Crude Pump Installation Manual - SULZER PDF

Document No: Revision: Revision Date:
48330 Lead 01 0 01 Oct 2007
Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual Volume 1 of 3

Site Client Item Saudi Aramco PO No Sulzer Ref. No Pump Type Tag Nos Serial Nos Aramco - Khurais Foster Wheeler & Hyundai Engineering / Aramco Crude Shipping Pump QDCI-M36-31-Q268-DA 9901-48330 CD 20x24x22G / 1 Stage B36-G-0002A / B / C / D TBA
Crude Oil Shipping Pumps

Equipment Hazardous Area Classification Class 1 Group. IIA Division 2
Sulzer Pumps (UK) Ltd. Manor Mill Lane Leeds, LS11 8BR
Tel: 0113 2701244 Facsimile: 0113 2724400 / 2724404 e-mail: Manual No. 104.471.646
K:\In Work Manuals\48329, 30 CP CD Khurais\48330\48330 Lead 01-0.doc
pumpsales.leeds@sulzer.com
Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual

Document No: 48330 Lead 01 0 01 Oct 2007
Table of Contents
Revision: Revision Date:
Table of Contents Volume 1 of 3

1.
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Leading Particulars
List of Equipment Supplied Sulzer Drawings and Documents Pump Unit Data Equipment Data Sheets Performance Curves and Test data
(48330 Lead 01-0)
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Introduction and General Safety

Introduction Environmental Considerations Contact Information General Safety
(IntroSafety 01-3)
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16
Pump Manual
Pump Pump Pump Pump Pump Pump Pump Pump Pump Pump Pump Pump Pump Pump Pump Pump Introduction Receiving Installation Coupling Alignment Commissioning and Operation Maintenance Case / Rotating Element Assembly Drive Coupling Bearing Assemblies Mechanical Seals Lubrication Torque Tightening of Fasteners Field Mounting the Driver Troubleshooting Replacement Parts Nitrogen Charged Storage Container - Charging and Purging Procedures (CD Intro 01-1) (Receiving 01-0) (Installation 01-4) (Alignment 01-3) (CommOp 01-3) (Maintenance 01-2) (CD Casing 11-1) (Drive Cplg 03-2) (Bearings 04-0) (MSeal 01-3) (Lubric 03-1) (TorqVal 01-0) (FieldMount 01-1) (CD Trouble 01-0) (RepParts 01-0) (Purge 02-0)
Manual No. 104.471.646

Contents Page 1

Table of Contents
4.
Mechanical Seal and Associated Equipment

Burgmann - Operating Manual Mechanical Seal SHV8/165-E1 Burgmann - Mechanical Seal Drawing SHV8/165-E1
(MecSeal 01-0)
Burgmann - 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2 Cyclone Separator - Operating Manual and Drawing
5.
Drive Coupling

(DriveCplg 01-0)
Bibby - Installation, Operating and Maintenance Instructions for Bibby Turboflex Couplings Having Bolted Adaptors and Hubs Bibby - 8HSU-30-305-56 Coupling Drawing 9109 Sht 1 (Motor to Gearbox) Bibby - 8HS-22-230 (2LAH) Coupling Drawing 9110 Sht 1 (Gearbox to Pump)
Manual No. 104.471.646

Contents Page 2

Table of Contents
Volume 2 of 3
6. Drive Motor
ABB - User's Manual - Motor AMC 900M4A BSNV General ABB Technical Specification Drawings for the Motor Circuit Diagrams Machine Parts List Installation and Maintenance Manual Accessories and Instructions Main Terminal Box
(DriveMotor 01-0)
Manual No. 104.471.646

Contents Page 3

Table of Contents
Volume 3 of 3
7. Instrumentation
Minco - Explosionproof / Flameproof RTD Sensors - Product Information Bently Nevada - 3300XL 8mm and 3300 5 mm Proximity Transducer System Manual Bently Nevada - 31000, 32000 Proximity Probe Housings - Specifications and Ordering Information Bently Nevada - 330500 Velomitor Sensor 330525 Velomitor XA Sensor 330530 Radiation Resistant Velomitor Sensor Users Guide Bently Nevada - 21128, CA21128, BA42608 Velocity Transducer Housings Specifications and Ordering Information Rosemount (Emerson) - 3144P Temperature Transmitter - Quick Installation Guide
(Insts 01-0)
8.
Lubricating Oil System

To Be Inserted When Available
9.
Gearbox
BHS - High Speed Parallel Shaft Gear Unit Manual I. Operating Instructions II. Drawings and Alignment Diagram IV. Spare Parts BHS - Operating Instructions - Spare Parts Storage System
10.
Hydraulic Assembly / Removal Equipment

Tentec - Safety Data Sheet - Castrol Hyspin AWS 32 Tentec - 2122 Hand Pump 2275 Bar - Operating Instructions, Parts list & Service Manual Tentec - 2065 Hand Pump 1600 Bar - Operating Instructions, Parts List and Service Manual Tentec - Maintenance Guide Tentec - Link Hose technical Specification
Manual No. 104.471.646

Contents Page 4

Section 1
Leading Particulars
1.1
List of Equipment Supplied

The following major items are supplied on Sulzer Order No. 9901-48330, Foster Wheeler & Hyundai Engineering / Aramco Order No. QDCI-M36-31-Q268-DA: 4 Crude oil shipping pumpsets, each comprising: 1 x Sulzer CD 20x24x22G / 1 stage pump, complete with two Burgmann SHV8/165-E1 cartridge mechanical seals with seal flushing to API Plans 31 / 61 / 65. Each seal has an associated Burgmann 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2 cyclone separator (API Plan 31). 1 x ABB AMC900M4A BSNV, 13000 hp (9694 kW), 1787 rev/min electric motor, complete with: Minco RTDs to monitor DE and NDE journal bearing temperature and u, v, w windings temperatures (3 per phase). Bently Nevada CA24701 series proximity probes and 330180 drivers to monitor motor DE and NDE journal bearing x and y plane vibration, motor keyphasor
1 x BHS FD48-3 speed increasing gearbox, complete with Rosemount / Minco RTDs to monitor input and output shaft DE and NDE journal bearing temperatures and input shaft i/b and o/b thrust bearing temperatures. 1 x Baric lube oil system supplying pressurised lube oil to the pump, gearbox and drive motor. 1 x Bibby 8HSU-30-305-56 flexible spacer coupling (Motor to Gearbox). 1 x Bibby 8HS-22-230 (2LAH) flexible spacer coupling (Gearbox to Pump). 1 x Fabricated, multi-point mounting, heavy duty grouted base plate for pump, gearbox and drive motor. Pumpset Instrumentation: Minco AS7014 series RTDs to monitor pump DE and NDE journal bearing temperatures, pump i/b and o/b thrust bearing temperatures. Rosemount 3144P series temperature transmitters to monitor pump DE and NDE journal bearing temperatures, pump i/b and o/b thrust bearing temperatures, motor DE and NDE journal bearing temperatures, gearbox input and output shaft DE and NDE journal bearing temperatures and input shaft i/b and o/b thrust bearing temperatures. Bently Nevada 3300XL vibration probes in 32000 housings and 330180 drivers to monitor pump DE and NDE journal bearing x and y plane vibration, pump axial position z plane, gearbox input and output shaft DE and NDE journal bearing x and y plane vibration, gearbox output shaft keyphasor. Bently Nevada 330500 series Velomitors in CA21128 velocity transducer housings to monitor pump DE and NDE bearing housing vibration. Coupling assembly / withdrawal equipment Hydraulic assembly / removal equipment:
Special Tools and Equipment:
Manual No. 104.471.646

Section 1 Page 1

Section 1
Leading Particulars
1 x 0-40,000 lbf/in2 hydraulic hand pump with integral gauge calibrated in lbf/in2. Fitted with BSP female outlet suitable for SKF 227857 pressure pipe. 1 x 0-25,000 lbf/in2 hydraulic hand pump with integral gauge calibrated in lbf/in2. Fitted with QR female coupling. 1 x Hydraulic load cell, maximum load 64 tons at 20,000 lbf/in2 with 15 mm stroke and 40 mm clear hole. Fitted with QR male coupling. 1 x High pressure flexible 2m hose with QR male and female couplings at end. 1 x High pressure 2 m pipe G G SKF 227957. 1 x Air release plug G SKF 233950. 1 x Wooden tool box.
6 X Jacking blocks with 6 x hex head dog point M16 x 70 screws and 12 x hex socket head M16 x x55 screws - bearing housing jacking. Nitrogen purged pump rotor storage container
Manual No. 104.471.646

Section 1 Page 2

Section 1
Leading Particulars
1.2
Sulzer Drawings and Documents

The Sulzer drawings and documents listed below are included next as inserts to the manual.
Description General Arrangement Equipment Arrangement Longitudinal Section P and I Diagram (3 Sheets) Terminal Block Diagram (8 Sheets) Instrument Schedule (12 Sheets) Cause and Effect Diagram (4 Sheets) Control System Description (9 Sheets) Alignment Criteria and Tolerances Diagrams Rotalign Pro Reports Name / Duty Plate Drawing Arrangement of Coupling Hub Assembly and Withdrawal Drawing Protection Packaging Procedure Protection & Preservation Procedure Operating Spare Parts List CD 20x24x22G Rotor Assembly Transportation / Preservation Unit General Arrangement Bill of Materials General Arrangement Lifting Frame - SWL 82.5 / 27t
Sulzer Document Reference 0-104.430.195 0-104.430.357 1-104.421.869 1-104.430.193 2-104.475.505 4-104.475.504 4-104.476.099 4-104.476.133 to be inserted when available 3-204.231.624 1-104.430.383 40-930 40-931 / 2 E13803 5066-D-001 5066-PL-003 F1474-1
Manual No. 104.471.646

Section 1 Page 3
Contract on 13.11.2007
1 Drawing No. E1-104.430.193
SPEED INCREASING GEARBOX B36-GG-0002A TP1 MAIN DRIVE MOTOR B36-GM-0002A B 13.2kV 3PH 60Hz 13,000HP 1787RPM
(COUPLING GUARD) (COUPLING)
1"
TP3
1"
1"
1"

1/2" 1/2" 2" 2"
NOTES
1. ALL TAG NUMBERS ARE PRECEDED BY B36. 2. ALL TAG NUMBERS HAVE THE FIRST SUFFIX LETTER CORRESPONDING TO THE RELEVANT PUMP SUFFIX LETTER i.e. TIT-5600A CORRESPONDS TO PUMP G-0002A. TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600B FOR PUMP G-0002B. TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600C FOR PUMP G-0002C. TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600D FOR PUMP G-0002D. 3. A SECOND SUFFIX LETTER IS USED TO UNIQUELY IDENTIFY INSTRUMENTS OF THE SAME TYPE WITH THE SAME SEQUENCE NUMBER i.e. TE-5600AA AND TE-5600AB FOR PUMP G-0002A. TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600BA & TE-5600BB FOR PUMP G-0002B. TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600CA & TE-5600CB FOR PUMP G-0002C. TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600DA & TE-5600DB FOR PUMP G-0002D. 4. TRANSMITTER KEY: H = 4-20mA/HART FF = FOUNDATION FIELDBUS
1"
CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP B36-G-0002A
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
8"
2"
2"
A
1" 1"
0.165" DIA.
1"
1.457" DIA.
2"
0.217" DIA.
FO 5604
0.217" DIA.
FO 5600
H : 158F H H : 158F H H : 158F H
FO 5601
H : 158F H
TP4
3/4"
TP2
3/4"
FO 5602
0.394" DIA.
A
1" 3/4" 1" 1" 3/4"
3"
PI 5501
3/4"
PI 5502
H : 158F H
TI 5600 A FG 5600 A
FF
TI 5601 A FG 5601 A
FF
TI 5602 A FG 5602 A
FF
TI 5603 A FG 5603 A
3/4"
FF (LOCKED OPEN)
FO 5603 A FG 5604 A
3/4"
TI 5604 A
3/4"
1"
1"
3/4"
(LOCKED OPEN) H
RETURN TO PUMP SUCTION

H
A TE 5603
1" 1" 1"
A
1"
3/4"
INSTRUMENT SYMBOL KEY

FIELD MOUNTED DISCRETE INSTRUMENT (BY SULZER) TE 5600 AA TE 5600
1" 2"
LIT 5600
ZC
ZC
LIT 5601
FF
TIT 5600 A
TIT 5601 A
TE 5601 AA TE 5601
1" 2" 1"
TIT 5602 A
TE 5602 AA TE 5602
8" 2"
TIT 5603 A
TE 5604 AA TE 5604
3/4" 1" 3"
TIT 5604 A
AA TE 5603
0.118" DIA.
AB
AB
AB
AB
3/4"
RACK MOUNTED INSTRUMENT (OR BACK OF PANEL, BY OTHERS)
FO 5605 A
2"
LI 5600
HH H
LI 5601
HH H
0.118" DIA.
HH SET @ 9.2 in H SET @ 4.6 in
HH SET @ 9.2 in H SET @ 4.6 in
FO 5606 A
3"
AB
PRIMARY LOCATED SHARED DISPLAY AND CONTROL (DCS) INSTRUMENT (BY OTHERS)
2"
4"
4"
8"
8"
4"
4"
3"
1"
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SYSTEM (ESD, BY OTHERS)
1"
2"
2"
3"
2"
2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1"
1-1/2"
D
VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM (VMS, BY OTHERS)
TP5A TP8
LUBE OIL RETURN PI-34481 LUBE OIL SYSTEM LUBE OIL SUPPLY PI-34481 LUBE OIL SYSTEM
TP5B
ELECTRICAL SIGNAL CONNECTION TO PROCESS SERIAL LINK SULZER OTHERS LIMIT OF SUPPLY
TP7
TERMINATION POINT SCHEDULE

TP No. TP 1 TP 2 TP 3 TP 4 TP 5A TP 5B TP 6 TP 7 TP 8 DESCRIPTION PUMP SUCTION PUMP DISCHARGE PUMP & SEAL SYSTEM VENT PUMP DRAIN PUMP DE SEAL LEAKAGE PUMP NDE SEAL LEAKAGE BASEPLATE DRAIN (NOT SHOWN) LUBE OIL SUPPLY LUBE OIL RETURN
SEAL OIL & LUBE OIL SYSTEMS

b a C.Woolner C.Woolner 02.08.06 18.07.06 d c C.Woolner C.Woolner 17.05.07 20.03.07 f e C.Woolner C.Woolner 13.11.07 10.10.07
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS GENERAL ARRANGEMENT INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE TERMINAL BLOCK DIAGRAM CAUSE & EFFECT DIAGRAM LUBE SYSTEM P&I D. : : : : : E0-104.430.195 E4-104.475.504 E2-104.475.505 E4-104.476.099 PI-34481 c REFER TO REVISION NOTES.
SEP.PARTS LIST REPLACED BY
YES/NO
DESIGN GROUP SUBSTITUTE FOR ORIGINAL SCALE
P & I DIAGRAM FOR CD 20x24x22G 1st CRUDE OIL SHIPPING ARAMCO - KHURAIS PUMPSETS B36-G-0002A/B/C/D
f e d ALL 3 WINDING RTD's DETAILED AS CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO MCC (2 x USED, 1 x SPARE). REFER TO REVISION NOTES. REFER TO REVISION NOTES.
DRAWN CHECKED APPROVED
THIS DRAWING IS ENTRUSTED TO THE RECIPIENT PERSONALLY BUT THE COPYRIGHT REMAINS WITH US. IT MUST NOT BE COPIED , REPRODUCED OR IN ANY WAY COMMUNICATED OR MADE ACCESSIBLE TO THIRD PARTIES WITHOUT OUR WRITTEN CONSENT SIMILAR DRG. .
9901-48330 CAD - DRAWING

PART - No. . BAR - CODE
b a
TAG NUMBERS CHANGED IN LINE WITH CLIENT COMMENTS, NOTES REVISED REFER TO REVISION NOTES.
MACHINING REGULATIONS SEE DRAWING NORMS.
E
4 5 6 7 8
Sheet of
01 03
13-06-06 C.Woolner 13-06-06 C.Woolner 13-06-06 T.Brennan
1 Drawing No. E1-104.430.193
B36-LCS-0505A NOTE: SET POINTS ARE PROVISIONAL ONLY AND TO BE CONFIRMED AFTER H : 230F TESTING. HH : 248F
H HH RUNNING STOPPED AVAILABLE LAMP TEST HAND/OFF/AUTO START STOP
XL 5600
XL 5601
XL 5602
HS 5601 A
HS 5602 A
HS 5603 A
HS 5604 A
HH : 257F H : 248F
HH : 257F H : 248F HH H
HH : 257F H : 248F HH H
HH : 257F H : 248F HH H
HH : 257F H : 248F HH H
HH : 257F H : 248F HH H
HH : 257F H : 248F HH H
HH : 257F H : 248F HH H
TAH 5606 A
TAHH 5606 A
TI 5608
TI 5608
TI 5609
TI 5609
TI 5610
TI 5610
TI 5611
TI 5611
HH H
CONTROL STATION *MOUNTED OFF-SKID*
AA
AB
AA
AB
AA
AB
AA
AB
A
ZC ZC ZC ZC ZC ZC ZC ZC
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (MCC)

H
TIT 5608 AA
(SPARE) (SPARE) (SPARE)
TIT 5608 AB
TIT 5609 AA
TIT 5609 AB
TIT 5610 AA
TIT 5610 AB
TIT 5611 AA
TIT 5611 AB
HS 5600 A
EMERGENCY STOP
TE 5606 AA
TE 5606 AB
TE 5606 AC
TE 5606 AD
TE 5606 AE
TE 5606 AF
TE 5606 AG
TE 5606 AH
TE 5606 AJ
HS 5605 A
EMERGENCY STOP
TE 5608 AA
TE 5608 AB
TE 5608 AC
TE 5608 AD
TE 5609 AA
TE 5609 AB
TE 5609 AC
TE 5609 AD
TE 5610 AA
TE 5610 AB
TE 5610 AC
TE 5610 AD
TE 5611 AA
TE 5611 AB
TE 5611 AC
TE 5611 AD
B36-ESB-0506A
CONTROL STATION *MOUNTED OFF-SKID*
B36-ESB-0507A
CONTROL STATION
V MOTOR WINDINGS
*MOUNTED OFF-SKID*
TP1
MAIN DRIVE MOTOR B36-GM-0002A 13.2kV 3PH 60Hz 13,000HP 1787RPM NOTES
1. ALL TAG NUMBERS ARE PRECEDED BY B36. 2. ALL TAG NUMBERS HAVE THE FIRST SUFFIX LETTER CORRESPONDING TO THE RELEVANT PUMP SUFFIX LETTER i.e. TIT-5600A CORRESPONDS TO PUMP G-0002A. TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600B FOR PUMP G-0002B. TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600C FOR PUMP G-0002C. TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600D FOR PUMP G-0002D. 3. A SECOND SUFFIX LETTER IS USED TO UNIQUELY IDENTIFY INSTRUMENTS OF THE SAME TYPE WITH THE SAME SEQUENCE NUMBER i.e. TE-5600AA AND TE-5600AB FOR PUMP G-0002A. TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600BA & TE-5600BB FOR PUMP G-0002B. TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600CA & TE-5600CB FOR PUMP G-0002C. TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600DA & TE-5600DB FOR PUMP G-0002D. 4. TRANSMITTER KEY: H = 4-20mA/HART FF = FOUNDATION FIELDBUS
(COUPLING GUARD)
MOTOR HEATER (120V 1PH 60Hz)
MAIN TERMINAL BOX HEATER (120V 1PH 60Hz)
SPEED INCREASING GEARBOX B36-GG-0002A
(COUPLING)
TP2
TE 5605 AA TE 5605 AB TE 5607 AA TE 5607 AB TE 5612 AA TE 5612 AB TE 5612 AC TE 5612 AD TE 5613 AA TE 5613 AB TE 5613 AC TE 5613 AD TE 5614 AA TE 5614 AB TE 5615 AA TE 5615 AB TE 5616 AA TE 5616 AB TE 5617 AA TE 5617 AB

FIELD MOUNTED DISCRETE INSTRUMENT (BY SULZER)
TIT 5605 A
TIT 5607 A
TIT 5612 AA
TIT 5612 AB
TIT 5613 AA
TIT 5613 AB
TIT 5614 A
TIT 5615 A
TIT 5616 A
TIT 5617 A
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
TI 5605
HH : 212F H : 194F
HH H
TI 5607
HH : 212F H : 194F
HH H
TI 5612
HH : 257F H : 248F
HH H
TI 5612
HH : 257F H : 248F
HH H
TI 5613
HH : 257F H : 248F
HH H
TI 5613
HH : 257F H : 248F
HH H
TI 5614
HH : 212F H : 194F
HH H
TI 5615
HH : 212F H : 194F
HH H
TI 5616
HH : 248F H : 230F
HH H
TI 5617
HH : 248F H : 230F
HH H
AA
AB
AA
AB
D
NOTE: SET POINTS ARE PROVISIONAL ONLY AND TO BE CONFIRMED AFTER TESTING.
NOTE: SET POINTS ARE PROVISIONAL ONLY AND TO BE CONFIRMED AFTER TESTING.

TEMPERATURE MONITORING
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS GENERAL ARRANGEMENT INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE TERMINAL BLOCK DIAGRAM CAUSE & EFFECT DIAGRAM LUBE SYSTEM P&I D. : : : : : E0-104.430.195 E4-104.475.504 E2-104.475.505 E4-104.476.099 PI-34481
YES/NO
REFER TO REVISION NOTES. TAG NUMBERS CHANGED IN LINE WITH CLIENT COMMENTS, NOTES REVISED REFER TO REVISION NOTES. e d f ALL 3 WINDING RTD's DETAILED AS CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO MCC (2 x USED, 1 x SPARE). REFER TO REVISION NOTES. REFER TO REVISION NOTES.
c b a

E
4 5 6 7 8
Sheet of
02 03
1 Drawing No. E1-104.430.193
A
MOTOR KEYPHASOR HH : 12.2 mils H : 8.4 mils
A
VMS VMS
HH H HH : 12.2 mils H : 8.4 mils VMS HH H HH : 6.45 mils H : 3.46 mils HH : 6.45 mils H : 3.46 mils HH H HH : 17.71 mils H : 13.77 mils HH H HH : 4.92 mils H : 3.94 mils HH : 4.92 mils H : 3.94 mils HH H HH : 15.7 mils H : 11.8 mils HH H
VMS
VMS
VMS
HH H
VMS
VMS
VMS
HH H
KT 5600 A
VXT 5600 A
VYT 5600 A
VXT 5601 A
VYT 5601 A
VXT 5602 A
VYT 5602 A
VXT 5603 A
VYT 5603 A
VZT 5600 A
VZT 5601 A
VXT 5606 A
VYT 5606 A
VXT 5607 A
VYT 5607 A
VZT 5602 A
VZT 5603 A
KE 5600 A
VXE 5600 A
VYE 5600 A
VXE 5601 A
VYE 5601 A
VXE 5602 A
VYE 5602 A
VXE 5603 A
VYE 5603 A
VZE 5600 A
VZE 5601 A
VXE 5606 A
VYE 5606 A
VXE 5607 A
VYE 5607 A
VZE 5602 A
VZE 5603 A
B MAIN DRIVE MOTOR B36-GM-0002A 13.2kV 3PH 60Hz 13,000HP 1787RPM NOTES
1. ALL TAG NUMBERS ARE PRECEDED BY B36. 2. ALL TAG NUMBERS HAVE THE FIRST SUFFIX LETTER CORRESPONDING TO THE RELEVANT PUMP SUFFIX LETTER i.e. TIT-5600A CORRESPONDS TO PUMP G-0002A. TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600B FOR PUMP G-0002B. TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600C FOR PUMP G-0002C. TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600D FOR PUMP G-0002D. 3. A SECOND SUFFIX LETTER IS USED TO UNIQUELY IDENTIFY INSTRUMENTS OF THE SAME TYPE WITH THE SAME SEQUENCE NUMBER i.e. TE-5600AA AND TE-5600AB FOR PUMP G-0002A. TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600BA & TE-5600BB FOR PUMP G-0002B. TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600CA & TE-5600CB FOR PUMP G-0002C. TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600DA & TE-5600DB FOR PUMP G-0002D. 4. TRANSMITTER KEY: H = 4-20mA/HART FF = FOUNDATION FIELDBUS (COUPLING GUARD) (COUPLING GUARD) (COUPLING)
TP1
SPEED INCREASING GEARBOX B36-GG-0002A
(COUPLING)
TP2
KE 5601 A VXE 5604 A VYE 5604 A VXE 5605 A VYE 5605 A VT 5600 KT 5601 VXT 5604 VYT 5604 VXT 5605 VYT 5605 A A VE 5600 A VT 5601 A VE 5601 A VE 5602 A VT 5602 A

FIELD MOUNTED DISCRETE INSTRUMENT (BY SULZER)
VMS
GEARBOX KEYPHASOR
VMS
HH H
VMS
HH H
VMS
HH : 21 g H : 13 g (g PEAK)
HH H
VMS
HH H
VMS
HH H
HH : 5.66 mils H : 3.03 mils
HH : 5.66 mils H : 3.03 mils
HH : 0.43 in/s H : 0.28 in/s (in/s RMS)
HH : 0.43 in/s H : 0.28 in/s (in/s RMS)
D

VIBRATION MONITORING
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS GENERAL ARRANGEMENT INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE TERMINAL BLOCK DIAGRAM CAUSE & EFFECT DIAGRAM LUBE SYSTEM P&I D. : : : : : E0-104.430.195 E4-104.475.504 E2-104.475.505 E4-104.476.099 PI-34481
YES/NO
REFER TO REVISION NOTES. TAG NUMBERS CHANGED IN LINE WITH CLIENT COMMENTS, NOTES REVISED REFER TO REVISION NOTES. e d f ALL 3 WINDING RTD's DETAILED AS CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO MCC (2 x USED, 1 x SPARE). REFER TO REVISION NOTES. REFER TO REVISION NOTES.
c b a

E
4 5 6 7 8
Sheet of
03 03
Aramco - Khurais Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets B36-G-0002A/B/C/D Instrument Schedule SO : 9901-48330 Sulzer Doc No. : E4-104.475.504-Rev "d"
Inst. Tag No.s Crude Oil Shipping Pump B36-G-0002A Note: All tag numbers are for Pumpste B36-G-0002A only, refer to P&ID E1-104.430.193 for tagging philosophy. Service Description Device Location P&ID Signal Type IS/NIS I/O Type
Page : 1 of 12 Date : 13/11/2007 Rev : 'd'
Instrument Details Process Media
Process Conditions Instrument Calibration Normal Max/Min Design Range Units Set-Pnt.1 Set-Pnt.2
No.
CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP INSTRUMENTATION

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a b a a a a b a a a a B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 VXE B36 VXT B36 VYE B36 VYT B36 VXE B36 VXT B36 VYE B36 VYT B36 VZE B36 VZT B36 VZE B36 VZT 5614AA 5614AB 5614A 5615AA 5615AB 5615A 5616AA 5616AB 5616A 5617AA 5617AB 5617A 5606A 5606A 5606A 5606A 5607A 5607A 5607A 5607A 5602A 5602A 5603A 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Housing Vibration Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearing Housing Vibration Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Velomitor Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Velomitor Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Pump Bearing Pump Bearing Instrument Rack Pump Bearing Pump Bearing Instrument Rack Pump Bearing Pump Bearing Instrument Rack Pump Bearing Pump Bearing Instrument Rack Pump Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Pump Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Pump Bearing Pump Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Pump Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Pump Bearing Pump Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Pump Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 PT100 PT100 4-20mA PT100 PT100 4-20mA PT100 PT100 4-20mA PT100 PT100 4-20mA Special Special Special Special mV/in/s Special Special Special Special mV/in/s Special Special Special Special NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS RTD RTD AI RTD RTD AI RTD RTD AI RTD RTD AI Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Shaft Vibration Shaft Vibration Housing Vibration Shaft Vibration Shaft Vibration Housing Vibration Shaft Position Shaft Position <194F <194F <194F <194F <194F <194F <230F <230F <230F <230F <230F <230F <3.94mil <3.94mil <0.28in/s <3.94mil <3.94mil <0.28in/s < 11.8mil < 11.8mil 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 1 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 1 25 25 F F F F F F F F F F F F mil mil mil mil in/s mil mil mil mil in/s mil mil mil mil H : 194 H : 194 H : 230 H : 230 H : 3.94 H : 3.94 H : 0.28 H : 3.94 H : 3.94 H : 0.28 H : 11.8 H : 11.8 HH : 212 HH : 212 HH : 248 HH : 248 HH : 4.92 HH : 4.92 HH : 0.43 HH : 4.92 HH : 4.92 HH : 0.43 HH : 15.7 HH : 15.7
B36 VE/VT 5601A
B36 VE/VT 5602A
GEARBOX INSTRUMENTATION
a a a a a a a a B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE 5608AA 5608AB 5608AA 5608AC 5608AD 5608AB 5609AA 5609AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing Gearbox Bearing Instrument Rack Gearbox Bearing Gearbox Bearing Instrument Rack Gearbox Bearing Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 PT100 4-20mA PT100 PT100 4-20mA PT100 PT100 NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS RTD RTD AI RTD RTD AI RTD RTD Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 F F F F F F F F H : 248 H : 248 HH : 257 HH : 257 -
Inst. Tag No.s Crude Oil Shipping Pump B36-G-0002A Note: All tag numbers are for Pumpste B36-G-0002A only, refer to P&ID E1-104.430.193 for tagging philosophy. Service Description Device Vibration Monitoring System Indicate Alarm Shutdown Indicate ESD System Alarm Shutdown Indicate
Page : 2 of 12 Date : 13/11/2007 Rev : 'd'
DCS Alarm Indicate MV MCC Alarm Shutdown
Remarks
No.

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a b a a a a b a a a a B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 VXE B36 VXT B36 VYE B36 VYT B36 VXE B36 VXT B36 VYE B36 VYT B36 VZE B36 VZT B36 VZE B36 VZT 5614AA 5614AB 5614A 5615AA 5615AB 5615A 5616AA 5616AB 5616A 5617AA 5617AB 5617A 5606A 5606A 5606A 5606A 5607A 5607A 5607A 5607A 5602A 5602A 5603A 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Housing Vibration Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearing Housing Vibration Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Velomitor Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Velomitor Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal VI VI VAH VAH VAHH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal VI VI VAH VAH VAHH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal TI TAH TAHH TI TAH TAHH TI TAH TAHH TI TAH TAHH Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
B36 VE/VT 5601A
B36 VE/VT 5602A
a a a a a a a a B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE 5608AA 5608AB 5608AA 5608AC 5608AD 5608AB 5609AA 5609AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD TI TAH TAHH TI TAH TAHH Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD
Inst. Tag No.s Crude Oil Shipping Pump B36-G-0002A Note: All tag numbers are for Pumpste B36-G-0002A only, refer to P&ID E1-104.430.193 for tagging philosophy. Service Description Device Manufacturer Model Number
Page : 3 of 12 Date : 13/11/2007 Rev : 'd'
Instrument Manufacturer, Model & Specification Sulzer Part/ Article No. Wet'd Part Material Housing Rating Haz. Area Certification
No.

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a b a a a a b a a a a B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 VXE B36 VXT B36 VYE B36 VYT B36 VXE B36 VXT B36 VYE B36 VYT B36 VZE B36 VZT B36 VZE B36 VZT 5614AA 5614AB 5614A 5615AA 5615AB 5615A 5616AA 5616AB 5616A 5617AA 5617AB 5617A 5606A 5606A 5606A 5606A 5607A 5607A 5607A 5607A 5602A 5602A 5603A 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Housing Vibration Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearing Housing Vibration Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Velomitor Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Velomitor Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Minco Minco Rosemount Minco Minco Rosemount Minco Minco Rosemount Minco Minco Rosemount Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada AS7014 Series Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS AS7014 Series Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS AS7014 Series Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS AS7014 Series Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 32000-28-05-08-110-00-02 330180-91-05 32000-28-05-08-110-00-02 330180-91-05 CA21128-01-00-03-02 32000-28-05-08-110-00-02 330180-91-05 32000-28-05-08-110-00-02 330180-91-05 CA21128-01-00-03-02 32000-28-05-09-028-00-02 330180-91-05 32000-28-05-09-028-00-02 330180-91-05 104.430.193.013 n/a 104.430.193.018 104.430.193.013 n/a 104.430.193.018 104.430.193.014 n/a 104.430.193.018 104.430.193.014 n/a 104.430.193.018 104.430.193.020 104.430.193.023 104.430.193.020 104.430.193.023 104.430.193.024 104.430.193.020 104.430.193.023 104.430.193.020 104.430.193.023 104.430.193.024 104.430.193.021 104.430.193.023 104.430.193.021 104.430.193.023 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 304SS n/a 304SS n/a 304SS 304SS n/a 304SS n/a 304SS 304SS n/a 304SS n/a Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium GRP/PPS n/a GRP/PPS n/a 304SS GRP/PPS n/a GRP/PPS n/a 304SS GRP/PPS n/a GRP/PPS n/a IP65 n/a IP66 IP65 n/a IP66 IP65 n/a IP66 IP65 n/a IP66 IP65 n/a IP65 n/a IP65 IP65 n/a IP65 n/a IP65 IP65 n/a IP65 n/a Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
B36 VE/VT 5601A
B36 VE/VT 5602A
a a a a a a a a B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE 5608AA 5608AB 5608AA 5608AC 5608AD 5608AB 5609AA 5609AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco Rosemount / Minco Rosemount Rosemount / Minco Rosemount / Minco Rosemount Rosemount / Minco Rosemount / Minco W-EYK / HSG 31536843 CH105 P2 T6 Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS W-EYK / HSG 31536843 CH105 P2 T6 Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS W-EYK / HSG 31536843 CH105 P2 T6 Part of Above By Gearbox Vendor n/a 104.430.193.018 By Gearbox Vendor n/a 104.430.193.018 By Gearbox Vendor n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a IP 65 n/a IP66 IP 65 n/a IP66 IP 65 n/a Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a
Inst. Tag No.s Crude Oil Shipping No. Pump B36-G-0002A Note: All tag numbers are for Pumpste B36-G-0002A only, refer to P&ID E1-104.430.193 for tagging philosophy. Service Description Device Location P&ID Signal Type IS/NIS I/O Type
Page : 4 of 12 Date : 13/11/2007 Rev : 'd'
Instrument Details Process Media Process Conditions Instrument Calibration Normal Max/Min Design Range Units Set-Pnt.1 Set-Pnt.2
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 VXE B36 VXT B36 VYE B36 VYT B36 VXE B36 VXT B36 VYE B36 VYT
5609AA 5609AC 5609AD 5609AB 5610AA 5610AB 5610AA 5610AC 5610AD 5610AB 5611AA 5611AB 5611AA 5611AC 5611AD 5611AB 5612AA 5612AB 5612AA 5612AC 5612AD 5612AB 5613AA 5613AB 5613AA 5613AC 5613AD 5613AB 5602A 5602A 5602A 5602A 5603A 5603A 5603A 5603A
Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane)
Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver
Instrument Rack Gearbox Bearing Gearbox Bearing Instrument Rack Gearbox Bearing Gearbox Bearing Instrument Rack Gearbox Bearing Gearbox Bearing Instrument Rack Gearbox Bearing Gearbox Bearing Instrument Rack Gearbox Bearing Gearbox Bearing Instrument Rack Gearbox Bearing Gearbox Bearing Instrument Rack Gearbox Bearing Gearbox Bearing Instrument Rack Gearbox Bearing Gearbox Bearing Instrument Rack Gearbox Bearing Gearbox Bearing Instrument Rack Gearbox Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Gearbox Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Gearbox Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Gearbox Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box
104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3
4-20mA PT100 PT100 4-20mA PT100 PT100 4-20mA PT100 PT100 4-20mA PT100 PT100 4-20mA PT100 PT100 4-20mA PT100 PT100 4-20mA PT100 PT100 4-20mA PT100 PT100 4-20mA PT100 PT100 4-20mA Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special
NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS
AI RTD RTD AI RTD RTD AI RTD RTD AI RTD RTD AI RTD RTD AI RTD RTD AI RTD RTD AI RTD RTD AI RTD RTD AI -
Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Shaft Vibration Shaft Vibration Shaft Vibration Shaft Vibration -
<248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <248F <3.46mil <3.46mil <3.46mil <3.46mil -
0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10
F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F mil mil mil mil mil mil mil mil
H : 248 H : 248 H : 248 H : 248 H : 248 H : 248 H : 248 H : 248 H : 248 H : 248 H : 3.46 H : 3.46 H : 3.46 H : 3.46
HH : 257 HH : 257 HH : 257 HH : 257 HH : 257 HH : 257 HH : 257 HH : 257 HH : 257 HH : 257 HH : 6.45 HH : 6.45 HH : 6.45 HH : 6.45
Inst. Tag No.s Crude Oil Shipping No. Pump B36-G-0002A Note: All tag numbers are for Pumpste B36-G-0002A only, refer to P&ID E1-104.430.193 for tagging philosophy. Service Description Device Vibration Monitoring System Indicate Alarm Shutdown Indicate ESD System Alarm Shutdown
Page : 5 of 12 Date : 13/11/2007 Rev : 'd'
DCS Indicate Alarm Indicate MV MCC Alarm Shutdown
Remarks
Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH VI VAH VAHH VI VAH VAHH VI VAH VAHH
TI
TAH
TAHH
Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD
TI
TAH
TAHH
TI
TAH
TAHH
TI
TAH
TAHH
TI
TAH
TAHH
TI
TAH
TAHH
TI
TAH
TAHH
TI
TAH
TAHH
TI
TAH
TAHH
TI
TAH
TAHH
Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
DC voltage with superimposed AC signal DC voltage with superimposed AC signal DC voltage with superimposed AC signal DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
Inst. Tag No.s Crude Oil Shipping No. Pump B36-G-0002A Note: All tag numbers are for Pumpste B36-G-0002A only, refer to P&ID E1-104.430.193 for tagging philosophy. Service Description Device Manufacturer Model Number
Page : 6 of 12 Date : 13/11/2007 Rev : 'd'
Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver
Rosemount Rosemount / Minco Rosemount / Minco Rosemount Rosemount / Minco Rosemount / Minco Rosemount Rosemount / Minco Rosemount / Minco Rosemount Rosemount / Minco Rosemount / Minco Rosemount Rosemount / Minco Rosemount / Minco Rosemount Rosemount / Minco Rosemount / Minco Rosemount Rosemount / Minco Rosemount / Minco Rosemount Rosemount / Minco Rosemount / Minco Rosemount Rosemount / Minco Rosemount / Minco Rosemount Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada
3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS W-EYK / HSG 31536843 CH105 P2 T6 Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS W-EYK(RZ) / HSG 31536780 CH105 P2 T6 Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS W-EYK(RZ) / HSG 31536780 CH105 P2 T6 Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS W-EYK(RZ) / HSG 31536780 CH105 P2 T6 Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS W-EYK(RZ) / HSG 31536780 CH105 P2 T6 Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS W-EYK / HSG 31536508 CH105 P2 T6 Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS W-EYK / HSG 31536508 CH105 P2 T6 Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS W-EYK / HSG 31536508 CH105 P2 T6 Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS W-EYK / HSG 31536508 CH105 P2 T6 Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 32000-28-05-05-225-00-02 330180-91-05 32000-28-05-17-190-00-02 330180-91-05 32000-28-05-05-225-00-02 330180-91-05 32000-28-05-17-190-00-02 330180-91-05
104.430.193.018 By Gearbox Vendor n/a 104.430.193.018 By Gearbox Vendor n/a 104.430.193.018 By Gearbox Vendor n/a 104.430.193.018 By Gearbox Vendor n/a 104.430.193.018 By Gearbox Vendor n/a 104.430.193.018 By Gearbox Vendor n/a 104.430.193.018 By Gearbox Vendor n/a 104.430.193.018 By Gearbox Vendor n/a 104.430.193.018 By Gearbox Vendor n/a 104.430.193.018 104.430.193.001 104.430.193.008 104.430.193.002 104.430.193.008 104.430.193.001 104.430.193.008 104.430.193.002 104.430.193.008
n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 304SS n/a 304SS n/a 304SS n/a 304SS n/a
Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium GRP/PPS n/a GRP/PPS n/a GRP/PPS n/a GRP/PPS n/a
IP66 IP 65 n/a IP66 IP 65 n/a IP66 IP 65 n/a IP66 IP 65 n/a IP66 IP 65 n/a IP66 IP 65 n/a IP66 IP 65 n/a IP66 IP 65 n/a IP66 IP 65 n/a IP66 IP65 n/a IP65 n/a IP65 n/a IP65 n/a
Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
Page : 7 of 12 Date : 13/11/2007 Rev : 'd'
c c c c a a a a a a a a a a b
B36 VZE B36 VZT B36 VZE B36 VZT B36 KE B36 KT B36 VXE B36 VXT B36 VYE B36 VYT B36 VXE B36 VXT B36 VYE B36 VYT
5600A 5600A 5601A 5601A 5801A 5801A 5604A 5604A 5604A 5604A 5605A 5605A 5605A 5605A
Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Gearbox Output Shaft Keyphasor Gearbox Output Shaft Keyphasor Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Bearing Housing Vibration
Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Accelerometer
Gearbox Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Gearbox Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Gearbox Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Gearbox Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Gearbox Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Gearbox Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Gearbox Bearing Skid Edge Junction Box Gearbox Bearing
104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3
Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special mV/g
NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS
Shaft Position Shaft Position Shaft Indentation Shaft Vibration Shaft Vibration Shaft Vibration Shaft Vibration Housing Vibration
< 13.77mil < 13.77mil <3.03mil <3.03mil <3.03mil <3.03mil <13g
25 25 0 to 4000 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 45
mil mil mil mil rpm rpm mil mil mil mil mil mil mil mil g
H : 3.03 H : 3.03 H : 3.03 H : 3.03 H : 13
HH : 5.66 HH : 5.66 HH : 5.66 HH : 5.66 HH : 21
H : 13.77 HH : 17.71 H : 13.77 HH : 17.71
B36 VE/VT 5600A
MAIN DRIVE MOTOR INSTRUMENTATION

b a a b d b b d b b d b b a a b b b b b b b b B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 KE B36 KT B36 VXE B36 VXT B36 VYE B36 VYT B36 VXE B36 VXT 5605AA 5605AB 5605A 5606AA 5606AB 5606AC 5606AD 5606AE 5606AF 5606AG 5606AH 5606AJ 5607AA 5607AB 5607A 5600A 5600A 5600A 5600A 5600A 5600A 5601A 5601A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'U' Winding Temperature Motor 'U' Winding Temperature Motor 'U' Winding Temperature (Spare) Motor 'V' Winding Temperature Motor 'V' Winding Temperature Motor 'V' Winding Temperature (Spare) Motor 'W' Winding Temperature Motor 'W' Winding Temperature Motor 'W' Winding Temperature (Spare) Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor Keyphasor Motor Keyphasor Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Motor Bearing Motor Bearing Instrument Rack Motor Stator Motor Stator Motor Stator Motor Stator Motor Stator Motor Stator Motor Stator Motor Stator Motor Stator Motor Bearing Motor Bearing Instrument Rack Motor Bearing Motor Junction Box Motor Bearing Motor Junction Box Motor Bearing Motor Junction Box Motor Bearing Motor Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 2 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3 PT100 PT100 4-20mA PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 4-20mA Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS RTD RTD AI RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD AI Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Winding Winding Winding Winding Winding Winding Winding Winding Winding Bearing Metal Bearing Metal Shaft Indentation Shaft Vibration Shaft Vibration Shaft Vibration <194F <194F <194F <230F <230F <230F <230F <230F <230F <194F <194F <194F <8.4 mil <8.4 mil <8.4 mil 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 2000 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F rpm rpm mil mil mil mil mil mil H : 194 H : 230 H : 230 H : 230 H : 230 H : 230 H : 230 H : 194 H : 8.4 H : 8.4 H : 8.4 HH : 212 HH : 248 HH : 248 HH : 248 HH : 248 HH : 248 HH : 248 HH : 212 HH : 12.2 HH : 12.2 HH : 12.2
Page : 8 of 12 Date : 13/11/2007 Rev : 'd'
Remarks
5600A 5600A 5601A 5601A 5801A 5801A 5604A 5604A 5604A 5604A 5605A 5605A 5605A 5605A
Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Accelerometer VI VI VAH VAH VAHH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal KI DC voltage with superimposed AC signal VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
B36 VE/VT 5600A

b a a b d b b d b b d b b a a b b b b b b b b B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 KE B36 KT B36 VXE B36 VXT B36 VYE B36 VYT B36 VXE B36 VXT 5605AA 5605AB 5605A 5606AA 5606AB 5606AC 5606AD 5606AE 5606AF 5606AG 5606AH 5606AJ 5607AA 5607AB 5607A 5600A 5600A 5600A 5600A 5600A 5600A 5601A 5601A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'U' Winding Temperature Motor 'U' Winding Temperature Motor 'U' Winding Temperature (Spare) Motor 'V' Winding Temperature Motor 'V' Winding Temperature Motor 'V' Winding Temperature (Spare) Motor 'W' Winding Temperature Motor 'W' Winding Temperature Motor 'W' Winding Temperature (Spare) Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor Keyphasor Motor Keyphasor Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal KI DC voltage with superimposed AC signal TI TAH TAHH TI TI TAH TAH TAHH TAHH TI TI TAH TAH TAHH TAHH TI TAH TAHH TI TI TAH TAH TAHH TAHH Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART Simplex RTD Simplex RTD Simplex RTD Simplex RTD Simplex RTD Simplex RTD Simplex RTD Simplex RTD Simplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
Page : 9 of 12 Date : 13/11/2007 Rev : 'd'
5600A 5600A 5601A 5601A 5801A 5801A 5604A 5604A 5604A 5604A 5605A 5605A 5605A 5605A
Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Accelerometer
Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada
32000-28-05-19-085-00-02 330180-91-05 32000-28-05-00-085-00-02 330180-91-05 32000-28-05-00-210-00-02 330180-91-05 32000-28-05-00-210-00-02 330180-91-05 32000-28-05-05-175-00-02 330180-91-05 32000-28-05-00-210-00-02 330180-91-05 32000-28-05-05-175-00-02 330180-91-05 330400-01-05
104.430.193.005 104.430.193.008 104.430.193.006 104.430.193.008 104.430.193.003 104.430.193.008 104.430.193.003 104.430.193.008 104.430.193.004 104.430.193.008 104.430.193.003 104.430.193.008 104.430.193.004 104.430.193.008 104.430.193.009
304SS n/a 304SS n/a 304SS n/a 304SS n/a 304SS n/a 304SS n/a 304SS n/a 304SS
GRP/PPS n/a GRP/PPS n/a GRP/PPS n/a GRP/PPS n/a GRP/PPS n/a GRP/PPS n/a GRP/PPS n/a 304SS
IP65 n/a IP65 n/a IP65 n/a IP65 n/a IP65 n/a IP65 n/a IP65 n/a IP65
Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
B36 VE/VT 5600A

b a a b d b b d b b d b b a a b b b b b b b b B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 KE B36 KT B36 VXE B36 VXT B36 VYE B36 VYT B36 VXE B36 VXT 5605AA 5605AB 5605A 5606AA 5606AB 5606AC 5606AD 5606AE 5606AF 5606AG 5606AH 5606AJ 5607AA 5607AB 5607A 5600A 5600A 5600A 5600A 5600A 5600A 5601A 5601A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'U' Winding Temperature Motor 'U' Winding Temperature Motor 'U' Winding Temperature (Spare) Motor 'V' Winding Temperature Motor 'V' Winding Temperature Motor 'V' Winding Temperature (Spare) Motor 'W' Winding Temperature Motor 'W' Winding Temperature Motor 'W' Winding Temperature (Spare) Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Motor Keyphasor Motor Keyphasor Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver Minco Minco Rosemount Minco Minco Minco Minco Minco Minco Minco Minco Minco Minco Minco Rosemount Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada S100011-PD-143-Z-3 Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 S100011-PD-143-Z-3 Part of Above 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS CA24701-28-05-00-030-04-02 330180-51-05 CA24701-28-05-00-030-04-02 330180-51-05 CA24701-28-05-00-030-04-02 330180-51-05 CA24701-28-05-00-030-04-02 330180-51-05 By Motor Vendor n/a 104.430.193.018 By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor n/a 104.430.193.018 By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor 316SS n/a n/a 316SS 316SS 316SS 316SS 316SS 316SS 316SS 316SS 316SS 316SS n/a n/a 304SS n/a 304SS n/a 304SS n/a 304SS n/a Aluminium n/a Aluminium n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a Aluminium n/a Aluminium 303SS n/a 303SS n/a 303SS n/a 303SS n/a NEMA 4X n/a IP66 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a NEMA 4X n/a IP66 NEMA 4 n/a NEMA 4 n/a NEMA 4 n/a NEMA 4 n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Part of Motor Part of Motor Part of Motor Part of Motor Part of Motor Part of Motor Part of Motor Part of Motor Part of Motor Class 1 Div. 2 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
Page : 10 of 12 Date : 13/11/2007 Rev : 'd'
b b
B36 VYE B36 VYT
5601A 5601A
Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane)
Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver
Motor Bearing Motor Junction Box
104.430.193 Sht 3 104.430.193 Sht 3
Special Special
NIS NIS
Shaft Vibration -
<8.4 mil -
0 to 15
mil mil
H : 8.4
HH : 12.2
LUBE OIL SYSTEM INSTRUMENTATION

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a B36 FG B36 FG B36 FG B36 FG B36 FG B36 FO B36 FO B36 FO B36 FO B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT 5600A 5601A 5602A 5603A 5604A 5600A 5601A 5602A 5602A 5600AA 5600AB 5600A 5601AA 5601AB 5601A 5602AA 5602AB 5602A 5603AA 5603AB 5603A 5604AA 5604AA 5604A Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Supply Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Lube Oil Supply Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Lube Oil Supply Pump 'NDE' Thrust Bearings Lube Oil Supply Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Lube Oil Pipework Lube Oil Pipework Lube Oil Pipework Lube Oil Pipework Lube Oil Pipework Lube Oil Pipework Lube Oil Pipework Lube Oil Pipework Lube Oil Pipework Lube Oil Pipework Lube Oil Pipework Instrument Rack Lube Oil Pipework Lube Oil Pipework Instrument Rack Lube Oil Pipework Lube Oil Pipework Instrument Rack Lube Oil Pipework Lube Oil Pipework Instrument Rack Lube Oil Pipework Lube Oil Pipework Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS NIS RTD RTD FF RTD RTD FF RTD RTD FF RTD RTD FF RTD RTD FF Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil <158F <158F <158F <158F <158F <158F <158F <158F <158F <158F <158F <158F <158F <158F <158F 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F H : 158 H : 158 H : 158 H : 158 H : 158 -
SEAL SYSTEM INSTRUMENTATION

a a a B36 FO B36 FO B36 FO 5604A 5605A 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Seal Fluid Supply Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Seal Leakage Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Seal Leakage Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice Seal Fluid Pipework Seal Fluid Pipework Seal Fluid Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1 Seal Fluid Seal Fluid Seal Fluid
a a
B36 LIT B36 LIT
5600A 5601A
Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Seal Leakage Detection Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Seal Leakage Detection
Level Transmitter Level Transmitter
Seal Fluid Pipework Seal Fluid Pipework
104.430.193 Sht 1 104.430.193 Sht 1
4-20mA 4-20mA
NIS NIS
AI AI
Seal Fluid Seal Fluid
<4.6 in <4.6 in
0 to 11.5 0 to 11.5
inch inch
H : 4.6 H : 4.6
HH : 9.2 HH : 9.2
Page : 11 of 12 Date : 13/11/2007 Rev : 'd'
Remarks
b b
B36 VYE B36 VYT
5601A 5601A
Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a B36 FG B36 FG B36 FG B36 FG B36 FG B36 FO B36 FO B36 FO B36 FO B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT 5600A 5601A 5602A 5603A 5604A 5600A 5601A 5602A 5602A 5600AA 5600AB 5600A 5601AA 5601AB 5601A 5602AA 5602AB 5602A 5603AA 5603AB 5603A 5604AA 5604AA 5604A Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Supply Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Lube Oil Supply Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Lube Oil Supply Pump 'NDE' Thrust Bearings Lube Oil Supply Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TI TAH TI TAH TI TAH TI TAH Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, Foundation Fieldbus Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, Foundation Fieldbus Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, Foundation Fieldbus Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, Foundation Fieldbus Part of Duplex RTD Part of Duplex RTD Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, Foundation Fieldbus

a a a B36 FO B36 FO B36 FO 5604A 5605A 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Seal Fluid Supply Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Seal Leakage Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Seal Leakage Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice LI LI LAH LAH LAHH LAHH 4-20mA/HART 4-20mA/HART
a a
B36 LIT B36 LIT
5600A 5601A
Page : 12 of 12 Date : 13/11/2007 Rev : 'd'
b b
B36 VYE B36 VYT
5601A 5601A
Proximity Probe Proximity Probe Driver
Bently Nevada Bently Nevada
CA24701-28-05-00-030-04-02 330180-51-05
By Motor Vendor By Motor Vendor
304SS n/a
303SS n/a
NEMA 4 n/a
Class 1 Div. 2 Grps C,D Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a B36 FG B36 FG B36 FG B36 FG B36 FG B36 FO B36 FO B36 FO B36 FO B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT B36 TE B36 TE B36 TIT 5600A 5601A 5602A 5603A 5604A 5600A 5601A 5602A 5602A 5600AA 5600AB 5600A 5601AA 5601AB 5601A 5602AA 5602AB 5602A 5603AA 5603AB 5603A 5604AA 5604AA 5604A Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Supply Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Lube Oil Supply Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Lube Oil Supply Pump 'NDE' Thrust Bearings Lube Oil Supply Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Sight Glass Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Probe - RTD Temperature Transmitter Minco Minco Rosemount Minco Minco Rosemount Minco Minco Rosemount Minco Minco Rosemount Minco Minco Rosemount AS7014 Series Part of Above 3144P-D1-F-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1 AS7014 Series Part of Above 3144P-D1-F-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1 AS7014 Series Part of Above 3144P-D1-F-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1 AS7014 Series Part of Above 3144P-D1-F-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1 AS7014 Series Part of Above 3144P-D1-F-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1 104.430.193.015 n/a 104.430.193.019 104.430.193.015 n/a 104.430.193.019 104.430.193.017 n/a 104.430.193.019 104.430.193.015 n/a 104.430.193.019 104.430.193.016 n/a 104.430.193.019 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a 316SS n/a n/a Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium Aluminium n/a Aluminium IP65 n/a IP66 IP65 n/a IP66 IP65 n/a IP66 IP65 n/a IP66 IP65 n/a IP66 Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Class 1 Grps B,C,D n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D Sulzer Pumps (UK) Sulzer Pumps (UK) Sulzer Pumps (UK) Sulzer Pumps (UK) Sulzer Pumps (UK)

a a a B36 FO B36 FO B36 FO 5604A 5605A 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Seal Fluid Supply Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Seal Leakage Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Seal Leakage Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice Flow/Restriction Orifice Magnetrol Magnetrol X705-510A-A11, X7MD-A45N-060, XF2A-DC2K-030 X705-510A-A11, X7MD-A45N-060, XF2A-DC2K-031 104.430.193.012 104.430.193.012 316SS 316SS Aluminium Aluminium IP65 IP65 Class 1 Div. 1 Grps B,C,D Class 1 Div. 1 Grps B,C,D
a a
B36 LIT B36 LIT
5600A 5601A
SULZER PUMPS (UK) Ltd. SULZER S.O. 9901-48330 CAUSE & EFFECT DIAGRAM SULZER DOC No : E4-104.476.099 CRUDE OIL SHIPPING (COS) PUMPSETS B36-G-0002A/B/C/D 13.11.07 Rev."a"
COLUMN 01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
B36-G-0002A H H H H H H H H H H H H H H HH HH H H H H H H HH HH H H H H H H H H H H H H HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
TAG No. PRIMARY DEVICE
SERVICE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B36-TE-5602AA Gearbox lube oil return temperature Gearbox lube oil return temperature B36-TE-5600AA B36-TE-5600AB B36-TE-5601AA B36-TE-5601AB Motor NDE lube oil return temperature Motor NDE lube oil return temperature Motor DE lube oil return temperature Motor DE lube oil return temperature TEMPERATURE DEVICES
10 B36-TE-5602AB 11 12 B36-TE-5603AA 13 B36-TE-5603AB 14 B36-TE-5604AA 15 B36-TE-5604AB 16 17 B36-TE-5605AA 18 B36-TE-5605AB 19 B36-TE-5606AA 20 B36-TE-5606AB 21 B36-TE-5606AC 22 B36-TE-5606AD 23 B36-TE-5606AE 24 B36-TE-5606AF 25 B36-TE-5606AG 26 B36-TE-5606AH 27 B36-TE-5606AJ 28 B36-TE-5607AA 29 B36-TE-5607AB 30 31 B36-TE-5608AA 32 B36-TE-5608AB 33 B36-TE-5608AC 34 B36-TE-5608AD 35 B36-TE-5609AA 36 B36-TE-5609AB 37 B36-TE-5609AC 38 B36-TE-5609AD 39 B36-TE-5610AA 40 B36-TE-5610AB 41 B36-TE-5610AC 42 B36-TE-5610AD 43
Pump DE lube oil return temperature Pump DE lube oil return temperature Pump NDE lube oil return temperature Pump NDE lube oil return temperature
Motor NDE journal bearing temperature Motor NDE journal bearing temperature Motor U winding temperature Motor U winding temperature Motor U winding temperature (spare) Motor V winding temperature Motor V winding temperature Motor V winding temperature (spare) Motor W winding temperature Motor W winding temperature Motor W winding temperature (spare) Motor DE journal bearing temperature Motor DE journal bearing temperature
Gearbox I/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature Gearbox I/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature Gearbox I/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature Gearbox I/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature Gearbox I/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature Gearbox I/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature Gearbox I/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature Gearbox I/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature Gearbox I/P shaft IB thrust bearing temperature Gearbox I/P shaft IB thrust bearing temperature Gearbox I/P shaft IB thrust bearing temperature Gearbox I/P shaft IB thrust bearing temperature
Note: All tag numbers are for Pumpset B36-G-0002A only, refer to P&ID E1-104.430.193 for tagging philosophy.
Sht 1 of 4
B36-G-0002A HH HH HH HH HH HH
ROW
TAG No.
TRIP COS PUMPSET (MCC)
TRIP COS PUMPSET (ESD)
OPERATOR ALARM (DCS)
SERVICE
COLUMN 01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
B36-G-0002A H H H H H H H H H H H H HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH H H H H H H H H HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
SERVICE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B36-TE-5611AA B36-TE-5611AB B36-TE-5611AC B36-TE-5611AD B36-TE-5612AA B36-TE-5612AB Gearbox I/P shaft OB thrust bearing temperature Gearbox I/P shaft OB thrust bearing temperature Gearbox I/P shaft OB thrust bearing temperature Gearbox I/P shaft OB thrust bearing temperature Gearbox O/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature Gearbox O/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature Gearbox O/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature Gearbox O/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature Gearbox O/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature Gearbox O/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature Gearbox O/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature Gearbox O/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature TEMPERATURE DEVICES
10 B36-TE-5612AC 11 B36-TE-5612AD 12 B36-TE-5613AA 13 B36-TE-5613AB 14 B36-TE-5613AC 15 B36-TE-5613AD 16 17 B36-TE-5614AA 18 B36-TE-5614AB 19 B36-TE-5615AA 20 B36-TE-5615AB 21 B36-TE-5616AA 22 B36-TE-5616AB 23 B36-TE-5617AA 24 B36-TE-5617AB 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Pump DE journal bearing temperature Pump DE journal bearing temperature Pump NDE journal bearing temperature Pump NDE journal bearing temperature Pump IB thrust bearing temperature Pump IB thrust bearing temperature Pump OB thrust bearing temperature Pump OB thrust bearing temperature
Sht 2 of 4
B36-G-0002A
ROW
TAG No.
SERVICE
COLUMN 01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SERVICE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B36-VXE-5602A Gearbox I/P shaft DE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) Gearbox I/P shaft DE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) Gearbox I/P shaft NDE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) Gearbox I/P shaft NDE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) Gearbox I/P shaft axial position deviation (z-plane) Gearbox I/P shaft axial position deviation (z-plane) Gearbox O/P shaft NDE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) Gearbox O/P shaft NDE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) Gearbox O/P shaft DE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) Gearbox O/P shaft DE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) Gearbox O/P shaft housing vibration H H H H H H H H H H H HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH Note: 2oo2 voting for HH trip. B36-VXE-5600A B36-VYE-5600A B36-VXE-5601A B36-VYE-5601A Motor NDE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) Motor NDE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) Motor DE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) Motor DE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) H H H H HH HH HH HH VIBRATION DEVICES
10 B36-VYE-5602A 11 B36-VXE-5603A 12 B36-VYE-5603A 13 B36-VZE-5600A 14 B36-VZE-5601A 15 B36-VXE-5604A 16 B36-VYE-5604A 17 B36-VXE-5605A 18 B36-VYE-5605A 19 B36-VE/VT-5600A 20 21 B36-VXE-5606A 22 B36-VYE-5606A 23 B36-VE/VT-5601A 24 B36-VXE-5607A 25 B36-VYE-5607A 26 B36-VE/VT-5602A 27 B36-VZE-5602A 28 B36-VZE-5603A 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Pump DE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) Pump DE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) Pump DE bearing housing vibration Pump NDE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) Pump NDE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) Pump NDE bearing housing vibration Pump axial position deviation (z-plane) Pump axial position deviation (z-plane)
H H H H H H H H
B36-G-0002A HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH Note: 2oo2 voting for HH trip.
ROW
Sht 3 of 4
TAG No.
TRIP COS PUMPSET (VMS)
SERVICE
COLUMN 01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
B36-G-0002A H H HH HH
SERVICE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 B36-HS-5600A 11 B36-HS-5605A 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 Pumpset emergency stop pushbutton Pumpset emergency stop pushbutton X X OTHER DEVICES B36-LIT-5600A B36-LIT-5601A Pump DE seal leakage level Pump DE seal leakage level LEVEL DEVICES
Sht 4 of 4
B36-G-0002A
ROW
TAG No.
SERVICE
Sulzer Pumps UK Ltd. Control System Description SO. 9901-48330
Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets B36-G-0002A/B/C/D Saudi Aramco - Khurais rd Rev 0, 23 November 2007 CONTENTS
Section 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1. Purpose. 1.2. Scope of Supply. 1.3. Hazardous Area Installation. 1.4. Associated Drawings. CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP LUBE OIL SYSTEM CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP MECHANICAL SEAL. SUMMARY OF PUMP MOUNTED INSTRUMENTATION SUPPLIED. 4.1. Process Instrumentation. 4.2. Lube Oil Instrumentation. 4.3. Machine Temperature Monitoring. 4.4. Machine Vibration Monitoring. CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP CONTROL LOGIC. 5.1. Start Permissives. 5.2. Shutdown Protection. 5.3. Start Sequence. 5.4. Normal Operation/Running. 5.5. Normal Stop Sequence. 5.6. Pump Shutdown.
Page 2
2. 3. 4.
3 5 5
5.
0 Rev.
First Issue For Comment/Approval Description
CW Compiled
23.11.07 Date
SD Approved
23.11.07 Date
e:\drawings\sulzer\48330\out\word\4104476133.doc
Page 1 of 9
Sulzer Doc. No. : E4-104.476.133,
Rev. 0
Sulzer Pumps UK Ltd. Control System Description SO. 9901-48330 1. INTRODUCTION
Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets B36-G-0002A/B/C/D Saudi Aramco - Khurais rd Rev 0, 23 November 2007
1.1. Purpose. 1.1.1. This Control System Description outlines the basic control & interlock logic for the mechanical protection of the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets, Tag No's B36-G0002A/B/C/D for Saudi Aramco Khurais, Saudi Arabia. All Tag No's detailed in this document are for pumpset B36-G-0002A only. 1.1.2. This description only covers the basic operating procedures associated with the machinery protection, monitoring & control. As such, this document does not cover the procedures for the initial commissioning / start-up of the Crude Oil Shipping Pump or for the process normal operation or upset conditions of the pump; the philosophy covers the protection & interlock logic for the pump only. 1.1.3. Full details on the commissioning & operation of the Crude Oil Shipping Pump package & specific items of equipment are contained in the Sulzer Installation Operation & Maintenance Manual. 1.1.4. All alarm, control & trip settings are included in the respective Instrument Schedule, the settings given herein are nominal values only. 1.2. Scope of Supply. 1.2.1. A summary of the equipment supplied by Sulzer & supplied by others is detailed below: 1.2.2. Supplied by Sulzer: 1.2.2.1. Crude Oil Shipping Pump, Sulzer barrel type, CD, with mechanical seals & sleeve type journal and tilting pad type thrust bearings. 1.2.2.2. Speed Increasing Gearbox BHS Getriebe 1.2.2.3. Main Drive Motor ABB Motors. 1.2.2.4. API 614, Off-Skid Pressurised Lube Oil System (LOS) Baric Systems. 1.2.2.5. Plan 31 / 65, Mechanical Seals Burgmann Industries. (Plan 65 Seal Leakage Detection) 1.2.2.6. Local - package - mounted, temperature & vibration, sensors for main equipment and temperature sensors for lube oil system, all cabled to skid edge junction boxes. 1.2.2.7. Emergency Stop Pushbutton Stations (x2) and Local Control Station (x1), supplied loose for mounting by client. 1.2.3. Supplied by Others: 1.2.3.1. Pump / System process control & shutdown logic - part of the DCS / ESD systems, along with the associated local process instrumentation. 1.2.3.2. Vibration Monitoring System (VMS) 1.2.3.3. Motor Control Centre (MCC), for HV (high voltage) main drive motor. 1.2.3.4. Motor Control Centre (MCC), for LV (low voltage) auxiliary motors & heaters. 1.2.3.5. All interconnecting cabling between Crude Oil Shipping Pump packages, HV & LV MCC's, DCS, ESD & VMS system(s) etc... 1.3. Hazardous Area Installation. 1.3.1. All Crude Oil Shipping Pump mounted instrumentation supplied by Sulzer shall be suitably certified for installation in a Class 1, Zone 2 Group IIA hazardous area with temperature class T3 (or better).
Page 2 of 9
Sulzer Doc. No. : E4-104.476.133,
Rev. 0
Sulzer Pumps UK Ltd. Control System Description SO. 9901-48330
Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets B36-G-0002A/B/C/D Saudi Aramco - Khurais rd Rev 0, 23 November 2007 Sulzer Doc. No. E0-104.430.195 E1-104.430.193 E4-104.475.504 E2-104.475.505 E4-104.476.099 GHG4148101L0034 GHG4483402L0154 GA-34481 PI-34481 IS-34481 WD-34481 JB-34481 CA-34481 CWI-34481 LP-34481 GST601634900 3BSY 200008-ETX 3BSY 200007-ETX
1.4. Associated Drawings. Title Description 1.4.1. Pump General Arrangement 1.4.2. Pump P & I Diagram 1.4.3. Pump Instrument Schedule 1.4.4. Pump Terminal Block Diagram 1.4.5. Pump Cause & Effect Diagram 1.4.6. Pump Emergency Stop Pushbutton Station 1.4.7. Pump Local Control Station 1.4.8. LOS General Arrangement 1.4.9. LOS P&I Diagram 1.4.10. LOS Instrument Schedule 1.4.11. LOS Wiring Diagram 1.4.12. LOS Junction Box Diagram 1.4.13. LOS Cable Schedule 1.4.14. LOS Cooler Wiring Diagram 1.4.15. LOS Local Control Station Diagram 1.4.16. Gearbox General Arrangement 1.4.17. Motor General Arrangement 1.4.18. Motor Connection Diagram
2. CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP LUBE OIL SYSTEM (LOS). 2.1. The purpose of the LOS is to provide the necessary (pressurised) supply of lube oil to the Crude Oil Shipping Pump, Speed Increasing Gearbox and Main Drive Motor bearings as follows: 2.1.1. Prior to starting the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset, so that the pump, gearbox and motor bearings are lubricated before starting the main drive motor. 2.1.2. Continuously whilst the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset is running. 2.1.3. After the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset has been stopped / shutdown, to ensure that the pump, gearbox and motor bearings are lubricated during the time the pumpset takes to run-down to a stationary - complete stop - condition. 2.2. Loss of the lube oil supply (detected by low-low lube oil pressure transmitter B36-PIT5604A) whilst the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset is running, will cause immediate shutdown of the main drive motor to prevent serious damage to the pump, gearbox or motor bearing 2.3. The off-skid LOS basically comprises of: 2.3.1. Lube Oil Reservoir (B36-D-0052A), complete with reservoir level gauge (B36-LG5600A) for indication, level transmitter (B36-LIT-5602A) for indication, low level alarm & interlocking with the lube oil reservoir heater, lube oil reservoir temperature transmitter (B36-TIT-5618A) for indication & control of the lube oil reservoir heater (B36-E-0051A) via the DCS / LV MCC. 2.3.2. Lube Oil Reservoir Heater (B36-E-0051A), complete with manually reset high-high temperature cut-out thermostat, to maintain the minimum required oil temperature of 60F. The heater is controlled from the lube oil reservoir temperature transmitter (B36-TIT-5618A) via the DCS / LV MCC.
Page 3 of 9
Sulzer Doc. No. : E4-104.476.133,
Rev. 0
Sulzer Pumps UK Ltd. Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets B36-G-0002A/B/C/D Control System Description Saudi Aramco - Khurais rd SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007 2.3.3. Two Lube Oil Pumps (B36-G-0052A & B36-G-0052B), 100% rated electric motor (B36-GM-0052A & B36-GM-0052B) driven. The pumps are to be arranged for duty / standby operation, prior to starting the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset the duty selected lube oil pump must be started / running and the LOS pressurised. The standby selected lube oil pump will be started automatically via the DCS / LV MCC on detection of low lube oil pressure (B36-PIT-5605A). Lube oil pump pressure gauges (B36-PI-5600A & B36-PI-5601A) and pressure transmitters (B36-PIT-5602A & B36-PIT-5603A) are fitted for indication and to provide positive feedback that the respective pump is running. 2.3.4. Separate Air Blast Lube Oil Cooler (B36-E-0002A), with three 50% rated electric motor driven air blast fans. The fans are to be arranged for two duty / one standby operation, where the two duty selected fans run continuously while the LOS is operating, the one standby selected fan cutting in on failure of one of the two duty fans. Part of the lube oil bypasses the air blast cooler via a remote sensing, temperature transmitter (B36-TIT-5619A) via DCS, bypass valve (B36-TCV-5619A). The remaining lube oil is then passed through the cooler once the oil temperature reaches 140F. Lube oil cooler inlet & outlet temperature gauges (B36-TI-5600A & B36-TI-5601A) are fitted for indication. 2.3.5. Duplex / Twin Lube Oil Filters (B36-D-0053A & B36-D-0053B), one in operation, one as standby and fitted with a manual changeover valve. A differential pressure transmitter (B36-PDIT-5600A) is fitted for indication & to alarm on detection of a high differential pressure i.e. blocked filter. 2.3.6. Lube Oil Supply Pressure Control Valve (B36-PCV-5600A), which regulates the lube oil supply pressure to the pump, gearbox and motor bearings to the required 25 PSIG. 2.3.7. Lube oil supply pressure transmitters, for low pressure alarm and to start standby lube oil pump (B36-PIT-5605A) and low-low pressure shutdown (B36-PIT-5604A). A pressure gauge for indication (B36-PI-5602A) is also provided. 2.3.8. Lube oil supply temperature transmitter (B36-TIT-5620A), is fitted for indication. 2.3.9. Separate Lube Oil Rundown Tank (B36-D-0054A), to ensure that the pump, gearbox and motor bearings are lubricated in an electrical power black out. A level gauge (B36-LG-5606A) and level transmitter (B36-LIT-5603A) are fitted for indication. 2.3.10. Lube oil return temperature transmitters (B36-TIT-5600A, B36-TIT-5601A, B36-TIT5602A, B36-TIT-5603A & B36-TIT-5604A), in each pump, gearbox and motor lube oil return line (on pump skid) for indication & high temperature alarm are also provided 2.4. Lube oil is provided at a nominal pressure of 25 PSIG - with breakdown orifices at the pump and gearbox bearings - prior to start-up & whilst the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset is running. 2.5. Prior to starting the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset, the duty selected lube oil pump is started to provide lube oil to the pump, gearbox and motor bearings before starting the main drive motor. 2.6. Should the duty selected lube oil pump fail whilst the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset is running a low pressure alarm will be detected (B36-PIT-5605A) and the standby lube oil pump will be started automatically and will continue to run until a Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset stop or shutdown sequence is completed, to ensure a continued lube oil supply to the pump, gearbox and motor bearings thus enabling the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset to continue running. If however the standby lube oil pump also fails whilst the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset is running a low-low pressure will be detected (B36-PIT-5604A) and a shutdown will be initiated. 2.7. When a Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset stop or shutdown sequence is initiated, the operating (duty or standby) lube oil pump should continue to run to provide lube oil to the pump, gearbox and motor bearings during run down and should also continue to run for 5-10 minutes (via a timer in the DCS) after the stop or shutdown sequence has been completed. In the event of an electrical power black out, oil will be provided from the lube oil rundown tank.
Page 4 of 9
Sulzer Doc. No. : E4-104.476.133,
Rev. 0
Sulzer Pumps UK Ltd. Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets B36-G-0002A/B/C/D Control System Description Saudi Aramco - Khurais rd SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007 3. CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP MECHANICAL SEAL. 3.1 The purpose of the Pump Mechanical Seal is to prevent pumped product leaking from the pump to atmosphere, or air leaking into the pumped product, especially under black shutdown conditions. 3.1.1 The Crude Oil Shipping Pump is fitted with two mechanical seals, one at the pump DE (drive end) & one at the pump NDE (non drive end), based on the Plan 31 system (Cyclone Separators) shown in API 610. There is facility at both the DE & NDE for pressure gauges (B36-PI-5501 & B36-PI-5502) to be fitted by others. 3.1.2 Seal leakage detection level transmitters are fitted (B36-LIT-5600A & B36-LIT-5601A), for indication & high-high level shutdown on an increasing seal leakage flow from the pump DE or NDE seal backing up in the seal leakage detection chamber against the respective restriction / flow orifice (B36-FO-5605 & B36-FO-5606). 4. SUMMARY OF PUMP MOUNTED INSTRUMENTATION SUPPLIED. 4.1. Process Instrumentation. No process instrumentation is supplied with the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset packages. All locally mounted process instruments, along with the associated process monitoring, control & shutdown systems are supplied by the Purchaser. 4.2. Lube Oil System Instrumentation. 4.2.1. The Lube Oil System is supplied with the following: 4.2.1.1. Lube oil reservoir level gauge (B36-LG-5600A), for indication. 4.2.1.2. Lube oil reservoir level transmitter (B36-LIT-5602A), Foundation Fieldbus output type, for indication, operator low level alarm & interlock with lube oil heater. 4.2.1.3. Lube oil reservoir heater (B36-E-0051A), with manually reset high-high temperature cut-out thermostat. 4.2.1.4. Lube oil reservoir temperature transmitter (B36-TIT-5618A) for indication & control of the lube oil reservoir heater (B36-E-0051A). 4.2.1.5. Lube oil pumps delivery pressure gauges, one per oil pump, (B36-PI-5600A & B36-PI-5601A), for indication. 4.2.1.6. Lube oil pumps delivery pressure transmitters, one per oil pump, (B36-PIT5602A & B36-PIT-5603A), for indication & positive feedback for pump running. 4.2.1.7. Lube oil pumps pressure relief valves, one per oil pump, (B36-PZV-5600A & B36-PZV-5601A). 4.2.1.8. Lube oil cooler inlet temperature gauge (B36-TI-5600A), for indication. 4.2.1.9. Lube oil temperature control valve (B36-TCV-5619A), air operated remote sensing, to bypass air blast cooler. 4.2.1.10. Lube oil cooler outlet temperature transmitter (B36-TIT-5619A), for indication & control (via DCS) of lube oil temperature control valve (B36-TCV-5619A). 4.2.1.11. Lube oil cooler outlet temperature gauge (B36-TI-5601A), for indication. 4.2.1.12. Lube oil filters differential pressure transmitter (B36-PDIT-5600A), for indication & high differential pressure alarm (blocked filter). 4.2.1.13. Lube oil supply pressure control valve, self-operated remote sensing type, (B36-PCV-5600A). 4.2.1.14. Lube oil supply pressure gauge (B36-PI-5602A), for indication. 4.2.1.15. Lube oil supply pressure transmitter (B36-PIT-5605A), Foundation Fieldbus output type, for indication, operator low pressure alarm and to start standby lube oil pump. 4.2.1.16. Lube oil supply pressure transmitter (B36-PIT-5604A), 4-20mA output type, for indication & low-low pressure shutdown.
Page 5 of 9
Sulzer Doc. No. : E4-104.476.133,
Rev. 0
Sulzer Pumps UK Ltd. Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets B36-G-0002A/B/C/D Control System Description Saudi Aramco - Khurais rd SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007 4.2.1.17. Lube oil supply temperature transmitter (B36-TIT-5620A), Foundation Fieldbus output type, for indication. 4.2.1.18. Lube oil rundown tank level gauge (B36-LG-5603A), for indication. 4.2.1.19. Lube oil rundown tank level transmitter (B36-LIT-5603A), Foundation Fieldbus output type, for indication. 4.2.1.20. Lube oil return temperature transmitters (B36-TIT-5600A, B36-TIT-5601A, B36-TIT-5602A, B36-TIT-5603A & B36-TIT-5604A), Foundation Fieldbus output type, in each pump, gearbox and motor lube oil return line for indication & high temperature alarm. 4.3. Machine Temperature Monitoring. 4.3.1. The following temperature sensors (RTDs) are fitted on the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset and cabled to main drive motor mounted and skid edge mounted junction boxes respectively. The motor winding RTD signals are monitored at the HV MCC where high temperature alarms & high-high temperature shutdowns are provided and communicated to the DCS, the pump, gearbox and motor bearing RTD signals are connected to skid mounted temperature transmitters and monitored at the ESD where high temperature alarms & high-high temperature shutdowns are provided and communicated to the DCS: 4.3.1.1. Main Drive Motor NDE journal bearing (B36-TE-5605AA/AB & B36-TIT5605A). 4.3.1.2. Main Drive Motor U winding (B36-TE-5606AA). 4.3.1.3. Main Drive Motor U winding (B36-TE-5606AB). 4.3.1.4. Main Drive Motor U winding (B36-TE-5606AC, spare). 4.3.1.5. Main Drive Motor V winding (B36-TE-5606AD). 4.3.1.6. Main Drive Motor V winding (B36-TE-5606AE). 4.3.1.7. Main Drive Motor V winding (B36-TE-5606AF, spare). 4.3.1.8. Main Drive Motor W winding (B36-TE-5606AG). 4.3.1.9. Main Drive Motor W winding (B36-TE-5606AH). 4.3.1.10. Main Drive Motor W winding (B36-TE-5606AJ, spare). 4.3.1.11. Main Drive Motor DE journal bearing (B36-TE-5607AA/AB & B36-TIT5607A). 4.3.1.12. Gearbox I/P Shaft DE journal bearing (B36-TE-5608AA/AB & B36-TIT5608AA). 4.3.1.13. Gearbox I/P Shaft DE journal bearing (B36-TE-5608AC/AD & B36-TIT5608AB). 4.3.1.14. Gearbox I/P Shaft NDE journal bearing (B36-TE-5609AA/AB & B36-TIT5609AA). 4.3.1.15. Gearbox I/P Shaft NDE journal bearing (B36-TE-5609AC/AD & B36-TIT5609AB). 4.3.1.16. Gearbox I/P Shaft Inboard thrust bearing (B36-TE-5610AA/AB & B36-TIT5610AA). 4.3.1.17. Gearbox I/P Shaft Inboard thrust bearing (B36-TE-5610AC/AD & B36-TIT5610AB). 4.3.1.18. Gearbox I/P Shaft Outboard thrust bearing (B36-TE-5611AA/AB & B36-TIT5611AA). 4.3.1.19. Gearbox I/P Shaft Outboard thrust bearing (B36-TE-5611AC/AD & B36-TIT5611AB). 4.3.1.20. Gearbox O/P Shaft NDE journal bearing (B36-TE-5612AA/AB & B36-TIT5612AA).
Page 6 of 9
Sulzer Doc. No. : E4-104.476.133,
Rev. 0
Sulzer Pumps UK Ltd. Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets B36-G-0002A/B/C/D Control System Description Saudi Aramco - Khurais rd SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007 4.3.1.21. Gearbox O/P Shaft NDE journal bearing (B36-TE-5612AC/AD & B36-TIT5612AB). 4.3.1.22. Gearbox O/P Shaft DE journal bearing (B36-TE-5613AA/AB & B36-TIT5613AA). 4.3.1.23. Gearbox O/P Shaft DE journal bearing (B36-TE-5613AC/AD & B36-TIT5613AB). 4.3.1.24. Crude Oil Shipping Pump DE journal bearing (B36-TE-5614AA/AB & B36TIT-5614A). 4.3.1.25. Crude Oil Shipping Pump NDE journal bearing (B36-TE-5615AA/AB & B36TIT-5615A). 4.3.1.26. Crude Oil Shipping Pump Inboard thrust bearing (B36-TE-5616AA/AB & B36-TIT-5616A). 4.3.1.27. Crude Oil Shipping Pump Outboard thrust bearing (B36-TE-5617AA/AB & B36-TIT-5617A). 4.4. Machine Vibration Monitoring. 4.4.1. Non-contacting eddy current type probes and seismic transducers are fitted on the Crude Oil Pumpset and cabled to main drive motor mounted and skid edge junction boxes. The signals are monitored at the Vibration Monitoring System (VMS, by others), where high vibration alarms & high-high vibration shutdowns are provided: 4.4.1.1. Main Drive Motor NDE keyphasor (B36-KE-5600A & B36-KT-5600A), for analysis (& speed indication if required) only. No alarms or trips are associated with this signal. 4.4.1.2. Main Drive Motor NDE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5600A & B36VXT-5600A, B36-VYE-5600A & B36-VYT-5600A), x & y planes respectively. 4.4.1.3. Main Drive Motor DE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5601A & B36VXT-5601A, B36-VYE-5601A & B36-VYT-5601A), x & y planes respectively. 4.4.1.4. Gearbox I/P Shaft DE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5602A & B36VXT-5602A, B36-VYE-5602A & B36-VYT-5602A), x & y planes respectively. 4.4.1.5. Gearbox I/P Shaft NDE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5603A & B36VXT-5603A, B36-VYE-5603A & B36-VYT-5603A), x & y planes respectively. 4.4.1.6. Gearbox I/P Shaft axial thrust position, (B36-VZE-5600A & B36-VZT-5600A, B36-VZE-5601A & B36-VZT-5801A), z plane. 4.4.1.7. Gearbox O/P Shaft NDE keyphasor (B36-KE-5601A & B36-KT-5601A), for analysis (& speed indication if required) only. No alarms or trips are associated with this signal. 4.4.1.8. Gearbox O/P Shaft NDE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5604A & B36VXT-5604A, B36-VYE-5604A & B36-VYT-5604A), x & y planes respectively. 4.4.1.9. Gearbox O/P Shaft DE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5605A & B36VXT-5605A, B36-VYE-5605A & B36-VYT-5605A), x & y planes respectively. 4.4.1.10. Gearbox O/P Shaft DE bearing housing vibration (B36-VE/VT-5600A). 4.4.1.11. Crude Oil Shipping Pump DE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5606A & B36-VXT-5606A, B36-VYE-5606A & B36-VYT-5606A), x & y planes respectively. 4.4.1.12. Crude Oil Shipping Pump DE bearing housing vibration (B36-VE/VT-5601A). 4.4.1.13. Crude Oil Shipping Pump NDE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5607A & B36-VXT-5607A, B36-VYE-5607A & B36-VYT-5607A), x & y planes respectively. 4.4.1.14. Crude Oil Shipping Pump NDE bearing housing vibration (B36-VE/VT5602A). 4.4.1.15. Crude Oil Shipping Pump axial thrust position, (B36-VZE-5602A & B36-VZT5602A, B36-VZE-5603A & B36-VZT-5603A), z plane.
Page 7 of 9
Sulzer Doc. No. : E4-104.476.133,
Rev. 0
Sulzer Pumps UK Ltd. Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets B36-G-0002A/B/C/D Control System Description Saudi Aramco - Khurais rd SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007 5. CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP CONTROL LOGIC. 5.1. Start Permissives. 5.1.1. The following start permissives should to be satisfied before the Crude Oil Shipping Pump can be started: 5.1.1.1. All pump shutdown conditions are healthy & reset (see Para 5.2). 5.1.1.2. All Stop commands are normal ie, not operated. 5.1.1.3. Crude Oil Shipping Pump suction pressure is OK / adequate (By others). 5.1.1.4. Crude Oil Shipping Pump discharge valve is closed (unless system pressure in the discharge manifold is sufficient enough to start against, in which case the discharge valve can be open, with manifold pressure being held against the non-return valve. The Crude Oil Shipping Pump cannot be started against an open valve / no system pressure). 5.1.1.5. Minimum Flow Valve is closed (if supplied). 5.1.1.6. Lube Oil System is charged. 5.1.1.7. All Process conditions are normal. Note: the Stop command should be interlocked with process start permissives so that the Crude Oil Shipping Pump cannot be started unless process conditions are normal (i.e. suction manifold isolation valve open). 5.1.1.8. HV MCC - for main drive motor - is available (By others). 5.2. Shutdown Protection. 5.2.1. The following conditions are to be continually monitored by the Vibration Monitoring Panel (VMS, by others) and or ESD and shall initiate an instantaneous shutdown of the Crude Oil Shipping Pump Main Drive Motor via the HV MCC in the event of a fault condition arising: 5.2.1.1. Main Drive Motor journal bearing vibrations high-high. 5.2.1.2. Main Drive Motor journal bearing temperatures high-high. 5.2.1.3. Main Drive Motor winding temperatures high-high. 5.2.1.4. Gearbox I/P Shaft journal bearing vibrations high-high. 5.2.1.5. Gearbox I/P Shaft axial position deviation high-high. 5.2.1.6. Gearbox I/P Shaft journal or thrust bearing temperatures high-high. 5.2.1.7. Gearbox O/P Shaft journal bearing vibrations high-high. 5.2.1.8. Gearbox O/P Shaft bearing housing vibrations high-high. 5.2.1.9. Gearbox O/P Shaft journal bearing temperatures high-high. 5.2.1.10. Crude Oil Shipping Pump journal bearing vibrations high-high. 5.2.1.11. Crude Oil Shipping Pump bearing housing vibrations high-high. 5.2.1.12. Crude Oil Shipping Pump axial position deviation high-high. 5.2.1.13. Crude Oil Shipping Pump journal or thrust bearing temperatures high-high. 5.2.1.14. Crude Oil Shipping Pump seal leakage detection level high-high. 5.2.1.15. Lube Oil System supply pressure low-low (see note 5.2.2 below). 5.2.2. Operation of the lube oil supply pressure low-low trip (& associated low-pressure alarm) should be inhibited or masked (in ESD & DCS respectively) whilst the lube oil pumps are not running. 5.2.3. All trips initiated should lockout on fault until the fault condition has returned to normal and the system manually reset by the operator.
Page 8 of 9
Sulzer Doc. No. : E4-104.476.133,
Rev. 0
Sulzer Pumps UK Ltd. Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets B36-G-0002A/B/C/D Control System Description Saudi Aramco - Khurais rd SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007 5.3. Start Sequence (Automatic, from DCS). 5.3.1. The basic procedure for STARTING the Crude Oil Shipping Pump is as follows: 5.3.1.1. Check start permissive conditions (see Para 5.1). 5.3.1.2. Reset all pump shutdown conditions (see Para 5.2). 5.3.1.3. Start the duty selected lube oil pump. 5.3.2. Once the duty selected lube oil pump is running, the start sequence is now held pending lube oil pressure being established at the motor, gearbox and pump bearings. 5.3.3. Once lube oil pressure is established, the main motor may be started and the lube oil pressure low alarm and low-low trip overrides removed. 5.3.4. Command the Crude Oil Shipping Pump minimum flow control valve to open (if supplied), simultaneous with starting the main drive motor. 5.3.5. Once the Crude Oil Shipping Pump is running (approx 10 seconds), command the discharge valve to open (simultaneous with closing the minimum flow valve, if supplied). 5.3.6. Overrides on any low-low flow process trips (by others) can be removed. 5.4. Normal Operation/Running 5.4.1. Once started, the Crude Oil Shipping Pump should run without manual intervention, as alarm & shutdown conditions shall be continuously monitored at the VMS, ESD and DCS etc.. 5.5. Normal Stop Sequence (Automatic from DCS). 5.5.1. The basic procedure for STOPPING the Crude Oil Shipping Pump on receipt of a stop command from the DCS is as follows: 5.5.1.1. Stop the Main Drive Motor. 5.5.1.2. Command the Crude Oil Shipping Pump discharge valve to close (simultaneous with stopping the main drive motor). Ignore this command if there is system pressure in the discharge manifold (see Para 5.1.1.4). 5.5.1.3. Once the main drive motor has stopped, start a 5-10 minute timer within the control logic which, after the timer has operated, automatically stops the operating (duty or standby) lube oil pump. 5.5.2. The Crude Oil Shipping Pump stop sequence is now complete. 5.5.3. With all start permissives healthy / satisfied and shutdown conditions healthy, the Crude Oil Shipping Pump package can be restarted as noted in above. 5.6. Pump Shutdown. 5.6.1. The basic procedure for STOPPING the Crude Oil Shipping Pump on receipt of a shutdown or emergency stop condition arising is as follows; 5.6.1.1. Stop the Main Drive Motor. 5.6.1.2. Command the Crude Oil Shipping Pump discharge valve to close (simultaneous with stopping the main drive motor). Ignore this command if there is system pressure in the discharge manifold (see Para 5.1.1.4). 5.6.1.3. Once the main drive motor has stopped, start a 5-10 minute timer within the control logic which, after the timer has operated, automatically stops the operating (duty or standby) lube oil pump. 5.6.2. The Crude Oil Shipping Pump shutdown sequence is now complete. 5.6.3. With all shutdown conditions reset & start permissives healthy / satisfied, the Crude Oil Shipping Pump package can be restarted as noted in above.
Page 9 of 9
Sulzer Doc. No. : E4-104.476.133,
Rev. 0
Company Electronic File Name:
This document is CONFIDENTIAL and the sole property of the Hyundai Engineering and Construction Co.Ltd. It shall neither be shown to third parties nor used for any other purposes than those for which it has been issued/sent. Any unauthorized attempt to reproduce it, in any form, is strictly prohibited
Attachment #2
OPERATING SPARE PARTS LIST

Saudi Aramco SA7970 DESCRIPTION OF PARENT EQUIPMENT (This form is required for each separate type /model /size of equipment) ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER (OEM) SAUDI ARAMCO EQUIPMENT NAME: CRUDE OIL SHIPPER MODEL: CD TYPE:20X24X22G PART#: N/A SERIAL :9901-48330 DRAWING 0-104.421.869 TAG .B36-G-0002A/B/C/D SAUDI ARAMCO / CONTRACTOR P.O. :003003/002140 validity March 31st 2008 P.O. ITEM #: P.O. QTY:4 DWG SPARE PART COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OEM PART NO. *(1) *(2) ITEM# 211.01 SHAFT +KEYS 412.02 O-RING 142.24X5.3 412.01 O-RING 129.54X5.3 500.01 RING 500.02 RING 485.01 THRUST RING 921.01 SHAFT LOCKNUT 234.01 DOUBLE SUCTION IMPELLER 303.01 FOUR LOBED RADIAL BEARING 430.01 INPRO SEAL 412.04 O-RING 204230988001 104490009821 021703012802 104206815031 104188113054 204231028001 204220166004 204230260401 204231018001 204221688027 104490005232 OEM NAME:SULZER UK PUMPS OEM REF :E13803 ADDRESS:MANOR MILL LANE BEESTON LEEDS LS11 8BR B.I. #: CONTACT NAME:GARY MONKS E-MAIL:GARY.MONKS@SULZER.COM J.O. #: TELEPHONE:0 {+44} 113 2724485 FACSIMILE:0 {+44} 113 2724404 G.B.P. to dollar 1=$2 OCM NAME OCM PART NO. QTY USED UNIT STOCK? *(2) *(3) PER EQPT. PRICE GBP *(5) SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER 204230988001 104490009821 021703012802 104206815031 104188113054 204231028001 204220166004 204230260401 204231018001 204221688027 104490005232 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 45,631.78 8.96 8.96 188.00 289.60 2,000.00 493.92 74,944.98 6,920.48 1,968.48 8.96 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
REPAIR?
*(6)
N N N N N N N N N N N
*Notes:
(1) Provide complete generic description and include material designation & size. If the item is a "Kit" , a "Set", or an "Assembly", 'list its contents and associated part numbers. (2) This part number/identification number must be "unique" to facilitate interchangeability. (Submit OCM part no. supporting document or catalog). (3) OCM = Original Component Manufacturer. (4) Unit price shall be entered in US$ dollar value. (5) Is it necessary for Saudi Aramco to stock this item?. If so, indicate the recommended quantity. (6) Is this item repairable?. Indicate with "Y" for yes, or "N" for no.
CERTIFIED TRUE & CORRECT:
G P Monks REV B Name & Signature / Affix company stamp
Attachment #2

Saudi Aramco SA7970 DESCRIPTION OF PARENT EQUIPMENT (This form is required for each separate type /model /size of equipment) ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER (OEM) SAUDI ARAMCO EQUIPMENT NAME: CRUDE OIL SHIPPER MODEL: CD TYPE:20X24X22G PART#: N/A SERIAL :9901-48330 DRAWING 0-104.421.869 TAG .B36-G-0002A/B/C/D SAUDI ARAMCO / CONTRACTOR P.O. :003003/002140 validity March 31st 2008 P.O. ITEM #: P.O. QTY:4 DWG SPARE PART COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OEM PART NO. *(1) *(2) ITEM# 302.01 FOUR LOBED RADIAL BEARING 430.01 INPRO SEAL 303.01 THRUST BEARING KINGSBURY JJ9 384.01 THRUST BEARING PLATE 592.01 SHIM PLATE 556.01 ADJUSTING PIECE 411.01 SEAL RING 923.01 SHAFT NUT 412.05 O-RING 400.01 SPIRAL WOUND GASKET 502.01 STATIONARY WEAR RING D.E 204231018001 204221688027 204231019001 204231024001 204231022001 204231023801 204231020001 204231025002 021501003405 FAFL4627602 204231032001 OEM NAME:SULZER UK PUMPS OEM REF :E13803 ADDRESS:MANOR MILL LANE BEESTON LEEDS LS11 8BR B.I. #: CONTACT NAME:GARY MONKS E-MAIL:GARY.MONKS@SULZER.COM J.O. #: TELEPHONE:0 {+44} 113 2724485 FACSIMILE:0 {+44} 113 2724404 G.B.P. to dollar 1=$2 OCM NAME OCM PART NO. QTY USED UNIT STOCK? *(2) *(3) PER EQPT. PRICE*(4) *(5) SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER 204231018001 204221688027 204231019001 204231024001 204231022001 204231023801 204231020001 204231025002 021501003405 FAFL4627602 204231032001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 6,920.48 1,968.48 10,283.52 3,566.40 1,855.00 42.56 2,414.72 3,606.40 8.96 91.12 8,645.00 y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
REPAIR?
*(6)
NO N N N N N N N N N N
*Notes:
Attachment #2

Saudi Aramco SA7970 DESCRIPTION OF PARENT EQUIPMENT (This form is required for each separate type /model /size of equipment) ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER (OEM) SAUDI ARAMCO EQUIPMENT NAME: CRUDE OIL SHIPPER MODEL: CD TYPE:20X24X22G PART#: N/A SERIAL :9901-48330 DRAWING 0-104.421.869 TAG .B36-G-0002A/B/C/D SAUDI ARAMCO / CONTRACTOR P.O. :003003/002140 validity March 31st 2008 P.O. ITEM #: P.O. QTY:4 DWG SPARE PART COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OEM PART NO. *(1) *(2) ITEM# 412.03 O-RING 412.05 O-RING 400.02 SPIRAL WOUND GASKET 502.02 STATIONARY WEAR RING N.D.E. 412.03 O RING 104490006592 021501003405 FAFL4627602 204231032002 104490006592 OEM NAME:SULZER UK PUMPS OEM REF :E13803 ADDRESS:MANOR MILL LANE BEESTON LEEDS LS11 8BR B.I. #: CONTACT NAME:GARY MONKS E-MAIL:GARY.MONKS@SULZER.COM J.O. #: TELEPHONE:0 {+44} 113 2724485 FACSIMILE:0 {+44} 113 2724404 G.B.P. to dollar 1=$2 OCM NAME OCM PART NO. QTY USED UNIT STOCK? *(2) *(3) PER EQPT. PRICE*(4) *(5) SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER SULZER 104490006592 021501003405 FAFL4627602 204231032002 104490006592 1 1 2 1 1 333.20 8.96 133.36 8,645.00 333.20 Y Y Y Y Y
REPAIR?
*(6)
N N N N N
*Notes:
Attachment #2

Saudi Aramco SA7970 DESCRIPTION OF PARENT EQUIPMENT (This form is required for each separate type /model /size of equipment) ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER (OEM) SAUDI ARAMCO EQUIPMENT NAME: CRUDE OIL SHIPPER MODEL: CD TYPE:20X24X22G PART#: N/A SERIAL :9901-48330 DRAWING 0-104.421.869 TAG .B36-G-0002A/B/C/D SAUDI ARAMCO / CONTRACTOR P.O. :003003/002140 validity March 31st 2008 P.O. ITEM #: P.O. QTY:4 DWG SPARE PART COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OEM PART NO. *(1) *(2) ITEM# VOITH GEARBOX SPARES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RADIAL BEARING RADIAL BEARING RADIAL BEARING RADIAL BEARING AXIAL TILTING PAD BEARING SEAL RING SEAL RING WHEEL SHAFT COMPLETE PINION SHAFT RESISTANCE THERMOMETER 9901483300003 9901483300003 9901483300003 9901483300003 9901483300003 9901483300003 9901483300003 9901483300003 9901483300003 9901483300003 VOITH VOITH VOITH VOITH VOITH VOITH VOITH VOITH VOITH VOITH 602189800 602189801 602190200 60219021 4571308 513937100 513936900 601677700 601676900 101007275 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 17,572.80 17,572.80 16,996.80 16,996.80 32.577.60 13,420.80 12,628.80 402,830.40 129,379.20 1,900.80 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N N OEM NAME:SULZER UK PUMPS OEM REF :E13803 ADDRESS:MANOR MILL LANE BEESTON LEEDS LS11 8BR B.I. #: CONTACT NAME:GARY MONKS E-MAIL:GARY.MONKS@SULZER.COM J.O. #: TELEPHONE:0 {+44} 113 2724485 FACSIMILE:0 {+44} 113 2724404 G.B.P. to dollar 1=$2 OCM NAME OCM PART NO. QTY USED UNIT STOCK? *(2) *(3) PER EQPT. PRICE*(4) *(5)
REPAIR?
*(6)
*Notes:
(1) Provide complete generic description and include material designation & size. If the item is a "Kit" , a "Set", or an "Assembly", 'list its contents and associated part numbers.
(2) This part number/identification number must be "unique" to facilitate interchangeability. (Submit OCM part no. supporting document or catalog). (3) OCM = Original Component Manufacturer. (4) Unit price shall be entered in US$ dollar value. (5) Is it necessary for Saudi Aramco to stock this item?. If so, indicate the recommended quantity. (6) Is this item repairable?. Indicate with "Y" for yes, or "N" for no.
Attachment #2

Saudi Aramco SA7970 DESCRIPTION OF PARENT EQUIPMENT (This form is required for each separate type /model /size of equipment) ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER (OEM) SAUDI ARAMCO EQUIPMENT NAME: CRUDE OIL SHIPPER MODEL: CD TYPE:20X24X22G PART#: N/A SERIAL :9901-48330 DRAWING 0-104.421.869 TAG .B36-G-0002A/B/C/D SAUDI ARAMCO / CONTRACTOR P.O. :003003/002140 validity March 31st 2008 P.O. ITEM #: P.O. QTY:4 DWG SPARE PART COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OEM PART NO. *(1) *(2) ITEM# VOITH GEARBOX SPARES 11 12 RESISTANCE THERMOMETER RESISTANCE THERMOMETER 9901483300003 9901483300003 VOITH VOITH 101004983 101006656 1 1 1,814.40 1,502.40 Y Y N N OEM NAME:SULZER UK PUMPS OEM REF :E13803 ADDRESS:MANOR MILL LANE BEESTON LEEDS LS11 8BR B.I. #: CONTACT NAME:GARY MONKS E-MAIL:GARY.MONKS@SULZER.COM J.O. #: TELEPHONE:0 {+44} 113 2724485 FACSIMILE:0 {+44} 113 2724404 G.B.P. to dollar 1=$2 OCM NAME OCM PART NO. QTY USED UNIT STOCK? *(2) *(3) PER EQPT. PRICE*(4) *(5)
REPAIR?
*(6)
*Notes:
Attachment #2

Saudi Aramco SA7970 (This form is required for each separate type /model /size of equipment) DESCRIPTION OF PARENT EQUIPMENT ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER (OEM) SAUDI ARAMCO EQUIPMENT NAME: CRUDE OIL SHIPPER MODEL: CD TYPE:20X24X22G PART#: N/A SERIAL :9901-48330 DRAWING 0-104.421.869 TAG .B36-G-0002A/B/C/D SAUDI ARAMCO / CONTRACTOR P.O. :003003/002140 validity March 31st 2008 P.O. ITEM #: P.O. QTY:4 DWG SPARE PART COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OEM PART NO. ITEM# *(1) *(2) COMPLETE MECH SEAL SHV8/165-E1 Q32Q2VMG1(1.4571) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 *Notes: SEAL FACE O-RING SPRING BACK-UP RING SEAL FACE O-RING PIN SLEEVE O-RING SET SCREW SHAFT SLEEVE O-RING COVER O-RING THROTTLE RING SPRING WASHER HEXAGON BOLT ASSEMBLY FIXTURE HEXAGON BOLT HEAD SCREW PLUG SHV8/165-1M 177,17X5,33 WN34-5 WN164.10-176 WN215-155 190,09X3,53 WN126-4H6X8 SH4/165-FTA1-5 190,09X3,53 DIN915-M6X16 SHV8/165-E1-11 148,59X5,33 SHV8/165-E1-13&M 228,19X3,53 WN24-160 WN34.5-4 SHV8/165-E1-17&M DIN933-M6X16 WN72-5X45X6 DIN933-M6X16 WN8-3/4NPT OEM NAME:SULZER UK PUMPS OEM REF :E13803 ADDRESS:MANOR MILL LANE BEESTON LEEDS LS11 8BR B.I. #: CONTACT NAME:GARY MONKS E-MAIL:GARY.MONKS@SULZER.COM J.O. #: TELEPHONE:0 {+44} 113 2724485 FACSIMILE:0 {+44} 113 2724404 G.B.P. to dollar 1=$2 OCM NAME OCM PART NO. QTY USED UNIT STOCK? *(2) *(3) PER EQPT. PRICE*(4) *(5) Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann Burgmann 071 469 000 126 349 072 103 565 350 127 161 262 833 495 372 812 000 149 101 741 350 130 588 206 833 488 246 101 741 350 133 853 205 126 237 246 103 450 350 126 353 246 101 806 350 575 900 712 143 604 246 126 355 246 247 571 205 500 023 246 247 571 205 806 770 204 2 1 1 12 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 8 4 4 4 50,480.54 15,814.80 368.02 50.78 1,066.04 4,770.58 3,047.32 7.82 3,937.30 305.32 16.36 14,472.48 331.24 13,632.76 349.68 2,566.66 24.82 3,005.32 10.52 126.24 10.52 184.52 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
REPAIR
*(6)
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
Attachment #2

Saudi Aramco SA7970 DESCRIPTION OF PARENT EQUIPMENT (This form is required for each separate type /model /size of equipment) ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER (OEM) SAUDI ARAMCO EQUIPMENT NAME: CRUDE OIL SHIPPER MODEL: CD TYPE:20X24X22G PART#: N/A SERIAL :9901-48330 DRAWING 0-104.421.869 TAG .B36-G-0002A/B/C/D SAUDI ARAMCO / CONTRACTOR P.O. :003003/002140 validity March 31st 2008 P.O. ITEM #: P.O. QTY:4 DWG SPARE PART COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OEM PART NO. *(1) *(2) ITEM# LUBE OIL SYSTEM FILTERS 1 FILTER ELEMENTS HBR-SP-EL--34481 BARIC HBR-SP-EL--34481 1SET 5,104.32 YES NO OEM NAME:SULZER UK PUMPS OEM REF :E13803 ADDRESS:MANOR MILL LANE BEESTON LEEDS LS11 8BR B.I. #: CONTACT NAME:GARY MONKS E-MAIL:GARY.MONKS@SULZER.COM J.O. #: TELEPHONE:0 {+44} 113 2724485 FACSIMILE:0 {+44} 113 2724404 G.B.P. to dollar 1=$2 OCM NAME OCM PART NO. QTY USED UNIT STOCK? *(2) *(3) PER EQPT. PRICE*(4) *(5)
REPAIR?
*(6)
*Notes:

Section 1
Leading Particulars
1.3
1.3.1
Pump Unit Data

Clearances and Runout Tolerances
Feature Impeller wear ring clearances New Clearance (mm) 0.63 - 0.72 Applicable Sections 3.7
Run-Out and Balance Requirements (mm) Maximum Allowable Shaft Run-out TIR Maximum Allowable Impeller Run-out - Measured on Wear Ring Surface Maximum Allowable Element Run-out - Measured on Wear Ring Surface 0.03 0.03 0.05
1.3.2
Hazardous Area Operation

The pumpset equipment supplied by Sulzer under Sulzer Order Number 9901-48330 has been designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area classified as a
Class 1
Group IIA
Division 2
The supplied equipment is NOT to be installed and/or operated in a Hazardous Area where the conditions may vary from the above classification limits. Unauthorised modification of the supplied equipment, or operation of the supplied equipment outside its design parameters, MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification.
1.3.3
Hazardous Operating Conditions

Maximum Pumping Temperature Pumped Medium 146F / 63.3C Stabilised crude oil
Manual No. 104.471.646

Section 1 Page 4

Section 1
Leading Particulars
1.4
Equipment Data Sheets

The Equipment Data Sheets, listed below, are included next as inserts to the manual.
Pump Data Sheets - 48330-PDS Pump Noise Data Sheets - BE-569367 Motor Data Sheets BE-106004 Gearbox Data Sheet 48330-GDS Coupling Data Sheet - Motor to Gearbox 9109-DS Coupling Data Sheet - Gearbox to Pump 9110-DS Instrument Data Sheets - 4-104.476.138 Lube Oil System Data Sheet DS-34481 Lube Oil System Cooler Data Sheet CE-34481 Lube Oil System Cooler Motor Data Sheet CMD-34481 Lube Oil System Noise Data Sheet NDS-34481 Lube Oil System Relief Valve Data Sheet RV-34481
Manual No. 104.471.646

Section 1 Page 5
APPD.
DHOH
JOB NO.
BI-10-03452
ITEM NO.
B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D 003003/002140
AAN
AAN
SAUDI ARAMCO
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP SDS-RE-31004 SMART DATASHEET
1 APPLICABLE TO: PROPOSALS PURCHASE AS BUILT 2 FOR 3 SITE KHURAIS CENTRAL PROCESSING FACILITY 4 NO. REQ
PURCHASE ORDER NO. SPECIFICATION NO.
CERT.
SAS
SAS
REVISION NO. PAGE Plant No UNIT 3 OF B36
04 32 Index
DATE BY G
02.01.2007 Drawing No BE-106004
CHKD.
PW
PW
GAS PLANT CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS

NO. STAGES ONE
SERVICE TYPE MODEL BY PURCHASER GENERAL (3.1.1)
4 (FOUR)
PUMP SIZE 20x24x22G CD
5 MANUFACTURER BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR PURCHASE AMENDMENT (FW REV P2)
SULZER
CD
SERIAL NO. 48330
6 NOTES: INFORMATION BELOW TO BE COMPLETED: 7 8 PUMPS TO OPERATE IN (PARALLEL) 9 (SERIES) WITH BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR PURCHASE AMENDMENT 10 GEAR ITEM NO. 11 GEAR PROVIDED BY 12 GEAR MOUNTED BY 13 GEAR DATA SHT. NO. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 LOCATION: (2.1.29) 27 28 29 30 31 32 02 03 04 INDOOR OUTDOOR GRADE CL I HEATED UNHEATED MEZZANINE GR II A DIV 2 UNDER ROOF PARTIAL SIDES OTHER SUCTION PRESSURE MAX./RATED DISCHARGE PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE DIFF. HEAD 2,226 (FT) PROCESS VARIATIONS STARTING CONDITIONS CONT. 285 879.0 797.0 NPSHA /
BY MANUFACTURER FOUR NO. TURBINE DRIVEN PUMP ITEM NO. TURBINE ITEM NO. TURBINE PROVIDED BY TURBINE MOUNTED BY TURBINE DATA SHT. NO. SITE AND UTILITY DATA (CONT'D)
3 (THREE) NO. MOTOR DRIVEN

PUMP ITEM NO. MOTOR ITEM NO. MOTOR PROVIDED BY MOTOR MOUNTED BY MOTOR DATA SHT. NO.
B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D B36-GM-0002 A/B/C/D PUMP VENDOR PUMP VENDOR
DESCRIPTION
BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR PURCHASE (FW REV P1)
OPERATING CONDITIONS CAPACITY, NORMAL 19,210

(USGPM) RATED
21,130 (USGPM) WATER SOURCE CHLORIDE CONCENTRATION (PPM) 82 (PSIG) (PSIG) (PSI) 265.0 (FT) TYPE OR NAME OF LIQUID PUMPING TEMPERATURE NORMAL 145 (F) MAX. 13 0.829 3.01 MAX (cP) @ 146 (F) MIN. 145 MIN (BTU/LB F) 145 Chlorides & H2S 10 PTB (pounds per thousand barrels) <60 FLAMMABLE (2.11.1.11) (F) (cP) (F) (F) VAPOR PRESSURE (PSIA) @ 0.843 INSTRUMENT AIR: MAX/MIN PRESS LIQUID STABILISED CRUDE / (PSIG)
JO/EWO
23 SERVICE:
INTERMITTENT (STARTS/DAY)
RELATIVE DENSITY (SPECIFIC GRAVITY): NORMAL VISCOSITY MAX. VISCOSITY CORROSIVE/EROSIVE AGENT
CHLORIDE CONCENTRATION
PARALLEL OPERATION REQ'D (2.1.11) SITE AND UTILITY DATA
BY
AV
AV
25.03.06
19.07.06
02.01.07
DATE
KP
SPECIFIC HEAT, Cp
REV NO.
ELECTRIC AREA CLASSIFICATION (2.1.22 / 3.1.5) WINTERIZATION REQ'D TROPICALIZATION REQ'D.
H2S CONCENTRATION (PPM) LIQUID OTHER HAZARDOUS
0.2 VOL % BASE SEDIMENT & WATER PERFORMANCE
REVISIONS DRAWN BY DATE CHKD BY OPRG. DEPT. BY DATE ENG. DEPT. BY DATE APPD. FOR CONSTR. BY DATE CERTIFIED BY DATE
33 SITE DATA (2.1.29) 34 35 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 46 48 49 50 ALTITUDE 1419 (FT) BAROMETER 32 13.91 (PSIA) / / DUST SAND STORMS DRIVERS (PSIG) (PSIG) DRIVERS 13200 60 3 120 60 1 (F) MAX. RETURN (F) (PSIG) (PSI) REMARKS: (F) (F) HEATING HEATING (PSIG) (PSIG) CONTROL (F) (F) SHUTDOWN FUMES 122 (F) (%) PROPOSAL CURVE NO. IMPELLER DIA. RATED RATED POWER RANGE OF AMBIENT TEMPS: MIN/MAX. RELATIVE HUMIDITY: OTHER UTILITY CONDITIONS: MIN MAX VOLTAGE HERTZ PHASE TEMP. INLET PRESS. NORM MIN RETURN MIN / MAX
104.451.653 21.889 MAX. 12200
RPM 22.75 MIN.
3895 19.342 (IN.) 87.5 (%) 87 (%)

(USGPM) (USGPM) (USGPM)
(BHP) EFFICIENCY
37 UNUSUAL CONDITIONS: (2.1.23)
POWER AT NORMAL CAPACITY MINIMUM CONTINUOUS FLOW: THERMAL
10870 (BHP) EFFICINCEY

(USGPM) STABLE
10600 24400 24400
40 STEAM:
PREFERRED OPERATING REGION ALLOWABLE OPERATING REGION MAX HEAD @ RATED IMPELLER MAX POWER @ RATED IMPELLER NPSHR AT RATED CAPACITY SUCTION SPECIFIC SPEED MAX. SOUND PRESS. LEVEL REQ'D EST MAX SOUND PRESS. LEVEL
14800 TO 10600 TO 2532 12300 130
(FT) (BHP) (FT) (2.1.8) (2.1.9) (dBA) (2.1.14) (dBA) (2.1.14)
43 ELECTRICITY
<6710 (11,000 US UNITS) < 85 91
47 COOLING WATER: (2.1.17) (PSIG) DESIGN (PSIG) MAX ALLOW P
NPSH AVAILABLE AT 120 % OF RATED CAPACITY = 263 ft POWER ABSORBED FIG ARE BASED ON SG=0.843
APPD.
DHOH
AAN
AAN
JOB NO.
BI-10-03452 00 OF
B36
ITEM NO. DATE 32 Index BY

G
B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D 02.01.2007 Drawing No
SAUDI ARAMCO
1 CONSTRUCTION API 610 8TH EDITION OTHER OH2 OH3 OH6 BB1 BB2 BB3 BB4 BB5 SIZE (IN) 24 20 31-SAMSS-004 VS1 VS2 VS3 VS4 VS5 FLANGE RATING (LBS) 600# 600# FAC'G RF RF POSITION (SEE REMARKS) VS6 VS7 OTHER 2 APPLICABLE STANDARD: 3 4 6
REVISION NO. PAGE Plant No SITE SERVICE 4
CERT.
SAS
SAS
BE-106004
KHURAIS CENTRAL PROCESSING FACILITY CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS CONSTRUCTION (CONT) 5.75 54 (IN) (IN) (IN)
CHKD.
PW
PW
SHAFT DIAMETER BETWEEN BEARINGS SPAN BETWEEN BEARING CENTERS SPAN BETWEEN BEARING & IMPELLER REMARKS
5 PUMP TYPE: (1.1.2) 7 8 9 10 ISSUED FOR PURCHASE AMENDMENT 11 12 13 14 SUCTION 15 DISCHARGE 16 BALANCE DRUM 17 PRESSURE CASING CONNECTIONS: (2.3.3.12) 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 27 28 29 31 02 03 04 33 34 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 45 47 48 49 50 51 REMARKS: DRAIN VENT PRESSURE GAUGE TEMP GAUGE WARM-UP BALANCE / LEAK-OFF CYLINDRICAL THREADS REQUIRED (2.3.3.3) ( SEE SEPARATE SHEET FOR VERTICALS) NEAR CENTERLINE SEPARATE MOUNTING PLATE CENTERLINE FOOT IN-LINE AXIAL SINGLE VOLUTE OVERHUNG RADIAL MULTIPLE VOLUTE BETWEEN BEARINGS 1350 DIFFUSER BARREL REMARKS: (PSIG) BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION 2025 (PSIG) BEARING (TYPE/NUMBER): RADIAL THRUST 4 LOBED RADIAL TILTING PAD / / 5.75" KNISBURY JJ9 MATERIAL APPENDIX H CLASS MIN DESIGN METAL TEMP BARREL/CASE SHAFT DIFFUSERS COUPLING SPACER/HUBS COUPLING DIAPHRAGMS (DISKS) A 216 WCB IMPELLER 4140 N/A STEEL STAINLESS STEEL CASE/IMPELLER WEAR RINGS HKA4 32 A 747 CB7CU1 / A743 CA15 (2.11.1.1) (F) A 487 CA6NM REMARKS: NO. 1 1 SIZE (NPS) 0.75 0.75 TYPE 600# 600#
ISSUED FOR PURCHASE AMENDMENT (FW REV P2)
COUPLINGS: (3.2.2) MAKE MODEL RATING (HP/100 RPM) LIMITED END FLOAT REQUIRED SIDE SIDE SPACER LENGTH SERVICE FACTOR DRIVER HALF COUPLING MOUNTED BY: PUMP MFR. BASEPLATES: API BASEPLATE NUMBER DRIVER MFR.
DRIVER - PUMP BIBBY TURBOFLEX 8HS-22-230 750 NO 18 1.5 PURCHASER (IN)
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED FOR PURCHASE (FW REV P1)
NOZZLE CONDITIONS: (2.3.2.1 & 2.3.2.3)
COUPLING PER API 671 (5.2.7) N/A (APPENDIX M)
NON-GROUT CONSTRUCTION: (3.3.13/5.3.7.3.5)
BI-10-03452
BI-10-03452
BI-10-03452 39084 KP
JO/EWO
BY
AV
25.03.06
19.07.06
DATE
AV
26 CASING MOUNTING:
30 CASING SPLIT: 32 CASING TYPE:
DRAWN BY DATE CHKD BY OPRG. DEPT. BY DATE ENG. DEPT. BY DATE APPD. FOR CONSTR. BY DATE CERTIFIED BY DATE
REV NO.
REVISIONS
35 CASE PRESSURE RATING: MAX ALLOWABLE WORKING PRESSURE @ 146 (F)
HYDROTEST PRESSURE
SUCT'N PRESS. REGIONS MUST BE DESIGNED FOR MAWP (VIEWED FROM COUPLING END) CCW CW
40 ROTATION:
REVIEW AND APPROVE THRUST BEARING SIZE LUBRICATION: (2.10.4) GREASE FLINGER FLOOD PURGE OIL MIST API-610 RING OIL PURE OIL MIST API-614 VG 46
IMPELLERS INDIVIDUALLY SECURED REMARKS: BOLT OH3 PUMP TO PAD/FOUNDATION SHAFT DIAMETER AT COUPLING 5.75 (IN)
CONSTANT LEVEL OILER PREFERENCE (SEE REMARKS) X PRESSURE LUBE SYS (5.2.6.2) OIL VISC. ISO GRADE (5.2.6.2)
46 SHAFT:
APPD.
DHOH
JOB NO.
BI-10-03452 00 OF
B36
ITEM NO. DATE
AAN
AAN
SAUDI ARAMCO
1 BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION (CONT) OIL HEATER REQ'D ELECTRIC STEAM OIL PRESS TO BE GREATER THAN COOLANT PRESS (5.2.6.2) REF. LO. SYSTEM D.S 'S 2 3 4 5 REMARKS 6
REVISION NO. PAGE 5 Plant No SITE SERVICE
32 Index
BY
G BE-106004
CERT.
SAS
SAS
KHURAIS CENTRAL PROCESSING FACILITY CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS MECHANICAL SEAL OR PACKING (CONT) 13 FLAMMABLE (PSIA) @ OTHER / / /
(USGPM)
CHKD.
PW
PW
VAPOR PRESSURE HAZARDOUS FLOW RATE MAX/MIN
145
(F)
PRESSURE REQUIRED MAX/MIN TEMPERATURE REQUIRED MAX/MIN QUENCH FLUID: NAME OF FLUID FLOW RATE SEE REMARKS SEAL FLUSH PIPING: (2.7.3.19 AND APPENDIX D) SEAL FLUSH PIPING PLAN TUBING PIPE AUXILIARY FLUSH PLAN TUBING 145 (F) (PSIG)
(USGPM) (2.11.1.1)
(PSIG) (F)
BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR PURCHASE AMENDMENT (FW REV P2)
7 MECHANICAL SEAL OR PACKING 8 SEAL DATA: (2.7.2) 9 10 BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR PURCHASE AMENDMENT 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 25 27 28 29 30 SEE ADDITIONAL REMARKS SEE ATTACHED API-682 DATA SHEET (2.7.2) NON-API 682 SEAL (2.7.2) APPENDIX H SEAL CODE SEAL MANUFACTURER SIZE AND TYPE SHV / MANUFACTURER CODE TEMPERATURE PRESSURE FLOW SEAL CHAMBER SIZE TOTAL LENGTH SLEEVE MATERIAL GLAND MATERIAL AUX SEAL DEVICE JACKET REQUIRED FLUSH (F) QUENCH (Q) HEATING (H) BAL'NCE FLUID (E) DRAIN (D) COOLING (C) LEAKAGE BARRIER/BUFF. (B) LUBRICATION (G) PUMPED FLUID (P) (IN) CLEAR LEN. AISI 316L AISI 316L FLOATING THROTTLE BUSH (IN) 94.9 BSTFP TYPE ES BURGMANN PUSHER Q3Q1 VMG
(USGPM)
DESCRIPTION
31 CARBON STEEL STAINLESS STEEL 61 CARBON STEEL STAINLESS STEEL
15 SEAL CHAMBER DATA: (2.1.6)
PIPE PIPING ASSEMBLY: (3.5.2.10.1) THREADED FLANGED UNIONS
SOCKET WELDED TYPE SEE REMARKS
TUBE TYPE FITTINGS
PRESSURE SWITCH (PLAN 52/53) PRESSURE GUAGE (PLAN 52/53) LEVEL SWITCH (PLAN 52/53) LEVEL GUAGE (PLAN 52/53)
21 SEAL CONSTRUCTION:
JO/EWO
TYPE
TEMP INDICATOR (PLANS 21, 22, 23, 32, 41) HEAT EXCHANGER (PLAN 52/53) REMARKS: EACH SEAL LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEM HAVE ONE NO. SEAL POT WITH ONE LEVEL TRANSMITTER.
BY
AV
AV
25.03.06
19.07.06
39084
DATE
KP
26 GLAND TAPS: (2.7.3.14)
PACKING DATA: (APPENDIX C) MANUFACTURER TYPE SIZE FLOW LANTERN RING STEAM AND COOLING WATER PIPING NO. OF RINGS
(USGPM) @
EXTERNAL FLUID INJECTION (X)
REV NO.
31 SEAL FLUIDS REQUIREM'T AND AVAILABLE FLUSH LIQUID: 32 NOTE: IF FLUSH LIQUID IS PUMPAGE LIQUID (AS IN FLUSH PIPING 33 PLANS 11 TO 41), FOLLWING FLUSH LIQUID DATA IS NOT REQ'D. 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 44 45 46 47 48 49 ADDITIONAL REMARKS: 50 51 SUPPLY TEMPERATURE MAX/MIN RELATIVE DENSITY (SPECIFIC GRAVITY) NAME OF FLUID SPECIFIC HEAT, Cp VAPOR PRESSURE HAZARDOUS FLAMMABLE FLOW RATE MAX/MIN PRESSURE REQUIRED MAX/MIN TEMPERATURE REQUIRED MAX/MIN SUPPLY TEMPERATURE MAX/MIN RELATIVE DENSITY (SPECIFIC GRAVITY) NAME OF FLUID (PSIA) @ OTHER / / / / @
(USGPM)
02
03
04
PACKING INJECTION REQUIRED (F) (F) (F)
/ @
(BTU/LB F) (F)
COOLING WATER PIPING PLAN COOLING WATER REQUIREMENTS SEAL JACKET/BRG HSG SEAL HEAT EXCHANGER QUENCH TOTAL COOLING WATER STEAM PIPING: TUBING PIPE
(USGPM) @ (USGPM) @ (USGPM) @
(3.5.4.1) (PSIG) (PSIG) (PSIG)

(USGPM)
(PSIG) (F) (F)
43 BARRIER/BUFFER FLUID:
(F) REMARKS:
NO COOLING WATER AVAILABLE.(AIR COOLERS ONL.Y)
A PLUGGED PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED TO PERMIT DIRECT MEASUREMENT OF SEAL CHAMBER PRESSURE. SEAL FACES SHALL BE BUKA 30 (CARBON WITH SILICON CARBIDE IMPREGNATION) Vs BUKA 20 (SILICON CARBIDE).
APPD.
DHOH
AAN
AAN
JOB NO.
BI-10-03452 00 OF
B36
ITEM NO. DATE BY

G
SAUDI ARAMCO
1 INSTRUMENTATION NONCONTACTING (API 670) PROVISION FOR MOUNTING ONLY FLAT SURFACE REQ'D SEE ATTACHED API 670 DATA SHEET MONITORS AND CABLES (3.4.3.3) BY LSTK CONTRACTOR. TRANSDUCER 2 VIBRATION: 3 4 5
32 Index
CERT.
SAS
SAS
BE-106004
KHURAIS CENTRAL PROCESSING FACILITY CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS MOTOR DRIVE (CONT) (3.1.5)
CHKD.
PW
PW
REMARKS:
SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINT MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD OTHER (SEE BELOW) PUMP: PUMP SURFACE PREPARATION PRIMER FINISH COAT THRUST BRG METAL TEMP BLAST CLEAN ZINC RICH EPOXY RAL 7040 (GREY) BLAST CLEAN REFER SAES-H-001 / 100 / 101 /1 01 V
6 7 8
9 REMARKS REFER 34-SAMSS-625 ISSUED FOR PURCHASE AMENDMENT 10 11 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE: 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 REMARKS 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 04 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 46 47 48 49 REMARKS: 50 FRAME SERVICE FACTOR VOLTS/PHASE/HERTZ TYPE ENCLOSURE MINIMUM STARTING VOLTAGE TEMPERATURE RISE FULL LOAD AMPS LOCKED ROTOR AMPS INSULATION STARTING METHOD LUBE UP RADIAL THRUST VERTICAL THRUST CAPACITY (LBS) DOWN SLEEVE N/A / / (LBS) EMZVB-22-280 CLASS B 475 2304 (485 %) CLASS F DOL FLOOD OIL LUBE SYSTEM 13200 / MOTOR DRIVE (3.1.5) MANUFACTURER 13000 HORIZONTAL (HP) REFER MOTOR DS ABB (INDUCTION) 1787 VERTICAL AMC 900 M4A BSNV 1.0 3 TEAAC 80% / 60 INDUCTION (RPM) START-UP SPECIFY SPARE PARTS (TABLE 6.1) NORMAL MAINTENANCE CAPITAL / CRITICAL SPARE PARTS AS PER MATERIAL REQUISITION BE-886101. RADIAL BRG METAL TEMP PROVISION FOR INSTRUMENTS ONLY SEE ATTACHED API-670 DATA SHEET TEMP GAUGES (WITH THERMOWELLS) OTHER LOCATION Lube Oil Return temperature transmitters PRESSURE GAUGE TYPE
DESCRIPTION
BASEPLATE(3.3.5 & 3.3.7 & 3.3.9 & 3.3.13 & 3.3.14 & 3.3.21 & 3.3.22) BASEPLATE SURFACE PREPARATION PRIMER FINISH COAT SHIPMENT: (4.4.1) DOMESTIC EXPORT EXPORT BOXING REQUIRED OUTDOOR STORAGE MORE THAN 6 MONTHS SPARE ROTOR ASSEMBLY PACKAGED FOR: HORIZONTAL STORAGE VERTICAL STORAGE TYPE OF SHIPPING PREPARATION REMARKS: ZINC RICH EPOXY RAL 9006 (ALUMINIUM)
BI-10-03452
BI-10-03452
BI-10-03452
JO/EWO
BY
AV
AV
KP
WEIGHTS MOTOR DRIVEN: WEIGHT OF PUMP (LBS) WEIGHT OF BASEPLATE (LBS) WEIGHT OF MOTOR (LBS) WEIGHT OF GEAR (LBS) TOTAL WEIGHT (LBS) TURBINE DRIVEN: WEIGHT OF BASEPLATE (LBS) WEIGHT OF TURBINE (LBS) WEIGHT OF GEAR (LBS) TOTAL WEIGHT (LBS) REMARKS 18,000 35,300 92,600 15,200 165,500 INC ANCILLARIES
25.03.06
19.07.06 03
REV NO.
02
39084
DATE
OTHER PURCHASE REQUIREMENTS COORDINATION MEETING REQUIRED REVIEW FOUNDATION DRAWINGS REVIEW PIPING DRAWINGS OBSERVE PIPING CHECKS OBSERVE INITIAL ALIGNMENT CHECK CHECK ALIGNMENT AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE CONNECTION DESIGN APPROVAL
45 BEARINGS (TYPE / NUMBER):
APPD.
DHOH
AAN
AAN
JOB NO.
BI-10-03452 00 OF
B36
ITEM NO. DATE BY

G
SAUDI ARAMCO
1 OTHER PURCHASER REQUIREMENTS (CONT) RIGGING DEVICE REQ'D FOR TYPE OH3 PUMP HYDRODYNAMIC THRUST BRG SIZE REVIEW REQ'D 2 3 5 6 7
32 Index
CERT.
SAS
SAS
BE-106004
KHURAIS CENTRAL PROCESSING FACILITY CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS QA INSPECTION AND TEST (CONT'D)
CHKD.
PW
PW
ADDITIONAL INSPECTION REQUIRED FOR: MAG PARTICLE RADIOGRAPHIC HARDNESS TEST REQUIRED FOR: (4.2.3.2) WETTING AGENT HYDROTEST (4.3.2.5) VENDOR SUBMIT TEST PROCEDURES RECORD FINAL ASSEMBLY RUNNING CLEARANCES INSPECTION CHECK-LIST (APPENDIX N) REMARKS LIQUID PENETRANT ULTRASONIC
4 X LATERAL ANALYSIS REQUIRED (5.2.4.1 & 5.2.4.1.1) ROTOR DYNAMIC BALANCE MOUNT SEAL RESERVOIR OFF BASEPLATE INSTALLATION LIST IN PROPOSAL SPARE ROTOR VERTICAL STORAGE TORSIONAL ANALYSIS/REPORT (2.8.2.6) PROGRESS REPORTS REQUIRED
ALTERNATE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA (SEE REMARKS) (4.2.2.1)
BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR PURCHASE AMENDMENT (FW REV P2)
8 9 10 BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR PURCHASE AMENDMENT 11
DESCRIPTION
12 REMARKS: 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 QA INSPECTION AND TEST REVIEW VENDORS QA PROGRAM PERFORMANCE CURVE APPROVAL SHOP INSPECTION (4.1.4) TEST WITH SUBSTITUTE SEAL (4.3.3.1.2) TEST NON-WIT WIT OBSERVE
GENERAL REMARKS
REMARK 1:
20 HYDROSTATIC (4.3.2.4) 21 PERFORMANCE (4.3.3.2.1) 22 NPSH (4.3.4.1.4) 23 COMPLETE UNIT TEST (ONE) 24 SOUND LEVEL TEST 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 ADDITIONAL REMARKS: 50 51 MATERIAL CERTIFICATION REQUIRED (2.11.1.7) CASING OTHER CASTING REPAIR PROCEDURE APPROVAL REQ'D INSPECTION REQUIRED FOR CONNECTION WELDS (2.11.3.5.6) MAG PARTICLE RADIOGRAPHIC MAG PARTICLE RADIOGRAPHIC LIQUID PENETRANT ULTRASONIC REMARK 6: LIQUID PENETRANT ULTRASONIC IMPELLER SHAFT REMARK 5: CLEANLINESS PRIOR TO FINAL ASSEMBLY NOZZLE LOAD TEST BRG HSG RESONANCE TEST REMOVE/INSPECT HYDRODYNAMIC BEARINGS AFTER TEST AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT TEST REMARK 4: REMARK 3: REMARK 2:
PUMP NOZZLES AND BASE PLATE SHALL BE DESIGNED TO ACCOMMODATE TWICE THE NOZZLE LOADS SPCIFIED IN API 610
JO/EWO
PUMP MATERIALS SHALL BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH ARAMCO SPEC. SAES-A-301
BY
AV
AV 19.07.06
25.03.06
39084
DATE
KP
SUPPLIER TO REF ARAMCO SPEC. 31-SAMSS-004 AND VARIOUS REFERRED SPECIFICATIONS.
REV NO.
02
03
04
B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D OPERATE AS TWO DUTY AND TWO STANDBY OR THREE DUTY AND ONE STANDBY.
PUMP SHUT OFF HEAD SHOULD NOT EXCEED 15 % OF RATED TOTAL DIFFERENTIAL HEAD WITH ZERO POSITIVE TOLERANCE. ALSO AS PER CL.2.1.11 OF 31-SAMSS-004 THE HEAD RISE SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 10 % OF THE HEAD AT RATED CAPACITY.
INSPECTION REQUIRED FOR CASTINGS
AGREED TEST TOLERANCE ON RATED HEAD OF 2182 FT = +2%/-2%. ON SHUT OFF HEAD OF 2500 FT = +2%/5%.
FULL DETAILS OF INSPECTION AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS ARE PROVIDED IN 31-SAMSS-004 & MATERIAL REQUISITION
APPD.
DHOH
AAN
AAN
JOB NO.
BI-10-03452 00 OF
B36
ITEM NO. DATE BY

G
SAUDI ARAMCO
VERTICAL PUMP (API 610-8TH) SDS-RE-31004 SMART DATASHEET
1 VERTICAL TYPE (FIG 1.1) VS1 VS2 VS3 2 3 4 5 REMARKS:
REVISION NO. PAGE Plant No SITE SERVICE VS4 8
32 Index
CERT.
SAS
SAS
BE-106004
KHURAIS CENTRAL PROCESSING FACILITY CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS VS5 VS6 VS7 OTHER
CHKD.
PW
PW
0 6 7 8 9 ISSUED FOR PURCHASE AMENDMENT 10 11 12 13 15 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 25
VERTICAL PUMPS PUMP THRUST: AT MIN FLOW AT RATED FLOW AT MAX FLOW MAX THRUST SOLEPLATE SOLEPLATE THICKNESS FLANGED (IN) DIAMETER NUMBER LINE SHAFT BEARING SPACING WATER GREASE OIL PUMPAGE (IN) (+) UP (LBS) (LBS) (LBS) (LBS) (IN) X (IN) THREADED LENGTH (FT) (-) DOWN (LBS) (LBS) (LBS) (LBS) (IN) LINE SHAFT:
VERTICAL PUMPS (CONT'D) OPEN (IN) ENCLOSED TUBE DIA. THREADED (IN) (FT) (FT) FLOAT SWITCH (IN) LINE SHAFT DIAMETER LINE SHAFT COUPLING: SLEEVE & KEY SUCTION CAN THICKNESS LENGTH DIAMETER SUCTION STRAINER TYPE FLOAT & ROD IMPELLER COLLETS ACCEPTABLE (2.5.2) HARDENED SLEEVES UNDER BEARINGS RESONANCE TEST STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS (5.3.4.1) DRAIN PIPED TO SURFACE (5.3.12.6)
DESCRIPTION
14 COLUMN PIPE: 16 GUIDE BUSHINGS:
19 GUIDE BUSHING LUBE:
BI-10-03452
BI-10-03452
BI-10-03452
JO/EWO
CENTERLINE OF DISCHARGE
BY
AV
AV
KP
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 SUMP DEPTH
SUMP ARRANGEMENT
GRADE DATA PUMP LENGTH LOW LIQUID PUMP LENGTH ELEVATION (1ST STG IMPELLER) LOW LIQUID GRADE
########
19.07.06 03
REV NO.
02
04
39084
DATE
SUBMERGENCE REQ'D
SUMP DIMENSION
SUMP DEPTH SUMP DIMENSION LOW LIQUID
(FT) (FT) (FT)
PUMP LENGTH SUBMERGENCE REQ'D CENTERLINE DISCHARGE HEIGHT DATUM ELEVATION
(FT) (FT) (FT) (FT)
Saudi Aramco 7305-ENG (08/2000)

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS
SAUDI ARABIAN OIL COMPANY

EQUIPMENT NOISE DATA SHEET
GENERAL INFORMATION
Project Designation: Location: Equipment Type: Khurais Gas - Shipping Pumps Khurais Crude Shipping Pump unit (Motor + G'box + Pump) 48330 Inquiry/Purchase Order No.: Manufacturer: Model No.: 3003/2140 Sulzer CD 20x24x22G / 1s
DB THIS DRAWING AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTION IN FULL OR IN PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
HL
Equipment Serial No.:

DESCRI PTI ON
PURCHASER'S REQUIREMENTS
ISSUED FOR PURCHASE
This form shall be completed for each piece of equipment (or integrated unit) that is likely to generate noise in excess of 85 dBA at a distance of one meter. If the noise level is greater than 90 dBA, the cost of special design and/or acoustic treatment should be supplied. Measurements are to be made in accordance with ANSI S1.13 and at full design load, unless otherwise indicated. For rotating electric machinery, use points defined in IEEE Standard 85.
Also measure at:
50% load
120% load
Other load
DATE JO/ EWO
BI-1003451
SUPPLIER, MANUFACTURER OR VENDOR INFORMATION

Sound Pressure Level, dBA Standard Design: 90 dB(A) Special Design: With Acoustic Treatment:
REV. NO.
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
01D
DATE: PROJECT ENGINEER
Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels, dBA (Ref. 0.02 mPA) (Supplier's Guaranteed Maximum Sound Pressure Level at One Meter) Octave Band (Hz) 20 - 75 75 - 150 150 - 300 Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Standard Design 92 88 86 87 86 82.5 80.5 71 Added Cost: Special Design With Acoustic Treatment
DATE:
CERTIFIED
DATE: CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
300 - 600 600 - 1200 1200 - 2400 2400 - 4800 4800 - 9600
DATE:
OPERATIONS
DATE: CONTROL NUMBER
EDSD V ERI FI CA T I ON
Description of Special Design:
ALL
REQUIREMENTS,
THIS INDICATES THAT REV. NO.__________
REV I SI ON CERT I FI CA T I ON
CERTIFICATE
DATE:
Description of Acoustic Treatment:
Added Cost:
BY:
(DCC) NO. ______________________________
OF THIS DRAWING IS COVERED, FOR
Supplier, Manufacturer or Vendor: Sulzer (ref. EQUIPMENT NOISE CALCULATION SHEET Rev.02 2007 Jun 19) Represented by: Signature: Peter Sandford Title: Date: Technical Services Manager 2007 Jun 19
APPROVAL/CERTIFICATION
COMPLETION

KHURAIS CRUDE SHIPPING PUMP UNIT
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
DRAWING
DAT
327
BE-569367
01D
BY
SAUDI ARABIA JO / EWO:
EDSD/7305-0800.XLS
EQUIPMENT NOISE CALCULATION SHEET 48330 Aramco Khurais Area calculations
Rev. 02
2007 Jun 19
P. Sandford
A-weighted Noise Level calculations
BASEPLATE Fully grouted Sulzer GA 0-104.430.195 Reference surface Units Length 11.85 m
Dimensions Width 3.50 m Height 0.62 m
Sound propagation over reflecting plane

Area 60.5 m
2
Surface vibration V 0.2 mm/s 10 lg V 72 dB re 50 nm/s
Sound Power Lw 90 dB re 1 pW
10 lg A 17.8 dB re 1 m2
MOTOR ABB Sulzer GA 0-104.430.195 Reference surface Measurement surface Length 5.97 7.97
Dimensions Width 2.38 4.38 Height 4.51 5.51

Area 89.5 171.0 10 lg A 19.5 22.3
Sound Pressure No load Lp On load Lp
Sound Power Lw
88
90
112.5
GEARBOX Sulzer GA 0-104.430.195 Reference surface Measurement surface Length 1.84 3.84

Area 13.9 52.3 10 lg A 11.4 17.2
Sound Pressure Lp
Sound Power Lw
90
107
PUMP Sulzer GA 0-104.430.195 Reference surface Measurement surface Length 2.08 4.08

Area 20.0 64.2 10 lg A 13.0 18.1
Sound Pressure Lp
Sound Power Lw
93
111
COMPLETE PUMP UNIT Dimensions Sulzer GA 0-104.430.195 Reference surface Measurement surface Units . Length 11.85 13.85 m Width 3.50 5.50 m Height 5.70 6.70 m

Area 216.5 335.5
2 m
Sound Pressure Lp
Sound Power Lw
10 lg A 23.4 25.3 dB re 1 m2 dB re 20 Pa
90
dB re 20 Pa
115.5
dB re 1 pW
DEFINITIONS
i Reference Surface: ii Measuring Surface:
- Imaginary box enclosing Noise Source - 1 m from Reference Surface
1 Calculation methods and procedures: ref. EEMUA 140 clause 3.2.2 (Large-source method) 2 Sound Pressure levels are mean values in 'free-field' conditions (i.e. no reverberation), with no extraneous background noise. NOTES: 3 These calculations assume the Motor noise increases by 2.5 dB "On load" 4 The noise levels of the Complete Pump Unit measured during a normal performance test may exceed these values for the following reasons: - reverberation in the test environment - extraneous background noise from the flow control valve, inlet and outlet pipes - noise radiated by the ungrouted baseplate
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!

INDUCTION MOTOR ( 250 hp and Above) APPLICABLE TO: Plant KCPF INQUIRY Plant No. PROPOSAL B36 PURCHASE AS BUILT Driven Equipment
CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS
#REF!
#REF! #REF!
ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D Purchaser's Data to be Supplied With Inquiry MOTOR DESIGN DATA BASIC DATA: Type of Motor: Volts: 13200 V General Purpose Phase: 1800 Hydrodynamic 3 Hertz: Min. % Overspeed: Antifriction N/A No C 20 Special Purpose 60 (HEAVY DUTY CHEMICAL AREA USE) 9700 kW Special 13000 hp %
THIS DRAWING AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED WITHIN HEREIN ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTION IN FULL OR PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THE DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
#REF!
#REF!
IM
Nameplate Rating:
Synchronous RPM: Bearing Type:
Per NEMA MG-1
Maximum Drive Equipment Vertical Thrust (Vertical Motors): Differential Protection Required: Yes
ANSI Class of Differential Current Transformer Required:
DESCRIPTION
SITE DATA:
REISSUE DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES
Area Classification:
Non-Hazardous Class: 1 T3 Group: II A Zone: 2
Hazardous (Classified)
ISSUED FOR PP (FW REV D1)
ISSUED FOR IFP (FW REV D2)
Temperature Class: Elevation: Motor Location: > 50 Ft Outdoors Indoors
Offshore
Non-Massive Foundation Description:
UNUSUAL CONDITIONS: Severe Corrosive Area Seismic Loading: External Forces and Moments Other
WIND BLOWN DUST AND RAIN (SALT LAIDEN AIR)
17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452
JO/EWO
#REF!
#REF!
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CONDITIONS: Max. S.C. KVA at Motor Bus

2 I t Let-Through Energy
07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
DATE
Min. S.C. KVA at Motor Bus Resistance Grounding System Ground Fault Amperes
X/R Ratio 400 1000 Other
REV NO.
00
01
STARTING: Full Voltage Variable Frequency Drive Unit Type Reduced Voltage % and Type REFER TECH. SPEC. BE-966101/ PARA 4.5.4
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
DATE PROJECT ENGINEER
VFD Details Attached (if motor purchased separately from drive unit.) Torques in excess of NEMA MG-1, if Required Loaded (100%) Partially Loaded YES % Provided % Other
DATE
CERTIFIED
Load Speed vs Torque Curve and Load wK 2 Voltage at Locked Rotor ( Min. % of Rated if Less Than 80%) Capability in Excess of Table s, if Required
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
MOUNTING: Horizontal Vertical Shaft Up Flange Mounted, NEMA Type PUMP SUPPLIER Soleplate Furnished By: Vertical Shaft Down
DATE
OPERATIONS
Foot Mounted Baseplate Furnished By
DATE
ENCLOSURE: TEFC TEAAC TEPV Explosion Proof TEAAC Tubes Other Copper Aluminium Alloy AISI 300 Series Hardware (Always required for severe corrosive area) Copper Alloy Stainless Steel Aluminium
EDSD VERIFICATION REVISION CERTIFICATION THIS INDICATES THAT REV NO CONTROL NUMBER OF THIS DRAWING IS COVERED, FOR ALL BY: APPROVAL/CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENT, BY DRAWING DATE: COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
Type of Protection Aex nA Eex p
DATA SHEET FOR INDUCTION MOTOR ( 250 hp and Above) B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ITEM N0. SERVICE
B36
SAUDI ARABIA JO/EWO-
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
9 of 36
04
KHURAIS CENTRAL PROCESSING FACILITY
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!

INDUCTION MOTOR ( 250 hp and Above) MOTOR DESIGN DATA (Continued)
#REF!
#REF!
ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
PMT
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
DRIVE SYSTEM: Direct Connected Gear Coupling Type:

FLEXIBLE DIAPHRAGM
Furnished By:
PUMP SUPPLIER
#REF!
#REF!
IM
Rotation Required By Driven Equipment When Facing Motor Opposite Drive End: Clockwise Driven Equipment Wk Other
2
Counterclockwise 5930 lb-Ft @ 1780 RPM
Reciprocating Compressor Load: Crank-Effort Diagram Curve No. Miscellaneous: Evaluation Factor (EF) $/kW Normal operating load; HP NA
DESCRIPTION
ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT BEARING TEMPERATURE DETECTORS:
Terminal Head Required Bearing Housing Temperature Indicators Required
Box Required 100 Ohm / Platinum, 3 wire double element
PARTIAL DISCHARGE SENSORS: Required Installation Location: Other Type / Manufacturer: Bus cupler Capacitors / Iris Power Canada Inside Main Terminal Box
LUBRICATION SYSTEM: Self Lube Pressure Lube Oil Mist
17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452
JO/EWO
Bearing Oil Rings for Coastdown Required

#REF! #REF!
Bearing Constant-Level Sight Feed Oilers Required; Special Seals Required for Gas Purge
Type Non-Conductive Seals Required Supplied By PUMP SUPPLIER
07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
DATE
Lube System Common with Driven Equipment:
REV NO.
00
01
MAIN TERMINAL BOX: Specific Box Location Required: Box Required to Oversized for Installation of Purchaser Equipment Purchaser Equipment to be Installed NONE Type Insulation
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
Main Supply Leads:
Conductor Size
On Line Motor Monitoring Sensors Required to be Installed: Type / Manufacturer
DATE
CERTIFIED
Phase Current Transformers for Local Ammeter Required: Accuracy Class Mounted / Installed By: Quantity Ratio
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
Voltage Transformers Required for Local Voltmeter: Accuracy Class Mounted / Installed By: Quantity Ratio
DATE
OPERATIONS
Provision for Main Supply Lead Termination: Universal Bushing Stud Other, Specify Seperable Connector per ANSI / IEEE-386
DATE
Terminal Box Space Heaters Required Provisions for Terminal Box Purging Required Silver-plated Bus Connections Required Other Main Conduit Box Requirements: SURGE CAPACITORS - SURGE ARRESTORS - BREATHERS/DRAIN HOLES - GROUND BUS Ground Bus Required
SPACE HEATERS:
(Mark all available voltages) 120 / 208V, 3ph. 240V, 1 ph. (RATED.VOLT) 277 / 480, 3 ph.
120V, 1ph (OPER.VOLT). 480V, 3 ph. Temperature Class:
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ITEM N0. SERVICE
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
10 of 36
04
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!

INDUCTION MOTOR ( 250 hp and Above) ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT (Continued)
#REF!
#REF!
ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
PMT
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
COUPLING: Taper Fit Manufacturer Supplied By: Cylindrical Fit Model Motor Manufacturer Coupling Supplied by: Data Sheet No. Driven Equipment Manufacturer Purchaser
PUMP SUPPLIER
#REF!
#REF!
IM
Idling Adaptor / Mass Moment Simulator Supplied By Coupling to be Used for Test: Contract Shop
PUMP OR MOTOR SUPPLIER None
PAINTING: Vendor's Standard Extra Coat at Shipment
Saudi Aramco Approved Protective Coating System APCS
MISCELLANEOUS:
DESCRIPTION
Epoxy Grout to be Used, Type Nameplate Material Stainless Steel Monel
Quantity of Special Tools and / or Special lifting Equipment Required Shaft Seal of Electrically Non-Conducting Material
Location of Auxilliary Junction Boxes Switches with Contacts Rated for DC Yes No
Data Required on Current Variation and Efficiency for Variable Torque Load Motor Manufacturer Review and Comment on Foundation Drawings Required Assembly Photgraphs Required per 6.2.4.5 External Forces on Motor Housing That May Affect Site Performance
Special Shipping Bearings Required per 4.4.3.9 Other / Comments
17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452
JO/EWO
#REF!
#REF!
MOTORS SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL JACKSCREWS.

07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
DATE
SUPPLIER SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL (1/8 IN THICK) STAINLESS STEEL SHIM PACKS BETWEEN MOTOR FEET AND MOUNTING PLATE
REV NO.
00
01
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
NOTES:
DATE
CERTIFIED
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
DATE
OPERATIONS
DATE
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ITEM N0. SERVICE
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
11 of 36
04
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!

INDUCTION MOTOR ( 250 hp and Above) REQUIRED ANALYSIS, SHOP INSPECTION AND TESTS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
Required Lateral Critical Speed Analysis by Design Review Meeting Torsional Analysis by Shop Inspection Data Preservation Radiographic Test; Ultrasonic Test; Magnetic Particle Test; Liquid Penetrant Test; Hardness Test; Parts: Parts: FORGED COMPONENTS Parts: SHAFT WELDS Parts: Parts: By Motor Vendor
Witnessed
Observed
#REF!
#REF!
IM
Optional ASTM Tests to be Proposed By Vendor
Check Balance with Half Coupling Inspection for Cleanliness per API
NA
Stator Inspection Prior to VPI Residual Unbalance Test (on one motor)
Routine Test Polarization Test Vibration Recording Stator Core Test Special Surge Test on Sample Coils Sealed Winding Conformance Test DC High-Potential Test Complete Test Rated Rotor Temperature Test if no Complete Test Volts 1000V 2500V 5000V
Bearing Inspection at Completion of Test Unbalance Response Test (on one motor)
DATE
Bearing Housing Natural Frequency Test Certified Data Prior to Shipment Other
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER

Note: Not all Purchaser data items are applicable for all orders. Items which are not applicable should be marked "N/A" by the purchaser. Purchaser should mark with an asterisk (*) items which are to be as specified by the driven equipment manufacturer. Items marked with an asterisk (*) shall be filled in by the vendor and
DATE
CERTIFIED
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
returned with the proposal.
DATE
OPERATIONS PLEASE REFER TO MATERIAL REQUISITION BE-886101 APPENDIX 7 FOR QUANTITY/CLARIFICATIONS FOR MOTOR TESTING REQUIREMENTS.
DATE
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ITEM N0. SERVICE
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
12 of 36
04
DESCRIPTION

17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452
JO/EWO
#REF!
07.Nov.05

00
REV NO.
01
17.Jan.06
#REF!
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!

INDUCTION MOTOR ( 250 hp and Above) VENDOR DATA TO BE SUPPLIED WITH PROPOSAL:
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
Vendor Vendor Job Reference
ABB LDS 0.5.1530
Purchased by Proposal No.
SULZER
Ultimate User Contract No.
SAUDI ARAMCO
#REF!
#REF!
IM
Kilowatts (Horsepower) Frame No. AMC 900
9700 (13000) Enclosure Type
Full Load Speed (RPM) TEAAC
1787
LOCKED ROTOR: Amps at Rated Voltage 2304 Amps at 80% Voltage 1810 Power Factor 0.14
Locked Rotor Withstand Time, Cold at: 70% Voltage 90% Voltage Locked Rotor Withstand Time, Hot at: sec sec 80% Voltage 100% Voltage 15 6 sec sec
70% Voltage 90% Voltage
sec sec 773.9
80% Voltage 100% Voltage
15 6
sec sec
Motor Rotor Wk
TORQUE: Full Load Torque (FLT) Pull Up Torque 46 51.8 Ft-lb %FLT Locked Rotor Torque Breakdown Torque 46 227 %FLT %FLT
Speed Torque Curve No. Estimated Starting Time at
3BSY200026-ETX 80%+100 % Voltage
Speed-Current Curve No. Curve No.
3BSY200026-ETX 3BSY200026-ETX
DESIGN DATA AT 1.0 SERVICE FACTOR AND RATED VOLTAGE: No Load Current 66.6 Amps 25% 137 0.84 91.6 88.9 4 LOBE SLEEVE 50% 242 0.92 95 93.4 75% 355 0.93 95.8 94.9 Full 475 0.92 96 95.1 Normal Operating
Load Amperes
DATE
Power Factor Nominal Efficiency Guaranteed Efficiency Bearing Type
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER UTILITY REQUIREMENTS: Bearing Oil: Oil Type ISO VG 46 Quantity 10 40 m3 USGPM BTU/MIN USGPM Pressure kW per brg. Pressure psig psig
Heat Load to be Removed Ventilation Air Requirements: Quantity
DATE
CERTIFIED
(Pressurization) INFORMATION FOR RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR LOAD: Crank-Effort Diagram Curve No. Max. Current Pulsations %Full Load
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
Calculated Efficiency Based on Current-Pulsation Operating Conditions:
WEIGHTS / DIMENSIONS
DATE
OPERATIONS
Net Weight Max. Erection Weight Air Gap
79800
lb lb in
Rotor Weight Length
23710 Ft
lb Width
Shipping Weight Ft Height
lb Ft
DATE
OTHER REQUIRED INFORMATION: Max. Sound PressureLevel at 3 Ft 85 dB(A) no load
When Rotor Dynamic Analysis is Specified, List Foundation Data Required from Purchaser:
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ITEM N0. SERVICE
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
13 of 36
04
DESCRIPTION

07.Nov.05
17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452
JO/EWO
#REF! 00
REV NO.
01
17.Jan.06
#REF!
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!

INDUCTION MOTOR ( 250 hp and Above) VENDOR DATA TO BE SUPPLIED WITH PROPOSAL: Comments:
#REF!
#REF! #REF! #REF!
ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
#REF!
IM
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
DATA TO BE SUPPLIED BY VENDOR AFTER RECEIPT OF ORDER: As Designed As Built
GENERAL INFORMATION
Vendor Vendor Job Reference Site Model
ABB
Purchased by Proposal No. Service Serial No.
Sulzer
Ultimate User Contract No. Equipment No.
SAUDI ARAMCO
KHURAIS
CRUDE SHIPPING PUMP
B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D
MOTOR DATA
Rating Data at 1.0 Service Factor: Nameplate Power 9700 (13000) 1787 kW (HP) RPM Voltage Enclosure Type 13200 Phase 3 Frame Size Hertz 60
Full Load Speed
Rotation When Facing Motor Opposite Drive End: Clockwise Thermal Capacity Curve Numbers Counterclockwise 3BSY200026-ETX Bi-Directional
17.Nov.05 B1=10=03452 REISSUE
INSULATION SYSTEM: Class F Temperature Rise 70

o
Above
50
ambient at 1.0 SF
JO/EWO
INDUCTION MOTOR EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT DATA:

#REF! #REF!
Locked Rotor at Rated Voltage: Stator R 0.00335 0.00131 Stator X Rotor X 0.0742 0.0829 Magn X Magn R 7.01 340.9
DATE
Rotor R
Rated Load at Rated Voltage: Stator R Rotor R 0.00335 0.007114 0,0744 0,249 120 micro F Stator X Rotor X ohm @ 0.1336 0.1111 20
Degree C.
REV NO.
00
01
Magn X Magn R
7.01 340.9
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
Phase-to-Phase Resistance Subtransient Reactance X" d
Total Winding Capacitance to Ground
RESIDUAL VOLTAGE OPEN-CIRCUIT TIME CONSTANT:
DATE
CERTIFIED
Motor Only: Motor Rotor
2.6
seconds 1446 kgm2
Motor With Surge Capacitors:
seconds
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
TORQUE: Full Load Torque (FLT) Pull Up Torque 46 51.8 kNm %FLT Locked Rotor Torque Breakdown Torque 46 227 %FLT %FLT
DATE
OPERATIONS MOTOR PERFORMANCE CURVES SUPPLIED: Speed Torque Curve No. 3BSY200026-ETX 3BSY200026-ETX 100-80 % Voltage 3BSY200026-ETX Speed-Current Curve No. Speed-Power Curve No. Curve No. 3BSY200026-ETX 3BSY200026-ETX 3BSY200026-ETX
DATE
Speed-Time Curve No. Estimated Starting Time at
Starting Performance Thermal Limit Curve No. Test Report Reference No.
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ITEM N0. SERVICE
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
14 of 36
04
DESCRIPTION
DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES
07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!

INDUCTION MOTOR ( 250 hp and Above) MOTOR DATA (continued) BEARING INFORMATION: Coupling End Bearing: Outboard End Bearing: Bore Length Design Clearance with Shaft Bearing Loading Thrust Bearing Top (Bottom): Bearing Lubrication: Pressure / Flood Lubrication: Self Oil psig Manufacturer's Type Pressure USGPM Flood @ Part No. Other psig BTU/MIN Losses Manufacturer's Type Manufacturer's Type in Bore Diameter in Min. in Min. in Max. Part No. Part No. Bore Diameter in Max.
#REF! #REF! #REF!
ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
IM
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
WEIGHTS / DIMENSIONS: Net Weight Max. Erection Weight 7960 lb lb Class: 86 Rotor Weight 23700 lb Shipping Weight lb Division: dB(A) lb
Max. Maintenance Weight Group:
DESCRIPTION
Area Classification:
REISSUED DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES
Maximum Sound Pressure Level at 3 Ft
ACCESSORIES
WINDING TEMPERATURE DETECTORS: Number 2 PER PHASE Resistance Rating, Ohm / Material
o
100 OHM / PLATINUM RTD'S PER 17-SAMSS-502

o
Recommended Alarm Setting Thermal Temperature Switch Contacts: Normally Open, Closing Setting Normally Closed, Opening Setting
Recommended Trip Setting
o o
C C
BEARING TEMPERATURE DETECTORS: Resistance Rating, Ohm / Material

100 OHM / PLATINUM RTD'S PER 17-SAMSS-502
17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452
JO/EWO
#REF!
#REF!
Recommended Alarm Setting
90
Recommended Trip Setting
100
07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
DATE
VIBRATION DETECTOR: Non-Contacting Probes: Probe Type
(REFER TO 17-SAMSS-502 FOR SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS) Provision Only Model

Bentley Nevada or Equal
Installed
No. per Bearing
TWO
REV NO.
00
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
01
Oscillator / Demodulator Model
Bearing Housing Seismic Detectors: Sensor Type
Provision Only Model

Bentley Nevada or Equal
Installed Output Transducer Model
No. per Bearing Vibration Switch: Switch Type
Location ( Orientation; H,V,A) Manual Reset Electrical Reset Model
DATE
CERTIFIED SPACE HEATERS: (OPERATING CONDITIONS) Motor Enclosure: (NOMINAL)
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
Voltage
120
1 Phase
3 Phase
Wattage
kW
Max. Surface Temp.
Main Terminal Enclosure: Voltage 120 V 1 Phase 3 Phase Wattage kW Max. Surface Temp.
o
DATE
OPERATIONS CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: Differential: Class Class Ratio Ratio Number Mounted Number Mounted
DATE
Phase:
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS: Connection Fuse Type Class Class Ratio Ratio Number Mounted Number Mounted
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ITEM N0. SERVICE
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
15 of 36
04
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!

INDUCTION MOTOR ( 250 hp and Above) MOTOR DATA (continued) SURGE PROTECTION Surge Arrestor Type: Capacitor Type: Voltage Capacitance V mF
#REF!
#REF! #REF! #REF!
ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
#REF!
IM
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
OTHER INFORMATION
Drawing References Wiring Diagram
mm
Accessories Outline
WINDING / ROTOR REPAIR DATA: All Dimension are:
COIL INFORMATION:
DESCRIPTION
Total Copper Weight
lb
Copper Strand Size Number of Strands per Coil Turn Number of Turns per Coil
REISSUED DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES
Strand Insulation Turn Insulation Coil Ground Wall Insulation
Finished Coil Dimension in Slot Region WxHxL ( Also Give Tolerances)
Total Number of Stator Slots Winding Connection Special End-Turn Bracing Slot Filler Description / Thickness: Side Special End-Turn Bracing Other Information Top
Winding Throw
Between Top/Bottom Coils
17.Nov.05 B!-10-03452
JO/EWO
#REF!
#REF!
ROTOR / ROTOR BAR INFORMATION:

07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
DATE
Number of Rotor Bars Cross-section Dimension (Also Give Tolerances) Short Circuit End-Ring Alloy Rough Forging or Cast Dimensions: Non-Magnetic Retaining Ring Alloy Shaft Material
Bar Alloy
Length
REV NO.
00
01
OD
ID
Thickness
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
Grade of Castings
OTHER INFORMATION: MOTOR ACCESSORIES:
DATE
CERTIFIED
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
DATE
OPERATIONS
DATE
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ITEM N0. SERVICE
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
16 of 36
04
Saudi Aramco 2616-ENG(03/99)

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

17-SAMSS-503, SEVERE DUTY TOTALLY ENCLOSED SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS APPLICABLE TO: Plant: Inquiry Proposal Plant No. B36 Purchase Driven Equipment: As Built Lube Oil Pumps
PMT
SAS
SAS PW
ENG'G CERT.
PW
PW
SAS AV
BUYERs Data to Be Supplied With Inquiry:

AV AV
BASIC DATA Volts: Full Load RPM: Clockwise Motor Thrust Loads: Type Load: NEMA Torque Design: None Direct Coupled B (normal) 460 Phase: 3 Hertz: 60 Nameplate: kW hp Speed Range for Variable Speed Drive: Counter-Clockwise Other Belt Driven Other Other (specify) SITE DATA Bi-Directional
Rotation When Facing Motor Opposite Drive End:
14.Nov.05 BI-10-03452 RE ISSUED DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES
Area Classification: Hazardous (Classified)

07.Dec.05 BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR PP ( FW REV D1 )
Non-Hazardous Class: 1 Group: T3 ft STARTING 1419 IIA C Zone: 2 Ignition Temperature:
Elevation (Specify if Above 3000 ft.):
Full Voltage
Reduced Voltage % and Type Type
Variable Frequency Drive Unit
VFD Details Attached (If motor purchased separately from drive unit.) MOUNTING Horizontal Foot Mounted Vertical Shaft Up Flange Mounted, NEMA Type ENCLOSURE TEFC TENV Explosion Proof in. Space Heaters Space Heater Required; Operating Voltage: 120 V, 1 ph C Separate Heater Terminal Box Other Voltage Heater Leads: NOTE: SPACE HEATER IS REQUIRED FOR THE MOTORS RATED 75kW AND ABOVE Max. Surface Temp. at Operating Volts Main Terminal Box Other IP 56 Vertical Shaft Down
REV NO.
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
DATE PROJECT ENGINEER DATE

CERTIFIED
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
DATE
OPERATIONS
DATE
EDSD VERIFICATION THIS INDICATES THAT REV NO OF THIS DRAWING IS COVERED, FOR CONTROL NUMBER ALL APPROVAL/CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENT, BY DRAWING BY: COMPLETION CERTIFICATE (DCC) NO. DATE:
REVISION CERTIFICATION
00
Main Terminal Box Conduit Hub Size:
DATA SHEET FOR LOW VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTOR ITEM N0. SERVICE B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
30 of 36
04
DESCRIPTION DATE JO/EWO
21.Sep.05 BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR COMMENTS / RFQ

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

17-SAMSS-503, SEVERE DUTY TOTALLY ENCLOSED SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
PMT
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
SAS PW
PW
PW
SUPPLIER Data:
GENERAL INFORMATION
AV
AV
AV
Manufacturer
Model
Serial No.
MOTOR DATA
Rating Data at 1.0 Service Factor: Nameplate Power Full Load Speed Clockwise
DESCRIPTION
kW (hp) RPM
Voltage
460
Phase
Hertz Frame Size Bi-Directional
60
Enclosure Type Counter-Clockwise
Torque:
Speed-Torque Curve No.
Speed-Current Curve No. Design Data at 1.0 Service Factor and Rated Voltage
No Load Current Load Amperes Power Factor Nominal Efficiency Guaranteed Efficiency Locked Rotor Amps at Rated Voltage
Amps 25% 50% 75% Full
JO/EWO
Insulation System Class F Temperature Rise 70 C above 50 C ambient at 1.0 SF
DATE
Bearing Information Coupling End Bearing: Outboard End Bearing: Certification: Class Manufacturers Type Manufacturers Type Group Zone Weights/Dimensions Net Weight lb Rotor Weight lb Space Heaters: (Operating Conditions) Voltage V Wattage kW hp Max. Surface Temp. C Part No. Part No. Agency
REV NO.
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER

CERTIFIED
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
00
SUPPLIER MUST COMPLETE THIS MOTOR DATA SHEET FOR ALL PROPOSED ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVERS.
DATE
OPERATIONS
DATE
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
31 of 36
04

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

17-SAMSS-503, SEVERE DUTY TOTALLY ENCLOSED SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS APPLICABLE TO: Plant: Inquiry Proposal Plant No. B36 Purchase Driven Equipment: As Built Lube Oil Cooler Fan
PMT
SAS
SAS PW
ENG'G CERT.
PW
PW
SAS AV
BUYERs Data to Be Supplied With Inquiry:

AV AV
BASIC DATA Volts: Full Load RPM: Clockwise Motor Thrust Loads: Type Load: NEMA Torque Design: None Direct Coupled B (normal) 460 Phase: 3 Hertz: 60 Nameplate: HOLD kW hp Speed Range for Variable Speed Drive: Counter-Clockwise Other Belt Driven Other Other (specify) SITE DATA Bi-Directional
Area Classification: Hazardous (Classified)

Non-Hazardous Class: 1 Group: T3 ft STARTING IIA C Zone: 2 Ignition Temperature:
Elevation (Specify if Above 3000 ft.):
Full Voltage
Reduced Voltage % and Type Type
Variable Frequency Drive Unit
VFD Details Attached (If motor purchased separately from drive unit.) MOUNTING Horizontal Foot Mounted Vertical Shaft Up Flange Mounted, NEMA Type ENCLOSURE TEFC TENV Explosion Proof in. Space Heaters Space Heater Required; Operating Voltage: 120 V, 1 ph C Separate Heater Terminal Box Other Voltage Heater Leads: NOTE: SPACE HEATER IS REQUIRED FOR THE MOTORS RATED 75kW AND ABOVE Max. Surface Temp. at Operating Volts Main Terminal Box Other IP 56 Vertical Shaft Down
REV NO.
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER

CERTIFIED
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
DATE
OPERATIONS
DATE
00
Main Terminal Box Conduit Hub Size:
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
33 of 36
04
DESCRIPTION DATE JO/EWO

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

PMT
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
SAS PW
PW
PW
SUPPLIER Data:
GENERAL INFORMATION
AV
AV
AV
Manufacturer
Model
Serial No.
MOTOR DATA
Rating Data at 1.0 Service Factor: Nameplate Power Full Load Speed Clockwise
DESCRIPTION
kW (hp) RPM
Voltage
460
Phase
60
Torque:
No Load Current Load Amperes Power Factor Nominal Efficiency Guaranteed Efficiency Locked Rotor Amps at Rated Voltage
Amps 25% 50% 75% Full
JO/EWO
Insulation System Class F Temperature Rise 70 C above 50 C ambient at 1.0 SF
DATE
Bearing Information Coupling End Bearing: Outboard End Bearing: Certification: Class Manufacturers Type Manufacturers Type Group Zone Weights/Dimensions Net Weight lb Rotor Weight lb Space Heaters: (Operating Conditions) Voltage V Wattage kW hp Max. Surface Temp. C Part No. Part No. Agency
REV NO.
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER

CERTIFIED
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
00
DATE
OPERATIONS
DATE
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
34 of 36
04

OPRNS #REF! #REF! #REF!

COUPLING Note INDICATES INFORMATION TO COMPLETED BY BUYER INDICATES INFORMATION TO BE COMPLETED BY MANUFACTURER Applicable to Service Proposals Purchase As built Operating Spare DRIVER TYPE ELECTRIC MOTOR MANUFACTURER ABB TAG NO. FLEX DISK BIBBY TRANSMISSIONS MODEL 8HSU 9109 SHT1 OPERATING CONDITIONS SIZE 8HSU-30-305-56 MODEL AMC 900 M4A
#REF!
#REF!
ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
PMT
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
Item Nos.
CRUDE SHIPPING PUMP MOTOR TO GEARBOX
#REF!
#REF!
IM
SERIAL TYPE. COUPLING TYPE MANUFACTURER ASSEMBLY DRAWING NO.
DESCRIPTION
POWER TRANSMITTED (hp): NORMAL

17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452 REISSUED DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES
13000 NORMAL 38206
MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS 1787 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS
13000 TRIP
SPEED (RPM): MINIMUM ALLOWABLE TORQUE (Ft-lb):

ISSUED FOR PP (FW REV D1) ISSUED FOR IFP (FW REV D2)
MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS
FREQUENCY OF TRANSIENTS (EVENTS/TIME) (2.1.1) ADDITIONAL ANF EXCITING FREQUENCY (2.3.4.C) MINIMUM REQUIRED EXPERIENCE FACTOR, SF (2.1.1)
o AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( F) MAXIMUM
ACTUAL SF MINIMUM
1.61 SAND STORMS
ENVIRONMENT (2.6.5) (2.1.8)
DUST
HYDROGEN SULFIDE
COUPLING DATA
SHAFT SEPERATION AT OPERATING TEMP. (in B.S.F.) MOTOR ROTOR FLOAT (in.) MARINE TYPE REQUIRED (2.2.2) REQUIRED MISALIGNMENT (2.1.2) STEADY STATE: ANGULAR (DEG.) ANGULAR (DEG.) 0.75 PARALLEL OFFSET (in) PARALLEL OFFSET (in) AXIAL (in) AXIAL (in) TRANSIENT: 18 THERMAL GROWTH (in.) (2.2.3) FROM
o
F.AMBIENT
LIMITED END FLOT (in.)
ELECTRICALLY INSULATED (2.1.12)
JO/EWO
#REF!
07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
DATE
#REF!
FLEX-HUB TYPE REQIURED (2.2.2)
DYNAMIC BALANCE (2.5.2.1)
COMPONENT BALANCE & ASSEMBLY CHECK BALANCE (2.5.2.1)(2.5.2.3) REPEATABILITY TEST AFTER ASSEMBLY BALANCE (2.5.2.5) 1172 175 0.75 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS TORQUE (Ft-lb) (5.2.5.6c) LUBRICATED PARALLEL OFFSET (in) DRIVER END DRIVER END DRY see curves AXIAL (in) see curves AXIAL (in) DRIVEN UNIT END DRIVEN UNIT END 28362 COMPRESSION PRESTRETCH see curves see curves 61586
REV NO.
00
01
ASSEMBLY BALANCE (2.5.2.4) DESIGN RATING (hp/100 RPM) (2.1.1) BOLTING TORQUE (Ft-lb) (2.1.11.5)
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
RESIDUAL UNBALANCE CHECK OF COMPONENTS (2.5.2.2)

CERTIFIED
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE MISALIGNMENT (5.2.5.6a) STEADY STATE: TRANSIENT: ANGULAR (DEG.) ANGULAR (DEG.) see curves PARALLEL OFFSET (in)
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE RESIDUAL UNBALANCE (lb-in) MAXIMUM ACTUAL RESIDUAL UNBALANCE (lb-in) PERSONAL STIFFNESS (lb-in/RAD) (5.2.5.2b) 1.403 e+008 FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT COUPLING INITIAL DEFLECTION (in.)
2 WR2 (lb-in ) (5.2.5.2b)
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT COUPLING CALCULATED AXIAL NATURAL FREQUENCY TEST OF ANF (4.4.1) ACTUAL ANF
DATE
OPERATIONS
REQUIRED CURVES
DATE
GEAR COUPLING (5.2.4.1) AXIAL FORCE VS TORQUE BENDING MOMENT VS ANGULAR MISALIGNMENT
FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT COUPLING (5.2.4.2) AXIAL FORCE VS AXIAL DEFLECTION BENDING MOMENT VS AXIAL DEFLECTION WINDAGE LOSS VS COUPLING SPEED
DATA SHEET FOR COUPLING ITEM N0. SERVICE B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
17 of 36
04

OPRNS #REF! #REF! #REF!

COUPLING Note INDICATES INFORMATION TO COMPLETED BY BUYER INDICATES INFORMATION TO BE COMPLETED BY MANUFACTURER MATERIALS (2.6) DRIVE END MATERIALS HUB/FLANGE SPACER SLEEVE FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT GUARD BOLTS NUTS AISI 301 BS970B817M40T S 99 GR 12 VENDOR STANDARD DRIVE END ACTUAL DRIVE END ACTUAL DRIVEN END ACTUAL DRIVEN END ACTUAL AISI 301 BS970B817M40T S 99 GR 12 BS970B817M40T BS970B817M40T DRIVEN END MATERIALS BS970B817M40T
#REF!
#REF! #REF! #REF!
ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
#REF!
IM
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
BS970B817M40T
FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT PROTECTIVE COATING (2.6.4)

DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL AND WELD HARDNESS TESTS REQUIRED (4.3.1.3) INTERNAL TEETH HARDNESS (ROCKWELL C) (2.2.6)
17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452 REISSUED DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES
EXTERNAL TEETH HARDNESS (ROCKWELL C) (2.2.6)
COUPLING HUB MACHINING

ISSUED FOR PP (FW REV D1) ISSUED FOR IFP (FW REV D2)
DRIVE END TYPE (INTEGRAL, CYLINDRICAL TAPER (2.1.4) (2.1.8.1) KEYED OR HYDRAULICALLY FITTED (2.1.8.1) TAPER (1 DEG. IA. 1/2 in. PER Ft. 1/4 in. PER Ft)
2.1.9.1.1) (2.1.9.1.2) (2.1.9.1.3)
DRIVEN END CYLINCRICAL KEYED
CYLINDRICAL KEYED
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS AND NUMBER 2.1.9.2) NOMINAL BORE DIAMETER INTERFERENCE FIT (in.) MAX/MIN (2.1.8.1) PULLER HOLES BALANCING HOLES (2.5.3)
1 260 mm INCLUDED INCLUDED
JO/EWO
#REF! 07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
DATE
#REF!
COUPLING GUARD (APPENDIX E) COORDINATOR (E.2.1) FLANGED CYLINDRICAL (E.4.1) AIR TIGHT (E.4.7.1) SPARK RESISTANT (E.2.9) PUMP SUPPLIER BASE MOUNT (E.3.2) OIL TIGHT (E.2.7) PURGE REQUIRED PURGE GAS PURGE CONNECTION SIZE & TYPE PURGE USGPM REQUIRED OIL MIST COOLING GAS COOLING CONTRACT GUARD TO BE USED DURING SHOP TEST (E.4.5) ADDITIONAL GUARD DETAILS (2.3.5)
REV NO.
00
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
01

CERTIFIED
TRANSPARENT WINDOW FOR EACH OIL SPRAY POINT (E.4.6.4) VENT COLLECTION FLANGED (E.4.3) AS PER API. RATING & FACING
ACCESSORIES
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
PRIME EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER TO FURNISH ONE SET OF HYDRAULIC INSTALLATION/REMOVAL TOOLING (TO INCLUDE PLUG AND RING CAGES (APPENDIX D) DRILL TEMPLATE FOR INTEGRAL FLANGED HUBS BY (2.1.5) COUPLING MANUFACTURER PURCHASER HAND PUMP (S), PRESSURE GAUGES (S), FITTING AND HOSE (S) BY (3.1) PURCHASER COUPLING MANUFACTURER PULLER BY COUPLING MANUFACTURER (3.4) MOMENT SIMULATOR (2.1.7.1) PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT OUTDOOR STORAGE FOR MORE THAN 3 MONTHS (4.5.2) EXPECTED STORAGE TIME
(4.5.3)
DATE
OPERATIONS
TWO-PIECE STOP RINGS BY COUPLING MANUFACTURER (3.3)
DATE
APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS API-671, SPECIAL PURPOSE COUPLINGS SAUDI ARAMCO INSPECTION FORM 175-130900, COUPLINGS SHAFT SPECIAL PURPOSE
6 months
(4.5.3)
SHIPPING
DOMESTIC EXPORT
STORAGE
INDOOR OUTDOOR
SEE COUPLING PURCHASE ORDER FOR PRESERVATION, BOXING AND SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS. REMARKS:
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
18 of 36
04

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

COUPLING Note INDICATES INFORMATION TO COMPLETED BY BUYER INDICATES INFORMATION TO BE COMPLETED BY MANUFACTURER Applicable to Service Proposals Purchase As built Operating Spare DRIVER TYPE GEARBOX MANUFACTURER BHS TAG NO. MODEL FD 48-3 FLEX DISK BIBBY MODEL 8 HS 9110 sht1 OPERATING CONDITIONS SIZE 8 HS 22-230 MODEL FD48-3
PMT
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
SAS
PW
PW
PW
Item Nos.
CRUDE SHIPPING PUMP GEARBOX TO PUMP
AV
AV
AV
SERIAL TYPE. GEARBOX MANUFACTURER BHS COUPLING TYPE MANUFACTURER ASSEMBLY DRAWING NO.
DESCRIPTION
POWER TRANSMITTED (hp): NORMAL

13000 NORMAL 17524
MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS 3895 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS
13000 TRIP
SPEED (RPM): MINIMUM ALLOWABLE TORQUE (Ft-lb):

MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS
FREQUENCY OF TRANSIENTS (EVENTS/TIME) (2.1.1) ADDITIONAL ANF EXCITING FREQUENCY (2.3.4.C) MINIMUM REQUIRED EXPERIENCE FACTOR, SF (2.1.1)
o AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( F) MAXIMUM
ACTUAL SF MINIMUM
2.25 SAND STORMS
ENVIRONMENT (2.6.5) (2.1.8)
DUST
HYDROGEN SULFIDE
COUPLING DATA
SHAFT SEPERATION AT OPERATING TEMP. (in B.S.F.) MOTOR ROTOR FLOAT (in.) MARINE TYPE REQUIRED (2.2.2) REQUIRED MISALIGNMENT (2.1.2) STEADY STATE: TRANSIENT: ANGULAR (DEG.) ANGULAR (DEG.) 0.75 PARALLEL OFFSET (in) PARALLEL OFFSET (in) AXIAL (in) AXIAL (in) 18 THERMAL GROWTH (in.) (2.2.3) FROM
o
F.AMBIENT
LIMITED END FLOT (in.)
ELECTRICALLY INSULATED (2.1.12)
DATE
JO/EWO
FLEX-HUB TYPE REQIURED (2.2.2)
DYNAMIC BALANCE (2.5.2.1)
COMPONENT BALANCE & ASSEMBLY CHECK BALANCE (2.5.2.1)(2.5.2.3) REPEATABILITY TEST AFTER ASSEMBLY BALANCE (2.5.2.5) 417.76 580 0.75 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS TORQUE (Ft-lb) (5.2.5.6c) LUBRICATED PARALLEL OFFSET (in) DRIVER END DRIVER END 3.8 e+007 DRY see curves AXIAL (in) see curves AXIAL (in) DRIVEN UNIT END DRIVEN UNIT END 7350.33 COMPRESSION PRESTRETCH see curves see curves 39386
REV NO.
00
ASSEMBLY BALANCE (2.5.2.4) DESIGN RATING (hp/100 RPM) (2.1.1) BOLTING TORQUE (Ft-lb) (2.1.11.5)
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
RESIDUAL UNBALANCE CHECK OF COMPONENTS (2.5.2.2)

CERTIFIED
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE MISALIGNMENT (5.2.5.6a) STEADY STATE: TRANSIENT: ANGULAR (DEG.) ANGULAR (DEG.) see curves PARALLEL OFFSET (in)
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE RESIDUAL UNBALANCE (lb-in) MAXIMUM ACTUAL RESIDUAL UNBALANCE (lb-in) PERSONAL STIFFNESS (lb-in/RAD) (5.2.5.2b) FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT COUPLING INITIAL DEFLECTION (in.)
2 WR2 (lb-in ) (5.2.5.2b)
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT COUPLING CALCULATED AXIAL NATURAL FREQUENCY TEST OF ANF (4.4.1) ACTUAL ANF
DATE
OPERATIONS
REQUIRED CURVES
DATE
GEAR COUPLING (5.2.4.1) AXIAL FORCE VS TORQUE BENDING MOMENT VS ANGULAR MISALIGNMENT
FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT COUPLING (5.2.4.2) AXIAL FORCE VS AXIAL DEFLECTION BENDING MOMENT VS AXIAL DEFLECTION WINDAGE LOSS VS COUPLING SPEED
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
22 of 36
04

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

COUPLING Note INDICATES INFORMATION TO COMPLETED BY BUYER INDICATES INFORMATION TO BE COMPLETED BY MANUFACTURER MATERIALS (2.6) DRIVE END MATERIALS HUB/FLANGE SPACER SLEEVE FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT GUARD BOLTS NUTS AISI 301 BS970 817 M 40 T S 99 GR 12 VENDOR STANDARD DRIVE END ACTUAL DRIVE END ACTUAL DRIVEN END ACTUAL DRIVEN END ACTUAL AISI 301 BS970 817 M 40 T S 99 GR 12 BS970 817 M 40 T BS970 817 M 40 T DRIVEN END MATERIALS BS970 817 M 40 T
PMT
SAS
SAS PW AV
ENG'G CERT.
PW
AV
AV
PW
SAS
BS970 817 M 40 T
FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT PROTECTIVE COATING (2.6.4)

DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL AND WELD HARDNESS TESTS REQUIRED (4.3.1.3) INTERNAL TEETH HARDNESS (ROCKWELL C) (2.2.6)
EXTERNAL TEETH HARDNESS (ROCKWELL C) (2.2.6)
COUPLING HUB MACHINING

DRIVE END TYPE (INTEGRAL, CYLINDRICAL TAPER (2.1.4) (2.1.8.1) KEYED OR HYDRAULICALLY FITTED (2.1.8.1) TAPER (1 DEG. IA. 1/2 in. PER Ft. 1/4 in. PER Ft)
2.1.9.1.1) (2.1.9.1.2) (2.1.9.1.3)
DRIVEN END TAPER HYDRAULIC
CYLINDRICAL KEYED
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS AND NUMBER 2.1.9.2) NOMINAL BORE DIAMETER INTERFERENCE FIT (in.) MAX/MIN (2.1.8.1) PULLER HOLES BALANCING HOLES (2.5.3)
JO/EWO
N/A INCLUDED
DATE
COUPLING GUARD (APPENDIX E) COORDINATOR (E.2.1) FLANGED CYLINDRICAL (E.4.1) AIR TIGHT (E.4.7.1) SPARK RESISTANT (E.2.9) TRANSPARENT WINDOW FOR EACH OIL SPRAY POINT (E.4.6.4) VENT COLLECTION FLANGED (E.4.3) AS PER API. RATING & FACING ACCESSORIES PUMP SUPPLIER BASE MOUNT (E.3.2) OIL TIGHT (E.2.7) PURGE REQUIRED PURGE GAS PURGE CONNECTION SIZE & TYPE PURGE USGPM REQUIRED OIL MIST COOLING GAS COOLING CONTRACT GUARD TO BE USED DURING SHOP TEST (E.4.5) ADDITIONAL GUARD DETAILS (2.3.5)
REV NO.
00
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
GBU
DATE 30-May-02 PROJECT ENGINEER DATE

CERTIFIED
00
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
PRIME EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER TO FURNISH ONE SET OF HYDRAULIC INSTALLATION/REMOVAL TOOLING (TO INCLUDE PLUG AND RING CAGES (APPENDIX D) DRILL TEMPLATE FOR INTEGRAL FLANGED HUBS BY (2.1.5) COUPLING MANUFACTURER PURCHASER HAND PUMP (S), PRESSURE GAUGES (S), FITTING AND HOSE (S) BY (3.1) PURCHASER COUPLING MANUFACTURER PULLER BY COUPLING MANUFACTURER (3.4) MOMENT SIMULATOR (2.1.7.1) PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT OUTDOOR STORAGE FOR MORE THAN 3 MONTHS (4.5.2) EXPECTED STORAGE TIME
(4.5.3)
DATE
OPERATIONS
TWO-PIECE STOP RINGS BY COUPLING MANUFACTURER (3.3)
DATE
APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS API-671, SPECIAL PURPOSE COUPLINGS SAUDI ARAMCO INSPECTION FORM 175-130900, COUPLINGS SHAFT SPECIAL PURPOSE
6 months
(4.5.3)
SHIPPING
DOMESTIC EXPORT
STORAGE
INDOOR OUTDOOR
SEE COUPLING PURCHASE ORDER FOR PRESERVATION, BOXING AND SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS. REMARKS: ONE SET OF COUPLING PUMP HUB FITTING TOOLS TO BE SUPPLIED. BY SULZER
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
23 of 36
04
Aramco - Khurais Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets B36-G-0002A/B/C/D

Saudi Aramco 8020-314-ENG (05/2002)
PMT OPRNS
Instrument Data Sheet SO : 9901-48330

INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET
1 INSTRUMENT TAG NUMBER 2 TYPE OF INSTRUMENT SERVICE GENERAL DATA 3 4 P & ID NUMBER | SH NO. 5 MANUFACTURER 6 MODEL NUMBER TYPE / MODEL NO. 7 8 MATERIAL SOURCE REQUISITION NO. SAMS STOCK NO. Class 1 , Division1 Transmitter Housing IP66 NACE MR-01-75 kPa(ga) (PSIG) Atmospheric 63C (145F) Atmospheric 63C (145F) E1-104.430.193 / Sheet 1 Magnetrol Note 1) XMTR PNEUMATIC SWITCH ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER SMART
LEVEL INSTRUMENTS
B36-LIT-5600A & B36-LIT-5601A Guided Wave Radar Level Transmitter Seal leakage detection.
THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
ENGG CERT
DESCRI PTI ON
9 ELECTRICAL AREA CLASSIFICATION 10 ENCLOSURE: NEMA OR IEC NO. 11 NACE MR-01-75 OR OTHER SEVERE SERVICE SERVICE 12 PRES: OPER | MAX 13 TEMP: OPER | MAX. 14 UPPER FLUID 15 LOWER FLUID 16 REL. DENSITY @ OPER. TEMP UPPER | LOWER 17 DISTANCE BETWEEN CONNECTIONS BODY / CAGE 18 TYPE: INTERNAL | EXTERNAL 19 BODY | CAGE MATERIAL | RATING 20 CONN. SIZE UPPER | LOWER 21 CONN. TYPE UPPER | LOWER 22 CONN. ORIENTATION UPPER | LOWER 23 VENT SIZE | DRAIN SIZE 24 ROTATABLE HEAD YES | NO 25 CALIBRATED RANGE DISPLACER 26 DISPLACER DIA. AND LENGTH 27 EXTENSION LENGTH 28 DISPLACER MATERIAL | RATING 29 CONNECTION SIZE | RATING | LOCATION 30 TORQUE TUBE MATERIAL 31 COOLING FINS REQ'D 32 OTHER WETTED PARTS MATERIAL 33 34 OUTPUT RANGE | ON LEVEL INCR. OUTPUT WILL mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) in NPT mm (in)
I SSUED FOR APPROVAL
C (F)
617mm
JO/ EWO
316/316L SS 1" 600lb RF Horizontal

3 4
1" 600lb RF Vertical

3 4
16- 11- 07
DATE
/"
0 to 11.5"
/"
REV NO.
00
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER C.W. 16-11-07 DATE: PROJECT ENGINEER B.V. DATE: CERTIFIED 16-11-07
600mm insertion length probe
316/316L SS with ceramic spacers
TORQUE TUBE
4-20mA 24VDC in NPT n/a n/a 1/2" n/a
TRANSMITTER
SW
35 PWR. SUPPLY | OUTPUT LOAD 36 AIR SUPPLY | OUTPUT CONNECTION NPT 37 CONDUIT CONN. SIZE 38 SWITCH CONTACT TYPE | RATING 39 SET POINT 40 SETPOINT LOCAL | REMOTE 41 % 42 PROP BAND RANGE
DATE: OPERATIONS
LOG
REM
CONTROL NUMBER
CONTROLLER
DATE:
43 RESET | RATE ACTION 44 ANTI-RESET WIND-UP 45 OUTPUT RANGE 46 ON LEVEL INCR. OUTPUT WILL 47 PWR SUPPLY | OUTPUT LOAD 48 AIR SUPPLY | OUTPUT CONN. in NPT
YES
NO
DATE:
INCR INTG
DECR SEPT
APPROVAL/CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS,
THIS INDICATES THAT REV. NO.___________
BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
OF THIS DRAWING IS COVERED, FOR ALL
BY DRAWING COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
49 AUTO - MANUAL PANEL NOTES: 1) Model no.: X705-510A-310 + X7MD-A45N-060 + XF2A-DC2K-030 (Safety Certified). 2) Set point 1 = 4.6" (Alarm), Set point 2 = 9.2" (Trip).
ISS FOR
Seal Leakage Detection Level Transmitter
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
1 of 4
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-314-0502.XLS
4104476138.xls
Sht 1 of 70
Sulzer Doc. No.: E4-104.476.138-Rev."0"

PMT OPRNS

LEVEL INSTRUMENTS
B36-LIT-5600B & B36-LIT-5601B Guided Wave Radar Level Transmitter Seal leakage detection.
ENGG CERT
DESCRI PTI ON
C (F)
617mm
JO/ EWO

3 4

3 4
16- 11- 07
DATE
/"
0 to 11.5"
/"
REV NO.
00
TORQUE TUBE
TRANSMITTER
SW
DATE: OPERATIONS
LOG
REM
CONTROL NUMBER
CONTROLLER
DATE:
YES
NO
DATE:
INCR INTG
DECR SEPT
BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
2 of 4
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-314-0502.XLS
4104476138.xls
Sht 2 of 70

PMT OPRNS

LEVEL INSTRUMENTS
B36-LIT-5600C & B36-LIT-5601C Guided Wave Radar Level Transmitter Seal leakage detection.
ENGG CERT
DESCRI PTI ON
C (F)
617mm
JO/ EWO

3 4

3 4
16- 11- 07
DATE
/"
0 to 11.5"
/"
REV NO.
00
TORQUE TUBE
TRANSMITTER
SW
DATE: OPERATIONS
LOG
REM
CONTROL NUMBER
CONTROLLER
DATE:
YES
NO
DATE:
INCR INTG
DECR SEPT
BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
3 of 4
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-314-0502.XLS
4104476138.xls
Sht 3 of 70

PMT OPRNS

LEVEL INSTRUMENTS
B36-LIT-5600D & B36-LIT-5601D Guided Wave Radar Level Transmitter Seal leakage detection.
ENGG CERT
DESCRI PTI ON
C (F)
617mm
JO/ EWO

3 4

3 4
16- 11- 07
DATE
/"
0 to 11.5"
/"
REV NO.
00
TORQUE TUBE
TRANSMITTER
SW
DATE: OPERATIONS
LOG
REM
CONTROL NUMBER
CONTROLLER
DATE:
YES
NO
DATE:
INCR INTG
DECR SEPT
BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
4 of 4
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-314-0502.XLS
4104476138.xls
Sht 4 of 70

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET - RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR (RTD)
THIS DRAWING AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTION IN FULL OR IN PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
ASSEMBLY
1 THERMOWELL
NONE
INCLUDED (see Form 8020-418-M-ENG)
OTHER (specify)
PROCESS
2 FLUID
LIQUID SOUR LIQUIDS
GAS WATER n/a kPa(ga) (PSIG)

O
HYDROCARBONS OTHER (Specify)
CORROSIVE COMPOUNDS (specify)
3 PRESSURE 4 TEMPERATURE
OPERATING OPERATING
Note 1) <70 (158)
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
Note 1) 70 (158)
kPa(ga) (PSIG)
O
C ( F)
C (OF)
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON
5 MAT'L SOURCE 6 MAKE 7 SHEATH 8 TYPE
REQ. NO. MFR. O.D. Minco Products Inc. 6.0 (0.236) mm (in.)
,SAMS STOCK NO. , MODEL NO. MATERIAL PDPD Platinum 385 100 O Stainless Steel with Copper Alloy Tip OTHER (Specify) Ohm @ 260 (500) %
O
PLATINUM WITH R100 / RO = 1.3926 (SAMA RC. 21-4) 100 Ohm @ O C ( F) FROM + 0.5% MFG. STD. 2-WIRE LEAD WIRES -50 (-58)
O O
1.385 OOC (OF)
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
9 ICE POINT RES. 10 TEMP. RANGE 11 ACCURACY 12 LEADS 13 CONNECTION
OTHER (Specify)
O
C (OF) TO 0.1
C (OF)
OTHER (Specify) POTTED 3-WIRE RECEPTACLE 1/2" NPT Process Connection
HERM. SEALED 4-WIRE BAYONET LOCK OTHER (specify)
JO/ EWO
14 MOUNTING THREAD CONNECTION HEAD

00
DATE
15 MAT'L SOURCE 16 MAKE 17 TYPE 18 CONSTRUCTION 19 ENCLOSURE
REQ. NO. MFR. Minco Products Inc.
, SAMS STOCK NO. , MODEL NO. OTHER (specify) ; CONDUIT CONNECTION SIZE 4 3/4 /IEC IP in. NPT 65 CH104 Series
REV. NO.
[ ] NONE
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER C.W. DATE: 16-11-07
SCREW CAP & CHAIN MATERIAL WEATHERPROOF Aluminium
EXPLOSIONPROOF: NEMA TYPE Class 1, Division 1 & 2 Groups B, C & D
PROJECT ENGINEER B.V. DATE: 16-11-07
20 ELECTRICAL AREA CLASSIFICATION: 21 EXTENSION 22 TERM. BLOCK

UNION:
NIPPLE SIZE
in. NPT: LENGTH "N"
mm (in.)
CERTIFIED
6 wire (Duplex element)
SERVICE
23 ROT. EQUIPM. 24 COMPLY WITH
BEARING
WINDING (17-SAMSS-502)
SURFACE (specify)
Lube Oil Return Line
NACE MR-75-01
YES
NO
OPTIONS
DATE:
25 26 27
OPERATIONS
28
"A": T'/C ELEMENT LENGTH "Y": T/C ELEMENT DIAMETER

DATE:
"N": CONNECTION HEAD EXTENSION LENGTH "T": THERMOWELL LAGGING EXTENSION LENGTH "U": THERMOWELL INSERTION LENGTH
REQUIREMENTS,
CERTIFICATE
BY:
(DCC) NO. ______________________________
CONDUIT CONN.
"N"
2"
"U"
COMPLETION
NOTES: 1) Refer to 8020-418-M-ENG for thermowell details. ISS FOR Lube Oil Return Line RTD
DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
DRAWING
ISS
KHURAIS
B36
E-
1 of 2
00
BY
EDSD/8020-416-1-0502.XLS
4104476138.xls
Sht 5 of 70

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

REV. P&ID NO. / SHT. NO.
INSTRUMENT TAG NO.
ELEMENT TYPE (ITEM 8)
ELEMENT LENGTH "A"
TEMP. RANGE (ITEM 10)
SERVICE (ITEM 23)
B36-TE-5600AA/AB B36-TE-5601AA/AB B36-TE-5602AA/AB B36-TE-5603AA/AB B36-TE-5604AA/AB
PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385)
To suit thermowell To suit thermowell To suit thermowell To suit thermowell To suit thermowell
-50 to 260C -50 to 260C -50 to 260C -50 to 260C -50 to 260C
Motor NDE Lube Oil Return Motor DE Lube Oil Return Gearbox Lube Oil Return Pump DE Lube Oil Return Pump NDE Lube Oil Return
E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5600BA/BB
PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385)
DESCRI PTI ON
B36-TE-5601BA/BB B36-TE-5602BA/BB B36-TE-5603BA/BB

ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
B36-TE-5604BA/BB
B36-TE-5600CA/CB B36-TE-5601CA/CB B36-TE-5602CA/CB B36-TE-5603CA/CB B36-TE-5604CA/CB
PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385)
DATE
JO/ EWO
B36-TE-5600DA/DB
00
PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385)
REV. NO.
B36-TE-5601DA/DB B36-TE-5602DA/DB B36-TE-5603DA/DB B36-TE-5604DA/DB
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
C.W. DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
OPERATION
REQUIREMENTS,
CERTIFICATE
(DCC) NO. ______________________________
DATE:
BY:
NOTES: Refer to 8020-418-M-ENG for thermowell details.
COMPLETION
ISS FOR
Lube Oil Return Line RTD
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
DRAWING
ISS
KHURAIS
B36
E-
2 of 2
00
BY
EDSD/8020-416-2-0700.XLS
4104476138.xls
Sht 6 of 70

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

GENERAL 1 MAT'L SOURCE 2 MAKE PROCESS 3 FLUID
REQ. NO. MFR.
, Minco Products Inc. ,
SAMS STOCK NO. MODEL NO. WATER TW1220 Series OTHER (Specify) Seawater
HYDROCARBONS LIQUID GAS;
SOUR LIQUIDS
CORROSIVE COMPOUNDS (Specify) Atmos. <158 PSIG

O
4 PRESSURE 5 TEMPERATURE BODY 6 MATERIAL 7 COVER 8 CONSTRUCTION 9 CONNECTIONS OPTIONS 10 CORROSION
OPERATING OPERATING
MAXIMUM (DESING) MAXIMUM (DESING)
Atmos. 158
PSIG
O
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
316 Stainless Steel SCREW CAP & CHAIN TAPERED PROCESS 1-1/2" OTHER (Specify) DRILLED INTERNAL THREAD BUILT-UP 1/2" in. NPT: CLOSED-END TUBE
STRAIGHT in.
BORE
0.26"
in
COMPLIANCE WITH NACE MR-75-01
YES
NO
RF FLANGE (F) (PER ASME B16.5) JO/ EWO BORE 0.260"
0.875"
3/16" RADIUS
1/4"
3/4"
FULL PENETRATION DOUBLE WELD
1/2" NPT
"U"
STAMP TW TAG NO. ON THE OUTSIDE EDGE OF THE FLANGE
"T"
CERTIFIED
REV.
INSTRUMENT TAG NO.

B36-TE-5600AA/AB B36-TE-5601AA/AB
PROCESS CONN. (ITEM 9) 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF
INTERNAL THREAD (ITEM 9) 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT
BORE I.D. (ITEM 9) 0.26" 0.26" 0.26" 0.26" 0.26"
WELL DIMENSIONS "U" 4.92" 4.92" 10.24" 4.92" 5.31" "T" 2.25" 2.25" 2.25" 2.25" 2.25"
PROC. FLUID (ITEM 3) Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil
P&ID NO. / SHT. NO. E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
DATE:
B36-TE-5602AA/AB B36-TE-5603AA/AB B36-TE-5604AA/AB
OPERATIONS
B36-TE-5600BA/BB B36-TE-5601BA/BB B36-TE-5602BA/BB
1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF
1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT
0.26" 0.26" 0.26" 0.26" 0.26"
4.92" 4.92" 10.24" 4.92" 5.31"
2.25" 2.25" 2.25" 2.25" 2.25"
Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil
DATE:
B36-TE-5603BA/BB B36-TE-5604BA/BB
(DCC) NO. ______________________________
ISS FOR
Lube Oil Return Line RTD Thermowell
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO.
INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
DRAWING
ISS
B36
E-
1 of 2
00
BY
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-418-1-0101.XLS
4104476138.xls
Sht 7 of 70
THERMOWELL
REV. NO.
DATE
00
REQUIREMENTS,
DESCRI PTI ON
COMPLETION
CERTIFICATE
BY:

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

GENERAL 1 MAT'L SOURCE 2 MAKE PROCESS 3 FLUID
REQ. NO. MFR.
, Minco Products Inc. ,
SAMS STOCK NO. MODEL NO. WATER TW1220 Series OTHER (Specify) Seawater
HYDROCARBONS LIQUID GAS;
SOUR LIQUIDS
CORROSIVE COMPOUNDS (Specify) Atmos. <158 PSIG

O
4 PRESSURE 5 TEMPERATURE BODY 6 MATERIAL 7 COVER 8 CONSTRUCTION 9 CONNECTIONS OPTIONS 10 CORROSION
OPERATING OPERATING
MAXIMUM (DESING) MAXIMUM (DESING)
Atmos. 158
PSIG
O
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
316 Stainless Steel SCREW CAP & CHAIN TAPERED PROCESS 1-1/2" OTHER (Specify) DRILLED INTERNAL THREAD BUILT-UP 1/2" in. NPT: CLOSED-END TUBE
STRAIGHT in.
BORE
0.26"
in
COMPLIANCE WITH NACE MR-75-01
YES
NO
RF FLANGE (F) (PER ASME B16.5) JO/ EWO BORE 0.260"
0.875"
3/16" RADIUS
1/4"
3/4"
FULL PENETRATION DOUBLE WELD
1/2" NPT
"U"
STAMP TW TAG NO. ON THE OUTSIDE EDGE OF THE FLANGE
"T"
CERTIFIED
REV.
INSTRUMENT TAG NO.

B36-TE-5600CA/CB B36-TE-5601CA/CB
PROCESS CONN. (ITEM 9) 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF
INTERNAL THREAD (ITEM 9) 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT
BORE I.D. (ITEM 9) 0.26" 0.26" 0.26" 0.26" 0.26"
WELL DIMENSIONS "U" 4.92" 4.92" 10.24" 4.92" 5.31" "T" 2.25" 2.25" 2.25" 2.25" 2.25"
PROC. FLUID (ITEM 3) Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil
P&ID NO. / SHT. NO. E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
DATE:
B36-TE-5602CA/CB B36-TE-5603CA/CB B36-TE-5604CA/CB
OPERATIONS
B36-TE-5600DA/DB B36-TE-5601DA/DB B36-TE-5602DA/DB
1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1-1/2" 150lb RF
1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT
0.26" 0.26" 0.26" 0.26" 0.26"
4.92" 4.92" 10.24" 4.92" 5.31"
2.25" 2.25" 2.25" 2.25" 2.25"
Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil Lube Oil
DATE:
B36-TE-5603DA/DB B36-TE-5604DA/DB
(DCC) NO. ______________________________
ISS FOR
Lube Oil Return Line RTD Thermowell
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO.
INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
DRAWING
ISS
B36
E-
2 of 2
00
BY
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-418-1-0101.XLS
4104476138.xls
Sht 8 of 70
THERMOWELL
REV. NO.
DATE
00
REQUIREMENTS,
DESCRI PTI ON
COMPLETION
CERTIFICATE
BY:

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5600A Motor NDE Lube Oil Return 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5601A Motor DE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5602A Gearbox Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5603A Pump DE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
9 ELEMENT TYPE (THERMOCOUPLE / RTD) 10 ELEMENT SPECIFICATION 11 ASSOCIATED ELEMENT / THERMOWELL ISS NUMBER 12 13 OUTPUT SIGNAL RANGE (4 - 20 mA / DIGITAL) COMM 14 COMMUNICAIONS PROTOCOL 15 16 17 INPUT RANGE LIMITS CONFIG 18 CONFIGURED RANGE 19 FACTORY CONFIGURATION 20 21 PERFORMANCE 22 TOTAL RMS ERROR 23 STABILITY 24 MAXIMUM AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 25 26 27 ELECTRICAL AREA CLASSIFICATION HOUSING 28 ENCLOSURE TYPE 29 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION SIZE 30 MOUNTING 31 32 33 INDICATOR (NONE/REMOTE/INTEGRAL) 34 INDICATOR SCALE RANGE (ANALOG/DIG/ENGR UNITS) 35 INDIATOR MAXIMUM AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ACCESSORIES
RTD PT100 a 0.00385 8020-416-ENG 8020-418-ENG DIGITAL Fieldbus
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER C.W. DATE: PROJECT ENGINEER B.V. 16-11-07
Class 1, Division 2 Class 1, Division 2 Class 1, Division 2 Class 1, Division 2 NEMA 4X NPT / 1/2" 3/8-16 UN-2B NEMA 4X NPT / 1/2" 3/8-16 UN-2B NEMA 4X NPT /1/2" 3/8-16 UN-2B NEMA 4X NPT / 1/2" 3/8-16 UN-2B
16-11-07 DATE: CERTIFIED
Integral Digital 0 to 400F
Integral Digital 0 to 400F 185 Hot Backup
185 Hot Backup
36 SPECIAL TRANSMITTER FEATURES 37 SPECIAL CALIBRATION 38 REDUNDANT / DUAL ELEMENT INPUTS 39 40 41
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
46 47 NOTES: 1. PRESS "INSTRUCTION" TAB OF THIS FILE TO SEE THE INSTRUCTIONS TO FILL THIS FORM.
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
2. Model no.: 3144P-D1-F-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1
ISS FOR
Lube Oil Return Line Temperature Transmitter
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
1 of 5
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
Sht 9 of 70
TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS - SMART
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5604A Pump NDE Lube Oil Return 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5600B Motor NDE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5601B Motor DE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5602B Gearbox Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
2 of 5
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
Sht 10 of 70 Sulzer Doc. No.: E4-104.476.138-Rev."0"
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5603B Pump DE Lube Oil Return 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5604B Pump NDE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5600C Motor NDE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5601C Motor DE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
3 of 5
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5602C Gearbox Lube Oil Return 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5603C Pump DE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5604C Pump NDE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5600D Motor NDE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
4 of 5
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5601D Motor DE Lube Oil Return 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5602D Gearbox Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5603D Pump DE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5604D Pump NDE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
5 of 5
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5605A Motor NDE Journal Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5607A Motor DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5605B Motor NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5607B Motor DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
2. Model no.: 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS (Safety Certified)
ISS FOR
Motor Journal Bearing Temperature Transmitter
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
1 of 2
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5605C Motor NDE Journal Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5607C Motor DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5605D Motor NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5607D Motor DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
Motor Journal Bearing Temperature Transmitter
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
2 of 2
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5608AA Gearbox I/P DE Journal Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5608AB Gearbox I/P DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5609AA Gearbox I/P NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5609AB Gearbox I/P NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
Gearbox Journal Bearing Temperature Transmitter
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
1 of 12
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5610AA Gearbox I/P I/B Thrust Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5610AB Gearbox I/P I/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5611AA Gearbox I/P O/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5611AB Gearbox I/P O/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
Gearbox Thrust Bearing Temperature Transmitter
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
2 of 12
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5612AA B36-TIT-5612AB B36-TIT-5613AA Gearbox O/P DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes B36-TIT-5613AB Gearbox O/P DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes Gearbox O/P NDE Gearbox O/P NDE Journal Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
I SSUED FOR APPROVAL THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
ENGG CERT
Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
DESCRI PTI ON
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
JO/ EWO
TRANSMITTER DATA
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
16- 11- 07
DATE
185
REV NO.
00
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
3 of 12
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5608BA Gearbox I/P DE Journal Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5608BB Gearbox I/P DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5609BA Gearbox I/P NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5609BB Gearbox I/P NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
4 of 12
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5610BA Gearbox I/P I/B Thrust Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5610BB Gearbox I/P I/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5611BA Gearbox I/P O/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5611BB Gearbox I/P O/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
5 of 12
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5612BA B36-TIT-5612BB B36-TIT-5613BA Gearbox O/P DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes B36-TIT-5613BB Gearbox O/P DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes Gearbox O/P NDE Gearbox O/P NDE Journal Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
ENGG CERT
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
DESCRI PTI ON
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
JO/ EWO
TRANSMITTER DATA
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
16- 11- 07
DATE
185
REV NO.
00
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
6 of 12
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5608CA Gearbox I/P DE Journal Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5608CB Gearbox I/P DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5609CA Gearbox I/P NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5609CB Gearbox I/P NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
7 of 12
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5610CA Gearbox I/P I/B Thrust Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5610CB Gearbox I/P I/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5611CA Gearbox I/P O/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5611CB Gearbox I/P O/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
8 of 12
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5612CA B36-TIT-5612CB B36-TIT-5613CA Gearbox O/P DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes B36-TIT-5613CB Gearbox O/P DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes Gearbox O/P NDE Gearbox O/P NDE Journal Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
ENGG CERT
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
DESCRI PTI ON
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
JO/ EWO
TRANSMITTER DATA
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
16- 11- 07
DATE
185
REV NO.
00
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
9 of 12
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5608DA Gearbox I/P DE Journal Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5608DB Gearbox I/P DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5609DA Gearbox I/P NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5609DB Gearbox I/P NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
KHURAIS
10 of 12
00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5610DA Gearbox I/P I/B Thrust Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5610DB Gearbox I/P I/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5611DA Gearbox I/P O/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5611DB Gearbox I/P O/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
KHURAIS
11 of 12
00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5612DA B36-TIT-5612DB B36-TIT-5613DA Gearbox O/P DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes B36-TIT-5613DB Gearbox O/P DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes Gearbox O/P NDE Gearbox O/P NDE Journal Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
ENGG CERT
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
DESCRI PTI ON
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
JO/ EWO
TRANSMITTER DATA
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
16- 11- 07
DATE
185
REV NO.
00
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
KHURAIS
12 of 12
00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

ASSEMBLY
1 THERMOWELL
NONE
OTHER (specify)
PROCESS
2 FLUID
LIQUID SOUR LIQUIDS

O
OPERATING OPERATING
n/a <90 (194)
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
n/a 100 (212)
kPa(ga) (PSIG)
O
C ( F)
C (OF)
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON
O
O O
1.385 OOC (OF)
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
OTHER (Specify)
O
C (OF) TO 0.1
C (OF)
JO/ EWO

00
DATE
REV. NO.
[ ] NONE

UNION:
NIPPLE SIZE
in. NPT: LENGTH "N"
See options below
mm (in.)
CERTIFIED
SERVICE
BEARING
SURFACE (specify)
NACE MR-75-01
YES
NO
OPTIONS
DATE:
25 115mm (4.53 in.) Stand-off Adaptor, 173mm (6.81 in.) Insertion. 26 27
OPERATIONS
28

DATE:
REQUIREMENTS,
CERTIFICATE
BY:
(DCC) NO. ______________________________
CONDUIT CONN.
"N"
2"
"U"
COMPLETION
NOTES:
ISS FOR
Pump Journal Bearing RTD
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
DRAWING
ISS
KHURAIS
B36
E-
1 of 2
00
BY
EDSD/8020-416-1-0502.XLS
4104476138.xls
Sht 28 of 70

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO.
ELEMENT LENGTH "A"
SERVICE (ITEM 23)
PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385)
173mm (6.81") 173mm (6.81")
-50 to 260C -50 to 260C
Pump DE Journal Bearing Pump NDE Journal Bearing
E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385)
173mm (6.81") 173mm (6.81")
-50 to 260C -50 to 260C
E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
B36-TE-5614CA/CB
PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385)
173mm (6.81") 173mm (6.81")
-50 to 260C -50 to 260C
E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
DESCRI PTI ON
B36-TE-5615CA/CB
B36-TE-5614DA/DB
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385)
173mm (6.81") 173mm (6.81")
-50 to 260C -50 to 260C
E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
B36-TE-5615DA/DB
REV. NO.
DATE:
DATE
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
C.W. DATE: 16-11-07 PROJECT ENGINEER B.V. DATE: 16-11-07
JO/ EWO
CERTIFIED
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
DATE:
OPERATION
00
REQUIREMENTS,
CERTIFICATE
(DCC) NO. ______________________________
DATE:
BY:
NOTES: Element length "A" detailed above is insertion length only, for extension lengths refer to item 21.
COMPLETION
ISS FOR
Pump Journal Bearing RTD
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
DRAWING
ISS
KHURAIS
B36
E-
2 of 2
00
BY
EDSD/8020-416-2-0700.XLS
4104476138.xls
Sht 29 of 70

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

ASSEMBLY
1 THERMOWELL
NONE
OTHER (specify)
PROCESS
2 FLUID
LIQUID SOUR LIQUIDS

O
OPERATING OPERATING
n/a <110 (230)
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
n/a 120 (248)
kPa(ga) (PSIG)
O
C ( F)
C (OF)
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON
O
O O
1.385 OOC (OF)
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
OTHER (Specify)
O
C (OF) TO 0.1
C (OF)
JO/ EWO

00
DATE
REV. NO.
[ ] NONE

UNION:
NIPPLE SIZE
in. NPT: LENGTH "N"
See options below
mm (in.)
CERTIFIED
SERVICE
BEARING
SURFACE (specify)
NACE MR-75-01
YES
NO
OPTIONS
DATE:
25 No Stand-off Adaptor, 30mm (1.18 in.) Insertion. 26 27
OPERATIONS
28

DATE:
REQUIREMENTS,
CERTIFICATE
BY:
(DCC) NO. ______________________________
CONDUIT CONN.
"N"
2"
"U"
COMPLETION
NOTES:
ISS FOR
Pump Thrust Bearing RTD
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
DRAWING
ISS
KHURAIS
B36
E-
1 of 2
00
BY
EDSD/8020-416-1-0502.XLS
4104476138.xls
Sht 30 of 70

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO.
ELEMENT LENGTH "A"
SERVICE (ITEM 23)
PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385)
68mm (2.68") 68mm (2.68")
-50 to 260C -50 to 260C
Pump Inboard Thrust Bearing Pump Outboard Thrust Bearing
E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385)
68mm (2.68") 68mm (2.68")
-50 to 260C -50 to 260C
E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
B36-TE-5616CA/CB
PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385)
68mm (2.68") 68mm (2.68")
-50 to 260C -50 to 260C
E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
DESCRI PTI ON
B36-TE-5617CA/CB
B36-TE-5616DA/DB
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
PT100 (0.00385) PT100 (0.00385)
68mm (2.68") 68mm (2.68")
-50 to 260C -50 to 260C
E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2 E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
B36-TE-5617DA/DB
REV. NO.
DATE:
DATE
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
C.W. DATE: 16-11-07 PROJECT ENGINEER B.V. DATE: 16-11-07
JO/ EWO
CERTIFIED
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
DATE:
OPERATION
00
REQUIREMENTS,
CERTIFICATE
(DCC) NO. ______________________________
DATE:
BY:
NOTES: Element length "A" detailed above is insertion length only, for extension length refer to item 21.
COMPLETION
ISS FOR
Pump Thrust Bearing RTD
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
DRAWING
ISS
KHURAIS
B36
E-
2 of 2
00
BY
EDSD/8020-416-2-0700.XLS
4104476138.xls
Sht 31 of 70

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5614A Pump DE Journal Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5615A Pump NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5616A Pump I/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5617A Pump O/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
Pump Journal & Thrust Bearing Temperature Transmitters
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
1 of 4
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5614B Pump DE Journal Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5615B Pump NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5616B Pump I/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5617B Pump O/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
2 of 4
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5614C Pump DE Journal Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5615C Pump NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5616C Pump I/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5617C Pump O/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
3 of 4
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER 2 SERVICE GENERAL DATA B36-TIT-5614D Pump DE Journal Bearing 3 P & ID NUMBER 4 MANUFACTURER 5 MODEL NUMBER 6 7 8
B36-TIT-5615D Pump NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5616D Pump I/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
B36-TIT-5617D Pump O/B Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Rosemount See Notes
MATERIAL SOURCE
SAMS STOCK NO.
ELEMENT
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
RTD PT100 a 0.00385
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
4-20mA HART
F F
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
-58 to 500 0 to 400 YES NO
0.02% of span 0.1%
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
0.02% of span 0.1% 185
185
185 Hot Backup
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
Dual Input
DATE: OPERATIONS
42 43 44 45
DATE: BY:
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
4 of 4
00
KHURAIS
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS
4104476138.xls
JO/ EWO
DESCRI PTI ON
ENGG CERT
TRANSMITTER DATA
REV NO.
00
16- 11- 07
DATE

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXE-5602A Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXE-5603A B36-VYE-5603A Gearbox I/P NDE Gearbox I/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYE-5602A Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) -
ENGG CERT
SWITCH SPECIFICATION
SENSITIVITY RANGE DESCRI PTI ON VIBRATION RANGE SET POINT TYPE OF ENCLOSURE CONDUIT CONNECTION
HZ 0-10 mil See 3) GRP Housing 3/4" NPT VOLTS (AC / DC) AMP. -
0-10 mil See 3) GRP Housing 3/4" NPT -
CONTACT ARRANGEMENT CONTACT RATING
ACTION OF CIRCUIT NO.1 ACTION OF CIRCUIT NO.2

CIRCUIT NO.1 ACTUATES CIRCUIT NO.2 ACTUATES POWER SUPPLY
(SEE NOTE 1) (SEE NOTE 1)
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE
CONTROL UNIT SPECIFICATION

STARTING TIME DELAY MONITORING TIME DELAY MANUAL RESET POWER SUPPLY SECOND SECOND -
REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
PROJECT ENGINEER B.V. 16-11-07 DATE: CERTIFIED
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS
ALARM LIGHT OR ANNUNCIATOR SPECIFICATION

EQUIPMENT TAG NO. MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER -
MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:
NOTES: 1. FILL IN UNDER "ACTION OF CIRCUIT" OPENS ON RISE, OR CLOSES ON RISE. 1) Bently Nevada Part No.: 32000-28-05-05-225-00-02. 2) Bently Nevada Part No.: 32000-28-05-17-190-00-02. 3) Set point 1 = 3.46 mil (Alarm), set point 2 = 6.45 mil (Trip).
ISS FOR Gearbox Vibration Probe

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
1 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXE-5602B Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXE-5603B B36-VYE-5603B Gearbox I/P NDE Gearbox I/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYE-5602B Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) -
ENGG CERT

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
2 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXE-5602C Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXE-5603C B36-VYE-5603C Gearbox I/P NDE Gearbox I/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYE-5602C Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) -
ENGG CERT

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
3 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXE-5602D Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXE-5603D B36-VYE-5603D Gearbox I/P NDE Gearbox I/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYE-5602D Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) -
ENGG CERT

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
4 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VZE-5600A Gearbox I/P Axial Position P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VZE-5600B Gearbox I/P Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) B36-VZE-5601B Gearbox I/P Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VZE-5601A Gearbox I/P Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) -
ENGG CERT
HZ 25 mil See 3) GRP Housing 3/4" NPT VOLTS (AC / DC) AMP. -
25 mil See 3) GRP Housing 3/4" NPT -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
5 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VZE-5600C Gearbox I/P Axial Position P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VZE-5600D Gearbox I/P Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) B36-VZE-5601D Gearbox I/P Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VZE-5601C Gearbox I/P Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) -
ENGG CERT

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
6 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXE-5604A
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXE-5605A B36-VYE-5605A B36-KE-5601A Gearbox O/P DE Gearbox O/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) Keyphasor E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1)
B36-VYE-5604A
ENGG CERT
Gearbox O/P NDE Gearbox O/P NDE Gearbox O/P DE Radial Vibration Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE
E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
0-4000 RPM GRP Housing 3/4" NPT -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
7 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXE-5604B
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXE-5605B B36-VYE-5605B B36-KE-5601B Gearbox O/P DE Gearbox O/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) Keyphasor E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1)
B36-VYE-5604B
ENGG CERT

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
8 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXE-5604C
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXE-5605C B36-VYE-5605C B36-KE-5601C Gearbox O/P DE Gearbox O/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) Keyphasor E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1)
B36-VYE-5604C
ENGG CERT

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
9 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXE-5604D
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXE-5605D B36-VYE-5605D B36-KE-5601D Gearbox O/P DE Gearbox O/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 2) Keyphasor E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1)
B36-VYE-5604D
ENGG CERT

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
10 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXT-5602A Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXT-5603A B36-VYT-5603A Gearbox I/P NDE Gearbox I/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYT-5602A Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
ENGG CERT
HZ 0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a VOLTS (AC / DC) AMP. -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:
NOTES: 1. FILL IN UNDER "ACTION OF CIRCUIT" OPENS ON RISE, OR CLOSES ON RISE. 1) Set point 1 = 3.46 mil (Alarm), set point 2 = 6.45 mil (Trip). 2) Mounted in skid edge 316SS junction box.
ISS FOR Gearbox Vibration Probe Proximitor

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
1 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXT-5602B Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXT-5603B B36-VYT-5603B Gearbox I/P NDE Gearbox I/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYT-5602B Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
ENGG CERT
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
2 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXT-5602C Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXT-5603C B36-VYT-5603C Gearbox I/P NDE Gearbox I/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYT-5602C Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
ENGG CERT
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
3 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXT-5602D Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXT-5603D B36-VYT-5603D Gearbox I/P NDE Gearbox I/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYT-5602D Gearbox I/P DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
ENGG CERT
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
4 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VZT-5600A Gearbox I/P Axial Position P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VZT-5600B Gearbox I/P Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 B36-VZT-5601B Gearbox I/P Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VZT-5601A Gearbox I/P Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
ENGG CERT
HZ 25 mil See 1) See 2) n/a VOLTS (AC / DC) AMP. -
25 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
5 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VZT-5600C Gearbox I/P Axial Position P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VZT-5600D Gearbox I/P Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 B36-VZT-5601D Gearbox I/P Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VZT-5601C Gearbox I/P Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
ENGG CERT
HZ 25 mil See 1) See 2) n/a VOLTS (AC / DC) AMP. -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
6 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXT-5604A
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXT-5605A B36-VYT-5605A B36-KT-5601A Gearbox O/P DE Gearbox O/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 Keyphasor E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYT-5604A
ENGG CERT
Gearbox O/P NDE Gearbox O/P NDE Gearbox O/P DE Radial Vibration Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-4000 RPM See 2) n/a -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
7 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXT-5604B
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXT-5605B B36-VYT-5605B B36-KT-5601B Gearbox O/P DE Gearbox O/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 Keyphasor E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYT-5604B
ENGG CERT
E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-4000 RPM See 2) n/a -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
8 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXT-5604C
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXT-5605C B36-VYT-5605C B36-KT-5601C Gearbox O/P DE Gearbox O/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 Keyphasor E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYT-5604C
ENGG CERT
E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-4000 RPM See 2) n/a -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
9 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXT-5604D
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXT-5605D B36-VYT-5605D B36-KT-5601D Gearbox O/P DE Gearbox O/P NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 Keyphasor E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYT-5604D
ENGG CERT
E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-4000 RPM See 2) n/a -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
10 of 10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE Gearbox O/P DE Brg. Housing P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330400-01-05 -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
Gearbox O/P DE Brg. Housing E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330400-01-05 Gearbox O/P DE Brg. Housing E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330400-01-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VE/VT-5600A B36-VE/VT-5600B B36-VE/VT-5600C B36-VE/VT-5600D Gearbox O/P DE Brg. Housing E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330400-01-05 -
ENGG CERT
HZ 0-45 g See 1) SS Housing 1/2" NPT VOLTS (AC / DC) AMP. -
0-45 g See 1) SS Housing 1/2" NPT -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:
NOTES: 1. FILL IN UNDER "ACTION OF CIRCUIT" OPENS ON RISE, OR CLOSES ON RISE. 1) Set point 1 = 13 g (Alarm), set point 2 = 21 g (Trip).
ISS FOR Gearbox Casing Accelerometer

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
1 of 1
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXE-5606A Pump DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXE-5607A Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) B36-VYE-5607A Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYE-5606A Pump DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
ENGG CERT

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:
NOTES: 1. FILL IN UNDER "ACTION OF CIRCUIT" OPENS ON RISE, OR CLOSES ON RISE. 1) Bently Nevada Part No.: 32000-28-05-08-110-00-02. 2) Set point 1 = 3.94 mil (Alarm), set point 2 = 4.92 mil (Trip).
ISS FOR Pump Vibration Probe

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
1 of 6
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXE-5606B Pump DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXE-5607B Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) B36-VYE-5607B Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYE-5606B Pump DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
ENGG CERT

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
2 of 6
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXE-5606C Pump DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXE-5607C Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) B36-VYE-5607C Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYE-5606C Pump DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
ENGG CERT

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
3 of 6
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXE-5606D Pump DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXE-5607D Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) B36-VYE-5607D Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYE-5606D Pump DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
ENGG CERT

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
4 of 6
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VZE-5602A Pump Axial Position P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
Pump
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VZE-5602B Pump Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) B36-VZE-5603B Pump Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VZE-5603A
ENGG CERT
Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
5 of 6
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VZE-5602C Pump Axial Position P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
Pump
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VZE-5602D Pump Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) B36-VZE-5603D Pump Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VZE-5603C
ENGG CERT
Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
6 of 6
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXT-5606A Pump DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXT-5607A Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 B36-VYT-5607A Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYT-5606A Pump DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
ENGG CERT
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:
ISS FOR Pump Vibration Probe Proximitor

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
1 of 6
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXT-5606B Pump DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXT-5607B Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 B36-VYT-5607B Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYT-5606B Pump DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
ENGG CERT
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
2 of 6
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXT-5606C Pump DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXT-5607C Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 B36-VYT-5607C Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYT-5606C Pump DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
ENGG CERT
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
3 of 6
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VXT-5606D Pump DE Radial Vibration P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VXT-5607D Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 B36-VYT-5607D Pump NDE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VYT-5606D Pump DE Radial Vibration E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
ENGG CERT
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -
0-10 mil See 1) See 2) n/a -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
4 of 6
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VZT-5602A Pump Axial Position P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
Pump
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VZT-5602B Pump Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 B36-VZT-5603B Pump Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VZT-5603A
ENGG CERT
Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
HZ 25 mil See 1) See 2) VOLTS (AC / DC) AMP. -
25 mil See 1) See 2) -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
5 of 6
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE B36-VZT-5602C Pump Axial Position P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
Pump
VIBRATION SWITCHES
B36-VZT-5602D Pump Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 B36-VZT-5603D Pump Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VZT-5603C
ENGG CERT
Axial Position E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 -
HZ 25 mil See 1) See 2) VOLTS (AC / DC) AMP. -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
6 of 6
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE Pump DE Brg. Housing P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
Pump DE Brg. Housing E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) Pump NDE Brg. Housing E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VE/VT-5601A B36-VE/VT-5602A B36-VE/VT-5601B B36-VE/VT-5602B Pump NDE Brg. Housing E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
ENGG CERT
HZ 0-1 in/s See 2) SS Housing 1/2" NPT VOLTS (AC / DC) AMP. -
0-1 in/s See 2) SS Housing 1/2" NPT -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:
NOTES: 1. FILL IN UNDER "ACTION OF CIRCUIT" OPENS ON RISE, OR CLOSES ON RISE. 1) Full part no.: CA21128-01-00-03-02. 2) Set point 1 = 0.28 in/s (Alarm), set point 2 = 0.43 in/s (Trip).
ISS FOR Pump Bearing Housing Velomitor

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
1 of 2
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE Pump DE Brg. Housing P & ID DRAWING NUMBER MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER MATERIAL SOURCE E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
VIBRATION SWITCHES
Pump DE Brg. Housing E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) Pump NDE Brg. Housing E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
B36-VE/VT-5601C B36-VE/VT-5602C B36-VE/VT-5601D B36-VE/VT-5602D Pump NDE Brg. Housing E1-104.430.193 Bently Nevada See 1) -
ENGG CERT
HZ 0-1 in/s See 2) SS Housing 1/2" NPT VOLTS (AC / DC) AMP. -

JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV NO.
00
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE
DATE: OPERATIONS

MATERIAL SOURCE
DATE:
BY:
NOTES: 1. FILL IN UNDER "ACTION OF CIRCUIT" OPENS ON RISE, OR CLOSES ON RISE. 1) Full part no.: CA21128-01-00-03-02. 2) Set point 1 = 0.28 in/s (Alarm), set point 2 = 0.43 in/s (Trip).
ISS FOR Pump Bearing Housing Velomitor

(DCC) NO.:
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
KHURAIS
SAUDI ARABIA
B36
JO / EWO:
E-
2 of 2
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS
4104476138.xls

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

LUBRICATION, SHAFT SEALING AND CONTROL OIL SYSTEMS DATA SHEET
NOTE: INDICATES INFORMATION BE COMPLETED BY BUYER. BY MANUFACTURER OF LUBRICATION, COMPRESSOR SHAFT SEALING AND CONTROL OIL SYSTEMS. BY MANUFACTURER OF BUFFER FLUID SYSTEMS FOR MECHANICAL SEALS AND CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS. PURCHASERS REFERENCE APPLICABLE TO: PROPOSALS PURCHASE AS BUILT
PMT
SAS
SAS PW AV
ENG'G CERT.
AV
PW
AV
PW
SAS
LUBE, SEAL, CONTROL OIL SYSTEM MANUFACTURER BUFFER FLUID SYSTEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER REFERENCE NUMBER SYSTEM SUPPLIES LUBE OIL COMPR. SEAL OIL CONTROL OIL
BARIC SYSTEMS
34481 BUFFER FLUID TO: COMPR. TAG NO. GEAR TAG NO. PUMP TAG NO.
DRIVER TAG NO. SEPARATE LUBE OIL SYSTEM COMBINED LUBE & SEAL OIL SYSTEM SEPARATE SEAL OIL SYSTEM CONTROL OIL SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
BUFFER FLUID SYSTEM FOR DOUBLE

MECHANICAL SEAL BUFFER FLUID SYSTEM FOR TANDEM MECHANICAL SEAL

MAIN EQUIPMENT DATA SHEET NO.(S)
DRIVER GEAR
9 - 17 20 - 22
COMPRESSOR PUMP 3-8
PURCHASERS REFERENCES LUBE, SEAL & CONTROL OIL SYSTEM(S) NORMAL

USGPM
BUFFER FLUID SYSTEM AFTER TRIP

USGPM
BUFFER LIQUID OIL ACCORDING 26-SAMSS-045 PER
psig
psig
LUBE OIL DRIVER DRIVER UNIT GEAR OTHER TOTAL COMPRESSOR SEAL OIL CONTROL OIL OIL CHARACTERISTICS SYSTEM TO SERVE 77.755 25 8.892 17.259 51.514 25 25 25 REQUIRED FLOW PER SEAL
JO/EWO
AT
psia
DATE
TOTAL FLOW REQ'D BY SYSTEM SYSTEM DESIGN PRESS. psia
USGPM
o
REV NO.
00
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
00
SEALS
PER 26-SAMSS-045 OTHER, VISCOSITY AT 40F VISCOSITY AT 100F
ISO VG 46 cS/cP/SSU cS/cP/SSU
ISO VG 32
STUFFING BOX PRESSURE:
psi
PROCESS FLUID
DATE
CERTIFIED
SAMSS NUMBER COMPRESSOR BLOCK-IN TIME EQUIPMENT COAST-DOWN TIME
31-SAMSS-004 MIN. MIN. MIN. 60

o
MAX. FLOW TEMP.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
EQUIPMENT COOL-OFF TIME MIN. START-UP OIL TEMP. SETTLING OUT PRESSURE
VISC. AT FLOW TEMP.
cS/cP/SSU
F VAPOUR PR. AT MAX. FLOW TEMP. psig
psig psig
DATE
OPERATIONS
PROCESS RELEIF VALVE SETTINGS
REL. DENSITY AT FLOW TEMP.
DATE
PURCHASERS REFERENCES API 614 REFERENCES SEPARATE LUBE OIL SYSTEM SEPARATE SEAL OIL SYSTEM COMBINED LUBE & SEAL SYSTEM LUBE OIL AT MAIN EQUIPMENT SEAL OIL AT MAIN EQUIPMENT BUFFER FLUID SYSTEM FOR DOUBLE MECH. SEAL ACCORDING STD. DWG. BUFFER FLUID SYSTEM FOR TANDEM MECH. SEAL ACCORDING STD. DWG. LUBE OIL SYST. ACC. STD. DWG. AB-036370 AB-036858 AB-036859
DWG. TYPE DAT
FIG NO.
OPTIONS NOS.
COMMENTS
AB-036281
AB-036282
AB-036283
AB-036368
AE-036369
AB-036859
SPECIAL DWG. NO. SK-200050
DATA SHEET FOR LUBRICATION, SHAFT SEALING AND CONTROL OIL SYSTEMS
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ITEM N0. SERVICE
B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
24 of 36
04

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

LUBRICATION, SHAFT SEALING AND CONTROL OIL SYSTEMS DATA SHEET NOTE:
INDICATES INFORMATION BE COMPLETED BY BUYER. BY MANUFACTURER OF LUBRICATION, COMPRESSOR SHAFT SEALING AND CONTROL OIL SYSTEMS. BY MANUFACTURER OF BUFFER FLUID SYSTEMS FOR MECHANICAL SEALS AND CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS.
PMT
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
SAS
PW
PW
PW
SYSTEMS COMPONENTS LAYOUT F. SYSTEM LAYOUT THE OIL SYSTEM SHALL COMPLY, WHEN SPECIFIED WITH TYPICAL SCHEMATICS OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND COMPLETE SYSTEMS AS SHOWN IN APPENDIX "A" OF API 614. FIG OVERALL LAYOUT OIL RESERVOIR PRIMARY PUMPS STAND-BY PUMPS BOOSTER PUMPS AUTO-START TURBINE 2A-10 2A-21 2A-19 2A-21a&c 2A-19b OPTION * Max. all motors running MOTORS CONTROLS PROTECTION INSTRUMENT AIR: PRESSURE AVAILABLE REQUIRED AMOUNT COOLING WATER AVAILABLE UTILITIES ELECTRIC YES
UTILITY DATA REQUIRED NO AC DC AC DC DC YES V 460 24 24 NO psig in .PM (STD) WELL WATER SEAWATER TREATED WATER
3
AV
AV
AV
AMOUNT kW kVa
PHASES
A 3
115
DESCRIPTION
COOLER(S)
FILTER(S) LOW PRESS. HIGH PRESS. ACCUMULATOR

2A-17
ONCE THROUGH SYSTEM

o DESIGN TEMP. INLET RETURN F
CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM
REQUIRED AMOUNT AVAILABLE PRESSURE REQUIRED PRESSURE FOULING FACTOR LOCATION, SITE AND INSTALLATION DATA
USGPM psig psig

o SQ.Ft. F.hr/BTU
OVERHEAD TANK INNER SEAL DRAINERS REMARKS
1.
INDOOR OUTDOOR
HEATED UNHEATED
UNDER ROOF PARTIAL SIDES
INSTALLED ON: MAIN EQUIPM. SEPARATE BASE PLATE CONSOLE FREE STANDING
AMBIENT CONDITIONS: 2. 3. 4. ELECTRICAL AREA CLASS NON-CLASSIFIED AREA 5. CORROSIVE ELEMENTS: H2S SALT OR SEACOAST OTHERS 1 GR. IIA Div. 2 DESIGN 130
o
MAX.
122
MIN.
32
LUBE OIL SYST. COMPR. SEAL OIL SYST. COMPR. SEAL OIL REC. SYST. BUFFER FLUID SYST. HEAT EXCHANGERS GAUGE BOARD PANEL MFR. SUPPLIES INTERCONNECTING PIPING YES NO
REV NO.
DATE
JO/EWO
00
EQUIPMENT DATA RESERVOIR SERVICE APPLICATION SEPARATE LUBE LUBE OIL 3167 450 / / / / COMB LUBE SEAL SEPARATE SEAL BUFFER FLUID
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
CHARGE CAPACITY, L RUNDOWN CAPACITY, L RETENTION CAPACITY, MINUTES & L
9.07 / 2717 YES 12 HP HOLD -DLUBE ROTARY ROTARY -DCOMB LUBE SEAL -DSEPARATE SEAL -DBUFFER FLUID
DATE
CERTIFIED
ELECT. IMMERSION HEATER, YES/NO RESERVOIR TAG NUMBER PUMPS
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
MAIN PUMP TYPE, ROTARY CENTRIFUGAL STAND-BY PUMP TYPE, ROTARY CENTRIFUGAL EMERGENCY PUMP TYPE, ROTARY CENTRIFUGAL
DATE
OPERATIONS
MAIN PUMP TAG NO. STAND BY PUMP TAG NO. EMERGENCY PUMP TAG NO.
HOLD -GHOLD -G-G-
-G-G-G-
-G-G-G-
-G-G-G-
DATE
MAIN PUMP DATA SHEET NO. STAND-BY PUMP DATA SHEET NO. EMERGENCY PUMP DATA SHEET NO. DRIVERS DRIVER TYPE MAIN PUMPS, ST. TURB EL. MOTOR DRIVER POWER RATING SPEED, kW RPM DRIVER TYPE STAND-BY PUMP, ST. TURB. EL. MOTOR DRIVER POWER RATING SPEED, kW RPM DRIVER TYPE/POWER RATING SPEED EMERG. PUMP. MAIN PUMP DRIVER TAG NO. STAND-BY PUMP DRIVER TAG NO. EMERGENCY PUMP DRIVER TAG NO.
El. Motor 20 / 3550 / / /
El. Motor 20 / / / 3550 / / / / / / / / /
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ITEM N0. SERVICE
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
25 of 36

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

PMT
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
SAS
PW
PW
PW
EQUIPMENT DATA (CONT'D) HEAT EXCHANGERS SERVICE APPLICATION ACCORDING 32-SAMSS-007, YES/NO ACCORDING 32-SAMSS-011, YES/NO ACCORDING 32-SAMSS-019, YES/NO VENDOR STANDARD HEATLOAD, BTU/MIN MANUFACTURER HEAT EXCHANGER TAG NO. FILTERS SERVICE APPLICATION LUBE 10 NOMINAL INDUFIL 145 5.8 HOLD LUBE OIL CONTROL OIL / 188.5 / 69.6 / / / / / / KF / / KF LUBE & SEAL CONT. OIL SEPARATE SEAL OIL BUFFER FLUID LUBE OIL Lube Oil Cooling
LUBE & SEAL
SEPARATE SEAL
BUFFER FLUID
AV
AV
AV
No Yes No Air cooled 8139.51 AIRFINS HOLD -E-E-E-
DESCRIPTION
FILTRATION, MICROMETERS
MANUFACTURER DESIGN PRESSURE/TEST, psig DIFF. PRESS. CLEAN/FAIL, psig

FILTER TAG NO. ACCUMULATORS SERVICE APPLICATION NUMBER REQUIRED NOMINAL/USABLE CAP. EACH, USG DIRECT CONTACT/BLADDER TYPE MANUFACTURER RUNDOWN, MIN. DESIGN PRESS./TEST psig INCLUDE: CHARGE PR. GAUGE MANUAL CHARGE VALVE GAS SUPPLY REGULATOR ACCUMULATOR TAG NUMBER(S) OVERHEAD TANKS (SUPPLIER TO CONFIRM IF REQ.) SERVICE APPLICATION REQUIRED: YES/NO DIRECT CONTACT/BLADDER TYPE
SEAL OIL
BUFFER FLUID
DATE
JO/EWO
-D-
-D-
-D-
-D-
REV NO.
00
RUNDOWN LUBE YES DIRECT CONTACT 3 MINUTES N/A N/A N/A 238 N/A / N/A FILL
LOW PRESS SEAL
MED. PRESS. SEAL
HIGH PRESS. SEAL
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
RUNDOWN, MINUTES PURGE GAS: TYPE OF GAS in3/S(STD)
DATE
CERTIFIED
INCL. CONTROL TOTAL CAPACITY, USG NOMINAL USABLE CAP. USG
/ / -D-
/ / -D-
/ / -DHIGH. PRESSURE SEAL OIL
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
DESIGN PRESS./TEST psig OVERH. TANK TAG NO. DRAINERS FOR INNER COMPR. SEAL OIL
ATMOS /
DATE
OPERATIONS
SERVICE APPLICATION FLOAT/TRANSMITTED CONTROLLED POTS, FOR MANUAL DRAIN: YES/NO
LOW-PRESSURE SEAL OIL
MED.-PRESSURE SEAL OIL
DATE
CAPACITY, EACH, USG DESIGN PRESS./TEST,psig DRAINER TAG NO.(S) MIST ELIMINATORS CAPACITY, USG MIST EL. TAG NO.(S) DEGASSING RESERVOIR NORMAL/MAX. CAP., USG L/sec; NORMAL/MAX.
o OPERATING TEMP, F
/ -D-
/ -D-
/ -D-
-D-
-D-
-D-
/ /
/ /
/ /
PURGE GAS; TYPE DEGAS RES. TAG. NO.

/ -DDWG. TYPE DAT
/ -D-
/ -D-
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ITEM N0. SERVICE
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
26 of 36
04

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

PMT
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
SAS
PW
PW
PW
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION H MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION 1. PIPING: UPSTR. FILTER DOWNSTR. FILTER 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. RESERVOIR DEGASSING TANK OVERHEAD TANK RUNDOWN TANK (IF REQ.) SEAL DRAINERS FILTERS ACCUMULATORS ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM 316L or 304L SS SS 316 St. Steel 316 St. Steel 316 St. Steel MANUFACTURER GAUGE BOARD
PANELS
AV
AV
AV
ALL INSTRUMENTATION CONTROL STATION INTEGRAL WITH GAUGE BOARD SEPARATE SWITCH RACK MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MOUNTED ON MAIN EQUIP. BASE PLATE L.O. AND/OR S.O. CONSOLE FREE STANDING
PRESSURE GAUGE REQUIREMENTS: MAIN LUBE OIL PUMP DISCHARGE STAND-BY LUBE OIL PUMP DISCHARGE
LOCALLY MOUNTED
INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS GAUGE ALARM & SHUTDOWN SWITCHES: BOARD LOW LUBE OIL RESERVOIR LEVEL LOW SEAL OIL/BUFFER FL. RESERVOIR LEVEL HIGH SEAL OIL HEAD TANK LEVEL HIGH-HIGH SEAL OIL HEAD TANK LEVEL LOW SEAL OIL HEAD TANK LEVEL LOW-LOW SEAL OIL HEAD TANK LEVEL STAND-BY LUBE OIL PUMP START LOW EMERG. LUBE OIL RUNDOWN TK. LEVEL STAND-BY LUBE OIL PUMP RUNNING STAND-BY SEAL/OIL BUFFER FL. PUMP RUNNING EMERGENCY LUBE OIL PUMP RUNNING EMERGENCY BOOSTER PUMP RUNNING HIGH LUBE OIL FILTER P psi
ALARM
TRIP
EMERGENCY LUBE OIL PUMP DISCHARGE SEAL OIL/BUFFER FLUID PUMP DISCHARGE STAND-BY S.O./BUFFER FLUID PUMP DISCHARGE EMERGENCY SEAL OIL PUMP DISCHARGE LUBE OIL HEADER (EACH LEVEL) SEAL OIL HEADER (EACH LEVEL) CONTROL OIL HEADER ACCUMULATOR PRE CHARGE GAS COMPRESOR SEAL REFERENCE GAS PURGE GAS SUPPLY EACH OIL PUMP SUCTION DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAGES: LUBE OIL FILTERS SEAL OIL/BUFFER FLUID FILTERS BOOSTER OIL FILTERS CONTROL OIL FILTERS TEMPERATURE GAUGE REQUIREMENTS:
DATE
HIGH SEAL OIL/BUFFER FL. FILTER P psi HIGH GOVERNOR OIL FILTER HIGH CONTROL OIL FILTER P psi P psi
HIGH SEAL OIL DRAINER LEVEL LOW LUBE OIL HEADER PRESS (EACH) LOW-LOW LUBE OIL HEADER PRESS. (EACH) LOW SEAL OIL/BUFFER FLUID HEADER PRESSURE (EACH LEVEL) LOW CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW SEAL OIL P psi (EACH LEVEL) P psi (EACH LEVEL)
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
FUNCTION LUBE OIL COOLER INLET LUBE OIL COOLER OUTLET
DATE
CERTIFIED
SEAL OIL/BUFFER FLUID COOLER INLET SEAL OIL/BUFFER FLUID COOLER OUTLET LUBE AND/OR SEAL OIL RESERVOIR
LOW-LOW SEAL OIL
HIGH THRUST BRG. OIL TEMP. (EA. BRG.) HIGH LUBE OIL COOLER OUTLET TEMP. LOW LUBE OIL COOLER OUTLET TEMP. HIGH SEAL OIL COOLER OUTLET TEMP. LOW SEAL OIL COOLER OUTLET TEMP. HIGH RUNDOWN TANK LEVEL LOW RUNDOWN TANK LEVEL (IF TANK REQ.) HIGH ACCUMULATOR LEVEL LOW ACCUMULATOR LEVEL
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
DEGASSING TANK LEVEL INDICATORS/CONTROLLERS: CONTAMINATED SEAL OIL DRAIN TRAPS
DATE
OPERATIONS
SEAL OIL DRAIN TRIP LEVEL CONTROLLERS DEGASSING TANK LUBE OIL RESERVOIR
DATE
SEAL OIL/BUFFER FLUID RESERVOIR SEAL OIL HEAD TANKS SEAL HEAD TANK LEVEL CONTROLLER LUBE OIL RUN-DOWN TANK (IF TANK IS REQ.) INSPECTION AND TESTS L. INSPECTION AND TESTING CLEANLINESS FOUR-HOUR RUN CHECK CONTROLS CHANGEOVERS (COOLERS/FILTERS) ONE-AND TWO-PUMP OPERATION HYDROSTATIC
MISCELLANEOUS REQ'D WITNESS MASSES (lb) L.O. CONSOLE (Approx) 17620 S.O. CONSOLE
TOTAL SHIPPING MASS (lb) SPACE REQUIREMENTS (Ft): COMPLETE UNIT: Ft L L.O. CONSOLE: S.O. CONSOLE:
DWG. TYPE DAT
(Approx) W W W 13.12 H H H 8.04
20.34
Ft L Ft L
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ITEM N0. SERVICE
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
27 of 36
04
INDICATORS AND SWITCHES ONLY
DESCRIPTION REV NO. JO/EWO
00

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMP DATA SHEET
DESIGN OPERATING DATA A. SERVICE CONTINUOUS ATTENDED PUMP FUNCTION: INTERMITTENT UNATTENDED Lube Oil Pump (1 x operating, 1 stand-by) STAND BY .1 .2 .3 .4 B. LIQUID CHARACTERISTICS 1. 2. LIQUID PUMPED: LUBE OIL ISO VG 46
o o
PMT
SAS
SAS
SAS
PERFORMANCE DATA E. PUMP CHARACTERISTICS MAX./MIN. CAPACITY USGPM 114.22 psig psig RPM psi BHP BHP % 110.27 145 131.8
ENG'G CERT.
PW
PW
PW
MAX. ALLOWABLE DISCHARGE PRESSURE MAX. RELIEF VALVE SET PRESSURE MAX. ALLOWABLE SPEED NPSHR AT MAX. CAPACITY POWER ABSORBED AT MAX. CAPACITY MAX. ALLOWABLE POWER CONS. EFFICIENCY (HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL)
AV
AV
AV
4000 12.91 15.08 20 63.99
.5 .6 F 170.8 .7 .8 0.839 cS/cP/SSU cS/cP/SSU 95.9 13.67 psia psia NONE NEG. NEG. UNKNOWN HARD SOFT NEG. 13.67
RATED FLOW TEMPERATURE .1 MIN./MAX. FLOW TEMPERATURE F 60
170.8
3.
RELATIVE DENSITY AT FLOW TEMP. VISCOSITY AT FLOW TEMP.
.1 MIN./MAX. VISCOSITY
VAPOR PRESSURE AT FLOW TEMP.
EQUIPMENT DATA F. PUMP MODEL, MASS, LUBRICANTS 1. MANUFACTURER SPX PLENTY MIRRLEES KCA52-4NL TBA
DESCRIPTION
.1 V.P. AT MAX. FLOW TEMP.

6.
SOLIDS IN FLUID:
P.P.M. GRITTY
.1 CHARACTER OF SOLIDS: .2
PULPY
.1 TYPE/SIZE: .2 SERIAL NUMBER(S):
7.
GAS IN FLUID
NONE
VOL. %
UNKNOWN
2.
PUMP EQUIPPED WITH REQD VENDOR SUPPLY
.1 TYPE OF GAS 8. PRINCIPLE CORROSIVES .1 DRIVER(INCL. COUPLING AND GUARD IF REQUIRED) .1 pH OF PUMPED FLUID .2 BASE PLATE .3 SUCTION STRAINER C. RATED OPERATING CONDITIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. CAPACITY MAX./MIN. NPSH AVAILABLE AT SUCTION PORT SUCTION PRESSURE TOTAL DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE DISCHARGE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE SETTING LOCATION INDOOR OFFSHORE 8. OUTDOOR ONSHORE Coastal Location
o
.4 RELIEF VALVE USGPM 93.31 psi psig psi psig psig 93.31 14 0 68.2 68.2 101.5 .5 SUCTION AND DISCHARGE PIPEWORK FOR RELIEF VALVE .6 SHAFT PACKING: MAKE AND TYPE .7 MECH. SEAL SINGLE MAKE MANUF. SEAL MODEL SERIAL NUMBERS API 610 SEAL FLUSH PLAN .8 COUPLING MAKE .1 MODEL YES 3. .2 TYPE DOUBLE N/A N/A N/A N/A MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD TANDEM THROTTLE BUSH
REV NO.
DATE
JO/EWO
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
00
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE MAX. / MIN.
122/32
D. PUMP/DRIVER/TRANSMISSION TYPE 1. 2. PUMP IN ACCORDANCE WITH API 676 PUMP TYPE SPUR GEAR HELICAL GEAR OTHER TWIN SCREW THREE SCREW VANE PROGRESSING CAVITY RPM CW CCW 3550
(LOOKING FROM DRIVER END)
MASS lb lb lb lb lb TOTAL MASS lb
DATE
CERTIFIED
.1 PUMP .1 ROTATING ASSEMBLY .2 CASING .2 BASEPLATE .3 MOTOR
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
.1 RATED SPEED .2 DIRECTION OF ROTATION 3. DRIVER TYPE
ELECTRIC MOTOR RPM BHP VERTICAL FOOT MOUNTED STANDARD 256TDV G. UTILITY 2 , GROUP II A 1. ELECTRIC POWER SPECIAL 3550 20 4. LUBRICANTS .1 BEARING LUBRICANT SAUDI ARAMCO EQUIV. .2 COUPLING LUBRICANT SAUDI ARAMCO EQUIV.
DATE
OPERATIONS
.1 RATED SPEED .2 RATED POWER .3 HORIZONTAL FLANGE MOUNTED
DATE
.4
.5 SHAFT EXTENSION: .6 FRAME SIZE: .7 AREA CLASSIFICATION CLASS 1
UTILITY DATA
Zone:
AVAILABLE AC DC VOLTS AC INLET PRESS. INLET TEMP. FLOW 460

PHASE
NON-CLASSIFIED 4. INTERMEDIATE TRANSMISSION GEAR BOX, MAKE MODEL 3. OTHER N/A RATIO AGMA FACTOR : .1 MAIN ELECTRIC DRIVER 2. COOLING WATER
Hz
3 / 60 psig
o
USGPM Air at 115 psig
DATA SHEET FOR ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMP ITEM N0. SERVICE B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
28 of 36
04

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMP DATA SHEET PUMP CONSTRUCTION DATA H. MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
API CLASS. SUPPLIER to complete table
PMT
SAS
SAS
SAS
PERFORMANCE DATA K. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
ENG'G CERT.
PW
PW
PW
1.
ASTM OR EQUIVALENT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. CASING ROTOR SHAFT GLAND GLAND PACKING LANTERN RING BASE PLATE RELIEF VALVE PIPEWORK GASKETS BEARINGS BEARING HOUSING HARD SURFACING OVERLAY MECH. SEAL SPRINGS BS1490 LM 25TF BS970 080 A42 BS1452 Gr 250 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A NON ASBESTOS N/A BS970 080 M40 N/A N/A
SHOP INSPECTION AND TESTS REQ'D WITNESSED CERTIFIED

AV
AV
AV
.1 HYDROSTATIC TEST .2 RUNNING TEST (MIN. 4 HRS) .3 PERFORMANCE TEST .4 NPSH TEST .5 DISMANTLE AND INSPECT AFTER TEST YES/NO (Running test as part of main unit tests) 2. DRAWINGS AND OTHER DATA Certified dimensional outline drawing and list of 1. connections 2. Foundation plan showing anchor bolt location 3. Cross-sectional drawing and bill of materials 4. Center of gravity, vertical and plan location 5. Lube oil schematic and bill of materials 6. Cooling or heating schematic and bill of materials 7. Driver outline 8. Driver performance characteristics REQUIRED NO
DESCRIPTION
10. 14.Nov.05 BI-10-03452 RE ISSUED DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES 11. 12. 13. 07.Dec.05 BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR PP ( FW REV D1 ) 14.
J. PUMP CONSTRUCTION
1. PUMP NOZZLE
9. Completed driver data sheets 10. Dimensional outlines for all major accessory equipment SIZE
in. in.
.1 SUCTION THREADED FLANGED
ASME RATING
FACING
POSITION
11. Operating and maintenance manuals 12. Parts list with sectional drawings 13. Spare parts recommendation
JO/EWO
3.
.2 DISCHARGE THREADED FLANGED .3 3
PUMP NAMEPLATE DIMENSIONAL DATA MUST BE IN ENGLISH UNITS
SIZE
in. in.
ASME RATING 150 lb
FACING
POSITION 4. PURCHASER'S DECISIONS REQUIRED BY PARAGRAPH 1.1 OF API 676 WILL BE SPECIFIED IN THE PURCHASE ORDER.
DATE
RF
TOP
REV NO.
00
5.
2. OTHER CONNECTIONS SERVICE LUBE OIL INLET
PIPING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 01-SAMSS-17.
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
NO.
SIZE
TYPE
6.
PUMP MARK NO(S) -HOLD -G-G, , -G-G-
LUBE OIL OUTLET SEAL LIQUID INLET SEAL LIQUID OUTLET
DATE
CERTIFIED
CASING DRAIN VENTS COOLING WATER
7.
PUMPS OF IDENTICAL TYPE & SIZE IN OPERATION
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
3. CLEARANCES in. in. .1 RADIAL (DESIGN/MAX./MIN.)
-G-G-
, ,
-G-G-
DATE
OPERATIONS
.2 AXIAL (DESIGN/MAX./MIN.)
4.
BEARINGS
INTERNAL
EXTERNAL
DATE
.1 5. 6. TIMING GEARS INTERNAL NUMBER OF SCREWS 3 EXTERNAL PITCH 52
PURCHASERS REFERENCE
.1 THRUST EQUALIZATION METHOD

7.
HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT JACKSCREWS PRESSURES
YES
NO
HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURE
o
1. DRIVER DATA SHEET 2. GEAR UNIT DATA SHEET 3. LUBE OIL SYST. DATA SHEET 4. SAFETY INSTRUCTION SHEET 5. EQUIPM. NOISE DATA SHEET
8.
MAX. ALLOW WORK PRESS
AT
.1 CASE .2 JACKETS .3 COILS psig psig psig 145
F AT
217.5
DATA SHEET FOR ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMP ITEM N0. SERVICE B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
29 of 36
04

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

PMT
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
SAS PW
PW
PW
SUPPLIER Data:
GENERAL INFORMATION
AV
AV
AV
Manufacturer
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Model
5KS256XAB156
Serial No.
TBA
MOTOR DATA
Rating Data at 1.0 Service Factor: Nameplate Power Full Load Speed 20 3550 Clockwise
DESCRIPTION
kW (hp) RPM
Voltage
460
Phase TEFC
60 256TDV
Torque:
No Load Current Load Amperes Power Factor Nominal Efficiency Guaranteed Efficiency
3.31
Amps 25% 6.38 80.46 91.14 50% 11.12 90.18 93.36 75% 16.40 91.91 93.16 Full 22.30 91.50 91.70
Locked Rotor Amps at Rated Voltage
140.53 Insulation System
JO/EWO
Class
Temperature Rise
70
C above
50
C ambient at 1.0 SF
DATE
Bearing Information Coupling End Bearing: Outboard End Bearing: Certification: Class Manufacturers Type Manufacturers Type 1 Group C/D ROLLER ROLLER Div Weights/Dimensions Net Weight 350 lb Rotor Weight lb Space Heaters: (Operating Conditions) Voltage V Wattage kW hp Max. Surface Temp. C Part No. Part No. 2 Agency 6310ZC3 6309ZC3 CSA
REV NO.
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER

CERTIFIED
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
00
DATE
OPERATIONS
DATE
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
31 of 36
04

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FLUID NAME TOTAL FLUID ENTERING (1) LIQUID VAPOUR NON-COND STEAM WATER OPERATING PRESSURE OPERATING TEMPERATURE (6) DENSITY, LIQUID SPECIFIC HEAT VISCOSITY CONDUCTIVITY (LIQUID / VAPOUR) LOADING @ INLET LIQUID DENSITY VISCOSITY @ OP. TEMPERATURE PRESSURE DROP ALLOW / CALCULATED MAX. DIFF. PRESSURE ACROSS FILTER ELEMENTS CLEAN / FOUL (2) SOLIDS, CONTENT OF (MAXIMUM SOLIDS CONCENTRATION) ENTRAINED LIQUID QUALITY (LIQUID) TOTAL DISSOLVED SOLIDS (LIQUID) DROPLET AND PARTICLE REMOVAL EFFICIENCY % % % SIZE CUTOFF SIZE CUTOFF SIZE CUTOFF microns microns microns 10 WT % lb/ft3 cP psi psi ppmw ppmw STA STA STA 5.8 Lubrication Oil ISO VG 46 USgpm USgpm USgpm USgpm USgpm USgpm psia F lb/ft3 Btu/lb cP Oil ISO VG 46 77.755 77.755 0 0 0 0 67.8 140 52.36 0.49 19.73 0.000001789 100 52.36 19.73 5.8 69.6 EQUIPMENT NO. SERVICE MANUFACTURER MODEL / SIZE (LENGTH, WIDTH, HEIGHT) NO. OF UNITS PER ITEM CONNECTED IN (PARALLEL / SERIES) PROCESS DATA / SPECIFICATION Lube Oil Filters FILTER SPECIFICATION NO. P.O. NO. YEAR BUILT ELEMENT CATALOG NO. QUANTITY OF ELEMENTS REQUIREMENT SUPPLIER DATA
PMT
SAS
SAS
SAS
32-SAMSS-004 DATE
ENG'G CERT.
PW
PW AV
AV
AV 07.Dec.05 BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR PP ( FW REV D1 ) 00
PW
DESCRIPTION
16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
REV NO.
DATE
JO/EWO
NATURE OF SOLIDS (ABRASIVE / NON-ABRASIVE) MESH SIZE TOTAL FILTRATION AREA / FREE AREA mesh / microns in2 / % STA STA STA STA 10
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
37 38 39 DESIGN PRESSURE TEST PRESSURE DESIGN TEMPERATURE CORROSION ALLOWANCE CONNECTIONS SIZE / RATING / FACING DRAIN & VENTS MATERIALS (3) : SHELL INTERNAL (SUPPORTS) FLANGES STUD BOLTS SKIRT OR SUPPORT REQUIRED LEVEL GAUGE: WEIGHT SURFACE PREPARATION CODE - ASME VIII, DIVISION 1 IN OUT
DESIGN - MATERIALS - CONSTRUCTION PER UNIT psig psig F in PER CODE 145 188.5 212 0 2" NB 150 lb RF 2" NB 150 lb RF 3/4" NB 150 lb RF ASTM A182 316L ASTM A182 316L ASTM A182 F316 ASTM A193 B8M COVERS FILTER ELEMENTS GASKETS STUD BOLT NUTS ASTM A182 316L GLASS FIBRE MEDIA NON ASBESTOS ASTM A194 8M
DATE
CERTIFIED
40 41 42
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
43 44 45
DATE
OPERATIONS
46 47 48
DATE
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
lb
EMPTY
254
FULL
277
STAMP
YES
UM STAMP
CLEANING METHOD (SUPPLIER TO ADVISE) : ABBREVIATIONS STA = SUPPLIER TO ADVISE (S) = SUMMER, (W) = WINTER KCS = KILLED CARBON STEEL SS = STAINLESS STEEL
FILTER DATA SHEET ITEM N0. SERVICE B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
35 of 36
04

OPRNS AAN AAN AAN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Liquid Vapor Non-Cond. Steam Water Viscosity liq./vap. Operating Temperature Density, Liquid Spec. Heat Conduct. liq./vap. Lethal Service Pour/Freeze Point Bubble Point Inlet Pressure Pressure Drop Allow/Calc Fouling Resistance Surface/Unit Finned Tube Surface/Unit Bare Tube M.T.D. Corrected Transfer Rate - Service, Finned Tube - Clean, Bare Tube - Service, Bare Tube Latent Heat 68.2 15 / 14.94 0.00017 m2K/W 9924 453.2 16.92 16.5 W/m2K 361 W/m2K N/A Lb/Hr Lb/Hr, Mol Wt Lb/Hr, Mol Wt Lb/Hr Lb/Hr cP
o
PMT
SAS
SAS
SAS
Equipment No. Service Manufacturer Model/Size (length, width) No. of Bays Fluid Name Total Fluid Entering
HOLD Lube Oil Coolers AIRFINS 1 PERFORMANCE DATA - TUBE SIDE Lubrication Oil ISO VG 46 77.755 USGPM IN 32625 0 0 0 0 11.47 170 52.36 0.507 0.000001792 No
o o
Specification No. 32-SAMSS-011 P.O. No. Year Built DATE 2007 FORCED
ENG'G CERT.
PW
PW
PW
+2LF1400/5-H1.1-6950(1307)4RVF2-11-67X16V1-T8 Forced or Induced
AV
AV
AV
PERFORMANCE DATA - AIR SIDE Altitude Design Inlet Air Temp. OUT 32625 Outlet Air Temp. Min. Design Ambient 0 0 0 0 19.73 140 52.95 0.49 0.000001789 Fans Manufacturer Model No. Per Bay F F Diameter No. of Blades RPM/Tip Speed Reqd. H.P. Per Fan Blade Material Pitch Angle: Adj./Auto. Speed Reducer Manufacturer Model Type No. Per Bay Ratio Motor (Driver) Manufacturer Model GENERAL ELECTRIC 5KS184XAB282W6 TEFC 1 5 1755 460 / 3 / 60 BELT 1 03:01 1 4.593 4 600 / 8657 Ft/min 3.5 Aluminium Fixed Ft COMET Static Pressure Face Velocity Air Quantity (Total) Air Quantity (Fan) Mass Velocity (net free area) MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 1419 130 139.1 32 2.176 0.159 20.31 6.77 Ft
o o o
F F F
0 0
0 0
in. H2O FPM SCFM SCFM Lb/h-ft2
17 18 19
Lb/Cu.Ft Btu/Lb oF Btu/Hr Ft. oF Yes
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
psig psi Hr Ft2 oF/Btu Sq. Ft Sq. Ft

o
Btu/Hr oF Ft2 Btu/Hr oF Ft2 Btu/Hr oF Ft2 Btu/Lb
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
37 38 39
Heat Exchanged
488371
Btu/Hr
Type No. Per Bay Horsepower R.P.M. Volts/Phase/Hertz
DATE
CERTIFIED
40 41 42 43 44 45 145 188.6
DESIGN - MATERIAL - CONSTRUCTION Design Pressure TUBE BUNDLE Size No./Bay Arrangement Bundles Bays Bundle Frame MISCELLANEOUS Struct. Mount Surface Preparation Weight - Empty/Full of water Wind Load * Give tube count of each pass when irregular 18722 lbs psi Standard API 661 Noise Level Not to Exceed 85 dB(A) (grade) (piperack) c/c In Parallel In Parallel PAINTED In Series In Series 1 No. of Tubes/pass 7.5 x 1.5 m No. Tube Rows 19 4 psig Test Pressure HEADER Type Material No. Passes* Plug Material Gasket Material Corrosion Allowance No., Size Inlet Nozzle No., Size Outlet Nozzle Special Nozzles Rating & Facing TI PI psig Design Temperature TUBE Material (Seamless) in./ft OD No. /Bundle Pitch in. in. in. in. FIN, Type Material OD No./in. Code-ASME VIII; Div. 1 Stamp Yes No 203 A213 TP316L (Welded) 1 76 / 22.8 2.64 EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM 2.244 11 in.
o o
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
COVER PLATE A240 TP316L 2 N/A CAFF 0 1x2 1x2 N/A 150 lb RF
DATE
OPERATIONS
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
in. ft.
DATE
SPECIFICATION SHEET - AIR COOLED HEAT EXCHANGER ITEM N0. SERVICE B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS
DWG. TYPE DOC
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
32 of 36
04
DESCRIPTION REV NO. DATE JO/EWO
00
BARIC SYSTEMS
DOCUMENT COVER SHEET
PROJECT DETAILS:
CLIENT : CLIENT O/NO : PROJECT REF : BARIC REF : DOCUMENT: DOCUMENT NO : SULZER PUMPS (UK) LIMITED 48330 SAUDI ARAMCO KHURAIS CRUDE SHIPPER PUMPS 34481 LO COOLER FAN MOTOR DATASHEET CMA-34481
CMA-34481
00
First Issue
A. PENKETH
D. GODSMARK
17-Sep-07
DOCUMENT NUMBER
REVISION
DESCRIPTION
ORIGINATOR
APPROVED
DATE
Model Number: 5KS184XAB282W6 / Version: v07021163.01
Certified Print
Wednesday, February 21, 2007
Page 7 of 7
Marks: CUSTOMER: General Electric International Final Customer: AIRFINS, U.K. REF.: P.O.4774/P105/Revision 3
OPRNS

AAN AAN AAN

GENERAL INFORMATION
Project Designation: Location: Equipment Type: Equipment Serial No.: KHURAIS CENTRAL PROCESSING FACILITY KHURAIS LUBE OIL SYSTEMS B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D Inquiry / Purchase Order No.: Model No.:
PMT
SAS
SAS PW AV
ENG'G CERT.
PW
AV
AV
PW
SAS
Manufacturer:
BARIC SYSTEMS
PURCHASER'S REQUIREMENTS
This form shall be completed for each piece of equipment (or integrated unit) that is likely to generate noise in excess of
DESCRIPTION
85 dBA at a distance of one meter. If the noise level is greater than 90 dBA, the cost of special design and/or acoustic
treatment should be supplied. Measurements are to be made in accordance with ANSI S1.13 and at full design load, unless otherwise indicated. For rotating electric machinery, use points defined in IEEE Standard 85.
Also measure at:
50% load
120% load
Other load
SUPPLIER, MANUFACTURER OR VENDOR INFORMATION

Sound Pressure Level, dBA Standard Design: Special Design: N/A With Acoustic Treatment: N/A
JO/EWO
Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels, dBA (Ref. 0.02 mPA) (Supplier's Guaranteed Maximum Sound Pressure Level at One Meter)
DATE
REV NO.
00
Octave band (Hz) 20 - 75 75 - 150 150 - 300 300 - 600 600 - 1200 1200 - 2400 2400 - 4800 4800 - 9600
Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Standard Design
Special Design
With Acoustic Treatment
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
<85 dB(A)
DATE
CERTIFIED
DATE
CONSTRUCTION AGENCY
Description of Special
DATE
OPERATIONS
Added Cost:
Design:
DATE
Description of Acoustic Treatment:
Added Cost:
Supplier, Manufacturer or Vendor: Represented by: Signature:
SULZER PUMPS (UK) LTD.
Title: Date:
EQUIPMENT NOISE DATA SHEET ITEM N0. SERVICE B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS
DWG. TYPE DAT
PLANT NO. INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
B36
BE-106004
BI-10-03452
#REF! of 36
04

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET - PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES CONVENTIONAL & BALANCED TYPES
1 INSTRUMENT TAG NUMBER GENERAL DATA 2 SERVICE 3 SERIAL NUMBER 4 P & ID NUMBER 5 MANUFACTURER 6 MODEL NUMBER 7 8 MATERIAL SOURCE REQUISITION NO. AMS STOCK NO. (NOTE 4)
PI-34481 PI-34481
ENGG CERT
B36-PZV-5600 LUBE OIL
B36-PZV-5601 LUBE OIL
LESER
LESER
5264.1122
N/A N/A CONVENT. St. Steel INLET INLET INLET OUTLET OUTLET OUTLET (OPEN / CLOSED) 1.5" 300lb RF Metal Closed 3" 150lb RF
5264.1122
N/A N/A CONVENT. St. Steel 1.5" 300lb RF Metal Closed 3" 150lb RF
9 DESIGN TYPE DESCRIPTION 10 MATERIAL 11 SIZE BODY 12 CONNECTION RATING 13 FLANGE FACING TYPE 14 SEAT TYPE 15 BONNET 16 17 TRIM MATERIAL 18 NOZZLE AND DISC 19 GUIDE 20 SPRING 21 SPRING COATING 22 BELLOWS 23 24 CAP ACCESSORIES 25 LIFTING LEVER 26 TEST GAG 27 VENT WITH BUG SCREEN 28 AUXILIARY PISTON 29 LIQUID TRIM 30 BASIS OF SELECTION 31 ASME CODE (>15 PSIG) 32 FIRE 33 OTHER 34 35 PROCESS FLUID 36 CORROSIVE COMPOUNDS 37 REQUIRED CAPACITY 38 MW OR SP. GR. @ RELIEVING TEMPERATURE 39 VISCOSITY @ RELIEVING TEMPERATURE
DATE: OPERATIONS
St. Steel St. Steel St. Steel N/A N/A (SCREWED / BOLTED) (PLAIN / PACKED) (YES / NO) (YES / NO) (YES / NO) (YES / NO) DIV (I / VIII) STAMP (F / BD) NO BD N/A ISOVG 46 NONE 59.17 USGPM 0.86 CP 0 @ RELIEF DESIGN 11.47 N/A 104 145 0 0 0 101.53 10 0 RESERVOIR PSIG N/A 10.1 SCREWED N/A NO NO NO YES NO
St. Steel St. Steel St. Steel N/A N/A SCREWED N/A NO NO NO YES NO BD N/A ISOVG 46 NONE 59.17 USGPM 0.86 11.47 0 104 58.0 0 0 0 101.53 10 0 RESERVOIR N/A 10.1 N/A 104 145 NO
REV NO. DISCIPLINE ENGINEER DATE: PROJECT ENGINEER
DATE
JO/EWO
BLOCKED DISCHARGE
DATE: CERTIFIED
40 WT % FLASH 41 TEMPERATURE SERVICE CONDITIONS 42 PRESSURE 43 SET PRESSURE
MW OF VAPOR NORMAL NORMAL
F
PSIG PSIG PSIG PSIG PSIG PSIG
104 58.0
DATE: CONTROL NUMBER EDSD VERIFICATION
101.53
101.53
44 SUPERIMPOSED BACK PRESSURE 45 BUILT-UP BACK PRESSURE 46 TOTAL MAXIMUM BACK PRESSURE 47 COLD DIFFERENTIAL SET PRESSURE 48 ACCUMULATION 49 BLOWDOWN 50 DISCHARGES TO 51 MAXIMUM ALLOW BELLOWS BACK PRESSURE (NOTE 4) 52 53 54 OVERPRESSURE %
DATE:
BY:
PSIG %
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO.
INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
E-
1 OF 3
01
EDSD/8020-611-1-1299.XLS

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

55 INSTRUMENT TAG NUMBER 56 CAL. MAX. TAIL PIPE VELOCITY 57 DESIGN LIMIT ON TAIL PIPE VELOCITY PIPING 58 CALCULATED LINE PIPING PRESSURE LOSS 59 INLET PRESSURE LOSS LIMIT (3% SET PRESSURE) 60 61 62 SPRING DATA 63 SPRING RANGE (NOTE 4) 64 MANUFACTURER'S SPRING NUMBER (NOTE 4) 65 66 CALCULATED ORIFICE AREA (REFER SH.3) 67 SELECTED API ORIFICE AND AREA 68 ACTUAL ORIFICE AREA (NOTE 4) 69 70 SET PRESSURE OF LOW VALVE MULTIPLE VALVES 71 SET PRESSURE OF INTERMEDIATE VALVE 72 SET PRESSURE OF HIGH VALVE 73 SET PRESSURE OF SPARE VALVE 74 75 76 PSIG PSIG PSIG PSIG N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A API SQ. IN. SQ. IN. SQ. IN. D 0.1266 0.1279 0.1279 D 0.1266 0.1279 0.1279 PSIG 93 - 110 12540 93 - 110 12540 FT/SEC FT/SEC PSIG PSIG 0 0 0 0
B36-PZV-5600 B36-PZV-5601
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
DATE:
CERTIFIED
DATE:
OPERATION
DATE: CONTROL NUMBER BY: EDSD VERIFICATION
(DCC) NO. ______________________________
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO.
INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
DRAWING
ISS
E-
2 OF 3
01
BY
EDSD/8020-611-2-1299.XLS
DESCRIPTION
REV. NO.
DATE JO/EWO
REQUIREMENTS,
COMPLETION
CERTIFICATE
DATE
ORIFICE AREA

PMT OPRNS

77 INSTRUMENT TAG NUMBER 78 A 79 A' 80 C 81 F' 82 G 83 K NOMENCULATURE 84 K 85 86 KSH SUPERHEATED STEAM CORRECTION FACTOR 87 K N NAPIER CORRECTION FACTOR 88 K W BACK PRESSURE CORRECTION FACTOR 89 K V VISCOSITY CORRECTION FACTOR 90 M 92 P 94 T 95 Q 96 W MOLECULAR WEIGHT PSIA PSIG PSIG SET PRESSURE RELIEVING TEMPERATURE LIQUID FLOW GAS / VAPOR / STEAM FLOW COMPRESSIBILITY FACTOR GAS/VAPOR A= 99 STEAM A= W 51.5 P K
1 d d b B36-PZV-5600 B36-PZV-5601
REQUIRED ORIFICE AREA EXPOSED SURFACE AREA OF VESSEL SPECIFIC HEAT COEFF. (SEE API RP 520) VALVE FACTOR SPECIFIC GRAVITY COEFFICIENT OF DISCHARGE BACK PRESSURE CORRECTION FACTOR
SQ.IN. SQ.FT.
0.1266 N/A N/A N/A 0.86
0.1266 N/A N/A N/A 0.86
DESCRIPTION
N/A N/A
N/A N/A
N/A 126.2 101.5 0 104 35.48 USGPM 0 N/A
N/A 126.2 101.5 0
91 P1 SET P + OVER P + ATM. P 93 Pb BACK PRESSURE
R F
GPM LB/HR
104
35.48 USGPM 0 N/A
97 Z 98 ORIFICE AREA CALCULATIONS BASED ON API RP 520 PART 1
W (TZ)
1/2 1/2
CKd P1 K b (M)
DISCIPLINE ENGINEER
SH
100
CERTIFIED LIQUID A= Q (G)

1/2 1/2
DATE: CERTIFIED
38 K d K W K V (P+OVER P-P ) b
DATE: CONSTRUCTION AGENCY DATE: OPERATIONS
101
GAS EXPANSION A F' A' (P ) 1/2 1
DATE: CONTROL NUMBER EDSD VERIFICATION
NOTES:
1. THESE CALCULATIONS DETERMINE MINIMUM REQUIRED ORIFICE AREA. TRUE VALVE CAPACITY DEPENDS ON ACTUAL ORIFICE SELECTED. 2. VENDOR TO CHECK CALCULATION AND SELECTION AND RETURN COPY OF COMPLETED OR CORRECTED SHEET TO BUYER. 3. FOR GENERAL RELIEF VALVE SPECIFICATION REFER TO 34-AMSS-611. 4. VENDOR TO PROVIDE THIS VALUE.
DATE: BY:
5. WHEN A SPECIFIC MANUFACTURER'S VALUE IS USED. THE MANUFACTURER'S SIZING FORMULA MAY BE ATTACHED.
(DCC) NO.: _____________________________.
ISS FOR
DWG. TYPE
PLANT NO.
INDEX
DRAWING NO.
SHT.NO.
REV.NO.
ISS
E-
3 OF 3
01
EDSD/8020-611-3-1299.XLS
REV NO.
DATE
JO/EWO
ENGG CERT

Section 1
Leading Particulars
1.5
Performance Curves and Test Data

The Performance Curves and available Test Data Documentation, listed below, are included next as inserts to the manual.
Pump Predicted Performance Curve - 4-104.451.653 Test Data to be inserted when available
Manual No. 104.471.646

Section 1 Page 6
EFFICIENCY BASED ON API CLEARANCES AT WEAR RINGS STANDARD CLEARANCES AT BUSHES 300 40,000 HOUR NPSHR AT IMPLR C L HEAD EFFICIENCY PERCENT 2800 2600 HEAD IN FEET 2400 2200 MIN FLOW 2000 1800 EFF %
MAX IMP DIA.
200 90 80 70 60 50 40 100
TEST TOLERANCE Rated Head : +2%/-2% Shut Off Head : +2%/-5%
30 20 10 0 15000 10000 5000 BHP

REV.
BHP AT 0.843 SP GR
4000
8000
12000
16000
20000
IMPELLER MAX DIA
24000
28000
US GALLONS PER MINUTE FW/HYUNDAI ARAMCO KHURAIS Crude Shipping Pump ITEM NO: B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D
Sulzer Pumps
DS 06-APR-2007 S.O 48330
20 X 24 X 22 G CD 1 STAGE
DIA IMPELLER IMPELLER PATT
578 mm
EYE AREA SQ IN
556 mm
REFERENCE
CD-128 C/N 57780
1413HSB-30 (High Capacity) LSF 1.2911
3895 RPM
CURVE NO.
NPSH IN FEET
A
4-104.451.653

Document No: IntroSafety 01
Section 2
3 18 Jun 2007
2.1
Introduction Hazardous Area Classification

The supplied pump and pumpset equipment MAY be designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Alternatively, if the pumpset equipment IS NOT designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area, this will be indicated in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 Hazardous Area Operation. This manual details the installation, operating and maintenance procedures required for the Sulzer pump. It also contains appropriate manufacturers information for the ancillary equipment supplied by Sulzer. The manual, which is supplied in accordance with contractual requirements, is not subject to automatic amendment or revision servicing after initial approval. The copyright for this installation, operating and maintenance manual remains the property of Sulzer. On all correspondence concerning this equipment, including general information inquiries and the ordering of spare parts, always include the Sulzer reference, which is detailed on the pump identification plate.
2.1.1
Special Instructions
It is strongly recommended that all installation, operating and maintenance tasks on the equipment are carried out in accordance with the information, instructions and procedures contained in this manual. Failure to comply with this requirement may invalidate any equipment guarantees. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that personnel engaged in the installation, operation or maintenance of this equipment are aware of: installation, operating and maintenance information, instructions and procedures detailed in this manual. any special orders or instructions which affect the installation, operation or maintenance of the equipment. actions to be taken in the event of abnormal or emergency conditions. approved modifications to installation, operating or maintenance procedures that may result from experience in operating the equipment.
Before any modification is incorporated in the installation, operating and maintenance information, instructions and procedures contained in this manual, details of the proposed modification must first be submitted to Sulzer for approval. During the period of guarantee, repairs or modifications should be carried out either by Sulzer engineering personnel or by other approved engineering personnel.
Section 2 Page 1
L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 2\S2 IntroSafety 01-3.doc

Section 2
3 18 Jun 2007
2.2 2.2.1
Environmental Considerations Mineral Oil Based Products

These products are based on severely refined lubricating oils derived from high boiling fractions of petroleum. They are available in a wide variety of viscosities often containing special additives. Additives frequently used include polymeric viscosity modifiers, extreme pressure, anti-wear, anti-oxidants, foam suppressors and corrosion inhibitors. For Health and Safety purposes they may be considered collectively to be one group. SULZER pumps and ancillary equipment often use various types of oils and greases for lubrication of bearings and hydraulic power transmission etc. The following list of precautions may be used as a guide to the safe handling and disposal of these products.
2.2.2
General Precautions
Avoid frequent or prolonged skin contact. Wear protective clothing (especially suitable gloves) and goggles. Do not inhale fumes or vapours. Avoid swallowing these products. Food and drink should be kept away from areas where these products are stored or used. Adequate washing facilities and suitable cleansing agents should be available. Do not exceed the TLV of 5 mg/m2 for mineral oil mist in the working environment. Close containers after use. Spillages should be cleaned up immediately. Apply barrier creams to the skin before handling oils. Afterwards, wash thoroughly (see below) and apply after work creams to moisturise and replace natural oils in the skin. To remove oil from the skin: Wash thoroughly with soap and water. A nail brush is an effective aid. Special hand cleansers help clean dirty hands. Do not use petrol, diesel fuel, gas oil or any solvent. When skin is clean and dry, apply after work cream.
Avoid skin contact with oil-soaked clothing. Do not keep oily rags in your pockets. Launder dirty clothing before re-use.
2.2.3
Disposal of Used Oil

Collect and dispose of used oil in accordance with local regulations. Do not pour used oil onto the ground, into canals, rivers or the sea, or down sewers and drains. Refer to Health and Safety information supplied by the manufacturer of the oil being used and disposed of. Always employ a licensed (where applicable), reputable waste disposal company for the removal of used oil.
Ensure that a control ticket for the collection and disposal of waste oil is properly completed and a copy retained for future reference.
Section 2 Page 2

Section 2
3 18 Jun 2007
2.2.4
Disposal of Equipment
Customer notice Information herein concerning laws and regulations is based upon UK and EU regulations except when specific reference is made to those of other jurisdictions. Since conditions of use and governmental regulations may differ from one location to another and may change with time, it is the customer's responsibility to assure that the customer's workplace, site and disposal practices are in compliance with laws, regulations, ordinances and other governmental enactment applicable in the jurisdiction(s) having authority over the customer's operations. Disposal Usually Sulzer pumps can be disposed of easily after a thorough cleaning. Metal parts (steels, stainless steels, non ferrous alloys, cast iron, duplex alloys) can be segregated and disposed of as scrap metal. Ceramic materials (synthetic carbons, ceramics, and carbides) belong to waste products. These can be separated from their housing materials and are physiologically recognised as safe. Synthetic materials/plastics (elastomers, PTFE) belong to special waste and must be disposed of using licensed carriers. Unless otherwise stated in the Installation and Maintenance Instructions, this product is recyclable and no ecological hazard is anticipated with its disposal providing due care has been taken. Sub Vendor Goods Please refer to sub vendor installation, operation and maintenance manuals for information relating to disposal of those goods. Returning Products Customers are advised that under EC Health, Safety and Environmental Law, when returning products to Sulzer Pumps they must provide information on any hazards and the precautions to be taken due to the contamination, residues or mechanical damage which may present a health, safety and environmental risk. This information must be provided in writing including Health and Safety data sheets relating to any substances identified as hazardous or potentially hazardous.
Section 2 Page 3

Section 2
3 18 Jun 2007
2.3
Contact Information Sulzer Web Site Sulzer Pumps (UK) Ltd e-mail: http://www.sulzer.com pumpsales.leeds@sulzer.com
Sulzer Spares & Service Information (UK SITES ONLY)

Address Sulzer Pumps (UK) Ltd Manor Mill Lane Leeds LS11 8BR Spares Telephone: Fax: e-mail Service Telephone: Fax: e-mail 0113 272 4515 0113 272 4501 steve.laughton@sulzer.com 0113 272 4516 0113 272 4404 harry.barrow@sulzer.com
Sulzer Spares & Service Information (EXCEPT UK SITES)

Address Sulzer Pumps (UK) Ltd Manor Mill Lane Leeds LS11 8BR Spares Telephone: Fax: e-mail Service Telephone: Fax: e-mail 0113 272 4514 0113 272 4404 andy.whittam@sulzer.com 0113 272 4516 0113 272 4404 harry.barrow@sulzer.com
Section 2 Page 4

Section 2
3 18 Jun 2007
2.4
General Safety
This section contains general safety information, which must be observed during the installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance of the equipment. Service engineers and operators must familiarise themselves with this information before starting any maintenance or operating activity. The manual should always be available for reference adjacent to the installed equipment. For general safety information relevant to the ancillary equipment supplied by Sulzer, refer to the manufacturers supplied information later in this manual.
2.4.1
Special Safety Instructions

Special safety instructions, which apply to specific procedures or operations, are indicated in manuals produced by SULZER through the use of the following symbols: Failure to comply with these instructions could result in injury to personnel. Damage to equipment may also occur.
Warning of the presence of dangerous electrical supplies.
Failure to comply with these instructions MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and could result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
CAUTION
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in damage to the equipment. In manuals and/or documentation produced by other manufacturers, and either included within this manual or provided separately, special safety instructions may be indicated using different systems which should be described within that document.
2.4.2
Safety Labels
Where appropriate, safety labels are attached directly to the equipment. These include: arrow symbols to indicate correct rotational sense markings for fluid connections etc.
Labels must be maintained in a serviceable, legible condition.
Section 2 Page 5

Section 2
3 18 Jun 2007
2.4.3
General Safety Instructions for Operators

Notes: 1. The following safety instructions apply to all personnel involved in, or present during, any operating procedure carried out on the supplied equipment. 2. All personnel involved in any operating procedure must be familiar with, and adhere to, any safety instructions included in supplied manuals provided by equipment subvendors.
CAUTION
Where local and site safety instructions differ from the following instructions, the local and site instructions must be followed. Operators must be competent (suitably qualified, experienced and with sufficient knowledge of the equipment and processes) to carry out required tasks, and also familiar with the appropriate sections of this manual, before starting work. Whilst any equipment is running, all guards must remain properly fitted. Under no circumstances should any person reach into an enclosure to adjust equipment when not in the company of someone who is capable of rendering aid in the event of an accident. Personnel working with or near high voltage power supplies should be familiar with modern methods of resuscitation. Do not operate equipment outside its approved operating parameters. Examine equipment, particularly bearings and housings, regularly for indications of overheating. Wear a safety helmet and protective footwear. Use ear protection, goggles / safety glasses and/or gloves if the work being carried out is noisy or hazardous to eyes and/or hands. If dust, fumes or vapours present a hazard to the respiratory system, the appropriate mask and filter must be worn. Personnel working with or near high voltage equipment or rotating / moving equipment should remove watches, rings, or any jewelry that could make physical contact with circuits or moving parts. Clean up any fluid spillage immediately, using appropriate precautions if the fluid being handled is of a hazardous nature. Take required action to remove the cause of the spillage.
Follow all other Health and Safety Regulations, procedures and local requirements.
Section 2 Page 6

Section 2
3 18 Jun 2007
2.4.4
General Safety Instructions for Maintenance Personnel

Notes: 1. The following safety instructions apply to all personnel involved in, or present during, any maintenance procedure carried out on the supplied equipment. 2. All personnel involved in any maintenance procedure which includes operating aspects must be familiar with, and adhere to, the safety instructions in Section 2.4.3 General Safety Instructions for Operators, above. 3. All personnel involved in any maintenance procedure must be familiar with, and adhere to, any safety instructions included in supplied manuals provided by equipment sub-vendors.
CAUTION
Where local and site safety instructions differ from the following instructions, the local and site instructions must be followed. Maintenance personnel must be competent (suitably qualified, experienced and with sufficient knowledge of the equipment and processes) to carry out required tasks, and also familiar with the appropriate sections of this manual, before carrying out any maintenance task. Before carrying out any maintenance activity the equipment must be shut down; controls should be locked and electrical supplies isolated to prevent unauthorised start-up. Under certain conditions, dangerous potentials caused by charges retained by capacitors may exist even when power is switched off. To avoid danger, always disconnect the power and discharge the circuit before touching it. Personnel working with or near high voltage power supplies should be familiar with modern methods of resuscitation. Whilst any equipment is running, all guards must remain properly fitted. Following completion of any work, and before restarting the equipment, ensure all guards are correctly refitted. Under no circumstances should any person reach into an enclosure to service or adjust equipment when not in the company of someone who is capable of rendering aid in the event of an accident. Never work alone. Use a lifting harness, safety line and respirator as required. Wear a safety helmet and protective footwear. Use ear protection, goggles / safety glasses and/or gloves if the work being carried out is noisy or hazardous to eyes and/or hands. If dust, fumes or vapours present a hazard to the respiratory system, the appropriate mask and filter must be worn. Personnel working with or near high voltage equipment or rotating / moving equipment should remove watches, rings, or any jewelry that could make physical contact with circuits or moving parts. Check for fire or explosion risk before welding or using electrical hand tools. Electricity can kill! Isolate all equipment from electrical power supplies before carrying out any maintenance procedure. All such work should be closely controlled and a Permit to Work system is recommended.
Section 2 Page 7

Section 2
3 18 Jun 2007
During lifting operations: Make sure that all lifting equipment is correctly certified / calibrated and is in serviceable condition and suitable for the task. Only use approved safe methods of handling heavy equipment. When eyebolts are fitted to individual parts of the system for lifting purposes, do not attempt to use them to lift the whole assembly. Unless otherwise stated in the detailed instructions in the manual, eyebolts are only provided to lift the loosened single part during assembly or dismantling. Do not pass under suspended loads.
De-pressurise and drain all pipework connected to the equipment before dismantling to prevent danger from sudden leakage. Take appropriate precautions if the fluid being handled is of a hazardous nature. Take care during oil changes, the oil casing may be under pressure. Hold a rag over the oil plug to prevent splatter into eyes or onto skin. Take care when removing worn parts, they may have sharp edges. When handling components during dismantling and assembly, ensure that the equipment is properly secured and that loose parts are supported. Provide a suitable barrier around the work area, especially where removal of pumping equipment leaves open sumps or wells.
Follow all other Health and Safety Regulations, procedures and local requirements.
Section 2 Page 8

Document No: PumpMan 01 0 26 Apr 2002
Section 3
Pump Manual
Pump Manual
The pump equipment manufacturers information is included next as an insert to the manual.
L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3 PumpMan 01-0.doc

Document No: CD Intro 01 1 02 May 2003
Section 3.1
Pump - Introduction
3.1
Introduction
Hazardous Area Classification
The supplied pump and pumpset equipment MAY be designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Alternatively, if the pumpset equipment IS NOT designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area, this will be indicated in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 Hazardous Area Operation.
3.1.1
Scope
This section provides general descriptive information on the Sulzer CD (BBS) and CD-2 (BBT-D) pump. Use this section in conjunction with the General Arrangement drawing and the Longitudinal Section drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents.
3.1.2
Description
The CD pump is the Sulzer single-stage, horizontal, radially spilt pump for industrial and refinery service. It features a double volute casing and a double-suction impeller. The CD-2 two-stage variant features a double-suction first stage impeller and a single suction 2nd stage unit.
3.1.2.1
Features
Volute Casing and Casing Covers The radially split double volute casing is a machined casting with integral suction and discharge nozzles. These are normally located one on each side of the casing with connection flanges uppermost. However, other configurations are possible, including inline flanges or suction and discharge nozzles on the same side of the casing. Depending on specific pump design, the volute casing may have an integral DE end cover and a bolted NDE casing cover, or it may have similar bolted DE and NDE casing covers. The end / casing covers have integral or bolted bearing brackets which support the DE and NDE bearing housing assemblies and the rotating assembly. Optional DE and NDE cooling jackets may be fitted. Shaft Accurate machining provides precision fits and clearances for assembly and operation. Bushings DE and NDE throat bushes are fitted.
Section 3.1 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\CD and CD-2\S3.01 CD Intro 01-1.doc

Document No: CD Intro 01 1 02 May 2003
Section 3.1
Pump - Introduction
For two-stage CD pumps, an additional centre bush and shaft sleeve is introduced between the stages. Impellers The impeller is a closed, double-suction design, machined for integral or replaceable wear rings, depending on application. The impeller is located axially by a thrust ring and retainer, and by one key. For the two-stage variant, the single suction 2nd stage impeller is located on a tapered section of shaft by an impeller nut and a key. Wear Rings Replaceable impeller wear rings (when required) and case wear rings are fitted to provide close running clearances and reduce leakage from impeller high pressure liquid side to the suction side. Integral, close running wear surfaces on impellers are also available. Mechanical Seal The pump is equipped as standard with mechanical seals. Bearings CD pumps can be supplied with ball/ball, ball/sleeve and tilting pad/sleeve bearing arrangements. Refer to Section 3.9 - Bearing Assemblies. Coupling The coupling is selected to suit a specific application, based on operating speed and rated power. A spacer is normally provided to facilitate bearing and mechanical seal removal and maintenance without disturbing the volute case or the driver. Auxiliary Piping Auxiliary piping may be required for bearing lubrication, oil cooling, seal injection, vent, drain or inter-stage bleed-off connections. Factory installed piping and required external connections will be noted on the General Arrangement drawing and on any referenced piping drawing(s). Additional equipment such as isolating valves, strainers, heat exchangers and gauges can be supplied.
3.1.3
Performance Factors
Pump performance is affected by changes in fluid specific gravity, temperature, viscosity, pump operating speed, and NPSHA (Net Positive Suction Head Available). Centrifugal pumps are designed for specific operating conditions and may not be suited for any other without loss of performance or damage.
CAUTION
Do not change operating conditions from original design parameters without contacting a Sulzer representative.
Section 3.1 Page 2

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\CD and CD-2\S3.01 CD Intro 01-1.doc

Document No: Receiving 01 0 08 May 2002
Section 3.2
Pump - Receiving
3.2
3.2.1
CAUTION
Receiving
Transportation and Lifting
For all transport and/or lifting tasks, the general rules of engineering and regulations on the prevention of accidents must be strictly observed. A competent (suitably qualified, experienced and with sufficient knowledge of the equipment and processes) supervisor must be nominated to oversee all transport and lifting tasks. For all lifting tasks, the crane / lifting equipment operator and the handling personnel must be competent (suitably qualified, experienced and with sufficient knowledge of the equipment and processes) to perform the work.
CAUTION
CAUTION
3.2.1.1
Protection During Transport

Refer to Protection Packaging Quality Specification - 40-930 in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents.
3.2.1.2
Transportation
Transport equipment must be checked to ensure that it is suitable for the load weight. The load must be secured correctly during transport to prevent shifting. Note: The total weight of delivered units is included on the dispatch documentation.
3.2.1.3
Lifting
Lifting Equipment Do not pass under a suspended load. Make sure that all lifting equipment is correctly certified / calibrated and is in serviceable condition and suitable for the task. Only use approved safe methods of handling heavy equipment. Note: The total weight of delivered units is included on the General Arrangement drawing (refer to Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents) and also on the dispatch documentation. Suitability of Lifting Equipment Where specific lifting equipment is NOT supplied, the site operators lifting equipment may be considered as suitable if it: is correctly certified / calibrated is fit for the intended purpose can be used without causing damage to any equipment is in serviceable condition is of an acceptable size and configuration has a specified safe working load (SWL) which exceeds the total weight it is required to accept
Section 3.2 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.02 Receiving 01-0.doc

Section 3.2
Pump - Receiving
Slinging Safety Guidelines Ensure that the load is suitable for lifting with a sling or slings. The sling(s) should not be allowed to damage the load, nor should the sling(s) be damaged. Ensure that the safe working load (SWL) of the sling(s) being used is adequate for the lift, having regard to the method of slinging. Ensure that the slings being used are in good condition. Damaged slings should be withdrawn from service immediately Ensure that the load will be stable and in balance when lifted. Attach the sling(s) to the designed lifting points where provided Attachment of Slings / Ropes to Crates Observe the warning notices on the crates, particularly those regarding slinging locations and the weights to be handled. These notices take account of the centre of gravity (mass) of the internal load - this cannot easily be assessed in a closed crate.
The illustration above is an example of the marking of a crate to indicate the correct position of the slings. Crates must be maintained in the correct orientation, as marked on the outside of the crate, and not positioned on a side or upside down.
The illustration above shows the recommended method of slinging a crate. Load spreaders should be used to protect the sides of the crate during lifting.
Section 3.2 Page 2


Section 3.2
Pump - Receiving
Attachment of Slings / Ropes to the Pump / Pumpset In most installations, attachment / lifting points are normally provided for lifting the pump / pumpset, The attachment points are normally shown on the General Arrangement drawing - refer to Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents. Note: In some cases, where space is at a premium, the attachment / lifting points may be removable after use. Such detachable equipment should be stored safely for future use. Lifting / Handling Equipment When selecting a suitable crane or hoist, the weight of all handling and lifting equipment supported by the crane or hoist (lifting beam, slings, shackles etc.) must be added to the total weight of the parts to be handled. The crane / hoist MUST be capable of safely lifting the heaviest of items in Sulzer supply.
Section 3.2 Page 3


Section 3.2
Pump - Receiving
3.2.2
Inspection Upon Arrival

The equipment supplied by Sulzer will have received a final pre-dispatch inspection in the factory. To ensure that the equipment has not been damaged in transit, the package should be inspected upon arrival. Any damage or shortage should be noted on the transport carrier's ticket, and should also be reported immediately to the carrier and to Sulzer or a representative of Sulzer.
3.2.2.1
Unloading
Refer to Section 3.2.1.3 - Lifting and arrange suitable slings and other lifting equipment (including crane / hoist) to maintain a level lift and avoid damage to piping or other components. Support the unloaded equipment on skids or timbers to ease later relocation to the installation or storage site. Ensure that a sufficient number of supports are provided to prevent flexing of the equipment.
Section 3.2 Page 4


Section 3.2
Pump - Receiving
3.2.3
Storage
Note: The following storage instructions apply only to the pump and may not be appropriate to furnished auxiliary equipment. Follow vendor instructions for all other components of the pump system.
3.2.3.1
Requirements
Prior to shipment, the pump and its components are prepared for outside storage. Refer to Protection & Preservation for Storage Quality Specification - 40-931 in Section 1 Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents. The following, additional requirements should be followed by the customer. 1. Store equipment above ground on skids or cribbing to prevent accumulation of water around the equipment. 2. Protect the pump and attachments with a vinyl-coated nylon tarpaulin. Lash the tarpaulin evenly to: i. ii. enable drainage of water and prevent the formation of pools on the tarpaulin. maintain sufficient air circulation with a 3 inch (8 cm) minimum clearance between tarpaulin and pump.
3. Locate the equipment in a storage area that is free from blowing sand or dirt. 4. Do not stack equipment. 5. Prevent animal entry by keeping connections sealed.
CAUTION
Before using rust prevention or drying products (see requirements 6 and 7, below), refer to the product manufacturers guidelines on Safety (i.e. COSHH). 6. Maintain rust prevention coatings. 7. Install or maintain drying agent.
3.2.3.2
Inspection and Maintenance During Storage

For information on inspection and maintenance requirements during long-term storage, refer to Inspection of Pumps in Storage Quality Specification - 40-932 in Section 1 Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents. Records Keep an inspection record with the stored equipment, detailing: 1. Date of inspection. 2. Name of person performing inspection or maintenance. 3. Results of inspection. 4. Date of maintenance. 5. Description of maintenance performed. 6. Amount and type of drying agent replaced.
Section 3.2 Page 5


Section 3.2
Pump - Receiving
3.2.4
Removal of Preservatives
Any preservatives that require removal before commissioning of the equipment should be identified by the prominent display of warning notices indicating quantity of preservative and the need for removal.
CAUTION
Before removing preservative products, refer to the manufacturers guidelines on Safety (i.e. COSHH) for the preservative and for any required removal products. Before cleaning be sure to remove any desiccant.
CAUTION
Section 3.2 Page 6


Document No: Installation 01
Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
3.3
Installation
The supplied pump and pumpset equipment MAY be designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Alternatively, if the pumpset equipment IS NOT designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area, this will be indicated in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 Hazardous Area Operation. Refer to Section 2.4 - General Safety for general safety advice for operators and maintenance personnel before starting any installation activity. Refer also to specific safety advice contained as applicable within the installation procedures included in this manual. When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during installation procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided: failure to use NEW O-ring seals, gaskets, seals or nut locking devices of the correct type and size at all appropriate stages during assembly procedures failure to connect main (suction and discharge) pipework correctly to the pump casing in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations failure to connect auxiliary pipework correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations and to direct the vent and drain pipework to suitable safe locations / containers failure to connect electrical equipment power supply and control cables and instrument cables correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations failure to achieve correct setting positions, clearances and alignment values for the rotating assemblies during coupling alignment procedures failure to ensure correct direction of rotation for the driver in accordance with manufacturers information failure to install the coupling spacers and coupling guards correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations
Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment.
Section 3.3 Page 1

K:\In Work Manuals\48329, 30 CP CD Khurais\48330\S3.03 Installation 01-4.doc

Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
3.3.1
General
Refer to the General Arrangement drawing, and (when applicable) to any other supplied Foundation / Installation drawings, in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 Sulzer Drawings and Documents. Suitable lifting devices must be available for installation and repair work. During erection care must be taken to ensure nothing is dropped or left in the pump unit. If anything is dropped into the pump unit, it must be removed and the pump checked completely to ensure that any loose item does not remain inside.
CAUTION
Failure to remove any lodged item could result in damage to the pump unit and/or associated plant. Good lighting is important and the pump should be readily accessible from all sides.
3.3.1.1
Foundation
The foundation must give adequate system support and meet external piping requirements. The foundation must also inhibit vibration. The foundation must have a flat and level surface, sufficient to ensure that the base plate, and hence the pump, are installed level, and also ensuring that any point contact between base plate and foundation is avoided. The General Arrangement drawing provides pump base plate hold-down dimensions necessary for foundation design. Concrete Foundations (by others) Reinforced concrete is the most satisfactory foundation. After the concrete has cured, remove water and extraneous material, and dry the entire foundation. It is essential that the concrete be fully cured before mounting the equipment. Roughen the foundation surface to ensure proper bonding for the grout by scraping with a chipping hammer. Remove 0.5 - 1 inch (13 - 25 mm) minimum of foundation material to eliminate the low strength, high porosity surface concrete and to insure proper bonding for grout. This can vary depending on curing time, proper placement and depth of sound aggregate. If grout must be applied to damp concrete, thoroughly coat the concrete with a penetrating sealer at least four hours in advance of pouring the grout. Remove any loose particles, dirt, or oil-soaked concrete. All equipment mounting surfaces that will be in contact with grout must be clean. Remove rust, oil, paint or other extraneous material. Note: Do not use oil-based solvents for base plate cleaning. The residue can prevent grout adherence. Sulzer recommend a non-shrinking grout that is resistant to damage by any chemicals that may be spilled, and compatible with the highest temperature to which it may be exposed. Consult a reputable grout manufacturer for further information on selection, preparation and placement.
Section 3.3 Page 2


Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
Check the civil structure with respect to all dimensions prior to equipment installation, with careful reference to the General Arrangement drawing. Clearly mark the positions of all equipment axial and transverse centre lines on the associated foundations. Mark off the positions of packing plates on both sides of foundation bolt pockets, and check for level and flatness in two planes.
Section 3.3 Page 3


Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
3.3.2
Base Plate Installation

Refer to the General Arrangement drawing, to the Alignment Criteria and Tolerances diagram(s), and (when applicable) to any other supplied Foundation / Installation drawings, in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents.
CAUTION
Ensure that the pump tag number shown on the drawings / diagrams is that of the pumpset being installed. The assembled pump, with coupling hub installed on the shaft, was factory mounted on the base plate. The Sulzer-supplied gearbox and driver were also factory mounted on the base plate and complete with installed coupling hubs. Equipment that is bolted down should not be removed, but piping may be removed as required to enable access. Any loose equipment, not bolted down, must be removed.
CAUTION
Do not install coupling spacers. The spacers will be assembled after a precision alignment has been completed and all piping and auxiliary equipment has been installed.
3.3.2.1
Tools and Equipment Required

The following tools will be required temporarily for the installation work: 2 Dial gauges 1 Spirit level 1 Set of standard hand tools 1 Nikon theodolite (optical level) or equivalent. Suitable lifting devices for installation and repair work. Suitable lighting
3.3.2.2
Base Plate Installation - Concrete Foundation

Note: The supplied foundation anchor bolts for base plate mounting are pre-positioned / embedded in the concrete foundation plinth by others. 1. Ensure that the support plinth for the base plate is clean and dry. 2. Place suitable packers at both sides of each pre-positioned foundation bolt. The recommended thickness of the required packers is shown on the General Arrangement drawing. 3. Attach the supplied lifting beam to suitable lifting equipment and attach the shackles and slings to the lifting lugs provided on the base plate. Adjust the slings until the weight of the unit is uniformly distributed between them and the base plate is level.
CAUTION
On no account attempt to sling the pumpset from other lifting points. Do not allow the slings to foul pipework, instruments etc. when lifting the base plate. 4. Lift the base plate assembly vertically, and check the underside of the base plate for cleanliness. Remove rust, oil, paint or any other extraneous material. When epoxy grout has been specified, the underside of the base plate will have been coated with an epoxy primer. Take care not to damage these painted surfaces when cleaning mechanically or using solvents.
Section 3.3 Page 4


Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
Note: Do not use oil base solvents for base plate cleaning. The residue can prevent grout adherence. 5. Carefully lower the base plate until the mounting holes in the base plate just engage over the pre-positioned mounting bolts. When this is achieved, continue to lower the base plate until it rests on the pre-positioned packers. Monitor the bolts during base plate lowering to ensure that the base plate is not deflecting / bending the bolts. 6. The base plate is equipped with a number of datum buttons for levelling measurement, the positions of which are determined on assembly of the pumpset. These buttons are each identified on the Alignment Criteria and Tolerances diagram by a unique grid reference number, and one of the buttons is designated the zero datum. The buttons themselves are also etched with their grid reference number. A Nikon theodolite (optical level), or equivalent, may be used for measurement of the relative heights of all the other buttons to the zero datum. When the equipment was aligned at the works prior to despatch, the relative heights of the buttons were recorded on the Alignment Criteria and Tolerances diagram for the pumpset. Alter the height of the base plate by adjusting the thickness of the shims under the support areas adjacent to the foundation bolts. Use the levelling screws provided adjacent to the foundation bolt holes on the long sides of the base plate to lift the base plate. Ensure that the relative heights of the datum buttons are reproduced, as shown on the associated Alignment Criteria and Tolerances diagram. This will ensure that the minimum of further adjustment is required to the shimming under the equipment feet when aligning the couplings. Accurate reproduction of the datum levels should enable reproduction of as built alignment figures. 7. When the base plate is levelled correctly, fit the washers (if applicable) and the nuts to the foundation bolts. Tighten the lower nuts on each bolt evenly and fully to secure the base plate in position and re-check base plate levelling. If levelling remains correct tighten the upper nuts on each bolt to act as lock nuts. 8. On the base plate, loosen each pump, gearbox and driver hold-down bolt Individually, in turn to check for "Soft Feet" at each location. Use feeler gauges to check clearance between each mounting foot and the support surface. Ensure that the maximum clearance is 0.002 inch (0.05 mm); make corrections with minor adjustments to the base plate levelling screws and shims. Note: Contact the factory if this requirement cannot be achieved and do not the grout base plate without factory authorisation. When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to achieve correct setting positions, clearances and alignment values for the rotating assemblies during coupling alignment procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. 9. Refer to Section 3.4 - Coupling Alignment and check the shaft / coupling hub alignment between the pump and gearbox before fitting and securing pipework. 10. Refer to Section 3.3.3 - Main Piping, below, and fit and secure the main pipework.
Section 3.3 Page 5


Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
11. Refer to Section 3.4 - Coupling Alignment and re-check the shaft / coupling hub alignment between the pump and gearbox DURING and AFTER fitting and securing the main pipework. Note: With concrete foundations, when all pipework has been fitted and secured, and alignments have been checked and found to be satisfactory, grout the base plate fully to the foundations as required. Allow the grout to set before using the pumpset.
Section 3.3 Page 6


Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
3.3.3
Main Piping
When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to connect main (suction and discharge) and auxiliary pipework correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to vent and prime the main pipework and pump casing correctly as detailed in Section 3.5 - Commissioning and Operation MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Refer to the General Arrangement drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents.
CAUTION
During, and on completion of suction and discharge pipework connection, pump and gearbox shaft alignment MUST be re-checked; refer to Section 3.4 - Coupling Alignment. If any stage in the connection of pipework results in shaft misalignment, the pipework MUST be disconnected and modified so that alignment is not affected after the pipework is subsequently refitted. If the gearbox or driver installation involves major piping, co-ordinate the activities required by the equipment manufacturers instruction manual with the procedure described below. This section addresses only the requirements for installing the pump suction and discharge piping. Pipe diameters will have already been determined at the planning stage and many factors unknown to the pump manufacturer will have been taken into account. It is good engineering practice for the suction piping to be at least one pipe size larger than the nominal bore of the suction flange. Do not make abrupt change at the pump suction. Some advice for installing piping is given below.
3.3.3.1
Assembly
The pipework must be supported in an adequate manner to ensure that no bending moments or stresses caused by the weight of the pipework or thermal expansion are transmitted to the pump flanges (install an expansion piece). To prevent dirt and foreign particles from gaining access to the pump, the covers of the pipework branches are not to be removed until just before the pipework is connected. All the pipework is cleaned and checked by SULZER up to the termination points at the plate edge. Nevertheless, a further check should be made for cleanliness before continuation pipework is connected. The pipework connected to the pump must previously have been flushed clean of any foreign matter. In order to prevent any impurities entering the pump, it is recommended that a suction strainer is installed. If at any time, a reduction in pump suction pressure is observed then the strainer should be removed and cleaned. Assemble piping in accordance with pipe manufacturers instructions. All supports and expansion equipment must be installed before making connections to pump flanges.
Section 3.3 Page 7


Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
Route pipes to avoid sharp bends, particularly in the pump suction piping, as these greatly increase the frictional resistance within the piping. A high frictional resistance within the suction piping contributes to reduced available pressure at the pump suction, and low pressure can lead to cavitation at the impeller inlet.
Note: Multi-pump installations should have separate suction pipes to each pump. The exceptions are duty / standby pumps, which may have common suction piping as only one pump operates at any time. Size manifold such that velocities are similar for each pump. Ensure pipe flanges are in line and parallel to pump flanges before bolting up.
Note (where applicable): On flooded suction applications, the horizontal pipe legs must descend toward the pump. On suction lift applications, the horizontal pipe legs steadily rise toward the pump to prevent air locks. Where flanged joints are used, ensure that the correct gasket is fitted, and that it is correctly centred so that the bore of the pipe is not restricted. Check that valves and fittings have the same nominal bore as the piping being used. If the pump nozzles have a smaller nominal bore than the fittings, suitable taper pieces should be installed. To prevent turbulent flow into the pump, do not position the shut-off valve in the suction piping adjacent to the pump suction nozzle. The suction valve should be positioned with the hand wheel horizontally or vertically downwards to prevent air pockets forming.
Note: The systems must be designed and constructed to facilitate the free flow of fluid, and the transition from small to large pipe diameters must be gradual. As a general rule, the length of a concentric taper piece should be 5 - 7 times the difference in pipe diameters.
3.3.3.2
Pipe Strain Check

Refer to the General Arrangement drawing for details of the permissible branch loads on the suction and discharge branches. Check for pipe strain by removing pump hold-down bolts and dowel pins (and alignment keys when installed) and note pump shaft movement. Mount dial indicators on the gearbox shaft to measure movement of the shaft in the vertical and horizontal planes.
CAUTION
Pump shaft movement up to 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) in either direction is acceptable. Adjustments must be made to the piping if these limits are exceeded or serious damage to the pump may result.
3.3.3.3
Pressure Test
The pipework should be pressure tested in accordance with the relevant Standard.
Section 3.3 Page 8


Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
3.3.3.4
Final Alignment
Complete a final alignment check after major piping installation as described in Section 3.4 - Coupling Alignment.
CAUTION
If fitting the pipework has resulted in a mis-aligned coupling, the pipework must be disconnected and modified so that alignment is not affected after the pipework is subsequently refitted.
3.3.3.5
Cleaning the Piping

1. Flush out the supply tank and piping to remove all traces of foreign matter. Where piping has been welded, all welding slag must be removed. 2. It is recommended that a temporary suction strainer be installed before the start of commissioning to prevent any impurities from entering the pump. The strainer should be made from #8 mesh stainless steel (18-8) wire, with 0.063 inch openings and 2.16 psf double crimp weave, or from perforated 22 G (0.048 inch) stainless steel plate with 144 holes per sq inch (0.057 inch diameter holes). The illustration below shows a typical strainer installation.
CAUTION
If a suction strainer is installed, the use of finer mesh screens than specified may result in insufficient flow to the pump and subsequent damage. Contact a Sulzer representative before proceeding. 3. Monitor the pressure drop across the suction strainer. An increased pressure drop across the strainer of 5 lbf/in2 (34.5 kPa) indicates that the strainer should be removed and cleaned. After a period of time (24 hours minimum), system flushing should be complete and the suction strainer can be removed.
Spool Piece Stainless Steel Wire Screen Pressure Indicator Connection Strap Screen Support is Welded to the Screen and Plate Plate Gasket on Both Sides of Plate Pressure Indicator Connection
Section 3.3 Page 9


Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
3.3.4
Auxiliary Piping and Equipment

When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to connect auxiliary pipework correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations and to direct the vent and drain pipework to suitable safe locations / containers MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to vent and prime the auxiliary pipework and connected equipment correctly as detailed in Section 3.5 - Commissioning and Operation MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Refer to the General Arrangement drawing, and (when applicable) to any other supplied pipework drawings / diagrams in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents. The mechanical seal and pump casing must be fully vented prior to start-up. Connect the on-site pipework to the appropriate auxiliary pipework terminations on the pumpset, as shown on the drawings detailed above. Do not mix up connections. After initial installation, and following shutdowns for maintenance purposes, check the pipe runs.
3.3.4.1
Flushing of External Lube Oil System and Interconnecting Pipework

This generic procedure for pumps which utilise an external lubricating oil system is intended to ensure that the external lube oil system and connecting pipework is cleaned to a suitable level. When the supplied pump is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to prepare the external lube oil system correctly for operation in accordance with manufacturers information MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to IOM Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Refer as applicable to any supplied General Arrangement drawing or P & I Diagram, and to any other supplied pipework drawings / diagrams in IOM Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Drawings and Documents. Refer also to the lube oil system manufacturers information, by others. For lube oil systems supplied by Sulzer - On despatch from the Sulzer factory, all supplied lube oil system connecting pipework has been pickled and passivated in preparation for normal operation, and the complete lube oil system has been flushed clean.
Section 3.3 Page 10


Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
Carrying out the following procedure for flushing the lube oil system is strongly recommended in the following circumstances to prevent particle contamination: For Sulzer supplied systems, where interconnecting pipework has been disconnected and hard blanked for transport of the pumpset equipment to site. For lube oil systems supplied by others and installed / connected at site. For lube oil systems that have been stored without use for over six months.
Flushing Procedure 1. Refer to the lube oil system manufacturers information, detailed above, and: i. ii. Remove covers as necessary and examine the inside of the lube oil reservoir as far as possible for cleanliness. Remove any debris. Replace covers. Fill the reservoir to the correct level with the correct grade of clean oil.
iii. If there is a rundown tank in the circuit, and this requires pre-filling, fill the rundown tank to the correct level with the correct grade of clean oil. iv. Examine the duplex oil filter elements and ensure that they are clean. If necessary, clean or replace dirty elements. Select one filter element for use (duty filter). 2. Refer to the appropriate drawings, detailed above, and: i. Remove the oil pipeline restriction orifices in the supply lines to the pump and drive motor (Note the fitted position of each orifice plate to ensure correct refitting). Fit 100 mesh size gauze filters in place of the restriction orifices to achieve particle filtration level specified in API 614. Disconnect the common return oil pipeline to the lube oil reservoir, fit a 100 mesh size gauze filter in the line to achieve particle filtration level specified in API 614 and re-connect the pipe.
ii.
CAUTION
Record the position of ALL installed mesh filters to ensure their removal on completion of flushing. 3. Refer to the lube oil system manufacturers information, detailed above, and ensure that lube oil temperature is at least at minimum start temperature. If necessary, use the lube oil heater to raise the temperature. 4. Refer to the lube oil system manufacturers information, detailed above, and start the auxiliary lube oil pump to circulate oil. Monitor the oil level in the lube oil tank reservoir regularly during the flushing operation and top up with clean oil of the correct grade as required. 5. Check all lube oil pipework connections for leaks and ensure that an adequate flow of oil is visible at each bearing return sight glass. 6. At the drive motor bearing pedestals, ensure that oil flow does not result in leakage into the motor / rotor windings. 7. Monitor the differential pressure across the duty lube oil filter regularly during the flushing operation. When differential pressure increases to 0.6 bar.g, operate the filter changeover valve to select the other filter element as duty filter. Remove and replace or clean / refit the dirty filter element ready for future use. 8. At appropriate intervals (typically 3 hours), stop the auxiliary oil pump and remove each mesh filter in turn and record the degree of contamination. Clean each mesh filter and refit it in the same position in the pipework.
Section 3.3 Page 11


Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
9. Continue to flush the system until ALL mesh filters are found to be clean during routine examination. 10. Following completion of flushing, re-instate the lube oil system by removing ALL mesh filters, refitting the restriction orifices in their correct positions and re-connecting pipework. 11. Remove, clean and refit the current duty filter element ready for future use. 12. Run the auxiliary lube oil pump to check for leaks. When running temperature has stabilised, refer to the lube oil system manufacturers information, detailed above, and check that bearing oil supply pressure is correct within given limits. Stop the lube oil pump.
Section 3.3 Page 12


Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
3.3.5
Electrical and Instrument Connections

All electrical work must be carried out by fully qualified and competent personnel. When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to connect electrical equipment power supply and control cables and instrument cables correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Refer to the drawings and documentation available in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents, and to the ancillary equipment manufacturers information, later in this manual. Electricity can kill! Equipment being worked on must be isolated to prevent shocks to personnel, and inadvertent starting. All work on electrical installations should be closely controlled and a Permit to Work system is recommended. The pumpset and associated equipment must be properly earthed. Refer to the gearbox and driver manufacturers information and drawings, later in this manual, and connect power supply, control and instrument cables. Refer to the pumpset instrumentation and ancillary equipment manufacturers information, later in this manual, and make external instrument and equipment connections in the junction boxes provided.
3.3.5.1
Driver No-Load Run

When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to ensure correct direction of rotation for the driver in accordance with manufacturers information MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 3.3 - Installation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. When required and applicable, a No-Load run of the driver may be carried out with the driver uncoupled from the gearbox. "No-Load" driver testing will allow the driver rotation to be checked and provide an opportunity to make final equipment adjustments before coupling to the pump. A further run with the driver and gearbox coupled and the pump uncoupled may be carried out as required to further check the driver and also enable initial gearbox and coupling checks. The assembly of the equipment, and the electrical / instrumentation hook-up, must be completed in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. Refer to the appropriate manufacturers manual for details.
Section 3.3 Page 13


Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
3.3.5.2
CAUTION
Setting Axial Position Probe Clearance

The 0.50 mm value of total float in the thrust bearing (axial movement of the rotor) used in the following examples is a TYPICAL value only. During the setting procedure, the ACTUAL recorded float must be used to centralise the rotor, position the probes and set the indicators. The ALARM and TRIP settings (0.05 and 0.075 above FLOAT respectively) are correct. When axial position probes are fitted to the pump, the correct clearance for the probe can be set as follows: 1. Ensure that the coupling spacer is removed. 2. Position a dial test indicator (DTI) at a fixed point and set it to monitor the axial position of the pump-half coupling hub. 3. Move the pump rotor fully forward onto the inboard thrust pads. Set the DTI to ZERO. 4. Move the pump rotor fully back onto the outboard thrust pads. Record the total float in the thrust bearing (axial movement of the rotor). 5. Move the pump rotor to the mid point of the total float. Example: Rotor Fully Forward Rotor Fully Back Rotor Correctly Positioned 0.00 mm DTI Reading 0.50 mm DTI Reading 0.25 mm DTI Reading
6. With the rotor in its central position, set each axial probe by adjusting its position (gap) until an output voltage of 9 volts is obtained (using a multi-meter). Secure the probe in this position using the lock nuts or other locking method. Check that output remains at 9 volts - if not, re-position and re-lock probe as required to obtain correct output. 7. Check that the indication on the control panel reads ZERO. 8. Using the Example given in step 5, above: i. ii. Move the pump rotor fully forward onto the inboard thrust pads. Check that the indication on the control panel for both probes reads MINUS 0.25 mm. Move the pump rotor fully back onto the outboard thrust pads. Check that the indication on the control panel for both probes reads PLUS 0.25 mm.
iii. Initially, set the ALARM and TRIP values to 0.05 mm and 0.075 mm respectively above the MINUS and PLUS 0.25 mm float values. Example: FLOAT = 0.25 mm ALARM = 0.30 mm TRIP = 0.325 mm
Note: During commissioning, the control room indication of thrust bearing float (axial movement of the rotor) may increase slightly above the original value obtained by moving the rotor by hand. This is because the hydraulic force generated by the operating pump is greater than the hand pressure available to move the stationary rotor. If this increase in reading is observed during pump operation, the ALARM and TRIP settings should be reset to maintain the 0.05 and 0.075 values above the indicated float. Example: 0.335 mm
CAUTION
FLOAT = 0.26 mm
ALARM = 0.31
mm
TRIP =
DO NOT adjust the position of the probes in an attempt to obtain the original set values recorded at step 8, iii, above.
Section 3.3 Page 14


Section 3.3
Pump - Installation
4 15 Oct 2007
3.3.6
Coupling Spacer Installation

When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to install the coupling spacer and coupling guard(s) correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. The coupling hubs should already be mounted, the pump and gearbox positioned with the required shaft end separations according to the General Arrangement drawing, and a precision alignment including "Cold - Offset" completed. Refer to Section 3.8 - Drive Coupling, and to the coupling, drive motor and gearbox manufacturers information, later in this manual, for details on fitting of the coupling hubs and the coupling spacers. The coupling manufacturers instructions contain detailed information for correctly installing the spacers and tightening the coupling bolts to the correct torque value(s).
CAUTION
Read the coupling manufacturers information before proceeding.
Lock power breakers to the off position. Install the coupling spacers and also the coupling guards. Check for adequate clearance between the guards and the couplings.
3.3.7
Storage
If the equipment is not going into immediate service, refer to the storage instructions in Section 3.2 - Receiving, and also to any available storage information in the ancillary equipment manufacturers documentation, later in this manual.
Section 3.3 Page 15


Document No: Alignment 01 3 27 Sep 2003
Section 3.4
Pump - Coupling Alignment
3.4
Coupling Alignment
The supplied pump and pumpset equipment MAY be designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Alternatively, if the pumpset equipment IS NOT designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area, this will be indicated in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 Hazardous Area Operation. Refer to Section 2.4 - General Safety for general safety advice for operators and maintenance personnel before starting any maintenance activity. Refer also to specific safety advice contained as applicable within the maintenance procedures included in this manual. When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to achieve correct setting positions, clearances and alignment values for the rotating assemblies during coupling alignment procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Refer to the General Arrangement drawing, the pump Longitudinal Section drawing and the Alignment Criteria & Tolerances drawing (when available) in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents. Refer also to the coupling and driver (and any other main drive train equipment) manufacturers information and drawings, later in this manual.
CAUTION
Failure to carry out proper alignment can lead to damage to the coupling and to the pump and driver bearings. When applicable, ensure that any rotor locking devices are removed before attempting to turn rotors. Bearings must be lubricated using the correct grade of oil specified for operational use BEFORE attempting to turn rotors. Avoid any unnecessary turning of machine rotors. Whenever practical, the pump must be filled with product before turning by hand. Stainless steel fitted pumps are particularly susceptible to pick-up and turning by hand should be avoided whenever possible.
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
Section 3.4 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.04 Alignment 01-3.doc

Section 3.4
3.4.1
Scope
This section describes recommended procedures for aligning the motor (driving machine) to the pump (driven machine) for a horizontal pumpset. Where the drive train includes other equipment (i.e. gearbox, geared fluid coupling, booster pump etc.), refer to the illustrated examples below and adapt the procedures as follows: 1. Determine which machine is to be levelled and positioned correctly and then used as the reference machine. The position of this machine will then remain fixed, and the adjacent machine(s) will be moved as necessary to align with it. 2. Ensure that the reference machine is level and positioned correctly. 3. Work outwards from the reference machine, and position the next machine A in the train with the correct gap between coupling flange faces or shaft ends (as applicable) and align the shaft to the shaft of the reference machine. 4. Where a further machine B is included in the drive train, use machine A as the reference machine to position and align B to A. In the same way, position and align C to B, etc. B A Reference Machine A B
Reference Machine
Section 3.4 Page 2


Section 3.4
3.4.2
3.4.2.1
General
Coupling Hub Spacing and Angular Alignment
Note: Where coupling flange faces do not align with shaft ends, distance between coupling flange faces (DBCFF or DBFF) is normally specified on the appropriate drawings (detailed above), and should be used as the reference dimension for setting correct spacing between machines. The distance between shaft ends (DBSE) may also be shown but is not to be used as a reference dimension. Where coupling flange faces do align with shaft ends, distance between coupling flange faces, DBSE is normally specified on the appropriate drawings (detailed above), and should be used as the reference dimension for setting correct spacing between machines. The rotating equipment coupling hubs must be a specific distance apart as detailed on the drawings and documents detailed above. This should be checked and adjusted if necessary. Ensure that the correct allowances for relative thermal growth are taken into account when aligning the equipment. The faces of the hubs must be parallel to within the tolerance detailed on the drawings and documents detailed above. This should be checked and adjusted if necessary. Note: The standard tolerance is 0.05 mm and this should be used unless order specific drawings with a different tolerance are included within the IOM manual
3.4.2.2
Coupling Hub Radial Alignment

The axes of the shafts must be parallel and concentric to within the tolerance detailed on the drawings and documents detailed above. Radial alignment of the coupling hubs must first be checked before the pipework is installed. Radial alignment of the hubs must also be monitored during pipework connection and re-checked after pipework connection to ensure that pipework connection does not adversely affect alignment. If alignment is affected, the pipe connections must be re-made until alignment remains correct. Note: The standard tolerance is 0.05 mm and this should be used unless order specific drawings with a different tolerance are included within the IOM manual
CAUTION
Do not adjust driver OR driven machine positions to correct alignment errors caused by pipe connection.
Section 3.4 Page 3


Section 3.4
3.4.3
Initial Alignment
1. Obtain the requirement for cold-offset from the drawings and documents detailed above. 2. Loosen the hold-down bolts on the moveable machine, lift the machine and insert sufficient shims under the mounting feet to approximately align the shaft with the shaft of the reference machine, taking into account the cold-offset. A straight edge and a set of feeler gauges should be used to make the approximate alignment. Shims - slotted shims the same size as the mounting foot must be used. The shim stock should ideally be stainless steel and be available in various thicknesses. Where a shim stack of thickness greater than 0.13 inches (3 mm) occurs, it must be replaced by a plate of equivalent thickness before adding more shims. 3. Check the position of the moveable machine in relation to the reference machine shaft and set to the DBCFF or DBSE (as applicable) dimension shown on the drawings and documents detailed above.
CAUTION
Refer to the equipment manufacturers information, detailed above, and ensure that the rotating assembly in each machine is set to the required position before moving the machine to the correct DBCFF or DBSE position (i.e. an electric motor may require the rotor to be set at the magnetic centre position). 4. Tighten down the reference and moveable machine hold-down bolts to the correct torque value - refer to the drawings and documents detailed above or to Torque Tightening of Fasteners, later in this manual.
3.4.4
Final Alignment
There are several satisfactory methods of checking alignment. The face and periphery method, and the reverse indicator method are detailed on the following pages. Other methods, involving the use of optical / electronic equipment may be suitable, but because of the wide range of equipment available, these are not detailed. Refer to the equipment manufacturers information if this type of equipment is to be used.
Section 3.4 Page 4


Section 3.4
3.4.5
Coupling Alignment - Face and Periphery Method

Note: The coupling hubs must be disconnected, i.e. the spacer unit removed. The face and periphery alignment method involves: Checking DBCFF or DBSE (as applicable) and angular alignment by taking average gap (face) readings using inside micrometers. Checking coupling hub radial alignment by taking periphery readings using a dial indicator.
12
3.4.5.1
Coupling Hub Spacing and Angular Alignment Check

1. Refer to the Illustration right. Mark both coupling hubs at the same point, (i.e. 12 oclock position), to identify the relative positions of the reference and moveable machine shafts. 2. Refer to the Illustration below. 3. Measure the gap between the coupling faces as close to the rim as possible at 12 oclock, 3 o clock, 6 oclock and 9 oclock, and record the results - see Section 3.4.5.3 - Blank Angular Alignment Check Record Sheet.
Internal micrometer
Looking Towards Driver
6 Clock Position Indication
Reference machine - half coupling hub Angular Alignment Check
Moveable machine - half coupling hub
4. Turn the reference and moveable machine shafts by 90 to the 3 oclock position and then re-measure the gap at the four clock positions (12, 3, 6 and 9), and record the results. 5. Repeat step (4) twice more, so that four sets of measurements have been taken. 6. The record sheet will now show four columns of four figures, each column identified by a clock position (12, 3, 6 and 9). Add up each column and divide by four to give an average gap measurement. Note: This method ensures that variables such as axial shaft position and tolerances on coupling machining are not misinterpreted and influence the true coupling alignment readings. 7. If the obtained values exceed the permitted tolerance, adjust the position of the moveable machine and repeat the checks until acceptable readings are obtained.
Section 3.4 Page 5


Section 3.4
3.4.5.2
Coupling Hub Radial Alignment Check

1. Refer to Section 3.4.5.1 - Coupling Hub Spacing and Angular Alignment Check, above and mark both coupling hubs at the same point (i.e. 12 oclock position) to identify the relative positions of the reference and moveable machine shafts. 2. Refer to the Illustration below.
DTI
Moveable machine - half coupling hub Radial Alignment Check
Reference machine - half coupling hub
3.
Mount the clock gauge (dial test indicator) rigidly on the half coupling hub fitted to the reference machine. Readings are to be taken on the half coupling hub fitted to the moveable machine. Position the clock gauge (dial test indicator) probe at Top Dead Centre (12 oclock) and set gauge reading to zero. Turn both shafts by 90 so that the clock gauge (dial test indicator) probe is at the 3 oclock position. Record the reading on the clock gauge (dial test indicator) results see Section 3.4.5.4 - Blank Radial Alignment Check Record Sheet. Repeat step (5) for the 6 oclock and 9 oclock positions of the clock gauge (dial test indicator) probe. Finally, turn both shafts to the 12 oclock position. The clock gauge (dial test indicator) should again read zero.
4. 5.
6. 7.
Note: If opposite readings are plus and minus, the readings are added together to determine the maximum reading.
Section 3.4 Page 6


Section 3.4
3.4.5.3
Blank Angular Alignment Check Record Sheet

Equipment Number: Shaft Positions 12 3 6 9 Column Total Average 12 Gap Measurement 3 6 9
3.4.5.4
Blank Radial Alignment Record Sheet
Equipment Number: Shaft Positions 12 3 6 9 Clock Gauge (Dial Test Indicator) Reading 0
Section 3.4 Page 7


Section 3.4
3.4.6
Coupling Alignment - Reverse Indicator Method

The reverse indicator alignment method is a graph analysis method based on reverse indicator readings at the two hubs and the distance from the reference machine hub to the movable machine hub and mounting feet to achieve a precise alignment. The most effective way of recording data as it is collected is to plot it on square grid graph paper. Two charts are necessary to complete the task; one for the vertical alignment and one for the horizontal alignment as described below. Ideally, both reference and moveable machine hubs should be turned together. This can be achieved by connecting them together using the coupling spacer (loosely connected) or alternatively, using a threaded stock piece through both hubs. Vertical alignment is checked first, and any required adjustment is applied. Then, the horizontal alignment is checked and any required adjustment is applied. Vertical alignment is then re-checked.
3.4.6.1
Vertical Alignment Check

1. Mount two dial indicators as shown on the illustration, right, with the indicator tips at the top centre of the hub peripheries. Ensure that the supports for each indicator are sufficiently rigid to eliminate any sag that may cause spurious readings. 2. Zero both indicators. 3. Rotate both hubs through 180 and record both indicator readings. 4. Refer to the illustration, below. Measure the distance C between the dial indicator tips. 5. Measure the distance F1 between the dial indicator tip on the reference machine hub and the centre line of the moveable machine front foot. 6. Measure the distance F2 between the dial indicator tip on the reference machine hub and the centre line of the moveable machine back foot.
C
Moveable Machine
Reference Machine
F1 F2
7. Draw a horizontal axis in the centre of the chart. Mark the units for the horizontal axis along the top or bottom of the chart and mark the units for the vertical axis along the right hand or left hand edge. Choose suitable scales to ensure that the F2 dimension almost spans the chart horizontally and that the eccentricity value for the reference
Section 3.4 Page 8


Section 3.4
machine hub (this is half of the total indicator reading) almost spans the chart vertically from the centre axis to the top or bottom edge. See the Example Chart, below. 8. Measure off the distances C, F1 and F2 on the horizontal axis. Draw vertical lines through C, F1 and F2. See the Example Chart, below.
9. On the extreme right scale B, measure off and mark the eccentricity value for the reference machine hub (half of the total indicator reading). If the value is POSITIVE, (i.e. indicator tip moves into indicator body), it should be placed above the horizontal axis of the chart. If the value is NEGATIVE, (i.e. indicator tip moves out from body), it should be placed below the horizontal axis of the chart. 10. On the vertical line C, measure off and mark the eccentricity value for the moveable machine hub (half of the total indicator reading). These readings must be reversed before plotting. If the value is POSITIVE, (i.e. indicator tip moves into indicator body), it should be placed BELOW the horizontal axis of the chart. If the value is NEGATIVE, (i.e. indicator tip moves out from body), it should be placed ABOVE the horizontal axis of the chart. 11. Join the two plotted points and extend the line to cut the vertical lines representing F1 and F2. This extended line represents the relationship between the reference machine shaft and the moveable machine shaft. The vertical distance between the plotted line and the centre axis line where it cuts F1 and F2 indicates the vertical correction required at the front and back mounting feet of the movable machine in the same units as used on the vertical scale of the chart. 12. If the obtained values exceed the permitted tolerance, adjust the thickness of the shimming under the mounting feet of the moveable machine in accordance with the plotted corrections. A positive correction value will require removal of shims.
3.4.6.2
Vertical Alignment Example

Refer to the Metric and Imperial Example Charts on the following pages. 1. The following readings have been recorded: Reference machine hub TIR Moveable machine hub TIR Dimension C Dimension F1 Dimension F2 And the following values have been calculated: Reference machine hub eccentricity Moveable machine hub eccentricity -0.711 mm (-0.028 inches) +0.533 mm (+0.021 inches) -1.423 mm (-0.056 inches) +1.067 mm (+0.042 inches) 171.45 mm (6.75 inches) 349.25 mm (13.75 inches) 603.25 mm (23.75 inches)
2. Plot the values on the chart. Draw the vertical lines through C, F1 and F2 and draw an extended line through the two hub eccentricity values to cut the vertical lines. 3. Measure the distance between the extended line and the centre axis line where it cuts F1 and F2. The measurement along F1 is the vertical correction required at the front mounting feet of the moveable machine and the measurement along F2 is the vertical correction required at the back mounting feet of the movable machine - both in the same units as used on the vertical scale of the chart.
Section 3.4 Page 9

1.52 1.27
F2 F1
1.02 0.76 0.51
Section 3.4
Correction at Moveable Machine Back Foot Correction at Moveable Machine Front Foot
0.25 0 0.25 0.51 0.76 1.02
Moveable Machine Hub Eccentricity
Reference Machine Hub Eccentricity
1.27 1.52
Revision:
Document No:
Revision Date:
711
660
610
559
508
457
406
356
305
254
203
152
102
51
Coupling Alignment Record (Example) Plant Item No. + 0.36 + 0.1 Coupling Type D.B.S.E. P28 M-70 165.1 Measurement C Measurement F1 Measurement F2 171.45 345 590
Date:
09 May 2002
Correction
Alignment 01
27 Sep 2003
Reference Hub TIR
- 1.423
F1
Section 3.4 Page 10
Moveable Hub TIR
+ 1.067
F2
Section 3.4
F2 F1 C
Correction at Moveable Machine Back Foot Correction at Moveable Machine Front Foot
Moveable Machine Hub Eccentricity
Reference Machine Hub Eccentricity

Revision: Document No: Revision Date:
Coupling Alignment Record (Example) Plant Item No. + 14 +3 Coupling Type D.B.S.E. P28 M-70 6.5 Measurement C Measurement F1 Measurement F2 6.75 13.75 23.75
Date:
09 May 2002
Correction
Alignment 01
27 Sep 2003
Reference Hub TIR
- 56
F1
Section 3.4 Page 11
Moveable Hub TIR
+ 42
F2

Section 3.4
3.4.6.3
Horizontal Alignment Check

Having checked the vertical alignment and carried out any required adjustment, the horizontal alignment must be checked. The procedure is the same as for the vertical alignment check except that the two dial indicators must be moved through 90 with the indicator tips in the centre of the hub peripheries at the 90 (3-o-clock) position to measure horizontal TIR. Record the TIR of the two hubs, and measure C, F1 and F2. Plot a chart in the same way as for vertical alignment. The vertical difference between the plotted line and the centre axis line where it cuts F1 and F2 indicates the horizontal correction required at the front and back mounting feet of the moveable machine in the same units as used on the vertical scale of the chart. If the obtained values exceed the permitted tolerance, a positive correction value (i.e. above the centre axis line), indicates that the feet of the moveable machine should be moved to the left when viewed from the drive end. For negative correction values (i.e. below the centre axis line), the feet of the moveable machine should be moved to the right when viewed from the drive end. Adjust the horizontal position of the moveable machine mounting feet in accordance with the plotted corrections.
3.4.6.4
Vertical Alignment Re-Check

When horizontal alignment has been checked, and any required adjustment applied, refer to Section 3.4.6.1 - Vertical Alignment Check, above and re-check vertical alignment.
Section 3.4 Page 12


Document No: CommOp 01 3 30 Oct 2006
Section 3.5
Pump - Commissioning and Operation
3.5
Commissioning and Operation

The supplied pump and pumpset equipment MAY be designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Alternatively, if the pumpset equipment IS NOT designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area, this will be indicated in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 Hazardous Area Operation.
3.5.1
Commissioning
Refer to Section 2.4 - General Safety for general safety advice for operators and maintenance personnel before starting any commissioning activity. Refer also to specific safety advice contained as applicable within the commissioning procedures included in this manual. Note: Each installation will be subject to its own local procedures for the issuing and cancelling of permits to work on the plant. These are not covered by this manual but must be followed in each case. For the purpose of this manual, it is assumed that the connected systems are available and that there is no restriction on the operation of the pumpset. Refer to the General Arrangement drawing, and to any other applicable drawings, especially those documents covering instrumentation, wiring, pipework, control and lubrication systems in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents. Refer as required to the equipment data sheets in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Equipment Data Sheets, and to the performance curves and test data in Section 1 Leading Particulars, Performance Curves and Test Data. Refer also to the manufacturers information for supplied ancillary equipment, included as inserts later in this manual.
Section 3.5 Page 1

K:\In Work Manuals\48329, 30 CP CD Khurais\48330\S3.05 CommOp 01-3.doc

Section 3.5
3.5.1.1
Pre-Commissioning Checks
When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during pre-commissioning procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided: failure to connect main (suction and discharge) pipework correctly to the pump casing in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations failure to connect auxiliary pipework and associated equipment correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations and to direct the vent and drain pipework to suitable safe locations / containers failure to prepare the mechanical seals and associated equipment for operation in accordance with manufacturers information failure to connect electrical equipment power supply and control cables and instrument cables correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations failure to prepare the driver correctly for operation, and to ensure correct direction of rotation for the driver, in accordance with manufacturers information failure to prepare the external lube oil system correctly for operation in accordance with manufacturers information failure to prepare the gearbox correctly for operation in accordance with manufacturers information failure to install the coupling spacers and coupling guard(s) correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Ensure that all aspects of the installation procedure have been completed. In particular, ensure that base plate levelling and installation has been completed, main and auxiliary piping has been connected and secured correctly and that all electrical and instrument connections have been completed. Ensure all debris and any oil spills left over from the installation procedure have been cleaned up. Examine all electrical connections and earthing connections for completion and security. Check the earth loop impedance. Check instrumentation insulation resistances. Check the set-points of all controls and instrumentation. Fit and close all terminal box covers before turning on electrical supplies. Check all pipework connections for security. Check that there are no loose bolts. Refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information, later in this manual, and check that the mechanical seals and associated equipment are ready for operation.
CAUTION
Failure to disengage the mechanical seal restraining fixtures before running the pump will result in damage to the mechanical seal and pump components.
Section 3.5 Page 2


Section 3.5
When an external lube oil system is installed, refer to Section 3.11 - Lubrication, to any applicable documentation in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 Sulzer Drawings and Documents, and to the lube system manufacturers information and drawings, later in this manual, and ensure that the system is ready for operation.
CAUTION
When a 3-way temperature control valve (TCV) is fitted to control lube oil flow to a cooler, manual over-ride must be used during system priming to ensure that the cooler is filled with oil. When a gearbox is installed, refer to the gearbox manufacturers information and drawings, later in this manual, and ensure that the gearbox is ready for operation. Ensure that drive shafts are not binding when rotated. Refer to Section 3.4 - Coupling Alignment and ensure that alignment has been checked and adjusted as necessary. Refer to the driver manufacturers information, later in this manual, and check that the driver is ready for operation. In particular: check that the motor is suitable for the electricity supply voltage and frequency. measure the motor insulation resistance using a Megger. If appropriate, check the motor anti-condensation heater, which must be wired so that it switches off when the motor starts, and on again when it stops. If required and applicable, refer to the driver manufacturers information and carry out a light run of the motor or other driver - i.e. with the coupling spacer removed. For pumpsets with gearboxes, this should be followed by a run of the motor and gearbox together, before the pumps are connected. Refer to Section 3.8 - Drive Coupling and ensure that the coupling spacers are correctly fitted, before fitting the coupling guards. Ensure all guards are fitted.
Section 3.5 Page 3


Section 3.5
3.5.1.2
Commissioning Runs
When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during commissioning procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided: failure to vent and prime the main pipework and pump casing, and the auxiliary pipework and connected equipment (i.e. mechanical seals and associated equipment, coolers, instruments) correctly, in accordance with manufacturers information failure to operate the external lube oil system correctly, in accordance with manufacturers information failure to operate the driver correctly, in accordance with manufacturers information failure to operate the gearbox correctly, in accordance with manufacturers information
Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Note: Details of pumpset operation and system monitoring by automatic or remote systems (by others) is beyond the scope of this manual.
CAUTION
Note the locations of emergency stop buttons prior to starting the equipment in case problems arise requiring immediate action to prevent possible damage occurring. 1. Refer to Section 3.5.1.1 - Pre-Commissioning Checks and ensure that all applicable pre-commissioning checks have been completed. 2. Ensure that pumpset drain valves are closed. 3. Check that the pump discharge valve is initially closed. Where a significant temperature difference exists between the stationary pump and the product, failure to allow the pump casing temperature and product temperature to equalise at the specified rate to within specified limits before pump start up can cause damage to the pump from thermal shock. Refer to the following table. Failure to operate the pump within the temperature difference and gradient parameters stated below may damage the pump. Temperature Equalisation to Avoid Thermal Shock
CAUTION
CAUTION
Pump Type CD
Conditions Requiring Temperature Equalisation

Product temperature more than 56C (100F) above pump temperature measured at outside of parting flange at suction end of pump
Rate of Equalisation
8C (14F) / minute (Maximum) before pump operation
Where a temperature difference exceeding the above limit exists between the pump casing and the product, start a controlled circulation of product through the pump to achieve a gradual and steady increase in pump temperature within the rate specified above. Measure casing temperatures at several points. Continues
Section 3.5 Page 4


Section 3.5
Continued Depending on site pipework layout, circulation of product MAY be: from suction (using the pressure in the suction line, possibly from a booster pump), through the pump and out via a minimum flow valve. from suction (using the pressure in the suction line, possibly from a booster pump), through the pump and out via a partially open discharge valve. In this case, the pressure in the suction line must be above the pressure in the discharge line and also high enough to open an in-line nonreturn valve. via a purpose designed pump heating circuit. This would typically inject warm product into the pump discharge branch and return from the pump suction branch.
Note: In certain installations, where hot product is extremely remote from the pump, the product temperature close to the stationary pump may be well below the condition requiring temperature equalisation. In these cases, if pump temperature is likely to rise sufficiently before hot product reaches the pump during operation, then temperature equalisation may not be required. Note: Abnormal Operation - Thermal transients are sudden upward or downward temperature changes, usually caused by abnormal plant conditions. Occurrences should be minimised. Should thermal transients, or exposure to low ambient temperatures be anticipated, then use of a thermal insulation enclosure or jacket is recommended. 4. Gradually (slowly) open the pump suction valve fully to allow the pump casing to fill with liquid via the suction branch (normally TP1).
CAUTION
Before running the pump, ensure that the suction valve is fully open. 5. Ensure that any required equipment cooling liquid supply is available and selected ON. Refer to the cooling equipment manufacturers information and vent the cooler(s) and associated equipment as required. Ensure that vent connections are closed when an air-free flow of liquid is obtained. 6. Vent the pump and main pipework system (as far as possible) of trapped air. Automatic or manual vent valves will normally be provided where necessary - some pumps, with vertical suction and discharge connections are self venting. When all air is expelled, and an air-free flow of product is obtained, ensure the vent valves are closed. Note: If the discharge pipework downstream of the discharge valve cannot be fully primed, it may be possible to fill the line using the pump, providing that the valve can be throttled to control the pump flow to not more than 120% of the best efficiency point (BEP) for all operating conditions. Close each vent valve when an air-free flow of product is obtained. When applicable, open instrument isolation and vent connections. Close the vent connections when an air-free flow of product is obtained.
CAUTION
To avoid thermal shocking of mechanical seal faces by directing flushing / cooling / quenching flow on to hot (operating) seal faces, external fluid supplies (when applicable) must be available and selected on BEFORE STARTING THE PUMP. 7. Ensure that any required mechanical seal flushing / cooling / quenching liquid supply is available and selected ON before starting the pump. 8. Refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information and vent the mechanical seals and associated equipment as required. Ensure that vent connections are closed when an air-free flow of liquid is obtained.
Section 3.5 Page 5


Section 3.5
Do not operate the pump against a closed discharge valve (except where a minimum flow circuit is installed), or below minimum recommended flow rate. When supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, operation of pump against a closed discharge valve without minimum flow circuit MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. 9. If a minimum flow system is installed, ensure that the minimum flow valve is locked in the open position. If a minimum flow system is not installed, ensure that the discharge valve is set to approximately 10% open. 10. When applicable, select the compressed air supply ON. In particular, where pump (and other equipment as appropriate) bearing oil seals require an air supply, ensure that it is selected ON. 11. When an external lube oil system is installed, refer to Section 3.11 - Lubrication, to any applicable documentation in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 Sulzer Drawings and Documents, and to the lube system manufacturers information and drawings, later in this manual. Check that the lube oil system is ready for operation. In particular, ensure that the system is fully primed - refer to Section 3.5.1.1 - pre-Commissioning Checks. Operate the lube oil system to provide the required flow of oil to the appropriate bearings BEFORE the drive motor is started. When flow indicating equipment is available, check lubricating oil flow indications. 12. Refer to the driver manufacturers manual and start the driver. Observe that the driver runs up to speed quickly. Note: Should the pressure developed by the pump not increase steadily during the starting operation, it is probably a sign that air is present in the pump circuit, and the pump unit should therefore be shut down and the priming operation re-commenced. 13. Gradually open the pump discharge valve as required to regulate the flow rate / differential pressure to the required value.
CAUTION
Do not throttle the suction valve to control pump output. To do so may incur damage through cavitation within the pump. Operating Checks Head: As soon as operating speed is reached, there should be pressure at the pump discharge. Shut down immediately if this does not happen. Pump / Driver Speed: When applicable, check operating speed remains within specified parameters. Motor Current: When an electric motor driver is installed, the full load current shown on the motor nameplate must not be exceeded. Vibration: When vibration measuring equipment is available, monitor vibration levels. Shut down the pumpset if the vibration limits are significantly exceeded, but note that the vibration levels will be higher at reduced flow than at the normal operating condition.
Section 3.5 Page 6


Section 3.5
Leaks: Any leak signifies a problem. Particular attention should be paid to leaks in the area of the shaft mechanical seals, which could indicate a failed seal. Oil Supply: Monitor oil level until it stabilises. When an external lube oil system is installed, and flow indicating equipment is available, monitor lubricating oil flow. When temperature measuring equipment is available, monitor oil temperature and ensure that it does not exceed the maximum allowable value. Shut down the pumpset if the temperature limit is significantly exceeded. Bearing Temperature: When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, excessive bearing temperatures during pump operation MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. When temperature measuring equipment is available, monitor bearing temperatures until they stabilise and ensure that they do not exceed the maximum allowable value. Shut down the pumpset if the temperature limit is significantly exceeded. Pump Case Temperature: When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, excessive pump casing temperature during pump operation MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. When temperature measuring equipment is available, monitor pump casing temperature and ensure that it does not exceed the maximum allowable value. Shut down the pumpset if the temperature limit is significantly exceeded. Suction Strainer: A suction strainer may be fitted temporarily for initial operation. Refer to Section 3.3 Installation, Main Piping. Monitor pressure drop across the suction screen. Clean the strainer as necessary, and remove the equipment after the elapsed time prescribed. Performance Monitoring Monitor pump performance and compare with the operating range of the pump curves. Refer to Equipment Data Sheets and Performance Curves and Test Data. During initial commissioning runs, take readings and measurements of temperatures, pressures, motor current, vibration levels etc. as frequently as practicable. When conditions have stabilised, readings should be taken every half to one hour. Record these in a log book for future reference. The frequency of checks may be decreased following satisfactory running, at the discretion of the engineer in charge.
Section 3.5 Page 7


Section 3.5
3.5.2
Operation
Refer to Section 2.4 - General Safety for general safety advice for operators and maintenance personnel before starting any operating activity. Refer also to specific safety advice contained as applicable within the operating procedures included in this manual. Note: Each installation will be subject to its own local procedures for the issuing and cancelling of permits to work on the plant. These are not covered by this manual but must be followed in each case. For the purpose of this manual, it is assumed that the connected systems are available and that there is no restriction on the operation of the pumpset. Refer to the General Arrangement drawing, and to any other applicable drawings, especially those documents covering instrumentation, wiring, pipework, control and lubrication systems in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents. Refer as required to the equipment data sheets in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Equipment Data Sheets, and to the performance curves and test data in Section 1 Leading Particulars, Performance Curves and Test Data. Refer also to the manufacturers information for supplied ancillary equipment, included as inserts later in this manual.
Section 3.5 Page 8


Section 3.5
3.5.2.1
Routine Runs
When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during operating procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided: failure to vent and prime the main pipework and pump casing, and the auxiliary pipework and connected equipment (i.e. mechanical seals and associated equipment, coolers, instruments) correctly, in accordance with manufacturers information failure to prepare and operate the external lube oil system correctly, in accordance with manufacturers information failure to prepare and operate the driver correctly, in accordance with manufacturers information failure to prepare and operate the gearbox correctly, in accordance with manufacturers information
Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Note: Details of pumpset operation and system monitoring by automatic or remote systems (by others) is beyond the scope of this manual.
CAUTION
Note the locations of emergency stop buttons prior to starting the equipment in case problems arise requiring immediate action to prevent possible damage occurring. Where a significant temperature difference exists between the stationary pump and the product, failure to allow the pump casing temperature and product temperature to equalise at the specified rate to within specified limits before pump start up can cause damage to the pump from thermal shock. Refer to the following table. Failure to operate the pump within the temperature difference and gradient parameters stated below may damage the pump. Temperature Equalisation to Avoid Thermal Shock
CAUTION
CAUTION
Pump Type CD
Conditions Requiring Temperature Equalisation

Product temperature more than 56C (100F) above pump temperature measured at outside of parting flange at suction end of pump
Rate of Equalisation
8C (14F) / minute (Maximum) before pump operation
Where a temperature difference exceeding the above limit exists between the pump casing and the product, start a controlled circulation of product through the pump to achieve a gradual and steady increase in pump temperature within the rate specified above. Measure casing temperatures at several points. Depending on site pipework layout, circulation of product MAY be: from suction (using the pressure in the suction line, possibly from a booster pump), through the pump and out via a minimum flow valve.
Continues
Section 3.5 Page 9


Section 3.5
Continued from suction (using the pressure in the suction line, possibly from a booster pump), through the pump and out via a partially open discharge valve. In this case, the pressure in the suction line must be above the pressure in the discharge line and also high enough to open an in-line nonreturn valve. via a purpose designed pump heating circuit. This would typically inject warm product into the pump discharge branch and return from the pump suction branch.
Note: In certain installations, where hot product is extremely remote from the pump, the product temperature close to the stationary pump may be well below the condition requiring temperature equalisation. In these cases, if pump temperature is likely to rise sufficiently before hot product reaches the pump during operation, then temperature equalisation may not be required. Note: Abnormal Operation - Thermal transients are sudden upward or downward temperature changes, usually caused by abnormal plant conditions. Occurrences should be minimised. Should thermal transients, or exposure to low ambient temperatures be anticipated, then use of a thermal insulation enclosure or jacket is recommended. 1. Gradually (slowly) open the pump suction valve fully to allow the pump casing to fill with liquid via the suction branch (normally TP1).
CAUTION
Before running the pump, ensure that the suction valve is fully open. 2. Check that the pump and system are fully primed for operation. If not, refer to Section 3.5.1.2 - Commissioning Runs, above, and complete applicable priming actions. 3. When a gearbox is installed, refer to the gearbox manufacturers information and drawings, later in this manual, and ensure that the gearbox is ready for operation.
CAUTION
To avoid thermal shocking of mechanical seal faces by directing flushing / cooling / quenching flow on to hot (operating) seal faces, external fluid supplies (when applicable) must be available and selected on BEFORE STARTING THE PUMP. 4. Ensure that any required mechanical seal flushing / cooling / quenching liquid supply is available and selected ON before starting the pump. Where mechanical seal system(s) are installed, ensure that they are ready for operation. 5. Ensure that any required cooling liquid supply is available. Do not operate the pump against a closed discharge valve (except where a minimum flow circuit is installed), or below minimum recommended flow rate. When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, operation of the pump against a closed discharge valve without a minimum flow circuit MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. 6. If a minimum flow system is installed, ensure that the minimum flow valve is locked in the open position. If a minimum flow system is not installed, ensure that the discharge valve is set to approximately 10% open. 7. When applicable, select the compressed air supply ON. In particular, where pump (and other equipment as appropriate) bearing oil seals require an air supply, ensure that it is selected ON.
Section 3.5 Page 10


Section 3.5
8. When an external lube oil system is installed, refer to Section 3.11 - Lubrication, to any applicable documentation in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 Sulzer Drawings and Documents, and to the lube system manufacturers information and drawings, later in this manual. Check that the lube oil system is ready for operation. In particular, ensure that the system is fully primed - refer to Section 3.5.1.1 - pre-Commissioning Checks. Operate the lube oil system to provide the required flow of oil to the appropriate bearings BEFORE the drive motor is started. When flow indicating equipment is available, check lubricating oil flow indications. 9. Refer to the driver manufacturers manual and start the driver. Observe that the driver runs up to speed quickly. Note: Should the pressure developed by the pump not increase steadily during the starting operation, it is probably a sign that air is present in the pump circuit, and the pump unit should therefore be shut down and the priming operation re-commenced. 10. Gradually open the pump discharge valve as required to regulate the flow rate / differential pressure to the required value.
CAUTION
Do not throttle the suction valve to control pump output. To do so may incur damage through cavitation within the pump.
3.5.2.2
Operating Checks
Head As soon as operating speed is reached, there should be pressure at the pump discharge. Shut down immediately if this does not happen. Pump / Driver Speed When applicable, check operating speed remains within specified parameters. Motor Current When an electric motor driver is installed, the full load current shown on the motor nameplate must not be exceeded. Vibration When vibration measuring equipment is available, monitor vibration levels. Shut down the pumpset if the vibration limits are significantly exceeded, but note that the vibration levels will be higher at minimum flow than at the normal operating condition. Leaks Any leak signifies a problem. Particular attention should be paid to leaks in the area of the shaft mechanical seals, which could indicate a failed seal. Oil Supply Monitor oil level until it stabilises. When an external lube oil system is installed, and flow indicating equipment is available, monitor lubricating oil flow. When temperature measuring equipment is available, monitor oil temperature and ensure that it does not exceed the maximum allowable value. Shut down the pumpset if the temperature limit is significantly exceeded.
Section 3.5 Page 11


Section 3.5
Bearing Temperature When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, excessive bearing temperatures during pump operation MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. When temperature measuring equipment is available, monitor bearing temperatures until they stabilise and ensure that they do not exceed the maximum allowable value. Shut down the pumpset if the temperature limit is significantly exceeded. Pump Case Temperature When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, excessive pump casing temperature during pump operation MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. When temperature measuring equipment is available, monitor pump casing temperature and ensure that it does not exceed the maximum allowable value. Shut down the pumpset if the temperature limit is significantly exceeded. Suction Strainer A suction strainer may be fitted temporarily for initial operation. Refer to Section 3.3 Installation, Main Piping. Monitor pressure drop across the suction screen. Clean the strainer as necessary, and remove the equipment after the elapsed time prescribed.
3.5.2.3
Routine Performance Monitoring

When the pump is in normal service, at approximately three monthly intervals, take readings and measurements of temperatures, pressures, vibration levels etc. as appropriate. The values obtained may be compared with those originally taken when the pumps were new. In this way a record of pump performance over a period of time will be available to maintenance engineers, and any drop in performance will become apparent.
Section 3.5 Page 12


Section 3.5
3.5.3
Standby Procedures
Pumps that are on standby duty for seven days without being run operationally should be started and run for 20 minutes. This will inhibit condensation from accumulating within bearing housings.
3.5.3.1
Temperature Equalisation
When applicable, refer to Section 3.5.2.1 - Routine Runs and ensure that temperature equalisation requirements are met before starting a pump.
3.5.3.2
Coolant Systems
Ensure that coolant systems and lube oil systems remain available for pumps that are on standby for immediate startup.
3.5.4
3.5.4.1
Shut-Down Procedures
Normal Shut-Down
Note: The following procedure assumes that a local Stop button, and a local discharge valve control is available for the manual operation of the pumpset. The normal shut-down procedure may be controlled by automatic systems (by others). 1. Press the Stop button to stop the driver. Check that it runs down smoothly. 2. Close the discharge valve. 3. Where applicable, leave lube oil systems and coolant supplies operating for a minimum of 20 minutes after pumpset shutdown. 4. Where applicable, isolate the pumpset if it is not required on standby duty.
3.5.4.2
Emergency Shut-Down
Note: The following procedure assumes that a local Emergency Stop or Stop button, and a local discharge valve control is available for the manual operation of the pumpset. The emergency shut-down procedure may be controlled by automatic systems (by others). 1. Press the Emergency Stop (if available) or Stop button to stop the driver. Check that it runs down smoothly. 2. Close the discharge valve. 3. Where applicable, leave lube oil systems and coolant supplies operating for a minimum of 20 minutes after pumpset shutdown. 4. Isolate the pumpset in preparation for fault finding and possible rectification.
CAUTION
The pump must not be returned to normal service until the reason for the emergency shut-down has been investigated and rectified.
Section 3.5 Page 13


Section 3.5
3.5.4.3
Extended Shut-Down Procedures

Site conditions may require that a pump be shut down for an extended period (more than seven days). If the shut -down period is not long enough to warrant full storage procedures (see below), the following options are recommended: a) If Pump Can Be Run During Shut-Down The pump should be started every week and run for 20 minutes. This will inhibit condensation from accumulating within bearing housings (and lubrication pipework when applicable), and also guard against shaft seizure at a later stage. b) If Pump Cannot Be Run During Shut-Down Seek advice from Sulzer on required preservation, storage and inspection requirements. If the pump bearings are not normally immersed in oil when the pump is stationary, the bearings must be re-lubricated before start-up if the shut-down is for more than 30 days.
CAUTION
Failure to re-lubricate bearings before start-up after an extended shut down (when appropriate) could result in scored bearings and/or internal damage to the pump.
3.5.4.4
Freeze Damage
If it is possible that the liquid within the pump could freeze during the shut-down period, seek advice from Sulzer on required draining, preservation, storage and inspection requirements.
3.5.5
Storage Procedures
For advice on required protection, preservation and inspection procedures for pumps during storage periods, refer to Section 3.2 - Receiving. For advice on required protection, preservation and inspection procedures for supplied drivers and other pumpset equipment during storage periods, refer to the ancillary equipment manufacturers information, later in this manual.
Section 3.5 Page 14


Document No: Maintenance 01
Section 3.6
Pump - General and Scheduled Maintenance
2 23 Nov 2004
3.6
Maintenance
The supplied pump and pumpset equipment MAY be designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Alternatively, if the pumpset equipment IS NOT designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area, this will be indicated in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 Hazardous Area Operation. Refer to Section 2.4 - General Safety for general safety advice for operators and maintenance personnel before starting any maintenance activity. Refer also to specific safety advice contained as applicable within the maintenance procedures included in this manual.
3.6.1
Scope
This section contains general information and advice on pump maintenance procedures for a horizontal pumpset. These general instructions are provided as guidelines to aid and direct a safe and efficient maintenance project. It also provides a generic pumpset maintenance schedule that can be adapted and used as required when a specific site maintenance schedule is not available.
3.6.2
3.6.2.1
Equipment Condition
Performance Record
Keep a written performance log for the equipment. An ongoing performance record will assist troubleshooting and future pump service decisions. Long shutdowns and unnecessary expense can then be avoided. Pressure indicators can be installed into tapped openings in the suction and discharge nozzles to provide much of the data required for performance analysis. Periodic trending vibration recordings are necessary to diagnose excessive vibration levels.
3.6.2.2
Troubleshooting
Analyse performance before dismantling. A problem might be correctable without dismantling the pump. A performance record will help narrow the possible causes, and determine whether the problem is mechanical, hydraulic or system related. System problems typically originate in the suction system side of the pump. Control maladjustments should be eliminated. Mechanical and hydraulic problems often are interrelated and the source can be difficult to identify. Refer to Troubleshooting.
Section 3.6 Page 1

K:\In Work Manuals\48329, 30 CP CD Khurais\48330\S3.06 Maintenance 01-2.doc

Section 3.6
2 23 Nov 2004
3.6.3
General Overhaul Information and Advice

Dismantling Check for toxic or otherwise harmful fluids before loosening bolted joints or pipe connections. Collect and dispose of toxic or otherwise harmful fluids in accordance with the current environmental regulations to prevent endangering people or the environment. Before starting any maintenance activity, ensure that: - Electrical power breakers are locked in the OFF position. - The pump is at ambient temperature. - Pump system pressure has been isolated. - The pump is drained and vented (by removing drain plugs or opening valves as applicable). - Suction, discharge, and auxiliary piping valves are closed. Cap the ends of all disconnected pipework to prevent the entry of dirt. During any dismantling procedure, mark all removed parts to enable replacement in the same position. Protect all parts. Place larger parts in a protected area and wrap in cloth or plastic. Place smaller parts and bolting in bags or boxes, and identify with labels where components are for re-assembly. Protect screwed joints and threads. Refer to each dismantling / assembly section for information on specific requirements for special tools and equipment. Obtain any required items before starting maintenance activities. Check pump rotation. Note that certain threaded shaft components may be tightened against rotation and may have a left-hand thread.
CAUTION
At all stages during dismantling of the pump, it is essential that the pump shaft is adequately supported to prevent bending and/or damage to the bearings. Assembly When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during maintenance procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided: failure to maintain correct casing / impeller / bearing clearances, as detailed in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data failure to use NEW O-ring seals, gaskets, seals or nut locking devices of the correct type and size at all appropriate stages during assembly procedures failure to maintain bearings correctly failure to re-connect main (suction and discharge) pipework correctly to the pump casing in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations
Section 3.6 Page 2


Section 3.6
2 23 Nov 2004
failure to re-connect auxiliary pipework correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations and to direct the vent and drain pipework to suitable safe locations / containers failure to re-connect electrical equipment power supply and control cables and instrument cables correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations failure to ensure correct direction of rotation for the driver in accordance with manufacturers information failure to install the coupling spacers and coupling guard(s) correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations
Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. All parts must be absolutely clean and free of oil or dust. Technical grade acetone is recommended for cleaning machined surfaces immediately before assembly. Air dry (use filtered, dry air) cleaned parts in a dust-free area. The rust inhibitor on machined surfaces should be removed with a suitable solvent. Ensure that there is no paint on locating spigots or recesses. Handle all parts carefully so that they are not dropped, or damaged in any other way. Ensure any burrs or dirt on the faces of sleeves and impeller bores are removed. Antiscuffing paste must be applied to sleeves and impeller bores to facilitate later dismantling. New gaskets, seals and O-ring seals of the same material, type and size as originally supplied must be used for re-assembly operations. The O-rings must be fitted carefully to prevent the risk of damage. Powdered molybdenum disulphide can be used as a shaft lubricant. Lubricate screwed joints and threads with glycerine or Teflonspray. When applicable, re-assemble small bore pipework using new olives in unions that have been disconnected.
CAUTION
At all stages during assembly of the pump, it is essential that the pump shaft is adequately supported to prevent bending and/or damage to the bearings.
3.6.4
Shipping From Site

All equipment must be completely drained and decontaminated before removal from site. Shipments received at any Sulzer facility that have not been so treated must be returned to site at the owners expense.
3.6.5
Completion of Pump Overhaul

Re - commission the pump following every overhaul. Refer to Section 3.5 Commissioning and Operation.
Section 3.6 Page 3


Section 3.6
2 23 Nov 2004
3.6.6
Scheduled Maintenance
When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during scheduled maintenance procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided: failure to detect and rectify leaks from main (suction and discharge) pipework connections to the pump casing failure to detect and rectify leaks from auxiliary pipework and associated equipment (i.e. mechanical seals and associated equipment, coolers, instruments) connections failure to maintain ancillary equipment and systems (i.e. external lube oil system, mechanical seals and associated equipment, driver, gearbox) in accordance with manufacturers information
Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. If a site-specific pumpset maintenance schedule is not available, the following suggested schedule may be used or adapted as required. Please consult Sulzer for further advice as necessary. Refer to the General Arrangement drawing, the pump Longitudinal Section drawing, the Lubrication Schedule (when available), and to any other applicable supplied drawing or document in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents.
3.6.6.1
Daily Checks
Perform a walk-around inspection of the pumpset, preferably while the pumpset is operating, and: Carry out a visual check for leaks, or damage to components. Pay particular attention to main and auxiliary pipework connections and to mechanical seal locations. Repair or report any damage or leaks. Note: The mechanical seals require no routine maintenance except for a daily visual inspection to check for excessive external leakage. In this event the pump should be taken out of service and the seal repaired or replaced. Check all indicating instruments for correct functioning and unusual readings. Report faults and investigate the cause of any unusual readings. When a self-contained bearing lube system is in use, check the oil level in the constant level oilers - replenish as required. Record the replenishment amount to identify excessive oil loss / consumption. Refer to Section 3.11 - Lubrication. Check for unusual noises or noise levels. Report or investigate unusual noises or noise levels. When applicable, check strainer / filter differential pressures. When applicable, check external utility supplies (air, water etc.). Keep the area around the pumpset tidy. Clean up any spillages of oil.
Section 3.6 Page 4


Section 3.6
2 23 Nov 2004
3.6.6.2
Weekly Checks
When an external bearing lube system is in use, refer to Section 3.11 - Lubrication and to the available information for the lube oil system. If no scheduled maintenance information is available, consider the following: check the lube oil reservoir level - replenish as required. Record the replenishment amount to identify excessive oil loss / consumption. check the condition of the lube oil filter (check differential pressure gauge reading if applicable). When a duplex filter system is in use, change over to the clean filter element if required. Dirty filter element must be changed for new element or cleaned as appropriate. Record the changeover of filter elements to identify excessive filter clogging which may indicate problems in the bearings or in the lube oil system.
Record readings for all indicating instruments (identifies gradual changes in readings over time and may help to identify a developing problem in pumpset operation). Test run standby pumps to ensure readiness for operation.
3.6.6.3
Monthly Checks
Check the temperature and vibration levels etc. against the string test reference readings for normal expected values. (This information should be recorded and used as a bench mark for future readings). Check the security of the coupling guards.
CAUTION
DO NOT check the security of the coupling guards while the equipment is in operation.
3.6.6.4
Six-Monthly Checks
When an external bearing lube system is in use, refer to Section 3.11 - Lubrication and to the available information for the lube oil system. If no scheduled maintenance information is available, consider sampling and analysing the condition of the lube oil in the reservoir (alternatively, every 2,500 operating hours). Replace the oil in the lube system reservoir when analysis indicates that degradation of oil condition warrants the change. Check the alignment of the drive coupling - refer to Section 3.4 - Coupling Alignment. Check the pump performance against reference data. Inspect all parts for damage to paintwork, and repaint if necessary. If evidence of rust is found, affected areas must be cleaned, de-rusted and then repainted. Bright metal parts should also be examined for rust, the surfaces cleaned, and a film of Shell Ensis fluid (or Chevron equivalent) re-applied as necessary.
3.6.6.5
Yearly Checks
When an external bearing lube system is in use, refer to Section 3.11 - Lubrication and to the available information for the lube oil system. If no scheduled maintenance information is available, consider changing the lube oil filter elements. Check the security of all holding down bolts (alternatively, every 8,000 operating hours).
Section 3.6 Page 5


Section 3.6
2 23 Nov 2004
3.6.6.6
Sub-Vendor Equipment Maintenance Schedules

Refer to the relevant sub-vendor information, later in this manual, for details of any routine maintenance required on ancillary equipment.
Section 3.6 Page 6


Document No: CD Casing 11
Section 3.7
Pump - Case / Rotating Element Assembly
1 06 May 2003
3.7
Case / Element Assembly

3.7.1
Scope
Directions for the opening and closing of the volute case, and for the removal, dismantling, inspection of parts, re-assembly and re-fitting of the rotating element.
3.7.2
Preparation
Study the following procedures as well as the pump Longitudinal Section drawing, and other available drawings and documents, and be familiar with the design details and assembly sequence. Plan the operations and have withdrawal and assembly equipment, and other special tools available. This includes any required measuring devices, heating facilities and torque wrenches. Note: Supplied special tools and equipment may be detailed in the IOM Manual in Section 1- Leading Particulars, Section 1.1 - List of Equipment Supplied, or elsewhere within the manual. Refer to Section 3.7.5 - Removal and Fitting of Components with a Shrink Fit. Be familiar with the heating temperatures, mounting and dismounting forces and procedures. Refer to Section 3.12 - Torque Tightening of Fasteners for information on standard torque tightening procedures and values.
3.7.3
Examination and Cleanliness

Unless the volute casing needs renovation, it will remain installed after the rotating element has been removed. The casing must be protected from the ingress of dirt and physical damage during the maintenance cycle. The rotating element must be removed to a clean work area for dismantling.
Section 3.7 Page 1

K:\In Work Manuals\48329, 30 CP CD Khurais\48330\S3.07 CD Casing 11-1.doc

Section 3.7
1 06 May 2003
3.7.4 3.7.4.1
General Information on Dismantling and Assembly Dismantling

Check for toxic or otherwise harmful fluids before loosening bolted joints or pipe connections. Collect and dispose of toxic or otherwise harmful fluids in accordance with the current environmental regulations to prevent endangering people or the environment. Before starting any maintenance activity, ensure that: Electrical power breakers are locked in the OFF position. The pump is at ambient temperature. Pump system pressure has been isolated. The pump is drained and vented (by removing drain plugs or opening valves as applicable). Suction, discharge, and auxiliary piping valves are closed.
Cap the ends of all disconnected pipework to prevent the entry of dirt. During any dismantling procedure, mark all removed parts to enable replacement in the same position. Protect all parts. Place larger parts in a protected area and wrap in cloth or plastic. Place smaller parts and bolting in bags or boxes, and identify with labels where components are for re-assembly. Protect screwed joints and threads. Refer to each dismantling / assembly section for information on specific requirements for special tools and equipment. Obtain any required items before starting maintenance activities. Check pump rotation. Note that certain threaded shaft components may be tightened against rotation and may have a left-hand thread.
CAUTION
At all stages during dismantling of the pump, it is essential that the pump shaft is adequately supported to prevent bending and/or damage to the bearings.
3.7.4.2
Assembly
All parts must be absolutely clean and free of oil or dust. Technical grade acetone is recommended for cleaning machined surfaces immediately before assembly. Air dry (use filtered, dry air) cleaned parts in a dust-free area. The rust inhibitor on machined surfaces should be removed with a suitable solvent. Ensure that there is no paint on locating spigots or recesses. Handle all parts carefully so that they are not dropped, or damaged in any other way. Ensure any burrs or dirt on the faces of sleeves and impeller bores are removed. Antiscuffing paste must be applied to sleeves and impeller bores to facilitate later dismantling.
Section 3.7 Page 2


Section 3.7
1 06 May 2003
New gaskets, seals and O-ring seals of the same material, type and size as originally supplied must be used for re-assembly operations. The O-rings must be fitted carefully to prevent the risk of damage. Powdered molybdenum disulphide can be used as a shaft lubricant. Lubricate screwed joints and threads with glycerine or Teflonspray. When applicable, re-assemble small bore pipework using new olives in unions that have been disconnected.
CAUTION
At all stages during assembly of the pump, it is essential that the pump shaft is adequately supported to prevent bending and/or damage to the bearings.
3.7.4.3

When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during maintenance procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided: failure to maintain correct casing / impeller / bearing clearances, as detailed in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data failure to use NEW O-ring seals, gaskets, seals or nut locking devices of the correct type and size at all appropriate stages during assembly procedures failure to maintain bearings correctly failure to re-connect auxiliary pipework correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations and to direct the vent and drain pipework to suitable safe locations / containers failure to re-connect electrical equipment power supply and control cables and instrument cables correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations
Section 3.7 Page 3


Section 3.7
1 06 May 2003
3.7.5
CAUTION
Removal and Fitting of Components with a Shrink Fit

It must be emphasised that successful results using the following procedure(s) require either previous experience or first hand advice from a Sulzer representative. The components must be heated, and permanent damage can result if the level and duration of heating is not properly controlled. Impellers have a shrink interference fit to the shaft. Sufficient heat must be used to expand the outer part, while avoiding higher damaging temperatures. Note: Impeller removal and mounting can be considered a two person job. Have all tools, parts, gloves, etc. ready for quick action.
3.7.5.1
CAUTION
Impeller Removal
During the heating and removal process, the impeller must be heated and then withdrawn from the shaft smoothly and evenly. Take care not to allow too much heat to soak into the shaft. If significantly more than two minutes elapses during the heating cycle, stop heating, allow the components to cool completely, and start again. If problems persist, contact a Sulzer representative. Clean and polish the shaft ahead of the impeller before heating and removal. Protect the shaft with wet rags. If the shaft becomes hot it will expand, increasing the temperature required to remove the impeller. Adjust the torch to a soft flame, Do not allow the hot inner blue cone to touch the part. Heat the impeller slowly and evenly, alternately applying the flame to both sides. A temperature of 205C (400F) is usually sufficient for removal. Begin heating at the outer perimeter and work toward the centre, heating the hub last. Avoid producing an undesirable hot spot on the part, which can be created by stopping and changing direction at the same location. Withdraw the impeller from the shaft using a smooth and even motion. Stop the removal procedure if the impeller starts to move and then seizes. Allow the assembly to cool to the touch before resuming.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Forcing apart interference fit components that have temperature difference can result in damage, requiring repair or replacement. If a soft-face mallet is used, be sure to tap only on the shroud near an impeller vane.
CAUTION
Take care to avoid bending the impeller shroud.
3.7.5.2
Impeller Fit
Heat the impeller to 232C (450F) by electric oven or hot oil bath. Heating by torch is not recommended as it can cause uneven heating and has obvious safety risks. Slide the heated part smoothly and evenly over the shaft and into position. Stop the fitting procedure if the impeller starts to move and then seizes. Allow the assembly to cool to the touch before resuming. In this case, use torch heating as described in Section 3.7.5.1 above.
3.7.5.3
Fitting Impeller Wear Rings

Heat the new wear ring to 177C (350F) by electric oven or hot oil bath. Heating by torch is not recommended as it can cause uneven heating and has obvious safety risks.
Section 3.7 Page 4


Section 3.7
1 06 May 2003
3.7.6
NDE Casing Cover and Rotating Element - Removal

Refer to the Longitudinal Section drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents. Note: Depending on design criteria and specification, pump assemblies may not include throat bushes. In such cases, the bore of the DE and NDE casing covers are designed to function as throat bushes - when applicable, please replace any references to throat bushes in the following procedure with the appropriate casing cover bore.
CAUTION
In order to avoid disturbing the alignment of the pump with the driver, the DE casing cover is normally left in-situ on the volute casing during dismantling, and the rotating assembly is removed and refitted from the NDE. 1. Refer to Section 3.9 - Bearing Assemblies and to Section 3.10 - Mechanical Seals, and remove the DE and NDE bearing assemblies and mechanical seals. 2. Disconnect and remove sections of piping that will interfere with the removal of the NDE casing cover and rotating assembly. Cap pipe ends to prevent the entry of debris. 3. Measure total axial movement of the rotating element in the volute case and record for use at re-assembly. i. ii. Mount a dial indicator to a suitable fixed point with the indicator tip in contact with the shaft end. Push the shaft as far as it will go towards the DE. Set the dial indicator to zero.
iii. Move the shaft as far as it will go towards the NDE and note the indicator reading. iv. Push the shaft back towards the DE by half of the total indicator reading to set the shaft in the centre position. Remove the dial indicator. 4. Fit a suitable eyebolt into the tapped hole in the top of the NDE casing cover. Attach a suitable sling and shackles to the eyebolt and to suitable lifting equipment. Adjust the lifting equipment to just support the weight of the cover. 5. Unscrew and remove the nuts, complete with washers, from the NDE casing cover mounting studs in the volute casing. 6. Fit and tighten jackscrews evenly to break the joint seal and release the NDE casing cover from the volute casing.
CAUTION
During removal of the NDE casing cover from the volute casing, guide the casing cover carefully to prevent damage to the casing cover bore, to the case wear ring in the cover, and to the pump shaft. Support the rotating assembly as necessary to prevent damage to the bore of the DE casing cover and to the end of the shaft. 7. Support the NDE casing cover, complete with case wear ring and integral bearing bracket, using the attached lifting equipment. Withdraw the casing cover assembly away from the volute casing and off the pump shaft. Collect the gaskets. 8. Lower the NDE casing cover assembly onto suitable timber packing to protect the machined face. Remove the lifting equipment.
CAUTION
After the NDE casing cover has been removed, the rotating assembly is supported by the DE casing cover bore and the DE case wear ring. Provide additional support to the NDE of the rotating assembly to prevent damage to the casing bore and to the end of the shaft.
Section 3.7 Page 5


Section 3.7
1 06 May 2003
CAUTION
During removal of the rotating assembly from the volute casing and DE casing cover, guide the assembly carefully to prevent damage to the casing cover bore and to the pump shaft. 9. Support the rotating assembly using suitable soft slings attached to suitable lifting equipment. Place the slings as close to the impeller as possible to minimise the stress on the shaft. Withdraw the rotating assembly out of the volute casing and DE casing cover.
CAUTION
Handle the rotating assembly with care and support it evenly to maintain shaft straightness. 10. Transport the element to a clean work area for further dismantling and place on 'V' blocks, providing adequate support for the two ends and the centre of the element.
Section 3.7 Page 6


Section 3.7
1 06 May 2003
3.7.7
Rotating Element - Dismantling

Refer to the Longitudinal Section drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents. Refer as necessary to Section 3.7.5 - Removal and Fitting of Components with a Shrink Fit. Note: Check for match-marks or mark the impeller and wearing parts during dismantling to ensure correct replacement.
CAUTION
Handle the shaft with care and support it evenly to maintain straightness. 1. Ensure that the rotating assembly is located securely on suitable supports. 2. Slacken the grub screw and remove the thrust ring retainer. 3. Remove the thrust ring from the groove in the shaft adjacent to the impeller. 4. Clean and polish the shaft from the impeller to the shaft end to ease removal. 5. Refer to Section 3.7.5 - Removal and Fitting of Components with a Shrink Fit; heat the impeller and remove it smoothly and evenly from the shaft. Remove the key.
Section 3.7 Page 7


Section 3.7
1 06 May 2003
3.7.8 3.7.8.1
Inspection and Repair of Pump Components Clean and Inspect

After dismantling, clean the parts and inspect for wear or damage. In particular, check the running surfaces of rings and bushings. Damaged or excessively worn parts should be discarded. Re-usable parts should be prepared for short-term storage by applying a light machine oil to all machined surfaces.
3.7.8.2
CAUTION
Shaft
Sleeves MAY BE fitted to the shaft at the pump DE/NDE bearing locations. These sleeves are an integral part of the shaft and are fitted as part of in-process shaft manufacture. The sleeves are not supplied as separate parts and NO ATTEMPT SHOULD BE MADE TO REMOVE THEM. File off any burrs and smooth the resulting file marks with a fine emery paper / cloth. Protect the surfaces from damage. Polish the shaft at the impeller, seal, coupling and bearing locations, using a fine emery paper / cloth.
CAUTION
Handle the shaft with care and support it evenly to maintain straightness. Avoid bumping, hitting, or springing the shaft. Rest the shaft on precision rollers at the bearing locations. Use dial indicators to determine total indicator readings (TIR) at impeller and seal locations; maximum TIR is detailed in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data.
CAUTION
Never use a bent shaft. Measure the shaft diameter at the impeller mounting surface, and the impeller bore, to ensure that shrink fits have been maintained. Check with a Sulzer representative for further details. If the shaft is to be stored for re-use, it should be lightly oiled, covered with a protective sleeve and if possible, hung vertically to maintain straightness.
3.7.8.3
Bearings and Bearing Housings

When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to maintain bearing assemblies correctly in accordance with manufacturers information MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Refer to the bearing assembly instructions in Section 3.9 - Bearing Assemblies for information on inspection and replacement.
Section 3.7 Page 8


Section 3.7
1 06 May 2003
3.7.8.4
Case Wear Rings

When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to maintain bearing assemblies correctly in accordance with manufacturers information MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Inspect wear rings for nicks, scratches or uneven wear. Dress minor irregularities with a fine file and emery paper / cloth and remove any foreign material. Measure bores and outside diameters of the running surfaces to determine the diametrical clearance in each case. A clearance of no greater than 140% of the minimum new design clearance must still exist over at least 85% of the surface to make the parts re-usable. The remaining surface must not vary by more than 0.002 inches (0.05 mm), from the minimum new design clearance on the diameter. Chrome plating (or equivalent) up to a maximum of 0.010 inches (0.254 mm) on a side may be suitable if it restores the component to dimensions and tolerances specified for new item. Note: Refer to Sulzer for advice on suitability of plating before carrying out the procedure. Replace wear rings when pump performance drops below acceptable system standards. Measure the diametral clearance between corresponding components. Use several measurement locations, then subtract the average O/D from the average I/D to determine the diametral clearance. Note: The MAXIMUM allowable diametral clearance, i.e. the fully worn condition, is twice the maximum NEW clearance. The NEW diametral clearances for pump components are shown in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data. Removal of Case Wear Rings Case wear rings can be removed by drilling out the tack welding and removing the hex socket screws and then inserting a pulling tool or pry bar between the ring and the seat. Apply pressure evenly to remove the ring. Replacement of Case Wear Rings
CAUTION
DE and NDE case wear rings are NOT interchangeable. 1. Ensure that new rings and seats are clean and free of burrs. 2. Align the mounting holes in the new wear ring with the tapped holes in the end cover. Press the new case wear ring into the casing end cover ensuring the mounting / tapped holes remain in alignment. 3. Fit new hex socket screws to secure the wear ring in place and tack weld the head of each screw to secure the screws in place.
Section 3.7 Page 9


Section 3.7
1 06 May 2003
3.7.8.5
Impeller
Inspect the impeller for wear and damage. Look for cavitation marks (pits) in the suction opening, erosion of vanes and cracks in the shroud. Smooth minor irregularities with a very fine file or with a fine emery paper / cloth. Inspect the impeller key, shaft and impeller keyway. The impeller should be replaced if damaged or excessively worn or pitted.
3.7.8.6
Mechanical Seals
When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to maintain mechanical seals correctly in accordance with manufacturers information MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Refer to the manufacturers instructions, later in this manual or supplied separately, for details of storage and repair procedures and spare parts required.
Section 3.7 Page 10


Section 3.7
1 06 May 2003
3.7.9
Rotating Element - Assembly

When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during maintenance procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided: failure to maintain correct casing / impeller / bearing clearances, as detailed in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data
failure to use NEW O-ring seals, gaskets, seals or nut locking devices of the correct type and size at all appropriate stages during assembly procedures Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Refer to the Longitudinal Section drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents. Refer as necessary to Section 3.7.5 - Removal and Fitting of Components with a Shrink Fit. Note: Check for match-marks on impeller and wearing parts during assembly to ensure correct replacement.
CAUTION
A replacement bearing housing, or any re-work to the case bore, requires that the rotating element radial centre position be determined in order to establish the correct bearing housing position. In these cases, refer to Section 3.9 - Bearing Assemblies, Rotating Element Radial Centring BEFORE re-assembling bearing housings. 1. Clamp the shaft using a soft-jaw vice, close to the impeller mounting location, leaving unimpeded clearance. 2. Check the fit of all thrust rings and shaft keys. 3. Clean and polish the shaft from the impeller location to the shaft end to ease impeller fit. 4. Fit the key to the shaft. 5. Observe match marks to ensure that the impeller is refitted in the correct orientation. Refer to Section 3.7.5 - Removal and Fitting of Components with a Shrink Fit; heat the impeller and slide it smoothly and evenly onto the shaft, over the key and up to the shoulder. 6. Allow the impeller to air-cool 7. Insert the thrust ring into the groove in the shaft adjacent to the impeller. 8. Fit the thrust ring retainer over the shaft and into position over the thrust ring. Tighten the grub screw in the thrust ring retainer to secure it in place. Note: All replacement impellers are balanced. A balanced impeller replacement does not necessitate rotating element balancing, unless this was an original application requirement. If element balancing is a requirement, contact a Sulzer representative for limits. 9. Check runout on wear ring surfaces after shaft and impeller assembly. Support the element assembly on precision rollers at the bearing locations. TIR for the rotating element must be within the limits shown in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data. 10. Lightly coat the impeller wear surfaces and shaft wear surfaces with powdered molybdenum disulphide. This lubricant provides protection during storage and alignment shaft rotation.
Section 3.7 Page 11


Section 3.7
1 06 May 2003
3.7.10
Rotating Element and NDE Casing Cover - Fit

When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during maintenance procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided: failure to maintain correct casing / impeller / bearing clearances, as detailed in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data failure to use NEW O-ring seals, gaskets, seals or nut locking devices of the correct type and size at all appropriate stages during assembly procedures failure to maintain bearings correctly failure to re-connect auxiliary pipework correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations and to direct the vent and drain pipework to suitable safe locations / containers failure to re-connect electrical equipment power supply and control cables and instrument cables correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations
Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Refer to the Longitudinal Section drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents.
CAUTION
A replacement bearing housing, or any re-work to the case internal bore, requires that the rotating element radial centre position be determined in order to establish the correct bearing housing position. In these cases, refer to Section 3.9 - Bearing Assemblies, Rotating Element Radial Centring BEFORE re-assembling bearing housings. In order to avoid disturbing the alignment of the pump with the driver, the DE casing cover is normally left in-situ on the volute casing during dismantling, and the rotating assembly is removed and refitted from the NDE. Handle the rotating assembly with care and support it evenly to maintain shaft straightness. During installation of the rotating assembly into the volute casing, guide the assembly carefully to prevent damage to the DE casing cover bore, and to the pump shaft. When the rotating assembly is initially installed in the volute casing and DE casing cover, it is supported by the DE casing bore and by the DE case wear ring. Provide additional support to the NDE of the rotating assembly to prevent damage to the casing bore and to the end of the shaft. 1. Support the rotating assembly using suitable soft slings attached to suitable lifting equipment. Take care to minimise the stress on the shaft by placing the slings as close to the impeller as possible. 2. Insert the rotating assembly carefully into the volute casing. Prevent damage by guiding the shaft by hand and ensuring that the shaft passes smoothly through the DE
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
Section 3.7 Page 12


Section 3.7
1 06 May 2003
casing bore and that the impeller locates correctly in the DE case wear ring. Support the shaft end if the slings have to be re-positioned. 3. Fit new gaskets to the NDE casing cover. 4. Fit a suitable eyebolt into the tapped hole in the top of the NDE casing cover. Attach a suitable sling and shackles to the eyebolt and to suitable lifting equipment. Adjust the lifting equipment to just support the weight of the cover.
CAUTION
During installation of the NDE casing cover over the shaft and onto the volute casing, guide the casing cover carefully to prevent damage to the casing bore, to the case wear ring in the cover, and to the pump shaft. Support the rotating assembly as necessary to prevent damage to the casing bore, to the case wear ring in the cover, and to the pump shaft. 5. Lift the NDE casing cover, complete with case wear ring and integral bearing bracket, over the NDE of the shaft, over the mounting studs and into position on the volute casing. Ensure that the case wear ring locates correctly over the impeller. Raise the end of the shaft slightly until the cover is in position. 6. Check for metal-to-metal contact around the circumference of the casing cover joint.
CAUTION
After rotating assembly installation, turn the shaft manually and check that the rotating element rotates freely. 7. Fit the washers and nuts to the casing cover mounting studs. Refer to Section 3.12 Torque Tightening of Fasteners and tighten the nuts evenly to the correct torque value, using the tightening sequence depicted, to secure the casing cover in place. Remove the lifting equipment. 8. Re-check the rotating assembly for freedom of rotation. 9. Check total axial movement of the rotating element in the volute casing as detailed below. It should be no less than the amount recorded during dismantling to indicate non-binding of the element (typically a minimum of 0.25 inch (6.4 mm) end play). i. ii. Mount a dial indicator to a suitable fixed point with the indicator tip in contact with the shaft end. Push the shaft as far as it will go towards the DE. Set the dial indicator to zero.
iii. Move the shaft as far as it will go towards the NDE and note the indicator reading. iv. Push the shaft back towards the DE by half of the total indicator reading to set the shaft in the centre position. Remove the dial indicator. 10. Refer to Section 3.10 - Mechanical Seals and to Section 3.9 - Bearing Assemblies and refit the mechanical seal cartridges, bearings and bearing housings and reconnect pipework as required.
Section 3.7 Page 13


Document No: Drive Cplg 03
Section 3.8
Pump - Drive Coupling
2 11 Aug 2004
3.8
Drive Coupling
3.8.1
Scope
Directions for removal and installation of the drive-coupling spacer, and for removal and installation of the pump-half coupling hub (taper pump shaft - hydraulic fit using two pumps).
3.8.2
Preparation
Study the following procedures as well as the pump Longitudinal Section drawing, and other available drawings and documents, and be familiar with the design details and assembly sequence. Plan the operations and have withdrawal and assembly equipment, and other special tools available. This includes any required measuring devices and torque wrenches. Note: Supplied special tools and equipment may be detailed in the IOM Manual in Section 1- Leading Particulars, Section 1.1 - List of Equipment Supplied, or elsewhere within the manual. Refer to Torque Tightening of Fasteners for information on standard torque tightening procedures and values.
Section 3.8 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.08 Drive Cplg 03-2.doc

Section 3.8
2 11 Aug 2004
3.8.3
Coupling Spacer
When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to install the coupling spacer(s) and coupling guard(s) correctly in accordance with manufacturers information MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Refer to the Longitudinal Section drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents, and also to the coupling manufacturers information and drawings, supplied either as an insert to this manual or by others.
3.8.3.1
Removal
1. Remove the coupling guards. Check the coupling for match-marking on the spacer and hubs, create marks if none exist. Note: The marks ensure that correct balance is maintained on re-assembly. 2. Refer to the documentation detailed above, and remove the coupling spacer.
REMOVAL OF COUPLING SPACER
3.8.3.2
CAUTION
Fit
Ensure that the pump-half coupling hub has been refitted and that coupling alignment has been checked before fitting the coupling spacer. 1. Check for match-marking on the coupling spacer and coupling hubs. 2. Refer to the documentation detailed above, and refit the coupling spacer. 3. Refit the coupling guards.
Section 3.8 Page 2


Section 3.8
2 11 Aug 2004
3.8.4
Pump-Half Coupling Hub

When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to install the coupling hub correctly in accordance with manufacturers information MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Refer to the Longitudinal Section drawing, and to the appropriate Coupling Hub Assembly / Withdrawal Equipment Arrangement drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents, and also to the coupling manufacturers information and drawings, supplied either as an insert to this manual or by others. Note: The actual title of the supplied arrangement drawing for the coupling hub assembly and withdrawal equipment may vary.
3.8.4.1
Removal
Incorrect removal of the pump-half coupling hub is potentially EXTREMELY DANGEROUS. The following fitting procedure MUST be followed precisely, and the work MUST be carried out by experienced and competent maintenance personnel. If in doubt, please contact Sulzer for advice. Refer to the supplied arrangement drawing for the coupling hub assembly and withdrawal equipment for specific EXPECTED (DESIGN) and MAXIMUM expansion pressures and EXPECTED (DESIGN) and MAXIMUM advancing pressures before starting the removal procedure for the pump-half coupling hub. Note: It is assumed that all appropriate items of maintenance described in Section 3.6.3 General Overhaul Information and Advice have been completed. The coupling hub is removed by applying expansion hydraulic pressure to the coupling hub using one hydraulic pump, and controlling the movement of the hub off the shaft taper using the other hydraulic pump.
CAUTION
When a shaft nut / coupling locknut is fitted, check the thread direction (right or left hand) before loosening the nut. 1. When a shaft nut / coupling locknut is fitted to the DE of the shaft, remove the locking grub screws and then unscrew and remove the shaft nut / coupling locknut. 2. Remove the match-weighed plugs from the coupling hub hydraulic connections and fit the air release plug to one connection. Ensure that the coupling assembly equipment is correctly and securely attached to the pump shaft and is fully tightened before attempting to expand the coupling hub injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result should the hub release suddenly. 3. Turn the shaft to position the coupling hub air release plug at the top. Fit the coupling withdrawal equipment to the end of the shaft as shown on the supplied arrangement drawing. Ensure that the minimum gap detailed on the arrangement drawing is available between the load cell parts
Section 3.8 Page 3


Section 3.8
2 11 Aug 2004
4. Connect the higher pressure hydraulic pump to the coupling hub (expansion pump), and connect the lower pressure hydraulic pump (advancing pump) to the load cell, as shown on the supplied arrangement drawing. 5. Close the non-return valve on the hydraulic pump connected to the load cell. Always apply hydraulic pressure SLOWLY. The specified EXPECTED (DESIGN) expansion and advancing pressures are calculated values that should be sufficient to produce the required movement. However, if the required movement is not achieved, pressures CAN be increased as necessary UP TO the specified MAXIMUM values. DO NOT EXCEED the maximum pressure limits specified on the supplied arrangement drawing for the coupling hub assembly and withdrawal equipment. Contact Sulzer if maximum pressure is exceeded, or if use of the maximum pressure fails to achieve the required movement. 6. Open the air release plug in the coupling hub and operate the expansion pump slowly to fill the hub. When air-free oil flow is obtained through the air release plug, close the air release plug. 7. Using the expansion pump, slowly raise hydraulic expansion pressure until it reaches EXPECTED EXPANSION PRESSURE. Hold this pressure for 30 minutes or until the coupling pops free. If there is no movement of the coupling, slowly raise expansion pressure to MAXIMUM EXPANSION PRESSURE and hold for 30 minutes, or until the coupling hub pops free. Note: If the coupling hub pops free, the load cell will compress slightly, and the advancing pressure on the advancing pump gauge will increase slightly. 8. If the coupling hub has not moved after a reasonable interval of time (30 minutes) strike the back face of the coupling, as close to the shaft as possible, with a soft mallet. Do not stand in front of the shaft end when striking the hub. Be sure that the coupling hub is restrained by the withdrawal equipment as it will release suddenly. 9. When the coupling moves, advancing pressure in the load cell piston chambers will rise; this is indicated on the gauge of the advancing pump. Release this pressure SLOWLY by opening the non-return valve on the advancing pump. This will allow the hub to move off the taper. 10. When the load cell is completely compressed, release the expansion pressure and open the non-return valve on the expansion pump. The coupling should now be free of the shaft. 11. Remove the dismantling equipment and remove the coupling hub.
Section 3.8 Page 4


Section 3.8
2 11 Aug 2004
3.8.4.2
Fit
Incorrect fitting of the pump-half coupling hub is potentially EXTREMELY DANGEROUS. The following fitting procedure MUST be followed precisely, and the work MUST be carried out by experienced and competent maintenance personnel. If in doubt, please contact Sulzer for advice. Refer to the supplied arrangement drawing for the coupling hub assembly and withdrawal equipment for specific EXPECTED (DESIGN) and MAXIMUM expansion pressures and EXPECTED (DESIGN) and MAXIMUM advancing pressures before starting the fitting procedure for the pump-half coupling hub. Note: It is assumed that all appropriate items of maintenance described in Section 3.6.3 General Overhaul Information and Advice have been completed. The coupling hub is fitted by applying expansion hydraulic pressure to the coupling hub using one hydraulic pump, and advancing the hub on to the shaft taper using the other hydraulic pump. 1. Remove the O-ring seals from the coupling hub and the shaft taper. 2. Ensure that the coupling bore has a lead-in radius at the larger end of the taper bore, as indicated on the arrangement drawing, and that sharp corners and burrs are removed from the small end of the shaft and hub tapers. 3. Clean the shaft and coupling bore tapers. 4. Remove the match-weighed plugs from the coupling hub hydraulic connections and fit the air release plug to one connection. 5. Check the fit of the coupling on the taper, by positioning the coupling hub on the shaft taper by hand. Check for high spots with engineers blue on fit areas, and clean if necessary. The coupling to shaft fit should have as a minimum 90% blue. 6. Fit the coupling onto the shaft by hand with the air release plug positioned at the top and push the coupling onto the shaft taper, as far as it will go. Determine and record its position relative to the nearest datum face (dimension A on the supplied arrangement drawing for the coupling hub assembly and withdrawal equipment) with slip gauges. 7. After checking the coupling fit and obtaining dimension A, remove the coupling hub from the shaft. 8. Calculate dimension C, according to the formula detailed on the supplied arrangement drawing. 9. Clean the coupling bore and shaft taper thoroughly and then coat lightly with hydraulic oil.
CAUTION
Use only light machine oil or hydraulic oil around any hydraulic fit. NEVER use grease. 10. Lubricate the new O-ring seals with hydraulic oil and install them into position on the coupling hub and onto the shaft taper.
Section 3.8 Page 5


Section 3.8
2 11 Aug 2004
11. Refit the coupling squarely onto the shaft and push it on by hand as far as it will go. Ensure that the air release plug is at the top. 12. Install the coupling assembly equipment to the end of the shaft, as shown on the supplied arrangement drawing and ensure that the ram is truly square to the coupling face to ensure there is no cocking of the hub. Ensure that the coupling assembly equipment is correctly and securely attached to the pump shaft and is fully tightened before attempting to expand the coupling hub injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result should the hub release suddenly. 13. Connect the higher pressure hydraulic pump to the coupling hub (expansion pump), and connect the lower pressure hydraulic pump (advancing pump) to the load cell, as shown on the supplied arrangement drawing. Always apply hydraulic pressure SLOWLY. The specified EXPECTED (DESIGN) expansion and advancing pressures are calculated values that should be sufficient to produce the required movement. However, if the required movement is not achieved, pressures CAN be increased as necessary UP TO the specified MAXIMUM values. DO NOT EXCEED the maximum pressure limits specified on the supplied arrangement drawing for the coupling hub assembly and withdrawal equipment. Contact Sulzer if maximum pressure is exceeded, or if use of the maximum pressure fails to achieve the required movement. 14. Open the air release plug in the coupling hub and operate the expansion pump slowly to fill the hub. When air-free oil flow is obtained through the air release plug, close the air release plug. 15. Using the advancing pump, apply an initial advancing pressure of 34 bar, 500 lbf/in2 to the load cell. Use callipers at dimension A to check that the coupling is being pushed on to the shaft squarely. 16. Using the expansion pump, apply pressure slowly to the coupling hub, increasing pressure slowly up to approximately HALF OF THE EXPECTED EXPANSION PRESSURE. Observe movement of the coupling hub using the callipers AND a dial indicator.
CAUTION
The callipers and DTI are used for showing relative movement only. Dimension C must be used to determine the final axial position of the hub. Note: If the expansion pressure cannot be maintained due to leakage from the O-ring seals, increase advancing pressure sufficiently to maintain a seal. During the following procedure, ensure that expansion pressure does not exceed the MAXIMUM specified value. 17. With expansion pressure established and stable at HALF OF THE EXPECTED EXPANSION PRESSURE, slowly increase advancing pressure in 500 lbf/in2 increments. Observe movement of the coupling hub with the callipers, and an automatic increase in the expansion pressure at the gauge on the expansion pump, until the coupling hub is in the correct position (indicated by measuring dimension C with slip gauges).
Section 3.8 Page 6


Section 3.8
2 11 Aug 2004
Note: An INCREASE in advancing pressure moves the coupling hub ONTO the shaft taper and automatically increases expansion pressure. If advancing pressure is REDUCED, the expansion pressure across the taper moves the coupling hub OFF the shaft. 18. Check dimension C. 19. If dimension C is correct, slowly release expansion pressure and then re-check dimension C. 20. When the expansion pressure is fully released, remove the hose and air release plug, but LEAVE THE ADVANCING RAM PRESSURISED FOR AT LEAST TWO HOURS to permit oil to flow completely from the clearance space in the coupling hub fit.
CAUTION
Failure to leave the advancing ram pressurised for at least two hours will require reassembly and could damage the coupling/shaft tapers. 21. Check dimension C with slip gauges. 22. Remove the rest of the coupling assembly / withdrawal equipment. 23. Observe any movement of the coupling hub using the dial indicator. If the hub moves OFF the taper by more than 0.05 mm: i. ii. record the actual movement. repeat steps 12 to 23, but subtract the value recorded at (i) above from dimension C.
CAUTION
When a shaft nut / coupling locknut is used, check the thread direction (right or left hand) before fitting and tightening the nut. 24. When a shaft nut / coupling locknut is fitted to the DE of the shaft, refit the shaft nut / coupling locknut and tighten it up to the coupling hub. Refit and tighten the locking grub screws through the nut into the tapped holes in the coupling hub to secure the shaft nut / coupling locknut in place. 25. Refit the two match-weighed blanking plugs in the hydraulic connections in the coupling hub, secured with LOCTITE 222, or equivalent.
Section 3.8 Page 7


Document No: Bearings 04 0 15 Jan 2008
Section 3.9
Pump - Bearings - Multi-Lobe / JHJ9 Tilting Pad
3.9
Bearings
3.9.1
Scope
Directions for dismantling, inspection and assembly of the pump DE and NDE Multi Lobe journal / JHJ-9 Tilting Pad thrust bearings.
3.9.2
Preparation
Study the following procedures as well as the pump Longitudinal Section drawing, and other available drawings and documents, and be familiar with the design details and assembly sequence. Plan the operations and have withdrawal and assembly equipment, and other special tools available. This includes any required measuring devices and torque wrenches. Note: Supplied special tools and equipment may be detailed in the IOM Manual in Section 1- Leading Particulars, Section 1.1 - List of Equipment Supplied, or elsewhere within the manual. Refer to Torque Tightening of Fasteners for information on standard torque tightening procedures and values.
Section 3.9 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.09 Bearings 04-0.doc

Section 3.9
3.9.3
DE Bearing Assembly
When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during DE and NDE pump bearing maintenance procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided: failure to maintain bearing assemblies correctly in accordance with this procedure and with any applicable manufacturers information failure to maintain correct casing / impeller / bearing clearances, as detailed either in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data or in this procedure failure to use NEW O-ring seals, gaskets, seals or nut locking devices of the correct type and size at all appropriate stages during assembly procedures failure to connect auxiliary pipework correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations and to direct the vent and drain pipework to suitable safe locations / containers failure to connect instrument cables correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations failure to maintain / install the mechanical seal assemblies correctly in accordance with manufacturers information failure to install the coupling spacer(s) and coupling guard(s) correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations
3.9.3.1
Dismantling
Note: It is assumed that all appropriate items of maintenance described in Section 3.6 Maintenance, General Overhaul Information and Advice have been completed. 1. Refer to Section 3.8 - Drive Coupling and remove the coupling spacer and the pumphalf coupling hub. 2. Disconnect and remove the instrumentation from the bearing housing, and store in a safe place. 3. Drain any remaining oil from the bearing housing into a suitable container. 4. Carefully disconnect and remove auxiliary pipework from the bearing housing. Plug pipework ends to prevent ingress of dirt. 5. If deflectors are fitted, loosen the setscrews securing inboard and outboard deflectors to the pump shaft. 6. Remove the taper pins / dowel pins from the joint flanges of the bearing housing halves. 7. Remove the screws securing the top half of the bearing housing to the bottom half.
Section 3.9 Page 2


Section 3.9
8. Remove the plug and fit an eyebolt to the top of the bearing housing top half. Attach a suitable sling to the eyebolt and to suitable lifting equipment. Lift the bearing housing top half carefully away from the bottom half and lower it onto a flat surface, padded with cloth to protect the machined surface. Remove the lifting equipment. Note: If temperature detector wires are fitted, they must be guided carefully as the bearing housing top half is removed. 9. Remove the socket headed screws securing the journal bearing top half to the bottom half. Verify match-marks for re-assembly, and then remove the top half. 10. If thermocouple probes are fitted, remove them before removing the journal bearing bottom half. 11. Lift the shaft slightly (maximum 0.004 inches, 0.1 mm) using a suitable piece of wood, then rotate the journal bearing bottom half around the shaft and remove it. Lower the shaft. 12. Fit two suitable eyebolts to the bearing housing bottom half, one on each side using suitable tapped screw holes in the joint flange. Attach a suitable sling to the eyebolts and to suitable lifting equipment. Remove the taper pins / dowel pins and screws securing the bearing housing bottom half to the volute case and lower the housing carefully onto a flat surface, padded with cloth to protect the machined surface. Remove the lifting equipment. 13. Remove the outboard Inpro seal / deflector (complete with carrier ring when applicable), from the shaft. 14. Remove the inboard Inpro seal / deflector (complete with carrier ring when applicable), from the shaft. 15. If deflectors were fitted, dress off any burrs caused by the deflector set screws.
3.9.3.2
Examination of Bearings
Visually inspect the journal bearing surfaces for excessive scoring and heat damage. Check the wear pattern on the running surfaces, the bearings and the shaft. Renew the bearings if excessive wear or damage is present. Bearing Housing Check bearing housing fits, filing off any interference points. Remove old sealant from housing flanges.
3.9.3.3
CAUTION
Assembly
A replacement bearing housing, or any re-work to the case parting flange or internal bore, requires that the rotating element radial centre position be determined in order to establish the correct bearing housing position. In these cases, refer to Section 3.9.5 - Rotating Element Radial Centring BEFORE re-assembling bearing housings. Note: Ensure that the DE mechanical seal is installed before re-assembling the DE bearing assembly. 1. Slide the inboard Inpro seal / deflector (complete with carrier ring when applicable), as far as possible onto the shaft.
Section 3.9 Page 3


Section 3.9
2. Slide the outboard Inpro seal / deflector (complete with carrier ring when applicable), onto the shaft, into the approximate fitted position. 3. Fit two suitable eyebolts to the bearing housing bottom half, one on each side using suitable tapped screw holes in the joint flange. Attach a suitable sling to the eyebolts and to suitable lifting equipment. Lift the bearing housing bottom half into position on the volute case, ensuring that it engages correctly over the inboard and outboard Inpro seals / deflectors (or the carrier rings when applicable). Where a carrier ring is used, ensure that the carrier ring anti-rotation pins engage correctly in the recesses in the housing flanges. 4. Insert the taper pins / dowel pins through the bearing housing bottom half, into the volute casing to position the housing. Fit the mounting screws and tighten them evenly to secure the housing in place. Remove the lifting equipment.
CAUTION
Check taper pins / dowel pins for proper fit and seating (not "bottoming") before tightening the screws. Incorrect seating affects rotating element radial centring. Refer to Section 3.9.5 - Rotating Element Radial Centring. 5. Wipe clean and then generously lubricate the babbit surface of the journal bearing bottom half and the shaft bearing surface. 6. Raise the shaft slightly (maximum 0.004 inches, 0.1 mm) using a suitable piece of wood and fit the bearing half. Lower the shaft. 7. Wipe clean and then generously lubricate the babbit surface of the journal bearing top half and the shaft bearing surface. 8. Fit the journal bearing top half, aligning match-marks, and fit and tighten the socket head screws to secure the two halves together. 9. Rotate the journal bearing as necessary to enable the anti-rotation pin in the journal bearing shell to enter the locating hole in the bearing housing. 10. Apply a thin coating of room temperature vulcanising (RTV) silicone sealer to the machined horizontal mating surface of the bottom half bearing housing. 11. Remove the plug and fit an eyebolt to the top of the bearing housing top half. Attach a suitable sling to the eyebolt and to suitable lifting equipment. Lift the bearing housing top half carefully into position on the housing bottom half, ensuring that it engages correctly over the inboard and outboard Inpro seals / deflectors (or the carrier rings when applicable) and the journal bearing anti-rotation pin. 12. Insert the taper pins / dowel pins through the flange joint between bearing housing halves to position the bearing housing top half. Fit the mounting screws and tighten them evenly to secure the housing top half in place. Remove the lifting equipment. Where taper pins are used, release the taper pins between the bearing housing halves but allow the pins to remain loose in place. 13. If deflectors are fitted, position the inboard and outboard deflectors to provide a 0.02 inches (0.5 mm) clearance from the bearing housing and tighten the setscrews to secure the deflectors in place. 14. Refit auxiliary pipework and refit and connect instrumentation as appropriate.
CAUTION
After both bearing assemblies have been fitted, turn the shaft manually and check that the rotating element rotates freely. Refer to Section 3.9.4 - NDE Bearing Assembly, Thrust Bearing Axial Clearance Check and Adjustment, and check the clearance remains correct.
Section 3.9 Page 4


Section 3.9
15. When DE and NDE bearing assemblies are installed, refer to Section 3.10 Mechanical Seals if appropriate and complete the installation of the DE and NDE mechanical seals as required. 16. Refer to Section 3.8 - Drive Coupling and refit the pump-half coupling hub and coupling spacer as required.
Section 3.9 Page 5


Section 3.9
3.9.4
NDE Bearing Assembly

When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during DE and NDE pump bearing maintenance procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided: failure to maintain bearing assemblies correctly in accordance with this procedure and with any applicable manufacturers information failure to maintain correct casing / impeller / bearing clearances, as detailed either in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data or in this procedure failure to use NEW O-ring seals, gaskets, seals or nut locking devices of the correct type and size at all appropriate stages during assembly procedures failure to connect auxiliary pipework correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations and to direct the vent and drain pipework to suitable safe locations / containers failure to connect instrument cables correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations failure to maintain / install the mechanical seal assemblies correctly in accordance with manufacturers information failure to install the coupling spacer(s) and coupling guard(s) correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations
3.9.4.1
Dismantling
Note: It is assumed that all appropriate items of maintenance described in Section 3.6 Maintenance, General Overhaul Information and Advice have been completed. 1. Refer to Section 3.8 Drive Coupling and remove the coupling spacer. 2. Disconnect and remove the instrumentation from the bearing housing, and store in a safe place. 3. Drain any remaining oil from the bearing housing into a suitable container. 4. Carefully disconnect and remove auxiliary pipework from the bearing housing. Plug pipework ends to prevent ingress of dirt. 5. If a deflector is fitted, loosen the setscrews securing the inboard deflector to the pump shaft. 6. When a shaft driven lube oil pump is fitted to the NDE of the pump shaft, remove the shaft driven lube oil pump including oil pump-half drive coupling. 7. Loosen the screws securing the bearing end cover. Remove only those screws that locate in the top half of the thrust bearing housing. 8. Remove the taper pins / dowel pins from the joint flanges of the bearing housing halves.
Section 3.9 Page 6


Section 3.9
9. Remove the screws securing the top half of the bearing housing to the bottom half. 10. Remove the plug and fit an eyebolt to the top of the bearing housing top half. Attach a suitable sling to the eyebolt and to suitable lifting equipment. Lift the bearing housing top half carefully away from the bottom half and lower it onto a flat surface, padded with cloth to protect the machined surface. Remove the lifting equipment. Note: If temperature detector wires are fitted, they must be guided carefully as the bearing housing top half is removed. 11. Remove the exposed inboard and outboard thrust bearing pads. Rotate the thrust pad carrier rings (cages) to remove the remaining pads. Note: Wrap each pad individually in soft material to protect the babbit face. RTD-equipped pads must be returned to their original position on re-assembly. 12. For the inboard and the outboard split carrier rings in turn, rotate the carrier ring so that the split line aligns with the bearing housing joint flange, and then lift off the carrier ring top half. Rotate the carrier ring bottom half out of the bearing housing. Ensure that matched halves are kept together. 13. Remove the remaining screws from the bearing end cover. Remove the cover, complete with 0-ring seal(s) and shim arrangement. The bearing end cover has a thrust bearing shim plate screwed to the inboard face to abut against the outboard faces of the outboard thrust pads. 14. When a shaft driven lube oil pump is fitted to the NDE of the pump shaft, remove the lube oil pump drive coupling components from the main pump shaft and remove the key. 15. Loosen the locking screw, and then unscrew and remove the bearing nut. Dress off any burrs. 16. Remove the rotating thrust collar and key. 17. Slide the adjusting piece / spacer sleeve off the shaft. 18. Remove the socket headed screws securing the journal bearing top half to the bottom half. Verify match-marks for re-assembly, and then remove the top half. 19. If thermocouple probes are fitted, remove them before removing the journal bearing bottom half. 20. Lift the shaft slightly (maximum 0.004 inches, 0.1 mm) using a suitable piece of wood, then rotate the journal bearing bottom half around the shaft and remove it. Lower the shaft. 21. Fit two suitable eyebolts to the bearing housing bottom half, one on each side using suitable tapped screw holes in the joint flange. Attach a suitable sling to the eyebolts and to suitable lifting equipment. Remove the taper pins / dowel pins and screws securing the bearing housing bottom half to the volute case and lower the housing carefully onto a flat surface, padded with cloth to protect the machined surface. Remove the lifting equipment. 22. Remove the seal ring. 23. Remove the inboard Inpro seal / deflector (complete with carrier ring when applicable), from the shaft. 24. If deflectors were fitted, dress off any burrs caused by the deflector set screws.
Section 3.9 Page 7


Section 3.9
3.9.4.2
Examination of Bearings
Thrust Bearings Inspect every thrust bearing pad. Renew pads if they show extreme wear, scratches, or any 'smearing' of the babbitt lining. New and used pads should not be mixed. If a pad must be renewed, renew all pads on that side of the bearing.
CAUTION
Prevent damage to the thrust collar bore and bearing surfaces. Inspect both faces of the thrust bearing collar. The running surfaces should be smooth. Replacement is generally recommended, but a rough surface can be ground or lapped if proper equipment is available. Grinding or lapping the collar will affect pump end-play movement. Refer to the assembly instructions for the thrust bearing. Check the run-out of a re-worked collar after it is refitted to the shaft. The maximum allowed TIR for pump operating speeds UP TO 3600 rev/min is 0.001 inches (0.025 mm). For pump operating speeds ABOVE 3600 rev/min, the maximum allowed runout is 0.0005 inches (0.013 mm). Journal bearings Visually inspect the journal bearing surfaces for excessive scoring and heat damage. Check the wear pattern on the running surfaces, the bearings and the shaft. Renew the bearings if excessive wear or damage is present. Bearing Housings Check bearing housing fits, filing off any interference points. Remove old sealant from housing flanges.
3.9.4.3
CAUTION
Assembly
A replacement bearing housing, or any re-work to the case parting flange or internal bore, requires that the rotating element radial centre position be determined in order to establish the correct bearing housing position. In these cases, refer to Section 3.9.5 - Rotating Element Radial Centring BEFORE re-assembling bearing housings. Note: Ensure that the NDE mechanical seal is installed before re-assembling the NDE bearing assembly. 1. Slide the inboard Inpro seal / deflector (complete with carrier ring when applicable), as far as possible onto the shaft. 2. Slide the seal ring into position on the shaft, into the approximate fitted position. 3. Fit two suitable eyebolts to the bearing housing bottom half, one on each side using suitable tapped screw holes in the joint flange. Attach a suitable sling to the eyebolts and to suitable lifting equipment. Lift the bearing housing bottom half into position on the volute case, ensuring that it engages correctly over the Inpro seal / deflector (or the carrier ring when applicable). Ensure that the carrier ring (when applicable) and seal ring anti-rotation pins engage correctly in the recesses in the housing flanges. 4. Insert the taper pins / dowel pins through the bearing housing bottom half, into the volute casing to position the housing. Fit the mounting screws and tighten them evenly to secure the housing in place. Remove the lifting equipment.
Section 3.9 Page 8


Section 3.9
CAUTION
Check taper pins / dowel pins for proper fit and seating (not "bottoming") before tightening the screws. Incorrect seating affects rotating element radial centring. Refer to Section 3.9.5 - Rotating Element Radial Centring. 5. Wipe clean and then generously lubricate the babbit surface of the journal bearing bottom half and the shaft bearing surface. 6. Raise the shaft slightly (maximum 0.004 inches, 0.1 mm) using a suitable piece of wood and fit the bearing half. Lower the shaft. 7. Wipe clean and then generously lubricate the babbit surface of the journal bearing top half and the shaft bearing surface. 8. Fit the journal bearing top half, aligning match-marks, and fit and tighten the socket head screws to secure the two halves together. 9. Rotate the journal bearing as necessary to enable the anti-rotation pin in the journal bearing shell to enter the locating hole in the bearing housing. Rotor Axial Position - Check and Adjustment 10. Mount a dial indicator on the NDE bearing housing, with the indicator tip in contact with the end of the shaft. 11. Push the shaft as far as it will go towards the drive end, then set the indicator to zero. 12. Push the shaft as far as it will go towards the non-drive end and note the reading on the dial indicator. 13. Move the shaft to the centre position, i.e. one-half of the total reading. 14. Refer to the illustration, below. Fit the rotating thrust collar and bearing nut temporarily at the NDE of the shaft. Thrust Plate
Bearing Nut
Rotor Axial Positioning - Typical 15. Hand-tighten the bearing nut to adjust the distance A between the thrust collar inner face and the internal face of the bearing housing inboard flange to the correct value as shown below: Kingsbury Code Size JHJ-9 / JJ-9 Distance A (inches) 3.0 Distance A (mm) 76.2
Section 3.9 Page 9


Section 3.9
16. Using feeler gauges, measure the gap between the thrust collar face and the shoulder of the shaft B. Record this measurement - this is the required thickness of the adjusting piece / spacer sleeve. 17. If the thickness of the original adjusting piece / spacer sleeve is not correct, a new sleeve must be machined to within 0.010 inches (0.25 mm) of the required thickness. Ground surfaces must be parallel within 0.005 inches (0.013 mm). 18. Remove the bearing nut and the rotating thrust collar from the NDE of the shaft. NDE Bearing Assembly - Continuation (1) 19. Fit the adjusting piece / spacer sleeve of the correct thickness into place on the shaft up to the shoulder. 20. Fit the key to the shaft and fit the thrust collar onto the shaft over the key and up to the adjusting piece / spacer sleeve. 21. Fit the bearing nut onto the shaft up to the thrust collar. Tighten the bearing nut to the correct torque value, as detailed in the table, below. Tighten the locking screw to secure the bearing nut in place. Kingsbury Code Size JHJ-9 / JJ-9 Bearing Nut Torque (lbf.ft) 150 Bearing Nut Torque (Nm) 203
22. Check the runout of the inboard and outboard faces of the rotating thrust collar after the locknut has been tightened to the correct torque. For pump operating speeds UP TO 3600 rev/min, the maximum allowed runout is 0.001 inches (0.025 mm). For pump operating speeds ABOVE 3600 rev/min, the maximum allowed runout is 0.0005 inches (0.013 mm). Note: To check runout, mount two dial indicators to read collar position 180 apart on one face of the collar. Rotate the shaft in four 90 turns, recording both dial indicator readings at each stop. The runout is the difference of the two readings at each 90 stop. Repeat the checks for the other face of the collar. 23. Fit the inboard carrier ring bottom half over the shaft. The bottom half has no drive key. Rotate the carrier ring half into the bearing housing lower half. Note: The thrust bearing pads must be lubricated before installation. Return RTD-equipped pads to their original positions. 24. Fit the bottom thrust pads into the carrier ring. Rotate the carrier ring, complete with thrust pads, to align the split line with the bearing housing flange. 25. Fit the inboard carrier ring top half into position on the bottom half. Ensure that matched halves are kept together. 26. Fit the top thrust pads into the carrier ring. Rotate the complete carrier ring, complete with thrust pads, to position the drive key at the top. Thrust Bearing Axial Clearance Check and Adjustment To allow clearance for the necessary formation of oil films on bearing surfaces, and for heat expansion, it is necessary to provide an axial clearance between the thrust collar and the thrust bearing pads. The clearance is the distance that the thrust collar can be moved between the inboard and outboard bearing pad surfaces. The measurement, and any necessary adjustment, is done during installation, without applying load to bearings.
CAUTION
Bearing clearance must be checked before operation of the pump.
Section 3.9 Page 10


Section 3.9
27. Temporarily fit the bearing end cover, complete with thrust bearing shim plate. Secure the cover to the bottom half of the bearing housing with socket head screws inserted finger-tight only. 28. Fit the outboard carrier ring bottom half over the shaft. The bottom half has no drive key. Rotate the carrier ring half into the bearing housing lower half.
Bearing End Cover Shim Plate Thrust Bearing Axial Clearance Check - Typical Note: The thrust bearing pads must be lubricated before installation. Return RTDequipped pads to their original positions. 29. Fit the bottom thrust pads into the carrier ring. Rotate the carrier ring, complete with thrust pads, to align the split line with the bearing housing flange. 30. Fit the outboard carrier ring top half into position on the bottom half. Ensure that matched halves are kept together. 31. Ensure that the inboard and outboard thrust bearing carrier rings are positioned correctly with drive keys at the top and that the anti-rotation pin in the journal bearing shell top half is positioned correctly to enter the locating hole in the top half of the bearing housing. Any mis-alignment will interfere with the installation of the top half of the bearing housing. 32. Remove the plug and fit an eyebolt to the top of the bearing housing top half. Attach a suitable sling to the eyebolt and to suitable lifting equipment. Lift the bearing housing top half carefully into position temporarily on the housing bottom half, ensuring that it engages correctly over the Inpro seal / deflector (or the carrier ring when applicable), over the seal ring, over the inboard and outboard thrust bearing carrier ring drive keys and the journal bearing anti-rotation pin. 33. Insert the taper pins / dowel pins through the flange joint between bearing housing halves to position the bearing housing top half. Fit the mounting screws and tighten them evenly to secure the housing top half in place. 34. Fit the remaining screws to secure the bearing end cover to the bearing housing halves. Tighten all bearing end cover screws securely. 35. Mount a dial indicator on the drive end bearing housing, with the indicator tip in contact with the shaft end. Push the shaft as far as it will go towards the NDE and hold it in place. Set the dial indicator to zero.
Section 3.9 Page 11


Section 3.9
36. Now push the shaft towards the DE as far as it will go and record the dial indicator reading. Compare the reading with the required thrust bearing axial clearance value detailed in the table, below. Kingsbury Code Size JHJ-9 / JJ-9 Thrust Bearing Axial Clearance (inches) 0.015 - 0.017 Thrust Bearing Axial Clearance (mm) 0.39 - 0.44
37. If the indicator reading (bearing axial clearance) is too large, adjust by removing the bearing end cover and adding the appropriate thickness of shims between the bearing end cover and the thrust bearing shim plate. If the indicator reading (bearing axial clearance) is too small, adjust by removing the bearing end cover and removing the appropriate thickness of shims from between the bearing end cover and the thrust bearing shim plate. If there are no more shims to remove to correct the clearance, grind the thrust bearing shim plate to the required thickness. Ground surfaces must be parallel within 0.002 inches (0.05 mm). 38. After adjustment, refit the bearing end cover with the correct thickness of shimming and repeat steps 35 to 37 above to re-check the available bearing clearance. NDE Bearing Assembly - Continuation (2) 39. Remove the bearing end cover, complete with thrust bearing shimming. 40. Remove the taper pins / dowel pins from the joint flanges of the bearing housing halves and remove the screws securing the top half of the bearing housing to the bottom half. Lift the bearing housing top half carefully away from the bottom half. 41. Apply a thin coating of room temperature vulcanising (RTV) silicone sealer to the machined horizontal mating surface of the bottom half bearing housing. 42. Lower the bearing housing top half carefully into position on the housing bottom half, ensuring that it engages correctly over the Inpro seal / deflector (or the carrier ring when applicable), over the seal ring, over the inboard and outboard thrust bearing carrier ring drive keys and the journal bearing anti-rotation pin. 43. Insert the taper pins / dowel pins through the flange joint between bearing housing halves to position the bearing housing top half. Fit the mounting screws and tighten them evenly to secure the housing top half in place. Remove the lifting equipment. Where taper pins are used, release the taper pins between the bearing housing halves but allow the pins to remain loose in place. 44. When a shaft driven lube oil pump is fitted to the NDE of the pump shaft, fit the key and fit the pump-half and the connecting piece of the lube oil pump coupling to the pump shaft. 45. Fit new O-ring seal(s) to the bearing end cover. Lubricate the O-ring sealing surfaces, then push the cover, complete with shim arrangement, into the bearing housing, aligning the screw holes. Fit the cover securing screws and tighten them evenly to secure the cover in place. 46. When a shaft driven lube oil pump is fitted to the NDE of the pump shaft, apply silicone sealant to the mounting flange of the shaft driven lube oil pump and to the mounting flange on the bearing end cover. Fit the shaft driven lube oil pump to the bearing end cover, ensuring that the oil pump drive coupling half engages correctly in the connecting piece.
Section 3.9 Page 12


Section 3.9
47. If a deflector is fitted, position the inboard deflector to provide a 0.02 inches (0.5 mm) clearance from the bearing housing and tighten the setscrews to secure the deflector in place. 48. Refit auxiliary pipework and refit and connect instrumentation as appropriate.
CAUTION
After both bearing assemblies have been fitted, turn the shaft manually and check that the rotating element rotates freely. Refer to Thrust Bearing Axial Clearance Check and Adjustment, above, and check the clearance remains correct. 49. When DE and NDE bearing assemblies are installed, refer to Section 3.10 Mechanical Seals if appropriate and complete the installation of the DE and NDE mechanical seals as required. 50. Refer to Section 3.8 - Drive Coupling and refit the pump-half coupling hub and coupling spacer as required.
Section 3.9 Page 13


Section 3.9
3.9.5
Rotating Element Radial Centring

When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during DE and NDE pump bearing maintenance procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided: failure to maintain bearing assemblies correctly in accordance with this procedure and with any applicable manufacturers information failure to maintain correct casing / impeller / bearing clearances, as detailed either in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data or in this procedure
Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Refer to the Longitudinal Section drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents. A replacement bearing housing requires that the rotating element radial centre position be determined and adjusted as required in order to establish the correct bearing housing position. Any re-work to the case parting flange or internal bore requires radial re-centring of the rotating element.
CAUTION
Improper bearing housing to casing dowel pin seating, and re-work to the case parting flange or internal bore can affect rotating element radial centring. An offcentre element can cause damage. 1. Remove the DE and NDE bearings, bearing housings and mechanical seals. 2. Re-install only the DE and NDE bearing housing lower halves and the sleeve bearing assemblies. Note: A telescopic gauge or dial indicator is recommended for measurement accuracy. 3. Begin the measurement and adjustment procedure at either the DE or NDE end. Both ends must be within centring specification before dowel holes are drilled. 0 a Pump Shaft Stuffing Box Inner Diameter
270
90
180
Section 3.9 Page 14


Section 3.9
4. Refer to the illustration, above. Make four measurements (a, b, c and d) at 90 intervals, in each case measuring the distance from the shaft outer diameter to the stuffing box inner diameter. Do not make any measurements directly on casing split lines. 5. Adjust the position of the bearing housing as necessary until the four measurements (a, b, c and d) are equal to within 0.001 in. (0.025 mm). 6. Tighten the bearing housing mounting screws and re-check the four measurements. Repeat steps 4 and 5 as necessary if measurements are outside the specified tolerance. 7. Repeat steps 4, 5 and 6 for the other end of the pump. 8. When the DE and NDE bearing housings are both within the centring specification, either ream existing dowel pin holes (if practical) or drill and ream new dowel pin holes. Fit the dowel pins. 9. Repeat step 4 for the DE and NDE of the pump. If measurements are outside the specified tolerance, repeat steps 5 to 9 as necessary. 10. Remove the bearing housings and sleeve bearings. Refer to the appropriate sections and refit the DE and NDE mechanical seals and bearing assemblies.
Section 3.9 Page 15


Document No: MSeal 01 3 05 Jan 2005
Section 3.10
Pump - Mechanical Seals
3.10
Mechanical Seals
The supplied pump and pumpset equipment MAY be designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Alternatively, if the pumpset equipment IS NOT designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area, this will be indicated in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 Hazardous Area Operation. Refer to Section 2.4 - General Safety for general safety advice for operators and maintenance personnel before starting any maintenance activity. Refer also to specific safety advice contained as applicable within the maintenance procedures included in this manual. When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during maintenance procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided: failure to maintain / install the mechanical seal assemblies correctly in accordance with manufacturers information failure to use NEW O-ring seals, gaskets, seals or nut locking devices of the correct type and size at all appropriate stages during assembly procedures failure to re-connect auxiliary pipework correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations and to direct the vent and drain pipework to suitable safe locations / containers
3.10.1
Scope
Directions for dismantling and assembly of the pump DE and NDE mechanical seals.
3.10.2
Preparation
Study the following procedures as well as the pump Longitudinal Section drawing, and other available drawings and documents, and be familiar with the design details and assembly sequence. Plan the operations and have withdrawal and assembly equipment, and other special tools available. This includes any required measuring devices and torque wrenches. Also, have suitable spare parts (i.e. seal faces, bolts etc.) available. Note: Supplied special tools and equipment may be detailed in the IOM Manual in Section 1- Leading Particulars, Section 1.1 - List of Equipment Supplied, or elsewhere within the manual. Refer to Torque Tightening of Fasteners for information on standard torque tightening procedures and values.
Section 3.10 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.10 Mseal 01-3.doc

Section 3.10
3.10.3
DE Mechanical Seal
Refer to the Longitudinal Section drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents, and also to the mechanical seal manufacturers information and drawings, supplied either as an insert to this manual or by others. Note: The coupling hub and DE bearing assembly must be removed before removal and/or installation of the DE mechanical seal. The DE bearing should be inspected before refitting and this MAY necessitate replacement or refurbishment of the bearing.
3.10.3.1 Removal
1. Refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 - Bearings and remove the DE bearing assembly. 2. Remove auxiliary pipework as appropriate from the DE mechanical seal. Plug pipework ends to prevent ingress of dirt.
CAUTION
The mechanical seal components must be restrained axially before removal of the mechanical seal. 3. Refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information, detailed above. Fit the appropriate seal component restraining fixtures in position to restrain the mechanical seal components. 4. Where the seal sleeve is attached to the pump shaft by grub screws / set screws inserted through tapped holes in the seal sleeve and engaging in dimples in the shaft, loosen the screws sufficiently to disengage the sleeve fully from the pump shaft. 5. Where the seal sleeve is attached to the pump shaft by a shrink disc system, refer to the illustration, right, and proceed as follows:
Mechanical Seal Clamping Ring
CAUTION
Do not detach the tension ring from the clamping ring. i. Loosen (but do not remove) the hex socket screws securing the tension ring and clamping ring together and separate the two rings.
Thrust Ring Seal Sleeve Pump Shaft Retaining Ring Tension Ring
Note: Two tapped holes are provided in the outboard face of the clamping ring to enable the use of jack screws to assist in initial separation of theclamping ring and tension ring. ii. Slide the tension ring / clamping ring assembly off the mechanical seal shaft sleeve, over the retaining ring and off the pump shaft.
Seal Sleeve - Shrink Disc Attachment 6. Loosen the seal retaining screws and free the mechanical seal from its housing in the casing. Two diametrically opposed tapped holes are provided in the seal plate for jackscrews to assist in initial removal. 7. Withdraw the mechanical seal from its housing and off the shaft.
iii. Remove the retaining ring and the thrust ring from the pump shaft.
Section 3.10 Page 2


Section 3.10
3.10.3.2 Installation
Note: Cleaning / inspection of mechanical seal components before seal installation, and any subsequent required replacement of component parts, must be carried out in accordance with the seal manufacturers information, detailed above. 1. Lubricate the pump shaft lightly.
CAUTION
Ensure that the mechanical seal restraining fixtures are fitted to secure the mechanical seal components axially. 2. Refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information, detailed above. Ensure that the appropriate seal component restraining fixtures are fitted to restrain the mechanical seal components. 3. Slide the mechanical seal, complete with new shaft O-ring seals and housing O-ring seal, over the pump shaft and into the housing in the casing. Ensure that seal is orientated correctly for pipework connections. 4. Fit the mounting screws through the seal plate and into the tapped holes in the casing. Tighten the screws evenly to the torque value specified either on the Longitudinal Section drawing, or on the seal manufacturers drawing, to secure the mechanical seal in place. 5. Where the seal sleeve is attached to the pump shaft by grub screws / set screws inserted through tapped holes in the seal sleeve and engaging in dimples in the shaft, position the sleeve to align the screws with the dimples in the shaft. i. If the grub screws / set screws are accessible with the DE bearing assembly in place (and by turning the shaft as necessary), refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 Bearings and refit the DE bearing assembly at this stage and then refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information, detailed above, and tighten the grub screws / set screws evenly to secure the seal sleeve to the pump shaft. Withdraw the seal component restraining fixtures and secure them clear. If the grub screws / set screws are NOT accessible with the DE bearing assembly in place, refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information, detailed above, and tighten the grub screws / set screws evenly to secure the seal sleeve to the pump shaft. Withdraw the seal component restraining fixtures and secure them clear. Refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 - Bearings and refit the DE bearing assembly.
ii.
6. Where the seal sleeve is attached to the pump shaft by a shrink disc system, refer to the illustration in Section 3.10.3.1, above, and proceed as follows: i. ii. Fit the thrust ring into the groove in the pump shaft and fit the retaining ring over the shaft and over the thrust ring to secure the thrust ring in place. Slide the tension ring / clamping ring assembly over the pump shaft, over the retaining ring and the mechanical seal shaft sleeve into the position shown on the Longitudinal Section drawing.
iii. Tighten the hex socket screws evenly to the torque value specified on the Longitudinal Section drawing to tighten the tension ring / clamping ring assembly and secure the mechanical seal shaft sleeve to the pump shaft. Withdraw the seal component restraining fixtures and secure them clear. Refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 Bearings and refit the DE bearing assembly. 7. Refit auxiliary pipework as appropriate to the DE mechanical seal.
Section 3.10 Page 3


Section 3.10
3.10.4
NDE Mechanical Seal

Refer to the Longitudinal Section drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents, and also to the mechanical seal manufacturers information and drawings, supplied either as an insert to this manual or by others. Note: The NDE bearing assembly must be removed before removal and/or installation of the NDE mechanical seal. The NDE bearing should be inspected before refitting and this MAY necessitate replacement or refurbishment of the bearing.
3.10.4.1 Removal
1. Refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 - Bearings and remove the NDE bearing assembly. 2. Remove auxiliary pipework as appropriate from the NDE mechanical seal. Plug pipework ends to prevent ingress of dirt.
CAUTION
The mechanical seal components must be restrained axially before removal of the mechanical seal. 3. Refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information, detailed above. Fit the appropriate seal component restraining fixtures in position to restrain the mechanical seal components. 4. Where the seal sleeve is attached to the pump shaft by grub screws / set screws inserted through tapped holes in the seal sleeve and engaging in dimples in the shaft, loosen the screws sufficiently to disengage the sleeve fully from the pump shaft. 5. Where the seal sleeve is attached to the pump shaft by a shrink disc system, refer to the illustration, right, and proceed as follows:
Mechanical Seal Clamping Ring
CAUTION
Do not detach the tension ring from the clamping ring. i. Loosen (but do not remove) the hex socket screws securing the tension ring and clamping ring together and separate the two rings.
Thrust Ring Seal Sleeve Pump Shaft Retaining Ring Tension Ring
Note: Two tapped holes are provided in the outboard face of the clamping ring to enable the use of jack screws to assist in initial separation of theclamping ring and tension ring. ii. Slide the tension ring / clamping ring assembly off the mechanical seal shaft sleeve, over the retaining ring and off the pump shaft.
Seal Sleeve - Shrink Disc Attachment 6. Loosen the seal retaining screws and free the mechanical seal from its housing in the casing. Two diametrically opposed tapped holes are provided in the seal plate for jackscrews to assist in initial removal. 7. Withdraw the mechanical seal from its housing and off the shaft.
iii. Remove the retaining ring and the thrust ring from the pump shaft.
Section 3.10 Page 4


Section 3.10
3.10.4.2 Installation
Note: Cleaning / inspection of mechanical seal components before seal installation, and any subsequent required replacement of component parts, must be carried out in accordance with the seal manufacturers information, detailed above. 1. Lubricate the pump shaft lightly.
CAUTION
Ensure that the mechanical seal restraining fixtures are fitted to secure the mechanical seal components axially. 2. Refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information, detailed above. Ensure that the appropriate seal component restraining fixtures are fitted to restrain the mechanical seal components. 3. Slide the mechanical seal, complete with new shaft O-ring seals and housing O-ring seal, over the pump shaft and into the housing in the casing. Ensure that seal is orientated correctly for pipework connections. 4. Fit the mounting screws through the seal plate and into the tapped holes in the casing. Tighten the screws evenly to the torque value specified either on the Longitudinal Section drawing, or on the seal manufacturers drawing, to secure the mechanical seal in place. 5. Where the seal sleeve is attached to the pump shaft by grub screws / set screws inserted through tapped holes in the seal sleeve and engaging in dimples in the shaft, position the sleeve to align the screws with the dimples in the shaft. i. If the grub screws / set screws are accessible with the NDE bearing assembly in place (and by turning the shaft as necessary), refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 - Bearings and refit the NDE bearing assembly at this stage and then refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information, detailed above, and tighten the grub screws / set screws evenly to secure the seal sleeve to the pump shaft. Withdraw the seal component restraining fixtures and secure them clear. If the grub screws / set screws are NOT accessible with the NDE bearing assembly in place, refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information, detailed above, and tighten the grub screws / set screws evenly to secure the seal sleeve to the pump shaft. Withdraw the seal component restraining fixtures and secure them clear. Refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 - Bearings and refit the NDE bearing assembly.
ii.
6. Where the seal sleeve is attached to the pump shaft by a shrink disc system, refer to the illustration in Section 3.10.4.1, above, and proceed as follows: i. ii. Fit the thrust ring into the groove in the pump shaft and fit the retaining ring over the shaft and over the thrust ring to secure the thrust ring in place. Slide the tension ring / clamping ring assembly over the pump shaft, over the retaining ring and the mechanical seal shaft sleeve into the position shown on the Longitudinal Section drawing.
iii. Tighten the hex socket screws evenly to the torque value specified on the Longitudinal Section drawing to tighten the tension ring / clamping ring assembly and secure the mechanical seal shaft sleeve to the pump shaft. Withdraw the seal component restraining fixtures and secure them clear. Refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 Bearings and refit the NDE bearing assembly. 7. Refit auxiliary pipework as appropriate to the NDE mechanical seal.
Section 3.10 Page 5


Document No: Lubric 03 1 30 Apr 2003
Section 3.11
Pump - Lubrication
3.11
Lubrication
The supplied pump and pumpset equipment MAY be designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Alternatively, if the pumpset equipment IS NOT designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area, this will be indicated in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 Hazardous Area Operation. Refer to Section 2.4 - General Safety for general safety advice for operators and maintenance personnel before starting any maintenance activity. Refer also to specific safety advice contained as applicable within the maintenance procedures included in this manual. When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to maintain bearing assemblies correctly MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Refer to the Longitudinal Section drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents. For specific information on required type of oil, required oil change frequency and oil fill quantity, refer to the Lubrication Schedule or the Utility Schedule in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents (if available). Alternatively, the required information may be available in Section 1.1.1 - External Requirements.
3.11.1
Bearings
The pump radial and thrust bearings are lubricated by a pressurised oil supply from an external lubricating oil system (LOS). Refer to the LOS manufacturers information, later in this manual. Oil Flush Before shipment, the anti-friction bearings were coated with an oil-soluble rust preventive. Flush bearings and bearing housing with clean oil. Refit drain plugs (and refill with fresh oil to the correct level.
CAUTION
Do not wash a new bearing with solvent. A new bearing is packaged in a clean condition, and the coating should not be removed.
Section 3.11 Page 1

K:\In Work Manuals\48329, 30 CP CD Khurais\48330\S3.11 Lubric 03-1.doc

Document No: TorqVal 01 0 02 May 2002
Section 3.12
Pump - Torque Tightening of Fasteners
3.12
CAUTION
Torque Tightening of Fasteners

Where a specific torque tightening value for a fastener is detailed within a manual or drawing, that value must be used in preference to the standard values given in this document. This process establishes standard methods and values for torque tightening of fasteners. The suggested torque values are recommended to produce properly stressed joints with a minimum probability of nuts, bolts or studs breaking or loosening. Avoid possible distortion by using the correct tightening sequence during torque development. All fasteners are to be lubricated (if lubricants are permitted) with graphite and oil, molybdenum disulfide, or another anti-seize lubricant of comparable quality that is compatible with the fastener application. Cleaning specifications must be consulted to determine suitability or allowance of thread lubricant. Note: When using plated studs and nuts, oil threads lightly - DO NOT use molybdenum disulfide. Consult the appropriate Parts List (if applicable), or other suitable information source, to determine the fastener size and the component material when identifying standard torque values. Consult the Fastener Application Guideline on the following page to determine the appropriate torque setting table to use, based on the fastener application. Torque Value Conversion: 1 lbf.ft = 1.356 Nm 1 Nm = 0.738 lbf.ft
3.12.1
Torque Development
When developing the required torque, tighten opposing fasteners in an alternating sequence, as illustrated in the examples below. Lubricate and then install fasteners finger-tight. Develop the required fastener torque value in a minimum of three steps, with a maximum of 30% of the torque value being reached on the initial pass. After the last torque-development pass, a final "check pass", tightening to the required torque value, should be performed in a clockwise bolt-to-bolt sequence.
10 6 1 15 11 5 10 13 3 8 4 6 9 1 7 8 2 5 3
4 7 12 16 2
14
Circular Multi-Bolt, Example Pattern
Non-Circular Multi-Bolt, Example Pattern
Section 3.12 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.12 TorqVal 01-0.doc

Section 3.12
3.12.2
Fastener Application Guideline

1. Refer to the appropriate manufacturers information and drawings for specific torque values on sub-vendor equipment. 2. Look for a grade identification marking on the fastener. If the fastener is not covered by a specific table (2-6), then refer to the appropriate column in Torque Table 1 or 7. 3. The material into which the fastener is threaded must also be considered. For example: A 0.75 inch fastener of A193 grade B7, threaded into AISI 316 stainless steel (SS) material, is tightened to 62 lbf.ft (i.e use the LOWER value appropriate to the 316 stainless steel in Table 1 Column 7 and not the HIGHER value appropriate to A193 grade B7). The same fastener, in a steel raised face flange with gasket, is tightened to 155 lbf.ft (Table 3). 4. Where the material or fastener grade marking is unknown, and the application is for Table 1, use the values in column 7 (AISI 304, 316, or monel material). FASTENER APPLICATION Flat face flange joint with gasket TABLE NUMBER 1 (Imperial) or 7 (Metric) 2
Case parting Flange (horizontally split case pump) Raised face flange joint with gasket Pump thrust end hold-down bolts for alignment keys Bearing nut torque values Pivot shoe bearing nut torque values
3 4 5 6
5. Case parting flange torque values (Table 2) must be established based on either materials of B7/L7 or B7M/L7M fasteners as appropriate.
Note: Table 7 is similar in scope to Table 1, but covers metric fasteners
6. Torque values in Tables 4 - 6 will be unchanged regardless of the fastener material. Typical applications that could have either flat or raised face flanges include, but are not limited to: Bowl and column (vertical pump) Discharge head to receiver can (vertical pump) Isolation chamber, seal housing, reservoir (J-unit application) Impeller retainer (capscrew) Stuffing box or case cover (suction and discharge) Seal plate Inner case (double case pump) Driver stand (vertical pump) Pump and driver mounting, coupling, bearing assembly and mounting components
Select either Table 1 or Table 3, as applicable.
Section 3.12 Page 2


Section 3.12
3.12.2.1 Table 1 (Torque Values)

Column No. Material and Grade 1 A &SA193 Gr B7 A & SA320 Gr L7 2 SAE Gr 5 A325 & A449 ASTM F468 N05500 (Monel lbf.ft 7 14 23 36 55 109 190 304 453 579 805 1084 1420 1312 1637 2469 3543 4890 6541 8527 Nm 9 18 31 49 75 147 258 412 615 785 1092 1469 1925 1779 2220 3348 4804 6631 8870 11562 3 A193 Gr B6 4 A &SA193 Gr B7M A & SA320 Gr L7M UNS S32760 lbf.ft 6 13 21 34 51 100 176 281 419 607 845 1137 1490 1923 2399 3618 5192 7166 9586 12496 Nm 9 17 29 46 69 136 238 381 568 824 1146 1542 2020 2608 3254 4907 7041 9718 12999 16944 lbf.ft 6 12 20 32 48 95 165 264 394 572 795 1070 1402 1810 2258 3406 4887 6745 Nm 8 16 27 43 65 128 224 358 535 775 1078 1451 1901 2454 3062 4618 6627 9146 lbf.ft 4 8 14 23 34 67 118 119 177 257 358 482 631 Nm 6 11 20 31 47 91 160 161 241 349 485 653 856 5 SAE Gr 2 6 SAE gr 1 ASTM A307 gr A or B lbf.ft 3 5 9 14 22 43 74 119 177 257 358 482 631 814 1016 1533 2199 3035 4060 5292 Nm 4 7 12 19 29 58 101 161 241 349 485 653 856 1104 1378 2078 2982 4116 5505 7176 7 AISI 304, 316 ASTM A193 gr B8, B8M Monel Lbf.ft 2 4 8 12 18 35 62 99 148 214 298 401 526 679 847 1277 1833 2529 3383 4410 Nm 3 6 10 16 24 48 84 134 200 291 404 544 713 920 1148 1732 2485 3430 4588 5980
Fastener Size 0.250 - 20 UNC 0.3125 - 18UNC 0.375 - 16 UNC 0.4375 - 14UNC 0.500 - 13 UNC 0.625 - 11 UNC 0.750 - 10 UNC 0.875 - 9 UNC 1.000 - 8 UNC 1.125 - 8 UN 1.250 - 8 UN 1.375 - 8 UN 1.500 - 8 UN 1.625 - 8 UN 1.750 - 8 UN 2.000 - 8 UN 2.250 - 8 UN 2.500 - 8 UN 2.750 - 8 UN 3.000 - 8 UN
lbf.ft 8 15 27 41 63 124 217 347 517 750 1044 1405 1840 2375 2964 4470 6414 8853 10714 13966
Nm 11 21 36 56 86 168 295 470 702 1017 1415 1905 2496 3221 4019 6061 8698 12004 14528 18938
Note: Torque values are based on 60% of material yield strength except for the following: SAE Grade 8 fasteners and Socket Head Capscrews shall be torqued to column 1 values. All other material grades not listed or unidentifiable fasteners are to be torqued to column 7 values.
Torque values based on lightly lubricated threads.
Section 3.12 Page 3


Section 3.12

Case Parting Flange (Horizontal Split Case Pumps) Material and Grade Fastener Size 0.250 - 20 UNC 0.3125 - 18UNC 0.375 - 16 UNC 0.4375 - 14UNC 0.500 - 13 UNC 0.625 - 11 UNC 0.750 - 10 UNC 0.875 - 9 UNC 1.000 - 8 UNC 1.125 - 8 UN 1.250 - 8 UN 1.375 - 8 UN 1.500 - 8 UN 1.625 - 8 UN 1.750 - 8 UN 2.000 - 8 UN 2.250 - 8 UN 2.500 - 8 UN 2.750 - 8 UN 3.000 - 8 UN A &SA193 Gr B7 A & SA320 Gr L7 lbf.ft 280 661 968 1329 1784 2339 2969 3506 5215 7486 10532 12495 Nm 379 896 1312 1802 2420 3171 4026 4754 7071 10152 14282 16943 213 504 737 1013 1360 1782 2262 2671 3973 5704 8024 10865 289 683 1000 1373 1844 2416 3068 3622 5388 7735 10881 14733 -A &SA193 Gr B7M A & SA320 Gr L7M lbf.ft Nm

Raised Face Flange Joint With Gasket Fastener Size 0.250 - 20 UNC 0.3125 - 18UNC 0.375 - 16 UNC 0.4375 - 14UNC 0.500 - 13 UNC 0.625 - 11 UNC 0.750 - 10 UNC 0.875 - 9 UNC 1.000 - 8 UNC 1.125 - 8 UN 1.250 - 8 UN 1.375 - 8 UN 1.500 - 8 UN 1.625 - 8 UN 1.750 - 8 UN 2.000 - 8 UN 2.250 - 8 UN 2.500 - 8 UN 2.750 - 8 UN 3.000 - 8 UN Table 1 Col 1-4 MTL lbf.ft 6 11 19 30 45 89 155 248 370 536 745 1003 1315 1697 2117 3193 4582 6323 8458 11026 Nm 8 15 26 40 61 120 210 336 501 727 1011 1361 1783 2301 2871 4329 6213 8574 11469 14951 Table 1* Col 5-7 MTL lbf.ft 2 4 8 12 18 35 62 99 148 214 298 401 526 679 847 1277 1833 2529 3383 4410 Nm 3 6 10 16 24 48 84 134 200 291 404 544 713 920 1148 1732 2485 3430 4588 5980
Torque values based on lightly lubricated threads. * Ensure that these values will allow clamping pressure adequate to seal the joint.
Section 3.12 Page 4


Section 3.12

Pump Thrust End Hold-Down Bolts for Hot Alignment Keys Fastener Size 0.250 - 20 UNC 0.3125 - 18UNC 0.375 - 16 UNC 0.4375 - 14UNC 0.500 - 13 UNC 0.625 - 11 UNC 0.750 - 10 UNC 0.875 - 9 UNC 1.000 - 8 UNC 1.125 - 8 UN 1.250 - 8 UN 1.375 - 8 UN 1.500 - 8 UN 1.625 - 8 UN 1.750 - 8 UN 2.000 - 8 UN 2.250 - 8 UN 2.500 - 8 UN 2.750 - 8 UN 3.000 - 8 UN lbf.ft 35 55 85 125 175 240 300 400 500 750 Nm 47 75 115 170 237 325 407 542 678 1017 -
3.12.2.5 Table 5 (Bearing Nut Torque Values)

Locknut Designation 7300 Series Angular Contact Ball Bearings Maximum allowable tightening torque N-06 N-07 N-08 N-09 N-10 N-11 N-12 N-13 N-14 AN-15 AN-16 AN-17 AN-18 AN-19 AN-20 AN-21 AN-22 lbf.ft 20 25 35 50 70 90 115 145 175 220 260 310 360 425 525 600 680 Nm 25 30 50 70 95 125 155 195 235 295 350 420 490 580 710 815 920 6300 Series Deep Groove Ball 6200 Series Deep Groove Ball Bearings Bearings Maximum allowable tightening torque lbf.ft 15 20 30 45 60 80 100 125 150 185 220 260 310 360 450 515 635 Nm 20 30 40 60 85 110 135 170 210 250 300 355 420 490 610 700 860 Maximum allowable tightening torque lbf.ft 11 17 25 30 35 50 65 85 100 115 140 175 210 250 300 350 415 Nm 15 25 35 45 50 70 85 115 135 160 190 235 285 335 405 475 565
Section 3.12 Page 5


Section 3.12
3.12.2.6 Table 6 (Pivot Shoe Bearing Nut Torque Values)

Thrust Bearing Size JHJ-4 JHJ-5 JHJ-6 JHJ-7 JHJ-8 JHJ-9 Torque Value lbf.ft 100 100 100 150 150 150 Nm 135 135 135 203 203 203
3.12.2.7 Table 7 (Torque Values - Metric)

BS 6105 Stainless Steel Material and Grade A2 A4 4.6 BS 3692 Carbon Steel 5.6 BS 3076 (NA 18 Ni CuAl Alloy) Nominal Size (M) 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 56 64 Nm 1.94 4.60 9.12 15.6 24.7 37.2 52.0 72.6 96.5 125 181 248 334 428 549 684 847 1030 1640 2430 Nm 2.15 5.09 10.1 17.3 27.3 41.2 57.7 80.4 107 139 200 275 370 474 608 757 939 1140 1810 2700 Nm 2.51 5.96 11.8 20.3 32 48.2 67.5 94.1 125 162 234 322 434 555 712 887 1100 1330 2120 3160 Nm 3.14 7.45 14.8 25.3 40 60.3 84.4 118 157 203 293 403 542 694 890 1110 1370 1670 2650 3950 Nm 6.70 15.9 31.6 54.0 85.3 129 180 251 334 433 625 859 1160 1480 1900 2360 2930 3560 5660 8420 Nm 11.3 26.8 53.2 91.2 144 217 304 424 563 730 1060 1450 1950 2500 3200 3990 4950 6010 9560 14200 Nm 5.76 13.66 27.13 46.38 73.33 110.55 154.73 216.3 287.8 372 537 739 994 1272 1632 2035 2512 3062 4858 7242 8.8 12.9 Duplex SS 32760
Section 3.12 Page 6


Document No: FieldMount 01
Section 3.13
Pump - Field Mounting the Driver
1 30 Apr 2003
3.13
Field Mounting the Driver

The supplied pump and pumpset equipment MAY be designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. Alternatively, if the pumpset equipment IS NOT designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area, this will be indicated in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 Hazardous Area Operation. Refer to Section 2.4 - General Safety for general safety advice for operators and maintenance personnel before starting any installation activity. Refer also to specific safety advice contained as applicable within the installation procedures included in this manual. When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area, failure to maintain / install the drive motor correctly in accordance with manufacturers information MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment. In general, if an uninstalled driver is received from the Sulzer factory with the pump and the base plate, it will have previously been mounted and aligned in the factory. Holes tapped in the base plate driver pedestals for hold-down bolts will confirm this. On some occasions, however, a driver may be delivered to site without any initial mounting and alignment. In either case, the driver must be mounted on the base plate after the base plate is secured to the support structure. Refer to the driver manufacturers information and drawings, later in this manual. 1. Check that the driver to be installed is the correct one for the application. 2. Using a dial indicator mounted on the frame, confirm that the driver shaft runout does not exceed 0.002 inches (0.0508 mm) TIR. If this tolerance is not met, do not proceed without Sulzer approval. 3. If the runout is satisfactory, assemble the drive key and mount the coupling hub following the coupling vendors instructions. 4. Lift the driver, clean the mounting surfaces of the driver and pedestals, and place the driver on the base plate. 5. Separate the pump (or gearbox or fluid coupling as appropriate) shaft and driver shaft end to the dimension shown on the coupling assembly drawing. Note: The rotor of a sleeve bearing motor must be placed at its magnetic centre prior to moving to the correct shaft separation position. 6. Align the driver shaft approximately with the driven shaft using a straight edge and a taper gauge or a set of feeler gages.
Section 3.13 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.13 FieldMount 01-1.doc

Document No: FieldMount 01
Section 3.13
Pump - Field Mounting the Driver
1 30 Apr 2003
7. Select the correct driver hold-down bolts according to the manufacturers instructions. Ensure the mounting hole size is adequate and has sufficient clearance for a precise alignment later on. 8. For units that have not previously been installed, mark hole positions using the driver feet as templates. Use marker blue on the pedestal surfaces to facilitate hole positioning from the driver mounting holes. 9. Remove the driver, drill and tap holes to suit the hold-down bolts selected. 10. During final alignment of the driver, it may be necessary to add or remove shims at each driver mounting foot position to position the driver correctly. 11. After final alignment of the driver and tightening of the driver hold-down bolts, holes are normally drilled through the driver mounting feet and shims and into the support structure for insertion of locating dowels to secure the driver in position.
Section 3.13 Page 2

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.13 FieldMount 01-1.doc

Document No: CD Trouble 01 0 12 Jul 2002
Section 3.14
Pump - Troubleshooting
3.14
Troubleshooting
The following table identifies problems that may occur during start-up or normal operation. It also suggests a course of action based on the initial diagnosis of the problem. Further assistance is available by contacting a Sulzer representative. Problem Diagnosis
Speed is too low - turbine or engine drives. Lack of downstream backpressure. Direction of rotation wrong electric drive motor. Pump not primed. Impeller passages obstructed.
Course of Action
Refer to the driver manufacturers information and take the recommended action. Check control valve setting and adjust valve to increase pressure. Check power supply cables to motor driver, remove and reconnect to the correct terminals. Refer to Commissioning and Operation and prime system with product. Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Remove rotor and check between impeller vanes. Remove all foreign material without scoring hydraulic passages. Investigate valve actuator and control system operation. Adjust as necessary to maintain correct valve opening. Open all vents to eliminate air from pumping system. Check pump design requirements and proceed to make necessary changes or adjustments to system and create sufficient pressure. Remove and clean, or replace, suction strainer screen. Refer to Installation and Coupling Alignment. Check alignment and pipe strain - adjust as necessary. Locate voids by tapping on top plate. Fill voids completely with grout, drilling additional holes in top plate if necessary to evacuate air. Refer to Installation and Coupling Alignment. Check alignment taking cold offset into account. Dismantle pump to remove each assembly and rebalance to correct tolerances. Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Remove rotor and check between impeller vanes. Remove all foreign material without scoring hydraulic passages. Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Requires complete pump / rotating element dismantling to check shaft runout. Straighten to correct excessive runout tolerances or replace shaft. Check pump design requirements. Make necessary changes or adjustments to system to create more pressure at pump suction.
No discharge pressure. Failure to deliver liquid at startup.
Loss of discharge pressure after startup.
Downstream control valve opening too far. Air pocket in suction line. Insufficient suction pressure causing product to vaporise in pump. Suction strainer clogged.
Vibration and noise.
Pipe strain or coupling misalignment. Pump base not grouted, or air pockets exist between grout and base plate top plate. Cold offset not accounted for during final alignment. Improperly balanced rotating element or coupling. Impeller passages obstructed.
Bent shaft.
Cavitation as air or gas comes out of entrainment at first stage impeller.
Section 3.14 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\CD and CD-2\S3.14 CD Trouble 01-0.doc

Section 3.14
Problem Reduced pump output flow.
Diagnosis Minimum flow line open or partially open. Worn minimum flow orifice / warm up orifice. Impeller or case obstructed with foreign material.
Course of Action Review minimum flow circuit and make corrections to ensure proper operation. Locate worn unit. Remove and replace with new. Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Remove rotor and check between impeller vanes. Remove all foreign material without scoring hydraulic passages. Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Dismantle pump. Measure clearances at all wear part surfaces. Replace worn parts. Refer to seal manufacturers information. Open seal flush line vents to remove all entrapped air from system. Refer to Mechanical Seals and to seal manufacturers information. Remove and check mechanical seal assembly for loose parts and pumping ring orientation. Refer to seal cooler manufacturers information. Check cooler. Back flush to clean out or replace if necessary. Remove from line, check size against flow requirements and replace if necessary. Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Remove casing cover(s) and check throat bushing clearances. Replace worn bushing if required. Refer to Mechanical Seals and to seal manufacturers information. Remove seal assembly and replace springs. Review seal application if problem persists. Review application with seal vendor and replace parts according to recommendation. Refer to Installation and Coupling Alignment. Check alignment. Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Requires complete pump / rotating element dismantling to check shaft runout. Straighten to correct excessive runout tolerances or replace shaft.
Pump internals worn on close running clearance surfaces. Short seal life. Excessive seal leakage. Seal flush injection line hot. Seal flush flow rate insufficient. Seal flush system not vented. Seal pumping ring not secure or rotating backwards. Fouled seal cooler.
Excessive Wrong orifice upseal flush stream of seal. flow velocity. Restriction throat bushing worn. Particulates in seal flush. Clogged seal springs lock up.
Seal face materials inadequate for abrasive service. Coupling misalignment. Bent pump shaft.
Section 3.14 Page 2


Section 3.14
Problem High bearing temperature.
Diagnosis Coupling misalignment. Oil level too low or high. Oil viscosity too high. Excessive pump thrust.
Course of Action Refer to Installation and Coupling Alignment. Check alignment. Refer to Lubrication for correct level, and adjust level. Check constant level oiler setting. Use oil of recommended grade. Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Remove casing cover(s) and check wear part clearances. Dismantle rotating element as necessary to replace worn parts. Refer to Bearing Assemblies. Replace bearings. Refer to Bearing Assemblies. Examine assembly and condition of bearing and associated parts. Adjust assembly and replace parts as necessary. Review pump operating parameters with a Sulzer representative. Dismantle and repair unit and follow correct procedures during future operation. Review pump operating parameters with a Sulzer representative and make necessary corrections to unit design. Refurbish pump with correct parts, clean system, re-commission and operate as detailed in the manual.
Worn out bearings. Incorrectly installed bearing.
Pump overheating / seizure.
Pump operating below minimum flow.
Short term corrosion erosion Pitting oxidation or loss of material
Materials of construction not compatible with product. Abrasive material entrained in product. Insufficient suction pressure or entrained vapour. Electrolysis.
Section 3.14 Page 3


Document No: RepParts 01 0 02 May 2002
Section 3.15
Pump - Replacement Parts
3.15
3.15.1
Replacement Parts
Spare Parts
Spare parts should be kept to reduce downtime. Service of a pump determines number of spare parts. For pumps used in critical service, it is recommended that a complete rotating element, pre-assembled as far as practical, be stocked on-site.
3.15.2
Parts Orders
When ordering spare parts, provide the following details: 1. Pump serial number (from pump duty plate) 2. Longitudinal Section drawing item number 3. Description of part 4. The number of part as shown on Longitudinal Section drawing and parts list. Refer to Section 2 - Introduction and General Safety, Contact Information for contact information in regard to spare parts.
3.15.3
After Sales Service

Service Engineers are available on request to carry out commissioning and on-site repairs. Refer to Section 2 - Introduction and General Safety, Contact Information for contact information in regard to after sales service.
3.15.4
Spare Parts List and Interchangeability Record

When appropriate, a Spare Parts List and Interchangeability Record is included in Section 1 - Leading Particulars.
Section 3.15 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.15 RepParts 01-0.doc

Document No: Purge 02 0 04 Jan 2008
Section 3.16
Nitrogen Charged Storage Container Revision: - Charging and Purging Procedures Revision Date:
3.16
Nitrogen Charged Storage Container - Charging and Purging Procedures

Refer to the CD 20x24x22G Rotor Assembly Transportation / Preservation Unit General Arrangement drawing and Bill of materials in Section 1.2 - Sulzer drawings and Documents.
3.16.1
Lifting
Lifting Equipment Do not pass under a suspended load. Make sure that all lifting equipment is correctly certified / calibrated and is in serviceable condition and suitable for the task. Only use approved safe methods of handling heavy equipment. Suitability of Lifting Equipment Where specific lifting equipment is NOT supplied, the site operators lifting equipment may be considered as suitable if it: is correctly certified / calibrated is fit for the intended purpose can be used without causing damage to any equipment is in serviceable condition is of an acceptable size and configuration has a specified safe working load (SWL) which exceeds the total weight it is required to accept
Slinging Safety Guidelines Ensure that the load is suitable for lifting with a sling or slings. The sling(s) should not be allowed to damage the load, nor should the sling(s) be damaged. Ensure that the safe working load (SWL) of the sling(s) being used is adequate for the lift, having regard to the method of slinging. Ensure that the slings being used are in good condition. Damaged slings should be withdrawn from service immediately Ensure that the load will be stable and in balance when lifted. Attach the sling(s) to the designed lifting points where provided Lifting / Handling Equipment When selecting a suitable crane or hoist, the weight of all handling and lifting equipment supported by the crane or hoist (lifting beam, slings, shackles etc.) must be added to the total weight of the parts to be handled. The crane / hoist MUST be capable of safely lifting the heaviest of items in Sulzer supply. When using a fork lift to move the container, use the fork lifting points included in the container base plate construction.
Section 3.16 Page 1

K:\In Work Manuals\48329, 30 CP CD Khurais\48330\S3.16 Purge 02-0.doc

Section 3.16
3.16.2
Nitrogen Charging Procedure

Note: The storage container may be fitted with pressure and vacuum relief valves. When fitted, these valves will be set to operate at a safe positive and negative pressure differential between container and ambient pressure to prevent structural damage to the container. 1. Ensure all flange bolts are fully tightened around the full perimeter of the container.
CAUTION
Refer to the Storage Container General Arrangement drawing and to the Lifting guidelines, above, before lifting the container. 2. Lift the container into the vertical position. 3. If an external nitrogen supply is in use, connect the nitrogen supply to the inlet connection. Note: The inlet pipework fitted permanently to the storage container must include an inlet control valve / regulator to enable control of nitrogen gas flow into the container and to prevent gas leakage when the external supply is disconnected. 4. Ensure that the outlet purge valve is in the open position. During the container purging procedure, there is a risk of suffocation from an excessive concentration of nitrogen in inhaled air. The purging procedure MUST be carried out in a well-ventilated location or outdoors. 5. Turn on a low pressure nitrogen supply to the storage container using the valve / regulator to control delivery pressure BELOW the pressure relief valve setting. Allow nitrogen to flow through the container and out of the open purge valve for 3 hours to ensure that the container is purged of air. 6. Close the purge valve. 7. Continue / increase the flow of nitrogen until the required internal positive pressure specified by the container manufacturer is obtained within the container. 8. Turn off the nitrogen supply. Where an external nitrogen supply is in use, disconnect the supply.
3.16.2.1 Routine Maintenance

Routine pressure check - Check the storage container pressure gauge or pressure indicator every week to ensure that the positive differential pressure within the container is being maintained. If pressure is low, re-charge the container to the correct value using the above procedure. Record re-charging actions to identify possible leaks in the container system. Stored equipment check - Open the container and assess the condition of the stored equipment every 12 months. If the equipment remains in good condition, re-seal and pressurise the container for a further 12 month storage period. If the condition of the equipment has deteriorated, take any remedial actions to restore the equipment and then re-seal and pressurise the container for a further 12 month storage period.
Section 3.16 Page 2


Section 3.16
3.16.3
Nitrogen Purging Procedure

During the container purging procedure, there is a risk of suffocation from an excessive concentration of nitrogen in inhaled air. The purging procedure MUST be carried out in a well-ventilated location or outdoors. 1. Slowly open the purge valve fully to release pressure from the container.
CAUTION
Refer to the Lifting guidelines, above, before lifting the container. 2. When internal pressure has been dissipated, lower the container carefully into the horizontal position. 3. Flange bolts can now be released to allow access to the internal equipment.
Section 3.16 Page 3


Document No: MecSeal 01 0 26 Apr 2002
Section 4
Mechanical Seal
Mechanical Seal
The mechanical seal manufacturers information, and the associated equipment manufacturers information, is included next as an insert to the manual.
L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 4\S4 MecSeal 01-0.doc
OPERATING MANUAL
This document was drawn up observing the EC directives "Machinery" 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-2 and the German Standard VDI 4500.
In case of this mechanical seal is operated in explosion area an appropriate additional operating manual, following EC directives 94/9/EC (ATEX 95), has to be observed by all means! If required this could be ordered at BURGMANN.
BURGMANN MECHANICAL SEAL (M.S.) SHV8/165-E1

These instructions are intended for the assembly, operating and control personnel and should be kept at hand on site.
Project Item no. End user Machine manufacturer Type of machine
: ARAMCO KHURAIS CRUDE OIL SHIPPER : B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D : ARAMCO : SULZER : CD 20x24x22G
PLEASE READ this manual carefully and OBSERVE the information contained as to:
Safety Installation Transport / Storage Operation Information about the product Servicing
If there are any unclear points please contact BURGMANN by all means!
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
Operating Manual SHV8/165-E1
page 2 / 19
Table of Contents
Keywords and Symbols.......................................................................................3 GENERAL SAFETY NOTES............................................................................4 Instructions for worker's protection......................................................................5 TRANSPORT / STORAGE .................................................................................6 Transport.............................................................................................................6 Packing and storage ...........................................................................................6 INFORMATION ABOUT THE PRODUCT .......................................................8 Manufacturer and country of origin .....................................................................8 Declaration by the manufacturer .........................................................................8 Type designation.................................................................................................8 Designated use ...................................................................................................8 Operating conditions ...........................................................................................9 Materials .............................................................................................................9 Drawings, diagrams ............................................................................................9 Description ..........................................................................................................9 Required space, connecting dimensions ..........................................................10 Supply of M.S....................................................................................................10 Emissions..........................................................................................................10 INSTALLATION................................................................................................11 Assembly utilities ..............................................................................................11 Preparation for assembly ..................................................................................11 Assembly / installation ......................................................................................12 Supply connections...........................................................................................14 OPERATION.....................................................................................................15 Safe operation...................................................................................................15 Start up .............................................................................................................15 SERVICING ......................................................................................................16 Maintenance .....................................................................................................16 Directives in case of failure ...............................................................................16 After-sales service by BURGMANN ..................................................................16 Reconditioning (repair)......................................................................................17 Disassembly / removal......................................................................................17 Spare parts .......................................................................................................18 Required details for enquiries and orders .........................................................18 Disposal of the BURGMANN mechanical seal..................................................19 Copyright...........................................................................................................19
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 3 / 19
Keywords and Symbols

Following symbols for particularly important information are used:
"Attention, please pay special attention to these sections of text"
DANGER!
Draws attention to a direct hazard that will lead to injury or death of persons
WARNING!
Draws attention to the risk that a hazard could lead to serious injury or death of persons
CAUTION!
Draws attention to a hazard or unsafe method of working that could lead to personal injury or damage to equipment
ATTENTION!
Identifies a potentially dangerous situation. If it is not avoided the product or something in its vicinity could be damaged
IMPORTANT!
Identifies tips for use and other particularly useful information.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 4 / 19
GENERAL SAFETY NOTES
Any person being involved in assembly, disassembly, start up, operation and maintenance of the BURGMANN Mechanical Seal must have read and understood this Instruction Manual and in particular the safety notes. We recommend the user to have this confirmed. BURGMANN Mechanical Seals are manufactured on a high quality level and they keep a high working reliability. Yet, if they are not operated within their intended purpose or handled inexpertly they may cause risks. The machine has to be set up in such a way that seal leakage can be led off and disposed properly and that any personal injury caused by spurting product in the event of a seal failure is avoided. Any operation mode that affects the operational safety of the mechanical seal is not permitted. Unauthorised modifications or alterations are not permitted as they affect the operational safety of the mechanical seal. BURGMANN mechanical seals must be installed, operated, maintained, removed or repaired by authorised, trained and instructed personnel only. The responsibilities for the respective jobs to be done have to be determined clearly and observed in order to prevent unclear competencies from the point of security. Any work to be done on the mechanical seal is generally only permitted when the seal is neither operating nor pressurised. WARNING! Seals that have been used with hazardous substances must be properly cleaned so that there is no possible danger to people or to the environment. Apart from the notes given in this manual the general regulations for worker's protection and those for prevention of accidents have to be observed.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 5 / 19
Instructions for worker's protection
WARNING! If the medium to be sealed and/or the supply liquid is subject to the Hazardous Substances Regulation (GefStoffV), the instructions for handling dangerous substances (safety data sheets to EU Directive 91/155/EEC) and the accident prevention regulations have be observed. Medium to be sealed and/or supply medium may escape if the seal fails. Injury of persons and environment may be prevented by the user providing for splash protection and wearing safety goggles. Care has to be taken by the user for proper disposal of the leakage. The user has to control these measures. The user has to check what effects a failure of the mechanical seal might have and what safety measures have to be taken to prevent personal injury or damage to the environment.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 6 / 19
TRANSPORT / STORAGE
Transport
If not specified differently by contract the BURGMANN standard packing is used which is suitable for dry transport by truck, train or plane. The warning signs and notes on the packing must be observed. In addition seaworthy packing may become necessary. Notes for income inspection: Check packaging for visible damages. Open packaging carefully. Do not damage or lose parts supplied separately. Check if consignment is complete (delivery note). Inform the supplier immediately in writing if parts are damaged or missing. The mechanical seal has to be protected from damage during transport and storage. The transport case in which the seal is supplied is well suited for this purpose and should be kept for a possible return transport. ATTENTION! If the machine as well as the mechanical seal installed into the machine are transported together the assembly fixtures have to be inserted and fixed. The shaft has to be protected from deflection and shocks.
Packing and storage

The following recommendations apply to all BURGMANN mechanical seals which have been supplied and stored in their undamaged original packaging, as well as to seals which have been installed in a machine (e.g. pump, compressor, agitator, etc.) but have not yet been put into operation. BURGMANN mechanical seals and spare parts are super finished and repeatedly tested machine elements. For the storage special conditions have to be followed. Sliding materials and elastomers are subject to material-specific and time-based alterations (distortion, ageing) which might reduce the full efficiency of the mechanical seals. Yet, this may be avoided by observing the storage instructions. For the stock keeping of elastomers special conditions are required. For all rubberelastic parts the rules of DIN 7716 resp. of ISO 2230-1973 (E) are valid. Conveniences for storing of mechanical seals dust free moderately ventilated constantly tempered relative air humidity below 65 %, temperature between 15 C and 25 C.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 7 / 19
Protect the seal from direct exposure to heat (sun, heating) ultraviolet light (halogen or fluorescent lamps, sunlight, arc welding) presence or development of ozone (arc welding, mercury vapour lamps, highvoltage devices, electric motors) risk of embrittlement of elastomeric materials It has to be differentiated between: M.S. stored in the stock room M.S. installed in the machine, but not yet in operation. M.S. in the stock IMPORTANT! Store the seal in the original packing lying on a flat surface. Check the packaging periodically for damages. Plastic sheet packagings with humidity indicators have to be checked every 8 weeks. The check has to be recorded. Packings exceeding 50 % rel. humidity values have to be sent to the manufacturer or the nearest BURGMANN service centre for inspection and new packaging. Duly stored mechanical seal: Latest 3 years after delivery of the mechanical seal For reasons of safety shipment of the M.S. to BURGMANN resp. nearest BURGMANN service centre for Exchange of all secondary seals and springs Verification of the flatness of the faces Perhaps static pressure test. M.S. installed into the machine: ATTENTION! A preservation of the BURGMANN mechanical seals is not allowed. Check in case of a preservation of complete machines with mechanical seals installed BURGMANN has to be contacted. Do not use corrosion protection agents. Risk of deposition and possibly chemical attack of the secondary seals. Due to longer erecting times of new designed plants the period between delivery of the mechanical seal and on the other hand its installation and start up may exceed the period of 2-3 years. Latest after 3 years and in time before the planned start-up of the plant the seal has to be dismantled and to be sent to the manufacturer or the nearest BURGMANN service centre where it can be checked and reconditioned, if necessary. Damages caused by improper storage may not be claimed with reference to the warranty on the BURGMANN company.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 8 / 19
INFORMATION ABOUT THE PRODUCT

All technical information given is based on the results of extensive testing and on BURGMANN's long term practical experience. However, in view of the great diversity of possible applications the technical data can only be taken as being of approximate nature. We can only guarantee the safe and efficient functioning in individual cases if we have been comprehensively informed of the operating conditions to which they will be subject, and if this has been confirmed in a separate agreement.
Manufacturer and country of origin

Burgmann Industries GmbH & Co. KG uere Sauerlacher Str. 6-10 D - 82515 Wolfratshausen Germany
Declaration by the manufacturer

within the meaning of the EC-directive "MACHINERY" 98/37/EG A mechanical seal does not function independently. It is intended to be incorporated into or assembled with machinery.
Type designation
BURGMANN Mechanical Seal SHV8/165-E1
Designated use
This mechanical seal is exclusively designed for the use in the specified application. A different utilisation or a utilisation going beyond the specification is considered contrary to its designated use and excludes a liability by the manufacturer. Operation under conditions lying outside those limits stated in the drawing SHV8/165-E1 is considered contrary to its designated use. Should the seal be operated under different conditions or at a different application BURGMANN has to be asked for recognition as safe in advance. Changes to operating conditions have to be documented.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 9 / 19
Operating conditions
Information about the operating conditions can be found in the BURGMANN assembly drawing SHV8/165-E1 or in the specification sheets of the machine manufacturer. The selection of the mechanical seal (type, suitability, materials) should be done by BURGMANN staff or other authorised persons. A wrong selection by unauthorised persons is not covered by BURGMANN's warranty.
Materials
The materials of the mechanical seal depend on the application and are fixed in the order.
Drawings, diagrams
Assembly drawing SHV8/165-E1
The original assembly drawing in its latest edition (latest revision) only is decisive for both the design of M.S. as well as the utilisation of this manual. In the following description all figures in parentheses, e.g. (2) define the respective part item no. in the assembly drawing.
Description
cartridge design with shaft sleeve (11), cover (13), washer (17), assembly fixtures (19) installation horizontal single seal balanced bi-directional stationary seal face (1) rotating seat (5) multiple springs (3) floating throttle ring (15) at outboard axial movability 3 mm torque transmission from the M.S. to the shaft by means of a shrink disk (part of customer) operation with circulation (API, plan 31)
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 10 / 19
Required space, connecting dimensions

The available mounting space was decisive for the design of the housing parts. All connecting dimensions have to be checked with regard to the BURGMANN drawing before mounting the mechanical seal. The connecting dimensions of the mechanical seal were checked and approved by the customer on the main drawing.
Supply of M.S.
For a safe operation of the M.S. a circulation of the medium to be sealed is required, from the pump housing via a cyclone separator to the seal, in accordance with API, plan 31. At outboard threaded connections are provided according to API, plan 61, for purpose at user's option (e.g. for quench, leakage, venting etc.).
Emissions
A mechanical seal is a dynamic seal that cannot be free of leakage due to physical and technical reasons. Seal design, manufacture tolerances, operating conditions, running quality of the machine, etc. mainly define the leakage value. In fact, compared to other sealing systems there is few leakage. A possibly increased leakage during start-up will decrease to a normal quantity after the running-in period of the sliding faces. If this is not the case or if there are other malfunctions the mechanical seal has to be shut down, removed and checked for reasons of safety. A throttle ring at outboard provides for a quench and prevents gushes of leakage. The leakage can be liquid or gaseous. Its aggressiveness corresponds to that of the medium to be sealed. Leakage of mechanical seal at outboard side has to be drained and disposed properly. IMPORTANT! Components which may get in contact with the leakage have to be corrosion-resistant or have to be adequately protected. WARNING! If the medium to be sealed and/or the supply liquid is subject to the Hazardous Substances Regulation (GefStoffV), the instructions for handling dangerous substances (safety data sheets to EU Directive 91/155/EEC) and the accident prevention regulations have be observed.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 11 / 19
INSTALLATION
Assembly utilities
ethyl alcohol cellulose-tissue (no rag, no cloth!) suitable lubricants Elastomers made of EP-rubber must never come into contact with lubricants on the base of mineral oil (swelling, decomposition). set of hexagon keys set of open end or ring spanners torque wrench
Preparation for assembly

ATTENTION! The seal should remain packed until the following working steps have been completely terminated. Check the parts of the machine for: chamfered edges (sliding cones i.e. 2 mm / 30 or in accordance with EN 12756) radiused transitions mating fits and o-ring surfaces: fine finished Rz 10 m (= N7 = CLA 63)
Shaft surface in the area of the mechanical seal finished: Ra = 0.8 m (= N6 = CLA 32). Check at the machine: damage of connecting surfaces to the M.S. mating dimensions, rectangularity and concentricity to the shaft axis. Check run-out accuracy of the shaft (acc. to DIN ISO 5199: 100 m). Lubricate the shaft with a suitable grease slightly in the area of the mechanical seal. Elastomers made of EP-rubber must never come into contact with lubricants on the base of mineral oil ( swelling, possibly decomposition).
ATTENTION! Degrease the shaft in the area of the clamping device as well as possible.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 12 / 19
Prepare the place of assembly, take away any not required tool, cuttings, dirty cleaning wool etc. Cover the work bench with a piece of clean, non-fibrous cardboard.
Assembly / installation
The mechanical seal is supplied as a cartridge unit, premounted at works, and does not require any adjustment during installation. This document provides the required information for installation and removal of the cartridge only. For installation the assembly drawing SHV8/165-E1 has to be observed. O-rings in sliding contact with other parts when mounting the mechanical seal may be lubricated very thinly, if not described otherwise. The order of assembly to install the mechanical seal into the machine depends on the design of the machine and has to be determined by the machine manufacturer. During installation of the mechanical seal the machine auxiliaries (holding device for the shaft, etc.) have to be used in accordance with the instructions of the machine manufacturer. The mechanical seal has to be installed under the cleanest conditions and very carefully. Avoid unnecessary rotation of the shaft (damage of the sliding faces is possible). Do never force during installation. Avoid knocking the seal! Damage to mechanical seals has an adverse effect on their safe operation. When fitting the PTFE-sealing elements in no case widen or compress them. Otherwise, their sealing function cannot be ensured. Observe the notes in the current drawing if necessary please contact BURGMANN. Possible installation order: Make sure that all sealing elements are installed which contact the surrounding machine parts. Unpack the seal. Check, if the o-rings (12; 14) are installed. Lubricate the shaft with a suitable grease slightly in the area of the mechanical seal.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 13 / 19
Feed the complete seal cartridge onto the shaft. Feed the shrink disk (part of customer) onto the shaft. ATTENTION! Avoid knocking the seal! Damage to mechanical seals has an adverse effect on their safe operation. Feed the retaining elements (part of customer) onto the shaft. Bolt the machine housing to the bearing housing. Bolt the mechanical seal to the machine housing in the way that the connections for supply and disposal are positioned in accordance with view "X" in the drawing. Degrease the shaft in the area of the clamping device of the shaft sleeve as well as possible to obtain best transmission ratio. Fastening of the shrink disc (part of customer): First tighten some bolts of the shrink disc slightly crosswise until the discs are parallel. Afterwards tighten all bolts in sequence evenly (one after the other) in so many revolutions until all of them have the same torque. Check the tightening torque with a torque wrench. ATTENTION! Observe the maximum tightening torque. Check: at correct bracing the outer ring and inner ring has to be in alignment! The correct bracing condition is thus optically checkable. IMPORTANT! Remove the assembly fixtures (19) and keep them for a later removal of the seal. Further assembly of the machine in accordance with the instructions of the machine manufacturer. Remove the plastic protection caps from the supply and disposal connections after installation of M.S. Close unused supply connections pressure-tight with threaded plugs.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 14 / 19
Supply connections
The supply connections are designed as female threaded NPT connections in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1. The supply connections are marked on the mechanical seal and must not be interchanged during installation. ATTENTION! Sealing agents for threads (PTFE-tape, etc.) endanger the safe function of the seal if they enter the seal chamber. When screwed connections are opened take care by all means that sealing agents cannot enter the mechanical seal. Assignment of the connections: Circulation (plan 31) "IN" at internal connection F Quench (plan 61) "IN" at connection Q (plugged with head screw plug #21) ( NPT) Drainage (plan 61) "OUT" at connection D (plugged with head screw plug #21) ( NPT) Pressure indicator ant connection P (plugged with head screw plug #21) ( NPT) Supply piping: Use pipes of stainless steel with a big cross-section. Install the pipes continuously rising, as short and as convenient as possible for the flow to ensure self-venting. Avoid air inclusions and provide for venting connections, if necessary. Clean the piping thoroughly. Fasten all pipe connections pressure-sealed.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 15 / 19
OPERATION
Safe operation
During every state of operation the mechanical seal has to be constantly wetted by the medium to be sealed in its liquid form, in particular when the machine is started or stopped. The machine design has to be such as to take this necessity into consideration. Damages due to dry-running are excluded from the warranty. If the medium to be sealed builds deposits or tends to solidify during cooling down or standstill of the machine the stuffing box has to be flushed with suitable clean liquid. The flow and the liquid should be determined by the user. If the operation limit values and the instructions given in this manual are followed a trouble-free operation of the mechanical seal can be expected.
Start up
Safety checks before start up Seal assembly fixtures (19) removed Torque transmission (shrink disk #part of customer) between mechanical seal and shaft duly installed Supply connections tightened pressure-sealed Disposal connections installed environmentally safe For a safe operation of the M.S. a circulation of the medium to be sealed is required, from the pump housing via a cyclone separator to the seal, in accordance with API, plan 31. Flood machine and seal cavity (stuffing box) with process fluid. Thoroughly vent seal cavity and circulation system. After a short start up period repeat the venting procedure several times with the machine being at standstill. At outboard threaded connections are provided according to API, plan 61, for purpose at user's option (e.g. for quench, leakage, venting etc.). Now the seal is ready for operation.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 16 / 19
SERVICING
Maintenance
A correctly operated mechanical seal needs low maintenance. Wear parts, however, have to be replaced, if necessary. A duly operation includes a regular check of the following parameters: Temperature Leakage (drainage) rate of the mechanical seal An inspection of the mechanical seal should be carried out during a revision of the complete plant. We recommend to have this inspection be performed by responsible BURGMANN personnel. If the mechanical seal is removed during a revision of the plant the sliding faces should be refinished at the manufacturer and both, elastomeric seal rings and springs should be replaced.
Directives in case of failure

Try to define the kind of failure and record it. In the event of excessive leakage, note changes in the leakage amount and switch the machine off if necessary. If a constant amount is leaking in a steady flow, the mechanical seal is damaged. In the event of a inadmissible temperature rise, the machine has to be stopped for safety reasons. If there is a malfunction which you cannot correct on your own, or if the cause of malfunction is not clearly recognisable please immediately contact the nearest BURGMANN agency, a BURGMANN service centre or the BURGMANN headquarters. During the warranty period the BURGMANN mechanical seal must only be disassembled with approval of the manufacturer or when a representative is present.
After-sales service by BURGMANN

BURGMANN's customer service department offers a comprehensive service package covering consultancy, engineering, standardisation, installation, commissioning as well as damage analysis right through to seminars on sealing technology. Addresses are listed in various BURGMANN brochures as well as under www.burgmann.com.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 17 / 19
Reconditioning (repair)
If reconditioning is necessary, the complete seal should be sent to the manufacturer, as this is the best way to find out which components can be reconditioned or which parts must be replaced in order to ensure an optimum tightness. If, for compelling reasons, a reconditioning has to be carried out on site (e.g. no. spare seal on stock, long transport, problems with customs) the seal may be repaired in a clean room by trained personnel of the user under the direction of BURGMANN mechanics.
Disassembly / removal
Stop the machine as instructed, allow to cool, depressurise and ensure that pressure cannot build up again. Work on the M.S. is only permitted when the machine is at a standstill and depressurised. There must be no product on the M.S. if necessary drain the machine and rinse it out. Isolate the machine to prevent it starting up unexpectedly. Comply with the safety notes (safety data sheets).
IMPORTANT! When removing, please observe by all means: current accident prevention regulations regulations for handling hazardous substances WARNING! Seals that have been used with hazardous substances must be properly cleaned so that there is no possible danger to people or to the environment. IMPORTANT! The packaging used to transport the seal must be identified with the relevant hazard symbol and include the safety data sheet for the product and/or supply medium. If the medium to be sealed builds deposits or tends to solidify during cooling down or standstill of the machine the stuffing box has to be flushed with suitable clean liquid. The flow and the liquid should be determined by the user. The order of disassembly to remove the mechanical seal out of the machine depends on the design of the machine and should be determined by the machine manufacturer. During removal of the mechanical seal the drive auxiliaries (closing device for the shaft exit, holding device for agitator shaft, etc.) have to be used in accordance with the instructions of the drive manufacturer.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 18 / 19
Shut off (or drain) the supply system. Remove the supply piping to the mechanical seal. Collect drained liquid and dispose it properly. Drain the mechanical seal. Collect the drained liquid and dispose it properly. IMPORTANT! Insert the assembly fixtures (19) into the groove in the shaft sleeve (11) and fasten them. Relieve the shrink disk (part of customer) by loosening the screws in sequence. Loosen all screw connections between seal cartridge and the respective machine parts. Remove the seal in the reverse sequence as described for assembly (set up). For an easier removal of the seal cartridge it is equipped with forcing threads.
Spare parts
Only BURGMANN original spare parts must be used. Otherwise Risks of a seal failure, endangering persons and environment. The BURGMANN guarantee for the mechanical seal lapses. For a quick exchange a complete spare seal should be on stock.
Required details for enquiries and orders

For enquiries and orders the following details are required: BURGMANN commission no. Drawing no. of mechanical seal: SHV8/165-E1 Part item no., designation, material, number of pieces acc. to drawing. Address of headquarters: Burgmann Industries GmbH & Co. KG Postfach 1240 D - 82515 Wolfratshausen Germany +49 (0) 81 71-23 0 Fax +49 (0) 81 71-23 12 14 www.burgmann.com
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
page 19 / 19
Disposal of the BURGMANN mechanical seal

Usually, the BURGMANN mechanical seals can be easily disposed after a thorough cleaning. Metal parts (steels, stainless steels, non-ferrous heavy metals) divided into the different groups belong to scrap metal waste. Ceramic materials (synthetic carbons, ceramics, carbides) belong to waste products. They can be separated from their housing materials, as are physiologically recognised as safe. Synthetic materials/plastics (elastomers, PTFE) belong to special waste. CAUTION! Material containing fluorine must not be burnt. IMPORTANT! Some of the synthetic materials, divided into the different groups can be recycled.
Copyright
The Burgmann Industries GmbH & Co. KG (Germany) holds the copyright to this document. Customers and operators of mechanical seals are free to use this document in the preparation of their own documentation. No claims of any type or form can be derived in such instance. We reserve the right to carry out technical modifications of the product, even if they have not yet been considered in this manual.
April 23, 2007 Department Technical Documentation
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007
Rev. 0
EagleBurgmann Industries UK LP
12 Welton Road, Wedgnock Industrial Estate, Warwick CV34 5PZ Fax : 01926 - 417617 Telephone : 01926 - 417621
OPERATING MANUAL
BURGMANN CYCLONE SEPARATOR
06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2
These instructions are intended for the assembly, operating and control personnel and should be kept at hand on site.
PLEASE READ this manual carefully and OBSERVE the information contained as to:
06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2
- Rev. 0 -
Operating Manual 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2 Page 2

Safety Storage Installation

Start up Maintenance

Removal Repair
If there are any unclear points please contact BURGMANN by all means.
MANUFACTURER
EagleBurgamannIndutriesUKLP 12 Welton Road Wedgenock Ind Est Warwick CV34 5PZ United Kingdom
DRAWINGS
Assembly drawing 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2 The assembly drawing in the original scale and in its latest edition (latest revision) only is decisive for the design and the use in connection with this manual. In the following description all figures in parentheses, e.g. (2) define the respective part item no. in the assembly drawing.
DECLARATION
within the meaning of the EC-directive Machinery A cyclone separator does not function independently. It is intended to be assembled with machinery.
DESIGNATION
06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2 Cyclone separator with replaceable insert made of elastomer or ceramic
DESCRIPTION
Cyclone separators of the ZY series are used to clean mainly aqueous liquids containing dirt and solids in suspension (e.g. in circulation systems of sewage sludge, crude, etc.). The best possible filtration efficiency is achieved if the specific weight of the solids is much higher than that of the carrier liquid, and if the differential pressure is as large as possible. The viscosity of the medium is also a factor that needs to be taken into account. Legend 1 = Pin 2 = Housing 3 = insert 4 = Cap Screw 5 = Cover 6 = O-Ring
OPERATING LIMITS
Design pressure (bar) Design temperature C) Differential pressure (bar) Connections (inch) 150/128/116 38/93/149 min. 1.5 flange ANSI B16.5 CL900-RF 30 292 316/316L V10
Weight, approx. (kg) Height (mm)
Materials: housing / cover Materials: O-rings *) with elastomer insert
DESIGNATED USE
Operation under conditions lying outside those limits stated in paragraph operating limits is considered contrary to its designated use. Should the cyclone separator be operated under conditions other than those recommended BURGMANN has to be asked for recognition as safe. - Rev. 0 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2
Operating Manual 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2 Page 3
may not be claimed on the BURGMANN company with reference to their warranty.
HOW TO ORDER
For enquiries and orders the following details are required: BURGMANN commission no. Drawing no. of cyclone separator : 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2 Part item no., designation, material, number of pieces.
INSTALLATION
Installation of the cyclone separator must be in vertical position only. The pressure at outlets C and B must be lower than at inlet A . Cleaned liquid is conveyed to the top ( B ) and the separated dirt to the suction port of the pump. The local regulations as well as the rules for the prevention of accidents have to be observed. For installation the assembly drawing 06-ZY61S5/NW12-A1 has to be on hand The cyclone separator has to be installed very carefully and under the cleanest conditions. Do not force during installation. Installation into the piping of the circulation circuit. The cyclone separator is ready for operation.
Address of headquarters Product field "Supply systems": EagleBurgmannIndustries 12 Welton Road Warwick CV34 5PZ United Kingdom +49-1926 417600 Telefax +49-1926 417617
AFTER-SALES
The range of services offered by BURGMANN not only includes advise during the planning stages but also technical support after commissioning. This is supported by a world-wide comprehensive network of subsidiaries, field engineers and service centres. Addresses are listed in the known BURGMANN Design Manuals as well as in various other BURGMANN brochures.
SAFE OPERATION
If the operation limit values and the instructions given in this manual are observed a trouble-free operation of the cyclone separator can be expected.
TROUBLES
Try to define the kind of failure and record it. If there is a malfunction which you cannot correct on your own, or if the cause of malfunction is not clearly recognizable please immediately contact the nearest BURGMANN agency, a BURGMANN service centre or the BURGMANN headquarters.
REPAIR
Repair of the cyclone separator is only possible by trained user personnel replacing a damaged insert (3). Replacing must only be carried ouit when the circulation circuit is pressureless !
SPARE PARTS
Only BURGMANN original parts must be used. Not observing this damages - Rev. 0 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2

Document No: DriveCplg 01 0 26 Apr 2002
Section 5
Drive Coupling
Drive Coupling
The drive coupling equipment manufacturers information is included next as an insert to the manual.
K:\Module Update\S5 DriveCplg 01-0.doc
Cannon Way, Mill Street West, Dewsbury, West Yorkshire England, WF13 1EH. Tel: +44 (0) 1924 460 801 Fax: +44 (0) 1924 457 668
INSTALLATION, OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR BIBBY TURBOFLEX COUPLINGS HAVING BOLTED ADAPTORS AND HUBS.
C. N. McConnell (chapters 4 5 & 6 added) C. N. McConnell C. N. McConnell AUTHOR
20/02/07 18/01/07 12/01/06 DATE
C B A ISSUE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
MANUAL 2LAH STD
Contents
Contents ...................................................................................................................................................... 2 Preface......................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 General Notes ...................................................................................................................................... 4 1.1 Dos .............................................................................................................................................. 4 1.2 Donts ........................................................................................................................................... 4 Description of Coupling.......................................................................................................................5 Operating Conditions .......................................................................................................................... 5 Product indentification/marking for non-electrical equipment.......................................................... 6 Limitations of product use .................................................................................................................. 7 Product servicing................................................................................................................................. 7 Maintenance Instructions.................................................................................................................... 8 Alignment Instructions........................................................................................................................ 9 8.1 Alignment Method:........................................................................................................................ 9 8.2 Axial: ............................................................................................................................................ 9 8.3 Parallel / Radial / Angular:............................................................................................................. 9 Installation Instructions .................................................................................................................... 10 9.1 Maximum Element Compression. ................................................................................................ 12 Removal Instructions..................................................................................................................... 12
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10
Page 2 of 12
Preface
This manual covers the general installation, maintenance and operating requirements of Bibby Turboflex disc couplings having the following configuration. 2LAH, Couplings having hubs supplied for both ends
LAH/LA, Couplings having a hub for one end and an adaptor at the other end to interface with the customers flange.
2LA, Coupling having adaptors at both ends to interface with the customers flanges.
All configurations are generically a 2LA design, however hubs may be supplied to give the LAH/LA or 2LAH configurations.
Page 3 of 12
General Notes
It is essential that a competent person carry out all the instructions contained in the following documents. Should any problems be anticipated or encountered then Bibby Turboflex personnel are available for site visits or, alternatively, repairs and overhauls can be undertaken in our works. Prior to performing any maintenance works (including inspections) it is essential that the power supply is isolated and that no accidental movement of rotating machinery is possible. This product is designed for a specific purpose. It is vital that it is not used for any purpose other than that for which it is designed and supplied, and that the limits of its capacities, as detailed here or in any other document, are not exceeded. No liability will be accepted and any warranty, either expressed or implied, will be null and void should any component of whatever kind, including nuts, bolts and washers, be used in the assembly, or modifications be made to all or part of the product which are not supplied, specified or agreed by Bibby Turboflex.
1.1
Dos
The following instructions should be read and understood prior to starting any assembly or maintenance work on the disc coupling. Prior to fitting any component, care should be taken to ensure that it is clean and free from any dirt. When tightening any bolts or screws, this should be done evenly, cylinder head fashion, to 50% torque then to 100% torque in the same sequence. Where specified it is essential that torque-tightening figures are not exceeded nor should it be allowed for them to be below specification. Whilst installing and removing the transmission unit, the unit should be supported to ensure that the weight is not imposed on one side only. Where hub/shaft connections require a standard interference fit the hubs may be heated in oil at 200-250 Celsius and rapidly positioned on the shaft. It is essential that this heat is evenly applied over the whole hub and that spot heating is avoided. Record the Bibby Turboflex order number, coupling type and size and any relevant information for future use. Contact Bibby Turboflex for refurbishment works and spare components.
1.2
Donts
Do not use any component that is not supplied or approved by Bibby Turboflex in the assembly of this product. Do not attempt, where the weight of the unit is excessive, to lift the coupling without the use of lifting equipment. The inherent balance of these couplings could be disturbed if they are allowed to be knocked either by striking or rolling. Care should be taken when transporting and fitting to avoid such knocks. This is particularly when a coupling is specifically balanced.
Page 4 of 12
Description of Coupling
The coupling is of the dry laminated diaphragm or disc type. Flexibility is obtained by the deformation of the disc packs, within defined limits, which are separated by a tubular spacer. Individual laminations are of regular polygonal profiles, which are assembled into a stack of previously designated thickness and secured by bushing. Flexibility is accomplished by connecting through the bushed holes, on a common pitch circle diameter, by means of bolts, alternately, to driving and driven components. The bolts, bushes and associated holes are machined to close limits associated with fitted bolts. Due to the need for reasonable ease of assembly, interference fits are undesirable and, consequently, tolerances are such as to allow for a close slide or slight transition fit. To compensate for these clearances and to ensure the best possible concentricity between components, the pitch circle diameter of the bolt holes in the flexible element is made smaller than that of the mating holes in the adjacent components. On assembly, all inherent clearances are, therefore, eliminated. Coupling bolts are sized such that they are capable of inducing a load equivalent to 4 times the tensile load in the flexible element laminations, between driving and driven bolt, when transmitting the full rated continuous torque of the coupling. This assumes a coefficient of friction between the various components of 0.25 but experience has shown that, due to the high loads induced, minute compressive deformation is sufficient to raise this to about 0.3. The reason for adopting this principle of using large, highly loaded, bolts is two-fold a) to prevent interface slip, as already mentioned, and b) to eliminate any chance of bolt bending due to the overhung radial loading imposed by the flexible element. Avoiding either slip or bending helps to avoid fretting which occurs when bolts are designed only to drive in shear. In general, the design is identical to a large number of units already in operation.
Operating Conditions
In operation the flexible elements are subjected to both tensile and bending stresses, each having an influence on the allowable magnitude of the other. It is important, therefore, that the operating limits of the various deflections for which the coupling is designed to accommodate, are kept, as far as practicable, within those indicated on the Allowable Misalignment Curve which was individually supplied with the final engineering data. In practice, the initial alignment of the coupling should be as close as possible and within the alignment limits given in the Installation Instructions. This will allow for changes during operation to remain within allowable limits. As the Bibby Turboflex units are designed to transmit the torque in friction between the driving and driven bolts and the flexible elements, it is essential that, should the need arise, these bolts should be correctly tightened to the torque indicated on the assembly drawing or in the Installation and Maintenance Instructions. Torque and speed should remain within the originally specified conditions.
Page 5 of 12
Product indentification/marking for non-electrical equipment.

Scope: Disc Coupling Assemblies, excluding component spares.
Equipment manufactured or supplied by Bibby Transmissions is marked legibly and indelibly, in a variety of ways, with the following (subject to contractual obligations permitting): Name and telephone number of manufacturer Designation of the series or type and size (Part Number) Contract/Order Number and if applicable the unique serial number If applicable, for equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres, the following will be marked on the equipment in accordance with the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC and EN 13463-1 Name and address of manufacturer Designation of the series or type and size (Part Number) Contract/Order Number and if applicable the unique serial number CE Mark. Year of construction Document of Conformity identification to ATEX Directive The specific marking of explosion protection and category. followed by the symbol of the equipment group
The letter G (concerning explosive atmospheres caused by gases, vapours or mists); and/or the letter D (concerning explosive atmospheres caused by dust) The letter c for constructional safety The ambient temperature range when different to 200 C to 400 C
Page 6 of 12
Limitations of product use
Unless otherwise agreed with Bibby Transmissions, these products must selected in accordance with the recommended selection procedure and must only be used within the performance criteria set out below: The rated torque capacities, which are stated in the product catalogue and/or product arrangement drawing. A continuous temperature range of:General Purpose Disc Couplings Series Designation D and DJ Series Designation DJCFT High Performance Disc Couplings Alloy Steel Couplings Alloy Steel/Composite Spacer Shafts -40 C to 280 C -20 C to 80 C -20 C to 280 C -20 C to 80 C
Within the permissible operating limits for angular, radial and axial misalignment.
Product servicing
Although with proper selection and careful installation a long working life and very high degree of operational safety can be expected we would recommend that for ATEX certified couplings the element assembly, coupling bolts and attachment screws are replaced at 50000 operational hour intervals. The operation of a damaged coupling in a hazardous area is contrary to ATEX and in doing so becomes an explosive hazard and is wholly the end users responsibility.
Page 7 of 12
Maintenance Instructions
General maintenance of the coupling consists of a check of the following during normal machinery maintenance schedules. API617 references this time period as 3 years for compressor applications. Axial, Angular & Parallel misalignment to ensure that these are still within the acceptable limits and that no major movements have occurred. All bolts to ensure that they are correctly tightened. The flexible elements, by visual inspection, for signs of fatigue cracking local to the washer anchoring points or general signs of fretting corrosion. Slight bowing or S like distortion is not detrimental to the operation of the unit. Note that any cracking will begin at the outermost edge of the outside blade. This means that this inspection is still possible without disturbing the element bolting. The element packs should be replaced at the earliest opportunity should cracking / damage be detected. Bibby Turboflex use self locking nuts containing a stainless steel spring insert. This gives a high level of performance over many reinstallations. It is recommended by Bibby Turboflex that these be replaced after being re-torqued 10-12 times. Note: Any requirement for spare parts should be made quoting the original purchasers original purchase order number and the coupling serial number. (This will be etched on the major coupling flanges) and will appear on all documentation.
Page 8 of 12
Alignment Instructions
Bibby Turboflex Ltd. couplings will accept substantial amounts of misalignment, the configuration of each individual unit defining the actual acceptable level. The allowable misalignment is shown graphically on a curve produced uniquely for any unit. This curve shows the maximum permitted level of misalignment for operation and is NOT intended to define set up limits.
8.1
Alignment Method:
Each company has its own method for aligning machinery all of which are well documented in both internal and freely available documents and books. Hence it is not our intention to describe methods for setting machines. Instead, the following gives guidelines for quick checks for alignment suitable after initial installation and for general maintenance checks.
8.2
Axial:
The suggested limits for axial set up distance between the machinery shafts will generally be specified in the installation instructions unique for the coupling. However, as a general rule, the following may be used: 4-bolt couplings:- +/- 0.4mm 6-bolt couplings:- +/- 0.3mm 8-bolt couplings:- +/- 0.2mm 10-bolt couplings:- +/- 0.2mm These values may be exceeded in certain cases and, if no reference is made in the unique installation instructions, reference should be made to Bibby Turboflex Ltd.
8.3
Parallel / Radial / Angular:
Having basically aligned the machinery shafts using one of the established techniques, the coupling may be installed as per the instructions. It is then worth performing a check to establish that the overall alignment is correct for the particular coupling. This may be simply performed by one of the following two methods: Attach a dial indicator securely to the back of one of the coupling flanges, with the needle in contact with the flange face the other side of the flexible element as near the outside periphery as possible. Rotate the machinery & coupling and locate the minimum reading position. At this position, set the dial reading to zero. Rotate the machinery again and record the maximum reading over 360 degrees. Divide this maximum value by the coupling flange diameter to gain a value in mm/mm, which should be no greater than that shown in the following list. (This should be repeated at both flexible elements in a spacer coupling). An alternative method is, where possible, to accurately measure the distance across the flanges that sandwich the flexible element to obtain a maximum and minimum value. The difference between these two values should be divided by the flange outside diameter to obtain a value in mm/mm, which should be no greater than that shown in the following list. (This should be repeated at both flexible elements in a spacer coupling). 4-bolt couplings - 0.004 mm/mm 6-bolt couplings - 0.003 mm/mm 8-bolt couplings - 0.002 mm/mm 10-bolt couplings - 0.0015 mm/mm NOTE: These values are intended as guides only and, in certain cases, may be exceeded. IF IN DOUBT, CONTACT BIBBY TURBOFLEX LTD.
Page 9 of 12
Installation Instructions
No liability will be accepted, and any warranty, either expressed or implied, will be null and void should any components of whatsoever kind, including nuts, bolts and washers, be used in the assembly or any modifications be made to all or part of the unit which are not supplied, specified or agreed by Bibby Turboflex. For general Safety, Alignment and Maintenance Instructions see other sections of this manual. IMPORTANT: The main Coupling Bolts/Nuts at both ends are tightened by Bibby Turboflex, and should, under normal circumstances, NOT BE TOUCHED unless specified in the installation instructions. When tightening any other bolt or screw, this should be done evenly, i.e. cylinder head fashion, to 50% torque then to 100% torque in the same sequence. Threads should be lubricated with Molybdenum Disulphide grease or equivalent. Check that the parallel & and axial misalignments of the shafts are within the limits defined on the separate alignment sheet or curves. Bibby Turboflex do not recommend any specific alignment method as this varies due to personnel preference, however the alignment should be within the operational envelope shown on the misalignment curve. (Section 5 and separate operating curves) 1. 2. Reference any applicable drawings for sizes and dimensions. Ensure that all required tools and equipment are available. The coupling is supplied in an assembled state with its misalignment capabilities locked by gagging blocks and installation screws near the element packs. The coupling is packed appropriately for transportation and storage. Inspect the coupling for: Indication of deviation from specification to ensure that it conforms to requirements. Potential damage due to transportation. For balanced couplings, note any match markings, which must be aligned when the coupling is installed.
3.
For 2LA configuration, go to step 6 4. For 2LAH and LAH/LA, the coupling must be split at the hub and adaptor joints to allow installation. Remove the connecting nuts and bolts from the hub/adaptor flanges and using jacking screws force the flanges apart. Store the nuts and bolts along with the packing ring and shims (if supplied) for future stages of installation.
Figure 1: Typical coupling construction.
Page 10 of 12
5.
The hubs may now be fitted to the driver and driven shafts. Where hub/shaft connections require a standard interference fit the hubs may be heated in an oil bath or oven at 200-250 Celsius and rapidly positioned on the shaft. It is essential that this heat is evenly applied over the whole hub and that spot heating is avoided. Ensure that one shaft rotates so that the coupling match marks can be aligned. Check the shafts (or flange face) misalignments and DBSE (distance between shaft ends) are within allowable limits. (Reference Section 5 and also operating curves). The main bolts in the transmission unit are factory assembled and must not be disturbed. Undo the installation screws and remove the packing blocks if present. The coupling should now be in a relaxed state. Compression screws are generally cap-head found mid way between main coupling bolts.
6. 7.
If no packing ring or shims are supplied, go to step 12. 8. 9. Measure the free length of the transmission unit. Add to this the thickness of the packing plate Record this value as X. Now measure the distance between the flange faces (DBFF) of the machinery. Adjust this length by either subtracting pre-stretch or adding pre-compression. Record this value as Y.
10. Calculated the required number of shims from the following equation Number of shims = (Y-X) shim thickness Round this value to a whole number of shims. Shim thickness is approximately 0.381mm 11. Fit shims between packing ring and the transmission unit. Ensure match marks are aligned. 12. Install the installation screws and tighten in cylinder head fashion, maintaining parallelism between the flange faces of the adaptor and spacer, until both elements packs are compressed by a minimum required amount to allow the transmission unit to be put into position. Do not compress the elements beyond the value stated in "Maximum Element Compression" Values. 13. Position the transmission unit between the hub (machinery) flanges, ensuring match marks are aligned. 14. Fit and tighten in cylinder head fashion the connecting bolts that pass through the packing ring and shims. 15. Release and remove the compression screws. 16. Fit and tighten in cylinder head fashion the connecting bolts that pass through the remaining flange. If a pre-stretch is present, it may be necessary to pull the flanges together using the connecting bolts. 17. Ensure all match marks are aligned, all tooling is removed and inspect the coupling before operation.
Page 11 of 12
9.1
Maximum Element Compression.
It may be necessary to compress the element packs in order to fit the coupling. These values express the maximum amount of compression allowed per element pack. However, it is recommended to use the minimum amount of compression required when installing couplings. Coupling bolt size M6 M8 M10 M12 M14 M16 M18 M20 M22 M24 M27 M30 M33 M36 M39 M42 Maximum Compression (mm) per element pack 1.75 1.75 2.0 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 4.0 4.0
Contact Bibby Transmission for sizes not stated here.
10 Removal Instructions.
Coupling removal is a reverse of the above installation process ensuring that, upon re-installation, the above process is again followed in careful sequence.
Page 12 of 12

Document No: DriveMotor 01
Section 6
Drive Motor
0 26 Apr 2002
Drive Motor
The drive motor manufacturers information, and the associated equipment manufacturers information, is included next as an insert to the manual.
K:\Module Update\S6 DriveMotor 01-0.doc
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. ABB
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SQUIRREL-CAGE INDUCTION MOTOR CLIENT PROJECT TYPE OUR REFERENCE DRIVING DATE : : : : : : ABB UK Aramco Sulzer Khurais AMC 900M4A BSNV 8000555/200 Pump 2006-08-31
____________________________________________________
SECTION A. RATED DATA B. STANDARDS C. OTHER PERFORMANCE DATA D. SITE CONDITIONS E. STARTING CHARACTERISTICS F. INSTALLATION DATA G. INCLUDED ACCESSORIES H. WORKSHOP TESTS K. REMARKS J. Equivalent Circuit Diagram PAGE 2 2 2 2 3 4 5 7 7 8
MOTOR CURVES : - CURRENT & POWERFACTOR - SPEED CURVES, DOL - TORQUE & SPEED CURVES, DOL - TIME & TERMINAL VOLTAGE SPEED CURVES, DOL - CURRENT & POWERFACTOR - SPEED CURVES, 80 % VOLTAGE - TORQUE & SPEED CURVES, 80 % VOLTAGE - TIME & TERMINAL VOLTAGE SPEED CURVES, 80 % VOLTAGE SHORT CIRCUIT EQUATIONS MAGNETIC FORCE AS A FUNCTION OF AXIAL DISPLACEMENT
3BSY 200026-ETX PAGE 1 2 3 4 5 6 3BSY 200011-ETX 8000555D0009 A
AL009337
Prep. Appr. Resp. dept.
ATAP/MME Savinovic Johansson Magnus J ATAP/MK
2006-09-14 Technical Specification 2007-10-15 SULZER Khurais
No. of sh.
9
Lang. Rev. ind. Sheet
8000555/200
Document number
ABB Automation Technologies
3BSY200001-ETX
en
TEMPLATE: NORMAL.DOT; PRINTDATE: 2007-10-15 1:10:00 PM; SAVEDATE: 2007-10-15 13:10; OSKAR VERSION: 3.35 (2006-06-29)
A. RATED DATA Output (continuous duty) Torque Power factor Voltage Frequency Speed Current B. STANDARDS Applicable standards Insulation class Temperature rise within class Increased safety, Standards/Form C. OTHER PERFORMANCE DATA Efficiency at 100 / 75 / 50 / 25 % load* Efficiency at 100 / 75 / 50 / 25 % load (guaranteed)* Power factor at 100 / 75 / 50 / 25 % load* *(Sinusoidal feeding) No-load current Max. compensation Break down torque Max. continuous negative sequence current D. SITE CONDITIONS Ambient temperature range Altitude Location Hazardous area classification C : 0 - 50 F : 32 - 122 m : < 1000 ft : < 3280 : Outdoors : Class 1, Zone2, Group IIA, T2 % : 96.0 % : 95.1 95.8 95.0 91.6 94.9 93.4 88.9 : : : : NEMA, 17-SAMSS-502 F B NEC article 505 kW : 9694 HP : 13000 kNm : 51.8 lbf ft : 38215 : 0.92 V (10%) : 13200 Y-Connection Hz (5%) : 60 r/min : 1787 A : 477
: 0.92 0.93 0.92 0.84 A : 66.6 kVAR : 1359 % : 227 % : 19
Document number
Lang.
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3BSY200001-ETX
en
E. STARTING CHARACTERISTICS Load break away torque Load torque at full speed Load inertia J (at motor speed) Short circuit capacity at motor bus Starting method Terminal voltage at start % Current at start % Current at start, guaranteed. No positive tolerance % Mean torque at break away % Mean torque at 50 % speed % Mean torque at 80 % speed % Mean torque at 90 % speed % Mean torque at 95 % speed % Starting time (+20%) s Locked rotor time, cold s Locked rotor time, warm s Stall time, cold s Stall time, warm s Number of successive starts from cold Number of successive starts from warm % % kgm2 MVA : : : : 6 64 227 lb-ft2 : 5387 0 (used in start calculations) A
: DOL : 100 80 : 481 379 : 580 450 : 46 29 : 62 39 : 92 58 : 143 89 : 224 141 : 12.2 26.7 : 9.5 21.5 : 7.5 20.5 : 9.5 21.5 : 7.5 20.5 : : 3 2
A B B B B
Document number
Lang.
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3BSY200001-ETX
en
F. INSTALLATION DATA Protection form and cooling form Heat losses (sinusoidal feeding): - Cooling air Arrangement form Sleeve bearings: - Max. axial play towards D-end - Max. axial play towards N-end - Max. permissible axial thrust - Oil temperature range to bearings - Type of oil - Degree of purity for oil Weights: - Total (complete machine, excluding terminal box) - Stator - Rotor Rotor inertia Direction of rotation (at drive end, facing shaft end) mm mm kN C : TEAAC kW : 447 ( at 9694 kW ) : IM 1001 : : : : : : 6.5 in : 0.256 6.5 in : 0.256 0 lbf : 0 40 - 65 F : 104 - 149 ISO VG 46 17/15/12 acc. to ISO 4406:1999 lb : 92610 lb : 24540 lb : 22928 lb-ft2 : 34302 A A A
kg : 42000 kg : 11150 kg : 10400 kgm2 : 1446
: COUNTER CLOCKWISE
First lateral critical speed (based on stiff foundation) rpm : 2250 Noise level (at 1m acc.to ISO 3744) Static force on each machine foot Dynamic force on each machine foot dB(A) : 86 , Tol. +0 dB(A) kN : 103 kN : 195 lbf :23036 lbf : 43890 A A
Document number
Lang.
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3BSY200001-ETX
en
G. INCLUDED ACCESSORIES Cooling arrangement TEAAC Self circulated inner air circuit cooled by built-on air-air heat exchanger.
Mounting arrangement IM 1001 Horizontal machine with two bearings, one shaft extension. DE shaft end cylindrical with key. Coupling half and shaft end details Coupling half to be supplied by others. Finish boring of coupling by customer. Mounting by ABB. Rotor balanced with half key. Foundation details Machine provided with 4 feet. Holding down bolts, mounting shims, dowel pins and horizontal machine jacking bolts. No alignment or grouting included in ABB scope of supply. Jacking bolts vertical adjustment. Bearings Sleeve bearings suitable for flood oil lubrication provided by others. Connection at each bearing The lube oil drain pressure must be less than or equal to the machine ambient pressure. An oil drain pressure of 200-1000 Pa lower than the bearing ambient is recommended.
Customer connection flange acc. to ANSI B16.5 Cl.150. Inlet pipe in stainless steel. Outlet pipe in stainless steel. Orifice valve for pressure reduction. Bearings not provided with emergency oil ring. Machines with 4-lobe bearings have an emergency running time of 3 seconds. Make sure that in case of failure of the oil supply system a backup system will start within 3 seconds.
Document number Lang. Rev. ind. Sheet
3BSY200001-ETX
en
Main terminal Standard stator terminal box, left side. Complies with IEEE/ANSI. Stator terminal box protection IP55 with all 6 ends brought out and neutral point terminated inside the box. Connection from underneath. Grounding clamps inside and outside. The main terminal box is delivered as a loose item, assembly on site is not included in ABB's scope of supply. 3 - Current transformers in neutral and line, self balancing connection Line side 3 - Surge capacitor 3 - Lightning arrestors 3 IRIS buscouplers Anticondensation heaters "Black heat" anti condensation heaters. In main both machine and MTB Termination in separate boxes (normally opposite main supply side). The anticondensation heaters should always be connected during stand still. Measurement and control Resistance temperature detectors All PT100 double elements (excl. stator) ANSI. 9 in the stator winding 2 in each bearing Oil sight glass on sleeve bearing housing, 1 per bearing. 1 Key phasor and 1 proximitor Vibration control proximity type in two radial planes, 90 apart 2 probes per bearing mounted outboard the bearing centerline 2 proximitors per bearing including mounting and intercables. Acceptance test for shaft run-out measurement is made in V-blocks. Burnishing surface for proximity type of vibration probes, maximum combined electrical and mechanical run out 13 m (0.51 mils) peak-to-peak. Bonding. A
Document number
Lang.
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3BSY200001-ETX
en
Surface treatment Epoxy-Offshore coating acc. to ISO 12944 C5M. Primer coating - two component zinc rich epoxy primer Intermediate coating - two component epoxy Finish coating - acrylic two component isocyanate free topcoat Colour Tools for rotor removal Rotor extension tool design with 2 m non split tube. H. WORKSHOP TESTS ABB Automation Technologies standard procedure is to perform a type test for a single machine order. If two or more identical machines are ordered, then a type test is performed on the first machine and routine tests on the remaining machines. Proposed workshop tests according to enclosed INSPECTION PLAN are part of our manufacturing program and are part of the quoted price of the machine. Witnessing of testing Participation in a test specially arranged, time to be agreed between ABB Automation Technologies and customer, 2 weeks advance notice, date will be confirmed 1 week prior to scheduled test date. The performance calculations are carried out and presented to customer during his visit. : 75 m : 200 m : 60 m : Green 3.0 mils 7.9 mils 2.4 mils RAL 6021
K. REMARKS Catalog no. 5000353
Document number
Lang.
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3BSY200001-ETX
en
J.
E Q U I V A L E N T
C I R C U I T
D I A G R A M
_______ _______ I1 | | ********* UE ********* | | I2' *--->--| R1 |-----*X1 SIG *------*------*X2 SIG'*-----| R2'/S |--<--|_______| ********* | ********* |_______| | | ----*---| | | | | | Z EIN ***** ----| | U1 =====> * * | | | | COS PHI *X H* |RFE| | | * * | | | | ***** ----| | | | | V ----*---| | | *-----------------------------------*----------------------------------U1, I1, Z ein : phase values X1 sig, X2 sig' : saturated values ue : ratio ue2 : ratio squared X2 sig' = ue2 * (Q2/3) * X2 sig I2' = I2 / ue R2' = ue2 * (Q2/3) * R2 -------------------0 Data for rated operation (with iron, friction, ventilation, and addit. losses) ---------------------------U1 = 7621. V R1 = 0.05411 OHM X H = 113.243 OHM I1 = 476.5 A R2' = 0.11134 OHM R FE = 5505.8 OHM I2 = 2134.3 A X1 SIG = 2.159 OHM N NENN = 1787.3 1/MIN Z EIN = 16.157 OHM X2 SIG' = 1.795 OHM M NENN = 51801. NM COS PHI = 0.9307 UE = 4.639 F NENN = 60.0 HZ ETA = 0.9569 S KIPP = 0.0310 PU M KIPP = 118354. NM ---------------------------0 Data for short circuit (s = 1, with 100 % voltage) ---------------------------U1 = 7621. V R1 = 0.05411 OHM X H = 113.243 OHM I1 = 2292.2 A R2' = 0.01805 OHM R FE = 5505.8 OHM I2 = 10509.8 A X1 SIG = 1.982 OHM ALFA1 SA = 0.9181 Z EIN = 3.325 OHM X2 SIG' = 1.340 OHM ALFA2 SA = 0.9181 COS PHI = 0.1011 UE = 4.639 M A = 23575. NM
Document number
Lang.
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3BSY200001-ETX
en
REVISION Rev. Page (P) Description Date ind. Chapt.(C) Dept./Init. A P3 New pump load curve. Curve no. 4-104.451.432. Load torque at 2006-11-30 full speed was 60%. Starting time was 11.7 and 24.4 seconds. MME/DS Current was 475 A. A A B B C P4 P6 P3 P8 P7 Weights and foundation dimensions revised. Key phasor added No positive tolerance added Locked rotor time and stall time added Equivalent Circuit Diagram added Colour changed to RAL 6021 from ABB standard blue 2007-05-23 MME/DS 2007-10-15 /MMO/MJ
Document number
Lang.
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3BSY200001-ETX
en
Formulas for torsional analysis calculations
Airgap torque equation - 3-phase short circuit Torque(t) = - 5.40 * e(-t/0.041) * sin(wt) p.u. Max. torque = -4.89 p.u. after 4.00 ms
Airgap torque equation - 2-phase short circuit Torque(t) = 1.35 * (1 + e(-t/0.041)) * sin(2wt) - 2.70 * (e(-t/0.083) + e(-t/0.041)) * sin(wt) p.u. Max. torque = -6.41 p.u. after 5.66 ms
Airgap torque equation - start from standstill Torque(t)= 0.46 * (1 + e(-t/ 5.74) e(-t/0.042)) - 4.51 * (cos(wt-1.47) e(-t/ 5.74) + cos(wt+1.47) e(-t/0.042)) p.u. Max. torque = 4.78 p.u. after 212.3 ms
Airgap torque equation - automatic reclosing at high speed Torque(t) = e(-t/0.057) (-3.65 + -6.50 * cos(wt-2.166)) Max. torque = -9.19 p.u. after 5.5 ms
Rated torque: 1.0 p.u. = 51.81 kNm t = time in seconds w = 2 * pi * 60.0 at 60.0 Hz line frequency
AL009337
ATAP/MME Savinovic Savinovic Djordje ATAP/MK
2006-08-31 Short circuit equations 2006-09-13 SULZER Khurais
No. of sh.
2
8000555/200
Document number
3BSY200011-ETX
en
TEMPLATE: NORMAL.DOT; PRINTDATE: 2006-09-13 09:59; SAVEDATE: 2006-09-13 09:39; OSKAR VERSION: 3.35 (2006-06-29)
REVISION Rev. Page (P) ind. Chapt.(C)
Description
Date Dept./Init.
Document number
3BSY200011-ETX
Lang.
Rev. ind.
Sheet
en
TEMPLATE: NORMAL.DOT; PRINTDATE: 2006-09-13 09:59; SAVEDATE: 2006-09-13 09:39; OSKAR VERSION: 3.35 (2006-06-29)
CURRENT & POWERFACTOR - SPEED CURVES, DOL

AMC 900M4A BSNV
6.0
9694 kW
60 Hz
0.92 PF
13200 V
477 A
1787 rpm
1.00
5.4
0.90
4.8
1.
0.80
4.2
0.70
3.0
0.50
2.4
0.40
1.8
0.30
1.2
0.20
0.6
2.
0.10
0.0 0.0
0.00 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
SPEED [p.u.]
1. Current at 100 % voltage 2. Power factor at 100 % voltage CURRENT SPEED
1 p.u. = 477.0 A 1 p.u. = 1800.0 rpm AL009337

No. of sh.
ATAP/MME Savinovic Bergman Leif I ATAP/MK
2006-11-30 Motor Curves 2007-10-12 SULZER Khurais
8
8000555/200
Document number
3BSY200026-ETX
en
POWER FACTOR
CURRENT [p.u.]
3.6
0.60
TORQUE - SPEED CURVES, DOL

AMC 900M4A BSNV
2.50
9694 kW
60 Hz
0.92 PF
13200 V
477 A
1787 rpm
2.25
2.00
1.75
1.50
TORQUE [p.u.]
1.25
1.00
0.75
2. 0.50
0.25 1. 0.00 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1. Load torque 2. Average torque at 100 % voltage
SPEED [p.u.]
TORQUE 1 p.u.= 51.8 kNm SPEED 1 p.u.= 1800.0 rpm
Document number
Lang.
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3BSY200026-ETX
en
TIME & TERMINAL VOLTAGE - SPEED CURVES, DOL

AMC 900M4A BSNV
14.0
9694 kW
60 Hz
0.92 PF
13200 V
477 A
1787 rpm
1.0
12.6
0.9
11.2
0.8
9.8
0.7
8.4
0.6
7.0
0.5
5.6
0.4
4.2 2. 2.8
0.3
0.2
1.4
0.1
0.0 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
0.0
SPEED [p.u.]
2. Starting time at 100 % voltage
LOAD INERTIA J = 227.0 kgm2 ROTOR INERTIA J = 1439.9 kgm2
SPEED 1 p.u. =1800.0 rpm TERMINAL VOLTAGE 1 p.u. =13200.0 V

3BSY200026-ETX
en
TERMINAL VOLTAGE [p.u.]

3
TIME [SEC]
CURRENT & POWERFACTOR - SPEED CURVES, 80% VOLTAGE

AMC 900M4A BSNV
4.0 1. 3.6 0.90
9694 kW
60 Hz
0.92 PF
13200 V
477 A
1787 rpm
1.00
3.2
0.80
2.8
0.70
2.0
0.50
1.6
0.40
1.2
0.30
0.8
0.20
0.4
2.
0.10
0.0 0.0
0.00 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
SPEED [p.u.]
1. Current at 80 % voltage 2. Power factor at 80 % voltage CURRENT SPEED 1 p.u. = 477.0 A 1 p.u. = 1800.0 rpm
Document number
Lang.
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3BSY200026-ETX
en
POWER FACTOR
CURRENT [p.u.]
2.4
0.60
TORQUE - SPEED CURVES, 80% VOLTAGE

AMC 900M4A BSNV
1.50
9694 kW
60 Hz
0.92 PF
13200 V
477 A
1787 rpm
1.35
1.20
1.05
0.90
TORQUE [p.u.]
0.75
0.60
0.45 2. 0.30
0.15 1. 0.00 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1. Load torque 2. Average torque at 80 % voltage
SPEED [p.u.]
TORQUE 1 p.u.= 51.8 kNm SPEED 1 p.u.= 1800.0 rpm
Document number
Lang.
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3BSY200026-ETX
en
TIME & TERMINAL VOLTAGE - SPEED CURVES, 80% VOLTAGE

AMC 900M4A BSNV
30.0
9694 kW
60 Hz
0.92 PF
13200 V
477 A
1787 rpm
1.0
27.0
0.9
24.0
0.8
21.0
0.7
18.0
0.6
15.0
0.5
12.0
0.4
9.0
0.3
6.0
2.
0.2
3.0
0.1
0.0 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
0.0
SPEED [p.u.]
2. Starting time at 80 % voltage
LOAD INERTIA J = 227.0 kgm2 ROTOR INERTIA J = 1439.9 kgm2
SPEED 1 p.u. =1800.0 rpm TERMINAL VOLTAGE 1 p.u. =13200.0 V

3BSY200026-ETX
en
TERMINAL VOLTAGE [p.u.]

6
TIME [SEC]
THERMAL CAPABILITY CURVE

AMC 900M4A BSNV
10000.
9694 kW
60 Hz
0.92 PF
13200 V
477 A
1787 rpm
1000.
2. 1.
100.
8. TIME [SEC.] 6. 4.
10.
7.
5.
3.
1.
0.1
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
STATOR CURRENT [p.u.]

1. Running warm 3. Stalling warm 5. Starting at rated voltage 2. Running cold 4. Stalling cold 6. Starting at 80% voltage 7. Acceleration curve at 100% voltage 8. Acceleration curve at 80% voltage
Document number
CURRENT 1 p.u. = 477A
Lang.
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3BSY200026-ETX
en
REVISION Rev. Page (P) Description Date ind. Chapt.(C) Dept./Init. A P2-3 New pump load curve. Curve no. 4-104.451.432. Load torque at 2006-11-30 P5-6 full speed was 60%. Starting time was 11.7 and 24.4 seconds MME/DS B P7 Thermal capability curve added 2007-05-23 MME/DS C P7 Acceleration curves added. Curve 1 and 2 corrected 2007-10-09 MME/LB
Document number
Lang.
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3BSY200026-ETX
en
Itm 1 2 3 4 5 6
Qty 3 2 1 1 4 1
Location In machine I maskinhus D- and ND-bearings D- och ND-lager D-bearing D-lager ND-bearing ND-lager D-and-ND bearing D- och ND-lager ND-bearing ND-lager
Article no 3BSM 013326-A 3BSM 014541-A
Specification 120V 400W 3-wire dubbel
3BSY 800048-ETX EMZLB 22-280 3BSY 800048-ETX EMZLB 22-280 3BSM 016775-A 3BSM 016775-A BN-givare 3300 BN-givare 3300
Name Space heater. Vrmare. RTD in bearing. RTD i lager. Bearing insulated. Mittflnslager isol. Bearing insulated. Mittflnslager isol. Vibration transmitter. Vibrationsgivare. Key phasor Key phasor
Remark Tranberg AS Minco RENK RENK
Bentely Nevada Bentaly Nevada
ISS SULZER Khurais ABB UK Type des. AMC 900M4A BSNV Intended for Trade name
Based on Prepared Approved Resp dept Pcl
808253
Reg No
06-11-23 P.Kaskikallio 06-12-07 L. Natterlund Take over dept ATAP/MKK
Machine Parts List List of machine details

Revision Lang
8000555/200 3BSY 200004-ETX
Page Cont
82 1 -
Installation & Maintenance
Squirrelcage Motors AMB & AMC
Squirrelcage Motors AMB & AMC Table of Contents
Chapter 1 - Introduction
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 General.........................................................................................................................1 Operative range and intended application ...................................................................1 Information on electromagnetic compatibility ............................................................1 Required qualifications for erection and operating personnel .....................................1
Chapter 2 - Safety instructions

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 Safety ...........................................................................................................................2 Site conditions..............................................................................................................2 Prerequisites.................................................................................................................2 Contraindications .........................................................................................................3
Chapter 3 - Storage and transport

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 Inspection of delivery ..................................................................................................4 Oil lubricated bearings.................................................................................................4 Rotor transport lock .....................................................................................................4 Turning a vertical motor to the horizontal position .....................................................5 Storage of the motor ....................................................................................................9 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 Short term storage of crated motor .............................................................9 Long term storage of crated motor .............................................................9 Short term storage of uncrated motor .......................................................10 Long term storage of uncrated motor .......................................................11 Space heater ..............................................................................................11 Prevention of corrosion damage an air-water coolers...............................11
Chapter 4 - Preparing for commissioning

4.1 Removing the rotor transport lock .............................................................................12 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.3 4.4 4.3.1 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 3BSM 008369, rev. E Motors with anti-friction bearings ............................................................12 Motor with sleeve bearings.......................................................................12 Cylindrical-bore coupling hub with a feather key ....................................13 Cylindrical-bore coupling hub with a shrink fit (plain or stepped seat) ...14 Taper-bore coupling hub with a shrink fit.................................................15 Prerequisites for installation .....................................................................15 Grouting ....................................................................................................17 Installation of motor with soleplates.........................................................17 Influence of the axial position of the rotor on motor alignment...............18 4.5.1.1 Motors without a guide bearing (sleeve bearing designs) .......18 Motors with guide bearings (anti-friction or special sleeve bearing design)...............................................................................18 Increase in shaft height due to thermal expansion....................................19 i
Mounting the coupling hub........................................................................................12
Installing the motor....................................................................................................15 Foundation .................................................................................................................17
Aligning to driven equipment ....................................................................................18
4.5.4 4.5.5 4.5.6 4.5.7
Alignment procedure ................................................................................20 Tightening torque for the anchor bolts......................................................21 Alignment report.......................................................................................21 Additional information for vertical motors...............................................22 4.5.7.1 4.5.7.2 General.....................................................................................22 Vertical motors with sleeve bearings .......................................22
4.5.8 4.5.9 4.5.10
Bearings ....................................................................................................22 Anti-friction bearings................................................................................22 Sleeve bearings .........................................................................................22 4.5.10.1 4.5.10.2 4.5.10.3 Laying the oil pipes .................................................................23 Layout of oil supply system.....................................................23 Monitoring of the oil supply system ........................................24
4.5.11 4.5.12 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.7.5 4.7.6 4.7.7 4.7.8 4.7.9 4.7.10 4.7.11
Bearing temperature monitoring...............................................................24 Bearing insulation .....................................................................................24 AMB motors .............................................................................................25 AMC motors .............................................................................................25 Air-to-water cooler ...................................................................................25 Insulation resistance..................................................................................25 4.7.1.1 Minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance ..............25 Cable penetration plate on the terminal box .............................................27 Terminals, preparing for connection .........................................................28 Cleaning the terminals ..............................................................................28 Measures to prevent oxidation and corrosion ...........................................28 Stud terminals ...........................................................................................28 Bar terminals.............................................................................................29 Fully insulated connectors ........................................................................30 Fastening the bolts for the terminal connectors ........................................31 Earthing.....................................................................................................31 Earth brushes.............................................................................................31
Mounting the ventilation unit ....................................................................................25
Electrical connections ................................................................................................25
Chapter 5 - Commissioning
5.1 5.2 5.3 Sleeve bearings with forced oil lubrication ...............................................................32 Direction of rotation...................................................................................................32 Air to water coolers....................................................................................................33 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.4 5.5 5.6 General......................................................................................................33 Prevention of corrosion damage on air-to-water coolers..........................33
Starting frequency......................................................................................................33 Starting, operation, shut-down...................................................................................34 Continuous monitoring during operation...................................................................34
3BSM 008369, rev. E
ii
5.7
Check list ...................................................................................................................35 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 Page 1........................................................................................................36 Page 2........................................................................................................37 Page 3........................................................................................................38
Chapter 6 - Inspection and maintenance

6.1 6.2 6.3 General.......................................................................................................................39 Instrumentation ..........................................................................................................40 Maintenance on sleeve bearings ................................................................................40 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.5 Oil change .................................................................................................40 Oil ring......................................................................................................40 Oil leakage ................................................................................................41 Emergency running for motors with forced oil lubrication ......................41 Maintenance on a separate oil supply system (Lube oil or jacking oil supply) ................................................................41 Maintenance plan for sleeve bearings.......................................................41 Validity of the regreasing intervals, conversion........................................42 Regreasing procedure ...............................................................................43 Choice of lubricating grease .....................................................................43 Maintenance plan for anti-friction bearings on horizontal and vertical motors ..........................................................................................44 Bearing temperatures ................................................................................45 Bearing condition monitoring by the shock-pulse method (SPM, only for anti-friction bearings) ......................................................45 Bearing housing and shaft vibration .........................................................45 6.5.3.1 6.5.3.2 6.5.4 6.6 6.7 6.6.1 Bearing housing vibration........................................................46 Shaft vibration .........................................................................46
Maintenance on anti-friction bearings .......................................................................42
Bearing monitoring instruments and bearing insulation............................................45 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3
Bearing insulation .....................................................................................47 Checking and replacing the sacrificial anodes on water coolers ..............47
Checking the cooling elements of heat exchangers ...................................................47 Maintenance plan for cage-induction motors ............................................................48
Chapter 7 - Servicing and cleaning

7.1 Servicing ....................................................................................................................50 7.1.1 7.1.2 Dismantling and reassembly.....................................................................50 Service sleeve bearings.............................................................................50 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 Inspection of the sliding surfaces of sleeve bearings...............50 Oil rings ...................................................................................50
Service of anti-friction bearings ...............................................................51 Reconditioning work during servicing .....................................................51
3BSM 008369, rev. E
iii
7.2
Cleaning .....................................................................................................................51 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 Mechanical dry cleaning...........................................................................51 Wet cleaning with cleaning agents............................................................51 Cleaning the air-to-water cooler ...............................................................52 7.2.3.1 7.2.3.2 7.2.3.3 7.2.3.4 7.2.3.5 Cleaning interval......................................................................52 Dismantling..............................................................................52 Cleaning the inside of the cooling tubes..................................52 Cleaning the outside of the cooling tubes................................53 Sacrificial anodes (expendable anodes) for air-water coolers .53
7.3
Stocking of spare parts...............................................................................................54
Chapter 8 - Dismantling and reassembly

8.1 8.2 Safety instructions......................................................................................................56 Dismantling................................................................................................................56 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 Coupling hub with a feather key...............................................................56 Coupling hub with a cylindrical shrink fit ................................................56 Coupling hub with a tapered shrink fit .....................................................58 Removing the ventilation unit from a horizontal motor ...........................60 8.2.4.1 8.2.4.2 8.2.4.3 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.2.7 8.2.8 8.2.9 8.2.10 8.2.11 8.3 8.2.5.1 8.2.6.1 Air-to-water cooler ..................................................................60 Air-to-air cooler .......................................................................60 Motors type AMB....................................................................60 All ventilation units .................................................................61 Air-to-water cooler ..................................................................61
Weather protection units ...........................................................................61 Removing the ventilation unit from a vertical motor ...............................61 Weather protection unit.............................................................................63 Dismantling anti-friction bearings on horizontal motors..........................63 Dismantling anti-friction bearings from vertical motors ..........................64 Dismantling sleeve bearings .....................................................................65 Space heater ..............................................................................................66 8.2.11.1 Rotor withdrawal .....................................................................67
Reassembly ................................................................................................................68 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 Fitting the air guide rings..........................................................................68 Assembling anti-friction bearings.............................................................69 Assembling sleeve bearings......................................................................71
8.4
Recommended tightening torque for bolts on the motor ...........................................73
Chapter 9 - Trouble shooting

9.1 Operational faults on cage-induction motors.............................................................74
3BSM 008369, rev. E
iv
Squirrelcage Motors AMB & AMC Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 General
This installation and maintenance manual for the motor is a part of the main documentation for the project. Actions shown in this manual are only to be performed by trained personnel authorized by the user.
1.2 Operative range and intended application

Electric motors are components intended for application in high voltage industrial installations. Due to the nature of their electrical and mechanical operating conditions, improper installation or operation, as also insufficient maintenance, could introduce hazards which could lead to the most severe bodily injury or damage to property. The technical data for the motor was determined with due consideration to the standards and specifications agreed in the order. This data is shown on the motor dimension drawing and in the test report. The motor may only be operated within the scope of this data. In case of deviations the manufacturer must be contacted. These instructions only consider those measures which must be observed when the motor is being operated in its operative range and in its intended application. The applicable national, local and plant regulations must also be taken into consideration.
1.3 Information on electromagnetic compatibility

The user must take the following precautionary measures during installation and operation in order not to impair the electromagnetic compatibility. The motor may only be connected to a power supply system which is properly earthed in conformity with the applicable regulations. Have technical modifications carried out by qualified personnel who, after completing the modifications, can check that the electromagnetic compatibility has not been in adversely influenced. If it is necessary to replace possible anti-interference components, filters or screened cables, the new parts must be identical to the originals.
1.4 Required qualifications for erection and operating personnel

Installation, operation, maintenance and repair work may only be carried out by mechanically and electrically skilled personnel qualified and properly trained for this work. These persons must be conversant with the motor, that is, they must have completely read and fully understand the relevant chapters of these operating instructions.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
1-1
Squirrelcage Motors AMB & AMC Chapter 2 Safety instructions
Chapter 2 Safety instructions
2.1 Safety
The machine is manufactured and intended for use only as prescribed by this manual. Modification, alteration, or lack of maintenance procedures as described in the labeling, may adversely affect the safety and efficacy of this device. The manufacturer is not responsible for malfunctions that comprise safety as a result of alteration, use of non ABB replacements parts, neglect or misuse. Replacements parts may vary from those shown in this manual. Should you have questions on those parts please contact ABB Automation Technologies AB. The actual appearance of the machine may vary from the illustration in this manual. Should pre-owned ABB equipment be purchased and reconditioned, the equipment should not be used until testing and analysis demonstrate that the equipment meets the original or upgraded specifications. The use of solvents as cleaning agents and the use of lubricants can involve health and/or safety hazards. The recommended precautions and procedures of the manufacturers should be followed.
2.2 Site conditions

This motor is to be used on a site with conditions according to ABBs Technical Specification Site conditions and applicable standards (included in binder Users Manual).
2.3 Prerequisites
The operator must: be proficient in the application of the machine and electricity. be thoroughly trained in the skills and have the knowledge required to operate this machine. be thoroughly familiar with the contents of this manual and other operators manuals that deals with the machine and accessory devices that may be used with this machine. be fully qualified and trained in the operation of this machine and able to distinguish normal from aberrant device behavior. never reset an alarm or trip until the reason for the alarm/trip has been located and necessary correction has been made to make a safe restart of the machine. The motors are suitable for a wide range of mounting and operating conditions. These variants greatly influence noise emission. With due consideration to all the factors involved, noise levels for the work location can only be measured on the commissioned motor on site.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
2-2
Squirrelcage Motors AMB & AMC Chapter 2 Safety instructions
2.4 Contraindications
The machine is not designed, sold or intended for any use except as indicated above. Furthermore, it is not intended to be used outside of the machine specifications or limitations. The machine must be in good working order.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
2-3
Squirrelcage Motors AMB & AMC Chapter 3 Storage and transport
Chapter 3 Storage and transport
3.1 Inspection of delivery

The motor will be packed in a case or bolted to a wooden skid for transport. Unpacking should be done carefully in order to avoid damage. The delivery should be checked against the packing list for completeness. The motor was checked in the factory and tested for faultless running. NOTE: When the motor arrives at its destination a general check must be carried out in order to determine possible transport damage as quickly as possible. Any damage or deviations between delivery and packing list must be entered in a report in cooperation with the responsible forwarder. Should the motor have suffered damage during transport or installation, this must be rectified before commissioning.
3.2 Oil lubricated bearings

Motors with oil lubricated bearings will be transported without oil filling. NOTE: Anytime the motor is to be transported, the lubrication oil must first be drained from the bearings, otherwise it could ingress through the seals to the inside of the motor.
3.3 Rotor transport lock

In order to prevent vibration arising during transport from causing bearing damage, a rotor transport lock is fitted which blocks the rotor axially.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
3-4
WARNING - Heavy lift

Whenever the motor is to be lifted, the lifting equipment must have adequate lifting capacity. The weight of the motor is given on the rating plate. When two or more motors are mounted on a common bedplate, this machine set may neither be lifted nor transported as a single unit. In case of special designs, contact ABB. When a motor is equipped with a ventilation unit, under no circumstances may the motor plus ventilation unit be lifted together using the lifting lugs on the ventilating unit (see figure 3-1). When lifting the motor, always use all four lifting lugs provided on the motor itself.
Figure 3-1
Lifting the motor
3.4 Turning a vertical motor to the horizontal position

As a general rule vertical motors are transported in their vertical location. Horizontal transport is possible on request. Vertical motors are always packed for transport in the vertical position. They must never be transported or stored in the horizontal position. However, it is permitted to turn a vertical motor to the horizontal position for short periods in special cases were this is necessary due to space limitation during installation. In such a case the following procedure is to be followed: 1. 2. 3. 4. The ventilation unit exchanger must be removed before beginning. Should the access opening be too narrow, it may be necessary to remove the main terminal box. Fit the rotor locking device. Before beginning, figure 3-2 to figure 3-7 should be studied and the necessary slings and blocks etc. be made ready.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
3-5
5.
The whole turning process must be carried out slowly and smoothly avoiding swinging, sudden shifts in suspension, or shock forces, which could be detrimental to the motor bearings. During the turning process ensure that the slings do not come into contact with junction boxes or any other accessories fitted. Follow the instructions given under figure 3-2 to figure 3-7. The motor can be turned from the horizontal back to the vertical by following the instructions in the reverse sequence.
6. 7. 8.
Raise motor with slings arranged at the four top lifting lugs and using two crane hooks. All slings with same tension.
Figure 3-2
Gradually relieve tension of slings on one side so that the motor is suspended at one side only.
Figure 3-3
3BSM 008369, rev. E
3-6
Remove slack slings from top lifting lugs and relocate to two bottom lugs. See figure 3-5
Figure 3-4
Slings now located on top and bottom lugs. Weight of motor still taken up by slings on top lugs only.
Figure 3-5
3BSM 008369, rev. E
3-7
Gradually tension slings on bottom lugs and raise crane hook while simultaneously lowering the crane hook with the slings on the top lugs.
Figure 3-6
Bring the motor into the horizontal position and rest onto suitable blocks positioned under the corners of the motor frame.
Figure 3-7
3BSM 008369, rev. E
3-8
3.5 Storage of the motor 3.5.1 Short term storage of crated motor
Storage < 9 month Measures to be taken by customer or other part. The machine should be left in the crate. The crate should preferably be stored indoors and shall be placed on a vibration-free, flat and well-drained surface. If the crate is to be stored outdoors, the crate must be covered with a tarpaulin on the top extending at least 1 meter out from the crate to avoid direct rain on the crate. The crate should be kept dry, protected from rain and moisture.
Before commissioning the following items should be carried out: Visual external inspection of bearings and entering shaft Check insulation resistance in accordance with section 4.7.1
3.5.2 Long term storage of crated motor

Storage > 9 month Long-term storage must be notified before delivery, so that the machine can be prepared and packed for the actual condition. If an unscheduled long-term storage is needed, please contact ABB. The machine should preferably be stored indoors and shall be placed on a vibration-free, flat and well-drained surface. Measures to be taken by customer or other part. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove top and sides of the wooden crate. Open the plastic protection to allow for a good ventilation. If cooler top is delivered separate, the cooler top must be mounted immediately on the machine. If the machine is prepared for air ducts, dont remove the temporary transport covers. The machine should be protected from rain and moisture. If the machine is to be stored outdoors, it must be covered with a tarpaulin on the top extending at least 1 meter out from the crate to avoid direct rain on the machine. If the machine is stored in a harsh environment measures should be taken to protect it against dust and dirt. To avoid condensation in the machine, the heating elements in main machine and exciter must be connected according to the circuit diagram, included in the binder Users Manual. Check regularly the anti-corrosion coating on NOT painted areas like shaft, flanges etc. and touch up if necessary. Measures should be taken to ensure that the heaters work properly at all time.
6.
7. 8.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
3-9
9.
If sleeve bearings, corrosion preventive oil should be filled in the bearings once every 12 month. Rotation of the rotor is not required.
10. The axial transport-locking device must always be mounted during transportation of the machine. Before commissioning the following items should be carried out: Visual external inspection of bearings and entering shaft. Visual inspection of exciter. Visual inspection of rotor and stator windings. The corrosion preventive oil in the bearings must be drained before rotation. Check insulation resistance in accordance with section 4.7.1.
3.5.3 Short term storage of uncrated motor

Storage < 9 month The machine should preferably be stored indoors and shall be placed on a vibration-free, flat and well-drained surface. Measures to be taken by customer or other part. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the plastic protection to allow for a good ventilation. If cooler top is delivered separate, the cooler top must be mounted immediately on the machine. If the machine is prepared for air ducts, dont remove the temporary transport covers. The machine should be protected from rain and moisture. If the machine is to be stored outdoors, it must be covered with a tarpaulin on the top extending at least 1 meter out from the crate to avoid direct rain on the machine and be placed on at least 100 mm high rigid supports, as to make sure that no water can enter the machine from below. If the machine is stored in a harsh environment measures should be taken to protect it against dust and dirt. To avoid condensation in the machine, the heating elements in main machine and exciter must be connected according to the circuit diagram, included in the binder Users Manual. Check regularly the anti-corrosion coating on NOT painted areas like shaft, flanges etc. and touch up if necessary. Measures should be taken to ensure that the heaters work properly at all time. The axial transport-locking device must always be mounted during transportation of the machine
5.
6. 7. 8.
Before commissioning the following items should be carried out: Visual external inspection of bearings and entering shaft. Check insulation resistance in accordance with section 4.7.1.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
3-10
3.5.4 Long term storage of uncrated motor

Storage > 9 month Long-term storage must be notified before delivery, so that the machine can be prepared and packed for the actual condition. If an unscheduled long-term storage is needed, please contact ABB. The machine should preferably be stored indoors and shall be placed on a vibration-free, flat and well-drained surface. Measures to be taken accordance with section 3.5.3 Short term storage of machine, < 9 month and in accordance to below: If sleeve bearings, corrosion preventive oil should be filled in the bearings once every 12 month. Rotation of the rotor is not required.
Before commissioning the following items should be carried out: Visual external inspection of bearings and entering shaft. Visual inspection of exciter. Visual inspection of rotor and stator windings. The corrosion preventive oil in the bearings must be drained before rotation. Check insulation resistance in accordance with section 4.7.1.
3.5.5 Space heater

NOTE: The motor space heater must be energized during the motor storage period. Take care to connect up with the correct supply voltage as shown on the motor connection diagram.
3.5.6 Prevention of corrosion damage an air-water coolers

In order to avoid corrosion damage, care should be taken to ensure that the water quality and possible inhibitors or sacrificial anodes etc. are conform with that or those agreed upon in the order. When a motor is delivered, the cooler will have been drained but may not be completely dry. Should commissioning not be planned within 6 months after delivery, or if ever the motor must be shut down for such a long period of time for other reasons, then the cooler must be dried out in order to prevent corrosion. This can be done by removing the covers of both water chambers and blowing through with warm air.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
3-11
Squirrelcage Motors AMB & AMC Chapter 4 Preparing for commissioning
Chapter 4 Preparing for commissioning
4.1 Removing the rotor transport lock 4.1.1 Motors with anti-friction bearings
Unscrew the locking bolt (tagged with a red label) at the D-end bearing by 5 mm and relock using jam nut.
Figure 4-1
Rotor lock on motors with anti-friction bearings
4.1.2 Motor with sleeve bearings
Dismantle the whole rotor locking gear, bar and studs, from the D-end.
Figure 4-2
Rotor lock on motors with sleeve bearings
4.2 Mounting the coupling hub

Torque transmission between the motor and the driven equipment is achieved by a coupling, mounted to the motor shaft and having either a feather key or a shrink fit. The form of shaft extension is shown on the binding motor outline drawing and could be one of the following: 3BSM 008369, rev. E Cylindrical with a feather key 4-12
Cylindrical with a shrink fit (plain or stepped) Tapered with a shrink fit.
CAUTION - Risk of personal injury

Handle hot couplings with care to avoid burns!
4.2.1 Cylindrical-bore coupling hub with a feather key

In general, the instructions issued by the coupling manufacturer are applicable for mounting and removing a coupling. The motor rotor will have been balanced with a half-key. Therefore, coupling parts must have been balanced on a mandrel, also with half-keys in their keyways. 1. 2. 3. 4. Clean shaft extension and coupling hub, check hub bore and slot for damage. Check diameters of hub bore and shaft extension against drawings. Check lengths of shaft extension, coupling hub and key. When the coupling hub is shorter than the shaft extension and a spacer ring is not to be fitted, then the length of key protrusion must be halved in order to avoid unbalance (see Fig. 4-3).
Figure 4-3 5.
Coupling fitted without a spacer ring
Under no circumstances may mating surfaces be coated with agents containing molybdenum sulphide (e.g. Molykote or similar). Light oiling of the shaft and the hub bore is recommended. Heat coupling hub to 110 C. Refer to section Shrink couplings for heating up and mounting procedures.
6.
CAUTION - Component damage

In the case of vertical motors, the coupling must be secured against slipping off.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
4-13
4.2.2 Cylindrical-bore coupling hub with a shrink fit (plain or stepped seat)
1. 2. Clean shaft extension and coupling hub, blow out oil channels, check hub bore for damage. Have following tools ready: 3. 4. 5. 6. two threaded studs two large lead hammers protective gloves wirerope slings or belts.
Measure shaft and bore. Document interference. In case of a gear coupling, position sealing ring on the shaft beyond the coupling seat. Lightly oil shaft extension with hydraulic oil (e.g. type HL 68). Do not use Molykote! Heat coupling according to the Fig. 4-4: Check temperature before fitting The coupling hub should always be mounted by a two-man team.
Figure 4-4
Shrink temperature of coupling hub as a function of diameter
T
A B C D
Required shrink temperature of coupling hub Oil bath Induction oven Measured interference Diameter of shaft extension
7.
After cooling, stress relieve the hub by injecting oil at about 1000 bar so long until oil appears from between the shaft and hub at both ends. 4-14
3BSM 008369, rev. E
NOTE: In the case of stepped shrink seats, it is essential to leave the middle hole open, otherwise the shrink fit will loosen and the coupling will be pushed towards the end of the shaft.
4.2.3 Taper-bore coupling hub with a shrink fit

1. 2. Clean shaft extension and coupling hub, blow out oil channels, check hub bore for damage. Have following tools ready: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. two threaded studs two large lead hammers protective gloves wire rope slings or belts.
Slip cold coupling hub onto the shaft. Document axial position of the hub and remove again. In case of a gear coupling, position sealing ring on the shaft beyond the coupling seat. Set temporary stop at the definitive axial location of the coupling hub according to data given by the responsible party. Lightly oil shaft extension with hydraulic oil (e.g. type HL 68). Do not use Molykote! Heat coupling according to figure 4-4: Check temperature before fitting The coupling hub should always be mounted by a two-man team.
8.
After cooling, fit shaft-end nut or other locking device, and tighten up. Stress relieve the hub by injecting oil at about 1000 bar so long until oil appears from between the shaft and hub at both ends.

Before injecting oil, the shaft-end nut, or retaining disc, must be fitted to prevent the coupling hub from jumping off the shaft. 9. Check shaft-end nut or retaining disc, retighten if necessary.
4.3 Installing the motor

Normally, the motor is installed on soleplates or a bedplate, which, together with the anchor bolts are later concreted into the foundation.
4.3.1 Prerequisites for installation

The environmental conditions must correlate with those agreed in the order, e.g.: 3BSM 008369, rev. E Altitude of plant Ambient temperature 4-15
Humidity Cooling water: Inlet temperature Pressure Flow rate Quality.
Lube oil: Inlet temperature Pressure Flow rate Viscosity.
For details see labels on the motor. The cooling air must be free of dust, oil, aggressive gases particularly ammonia, sulphur, chlorine and silicone. The motor must be installed on a solid foundation, which guarantees for plan-parallelism of the machined surfaces of the motor feet of at least 0.1 mm. After installation (driving and driven equipment), the running quality of the motor must be at least acceptable according to ISO 3945. The structural design of the foundation is not included in ABBs undertaking and the customer or a third party is therefore responsible for this. Furthermore, the grouting operation is normally also outside ABBs undertaking and responsibility. The installation should be planned as early as possible. NOTE: Pay attention to the direction of the cooling air. In the case of open-ventilated motors it must be ensured that the air inlet and outlet openings are not obstructed by ducts, piping or other objects. Warm exhaust air must not be drawn back into the motor.

Air inlet and outlet openings are to be covered during the installation phase in order to prevent the ingress of foreign matter into the motor. It is absolutely essential that these covers are removed again before commissioning.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
4-16
4.4 Foundation

The concreting in of the motor soleplates or bedplate must be done by personnel qualified for this work. The construction management is responsible to ensure this work is carried out properly.
4.4.1 Grouting
When the motor has been properly aligned, its base elements are attached to the foundation by grouting. Use only non-shrinking concrete for grouting to ensure proper adhesion between the base frame and grouting. Make sure that the grouting fills properly the whole space around and under the base element. Do not use a vibrator in order to avoid any disturbance in the alignment. After the grouting has set (cured), adjust vertically to the final elevation by putting shims between the base frame and the base element. Check also the other alignments of the motor and adjust, if necessary. Non-shrink grout is recommended for the best results. For shaping and grouting, the manufacturers instructions to be followed.
4.4.2 Installation of motor with soleplates

Normally, the motor is installed on soleplates with anchor bolts, which are to be concreted into the foundation. Proceed as follows: 1. 2. Check the prepared concrete foundation against the outline drawing, correct if necessary. Fasten soleplates (with at least 2 mm of shims between the mating faces) to the bottom of the motor feet by means of the holding-down bolts. Ensure the bolts are centrally positioned in their holes to permit later correction. The shims must be clean and free of burrs. Mark the location of the pads on the foundation. Place the pads in position and adjust the height with special mortar so there will be a clearance of about 15 mm between the bottom of the soleplates and the foundation. Align using a spirit level. Maintain the specified setting time for the special mortar. Suspend the motor on the crane and hang the anchor bolts centrally in their holes in the sole plates. Screw the levelling bolts in until the bolt heads protrude about 10 mm below the bottom edge of the soleplates. Position the slide plates onto the pads underneath the bolt heads. Rest motor down. Align motor, or driven equipment, to an accuracy of approx. 0.2 mm. Grout in anchor bolts up to the level of the pads and permit the grouting to set. Finish grouting foundation in conformity with the outline drawing or foundation plan. Vibrate grouting beneath the soleplates and ensure there are no cavities. The final tightening of the anchor bolts are to be done after the alignment. See section 4.5.4 4-17
3.
4.
5. 6. 7. 8.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
4.5 Aligning to driven equipment

NOTE: Careful alignment of the motor to the definitive installed driven equipment is an indispensable prerequisite for smooth running.
4.5.1 Influence of the axial position of the rotor on motor alignment

4.5.1.1 Motors without a guide bearing (sleeve bearing designs)
The rotor of a motor with sleeve bearings, B or K shells, must be guided by the coupling of the driven machine in such a way, that under no circumstances can a shaft shoulder come into contact with an end face of a bearing shell. B Shells at the D-end The deviation between the magnetic and mechanical centres is given on the label figure 4-5 beside the shaft position indicator.
Figure 4-5
Shaft position label
As a general rule the shaft should be positioned in its mechanical centre. However, in order to keep the axial force acting on the guide bearing of the driven equipment low, a shaft displacement towards the magnetic centre is permitted so long that the clearance in the coupling and thermal expansion do not result in contact between the shaft shoulder and the bearing shell. K-Shells with zero bearing play at the D-end The axial position of a sleeve bearing with a K-shell is set in the factory, by inserting shims or machining the seating face of the bearing endshield, so that the magnetic and mechanical centres correlate. The uncoupled motor can be operated for test runs in this condition. In operation, the driven equipment must guide the rotor by way of a rigid coupling. The guide bearing on the driven equipment must have zero clearance.
4.5.2 Motors with guide bearings (anti-friction or special sleeve bearing design)
Motors with anti-friction bearings or A-shell type sleeve bearings can accept axial force (refer to outline drawing for permissible values). 3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-18
Consequently, the driven machine must not provide for axial guidance. During alignment the specified clearance between the coupling halves is to be ensured. In the case of motors with anti-friction bearings, the axial clearance between the coupling halves must be able to absorb the thermal expansion of the motor shaft.
4.5.3 Increase in shaft height due to thermal expansion

When assessing the vertical mismatch, the change in shaft height due to thermal expansion must be taken into consideration. Formula for growth in shaft height h:
h = Shaft height Temperature rise Factor

For the motor, a temperature rise of 20 and 30 K must be reckoned with. For the driven equipment, the data from the manufacturer is applicable. When no data is available, it will be assumed as being zero. Permissible angular mismatch
Rigid coupling Curved-tooth coupling Flexible coupling a= 0.02 mm a= 0.05 mm a= 0.1 mm
Figure 4-6
Angular mismatch
Permissible radial mismatch
Rigid coupling Curved-tooth coupling Flexible Coupling
r = 0.02 mm r = 0.05 mm r = 0.1 mm
3BSM 008369, rev. E
4-19
Figure 4-7
Radial mismatch
4.5.4 Alignment procedure

1. Motors with sleeve bearings: Before the rotor may be turned, the bearings must be lubricated with 0.1 0.2 l of oil.
Measure run-out at the largest diameter of the coupling hub. The run-out on the shaft extension was measured in the factory and verified to be conform with the following tables:
Diameter of shaft extension Run-out tolerance of shaft extension (=total deflection) [m] 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
[mm] > 30 - 50 > 50 - 80 > 80 - 120 > 120 - 180 > 180 - 250 > 250 - 315 > 315 - 400
The run-out on the coupling hub may not be much greater than these values. Document measured values.

The motor is very heavy. 2. Measure angular mismatch a and document result. 3. Equalize vertical gap by inserting shims under the corresponding motor feet. Correct horizontal gap by moving motor laterally.
Measure radial mismatch r and document result. Equalize vertical mismatch by inserting shims under all four motor feet. (Consider change in shaft height due to thermal expansion). 4-20
3BSM 008369, rev. E
4.
Correct horizontal mismatch by moving motor laterally.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the permissible values have been attained.
4.5.5 Tightening torque for the anchor bolts
Motor type AMB 560 - AMB 710 AMC 800 - AMC 900 AMC 1000 - AMC 1120
Bolt diameter [mm] M42 M56 M64
Tightening torque [Nm] 800 1900 2800
4.5.6 Alignment report

Enter the values for the aligned motor into the alignment report.
Figure 4-8
Alignment report
3BSM 008369, rev. E
4-21
4.5.7 Additional information for vertical motors

4.5.7.1 General
Radial mismatch( r) Vertical motors have a spigot seating on the mounting flange as standard design. Therefore, radial alignment is not necessary, but a check is advisable. Angular mismatch( a) The engine flange surface should be checked for perpendicular aligment against the shaft end. Table: Allowed values Any correction required to match up with the counter-flange can be done by inserting shims, which should have as large an area as possible.
4.5.7.2 Vertical motors with sleeve bearings

To enable the rotor to be turned, the N-end thrust bearing must be relieved of load. This requires that the rotor weight be taken up by suitable lifting equipment. The radial clearance of the guide bearing at the N-end must be set as small as possible.
4.5.8 Bearings 4.5.9 Anti-friction bearings

The motor bearings will have been packed with lithium-soap grease in the factory.

Storing the motor over a period of several months can lead to oil leakage due to separation from the bearing grease. In such a case, the outer bearing cover must be dismantled to remove the grease with the oil residue. Fresh grease must be injected, with the motor running, directly after starting up.
4.5.10 Sleeve bearings

Motors with sleeve bearings are delivered without oil in the bearings. When filling with oil, the correct filling level is the middle of the sight glass. A higher level is not recommended as oil could escape at the seals during operation. In the case of bearings without a separate lube oil supply system, lubrication is provided by the oil rings. During longer periods of motor standstill, the weight of the rotor will press out the oil film from between the bearing shells and the journals. The bearings will be dry! Therefore, prior to the first commissioning, or before starting up after a longer period of standstill, 0.1 to 0.2 l of oil must be poured over the bearings.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
4-22
4.5.10.1 Laying the oil pipes

NOTE: Only properly cleaned pipes are to be used for the lube oil lines. In order to achieve stress-free connections, flexible compensating elements are to be included in the field piping just before the connection flanges on the motor bearings. The piping must be rigidly supported on the field side of the compensator. The oil return lines must have a continuous downward gradient of at least 5% from the connections on the motor bearings to the oil tank. Return lines are always to be kept as short as possible. The free pipe section must never be less than that at the bearing outlet points. Pipe bends should be avoided as far as possible. In order to avoid the danger of oil build-up or overpressure in the bearings, syphons and bridge sections are forbidden (see figure 4-9). Observe information given on outline drawing! The speed of the runback flow of the lubricant (referred to the pipe cross section) shall not exceed 0.17m/s. Thus, only 70% of the cross section is filled under the most unfavourable operation conditions, so that any oil mist present can be transported to the oil reservoir along with the returning oil. Branch connections are to be arranged in the flow direction. The pipe sections must be large enough to ensure the following oil flow velocities: Oil supply (full pipe section), < 1.5 m/s Oil return lines (full pipe section), < 0.17 m/s.
Vertical drops in the line > 1 m are to be avoided in order to prevent the formation of oil foam. In the case of bearing seals with sealing air, suitable venting of the bearing housing must be provided for. This can be done via the oil return pipe or by means of sufficiently sized vent filters, which will prevent the escape of oil vapour.
4.5.10.2 Layout of oil supply system
1 A 3 Figure 4-9
1 2 3
Layout of oil supply system
Oil return line Vent Vent holes
3BSM 008369, rev. E
4-23
The oil tank must have a condensed water separator and, if required by the ambient temperature, also a heater. Suitable inside protection against corrosion will enhance the prevention of oil contamination. Do not fit any equipment such as filters or similar in the return line as these will hinder the flow. The oil return line should ideally enter the oil tank above the oil level (A). However, should it submerge into the oil, then vent holes must be provided above the oil level to allow oil-borne air to escape from the pipe (B). The oil level in the tank must never, under any operating condition, be allowed to fall below the location of the oil suction line. Filters must block any particles larger than 15 25 m. When necessary, for process related reasons, switchable double filters must be used which can be cleaned during operation, i.e. without switching off the oil supply. Oil reservoirs The capacity of oil reservoirs should be approximately eight times the quantity delivered per minute. The lubricant content in small, very confined systems should not be less than five times this amount.Small plants should have a settling chamber permitting the air entrained in the oil to escape. If the return pipes which lead into the oil reservoir dip into the lubricant, vent holes shall be provided above the oil level (permitting the air entrained in the lubricant to escape). The suction pipe of the pump shall be adequately vented and provided with an oil level indicator. It shall be adequately distant from the bottom of the reservoir so as to prevent so as to prevent any desposits being sucked up. The oil reservoir shall have a sloping base for the oil to run off.

ABB will not accept any responsibility for oil leakage at the bearings when the above mentioned conditions have not been fulfilled.
4.5.10.3 Monitoring of the oil supply system

The oil supply to each bearing should be monitored by a flow indicator. If the oil flow falls below 70% of the nominal value the flow indicators should shut the motor down.
4.5.11 Bearing temperature monitoring

If the motor bearings are equipped with temperature monitors, the alarm and shutdown values are to be set according to the connection diagram.
4.5.12 Bearing insulation

When both bearings are insulated, it should be ensured that the short-circuiting cable at the Dend is connected (see outline drawing). In the case of anti-friction bearings ensure that all auxiliary connections to the bearings are insulated (only use original parts from the motor manufacturer!) 3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-24
NOTE: The jumper cable may only be connected to the non-short-circuiting position for measuring purposes.
4.6 Mounting the ventilation unit 4.6.1 AMB motors

Motors of the series AMB will normally be delivered with the ventilation unit already mounted. See section 8.2.4 on page 60 for dismantling and reassemble instructions.
4.6.2 AMC motors

For AMC motors the ventilation unit will be removed for transport. See section 8.2.4 on page 60 for dismantling and reassemble instructions.
4.6.3 Air-to-water cooler

Prior to commissioning, we recommend that the cooler be tested at the specified operating pressure to determine possible transport damage and to check for leakage. Tighten up any loose screws in the covers. After the leakage test the cooler can be connected up and vented. This is done by removing the vent plug from the connection-side water chamber and then slowly filling the cooler until bubble-free water is expelled from the vent hole. Screw the vent plug back into position. The cooler can then be put into operation. Only after this may the motor be started up.
4.7 Electrical connections

Work on the terminal box is to be carried out with care. It could contain sensitive equipment such as current transformers etc.
4.7.1 Insulation resistance

The insulation resistance of the winding is an indication of the condition of the insulation. The insulation resistance must be measured and documented before the motor is switched on for the first time (before connecting the cables).
4.7.1.1 Minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance

The minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance are:
3BSM 008369, rev. E
4-25
a)
For the stator winding: R1min (20C) 3x(1+Un) in M where Un = rated voltage of the motor in kV (line-to-line) For a wound rotor winding: R1min (20C) 1xUn in M; where Un = rated voltage of the rotor kV (line-to-line)
b)
c)
2000 M
For the resistance temperature detectors:
It is usual to apply a DC test voltage of 1000 to 5000 V. The insulation resistance varies with the winding temperature. A temperature rise of 12 K halves the value of the insulation resistance. When taking the measurement, in addition to the insulation resistance, the test voltage, the winding temperature and the time / date are also to be documented.
Rmin [M ] 50 40 30 20 10 10 20 30 40 50 60
UN [kV] 13.2 11.2 10.0 6.6 6.0 4.2 3.3
T amb [C]
Figure 4-10 Minimum values of insulation resistance for stator windings The insulation resistance is taken 1 min. after applying the test voltage. It is recommended to extend the measurement and also take the 10 min. reading to determine the polarization index (R10 min. / R1 min.). This data is very helpful at later diagnoses.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
4-26
Should the minimum permissible value not be obtained, then the winding must first be cleaned if this is necessary, and afterwards dried out.
Winding with Y-connection
DC Voltage supply (Megger)
Figure 4-11 Measuring the whole winding
Example: Measuring phase W (all phases are to be measured)
DC Voltage supply (Megger)
Figure 4-12 Phase-by-phase measurement
4.7.2 Cable penetration plate on the terminal box
1 3 4 5
Figure 4-13 Terminal box with cable penetration plate The terminal box is fitted with a separate cable penetration plate, which has to be adapted to the actual requirements of the plant (number and size of cable penetration). To remove the cable penetration plate the terminal box lid (3) must first be lifted off, to do this remove the earth strap (1) and bolts (2).
3BSM 008369, rev. E
4-27

Remove lid with care. Danger of bodily injury if lid is dropped. The lid is not normally hinged. Unscrew bolts (4) and remove the penetration plate (5).
4.7.3 Terminals, preparing for connection

The terminals may not be subjected to any forces from the weight of the incoming cables. Strain relief must be arranged external to the terminal box to prevent such forces acting on the terminals or the terminal box itself. After removing screws (4) the penetration plate (5) may be removed. NOTE: All electrical screwed connections accessible are to be checked and if necessary tightened up as specified. Always use a torque spanner.
4.7.4 Cleaning the terminals

Any dirt, oil or grease on the terminals is to be cleaned off using mineral spirits or another suitable solvent. Surface treated bar terminals (e.g. tinned, nickel or silver plated) may not be cleaned mechanically.
4.7.5 Measures to prevent oxidation and corrosion

The contact surfaces of electrical connections are to be treated, depending on the environmental conditions, as indicated in the table below:
Environment Indoors, dry environment Outdoors, humid or aggressive environment
Measures None Apply a light coating of vaseline using clean cloths
Table 4-1. Measures to prevent oxidation and corrosion Should another inhibitor be used, the manufacturers instructions are to be followed.
4.7.6 Stud terminals

Stud terminals are designed for a max. current of 400 A. The nominal torque for tightening the nuts is given in Tab. 4-2:
3BSM 008369, rev. E
4-28
Size of thread on stud M16
Tightening torque [Nm] 30 - 40
Table 4-2. Tightening torque for stud terminals
Figure 4-14 Stud terminal for max. 400 A / 11 kV (max. 2 cables per phase)
Figure 4-15 Stud terminal EEx e for max. 400 A / 11 kV (max. 1 cable per phase)
4.7.7 Bar terminals
Size of thread on stud M12 M16
Tightening torque [Nm] 40 80
Table 4-3. Tightening torque for dry or lightly greased bolts of property class 8.8.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
4-29
Figure 4-16 Bar terminal for max. 1600 A / 4.2 kV (max. 4 cables per phase)
Figure 4-17 Bar terminal for max. 2000 A / 11 kV (max. 4 cables per Phase)
4.7.8 Fully insulated connectors
1 3 4 2
Figure 4-18 Fully insulated connector for max. 400 A / 13.8 kV per connection
1 2 3 4 A B
Winding lead with connector fitted Connector for fitting to cable on site (supplied lose) Shrink sleeve, shrunk into place on site after bolting up Strain relief clamp Connectors as delivered Connectors ready for operation
Connecting up on site 1. 3BSM 008369, rev. E Drill out hole in connector (2) for accepting the cable, according to Tab. 4-4 4-30
2. 3. 4. 5.
Soft-solder field-side cable into the supplied connector (2) Slip shrink sleeve (3) over the cable. Fit and bolt the two connectors together. Move shrink sleeve (3) to its final position over the connection and shrink on with warm air of approx. 140 C Secure cable in the strain relief clamp (4).
Cable section in mm2 Hole diameter D in mm
70 11.3
95 13.5
120 15.2
150 16.7
185 18.4
240 21.1
300 23.7
400 27.0
Table 4-4.
4.7.9 Fastening the bolts for the terminal connectors
Size of thread M8
Tightening torque[Nm] 18 - 25
Table 4-5. Tightening torque for bolts for the terminal connectors
4.7.10 Earthing
WARNING - The motor housing must be earthed

The motor housing must be connected to the plant earthing system (for connection points on the motor see outline drawing). All potential equalizing cables between the motor housing and the parts fitted to it must be connected up. Any special (local) requirements are also to be observed!
4.7.11 Earth brushes

NOTE: The brush tracks on the shaft must be bare and clean. The brushes must not come into contact with solvents.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
4-31
Squirrelcage Motors AMB & AMC Chapter 5 Commissioning
Chapter 5 Commissioning
5.1 Sleeve bearings with forced oil lubrication

The bearings are connected to a separate oil supply system which must be in operation before the motor is started up until after it is has been switched off and come to rest. As a general rule the bearing oil inlet temperature must be between 20 C and 50 C.
5.2 Direction of rotation

Phase connections: Terminal designations according to IEC Recommendation 34-8: For clockwise rotation when facing onto the drive end of the motor (figure 5-1): L1-U1 / L2-V1 / L3-W1 For anti-clockwise rotation when facing onto the drive end of the motor (figure 5-2): L1-W1 / L2-V1 / L3-U1 A corresponding label will be fastened to the inside of the terminal box. The motor outline drawing will also show the planned direction of rotation.
U1
V1
W1
U1
V1
W1
L1 L2 L3
Figure 5-1 Clockwise rotation Figure 5-2 Anti-clockwise rotation
L1 L2 L3
3BSM 008369, rev. E
5-32
5.3 Air to water coolers
Figure 5-3
Figures of coolers
5.3.1 General
The coolers are provided with compensators to prevent the transfer of vibration between the cooler and the piping system. The agreed quality, quantity and inlet temperature of the cooling water must be maintained. Larger foreign bodies in the cooling water must be filtered out to prevent ingress into the cooler. The water inlet flange is the bottom one of the two. This ensures that the cooler remains full of water even after the system has been shut down. The cooling water flow rate should be regulated so that the required cooling capacity is attained at full load. The cooling capacity can be checked directly by measuring the cold air temperature (cold air entering into the motor), generally 40 C, or indirectly via the stator winding temperature. The set values for the sensors are given on the connection diagram.
5.3.2 Prevention of corrosion damage on air-to-water coolers

In order to avoid corrosion damage, care should be taken to ensure that the water quality and possible inhibitors or sacrificial anodes etc. are conform with that or those agreed upon in the order.
5.4 Starting frequency

During the starting phase, the motor will be subjected to thermal and mechanical stressing. Therefore, in order to avoid unnecessary damage the starting frequency agreed upon in the order should be adhered to. Any changes must be explicitly approved by the manufacturer.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
5-33
5.5 Starting, operation, shut-down

NOTE: Short power interruptions cause current and torque fluctuations. Should the supply voltage at reclosure be in phase-opposition to the residual voltage, this would mean high stressing for the gearbox and the driven equipment. This can be avoided by providing suitable protection, otherwise the whole shaft train must be suitably dimensioned for the stresses involved.
Step 1 2 3 4 5
Activity Switch off space heater Switch on separate lube-oil system for sleeve bearings Turn on water supply for air-to-water cooler Switch on fan-motor for ventilation unit Close stator circuit braker. (When the motor is to be started up via a starting transformer, then this must be interlocked with the circuit-breaker, so the motor can not be switched on when the starting transformer is in its operating position). Operation Open stator circuit breaker Set starting transformer to starting position Switch-off fan-motor on ventilation unit Turn off water supply to air-water cooler Turn off lube-oil supply to sleeve bearings Switch on space heater
Remarks When one is fitted For forced oil lubrication When one is fitted When one is fitted Motor starts
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Motor runs down When provided for starting When one is fitted When one is fitted For forced oil lubrication When one is fitted
5.6 Continuous monitoring during operation

The motor will be monitored during operation by the field monitoring system. For further inspections see Chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance. In case of anything unusual of arising, the motor should be switched off and the cause investigated in conformity with the trouble-shooting procedures given in Chapter 9 Trouble shooting.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
5-34
5.7 Check list

The following checklist and protocols should be completed during commissioning and returned to ABB together with the commissioning report after completed commissioning.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
5-35
5.7.1 Page 1
Customer: Site name: Serial number: Order number: Date: Name and company of responsible commissioning engineer:
First run up, date ..................................... Direction of rotation: clockwise (Seen from D-end) Direction of rotation: counterclockwise (Seen from D-end) No abnormal noise
Comments ............................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................
Second run up (to full speed), date ................................

Starting time ............................. s Retardation time .................. min Comments ............................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................................
Running unconnected, date ................................

Running of connected machine, date ................................

Motor data
Output: Frequency: Excitation: V kVA Hz A Power factor: Speed: Oil quality: Voltage: r/min Current: V A
3BSM 008369, rev. E
5-36
5.7.2 Page 2
Time Bearing temp. ( C)

o
Inlet Oil
Vibr. (mm/s, m)
Winding temp. (oC) max min
Cooling air/water m3/h

o
Comments Vibrations, noise, etc.
Dside
Nside
(oC)
(l/s)
Dside
Nside
3BSM 008369, rev. E
5-37
5.7.3 Page 3
Time (A)
Stator (cos) (V)
Load (MW)
Comments Vibrations, noise, etc.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
5-38
Squirrelcage Motors AMB & AMC Chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance
Chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance
6.1 General
Thorough and conscientious maintenance is the best foundation for high availability of the plant.
WARNING - High voltage

This work involves the main circuits of the motor normally connected to the high voltage supply net. Before you start to work: 1. Make sure the motor is disconnected from the high voltage net and the circuit breaker is locked in the open position so it not accidentally (or otherwise) can be closed during measurements. Note also that capacitors can contain dangerous voltages, so be sure to ground all details before you touch them.
2.
The maintenance plans presented in the following are based on ABBs many years of experience. The given time intervals are based on continuous trouble-free operation and are offered as reference values. It is recommended to draw up a maintenance plan tailored for the plant in question and to include deadlines. The following influential factors must be taken into consideration: Actual periods of operation Environmental conditions (e.g. dirt deposits) Loading, switching frequency.
Inspections given in the maintenance plans Table 6-4. should ideally be carried out by the same personnel to ensure that any deviations from the normal conditions will be recognized quickly. Regular plant inspection and recording of important operating quantities and events such as: Oil levels Earth fault monitoring Temperatures Noise, vibration, discolouring, odours.
afford valuable information when seeking the cause of a fault. It is essential that the cause of a fault (shutdown) is clarified before switching on again. Also in the case of abnormal operating conditions such as an alarm, a short-circuit, an overload etc., the cause should be determined and any corrective action necessary, carried out without delay. The actual maintenance work which is mostly carried out during planned periods of shutdown can be divided up as follows: 3BSM 008369, rev. E 6-39
Cleaning Replacing consumables Replacing wear and tear parts Elimination of recognized deficiencies.
6.2 Instrumentation
The set values for the monitoring instruments will normally have been agreed upon at the time of the order (see connection diagram). When this is not the case, then the values given in these instructions shall apply. The values are to be set during commissioning and may not be changed without first consulting the manufacturer.
6.3 Maintenance on sleeve bearings 6.3.1 Oil change

Oil qualities acc. to ABBs drawing Outline drawing, included in the binder Users Manual. The oil is to be changed: After a specified fixed interval of time (see lube label). Rule of thumb:, Oil-ring lubricated bearings, 8'000 hours Forced lubricated bearings, 20'000 hours Shorter intervals are necessary for frequent starting, high oil temperatures or excessive oil contamination.
Refer to the lube label for the oil change interval, viscosity, oil flow rate and quality Top up or change the oil only when the motor is at standstill.
3 Max. oil level during operation 1 Filling level 2 Min. oil level during operation
Figure 6-1 Oil level inspection at the sight glass
6.3.2 Oil ring

Correct functioning of the oil ring (i.e. uniform running and oil transport) can be checked at the top oil sight glass.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
6-40
6.3.3 Oil leakage

In case of oil leakage, replacement seals should be made ready for fitting during the next service.
6.3.4 Emergency running for motors with forced oil lubrication

Should the oil supply fail, the motor must be switched off immediately. All sleeve bearings are equipped with an oil ring which permits the motor to run down safely. If the process requires an emergency running time at rated speed, the manufacturer must be consulted.
6.3.5 Maintenance on a separate oil supply system (Lube oil or jacking oil supply)
If the motor manufacturers scope of supply includes a separate oil supply system to provide the motor with lube or jacking oil, then instructions for maintenance will be given in a separate document.
6.3.6 Maintenance plan for sleeve bearings

Every two years
Sleeve bearings
Check physical, chemical and mechanical properties of the lube oil. If the recommended lube oil change interval is to be increased, a regular check on the oil is to be carried out at least every 4 months. Check condition of bearing oil (discolouring, contamination) at sight glass. Filter if necessary. Determine cause and eliminate. Read off temperatures at the provided measuring points and record. Measure machine vibration, by means of provided sensors or a portable measuring instrument, and record. Measuring points: middle of bearing housing, horizontal and vertical (see section 6.5.3 on page 45). Check lube rings at top sight glasses for uniform running and oil transport. Check bearing seals for oil leakage and clean off any dirt deposits.
Before first commissioning
3BSM 008369, rev. E
Annually
Monthly
Weekly
Machine part
Maintenance or inspection work
During service
Quarterly
6-41
Every two years
Sleeve bearings, both insulated Sleeve bearings and separate oil supply system for lube or jacking oil
Check bearing shell insulation (see section 6.5.4 on page 47). Change oil. Change wear and tear parts. If bearing parts are changed, change the oil after running for 3 hours to remove any metal particles rubbed off during running in. Check for rust. (see Chapter 7 Servicing and cleaning).
After evaluation of the above periodic checks and inspections
Annually
Monthly
Weekly
Machine part
After indication from filter monitor (optical/electrical)
Separate oil supply system for lube or jacking oil
Clean filter on oil supply system. Check: - Oil supply system for proper functioning - Oil level and for loss oil on the system incl. piping and fittings. Check water piping for leakage. Check water pipes for deposits and possible signs of corrosion.
Oil-to-water cooler (when provided)
Table 6-1. Maintenance plan on sleeve bearings
6.4 Maintenance on anti-friction bearings

All data such as bearing nos., grease quantities and regreasing intervals are given on the lube labels fastened to the motor.
6.4.1 Validity of the regreasing intervals, conversion

The regreasing intervals are given for the longest possible maintenance interval. Regreasing may be carried out more frequently. In such a case the regreasing quantities are to be reduced proportionally. When the motor is to be connected to a central lubrication system with continuous regreasing, the grease quantities are to be converted proportionally. When the place of operation is very dirty the regreasing intervals are to be shortened. When the bearing temperature is higher than 70 C, the regreasing interval must be halved for every excessive 15K.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
During service
Quarterly
6-42
6.4.2 Regreasing procedure

Regreasing may only be carried when the motor is running. Excessive grease will be guided to the used grease container by the grease regulator thus preventing overgreasing of the bearing. A temporary increase in bearing temperature may be observed during the regreasing procedure. This increase can be avoided by injecting the grease into the bearing slowly. The used grease container should be checked at each regreasing and emptied when necessary.
6.4.3 Choice of lubricating grease

The bearings will have been packed with lithium-soap grease in the factory. Only greases of the same soap basis may be used for regreasing. Should it be necessary to change the grease quality (e.g. because of lower ambient temperatures) the bearings must be dismantled and washed out, refer to separate section on service. In case of doubt we recommend seeking advice from the grease manufacturer.
Lubricants
When regreasing, use only special grease with the following properties: good quality grease with lithium complex soap and with mineral- or PAO-oil. base oil viscosity 100-150 cST at 40oC. consistency NLGI grade 2 or 3 temperature range -30oC - + 120oC, continuously
Grease with the correct properties is available from all the major lubricant manufacturers. ABB grease corresponds to: Elf BP Esso Shell SKF Mobil Oil Epexelf 2 Energrease L S 2 Beacon 2 Alvania Grease G3 Alfalub LGMT 2 Mobilux EP2
3BSM 008369, rev. E
6-43
6.4.4 Maintenance plan for anti-friction bearings on horizontal and vertical motors
Every two years
Anti-friction bearings
Measure temperature at the provided measuring points and record. Measure motor vibration using the installed instruments or a portable meter. Measuring points/directions: On horizontal motors, on bearing housing and vertical. On vertical motors, on bearing endshield in two directions. Take measurements of the bearing condition by the shock-pulse method (SPM) and record. Always do this at the same speed and operating conditions. (See section 6.5.2 on page 45). Regrease the bearings. (Only when the motor is running, see lube labels on the motor). Check bearing seals for loss of grease and clean off any dirt deposits. Replace wear and tear parts (bearings, sliding or rubbing seals etc.). Wash out bearing covers, labyrinth seals etc. and renew grease filling. Check for rust. (See Chapter 7 Servicing and cleaning).
Anti-friction bearings, when both insulated.
Check insulation on bearing endshields. (See section 6.5.4 on page 47).
Table 6-2. Maintenance plan for anti-friction bearings Observe regreasing intervals given on the general arrangement drawing. In case of bearing temperatures >70 C and/or very dusty environments, the intervals for regreasing the bearings and for emptying the used grease container must be shortened. When, for process reasons, a motor is frequently at standstill, regreasing must be done at least once per year. This is made necessary by the useful life of the grease, possible condensation in the bearing enclosures etc.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
Annually
Monthly
Weekly
Machine part
During service
Quarterly
6-44
6.5 Bearing monitoring instruments and bearing insulation

The set values will normally have been agreed upon at the time of placing the order (see connection diagram).
6.5.1 Bearing temperatures

When not agreed otherwise the set values for bearing temperature monitoring are:
Alarm Shutdown 90 C 100 C
A sudden increase in bearing temperature compared with the normal operating temperature is an indication of the development of damage. If necessary, the cause must be investigated with the motor at standstill.
6.5.2 Bearing condition monitoring by the shock-pulse method (SPM, only for anti-friction bearings)
All anti-friction bearings are equipped with measuring nipples, as a standard, for taking readings with portable equipment. The measurements pick up the shock-pulses emitted when the rolling elements pass over an unevenness in the raceway. The measuring equipment converts this value into a so-called spike pulse with the unit SV (= Shock Value). The speed and the bearing diameter are decisive to allocate the measured values to one of the ranges good, average or poor. The SPM method is intended for trend measurement. Evaluation is only meaningful when the records show the initial values taken during the trial runs in the plant and those of following measurements taken periodically at the same speed and load conditions. (Never take measurements directly after regreasing). NOTE: During the trial runs, the values good and average are evaluated as being acceptable. After a certain running-in time the values can improve. Starting with the initial values, further measurements indicate the trend. A rapid worsening is a deciding factor in determining the time for a pending bearing change. It follows, that a bearing condition diagnosis based on one single measurement can not be made with SPM, but periodic comparison measurements must be taken under the same conditions, whereby the differences in obtained values are the criteria for evaluation.
6.5.3 Bearing housing and shaft vibration

The limit values for bearing housing acc. to section 6.5.3.1 and shaft vibration acc. to section 6.5.3.2. These values are not valid for motors driving reciprocating compressors, diesel generators or machines mounted on a foundation having a low natural frequency. For these machines, values must be agreed upon with the customer at the time of the order.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
6-45
6.5.3.1 Bearing housing vibration

The applicable quantity is the rms value of the vibration velocity measured on the bearing housing.
Veff Alarm Trip 4.5 mm/s 7.1 mm/s
6.5.3.2 Shaft vibration

The applicable quantity is the peak-to-peak value of the vibration amplitude of the shaft. The shaft vibration is to be measured directly beside the bearing.
s(p-p) Alarm Trip s (p-p) = 9000 ( n )
[]
s (p-p) = 13200 ( n ) []
n = speed[1/min]
Speed
Alarm [m]
Trip [m] 381 341 311 269 241 220
Alarm [mills] 10.2 9.1 8.4 7.2 6.5 5.9
Trip [mills] 15.0 13.4 12.2 10.6 9.5 8.7
1200 1500 1800 2400 3000 3600
260 232 212 184 164 150
Table 6-3. Peak-to-peak values of shaft vibration amplitude in m and mills. mills = [inch/1000]
3BSM 008369, rev. E
6-46
6.5.4 Bearing insulation

This work involves the main circuits of the motor normally connected to the high voltage supply net. Before you start to work: 1. Make sure the motor is disconnected from the high voltage net and that the circuit breaker is locked in the open position so it not accidentally (or otherwise) can be closed during the measurements. Note also that capacitors can contain dangerous voltages, so be sure to earth all details before you touch them.
2.
When both bearings are insulated, the condition of the bearing insulation can be measured on the assembled motor. When taking the measurement, the short-circuit across the insulation must be opened (switch jumper cable from steel bolt to insulation bolt). Measuring instrument: megger Evaluation: no signal When only one bearing is insulated, the condition can only be assessed when the bearing or bearing endshield is dismantled.
6.6 Checking the cooling elements of heat exchangers

Heavy deposits in the cooling tubes can considerably reduce the cooling effect, i.e. the heat transfer. Depending on the degree of contamination, annular inspections could be necessary. In the case of water coolers, if there is evidence of corrosion, the water analysis should be repeated and replacement parts considered for a possible spare parts order.
6.6.1 Checking and replacing the sacrificial anodes on water coolers

Checking and replacing sacrificial anodes is described in section 7.2.3.5 on page 53.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
6-47
6.7 Maintenance plan for cage-induction motors

during service every 2 years
quarterly
Temperature monitoring of the stator winding and cooling air Stator winding
Follow up of temperatures at the provided measuring points (e.g. RTDs) by monitoring system
Measurement of insulation resistance (see section 6.5.4 , Page 47). A winding diagnosis is recommendable after 3 years. Refer to maintenance plans Table 6-1. , Page 42 and Table 6-2. , Page 44. Listen for unusual machine noise or changes in noise emission (e.g. rubbing or knocking noises). Check all accessible places for rust (see Chapter 7 Servicing and cleaning).
monthly
weekly
Machine part
annually
Bearings Complete Machine
Connections for power supply, instrumentation and control Earthing brushes (when such are fitted) Air-to-water heat exchanger
Check all cables and wires, and their connections for condition, fastening and cleanliness.
Check extent of wear, ease of movement in the holders, and brush pressure. Clean contact surfaces of brushes and shaft with a fine polishing cloth. Check piping and cooler for leakage. Check inside of cooling tubes for possible deposits or signs of corrosion (depending on water contamination and water treatment). Check sacrificial anodes (depending on water contamination and water treatment).
Air-to-air heat exchanger Other ventilation units (e.g. IPW24 weather protection units).
Check inside of cooling tubes for deposits. Check filter for degree of contamination. Clean or replace filter after filter monitor responds (depending on contamination of ambient air).
3BSM 008369, rev. E
6-48
Coupling
Check state of coupling alignment and record values. Maintenance on coupling according to the manufacturers instructions. Should the vibration level increase carry out check immediately or decrease maintenance interval.
monthly
weekly
Machine part
Foundation Fastening bolts Fan-motor on ventilation unit, when such is fitted
Check machine foundation bolts for tightness. Check for tightness and condition of locking elements. Regrease antifriction bearings. Check for rust and cleanliness (see section 7.1 on page 50).
Table 6-4. Maintenance plan for cage-induction motors
3BSM 008369, rev. E
during service
every 2 years
quarterly
annually
6-49
Squirrelcage Motors AMB & AMC Chapter 7 Servicing and cleaning
Chapter 7 Servicing and cleaning
7.1 Servicing
Well planned and carefully carried out servicing helps to maintain high availability of the plant and to avoid consequential damages.
7.1.1 Dismantling and reassembly

Detailed information on dismantling and reassembly are presented in Chapter 8, Dismantling and reassembly, page 56.
7.1.2 Service sleeve bearings

Before filling the bearings with new oil, flush them out with a halogen-free solvent (e.g. SANGOJOL, VARSOL or WHITE SPIRIT). Following recommissioning, a bearing inspection after running for three hours is still the best means of preventing damage and should not be ignored. (Refer to chapter 8, for instructions on dismantling and reassembling). The important thing is to carry out servicing at the right time. The first service should be carried out after either 500 starts or 8000 hours of operation, but not later than two years after commissioning. Afterwards, servicing is recommended at intervals of 2 to 4 years. Services should be planned to utilize normal operational shut-downs: Draw up the service plan in good time with ABB and if necessary with the insurance company. The records taken and the observations made during regular maintenance serve as an important basis for this. Reserve necessary workshop capacity. Ensure necessary tools and equipment are ready. Determine requirements for possible replacement parts, complement stock of spare parts.
7.1.2.1 Inspection of the sliding surfaces of sleeve bearings

The condition of the contact surfaces indicates whether the bearing shells were correctly fitted and are matched to the forces arising during operation. Indication is also given as to whether the oil supply is sufficient. Remove any imperfections in the load-bearing surfaces using a scraper (do not use emery cloth!). Clean load-bearing surfaces until a white cloth remains clean!
7.1.2.2 Oil rings

Check roundness of oil rings with values given in Table 7-1 on page 51.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
7-50
Inside diameter of oil ring [mm] > 140 - 200 > 200 - 280 > 280 - 400 > 400 - 500 > 500 - 600 > 600 - 760
Permissible out-of-round [mm] *) (In accordance with DIN 322) 0.5 mm 0.6 mm 0.7 mm 0.8 mm 0.9 mm 1.0 mm
Table 7-1. *) Average value of two measurements displaced by 90
7.1.3 Service of anti-friction bearings

If a lubricating grease of another soap base is to be used then the bearings must be washed out with a halogen-free solvent (e.g. SANGOJOL, VARSOL or WHITE SPIRIT) prior to filling with the new lubricating grease. This requires dismantling the bearings, refer to chapter 8, for instructions on dismantling and reassembling. After the bearing components have been cleaned, they should be greased immediately to prevent corrosion. A rise in bearing temperature for a brief time after relubricating is insignificant as the grease regulator quickly eliminates the initial over- presure and ejects excessive grease.
7.1.4 Reconditioning work during servicing

Cleaning. Remove any signs of rust or burrs (in particular on the shaft seats, bearing shoulders and bore of bearing endshields) by brushing off, or rubbing off using a whet stone (oil stone) and then polish over. Check functional dimensions and if necessary correct by means of a suitable resurfacing process (e.g. metal spraying). Where painting is not allowed, give blank surfaces a coating of a suitable rust inhibitor, and protect them from moisture during possible periods of storage. Replace damaged wear and tear parts such as bearings, seals etc.
7.2 Cleaning 7.2.1 Mechanical dry cleaning

As a basic rule a mechanical process (scraper, vacuum cleaner with a soft nozzle or brush, compressed air) should be carried out first. When using compressed air, care is to be taken that dirt is not blown into the windings.
7.2.2 Wet cleaning with cleaning agents

Wet cleaning should only be carried out after an initial dry cleaning to avoid dirt from being transported into the windings which would be potentially dangerous. 3BSM 008369, rev. E 7-51
WARNING - Danger of fire

Some technical liquids are very flammable. Use them with care. Do not smoke or have a flame near the working place. Have a person prepared with a fire extinguisher at the working place during the work. Also use a breathing mask during the task. As the cleaning agent will become contaminated by dipping in the brush, prepare only small quantities and replace as necessary. Prepare plenty of small, clean and lint-free cleaning cloths. Working on small areas in turn, apply the cleaning agent using a hard brush and then immediately wipe over with a cleaning cloth. Change the cloths regularly.
7.2.3 Cleaning the air-to-water cooler

7.2.3.1 Cleaning interval
The degree of deposit build-up on the heat-exchanging surfaces of the cooler will depend on the cleanliness and composition of the coolants. Heavy deposits can considerably affect the cooling capacity making cleaning essential. It is therefore recommended to inspect the cooler periodically and to clean when necessary to prevent any deposits building up to form thick hard layers or even complete blocking of the tubes. The deposits can be removed either mechanically or chemically, whereby mechanical cleaning is the preferred method with consideration to corrosion. Should there be any signs of corrosion, the water analysis should be repeated and the results considered when ordering spare parts.
7.2.3.2 Dismantling
Drain the cooler and connected piping. Remove the bolts from the pipe flanges and those from the cooler fastening flanges, and withdraw the cooling element from the cooler housing. The water chamber covers can be removed to enable cleaning the insides of the cooling tubes. When reassembling, ensure that the joint faces are clean, free of grease and dry. It is not permitted to use sealing pastes or compounds etc. Clean the gaskets and ensure that they are not damaged. Tighten up the bolts working on diagonally opposite pairs.
7.2.3.3 Cleaning the inside of the cooling tubes

Loose dirt can be flushed out by increasing the flow velocity (increasing the pressure up to the test pressure). Soft deposits can be removed by using a nylon tube brush. Fasten the brush to a rod and push through the tubes. High pressure water has proven to be effective for removing hard crusted deposits. High pressure equipment can operate at pressures of up to 500 bar.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
7-52
Chemical cleaning agents must be chosen with great caution giving due consideration to corrosion. It is advisable to consult the supplier in advance and obtain his confirmation that the proposed product will not harm the tubes. Cleaning of the air water cooler to cooling coil.
7.2.3.4 Cleaning the outside of the cooling tubes

The following methods can be applied depending on the kind of dirt deposits involved: Blowing down with compressed air. Swill with warm water or steam, adding a cleaning agent if the dirt is oily or sooty. Spray with high pressure water: Caution, adjust the pressure so that the cooling fins will not be bent.

Adjust the pressure so that cooling fins will not be bent.
7.2.3.5 Sacrificial anodes (expendable anodes) for air-water coolers

When metals of different electrochemical potential are galvanically joined together, the presence of an electrolyte, such as sea water for example, results in the formation of a galvanic element and the electrochemical degradation of the baser metal. Controlled degradation of a sacrificial anode prevents this degradation and produces a protective coating on those parts made of copper alloy.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
7-53
Figure 7-1 Sacrifial anode The pure iron sacrificial anodes (figure 7-1) are screwed into the bottom part of the cooler. They should be checked at regular intervals, at least once per year. The cooler element need not be emptied for this inspection, but the water pressure should be reduced. The surface of an active sacrificial anode will show signs of its own material degradation and also deposits of corrosion products. In case of excessive corrosion the water analysis should be repeated. When the sacrificial anodes are dirty they must be cleaned. When ordering replacement sacrificial anodes quote the motor type and serial number. Any dirt accumulated during transport or storage is to be thoroughly cleaned off prior to fitting.
7.3 Stocking of spare parts

The following is a recommendation for the stocking of spare parts depending on the machine type and its design. This low investment can often prevent minor defects from developing into a more serious situation. For all kinds of machines, depending on its design 1 Set of bearing shells incl. oil rings and seals 1 Set of anti-friction bearings (type designation engraved in bearing) 1 Set of air filters 1 Set of earthing brushes and their holders Sacrificial anodes.
In the case of a single motor for a very important drive system or when there are several identical motors in the plant, the following additional spare parts are also recommended: 1 Spare rotor 1 Spare slide-in stator 1 Spare slipring.
Orders for spare parts should be directed to our responsible representative quoting the following data: 1. Motor for which the parts are intended.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
7-54
2. 3.
Type designation and serial number of the machine. (This data is given on the motor rating plate. Please copy this data very carefully in order to avoid incorrect deliveries). Quantities and names of the desired spare parts, Item Number. (when such is given) or drawing or sheet number.
This data listed under points 1 3 is still to be given, even when spare parts are being ordered based on a submitted example, otherwise it can be difficult to determine where the parts belong. The motor type designation and serial number should also be quoted in all correspondence. Example for a spare parts order or request for quotation: Machine type and Serial number.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
7-55
Squirrelcage Motors AMB & AMC Chapter 8 Dismantling and reassembly
Chapter 8 Dismantling and reassembly
8.1 Safety instructions

When carrying out any work on electrical conductors the local rules and regulations are to be observed. Non-observance of these could result in severest bodily injury or to loss of life. Prior to removing protection covers, ventilation units, bearing endshields etc. the following points are to be conscientiously carried out: 1. 2. 3. Switch off all circuits feeding the motor such as the main power supply, auxiliary systems for the monitoring equipment and any accessories fitted. Ensure all power supplies to the motor are dead and secured against unauthorized reconnection. Disconnect the cables at the motor for the main power supply, monitoring equipment, any accessories fitted and earthing.
8.2 Dismantling
First of all: uncouple the motor remove the holding-down bolts and any dowel pins fitted.
8.2.1 Coupling hub with a feather key

The coupling hub is to be removed cold using a puller. When necessary, it can be flame heated to ease removal.
8.2.2 Coupling hub with a cylindrical shrink fit

1. 2. Fit studs (1) and holding plate (2). Connect all the tapped oil-injection holes in the hub to the pump with the high-pressure hoses (5).
3BSM 008369, rev. E
8-56
NOTE: Do not damage the cone seals! Under no circumstances may the tapped oil-injection holes in the coupling hub be recut.

Support the coupling hub in the crane slings in such a way that it can not tip and slip out. 3. 4. 5. Place a drip tray underneath the coupling hub. Inject oil, ISO VG 68 (68 mm2/s at 40 C), until the oil slots are full. Maintain a constant pressure of max 1200 to 2000 bar at the middle connection, when there is one, otherwise at the outer connection. When the pressure begins to fall, maintain the max. pressure also at the other connections. After about 10 to 15 min oil will emerge from each end of the shrink fit. Change oil type to ISO VG 150 and repeat the whole procedure. Waiting time, at least 20 min. Coupling hub with plain cylindrical shrink fit Begin the removal process by producing a force of 45 t using the pump (8). Gradually increase the force to max 65 t within 10 to 15 min. When the coupling hub begins to move, continuously pump in more oil to maintain the full pressure and removal occurs in one swift movement without interruption. In case of oil leakage, try changing to cylinder oil, or clean the joint areas with acetone and seal with Araldite (AV 121 N).
6. 7.
5 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stud Holding plate Hydraulic jack Oil pump High-pressure hose Pump support Sling Manometer
2 3
Figure 8-1
8.
Coupling hub with a stepped cylindrical shrink fit Begin the removal process by injecting oil into the connection (6) using the oil pump (5). This will force the coupling hub to move axially. Removal must occur in one smooth movement without interruption. The oil pumps (1) must be maintained at full pressure
3BSM 008369, rev. E
8-57
during the whole removal process.
7 2
7 2 4
1 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Oil pump High-pressure hose Pump support Sling Oil pump (pneumatic or motor driven) Connection nipple Manometer
Figure 8-2
NOTE: If the stroke of the hydraulic jack is not long enough to pull the hub off in one single operation, then interrupt the process while the last oil slot is still on the shaft (approx. 70 mm of hub length). Insert a spacer and pull off the remaining length of hub without further interruption. NOTE: The pump (5) must be able to produce a pressure of at least 1000 bar.
8.2.3 Coupling hub with a tapered shrink fit

1. Loosen shaft-end nut, or locking device, so far to afford sufficient clearance for axial movement of the coupling hub. Insert a rubber or wooden spacer between coupling hub and the stop nut to avoid damage of the thread in the nut.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
8-58

Shaft-end nut, or locking device, must never be completely removed because the coupling hub can suddenly and unexpectedly break from its seat! 2. 3. 4. 5. Connect injection hole, in the hub, to the oil pump (3) by means of the high-pressure hose (2). Place a drip tray underneath the coupling hub. Inject oil, ISO VG 68 (68 mm2/s at 40 C), until the oil slots are full. Maintain a constant pressure of max 1200 to 2000 bar at the middle connection, when there is one, otherwise at the outer connection. When the pressure starts to fall maintain the max. pressure also at the other connections. After about 10 to 15 min oil will emerge from each end of the shrink fit. Maintain max oil pressure (1200 to 2000 bar) until the coupling hub slides up to its limit of axial movement. In case of too much oil leakage, try changing to cylinder oil, or clean the joint areas with acetone and seal with Araldite (AV 121 N).
6.
1 2 3 4 5
Coupling hub High-pressure hose Oil pump Manometer Pump support
Figure 8-3
3BSM 008369, rev. E
8-59
8.2.4 Removing the ventilation unit from a horizontal motor

8.2.4.1 Air-to-water cooler
Drain cooling elements and piping. Disconnect flanges.
8.2.4.2 Air-to-air cooler
Figure 8-4 When provided, dismantle noise damping units from air inlet (1) and air outlet (2).
8.2.4.3 Motors type AMB
AMB
6 3 2 1 5
Figure 8-5 1. 3BSM 008369, rev. E Dismantle cover (1) and air-guide ring (2). Remove circlip (5). 8-60
2. 3.
Flame-heat fan (3) and pull off using an extractor. Loosen 4 nuts (6) and remove fan cowling (4).
8.2.5 Weather protection units

8.2.5.1 All ventilation units

The ventilation unit is very heavy.
AMB
AMC
2 3 1 3 1 2 4
Figure 8-6 Remove 4 fastening bolts (1) and washers (2) and lift off cooler with the crane. Check seal (3), replace if necessary. Seal must be perfectly seated.
8.2.6 Removing the ventilation unit from a vertical motor

8.2.6.1 Air-to-water cooler
3 2 4
1 6 5
Figure 8-7 3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-61
1. 2. 3.
Remove cover (1) and air-guide ring (2). Loosen bolts (3) on tension element (4) and pull off fan (5). Loosen nuts (6) and take off fan cowling (7).
3 4 1 2
Figure 8-8

The unit is very heavy. 4. 5. Sling cooler (4) on crane and unscrew 4 fastening bolts (1). Remove washers (2) and lift away cooler.
W a rn in
g s ig n
Figure 8-9 6. Before turning motor to the horizontal position lock rotor axially by means of locking screws.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
8-62
Instructions for turning the motor are given in section 3.4.
8.2.7 Weather protection unit 8.2.8 Dismantling anti-friction bearings on horizontal motors
D and N ends
7D 10D 8D 9D 11D 6D
5D 6D 5N 10N 12N 2N 1N 4N 3N
N-Lager D-Lager
2D 12D 4D 1D 13D 13N
14N
Figure 8-10 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove circlips 1D, 1N. Dismantle labyrinth covers 2D, 2N or cover plate 3N. Pull off labyrinth rings 4D, 4N cold using an extractor. If necessary flame-heat to ease removal. Remove bearing covers 5D, 5N. Unscrew bearing endshield fastening screws and pull off bearing endshields 6D, 6N incl. outer rings of roller bearing. Pull off inner ring of roller bearing cold using an extractor. If necessary flame-heat to ease removal.
Only D-end 7. 8. Loosen bolts 11D and remove bearing ring 7D incl. spacer rings (2 pcs.) 8D. Pull off at ball bearing 9D cold using an extractor. If necessary flame-heat to ease removal.
D + N ends 9. Remove bearing covers 10D, 10N from the shaft.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
8-63
8.2.9 Dismantling anti-friction bearings from vertical motors

AMB 560 AMB 630 , 710
9 5 6 4 2 7 8 10 7
3 1
Figure 8-11 Top bearing (N-end) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn motor to horizontal position (see Chapter 3.4 ). Remove cover (1). Remove ring (2) and 2 half-rings (3). Pull off balance disc (4) cold using an extractor. If necessary flame-heat to ease removal. Unscrew fastening bolts from cover (5) and pull off bearing endshield. Pull off angular contact ball bearing (7) cold using an extractor (one on motors type AMB560 and 2 on larger motors). If necessary flame-heat to ease removal.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
8-64
Bottom bearing
15D 10D 9D 6D 13D 2D

Figure 8-12 1. Same as Dismantling anti-friction bearing from horizontal motors.
4D
11D
5D
NOTE: Do not lose bearing prestress springs 15D!
8.2.10 Dismantling sleeve bearings
3 4 4b 5 4a 7
12)
10
12) 4b 4a
13) 2 13) 1
11 6
1. Cover 2. Seal cover 3. Upper half bearing housing 4. Bearing seal (4a and 4b) 5. Upper half bearing shell 6. Lower half bearing shell 7. Lube ring Figure 8-13 3BSM 008369, rev. E
8. Lower half bearing housing 9. Motor seal 10. Spring 11. Bearing endshield 12. Stopper 13. Oil drain hole
8-65
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Drain off oil. Remove the cover (1) or the seal carrier (2). Remove the bolts in the upper half of the bearing housing (3) and lift the upper half away. Remove the springs (10) on each bearing seal (4a,b) and remove the bearing seal. Remove the bolts from the upper half of the bearing shell (5) and disconnect the earthing cable. Insert a lifting eyes and carefully lift the upper half of the bearing shell away.

The unit is very heavy. 7. 8. 9. Loosen the bolts holding together the lube ring (7) and remove the two halves (the lube ring is made of brass in two halves, held together with bolts and cylindrical pins). In order not to damage the bottom half of the bearing shell during removal, the rotor must be carefully raised until the shaft just touches the bore of the motor seal (9). Attach a lifting eye into the lower half of the bearing shell and draw the assembly toward you so that is slides around the journal. Insert lifting eyes in the top of the bearing shell and carefully lift lower bearing shell away. See figure 8-14.
Step 1 Figure 8-14
Step 2
Step 3

The unit is very heavy. 10. Screw eye bolt into bearing endshield (11), remove the bolts and lift carefully the bearing endshield away by using a crane. 11. Remove the motor seal (9).
8.2.11 Space heater

1. 2. 3BSM 008369, rev. E On machines with 6 poles or more, an air guide ring is fitted, which must be removed. Remove space heater. 8-66
NOTE: The space heater can also be removed without taking off the bearing endshield. Remove access cover (1) and work from the side of the motor.
Figure 8-15 Removing the space heater
8.2.11.1 Rotor withdrawal

The rotor is very heavy. NOTE: Do not damage the core or winding. Insert presspahn in stator bore. 1. 2. 3. 4. Withdraw rotor with the help of an extension pipe (1). Inside diameter of pipe must be matched to the shaft diameter. Protect shaft. Before removing the internal fan, mark its circumferential location on the fan carrier ring (so not to introduce unbalance at re-assembly). For AMC motors, mark fans D and N. Remove N-end fan before withdrawing the rotor. Do not interchange fans at reassembly!
3BSM 008369, rev. E
8-67
Figure 8-16
8.3 Reassembly
Reassemble the motor following the instructions given for dismantling in the reverse sequence. (Rotor withdrawal Section 8.2.10 )
8.3.1 Fitting the air guide rings

2
Figure 8-17 AMB with shaft-mounted fan

1 2 Air-guide ring Fastening screws
Figure 8-18 AMB 2-pole

3 4 Air-guide-ring (D+N) Bearing endshields (D+N)
3BSM 008369, rev. E
8-68
6 7 2 1 3 5 2 1 4
Figure 8-19 1. 2. 3. 4.
AMC
Ensure all bolts inside the motor are properly tightened up and provided with their original locking elements. In the case of AMC motors pay particular attention to the direction of rotation. Do not interchange the fans. Carefully insert rotor (see rotor withdrawal). Fit ventilation unit.
8.3.2 Assembling anti-friction bearings
D-End
N-End
Figure 8-20 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 3BSM 008369, rev. E Normally the bearings will be replaced by new ones. Wash out bearing cover. Carry out dimensional check on shaft and bore of bearing endshield. Check seats for possible damage. When necessary smooth imperfections using emery paper (coarseness P220). Apply a light coating of oil to shaft and bore of bearing inner ring (only fill pores). 8-69
6. 7. 8. 9.
Apply a coating of Wevopat 2000 to all seatings and spigot faces. Grease quality for packing out and relubrication. Clean lube holes in the bearing cover and bearing endshield. Important: Inject grease through the lube channels until clean grease is discharged. Fill bearing cover with grease and slide onto shaft: On vertical motors fix spring in inner cover with grease.
10. Heat bearing to 115 C in an oil bath and slide onto shaft. Flame-heat labyrinth and fit into place.

Temperatures above 120 C damage the bearings. When necessary, exchange the O-ring (1) (Figure 8-21). In the case of angular contact bearings, pay particular attention to correct location (Figure 8-22).
11. Fill grooves in the labyrinth cover with special grease USBB 312 and fit parts.
Figure 8-21
Figure 8-22
3BSM 008369, rev. E
8-70
8.3.3 Assembling sleeve bearings

Before beginning, ensure that the shaft surfaces and the bearing components are clean. When necessary exchange worn parts. 1. Assemble the motor seal (9) to the bearing endshield (11). Apply a thin coat of sealing compound (WEVOPAT) to the contact surfaces between motor seal and bearing endshield. Tightening torque according to table below:
Bearing size Tightening torque (Nm) 9 89 11 89 14 215 18 420 22 725 28 1450
2.
Assemble the bearing endshield to the motor housing. Apply a thin coat of sealing compound (WEVOPAT) to the contact surfaces between bearing endshield and the motor housing.

The unit is very heavy. 3. Assemble the lower half of the bearing housing (8) and the bearing endshield. Apply a thin coat of sealing compound (WEVOPAT) to the contact surfaces between bearing housing and the bearing endshield. Tightening torque according to table in point 1. In order not to damage the lower half of the bearing shell during assembling, the rotor must be carefully raised until the shaft just touches the bore of the motor seal (9). Apply coating of oil (bearing lube oil) to faces of spherical seat and bearing contact surfaces. Insert lifting eyes in the lower bearing shell over and onto the rotor shaft. Hold onto the lifting eye and allow the shell to glide around the journal until the lower shell is inserted. See figure 8-23.
4. 5.
Step 1 Figure 8-23
Step 2
Step3
3BSM 008369, rev. E
8-71

The unit is very heavy. 6. 7. 8. Lower the rotor shaft carefully into the bearing shell. Check the distance between the bearing journal and the bearing shell with a feeler gauge on front and rear end of the shell on both sides. Assemble the lube ring. Apply Loctice to the bolts and tighten. Tightening torque according to table below:
Bearing size Tightening torque(Nm) 9 11 1.4 14 18 22 2.7 28
9.
Oil shaft and bearing shell top-half (5) and set onto shaft.
10. Connect the earth cable. 11. Insert the bolts and tighten the bolts with a torque wrench. NOTE: Check location of stop to prevent the bearing seal from turning. See figure 8-13. 12. Coat joint faces and assemble the inner bearing seal (4b). Check location of the oil drain hole (13) and the stopper (12) to prevent turning. NOTE: Identification marks on the top and bottom shell halves must be identical and on the same side. 13. Hand tighten joint-face fastening bolts in turn, working in a cross-wise sequence. 14. Clean the upper part of the bearing housing and apply thin coat of oil to the spherical bearing seat.

The unit is very heavy. 15. Clean the horizontal joint of the upper and lower bearing housing carefully and apply a thin coat of the sealing compound WEVOPAT. 16. Coat the contact surfaces between enshield and the upper bearing housing. 17. Tighten up flange bolts in top-half of bearing housing with torque specified in table below. Lock bolts with Loctite.
3BSM 008369, rev. E
8-72
Bearing size Tightening torque (Nm)
9 89
11 89
14 215
18 420
22 725
28 1450
18. Tighten up joint-face fastening bolts, in turn working in a cross-wise sequence, with the torques given in table under point 17. 19. Prepare outer bearing seals as for the inner ones and set onto shaft, fit seal-carrier halves (2). Tightening torque according to the table below.
Bearing size Tightening Torque (Nm) 9 11 10.5 14 18 22 26 28
8.4 Recommended tightening torque for bolts on the motor

Recommended tightening torque for bolts, property class 8.8, slightly coated with oil. NOTE: Do not use Molybdenum di-sulphide
Bolt size Torque (Nm) (lbft)
M8 22.5 16.6
M 10 45 33
M 12 79 58
M 16 190 140
Bolt size Torque (Nm) (lbft)
M 20 400 295
M 24 690 510
M 30 1390 1022
M 36 2450 1800
3BSM 008369, rev. E
8-73
Squirrelcage Motors AMB & AMC Chapter 9 Trouble shooting
Chapter 9 Trouble shooting
9.1 Operational faults on cage-induction motors

Instructions for determining the cause of abnormal behaviour or fault conditions on cageinduction motors and proposed corrective measures. Should abnormal behaviour arise when starting or operating the motor, the cause should be determined and eliminated immediately, whereby prompt action can often avoid serious damage. In case of phenomena which can not be satisfactorily explained, we and our sales offices are at your disposal for further clarification. The following lists are offered as guidelines for trouble shooting.

The motor must be isolated from the power supply system prior to carrying out any investigations. Even when switched off at the stator switch, previous isolation from the power supply system is still necessary.
Fault Motor does not start, no noise
Possible cause of fault Interruptions in at least two of the supply lines No voltage
Corrective action Check fuses, supply cables and terminal connections Check supply cables Check supply cable and repair Correct driven equipment. Uncouple motor and test at no-load (Pay attention to starting time and axial guidance) Measure supply voltage Check supply cables Inspect rotor
Motor does not start, hums Motor will not start under load, normal magnetic noise
Interruption in one supply line Load torque too high
Supply voltage too low Motor runs at no-load, stalls under load Break in a supply cable after start-up Rotor bars broken, sparking in air-gap Soldered joints between bars and cage rings loose (an ammeter in the stator circuit indicates periodic fluctuations
3BSM 008369, rev. E
9-74
Fault Motor overheats even at noload
Possible cause of fault Stator wrongly connected (e.g. delta instead of star) Supply voltage too high Insufficient cooling as a result of blocked air passages Wrong direction of rotation for motors fitted with unidirectional fans (angled blades)
Corrective action Correct connection according to connection diagram Measure supply voltage and no-load current Clean air passages
Check direction of rotation and fans
Motor overheats under load
Motor is overloaded Voltage too high or too low Motor is single-phasing Rotor is rubbing in the stator bore
Check current input Measure voltage Check for break in supply cables Check air-gap Dismantle motor to afford detailed inspection, call in specialist, when necessary send motor or rotor to manufacturer
Local overheating in stator winding Humming noise, emission of smoke, signs of fire
Short-circuits in stator winding (individual coils will be too hot, singed appearance) Rotor rubbing in stator bore (when signs of fire in airgap), broken or loose rotor bars Motor too weak or load torque too high Voltage dip too great
Motor speed decreases greatly at low load
Decrease load torque Check supply voltage and section of supply cables Inspect rotor
Periodic fluctuation at ammeter in stator circuit (up to about 6 times per second). Dependent on slip Motor emits abnormal noise
Interruption in rotor circuit due to broken or loose bars
Mechanical or electrical cause
When cause is electrical, noise will disappear when motor is switched off, when mechanical it will usually decrease with decreasing speed. Consult manufacturer
3BSM 008369, rev. E
9-75
Fault Abnormally high bearing temperature
Possible cause of fault Axial force too high High vibration from an extraneous source Bearing damaged or insufficiently lubricated Oil rings out-of-round or have stepped lateral wear Oil filling not correct (level/grade) or oil is contaminated
Corrective action Determine cause and eliminate
Vibration on rotor
Bearings or coupling damaged, fault on gearbox or driven equipment Change in state of balance, cause could be on motor, coupling or driven equipment Sinking of foundation, inferior foundation
Check bearings, coupling, gearbox and driven equipment Check balance of components and dynamically rebalance when necessary Realign shaft train, rectify foundation
3BSM 008369, rev. E
9-76
3BSM 008369, rev. E

2006-12-08
Specifications and Ordering Information
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Transducer System
Description
Transducer System
The 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Transducer System consists of: a 3300 XL 8 mm probe a 3300 XL extension cable a 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor1 The system provides an output voltage directly proportional to the distance between the probe tip and the observed conductive surface. It is capable of both static (position) and dynamic (vibration) measurements, and is primarily used for vibration and position measurement applications on fluid-film bearing machines, as well as Keyphasor and speed measurement applications2. The 3300 XL 8 mm system represents our most advanced performance in an eddy current proximity transducer system. The standard 3300 XL 8 mm 5 metre system is also 100% compliant with the American Petroleum Institutes (API) 670 Standard (4th Edition) for mechanical configuration, linear range, accuracy, and temperature stability. All 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Transducer Systems achieve this level of performance while allowing complete interchangeability of probe, extension cable, and Proximitor Sensor without the need for individual component matching or bench calibration. Each component of the 3300 XL 8 mm Transducer System is backward compatible and interchangeable3 with other non-XL 3300 series 5 and 8 mm transducer system components4. This includes the 3300 5 mm probe, which is used when an 8 mm probe is too large for the available mounting space5,6.
Proximitor Sensor
The 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor incorporates numerous improvements over previous designs. Its physical packaging permits high-density DIN-rail installation. It can also be mounted in a traditional panel mount configuration, where it shares an identical footprint to older 4-hole mounted Proximitor Sensor designs. The mounting base for either option provides electrical isolation, eliminating the need for separate isolator plates. The 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor is highly immune to radio frequency interference, allowing installation in fiberglass housings without adverse effects from nearby radio frequency signals. Improved RFI/EMI immunity allows the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor to achieve European CE mark approvals without requiring special shielded conduit or metallic housings, resulting in lower installation costs and complexity. The 3300 XLs SpringLoc terminal strips require no special installation tools and facilitate faster, more robust field wiring connections by eliminating screw-type clamping mechanisms that can loosen.
Part number 141194-01 Revision G, June 2005
Page 1 of 29
Proximity Probe and Extension Cable

The 3300 XL probe and extension cable also reflect improvements over previous designs. A patented TipLoc molding method provides a more robust bond between the probe tip and the probe body. The probes cable is more securely attached as well, incorporating a patented CableLoc design that provides 330 N (75 lbf) pull strength where the probe cable attaches to the probe tip. 3300 XL 8 mm Probes and Extension Cables can also be ordered with an optional FluidLoc cable option. This option prevents oil and other liquids from leaking out of the machine through the cables interior. 3.
system for tachometer or overspeed measurements. 3300 XL 8 mm components are both electrically and physically interchangeable with non-XL 3300 5 and 8 mm components. Although the packaging of the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor differs from its predecessor, it is designed to fit in the same 4hole mounting pattern when used with the 4-hole mounting base, and will fit within the same mounting space specifications (when minimum permissible cable bend radius is observed). When XL and non-XL 3300-series 5 and 8 mm system components are mixed, system performance is limited to the specifications for the non-XL 3300 5 and 8 mm Transducer System. The 3300-series 5 mm probe (refer to Specifications and Ordering Information p/n 141605-01) uses smaller physical packaging, but does not permit reduced sideview clearances or tip-to-tip spacing requirements compared to an 8 mm probe. It is used when physical (not electrical) constraints preclude the use of an 8 mm probe. When narrow sideview probes are required, use the 3300 NSv Proximity Transducer System (refer to Specifications and Ordering Information p/n 147385-01). 8 mm probes provide a thicker encapsulation of the probe coil in the molded PPS plastic probe tip. This results in a more rugged probe. The larger diameter of the probe body also provides a stronger, more robust case. Bently Nevada recommends the use of 8 mm probes when possible to provide optimal robustness against physical abuse. Silicone tape is also provided with each 3300 XL extension cable and can be used instead of connector protectors. Silicone tape is not recommended in applications where the probe-toextension cable connection will be exposed to turbine oil.
4.
Connectors
The 3300 XL probe, extension cable, and Proximitor Sensor have corrosion-resistant, gold-plated ClickLoc connectors. These connectors require only finger-tight torque (connectors will "click"), and the specially engineered locking mechanism prevents the connectors from loosening. They do not require any special tools for installation or removal. 3300 XL 8 mm Probes and Extension Cables can also be ordered with connector protectors already installed. Connector protectors can also be supplied separately for installation in the field (such as when the cable must be run through restrictive conduit). Connector protectors are recommended for all installations and provide increased environmental protection7. 5.
6.
Extended Temperature Range Applications

An Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Probe and Extension Cable are available for applications where either the probe lead or extension cable may exceed the 177 C (350 F) temperature specification. The Extended Temperature Range Probe has an extended temperature rating for up to 260 C (500 F) for the probe lead and connector. The probe tip must remain below 177 C (350 F). The Extended Temperature Range Extension Cable is also rated for up to 260 C (500 F). Both the ETR probe and cable are compatible with standard temperature probes and cables. For example, you can utilize an ETR probe with the 330130 extension cable. The ETR system uses the standard 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor. When using any ETR component as part of your system, the accuracy is limited to the accuracy of the ETR system. Notes: 1. Proximitor Sensors are supplied by default from the factory calibrated to AISI 4140 steel. Calibration to other target materials is available upon request. Consult Bently Nevada Applications Note, Considerations when using Eddy Current Proximity Probes for Overspeed Protection Applications, when considering this transducer
7.
Specifications
Unless otherwise noted, the following specifications are for a 3300 XL 8 mm Proximitor Sensor, extension cable and 8 mm probe between +18 C and +27 C (+64 F to +80 F), with a -24 Vdc power supply, a 10 kilo load, an AISI 4140 steel target, and a probe gapped at 1.27 mm (50 mils). Performance characteristics are applicable for systems that consist solely of 3300 XL 8 mm components. The system accuracy and interchangeability specifications do not apply when using a transducer system calibrated to any target other than a Bently Nevada AISI 4140 steel target.
2.
Page 2 of 29
Electrical
Proximitor Sensor Input: Accepts one noncontacting 3300series 5 mm, 3300 8 mm or 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probe and Extension Cable. Power: Requires -17.5 Vdc to -26 Vdc without barriers at 12 mA maximum consumption, -23 Vdc to -26 Vdc with barriers. Operation at a more positive voltage than -23.5 Vdc can result in reduced linear range. Supply Sensitivity: Less than 2 mV change in output voltage per volt change in input voltage. Output resistance: Linear Range: 2 mm (80 mils). Linear range begins at approximately 0.25 mm (10 mils) from target and is from 0.25 to 2.3 mm (10 to 90 mils) (approximately 1 to 17 Vdc). Recommended Gap Setting: 1.27 mm (50 mils) Incremental Scale Factor (ISF) Standard 5 metre system: 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) 5% including interchangeability error when measured in increments of 0.25 mm (10 mils) over the 80 mil linear range from 0 to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F).
Resistance from Outer Conductor to Outer Conductor (RJACKET) (ohms) 0.20 0.04 0.23 0.05 0.26 0.05 0.30 0.06 0.46 0.09 0.49 0.10 0.53 0.11 0.56 0.11
Extension cable capacitance: Field wiring:
69.9 pF/m (21.3 pF/ft) typical 0.2 to 1.5 mm2 (16 to 24 AWG) . Recommend using three-conductor shielded triax cable and tinned field wiring. Maximum length of 305 metres (1,000 feet) between the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor and the monitor. See the frequency response graphs, figures 10 through 13 (pages 22 and 23) for signal rolloff at high frequencies when using longer field wiring lengths.
50
Resistance from the Center Conductor to the Outer Conductor (RPROBE) (ohms) 7.45 0.50 7.59 0.50 7.73 0.50 7.88 0.50 8.73 0.70 9.87 0.90
Probe dc resistance (nominal) (RPROBE) table:

Probe Length 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 5.0 9.0
Extension cable dc resistance (nominal):

Length of Extension Cable Resistance from Center Conductor to Center Conductor (RCORE) (ohms) 0.66 0.10 0.77 0.12 0.88 0.13 0.99 0.15 1.54 0.23 1.65 0.25 1.76 0.26 1.87 0.28
Standard 9 metre system: 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) 6.5% including interchangeability error when measured in increments of 0.25 mm (10 mils) over the 80 mil linear range from 0 to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F). Extended Temperature Range (ETR) 5 and 9 metre systems: 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) 6.5% including interchangeability error when measured in increments of 0.25 mm (10 mils) over the 80 mil linear range from 0 to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F). Deviation from best fit straight line (DSL) Standard 5 metre system:
Page 3 of 29
3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5

Less than 0.025mm (1 mil) with components at 0 C to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F). Standard 9 metre system: Less than 0.038mm (1.5 mil) with components at 0 C to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F). Extended Temperature Range 5 and 9 metre systems: Less than 0.038mm (1.5 mil) with components at 0 C to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F). Standard 5 metre system performance over extended temperatures: Over a probe temperature range of 35 C to +120 C (-31 F to +248 F) with the Proximitor Sensor and extension cable between 0 C to +45C (+32 F to +113 F), the ISF remains within 10% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) and the DSL remains within 0.076 mm (3 mils). Over a Proximitor Sensor and extension cable temperature range of 35 C to +65 C (-31 F to +149 F) with the probe between 0 C to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F), the ISF remains within 10% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) and the DSL remains within 0.076 mm (3 mils). Standard 9 metre system performance over extended temperatures: Over a probe temperature range of 35 C to +120 C (-31 F to +248 F) with the Proximitor Sensor and extension cable between 0 C to +45C (+32 F to +113 F), the ISF remains within 18% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) and the DSL remains within 0.152 mm (6 mils). Over a Proximitor Sensor and extension cable temperature range of 35 C to +65 C (-31 F to +149 F) with the probe between 0 C to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F), the ISF
Part number 141194-01 Revision G, June 2005 Specifications and Ordering Information
remains within 18% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) and the DSL remains within 0.152 mm (6 mils). Extended Temperature Range system performance over extended temperatures: Over a probe and extension cable temperature range of 35 C to + 260 C (-31 F to +500 F) with the Proximitor Sensor between 0 C to +45C (+32 F to +113 F), the ISF remains within 18% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) and the DSL remains within 0.152 mm (6 mils). Frequency Response:
0 to 10 kHz: +0, -3 dB, with up to 305 metres (1000 feet) of field wiring.
Minimum Target Size: 15.2 mm (0.6 in) diameter (flat target) Shaft Diameter Minimum: 50.8 mm (2 in) Recommended minimum:
76.2 mm (3 in) When gapped at the center of the linear range, the interaction between two separate transducer systems (cross-talk) will be less than 50 mV on shaft diameters of at least 50 mm (2 in) or greater. Care should be taken to maintain minimum separation of transducer tips, generally at least 40 mm (1.6 in) for axial position measurements or 38 mm (1.5 in) for radial vibration measurements to limit cross-talk to 50 mV or less. Radial vibration or position measurements on shaft diameters smaller than 76.2 mm (3 in) will generally result in a change in scale factor. Consult Performance Specification 159484 for additional information.
Page 4 of 29
Effects of 60 Hz Magnetic Fields Up to 300 Gauss: Output voltage in mil pp/gauss: Gap 5 metre Proximitor Sensor 0.0119 0.0131 0.0133 9 metre Proximitor Sensor 0.0247 0.0323 0.0348 Probe Ext. Cable 0.0004 0.0014 0.0045
Terminal Block Connections Ui= -28V Ii= 140mA Pi= 0.84W Coaxial Connection Ui = -28V Ii = 140mA Pi = 0.84W Load Parameters The capacitance and either the inductance or the inductance to resistance (L/R) ratio of the load connected to the probe coaxial terminal, must not exceed the following values:
Group IIC IIB IIA Capacitance F 0.077 0.644 2.144 Inductance mH 0.99 7.41 15.6 L/R Ratio H/? 35 142 295
Ci = 0 Li =10H
10 mil 50 mil 90 mil
0.0004 0.0014 0.0045
Ci= 5.7nF Li = 0.85mH
Electrical Classification: Complies with the European CE mark. Hazardous Area Approvals
Note: Multiple approvals for hazardous areas certified by Canadian Standards Association (CSA/NRTL/C) in North America and by Baseefa (2001) in Europe.
North America: Ex ia IIC T4/T5; Class I Zone 0 or Class 1 Division 1; Groups A, B, C, and D, when installed with intrinsically safe zener barriers per drawing 141092 or when installed with galvanic isolators. Ex nA IIC T4/T5 Class I Zone 2 or Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D when installed without barriers per drawing 140979. T5 @ Ta = -35 C to +85 C. T4 @ Ta= -51 C to +100 C. Europe: II 1 G EEx ia IIC T4/T5. EC certificate number BAS99ATEX1101, when installed per drawing 141092. II 3 G EEx nAII T4/T5. EC certificate number BAS99ATEX3100U,when installed per drawing 140979 T5 @ Ta= -35 C to +85 C T4 @ Ta= -51 C to +100 C. IEC Ex
The Proximitor must be installed so as to minimize the risk of impact or friction with other metallic surfaces. 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor, nA IECEx BAS04.0057X AEx nA II T4 / T5 (-51C = Ta = +100C / -35C = Ta = +85C) The terminals must be provided with a level of protection of at least IP54. Ui = -28V 3300 XL 8mm Eddy Current Probe, ia IECEx BAS04.0056 AEx ia IIC Temperature Classification per the table below.
Temperature Classification T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Ambient Temperature (Probe Only) -51C to +232C -51C to +177C -51C to +120C -51C to +80C -51C to +40C
3300 XL Proximitor Sensor, ia IECEx BAS04.0055X Ex ia IIC T4 / T5 (-51C = Ta = +100C / -35C = Ta = +85C)
Page 5 of 29
Ui = -28V Ii = 140mA Pi =0.84W
Ci = 1.5nF Li = 200H Standard Probe and Extension Cable Armor (optional):
5 or 9 metres including extension cable
3300 XL 8mm Eddy Current Probe, nA IECEx BAS04.0058X Ex nA II Temperature Classification per the table above. Must be supplied from a voltage limited source. EEx nA for Zone 2, Group IIC, EC certificate number BAS99ATEX3100U. Extended Temperature Range Probe and Extension Cable Armor (optional):
Flexible AISI 302 or 304 SST with FEP outer jacket.
Flexible AISI 302 or 304 SST with PFA outer jacket. Tensile Strength (maximum rated): 330 N (75 lbf) probe case to probe lead. 270 N (60 lbf) at probe lead to extension cable connectors. Connector material: Gold-plated brass or gold-plated beryllium copper.
Maximum Rated 33.9 Nm (300 inlbf) 22.6 Nm (200 inlbf) 22.6 Nm (200 inlbf) Recommended 11.2 Nm (100 inlbf) 7.5 Nm (66 inlbf) 7.5 Nm (66 inlbf)
Mechanical
Probe Tip Material: Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS). Probe Case Material: AISI 303 or 304 stainless steel (SST). Probe Cable Specifications: Standard cable: 75 triaxial, fluoroethylene propylene (FEP) insulated probe cable in the following total probe lengths: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 5, or 9 metres. Extended Temperature Range cable: 75 triaxial, perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) insulated probe cable in the following total probe lengths: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 5, or 9 metres. Extension Cable Material: 75 triaxial, fluoroethylene propylene (FEP) insulated. Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Extension Cable Material: 75 triaxial, perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) insulated. Proximitor Sensor Material: System Length:
Probe case torque: Standard forwardmounted probes Standard forwardmount probes first three threads Reverse mount probes
Connector-to-connector torque Recommended torque: see table:

Connector Type Two 3300 XL gold "click" type connectors One non-XL stainless steel connector and one 3300 XL connector Tightening Instructions Finger tight Finger tight plus 1/8 turn using pliers
Maximum torque: A308 aluminum Minimum Bend Radius:
0.565 Nm (5 inlbf)
25.4 mm (1.0 in)

Specifications and Ordering Information Page 6 of 29
Total System Mass (typical): 0.7 kg (1.5 lbm) Probe: 323 g (11.38 oz) Extension Cable: 34 g/m (0.4 oz/ft) Armored Extension cable: 103 g/m (1.5 oz/ft) Proximitor Sensor: 246 g (8.7 oz)
Storage Temperature: -51 C to +105 C (-60 F to +221 F) Relative Humidity: Less than a 3% change in Average Scale Factor (ASF) when tested in 93% humidity in accordance with IEC standard 68-2-3 for up to 56 days. Probe Pressure: 3300 XL 8 mm probes are designed to seal differential pressure between the probe tip and case. The probe sealing material consists of a Viton O-ring. Probes are not pressure tested prior to shipment. Contact our custom design department if you require a test of the pressure seal for your application.
Note: It is the responsibility of the customer or user to ensure that all liquids and gases are contained and safely controlled should leakage occur from a proximity probe. In addition, solutions with high or low pH values may erode the tip assembly of the probe causing media leakage into surrounding areas. Bently Nevada, LLC will not be held responsible for any damages resulting from leaking 3300 XL 8 mm proximity probes. In addition, 3300 XL 8 mm proximity probes will not be replaced under the service plan due to probe leakage.
Environmental Limits
Probe Temperature Range Operating and Storage Temperature: Standard probe:
-51 C to +177 C (-60 F to +351 F)
Extended Temperature Range probe:
Patents: -51 C to +177 C (-60 F to +351 F) for the probe tip; -51 C to +260 C (-60 F to +500 F) for the probe cable and connector.
Note: Exposing the probe to temperatures below 34 C (-30 F) may cause premature failure of the pressure seal.
5,016,343; 5,126,664; 5,351,388, and 5,685,884. Components or procedures described in these patents apply to this product.
Extension Cable Temperature Range Operating and Storage Temperature: Standard cable: -51 C to +177 C (-60 F to +351 F) Extended Temperature Range cable: -51 C to +260 C (-60 F to +500 F) Proximitor Sensor Temperature Range Operating Temperature: -51 C to +100 C (-60 F to +212 F)
Ordering Information
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes:
330101 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, without armor3 330102 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, with armor3 Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX-EXX Option Descriptions A: Unthreaded Length Option
Note: Unthreaded length must be at least 0.8 inches less than the case length.
Order in increments of 0.1 in Length configurations: Maximum unthreaded length: 8.8 in Minimum unthreaded length: 0.0 in
Page 7 of 29
Example: 0 4 = 0.4 in B: Overall Case Length Option Order in increments of 0.1 in Threaded length configurations: Maximum case length: 9.6 in Minimum case length: 0.8 in Example: 2 4 = 2.4 in C: Total Length Option 05 10 15 20 50 90 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metre (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
Example: 0 6 = 60 mm B: Overall Case Length Option Order in increments of 10 mm. Metric thread configurations: Maximum length: 250 mm Minimum length: 20 mm Example: 0 6 = 60 mm C: Total Length Option 05 10 15 20 50 90 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metres (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
D: Connector and Cable-Type Option 01 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector, standard cable 02 11 Miniature coaxial connector, standard cable ClickLocTM
D: Connector and Cable-Type Option 01 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector, standard cable 02 11 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector, standard cable Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector, FluidLoc cable Miniature coaxial ClickLoc connector, FluidLoc cable
Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector, FluidLoc cable Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector, FluidLoc cable
12
12
E: Agency Approval Option 00 Not required 05 Multiple Approvals
3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probes

330105-02-12-CXX-DXX-EXX, 3/8-24 UNF threads3 330106-05-30-CXX-DXX-EXX, M10 x 1 threads3 Option Descriptions C: Total Length Option 05 10 15 20 50 90 D: Connector Option 02 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metre (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) Miniature ClickLocTM coaxial connector
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Metric:

330103 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, without armor3 330104 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, with armor3 Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX-EXX Option Descriptions A: Unthreaded Length Option
Note: Unthreaded length must be at least 20 mm less than the case length.
Order in increments of 10 mm. Length configuration: Maximum unthreaded length: 230 mm Minimum unthreaded length: 0 mm
Part number 141194-01 Revision G, June 2005 Specifications and Ordering Information
Page 8 of 29
12
Miniature ClickLocTM coaxial connector, FluidLoc cable
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes:

330191 3300 XL 8 mm ETR Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, without armor 330192 3300 XL 8 mm ETR Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, with armor Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX Option Descriptions A: Unthreaded Length Option
Note: The FluidLoc cable options 10 and 12 are not necessary on the vast majority of 330105 and 330106 installations due to the presence of the probe sleeve. Consider carefully the application before ordering the FluidLoc cable options
. E: Agency Approval Option 00 Not required 05 Multiple Approvals
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Smooth Case:

330140 3300 XL 8 mm Probe without armor2 330141 3300 XL 8 mm Probe with armor2 Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX Option Descriptions A: Overall Case Length Option Order in increments of 0.1 in Length configurations: Maximum length: 9.6 in Minimum length: 0.8 in Example: 2 4 = 2.4 in B: Total Length Option 05 10 15 20 50 90 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metres (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
Order in increments of 0.1 in Length configurations: Maximum unthreaded length: 8.8 in Minimum unthreaded length: 0.0 in Example: 1 5 = 1.5 in B: Overall Case Length Option Order in increments of 0.5 in Threaded length configurations: Maximum case length: 9.6 in Minimum case length: 0.8 in Example: 2 5 = 2.5 in C: Total Length Option 05 10 15 20 50 90 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metre (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
C: Connector and Cable-Type Option 01 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector, standard cable 02 11 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector, standard cable Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector, FluidLoc cable Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector, FluidLoc cable
D: Agency Approval Option 00 Not required 05 Multiple Approvals
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes, Metric:

330193 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, without armor 330194 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, with armor Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX Option Descriptions A: Unthreaded Length Option
12
D: Agency Approval Option 00 Not required 05

Multiple Approvals
Page 9 of 29
Order in increments of 10 mm. Length configuration: Maximum unthreaded length: 230 mm Minimum unthreaded length: 0 mm Example: 0 6 = 60 mm B: Overall Case Length Option Order in increments of 10 mm. Metric thread configurations: Maximum length: 250 mm Minimum length: 20 mm Example: 0 6 = 60 mm C: Total Length Option 05 10 15 20 50 90 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metres (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes, Smooth Case:

330197 3300 XL 8 mm Probe without armor2 330198 3300 XL 8 mm Probe with armor2 Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX Option Descriptions A: Overall Case Length Option Order in increments of 0.5 in Length configurations: Maximum length: 9.5 in Minimum length: 1.0 in Example: 3 5 = 3.5 in B: Total Length Option 05 10 15 20 50 90 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metres (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
C: Agency Approval Option 00 Not required 05 330180-AXX-BXX Option Descriptions A: Total Length and Mounting Option 50 5.0 metre (16.4 feet) system length, panel mount 51 5.0 metre (16.4 feet) system length, DIN mount 5.0 metre (16.4 feet) system length, no mounting hardware 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system length, panel mount 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system length, DIN mount 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system length, no mounting hardware Multiple Approvals
3300 XL Proximitor Sensor
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Reverse Mount Probes

330195-02-12-CXX-DXX, 3/8-24 UNF threads 330196-05-30-CXX-DXX, M10 x 1 threads Option Descriptions C: Total Length Option 05 10 15 20 50 90 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metre (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
52 90 91 92
B: Agency Approval Option 00 Not required 05 Multiple approvals
Page 10 of 29
3300 XL Extension Cable

330130-AXXX-BXX-CXX
Note: Make sure that the extension cable length and the probe length, when added together, equal the Proximitor Sensor total length.
045 070 075 080 085 B: Cable Option 00 01
4.5 metres (14.8 feet) 7.0 metres (22.9 feet) 7.5 metres (24.6 feet) 8.0 metres (26.2 feet) 8.5 metres (27.9 feet) Standard cable Armored cable
Option Descriptions A: Cable Length Option 030 035 040 045 070 075 080 085 3.0 metres (9.8 feet) 3.5 metres (11.5 feet) 4.0 metres (13.1 feet) 4.5 metres (14.8 feet) 7.0 metres (22.9 feet) 7.5 metres (24.6 feet) 8.0 metres (26.2 feet) 8.5 metres (27.9 feet)
C: Agency Approval Option 00 Not required 05 Multiple Approvals
Accessories
141078-01 159484 Manual Performance Specification 3300 XL Proximity Transducer System Performance Specification 3300 XL ETR probes and extension cables Bulk field wire. 1.0 mm2 (18 AWG), 3 conductor, twisted, shielded cable with drain wire. Specify length in feet. 137491-AXX Aluminum probe clamp bracket2 Option Descriptions A: Mounting screw option 01 10-24 UNC-2A mounting screws 02 M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws The aluminum clamp bracket is an unthreaded mounting bracket designed to use with the smooth case probes (330140, 330141, 330197 and 330198). After gapping the probe, tighten the clamp bracket by tightening the screws. The mounting screws have pre-drilled holes for safety wire. 137492-AXX Aluminum probe threaded mounting bracket Option Descriptions A: Thread size
B: Connector Protector and Cable Option 00 Standard cable 01 02 03 10 11 12 13 Armored cable Standard cable with connector protectors Armored cable with connector protectors FluidLoc cable Armored FluidLoc cable FluidLoc cable with connector protectors Armored FluidLoc cable with connector protectors
162735
02120015
3300 XL Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Extension Cable

330190-AXXX-BXX-CXX
Option Descriptions A: Cable Length Option 030 035 040

3.0 metres (9.8 feet) 3.5 metres (11.5 feet) 4.0 metres (13.1 feet)
01 04
3/8-24 M10 x 1
The aluminum probe threaded mounting bracket is the standard mounting bracket for most 3300 and 3300 XL probe
Specifications and Ordering Information Page 11 of 29
installations. The -01 option is supplied with two 10-24 UNC-2A mounting screws. The -04 option is supplied with two M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws. The mounting screws have pre-drilled holes for safety wire. 27474-AXX Phenolic threaded probe mounting bracket Option Descriptions A: Thread size 01 04 3/8-24 M10 x 1
for use inside the casing of the machine. 40113-02 Connector Protector Kit. Connector Protector Kit for 3300 XL 8 mm probes and extension cables, including connector protectors and installation tools. Connector Protector Adapter. Allows connector protector installation tools manufactured prior to 1998 to be used with 75 ClickLoc connectors. Connector Protectors. Package contains 10 pairs of connector protectors for 3300 XL 8 mm probes and 3300 XL 5 and 8 mm extension cables. 75 ohm Triaxial Male Connector Protector. Male connector protectors are installed onto the extension cable and attach to the female connector protector on the probe, providing environmental protection of connectors. 75 ohm Triaxial Female Connector Protector. Female connector protectors are installed onto the probe lead and attach to the male connector protector on the extension cable, providing environmental protection of connectors. Also placed on the extension cable to slide over the connection to the Proximitor Sensor and protect it from the environment. 3/8-24 Probe Lock Nut with safety wire holes. Single probe lock nut with two holes drilled through the nut in order to secure the lock nut in place with safety wire. M10 x 1 Probe Lock Nut with safety wire holes. Single probe lock nut with two holes drilled through the nut in order to secure the lock nut in place with safety wire. 3300 XL Connector Kit. Used on 3300 XL 8 mm probes and extension cables. Contains one pair of male and female ClickLocTM connectors, two
Page 12 of 29
136536-01
The phenolic threaded mounting bracket is recommended if additional electric isolation from the mounting location is required (as in some generator and electrical motor bearing locations). The -01 option is supplied with two 10-24 UNC2A mounting screws. The -04 option is supplied with two M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws. The mounting screws have pre-drilled holes for safety wire. 138492-01 Replacement panel-mount mounting pad Replacement DIN-mount mounting pad
40180-02
03839410
138493-01
148722-01
03839420 3300 XL Test Plug. The 3300 XL Test Plug contains three small test pins attached to three color-coded wires 1 metre in length, each terminated in a banana plug. The three-pin adapter plugs into the test pin holes on 3300 XL-style Proximitor Sensors. It is used to check the performance of the Proximitor Sensor from the test pin holes in the terminal strip without requiring the removal of the field wiring. 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor Panel-mount Screws. Package includes four 6-32 UNC thread forming mounting screws. (Supplied standard with Proximitor Housings [3300 XL panel-mount option]). Silicone self-fusing tape. A 9.1 metre (10 yard) roll of silicone tape to protect connectors. It is easy to install and provides excellent electrical isolation and protection from the environment. It is not recommended
04301007
04310310
04301008
03200006
330153-01
color-coded sleeves, two pieces of slit FEP tubing, and one strip of silicone tape. 163356 Connector Crimp Tool Kit. Includes one set of multiconnector inserts and connector installation instructions. Compatible only with 330153 connector kits or with probes shipped in 2003 or later with ClickLoc connectors uninstalled. Supplied with carrying case.
Notes: 1. 2. 3. Five metre probes are designed for use with the five metre Proximitor Sensor only. Mounting clamps must be ordered separately for 330140, 330141, 330197, and 330198. For a shorter delivery time, order commonly stocked probes. Currently, stocked probes consist of the following part numbers: 330101-00-08-05-02-00, 330101-00-08-05-0205, 330101-00-08-10-02-00, 330101-00-08-10-
02-05, 330101-00-12-10-02-00, 330101-00-12-1002-05, 330101-00-16-10-02-00, 330101-00-16-1002-05, 330101-00-20-05-02-00, 330101-00-20-1002-00, 330101-00-20-10-02-05, 330101-00-30-1002-00, 330101-00-30-10-02-05, 330101-00-40-0502-00, 330101-00-40-10-02-00, 330101-00-40-1002-05, 330101-00-60-10-02-00, 330101-00-60-1002-05, 330102-00-20-10-02-00, 330103-00-02-1002-05, 330103-00-03-10-02-05, 330103-00-04-1002-00, 330103-00-04-50-02-00, 330103-00-05-1002-00, 330103-00-06-10-02-00, 330104-00-06-1002-00, 330104-01-05-50-02-00, 330105-02-12-0502-00, 330105-02-12-05-02-05, 330105-02-12-1002-00, 330105-02-12-10-02-05, 330106-05-30-0502-00, 330106-05-30-05-02-05, 330106-05-30-1002-00 and 330106-05-30-10-02-05.
Graphs and Dimensional Drawings
Page 13 of 29
Gap (m m )0.00
4
0.25
0.50
0.75
1 .00
1 .25
1 .50
1 .75
2.00
2.25
2.50 0.1 0 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.1 0
DSL Error (mils) Referenced to 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil)
2 0 -2 -4 1 0
ISF Error (%) Referenced to 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil)
5 0 -5 -1 0 -24 -22 -20 -1 8
Output (Volts)
-1 6 -1 4 -1 2 -1 0 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 0 1 0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 00
Gap (m ils)
5m @ 25 C (77 F) 5m @ 45 C (1 1 3 F) 5m @ 0 C (32 F)
Figure 1 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System over API 670 Testing Range
DSL Error (mm)
Page 14 of 29
Gap (m m ) 0.00
6 4 2 0 -2 -4 -6 1 0
0.25
0.50
0.75
1 .00
1 .25
1 .50
1 .75
2.00
2.25
2.50 0.1 5 0.1 0 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.1 0 -0.1 5
5 0 -5 -1 0 -24 -22 -20 -1 8
Output (Volts)
-1 6 -1 4 -1 2 -1 0 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 0 1 0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 00
Gap (m ils)
9m @ 25 C (77 F) 9m @ 45 C (1 1 3 F) 9m @ 0 C (32 F)
Figure 2 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System over API 670 Testing Range
DSL Error (mm)
Page 15 of 29
Gap (m m )
0.00 6 4 2 0
0.25
0.50
0.75
1 .00
1 .25
1 .50
1 .75
2.00
2.25
2.50 0.1 5 0.1 0 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.1 0 -0.1 5
-2 -4 -6 1 0
5 0 -5 -1 0 -24 -22 -20 -1 8
Output (Volts)
-1 6 -1 4 -1 2 -1 0 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 0 1 0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 00
Gap (m ils)
1 m Probe @ 25 C (77 F) 1 m Probe @ 1 20 C (248 F) 1 m Probe @ -35 C (-31F)
Figure 3 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm Probe over API 670 Operating Range
DSL Error (mm)
Page 16 of 29
Gap (m m ) 0.00
6
0.25
0.50
0.75
1 .00
1 .25
1 .50
1 .75
2.00
2.25
2.50 0.1 5 0.1 0 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.1 0 -0.1 5
2 0
-2 -4 -6 1 0
5 0 -5 -1 0 -24 -22 -20 -1 8 -1 6 -1 4 -1 2 -1 0 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 0 1 0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 00
Output (Volts)
Gap (m ils)
TC=25 C (77 F) Tc=-34 C (-30 F) Tc=-51 C (-60 F)
Figure 4 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m Proximitor Sensor with 4 m of Extension Cable @ Tc (Probe is at 25 C)
DSL Error (mm)
Page 17 of 29
Gap (m m ) 0.00
8 6 4 2 0 -2 -4 -6 -8 1 5
0.25
0.50
0.75
1 .00
1 .25
1 .50
1 .75
2.00
2.25
2.50 0.20 0.1 0 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.1 0 5 -0.1 -0.20 0.1 5
DSL Error (mils) Referenced to 200(mV/mil)
ISF Error (%) Referenced to 200(mV/mil)
1 0 5 0 -5 -1 0 -1 5 -20 -1 8 -1 6
Output (Volts)
-1 4 -1 2 -1 0 -8 -6 -4 -2
Gap (m ils)
0 0 1 0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 00
25 C (77 F)
65 C (1 49 F)
85 C (1 85 F)
1 00 C (21 2 F)
Figure 5 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m Proximitor Sensor with 4 m Extension Cable @ Th (Probe is at 25C)
DSL Error (mm)
Page 18 of 29
Gap (m m )
0.00 8 6 4 2 0 -2 -4 -6 -8 1 5 1 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1 .00 1 .25 1 .50 1 .75 2.00 2.25 2.50 0.20 0.1 0 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.1 0 -0.1 5 -0.20 0.1 5
DSL Error (mils)
ISF Error (%)
5 0 -5 -1 0 -1 5 -22 -20 -1 8 -1 6
Output (Volts)
-1 4 -1 2 -1 0 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 0 1 0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 00
Gap (m ils)
Tc=+25 C (+77 F) Tc=-34 C (-30 F) Tc=-51C (-60 F)
Figure 6 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m Proximitor Sensor with 8 m of Extension Cable @ Tc (Probe is at 25 C)
DSL Error (mm)
Page 19 of 29
Gap (m m )
0.00 8 6 4 2 0 -2 -4 -6 -8 1 5 0.25 0.50 0.75 1 .00 1 .25 1 .50 1 .75 2.00 2.25 2.50 0.20 0.1 5 0.1 0 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.1 0 -0.1 5 -0.20
DSL Error (mils)
ISF Error (%)
1 0 5 0 -5 -1 0 -1 5 -22 -20 -1 8 -1 6
Output (Volts)
-1 4 -1 2 -1 0 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 0 1 0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 00
Gap (m ils)
Th=+25 C (+77 F) Th=+85 C (+185 F) Th=+65 C (+149 F) Th=+100 C (+21 2 F)
Figure 7 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m Proximitor Sensor with 8 m of Extension Cable @ Th (Probe is at 25 C)
DSL Error (mm)
Page 20 of 29
Gap (m m )
0.00 10 8
0.25
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50 0.25 0.20 0.10 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.10 -0.15 -0.20 -0.25
DSL Error (mils)
4 2 0 -2 -4 -6 -8 -10 1 5 10
ISF Error (%)
5 0 -5 -10 -1 5 -24 -22 -20 -18
Output (Volts)
-16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2
Gap (m ils)
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Th=+25 C (+77 F)
Th =+260 C (+500 F)
Figure 8 Typical 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range Probe and 4 metres of Extended Temperature Range Extension Cable @ Th (Proximitor Sensor and probe tip with 1 foot of cable are at +25 C)
DSL Error (mm)
0.15
Page 21 of 29
Gap (m m )
0.00 10 8
0.25
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50 0.25 0.20 0.10 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.10 -0.15 -0.20 -0.25
DSL Error (mils)
4 2 0 -2 -4 -6 -8 -10 1 5 10
ISF Error (%)
5 0 -5 -10 -1 5 -24 -22 -20 -18
Output (Volts)
-16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2
Gap (m ils)
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Th=+25 C (+77 F)
Th=+260 C (+500 F)
Figure 9 Typical 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range Probe and 8 metres of Extended Temperature Range Extension Cable @ Th (Proximitor Sensor and probe tip with 1 foot of cable are at +25 C)
DSL Error (mm)
0.15
Page 22 of 29
Frequency Response to Different Field Wiring Lengths without Barriers (5 m System)

1 0 Magnitude (dB) -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 100
1,000 Frequency (Hz)
10,000
100,000
No field wiring 5000' wiring
1000' wiring 12,000' wiring
2000' wiring
Figure 10 Frequency Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System with varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers
Phase Response with Different Field Wiring Lengths, No Barriers (5 m System) 0 -10 Phase Angle (degrees) -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -90 -100 100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)
2000' wiring
Figure 11 Phase Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System with varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers
Part number 141194-01 Revision G, June 2005 Specifications and Ordering Information Page 23 of 29
1 0 Magnitude (dB) -1 -2 -3 -4 -5
100
1,000
Frequency (Hz)
10,000
100,000
No field wiring 5000' field wiring
1000' field wiring 12,000' field wiring
2000' field wiring
Figure 12 Frequency Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System with varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers
Phase Response with Different Field Wiring Lengths, No Barriers (9 m System)
0.00 -10.00 Phase Angle (degrees) -20.00 -30.00 -40.00 -50.00 -60.00 -70.00 -80.00 -90.00
-100.00 100
1,000
100,000
2000' field wiring
Figure 13 Phase Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System with varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers
Page 24 of 29
14.3 (9/16) for 3/8-24 threads2 17.0 (0.67) for M10 threads2 8.0 Dia. (0.31) Case Probe Tip Thread
8 (5/16) Wrench Flats, 4 each 75 ohm Cable 3.7 (0.15) Max. Outside Dia.
R
7.6 (0.30) Outside Dia. of Armor 9.0 (0.35) Max Dia. of Armor Ferrule
2.5 (0.10) Unthreaded Length "A" Case Length "B" 6.0 (0.235) Max. 3 Total Length "C", +30%, -0%
Miniature Male Coaxial Connector 7.23 (0.285) Outside Dia. Maximum "D"
Figure 14 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity probes, Standard Mount

330101 and 330191, 3/8-24 UNF-2A, without armor 7 330102 and 330192, 3/8-24 UNF-2A, with armor 6 330103 and 330193, M10X1 thread, without armor 7 330104 and 330194, M10X1 thread, with armor 6
Figure 15 Installed Connector Protectors
Page 25 of 29
Figure 16 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Reverse Mount 4, 7

330105 and 330195, 3/8-24 UNF-2A threads 330106 and 330196, M10X1 threads
8 (0.31) Dia. Tip
9.6 (0.38) Max. Dia.
75 Ohm Cable 3.68 (0.145) Dia. Max. 3.9 (0.16) Max. Dia. for FluidLoc R Cable With Armor, outside Dia. is 8.0 (0.315) 7.9 (0.31) 9.0 (0.35) Max Dia. of Armor Ferrule Wrench Flats 4 each Male (Plug) Connector 7.23 (0.285) Dia. Max.
2.54 (0.100) Case Length "A" 6.0 (0.235) Max. Cable Length
3
349.25 (13.750) Max.
Figure 17 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Smooth Case

330140 and 330197, without armor 7 330141 and 330198, with armor 6
Page 26 of 29
75 ohm cable 3.7 (0.15) max. O.D. Miniature Male 3.9 (0.16) Max. Dia. for FluidLocR cable Coaxial Connector 7.6 (0.30) Max. O.D. of Armor FEP or PFA 9.0 (0.35) Max Dia. of Armor Ferrule Coated Armor 6 83.8 7.2 (0.285) 7.2 (0.285) 83.8 Armor Length: Max. Dia. (3.30) (3.30) Max. Dia. 300 (11.8) less than cable length 83.8 83.8 or PFA Insulated (3.30) (3.30) FEP Triaxial Cable Stainless Steel Ferrules Miniature Female Coaxial Connector 8.4 (0.33) Dia. Cable Length +20%, -0%
Figure 18 330130, 3300 XL Extension Cable (FEP armor and insulation) 30190, 3300 XL ETR Extension Cable (PFA armor and insulation)
Mounting Option "A" Options -50 or -90
63.5 (2.50)
81.3 (3.20)
50.8 (2.00)
50.8 (2.00)
61.2 (2.41)
5.1 (0.20)
Figure 19 Panel Mount 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor
Page 27 of 29
Figure 20 DIN Mount 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor
Page 28 of 29
50 (1.95)
25.4 (1.00)
86 (3.4)
50.8 (2.00) 79.4 (3.125)
50.8 (2.00) 60.2 (2.37)
63.5 (2.50) 81 (3.2) 50.8 (2.00)
81.3 (3.20)
50.8 (2.00) 61.2 (2.41) 5.1 (0.20)
Figure 21 Physical mounting characteristics showing interchangeability of 3300 and 3300 XL Proximitor Sensors when 4-hole mounting option is used8
Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. All dimensions on figures are in millimetres (inches) unless otherwise noted. Standard mount 8 mm probes supplied with 17 mm or 9/16 inch lock nut. Probes ordered with 5 or 9 metre integral cables have a length tolerance of +20%, -0%. Reverse mount probes not available with armor or connector protector options. Letters inside quotation marks on figures refer to probe ordering options. Stainless steel armor is supplied with FEP outer jacket for standard probes, PFA outer jacket for ETR probes. FEP jacket is standard non-armored portion of the cable for standard probes, PFA jacket on non-armored portion for ETR probes. Use M3.5 or #6 screws for panel-mount Proximitor Sensors (screws provided when purchasing Bently Nevada housings).
2004 Bently Nevada LLC CableLoc, ClickLoc, FluidLoc, Keyphasor, NSv, Proximitor, and TipLoc are trademarks of Bently Nevada, LLC. Viton is a trademark of DuPont.
Page 29 of 29
21000, 24701 Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies
Description
Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies

Bently Nevada offers two all-metal Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies for external mounting of proximity probes: the 21000 aluminum probe housing assembly, and the 24701 stainless steel probe housing assembly. These housings consist of a dome cover that screws into the body of the housing, threaded ports for conduit connections, a probe sleeve of optional length, Orings, a reverse mount proximity probe, a thread seal, optional conduit fittings and an optional standoff adapter. Use of a proximity probe housing allows external access to the proximity probe and its extension cable, permitting gap adjustment or probe replacement without disassembly of the machine.
Note: A newer 31000/32000 proximity probe housing assembly is available with more flexible mounting options, better environmental resistance, and other improved features. It is recommended for installations where an explosion proof housing is not required. Consult specifications and ordering information (p/n 141610-01).
Both the 21000 and the 24701 housing assemblies are available in a Canadian Standards Association (CSA) approved version that is rated explosion proof in hazardous areas. In addition, CSA and BASEEFA approved proximity probes can also be ordered with both 21000 aluminum and 24701 stainless steel housings for intrinsically safe applications. Both housings are certified as CSA Type 4 enclosures, and both are fully compliant with the American Petroleum Institutes (API) 670 Standard for externally mounted proximity probe housings. Sleeve length is determined by the location in which the probe and housing will be installed. The probe lead must be longer than the sleeve. Sleeve lengths longer than 304 mm (12 inches) require additional sleeve support in order to reduce the vibration associated with unsupported long sleeve lengths. A probe support/oil seal, P/N 37948-01, is available to support long sleeves going through an inner bearing housing, or the customer or BNC can provide a custom sleeve support (see Figure 1. Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies Dimensions are in millimetres (inches) on page 7).
Part number 141600-01 Revision E, January 2003
Page 1 of 7
Environmental
Related Documents
For probe information, refer to the following manuals:
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Transducer System 141078-01 3300 XL NSv Proximity Transducer System 147357-01 3300 XL 11 mm Proximity Transducer System 146255-01 Radiation Resistant Probe & Proximitor System TW8029407
Temperature Range 3300 XL 8 mm and 3300 XL 11 mm probes: 3300 NSV probe: Operating:
-51 C to +177 C (-60 F to +351 F). -34 C to +177 C (-30 F to +351 F). -51 C to +177 C (-60 F to +351 F).
Note: Exposing 3300 XL or 3300 NSV probes to temperatures below 34 C (-30 F) may cause premature failure of their pressure seals.
Storage:
Specifications
Electrical Electrical Classification: Intrinsically Safe Applications: Complies with the CE mark for Europe. Multiple approvals for hazardous areas certified by Canadian Standards Association (CSA/ NRTL/C) in North America and by BASEEFA/CENELEC in Europe for hazardous applications when used with an approved Proximitor Sensor, extension cable, and either intrinsically safe or galvanically isolated barriers. Class I, Divisions 1 and 2: Groups A, B, C, and D. Class 2, Divisions 1 and 2: Groups E, F, and G. BASEEFA/ CENELEC: Explosion Proof Applications: Zones 0, 1, and 2: Groups I, IIA, IIB, and IIC. CA housings certified by CSA for explosion-proof applications in the following applications Class I, Divisions 1 and 2: Groups C and D. Class II, Divisions 1 and 2: Groups E, F, and G. Class III. Mechanical Material 21000: 24701: Mass (weight) 21000: 24701:
Aluminum body with 304 stainless steel sleeve. 303 stainless steel body, with 304 stainless steel sleeve.
1.1 kg (2.4 lb) typical, without fittings. 1.8 kg (4.1 lb) typical, without fittings.
CSA/NRTL/C:
Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies
21000-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXXX-EXX-F02 24701-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXXX-EXX-FXX
Explosion-Proof Housing Assemblies

CA21000-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXXX-EXX-F02 CA24701-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXXX-EXX-FXX Option Descriptions
A: Probe Option, With Connector:
00 16 26
Probe not required 3300 XL 8 mm probe 3300 NSV probe
Page 2 of 7
27 28 29 30 31 32
3300 NSV probe, multiple approvals 3300 XL 8 mm probe, multiple approvals 3300 XL 11 mm probe 3300 XL 11 mm probe, multiple approvals 3300 NSV probe with connector protector 3300 NSV probe with connector protector, multiple approvals 3300 XL 8 mm probe with connector protector 3300 XL 8 mm probe with connector protector, multiple approvals 3300 XL 11 mm probe with connector protector 3300 XL 11 mm probe with connector protector, multiple approvals
D: Probe Penetration (Option D Dimension):
Order in increments of 0.1 in (3 mm). Minimum length: 1.0 in = 0 1 0 (25.4 mm). Maximum length: See Table 2, Maximum Length of C and D Dimension for Proximity Probes, on page 6. Example: 3.7 in (94 mm) = 0 3 7 . 22.4 in (569 mm) = 2 2 4 .
Note: Installed probe P/N and S/N may not be visible for all available C plus D options. See Table 3, Maximum C and D Dimension with Visible Probe P/N and S/N, on page 6. For Probe Penetration Lengths between 1.0 and 2.0 inches, counter bore may be required in machine case to reduce probe side view and/or rear view effects. "C'' plus "D'' lengths greater than 300 mm (12 in) require additional sleeve support near the probe to prevent resonance from occurring. Adjustment range of Probe Penetration Option "D'' is 13 mm ( 0.5 in). For maximum C plus D see Table 2, Maximum Length of C and D Dimension for Proximity Probes, on page 6.
33 34
35 36
Note: If option -00 (probe not required) is selected for Option A, then Option B (Probe Cable Length Option) must also be -00. Order only multiple approvals probes for CA21000 or CA24701 housings.
E: Fittings Option:
00 01 02 03
Without fittings One Explosion-proof fitting and one plug Two Explosion-proof fittings One 3/4-14 NPT plug; one 3/4-14 to 1/2-14 NPT reducer; one cable seal grip with grommets for cable sizes: 1/8 to 3/16, 1/4 to 5/16, and 5/16 to 3/8-in One 3/4-14 NPT plug only
B: Probe Cable Length Option (see Table 2, Maximum Length of C and D Dimension for Proximity Probes, on page 6):
00 05 10
Probe cable not required 0.5 metre (20 in) 1.0 metre (39 in) 04
Note: 3300 XL 11 mm probes only available in 1.0 metre length. Excessive cable lengths should be avoided to reduce the possibility of damaging the cable when the housing lid is screwed onto the housing.
Note: Explosion-proof fittings are available for all housings. However, only CA versions of the housing are rated as explosion-proof by CSA when ordered with the E:00, E:01, E:02, or E:04 options.
F: Mounting Thread Option:
01 02
As cast, without threads 3/4-14 NPT (Must be ordered if Standoff Adapter Length Option is not -00.) 1-11 1/2 NPT 1/2-14 BSP 7/8-14 UNF-2A
C: Standoff Adapter (Option C Dimension):
Order in increments of 0.5 in (13 mm). Minimum length: 1.5 in = 1 5 (38 mm). Maximum length: 7.5 in = 7 5 (191 mm). Example: 1.5 in (38 mm) = 1 5 . No standoff adapter = 0 0 .
03 04 05
Note: For 21000 and CA21000 housings, Option F must be 02.
Page 3 of 7
Accessories
37948-01 Probe Support/Oil Seal Recommended for sleeves longer than 305 mm (12 in).
Housing AXX options for 7200 Series 11 mm probe options (A: 06 or A: 12 )
44382-AXXX Individual Probe Sleeve for 21000/24701Proximity Probe Housings A: Probe sleeve length This is the measured probe sleeve length . Order in increments of 0.1 in (3 mm). Note that the individual probe sleeve length does not include the distance from the end of the sleeve to the probe tip or the gap from the probe tip to the target material. If only the part number of the original housing is known and the sleeve cannot be measured, use the following table to determine the sleeve length:
All housing AXX options except NSv and 11 mm probes (options other than A:06, A:12, A:26, A:27, A:29, A:30, A:31, A:32, A:35, or A:36) AXXX: = Standoff Adapter Option from original housing (21000, CA21000, 24701, or CA24701 option C) + Probe penetration option from original housing (21000, CA21000, 24701, or CA24701 option D) + 0 4 5. Example: original part number is 2100016-10-15-035-03-02. AXXX: option for replacement sleeve is (015 + 035 + 045) = 0 9 5. AXXX: = Standoff Adapter Option from original housing (21000, CA21000, 24701, or CA24701 option C) + Probe penetration option from original housing (21000, CA21000, 24701, or CA24701 option D) + 0 4 6. Example: original part number is 24701-31-10-15-090-03-02. AXXX: option for replacement sleeve is (015 + 090 + 046) = 1 5 1 . AXXX: = Standoff Adapter Option from original housing (21000, CA21000, 24701, or CA24701 option C) + Probe penetration option from original housing (21000, CA21000, 24701, or CA24701 option D) + 0 3 7. Example: original part number is CA24701-36-10-40-053-02-02. AXXX: option for replacement sleeve is (040 + 053 + 037) = 1 3 0 .
AXXX: = Standoff Adapter Option from original housing (21000, CA21000, 24701, or CA24701 option C) + Probe penetration option from original housing (21000, CA21000, 24701, or CA24701 option D) + 0 3 9. Example: original part number is CA24701-12-10-30-113-01-02. AXXX: option for replacement sleeve is (030 + 113 + 039) = 1 8 2.
Minimum Probe Sleeve Length:
For all probes except NSv and 11 mm probes: 5.5 in (140 mm) = 0 55 3300 NSv Probe: 5.5 in (142 mm) = 0 5 6 3300 XL 11 mm probe: 4.7 in (119 mm) = 0 4 7
Maximum Probe Sleeve Length:
All 0.5 metre probes except NSv and 11 mm probes: 18.0 in (457 mm) = 180 3300 NSv 0.5 metre probe: 18.1 in (460 mm) = 1 8 1 7200-series 0.5 metre 11 mm probe: 15.4 in (391 mm) = 1 5 4 All 1.0 metre probes except NSv and 11 mm probes: 33.7 in (856 mm) = 3 3 7 3300 NSv 1.0 metre probe: 33.8 in (859 mm) = 3 3 8 3300 XL 1.0 metre 11 mm probe: 32.9 in (836 mm) = 3 2 9 7200 Series 1.0 metre 11 mm probe: 33.1 in (841 mm) = 3 3 1
Housing AXX options for 3300 NSv probe options (A:26, A:27, A:31, or A:32)
21003-AXXX
Individual Standoff Adapter:
Housing AXX options for 3300 XL 11 mm probe options (A:29, A:30, A:35, or A:36)
Order in increments of 0.5 in (13 mm). Minimum length: 1.5 in = 0 1 5 (38 mm). Maximum length: 7.5 in = 0 7 5 (191 mm). Example: 4.5 in (114 mm) = 0 4 5 .
Page 4 of 7
Note: For desired probe penetration lengths of less than 25 mm (1.0 in), order a separate Individual Standoff Adapter. The effective probe penetration length will then be reduced by the length of the Individual Standoff Adapter, plus an additional 13 mm (0.5 in) due to the NPT thread engagement. Example: The customer desires a probe penetration length of 13 mm (0.5 in). To do this, they can order a 21000 housing with DXXX (probe penetration) option of 0 3 0 [76 mm (3 in)] and a separate individual standoff adapter that is 51 mm (2.0 in) in length (part number 21003-020 ). The standoff adapter would cover 38 mm (2.0 in) of the probe sleeve, plus an additional 13 mm (0.5 in). Therefore, the effective probe penetration length would drop to 13 mm (0.5 in). Note: Signal affects due to probe side view and/or rear view of metal components are likely when effective penetration lengths of less than 1.0 inch are used.
Spare 3300 XL 11 mm Reverse Mount Probe, 3/8-24 UNF threads 330705-02-18-CXX-DXX-EXX

Option Descriptions: C: Total Length Option:
10 50 90
1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 9 0 metres (29.5 feet) Without connector With miniature male coaxial connector
D: Connector Option:
00 02
Spare 3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probe, 3/8-24 UNF threads 330105-02-12-CXX-DXX-EXX
E: Agency Approval Option:
00 05
Not required Multiple Approvals
C: Total Length Option:
05 10 15 20 50 90
0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metre (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) Connector not installed Miniature ClickLoc connector
TM
Tables
Table 1. Part Dimensions in mm (inches)
Dimension A B C&D E
00 02
Catalog Number
coaxial 21000
83.3 (3.28) 78.2 (3.08)
161.6 (6.36) 151.9 (5.97)
See Ordering Option C &D See Ordering Option C &D
26.7 (1.05) 27.9 (1.10)
00 05
Not required Multiple Approvals 24701
Spare 3300 NSV Reverse Mount Probe, 3/8-24 UNF threads 330906-02-12-CXX-DXX-EXX
C: Total Length Option:
05 10 50 70
0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 7.0 metres (23.0 feet) Connector not installed Miniature ClickLoc TM coaxial connector
00 02
00 05
Not required Multiple Approvals
Page 5 of 7
Table 2. Maximum Length of C and D Dimension for Proximity Probes

Probe Cable Length Maximum C & D Dimension
0.5 metre (3300 Series) 1.0 metre
343 mm (13.5 in) 742 mm (29.2 in)
Table 3. Maximum C and D Dimension with Visible Probe P/N and S/N
Probe Cable Length Maximum C & D Dimension
0.5 metre 1.0 metre
Not Visible 432 mm (17.0 in)
Page 6 of 7
Dimensional Drawing
Figure 1. Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies Dimensions are in millimetres (inches)
Part number 141600-01 Revision D, December 2002
Page 7 of 7
Instructions For Installation and Operation
Slide Bearings TYPE EM with external oil supply
RH EMZEI E 7.02
Installation and Operation
RENK AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Werk Hannover Weltausstellungsallee 21 D 30539 Hannover Telephone: (0511) 8601 0 Telefax: (0511) 8601 266 e mail: gleitlager.hannover@renk ag.com http:\\www.renk.de All rights reserved. Copy or reproduction without prior permission of RENK Aktiengesellschaft Hannover prohibited.
2 RH EMZEI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002 RENK AG Werk Hannover
EM with external oil supply
Contents Bearing Coding .............................................................................................................................................5 General Drawing of the Slide Bearing EM with External Oil Supply .............................................................7 General Drawing of the Thrust Part with RD Thrust Pads............................................................................9 General Drawing of the Loose Oil Ring.......................................................................................................11 General Drawing of the Floating Labyrinth Seal with Seal Carrier..............................................................13 General Drawing of the Rigid Labyrinth Seal..............................................................................................15 General Drawing of the Baffle.....................................................................................................................17 General Drawing of the Dust Flinger...........................................................................................................19 1 2 3 Considerations for Use ...........................................................................................................................21 Safety Instructions ..................................................................................................................................22 Preparatory Work ....................................................................................................................................23 3.1 3.2 3.3 Tools and equipment .......................................................................................................................23 Use of lifting equipment ...................................................................................................................23 Dismantling of the bearing ...............................................................................................................26 Dismantling of the shaft seal outboard side...........................................................................26 Dismantling of the machine seal...............................................................................................27 Dismantling of the housing .......................................................................................................27 Dismantling of the shaft seal machine side ...........................................................................27
3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.4 3.5 3.6 4
Cleaning of the bearing ....................................................................................................................28 Checks .............................................................................................................................................28 Assembly of the RD thrust pads ......................................................................................................29
Assembly of the Bearing.........................................................................................................................32 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 Assembly of the the machine seal ...................................................................................................32 Assembly opening for bearing fittting ..............................................................................................32 Assembly of the bottom half of the housing into the machine shield..............................................34 Fitting in the bottom half of the shell................................................................................................34 Assembly of the shaft seal machine side ......................................................................................35 Installation of the loose oil ring ........................................................................................................37 Fitting in the top half of the shell......................................................................................................38 Assembly of the top half of the housing ..........................................................................................39
RENK AG Werk Hannover
RH EMZEI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
Assembly of the Seals Outboard Side ................................................................................................41 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10).......................................................................................................41 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11) ............................................................................45 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle ( Type 12)....................................................................................46 Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20) ...........................................................................................................46 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21).................................................................................48 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22)..........................................................................................49
Instructions for Assembly of Peripheral Equipment ............................................................................ 50 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 Assembly of the oil supply equipment .............................................................................................50 Temperature measurement..............................................................................................................52 Water supply ....................................................................................................................................52 Closing of the assembly opening.....................................................................................................52
7 8
Bearing Insulation....................................................................................................................................53 Operation..................................................................................................................................................53 8.1 8.2 Filling up with lubricating oil .............................................................................................................53 Trial run ............................................................................................................................................54
Glossary....................................................................................................................................................55
Bearing Coding
Type
Housing
Heat Dissipation
Shape of Bore and Type of Lubrication

C plain cylindrical bore without oil ring plain cylindrical bore with loose oil ring Q
Thrust part
Size Diameter
80D100 100D125 125D160 160D200 200D250 250D315
centre flange mounted bearing
lubrication by oil circulation with external oil cooling lubrication by oil circulation with external oil cooling when oil throughput is high circulating pump and natural cooling circulating pump and water cooling (finned cooler in oil sump )
without thrust part (non locating bearing ) plain sliding surfaces with oil grooves (locating bearing)
9 11
14 18 22 28
two lobe bore (lemon bore) E taper land faces for one without oil ring sense of rotation (locating bearing) four lobe bore without oil ring K taper land faces (locating bearing) A elastically supported circular tilting pads (RD thrust pads) (locating bearing)
Example for bearing coding:
22 200 Type EM slide bearing with centre flange mounted housing, lubrication by oil circulation with external oil cooling, plain cylindrical bore with loose oil ring, locating bearing with taper land faces, size 22, diameter 200.
Shaft seals
Type 10 floating labyrinth seal (IP 44) Type 11 floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (IP 54) Type 12 floating labyrinth seal with baffle (IP 55) Type 20 rigid labyrinth seal (IP 44) Type 21 rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (IP 54) Type 22 rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (IP 55)
RH-EMZEI-E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
General Drawing Slide Bearing EM with external oil supply
RH EMZE/WI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
10
11
12
13
14 15
4 3
16
17 2
xxx
1 36
xxx
18 19
xxx
20 35 21 34 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
33
32
31
30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Engraved numbers housing Top half of the housing Tapped hole for the thrust part oil supply (optional ) Positioning pin nut Plate ( Assembly opening ) Screw Eye bolt Positioning pin Top sight glass Tapped hole ( in the top and bottom halves of the shell, up size 14 ) Top half of the shell Screw Machine seal Hamp packing seal groove Hamp packing Screw (split line of the housing) Screw (split line of the machine seal) Bottom half of the shell Tapped hole Engraved number shell Bottom half of the housing Recess Pressure equalizing hose Screw (split line of the shell) Screw Spherical seating Tapped hole for temperature measurement of the journal part Oil inlet connection hole Tapped hole for the oil sump temperature measurement Outlet/Inlet cooling water (Type E.T..) Cooler ( Type E.T..) Hexagon head plug (Oil drain plug) Metal tabs ( optional for EMZL. ) Oil outlet connection hole Oil outlet pipe with lock nut and lead seal Marking
General Drawing of the Thrust Part with Circular Tilting Pads (RD Thrust Pads)
RH RDZE/WI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
37
38 39 40
41
42
43
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Carrier ring Location groove Shroud ring top half Screw Shroud ring bottom half Circular tilting pad (RD thrust pad) Anti Rotation pin
General Drawing of the Loose Oil Ring
RH LSZE/WI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
11
44 45 46 47
44 45 46 47
Loose Oil Ring Dowel pin Hole Screw
General Drawing of the Floating Labyrinth Seal with Seal Carrier
RH SSZE/WI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
13
Bearing side 48
54 53
49
50 52 51
58
Outer view
55
57
56
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
Seal carrier top half Garter spring Groove Seal carrier bottom half Bottom half of the seal Top half of the seal Anti rotation pin Screw Engraved number Groove ( Type 11 ) Engraved number
General drawing of the Rigid Labyrinth Seal
RH KDZE/WI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
15
59 60
65
61 (2x)
62
64
63
59 60 61 62 63 64 65
Rigid labyrinth seal top half Screw Screw (split line) Groove ( Type 21 ) Rigid labyrinth seal bottom part Engraved number Engraved number
General Drawing of the Baffle
RH DSZE/WI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
17
66
67
68
66 67 68
Baffle top half Screw Baffle bottom half
General Drawing of the Dust Flinger
RH LRZE/WI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
19
69
70 (2x)
69 70
Dust flinger Screw (split line)
Considerations for Use
The instructions for installation and operation are addressed to qualified technical personnel (fitters, mechanic installers, mechanical engineers). Read these instructions carefully before starting assembly. Slide bearings of type EM are almost universally used in the engineering industry. Therefore it is not possible to provide detailed information on all possible types and range of applications for these bearing types. For instance, the position of the connection points for supply and monitoring equipment is determined by the place of application ( in the following called " installation " ). Please keep ready the guidelines with the technical documentation before starting assembly and operation of the slide bearings. Additional technical documentation with detailed information is supplied in case of special design bearings. Please contact RENK Export or Domestic Department for supplementary information on bearings. Please indicate the bearing coding and the full reference number, too. Following indications should be observed when reading these instructions. Safety instructions are marked as follows: Danger! Warning of dangers for personnel. Example: Warning of injury
Attention! Warning of damage for the bearing or installation.
Useful recommendations and additional information are framed. EM...Q This is how chapters, instructions or recommendations are marked when referring to a single type or size of a bearing. Example: Slide bearing type EM without thrust part ( non locating bearing ) Instruction follows.
Beginning of an enumeration.
( ) This is how the different parts of a bearing as described in the general drawings ( numbers ) are marked in the text.
- Use the enclosed check list before starting assembly or operation. Copies available on request. - The check list provides the experienced mechanical fitters of RENK bearings with the necessary instructions for installation and operation.
21
Safety Instructions Danger! The maintenance and inspection of the slide bearings should be carried out by: persons nominated by the safety representative persons correspondingly trained and instructed persons with knowledge on appropriate standards, regulations and accident prevention rules persons with knowledge on first aid measures and local rescue centres.
Warning of injury! Before starting work on the bearing: Switch off the installation. Make sure the installation is not in operation. Never lift or transport machines, etc.by the bearing eye bolts. These are only intended for assembly and dismantling of the bearing !
Warning of injury! Do not grab such heavy bearing parts as the bearing housing during assembly or dismantling works. This could result in bruising or injury to hands !
Attention! All metal parts of a slide bearing consisting of top and bottom part such as the housing, shells, shaft seals are marked by engraved numbers. Fit together only the parts with the same number.
Attention! In case the admissible bearing temperature exceeds 15 K inadmissible vibrations occur unusual noises or odours are noticed monitoring equipment triggers alarm shut down the installation and inform the maintenance personnel in charge.
Attention! Do not operate the bearing below the transition speed values indicated in the bearing calculation, thus avoiding inadmissible operating conditions, which could lead to damage to the bearing.
Attention! Please observe our leaflet Technical Information No. 85 which refers to various sealing compounds for extended technical applications.
22
3 3.1
Preparatory Work Tools and equipment
- Following tools and equipment are necessary:

Allan key set Wrenching key set Open jawed spanner set Feeler gauges ( up 0,05 mm ) Caliper gauge Emery paper, plain scraper Oil stone Lifting equipment Permanent sealing compound Clean (close weave) rags Oil with the correct viscosity ( see bearing type plate ) Detergents Liquid screw locking compound ( e.g. LOCTITE 242 ) Liquid sealing compound and Teflon tape
3.2
Use of lifting equipment Warning of injury! Before transport or lifting check if the eye bolts are tight ! Insecure eye bolts could result in bearing becoming loose. Before moving the bearing by the eye bolts make sure that the split line screws are tightened, otherwise the bottom half of the bearing could become detached. Make sure that the eye bolts are not exposed to bending stress, otherwise the bolts could break. Follow exactly the instructions for the use of lifting equipment.
- Use lifting equipment for assembly or transport of the following items:

Transport/Assembly of: Use lifting equipment for the following bearing sizes 9 28 14 28 11 28 14 28
Whole bearing unit Top half of the housing Bottom half of the housing Bearing shells
23
- Following steps are to be observed before using the lifting equipment:

Whole bearing unit
- Check if the screws at the split line are tight (16):

Bearing size Torque [Nm] 9 40 11 69 14 170 18 330 22 570 28 1150
- Check if the eye bolts (7) are tight. - Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts (7).
Top half of the housing
- Check if the eye bolts (7) are tight. - Connect the lifting devices to the eye bolts (7).
Size 22 and 28
- Sizes 22 and 28 are delivered equipped with an assembly device. When not in use, this assembly device is located in the "parking position" behind the flange and as such it is not allowed to use it as transport device.
Illustration 1:
Assembly device
24
To mount the top half of the housing remove the top sight glass and screw in the assembly device. By using the appropriate lifting equipment and with the help of the assembly device it is possible to lift and mount the top half of the housing in a straight position. After assembling the top half of the housing put the assembly device back into the "parking position" behind the flange and screw in the top sight glass. Bottom half of the housing
- Screw two eye bolts (7) with suitable threads tight into the cross placed opposite tapped holes (19).
Bearing size Tapped hole 9 M 10 11 M 12 14 M 16 18 M 20 22 M 24 28 M 30
- Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts (7).

Bearing shells
- Screw two eye bolts or screw hooks with suitable threads tight into the tapped holes (10):
Bearing size Tapped hole 14 M8 18 M 12 22 M 12 28 M 16
- Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts or to the screw hooks.
25
3.3
Dismantling of the bearing
Attention Make sure that the work place and the parts to be assembled are clean. Contamination and damage to the bearing, especially to the working surfaces, have a negative influence on the operating quality and could lead to premature failure. 3.3.1 Dismantling of the shaft seal outboard side
- Dismantle the shaft seals of the bearing. Proceed according to the sealing type:
Type 12 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle ( Type 12 ):
- Disconnec t the top half of the baffle (66) and the bottom (68). To do so, loosen the screws (67). - Further proceed as in the case of type 10 and 11 seal.
Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10) Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11)
Type 10 Type 11
- Loosen and remove all screws (55). - Simultaneously take away in axial direction both top half (48) and bottom half (51) of the seal carrier from the housing. - Lift off the top half of the seal carrier (48) and take out the floating labyrinth seal from the bottom half of the seal carrier (51). - Remove the protective cardboard (for transport protection) from the floating labyrinth seal. Proceed as indicated for sizes 9 11 14 28 - Take hold of the floating labyrinth seal with both hands.Press out the protective cardboard with both thumbs. - Take both halves of the seal (52), (53) by the split line.Pull both halves apart, till you can press out the protective cardboard. Remove carefully by pressing along the edge of the split line.
Warning of injury! During dismantling of the floating labyrinth seal hold on tight to the tensioned garter spring (49) which otherwise could bounce back and lead to injury.
Size 9 11 Size 14 18
- Take both seal halves (52),(53) and pull them apart by approximately 20 mm. - Open the garter spring (49).
Type 22 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (type 22)
- Separate the top and bottom half (66), (68) of the baffle, by untightening the screws (67). - Further proceed as in the case of types 20 and 21.
Rigid labyrinth seal (type 20) Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (type 21)
Type 20 Type 21
- Untighten all screws (60) and remove them. - Simultaneously remove in axial direction both top and bottom (59), (63) halves of the rigid labyrinth seal. - Remove the screws (61) at the split line. - Separate the top half of the rigid labyrinth seal (59) from the bottom half (63) and take out the protective cardboard (used for safe transport).
26
3.3.2
Dismantling of the machine seal
Loosen the hose clamps at the bottom half of the housing. Pull off the pressure equalizing hose (23). Loosen the split line screws (17) of the machine seal and turn them out. Loosen the screws (12) and remove the seal parts. Dismantling of the housing
3.3.3 EM.V. Size 22 and 28
- Unscrew the screw plug with the welded on positioning pin. - Replace the top sight glass (9) by the assembly device. The top half of the housing can be lifted and transported by using the assembly device, well tight, and the appropriate lifting equipment. - Unscrew the screws (16) at the split line and lift the top half of the housing (2). - Take out both top (11) and bottom (18) halves of the shell from the bottom half of the housing (21).
Attention! Do not damage the thrust and radial working surfaces!
- Unscrew the screws (24) at the split line and separate the top and bottom halves of the shell (11), (18) without using any tools or other devices.
Attention! If the bottom half of the shell (18) is provided with metal tabs (33) do not remove them.They regulate the oil level in the oil pockets. EMT.. The oil cooler (31) is already assembled and does not have to be removed for cleaning purposes. 3.3.4 Dismantling of the shaft seal machine side
The machine side seal is of Type 10, floating labyrinth seal.
- Remove the floating labyrinth seal from the bottom half of the housing. - Notice the anti rotation pin at the split line of the bottom half of the housing. - Remove the protective cardboard (for transport protection) from the floating labyrinth seal. Proceed as indicated for sizes 9 11 14 28
Size 9 11 Size 14 18
- Take hold of the floating labyrinth seal with both hands. Press out the protective cardboard with both thumbs. - Take both halves of the seal (52), (53) by the split line. Pull both halves apart, till you can press out the protective cardboard. Remove carefully by pressing along the edge of the split line.
Warning of injury! During dismantling of the floating labyrinth seal hold on tight to the tensioned garter spring (49) which otherwise could bounce back and lead to injury.
- Take both seal halves (52), (53) and pull them apart by approximately 20 mm. - Open the garter spring (49).
27
3.4
Cleaning of the bearing
Attention! Use only non aggressive detergents, such as for instance: VALVOLINE 150. Alcaline cleaning compounds (pH-value 6 to 9, short reaction time).
Warning of injury! Please observe the instructions for the use of the detergents.
Attention! Never use cleaning wool or fibrous cloth. Residues of such materials left in the bearing could lead to excessive temperatures.
- Clean the following parts thoroughly, to remove all residues of preservation :

EM.L. inside the top half of the housing (2) inside the bottom half of the housing (21) all plain parts of the top and bottom half of the housing (2),(21) top half of the shell (11) bottom half of the shell (18) sealing surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the seal carrier or of the rigid labyrinth seal
loose oil ring (44).
3.5
Checks
- Please check if there is any visible damage. Check the split line and the working surfaces in particular.
EM.L.
Insulated Bearings
The loose oil ring (44) should show absolutely no burrs or have no shoulders.
- Check the insulating layer of the spherical seating (26). - If necessary, change the damaged parts.
28
EM..A
3.6
Assembly of the RD thrust pads
- Clean both top (39) and bottom (41) halves of the shroud ring and all RD thrust pads (42). Proceed as described under chapter 3.4 (Cleaning of the bearing).
Bearing size Diameter 80 9 90 100 100 11 110 125 125 14 140 160 160 18 180 200 200 22 225 250 250 28 280 300 Number of RD thrust pads per bearing [Pieces] 14 16 20 16 18 22 18 20 24 18 20 24 18 20 24 18 20 24
- Check if the parts show any visible damage.

Carry out the assembly of both thrust parts of the top (11) and bottom (18) half of the shell according to the following instructions: One RD thrust pad on both sides of the top half of the shell has a bore for the insertion of a thermo sensor ( thrust part temperature measurement).
29
To mount the RD thrust pad into the correct position proceed as follows:
- Find the position of the location groove (38) on the top half of the shroud ring (39). Insert the RD thrust pad (42) with the anti rotation pin (43) into the corresponding thrust pad location hole (37). - Insert all other RD thrust pads (42) into the corresponding thrust pad holes (37) of the top and bottom half of the shell (11), (18).
42 37
Illustration 2:
Assembly of the RD thrust pads
- Place the top half of the shroud ring (39) into the the top half of the shell (11) by inserting the anti rotation pin (43) into the location hole (38). Match the split line of the top half of the shell (11) with the split line of the top half of the shroud ring (39) in true alignment.
38 39 43
42
Illustration 3:
Assembly of the shroud ring
30
- Tighten the screws (40) to the following torque rates:

Bearing size Tapped hole Torque [Nm] 9 M4 1,4 11 M4 1,4 14 M5 2,7 18 M6 8 22 M8 20 28 M 10 40
- Place the bottom half of the shroud ring (41) into the bottom half of the shell (18). Match the corresponding split lines in true alignment. Tighten the screws (40) to the same torque value as valid for the top half of the shell (11). - Check the mobility of all RD thrust pads (42). If the RD thrust pads jam, realign the top (39) and bottom half (41) of the shroud ring.
Attention! Insufficient mobility of the RD thrust pads will cause damage of the bearing.
Both top and bottom halves of the shells are prepared for assembly.
31
Assembly of the Bearing
Attention! Remove all impurities or other objects such as screws, nuts, etc. from inside the bearing.If left inside they could lead to damage to the bearing. Cover up the opened bearing during work breaks.
Attention! Carry out all assembly operations without making use of force.
Attention! Secure all screws of the housing at the split line and flange with a liquid scrw locking compound (e.g. LOCTITE 242).
4.1
Assembly of the the machine seal
- Fit the bottom half of the machine seal around ist locating spigot on the bottom half of the housing. - Align the split lines of the housing and of the seal in true alignment. - Tighten the screws (12) by using the following torque value:
Bearing size Tapped hole Torque [Nm] 9 M6 8 11 M6 8 14 M6 8 18 M8 20 22 M8 20 28 M8 20
Fit the top half of the machine seal around ist locating spigot on the top half of the housing. Align the split lines of the housing and of the seal in true alignment. Tighten the screws (12) by using the following torque value: Place the pressure equalizing hoses (23) between the machine side seal (13) and the bottom half of the housing into the clamps and tighten them.
4.2
Assembly opening for bearing fittting
The machine shield is designed in two versions:
Split machine shield:

In this case the bottom half has a thick wall and is provided with the recess to permit the fitting of the housing. The top half of the machine shield can have either the thick wall or only a thin sheet. In both cases, after completed bearing installation, the top half of the machine shield is fastened to the top half of the bearing housing.
Non split machine shield

In this case the bottom half is provided with the recess to permit the fitting of the bottom half of the housing. The top half is provided with a greater opening which is used as assembly opening for the bearing. The following graph shows the minimum values necessary for the different bearing sizes.
32
EM..Q, EM..B, EM..K, EM..E
Bearing size Diameter of the mounting recess Z [mm] Flat surface of the bottom half / Radius Rumin [mm] Flat surface of the top half / Radius Romin [mm] Opening height H [mm] Opening width A [mm]
9 375 215 240 195 135
11 450 255 280 230 150
14 530 305 310 280 85
18 630 360 360 330 95
22 800 455 455 415 120
28 1000 565 565 515 155
EM..A,
Bearing size Diameter of the mounting recess Z [mm] Flat surface of the bottom half / Radius Rumin ]mm] Flat surface of the top half / Radius Romin [mm] Opening height H [mm] Opening width A [mm]
9 375 215 250 205 135
11 450 255 285 240 150
14 530 305 310 290 85
18 630 360 365 350 95
22 800 455 470 440 120
28 1000 565 570 540 155
Attention! The flat surface of the bottom half Rumin must not be lower than 4 mm.
Size 9 11
A
Size 14 28
45
A
15
Ro
Ru
Ro
Ru
Illustration 4:
Assembly opening slide bearing type EM
After completed bearing installation the remaining opening is covered by a thin metal plate (5).
33
4.3
Assembly of the bottom half of the housing into the machine shield
Attention! The lifting equipment should not come to contact with the seal and working surfaces of the shaft.
- Lift the shaft high enough to give room for the assembly operations. - Protect the shaft against unintended movement. - Place the bottom half of the housing with the spigot (22) into the mounting recess of the machine shield. - Tighten the flange screws to the following torque rates. Use only 8.8 quality screws.
Bearing size Suitable flange screws Torque [Nm] for m tot (lightly oiled) 9 M 10 40 11 M 12 69 14 M 16 170 18 M 20 330 22 M 24 570 28 M 30 1150
4.4 EM..E
Fitting in the bottom half of the shell
Attention! Mounting the bottom half of the shell (not marked with an arrow) correctly will ease the assembly of the top half shell (marked with an arrow) (see chapter 4.7).
- Apply some lubricant to the spherical seating (26) in the bottom half of the housing (21) and to the working surfaces of the shaft. Use the same type of lubricant as indicated for bearing operation ( see type plate ). - Place the bottom half of the shell (18) on the working surface of the shaft. Turn the bottom half of the shell (18) into the bottom half of the housing (21) with the split line surfaces of both halves in true alignment.
In case the bottom half of the shell doesn`t turn in easily, check the position of the shaft and the alignment of the bearing housing
EM..B, EM..K, EM..E, EM..A
Attention! These operations should be carried out most carefully. The thrust parts of the bottom shell must not be damaged.
- Lower down the shaft till it sits on the bottom half of the shell (18).
34
4.5
Assembly of the shaft seal machine side
The machine side shaft seal is , as standard, a floating labyrinth seal. The integrated seal groove is in the top and bottom halves of the housing. Warning of injury! During assembly hold the garter spring ends securely to avoid them suddenly releasing and causing possible injury !
Check the movement of the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft in the seal area outside the housing.
Put the garter spring (49) around the shaft and hook both ends into each other. Put both halves of the seal (52),(53) in their place on the shaft. Put the garter spring (49) into the groove (50). Turn the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft.
Attention! The floating labyrinth seal should turn easily on the shaft. A jammed seal could lead to overheating during operation and even to shaft wear. If the floating labyrinth seal jams, dismantle the seal remove the worn parts of the seal carefully, by using emery paper or a plain scraper.
- Dismantle the floating labyrinth seal. - Apply sealing compound to the guide surfaces of the integrated seal groove in the bottom half of the housing.
Illustration 5:
Application of sealing compound to the integrated seal groove
35
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the guide surfaces and on the split line surfaces of both halves of the seal (52), (53).
Illustration 6:
Application of sealing compound to the floating labyrinth seal
Please observe the instructions for the use of sealing compound.
- Place the bottom half of the seal (52) with the labyrinths onto the shaft. - The oil return holes at the bearing side must be clear and open. - Turn the seal in opposite direction from the anti rotation pin into the groove of the housing until the split lines of the bottom half of the housing and the bottom half of the seal match each other. - Remove the residue of sealing compound. - Push the garter spring into the integrated seal groove between the bottom half of the housing and the seal until both ends jut out from the split line. - Place the top half of the seal with the cam facing the inside of the bearing on the bottom half of the seal. - Stretch the garter spring till both ends can be hooked.
36
4.6
Installation of the loose oil ring
- Open both split lines of the loose oil ring (44) by untightening and removing the screws (47). Separate both halves of the loose oil ring (44) carefully without using any tools or other devices.
I II
44
44
44
47
Illustration 7:
Opening of the loose oil ring
- Place both halves of the loose oil ring into the shell groove encircling the shaft.Press the positioning pin (45) of each split line into the corresponding hole (46). - Adjust both halves of the loose oil ring till the split lines match each other.
21 45 44
44
18
Illustration 8:

Bearing size Torque [Nm] 9 1,4 11 1,4 14 1,4 18 2,7 22 2,7 28 2,7
37
4.7
Fitting in the top half of the shell
- Apply some lubricant to the working surfaces of the shaft. Use the same type of lubricant as indicated for bearing operation (see type plate). - Check if the engraved number (20) on the bottom half of the shell corresponds with the engraved number (20) on the top half of the shell. - Place the top half of the shell (11) on the shaft; both engraved numbers(20) should be on one side.
Attention! An incorrectly placed shell could jam the shaft thus leading to the damage of both shaft and bearing. EM..B, EM..K, EM..E, EM..A
insulated bearing
Attention! Place the top half of the shell carefully on the shaft. The thrust parts of the top half of the shell should not be damaged. In the case of bearings arranged for insulation monitoring, connect the black cable for insulation monitoring to the bearing shell. According to the bearing type, there are two possibilities of connection. 1. The black cable is provided with a cable connector.
- Plug the cable with the cable connector into the counterpart available on the top of the shell. - Lead the cable through the cable gland in the bottom half of the housing and out of the bearing. - Tighten the cable gland oil tight.
2. The black cable is provided with an eyelet.
- Fasten the cable with the eyelet to the split line of the shell, by using one of the shell joint bolts. - Lead the cable through the cable gland in the bottom half of the housing and out of the bearing. - Tighten the cable gland oil tight. - Tighten up the screw (24) at the split line of the shell to the following torque rates:
- Check the split line of the bearing shell by using a feeler gauge. The split line gap should be less than 0,05 mm. If the split line is greater than this, dismantle both top (11) and bottom (18) halves of the shell. Rework the split line surfaces of the top (11) and bottom (18) half of the shell with an oil stone.
EM.L.
Marine bearings
- Check the mobility of the loose oil ring (44).

A guide bush in the top half of the shell secures the function of the loose oil ring.
- Check the mobility of the loose oil ring (44) in the guide bush.
38
EM..E
Shells with taper land faces suitable only for one direction of rotation are marked with an arrow on the top half shell, which indicates the sense of rotation of the shaft. The arrow indicates the allowed direction of shaft rotation after completion of the bearing assembly.
- Before mounting the top half of the housing check that the proposed direction of rotation of the shaft corresponds to the direction indicated by the arrow on the top half of the shell. - If the directions match, continue the assembly of the bearing. - If the directions do not match, the shell must be disassembled, re aligned and mounted again.
Attention! A wrongly placed shell, without observance of the direction of rotation of the shaft, impairs the operational safety of the bearing.
4.8
Assembly of the top half of the housing
- Check the true alignment of the split lines of the shell (11), (18) and bottom (21) half of the housing.
EM.C. EM.L. EM.Y. The positioning pin (8) in the top half of the housing fits in the corresponding hole (4) in the shell.
- Check if the engraved numbers (1) on the top and bottom halves of the housing correspond. - Clean the split line surfaces of the top and bottom halves of the housing. - Apply CurilT over the whole surface of the split line of the bottom half (21) of the housing.
- Place the top half of the housing carefully into the machine shield, without touching the seals or the bearing shell.
Illustration 9:
39
- Lower the top half of the housing (2) vertically on the bottom half of the housing (21). Lower the top half of the housing (2) till the split line of the housing is not visible any more. - Gently hit the bottom half of the housing (21) with a nylon hammer, thus ensuring the alignment of the spherical seating. - Insert the screws (16) at the split line of the housing. Tighten them crosswise to the following torque rates:
- Hand tighten the screws at the split line of the machine seal.
Size 22 and 28. EM.V.
insulated bearing
- Unscrew the assembly device and put it back into its "parking position" behind the flange. Tighten the assembly device by using the following torque: 40 Nm. - Replace the top sight glass and screw it hand tight into place. - Tighten the screw plug with the welded on positioning pin into the top half of the housing (2).
Insulation monitoring In the case of electric insulated bearings provided with insulation monitoring, the cable coming out of the bearing housing must be connected in a professional manner. According to the type supplied, please follow the assembly instructions given below. a) The cable is very short and provided with a further cable connector at the end of it. This cable is ready for connection to the bearing housing. The bottom half of the bearing housing is provided with the counterpart.
- Plug the cable connector into the counterpart.

Attention! This connection bypasses the electrical insulation of the bearing. In the case of electric machines, make sure at least one bearing is electrically insulated. To check the electrical insulation, interrupt the connection cable bearing housing. Check the electrical resistance with a suitable measuring instrument. Make sure that both bearings and the coupling are electrically insulated. b) The cable has a free end. In this case the customer has to make the connection. Attention! If only one bearing is insulated, the end of the cable must not be earthed. Any further connection depends on the customers requirements related to the insulation monitoring and can not therefore be described here.
40
Assembly of the Seals Outboard Side
- Assemble the outboard side seals. Proceed according to the seal type used. Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10) Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11) Floating labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 12) Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20) Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21) Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22)
Chapter 5.1 Chapter 5.2 Chapter 5.3 Chapter 5.4 Chapter 5.5 Chapter 5.6
Type 10
5.1
Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10) Warning of injury! During assembly hold the garter spring ends securely to avoid them suddenly releasing and causing possible injury !
Check the movement of the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft.
Put the garter spring (49) around the shaft and hook both ends into each other. Put both halves of the seal (52),(53) in their place on the shaft. Put the garter spring (49) into the groove (50). Turn the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft.
- Dismantle the floating labyrinth seal.
41
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the guide surfaces and on the split line surfaces of both halves of the seal (52), (53).
Illustration 10: Application of sealing compound to the floating labyrinth seal
- Press the bottom half of the seal (52) against the shaft. - Place the top half of the seal (53) on the shaft and align both halves of the seal to each other. - Place the garter spring (49) into the groove (50) and stretch until both ends can be hooked.
54
53
49
52
21
Illustration 11: Assembly of the floating labyrinth seal

42 RH EMZEI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002 RENK AG Werk Hannover
- Place in true alignment the split line of the floating labyrinth seal and the split line of the seal carrier. - Check that both engraved numbers (56) and (58) on top and bottom halves of the seal carrier (48), (51) correspond. - Clean the following parts: the seal surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the seal carrier (the groove of the floating labyrinth seal, the flange surfaces) the split line surfaces of the top (48) and bottom half (51) of the seal carrier the flange surfaces of the housing. - Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to: the lateral surfaces of the groove at the top (48) and bottom half (51) of the seal carrier the flange surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the seal carrier the split line surfaces of the bottom half of the seal carrier (51).
Ilustration 12:
Application of sealing compound on the seal carrier
43
- Place the top half of the seal carrier (48) on the top half of the seal (53). Press the bottom half (51) of the seal carrier against it. Push the shaft seal completely into the housing.
48 54
53
Illustration 13
Assembly of the seal carrier
- Place in true alignment the split lines of the seal carrier and the housing. - Tighten up the screws (55) to the following torque rates:
44
Type11
5.2
Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11)
- Assemble the floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger as described in Chapter 5.1, Floating labyrinth seal type 10. - Place both halves of the dust flinger (69) in front of the shaft seal around the shaft. Loosely screw in the screws (70) at the split line of the flinger.
69
48
57
Illustration 14: Clearance between dust flinger and seal carrier EM..Q
- Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (57) of the seal carrier. - Set the clearance "e" at the following figure around the whole unit:
maximum longitudinal extension of the shaft in operation + 1 mm (Parameters indicated in the Technical Documentation of the Installation).
- Tighten up both screws (70) to the following torque rates:

Seal diameter [mm] Torque [Nm] 80 140 7 >140 18
- Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (57) of the seal carrier. - Set the clearance "e"at 1 mm around the whole unit. - Tighten both screws (70) to the following torque rates:
45
Type 12
5.3
Floating labyrinth seal with baffle ( Type 12)
- Assemble the floating labyrinth seal with baffle as described in Chapter 5.1, type10. - Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the flange surfaces of the top half (66) and bottom half (68) of the baffle. - Screw the top half of the baffle (66) onto top half of the seal carrier (48) the bottom half of the baffle (68) onto bottom half of the seal carrier (51). - Tighten the screws (67) to the following torque rates:
Type 20
5.4
Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20)
- Check if the engraved numbers (64) and (65) on the bottom half (63) and top half (59) of the rigid labyrinth seal correspond. - Clean the flange surfaces of the top half (59) and bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal the split line surfaces of the top half (59) and bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal the flange surfaces of the housing. - Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the following parts: the flange surfaces of the top (59) and bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal the split lines of the bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
Illustration 15: Application of sealing compound to the rigid labyrinth seal

46
- Place the top half (59) of the rigid labyrinth seal on the shaft and press slightly the bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal from below against it. Lightly push the rigid labyrinth seal completely into the housing. - Tighten the screws (61) at the labyrinth seal split line. - Place in parallel alignment the split line of the rigid labyrinth seal and the split line of the housing. Press the rigid labyrinth seal slightly from below against the shaft. Adjust the rigid labyrinth seal in such a way that the clearance "f" between the shaft and the rigid labyrinth seal at both split lines has the same figure.
59
21
llustration 16: Alignment of the rigid labyrinth seal
63

47
Type 21
5.5
Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21)
- Assemble the rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger as described in Chapter 5.4, type 20. - Place both halves of the dust flinger (69) round the shaft, in front of the rigid labyrinth seal. Mount both screws (70) at the split line loose.
69
59
e
62
Illustration 17: Clearance between dust flinger and rigid labyrinth seal EM..Q
- Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (62) of the rigid labyrinth seal. - Set the clearance "e" at the following figure around the whole unit.
maximum longitudinal extension of the shaft in operation + 1 mm (Parameters are indicated in the Technical Documentation of the Installation).
- Tighten both screws (70) to the following torque rates:

- Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (62) of the rigid labyrinth seal. - Set the clearance "e" at 1 mm around the whole unit. - Tighten both screws (70) to the following torque rates:
48
Type 22
5.6
Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22)
- Assemble the rigid seal with baffle as described in Chapter 5.4, type 20. - Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound on the flange surfaces of the top half (66) and bottom half (68) of the baffle. - Screw the top half of the baffle (66) to the top half (59) of the rigid labyrinth seal the bottom half of the baffle (68) to the bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal. - Tighten the screws (67) to the following torque rates:
49
6 6.1
Instructions for Assembly of Peripheral Equipment Assembly of the oil supply equipment
The oil supply equipment together with the pressure, temperature and flow measuring instruments are usually provided by the user. The oil quantity and viscosity necessary for the operation of the bearing are specified in the bearing calculations. This manual contains only indications on the connection points with the bearing. The connection bores for the oil inlets in and outlets are on both lateral sides of the bearing, closed with screw plugs. Remove only those plugs where pipes are to be connected. Connection conditions Pipelines Inlet Precision steel pipe DIN 2391 Steel pipe DIN 2448 Outlet Steel pipe DIN 2448 max. 0,15 m/s Flow speed about 1,5 m/s Indications Place the throttle valve in the inlet pipeline directly in front of the bearing
15 inclination if 15 inclination is not possible enlarge correspondingly the cross sections of the pipeline directly behind the bearing.
Too low inclination or / and too small cross section lead to oil back pressure in the bearing. Leakage or overflowing are the consequences.
- Before starting assembly pickle all pipes which
have been welded have been bent hot are contamined and rusty inside.
Warning of injury! Please observe the instructions for the use of the pickling fluid. Wear rubber gloves, rubber apron, rubber boots and safety glasses.
50
Rinsing of the oil circuit
- Rinse the whole oil circuit to remove all impurities. The bearing must not be connected to the oil circuit during rinsing operations. The rinsing should be done before connecting the oil supply to the bearing or the bearing should be disconnected from the oil circuit. If this is not possible, dismantle the top half of the housing and remove the shells.
To avoid damage to the fittings:
- Remove all measuring and switching fittings. - Close all connections (see also the Technical Documentation of the Installation). - Fill up the oil supply system with lubricant. Use the type with the viscosity indicated on the bearing type plate. - Start operating the oil supply system.Collect the first charge of high contamined oil separately. Continue rinsing until the lubricant contains no impurities. - Drain off the oil supply system completely. Clean the oil tank and the filters.
Warning of environmental pollution! Please observe the instructions for the use of the lubricant. The manufacturer could provide information on waste oil disposal.
- Assemble all fittings.

Oil inlet
- Connect the inlet pipe at the connection hole (28) for the oil inlet. Seal with Teflon tape or liquid sealing compound.
Depending on the bearing size, the connection hole has the following threads: Bearing size Connection hole / Oil inlet (28) 9 G 3/8 11 G 3/8 14 G 3/8 18 G 1/2 22 G 3/4 28 G 3/4
If the bearing calculation specifies a separate supply source for the thrust parts:
- connect the inlet pipes to the connection hole of the thrust part supply (3) on the lateral side of the bearing. Seal with Teflon tape or liquid sealing compound.
51
Oil outlet EMZ.., EMX..
- Screw the oil outlet with special nut and lead sealing ring (35) into the oil outlet connection hole (34) . Connect the oil outlet pipe to the flange. Depending on the bearing size the connection hole for the oil outlet (35) has the following standard threads (larger threads are possible):
Bearing size Connection hole for oil outlet (35) 9 G 1 1/4 11 G 1 1/4 14 G 1 1/2 18 G 1 1/2 22 G2 28 G 2 1/2
EM.L.
- Screw the oil outlet with special nut and lead sealing ring (35) into the corresponding hole (34) with the marking at top dead centre. The spillover oil weir then ensures the minimum oil level for the emergency lubrication by means of the loose oil ring. Connect the oil outlet pipe to the flange. - Screw in the outlet pipe to the selected oil sump temperature measurement connection hole (29) and seal with Teflon tape or liquid sealing compound. The slide bearing type EM is provided with a tapped hole (G11/4) on both sides for the installation of an oil cooler and oil sump thermometer.Use an adapter with the necessary thread to connect suction pipes or oil sump thermometers.
EMU.., EMT..
6.2
Temperature measurement
- Fix suitable thermo sensors: into one of the tapped holes (27) for temperature measurements of the journal parts into one of the tapped holes (29) for temperature measurements of the oil sump into one of the tapped holes (optional) for temperature measurement of the thrust parts.
Proceed as follows:
- Take out the screw plugs from the connection holes. - Place the thermo sensor into the bore by using Teflon tape or sealing compound. - Connect the thermo sensor at the temperature monitoring equipment of the installation (see the Technical Documentation of the Installation for connecting and adjustement).
EMT..
6.3
Water supply
Following requirements should be observed before connecting the oil cooler (31):
water velocity of maximum 1,5 m/s in the cooling water inlet water pressure of maximum 5 bar adjusting tap on inlet outlet of cooling water under no pressure.
The direction of the cooling water passage in the oil cooler (31) is arbitrary.
6.4
Closing of the assembly opening
After completed bearing assembly and before starting operation close the assembly opening of the machine shield (with the thin metal plate (5)).
52
Bearing Insulation
These bearings are delivered insulated. The electrical insulation is assured by:
plastic coating of the spherical seatings (26) shaft seals made out of non conducting materials insulated positioning pin (8) insulated screwed connections for thermometers.
It is not necessary to insulate the pipelines.
- Mark the insulated bearing with the delivered plate "Insulated bearing shells". Install the plate in a visible place by using two grooved drive studs.
8 8.1
Operation Filling up with lubricating oil
Attention! Make sure that no impurities get into the bearing.
- Tighten all screw plugs in the connection holes (27), (28), (32), (34) to the necessary torque rates:
Screw plug threads Torque [Nm] for plugs with injection moulded plastic sealing ring Torque [Nm] for plugs with flexible sealing ring G 3/8 30 G 1/2 40 G 3/4 60 G1 110 G 1 1/4 G 1 1/2 160 230 G2 320 G 2 1/2 500
34
60
85
130
240
300
330
410
- Check that: the top sight glass (9) is tight, the screws should be hand tight. - Retighten the screws for oil inlet and outlet, and for the thrust parts (if existing). The necessary torque rates depend on the screw connections used.
In case thermo sensor or/and oil sump thermometer are used:
- Check if they are tight (according the the manufacturer's instructions). - Fill up the oil supply system with lubricant. Use a lubricant with a viscosity as indicated for the spedific bearing operation. - Start operating the oil supply system in order to fill the bearing with lubricant.
EM.C., EM.L., EM.Y.
- Remove the protective layer from the top sight glass (9). Continue as already mentioned above.
53
8.2
Trial run
- Before the trial run, check the following: the way the oil supply system functions ( see also the Technical Documentation of the Installation).The lubricant quantity at the bearing oil inlet must correspond to the values indicated in the EDP calculations. if the temperature monitoring equipment works.
EMT..
if the water cooling installation works.

Attention! Not enough lubricant leads to temperature rises and thus damage of the bearing. Too much lubricant leads to leakages.
The bearing is ready for operation.
- Supervise the bearing during the trial run (5 10 operating hours). Pay special attention to: the way the oil supply installation works ( necessary lubricant quantity, lubricant temperature, lubricant pressure before entering the bearing ) bearing temperature sliding noises of the shaft seals tightness occurrence of inadmissible vibrations.
Attention! If the bearing temperature exceeds the calculated value by 15 K ( see bearing calculation ) stop the installation immediately. Carry out an inspection of the bearing as described under Instructions for Service and Inspection of the Slide Bearings Type EM with External Oil Supply.
54
9 Baffle
Glossary With bearing types 10 and 20 the baffles are assembled externally in front of the shaft seals. The baffle, made of reinforced polyamide, protects the bearing from dust and water. The rigid labyrinth seal (type 20) is used with slide bearings type E with high oil throughput.It corresponds to the protective system IP44 and is made of an aluminium alloy. The rigid labyrinth seal is built of two halves, flanged at the housing.The labyrinths that wipe out the lubricant are arranged into two groups.The first two labyrinths , installed inside keep back most of the lubricant. Five further labyrinths protect the bearing from outside.They prevent the lubricant overflow and the ingress of impurities.The overflow lubricant is collected into a chamber between the both groups of labyrinths.Through the return bores the lubricant flows back into the bearing. The spherical seating is a special feature enabling the alignment of the shell in the housing.The shell is seated on two spherical seatings. The advantages of the spherical seating are: easy at assembly good heat transfer from the shell to the housing suitable for such applications with high thrust or journal loads. In the case of bearing types 10 and 20 a light alloy ring is clamped on the shaft in front of the shaft.This ring fits into a groove in the seal carrier or the rigid labyrinth seal, thus building a labyrinth. The labyrinth protects the shaft exit against low pressure that could otherwise " absorb " the lubricant. Low pressure occurs for instance in the case of rotating discs, such as couplings or cooling discs. The floating labyrinth seal (type 10) in the seal carrier is used as a shaft seal in the case of bearings type E operating under normal conditions. It prevents the lubricant and lubricant mist coming out and the ingress of impurities. The floating seal has a high capacity of resistance to wear. It is made of a high performance, high temperature stability and electrically insulated plastic material.The floating seal consists of two halves held together by a garter spring. Both ends of the spring are hooked together. In the case of slide bearings type EM the floating seal is mounted into a two piece seal carrier. The groove allows for radial movement of up to 1 mm. The seal is thus insensitive to shaft radial displacement or deflection. The sealing effect is produced by the baffles wiping off the lubricant from the shaft. The lubricant flows back into the bearing via oil return opening. In the case of the flange mounted bearings, the machine seal reduces the influence of positive and negative pressure in the machine thus preventing leakages at the inner seal area. The space between the machine seal and the bearing housing must always be vented to atmospheric pressure. The size of the gap between shaft and machine seal influences the sealing effect.
Rigid labyrinth seal
Spherical seating
Dust flinger
Floating labyrinth seal
Machine seal
55
Instructions for Maintenance and Inspection
Slide Bearings Type EM with external oil supply
RH EMZWI E 7.02
Maintenance and Inspection
RENK AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Werk Hannover Weltausstellungsallee 21 D 30539 Hannover Telephone: (0511) 8601 0 Telefax: (0511) 8601 266 e mail: gleitlager.hannover@renk ag.com http:\\www.renk.de All rights reserved. Copy or reproduction without prior permission of RENK Aktiengesellschaft Hannover prohibited.
RH EMZWI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
Contents Bearing Coding ..............................................................................................................................................5 General Drawing of the Slide Bearing EM with External Oil Supply ..............................................................7 General Drawing of the Thrust Part with Circular Tilting Pads (RD Thrust Pads)..........................................9 General Drawing of the Loose Oil Ring........................................................................................................11 General Drawing of the Floating Labyrinth Ring with Seal Carrier ..............................................................13 General Drawing of the Rigid Labyrinth Seal ...............................................................................................15 General Drawing of the Baffle ......................................................................................................................17 General Drawing of the Dust Flinger ............................................................................................................19 1 2 3 4 5 6 Considerations for Use ...........................................................................................................................21 Safety Instructions ..................................................................................................................................22 Operating Instructions after Standstill ..................................................................................................23 Maintenance Schedule ...........................................................................................................................24 Oil Change................................................................................................................................................25 Dismantling of the Bearing .....................................................................................................................26 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 Tools and equipment .......................................................................................................................26 Use of lifting equipment ...................................................................................................................26 Preparation for dismantling..............................................................................................................29 Dismantling of the shaft seal outboard side ..................................................................................30 Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10) ...............................................................................................30 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11).....................................................................30 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 12)..............................................................................30 Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20) ....................................................................................................30 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21) .........................................................................30 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22) ..................................................................................30
6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.5 6.6 6.7
Opening of the machine seal ...........................................................................................................31 Dismantling of the top half of the housing .......................................................................................31 Removal of the top half of the shell .................................................................................................32 Dismantling of the loose oil ring................................................................................................32 Dismantling the machine side shaft seal ..................................................................................32
6.7.1 6.7.2 6.8 6.9 7
Removal of the bottom half of the shell ...........................................................................................33 Dismantling of the machine seal ......................................................................................................33
Cleaning and Checking of the Bearing..................................................................................................34
Assembly of the Bearing.........................................................................................................................36 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 Fitting in the bottom half of the shell................................................................................................36 Assembly of the shaft seal machine side ......................................................................................37 Installation of the loose oil ring ........................................................................................................39 Fitting in the top half of the shell......................................................................................................40 Closing of the bearing ......................................................................................................................41 Assembly of the Seals Outboard Side...........................................................................................43 Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10) ...............................................................................................43 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11).....................................................................47 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 12)..............................................................................48 Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20) ....................................................................................................48 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21) .........................................................................50 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22) ..................................................................................50
8.6.1 8.6.2 8.6.3 8.6.4 8.6.5 8.6.6 9
Starting Operation after Inspection.......................................................................................................51
10 Corrosion Protection for Longer Standstill Periods ............................................................................52 11 Transport Protection...............................................................................................................................52 12 Glossary ...................................................................................................................................................53
Bearing Coding
Type
Housing
Heat Dissipation
Shape of Bore and Type of Lubrication

C plain cylindrical bore without oil ring plain cylindrical bore with loose oil ring Q
Thrust part
Size Diameter
80D100 100D125 125D160 160D200 200D250 250D315
M centre flange mounted bearing
lubrication by oil circulation with external oil cooling lubrication by oil circulation with external oil cooling for high oil throughput circulating pump and natural cooling circulating pump and water cooling (finned cooler in oil sump )
without thrust part (non locating bearing ) plain sliding surfaces with oil grooves (locating bearing) taper land faces for one sense of rotation (locating bearing) taper land faces (locating bearing) elastically supported circular tilting pads (RD thrust pads) (locating bearing)
9 11
14 18 22 28
two lobe bore (lemon shape) E without oil ring four lobe bore without oil ring K
Example for bearing coding:
22 200 Type E slide bearing with centrally flanged mounted housing, lubrication by oil circulation with external oil cooling, plain cylindrical bore with loose oil ring, locating bearing with taper land faces, size 22, diameter 200.
Shaft seals
Type 10 floating labyrinth seal (IP 44) Type 11 floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (IP 54) Type 12 floating labyrinth seal with baffle (IP 55) Type 20 rigid labyrinth seal ( IP 44) Type 21 rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (IP 54) Type 22 rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (IP 55)
RH-EMZWI-E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
General Drawing Slide Bearing EM with external oil supply
RH EMZE/WI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
10
11
12
13
14 15
4 3
16
17 2
xxx
1 36
xxx
18 19
xxx
20 35 21 34 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
33
32
31
30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Engraved numbers housing Top half of the housing Tapped hole for the thrust part oil supply (optional ) Positioning pin nut Plate ( Assembly opening ) Screw Eye bolt Positioning pin Top sight glass Tapped hole ( in the top and bottom halves of the shell, up size 14 ) Top half of the shell Screw Machine seal Hamp packing seal groove Hamp packing Screw (split line of the housing) Screw (split line of the machine seal) Bottom half of the shell Tapped hole Engraved number shell Bottom half of the housing Recess Pressure equalizing hose Screw (split line of the shell) Screw Spherical seating Tapped hole for temperature measurement of the journal part Oil inlet connection hole Tapped hole for the oil sump temperature measurement Outlet/Inlet cooling water (Type E.T..) Cooler ( Type E.T..) Hexagon head plug (Oil drain plug) Metal tabs ( optional for EMZL. ) Oil outlet connection hole Oil outlet pipe with lock nut and lead seal Marking
General Drawing of the Thrust Part with Circular Tilting Pads (RD Thrust Pads)
RH RDZE/WI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
37
38 39 40
41
42
43
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Carrier ring Location groove Shroud ring top half Screw Shroud ring bottom half Circular tilting pad (RD thrust pad) Anti Rotation pin
General Drawing of the Loose Oil Ring
RH LSZE/WI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
11
44 45 46 47
44 45 46 47
Loose Oil Ring Dowel pin Hole Screw
General Drawing of the Floating Labyrinth Seal with Seal Carrier
RH SSZE/WI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
13
Bearing side 48
54 53
49
50 52 51
58
Outer view
55
57
56
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
Seal carrier top half Garter spring Groove Seal carrier bottom half Bottom half of the seal Top half of the seal Anti rotation pin Screw Engraved number Groove ( Type 11 ) Engraved number
General drawing of the Rigid Labyrinth Seal
RH KDZE/WI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
15
59 60
65
61 (2x)
62
64
63
59 60 61 62 63 64 65
Rigid labyrinth seal top half Screw Screw (split line) Groove ( Type 21 ) Rigid labyrinth seal bottom part Engraved number Engraved number
General Drawing of the Baffle
RH DSZE/WI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
17
66
67
68
66 67 68
Baffle top half Screw Baffle bottom half
General Drawing of the Dust Flinger
RH LRZE/WI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
19
69
70 (2x)
69 70
Dust flinger Screw (split line)
Considerations for Use
The instructions for maintenance and inspection are addressed to qualified technical personnel (fitters, mechanic installers, mechanical engineers). Read these instructions carefully before starting assembly. Slide bearings of type EM are almost universally used in the engineering industry. Therefore it is not possible to provide detailed information on all possible types and range of applications for these bearing types. For instance, the position of the connection points for supply and monitoring equipment is determined by the place of application ( in the following called " installation " ). Please keep ready the guidelines with the technical documentation before starting maintenance and inspection of the slide bearings. Additional technical documentation with detailed information is supplied in case of special design bearings. Please contact RENK Export or Domestic Department for supplementary information on bearings. Please indicate the bearing coding and the full reference number, too. Following indications should be observed when reading these instructions. Safety instructions are marked as follows: Danger! Warning of dangers for personnel. Example: Warning of injury
Attention! Warning of damage for the bearing or installation.
Useful recommendations and additional information are framed. EM..Q This is how chapters, instructions or recommendations are marked when referring to a single type or size of a bearing. Example: Slide bearing type E without thrust part ( non locating bearing ) Instruction follows.
( )
Beginning of an enumeration. This is how the different parts of a bearing as described in the general drawings ( numbers ) are marked in the text.
- Use the enclosed check list before starting assembly or operation. Copies available on request. - The check list provides the experienced mechanical fitters of RENK bearings with the necessary instructions for installation and operation.
21
Safety Instructions Danger! The maintenance and inspection of the slide bearings should be carried out by: persons nominated by the safety representative persons correspondingly trained and instructed persons with knowledge on appropriate standards, regulations and accident. prevention rules persons with knowledge on first aid measures and local rescue centres.
Warning of injury! Before starting work on the bearing: Switch off the installation. Make sure the installation is not in operation. Never lift or transport machines, etc.by the bearing eye bolts. These are only intended for assembly and dismantling of the bearing !
Warning of injury! Do not grab such heavy bearing parts as the housing during assembly or dismantling work. This could result in bruising or injury to hands !
Attention! All metal parts of a slide bearing consisting of top and bottom part such as the housing, shells, shaft seals are marked by engraved numbers. Fit together only the parts with the same number.
Attention! In case the admissible bearing temperature exceeds 15 K inadmissible vibrations occur unusual noises or odours are noticed monitoring equipment triggers alarm shut down the installation and inform the maintenance personnel in charge.
Attention! Do not operate the bearing below the transition speed values indicated in the bearing calculation, thus avoiding inadmissible operating conditions, which could lead to damage to the bearing.
Attention! Please observe our leaflet Technical Information No. 85 which refers to various sealing compounds for extended technical applications.
22
Operating Instructions after Standstill
- Clean the external parts of the bearing. Dust and dirt impede the radiation of the heat. - Check with the instructions to determine if an oil change is necessary. Depending on the duration of the standstill an oil change is either prescribed or recommended. Carry out the oil change as indicated in Chapter 5. - Retighten the screws (16) to the following torque rates:
Bearing Size Torque [Nm] for tot = 0,1 ( lightly oiled ) 9 40 11 69 14 170 18 330 22 570 28 1150
- Check the firm position of the top sight glass (9). - Retighten the tapped holes for oil inlets and outlets, the oil supply hole for the thrust part (optional). The necessary torque rates depend on the used pipe joints.
In case a thermo sensor or/and an oil sump thermometer are used:
- Check that they are well fitted (see also the manufacturer's instructions). - Retighten all screw plugs in the connection holes (27), (28), (32), (34) to the necessary torque rates:
Screw plug threads Torque [Nm] for plugs with moulded on plastic seal Torque [Nm] for plugs with elastic seal G 3/8 30 G 1/2 40 G 3/4 60 G1 110 G 1 1/4 G 1 1/2 160 230 G2 320 G 2 1/2 500
34
60
85
130
240
300
330
410
- Start operating the oil supply system and check its functioning ( see also the Technical Documentation of the Installation ). The supplied oil quantity at the bearing oil inlet must correspond to the values indicated in the EDP calculations. - Check that the temperature monitoring equipment is functioning correctly.
EMT.. Check that the water cooler is functioning correctly The bearing is now ready to work.
23
Maintenance Schedule Deadline every 100 1000 hours Bearing in reversing operation every 5000 operating hours. Bearing in continous operation every 20.000 operating hours (please observe also the indications for the use of the lubricating oil). During prevention maintenance work for the installation. Immediately if:
Maintenance work Exterior cleaning of the bearing Oil change
Bearing inspection
the bearing temperature exceeds 15 K over the indicated value (see the EDP calculations) unusual operating noises occur unusual changes of the lubricating oil become visible increased oil level in the case of bearing type EMT....
24
Oil Change
Risk of pollution! Please observe the instructions for the use of the lubricating oil. The manufacturer can provide information on waste oil disposal.
Shut down the installation and secure it against unintended operation. Shut down the oil supply system. Take all necesarry measures to collect the whole quantity of the lubricating oil. Drain off the lubricating oil while still in a warm condition. Impurities and residues will thus be scavenged. Go ahead as follows: Let off and collect the lubricating oil of the oil supply system. - Unscrew the hexagon head plug (32). Drain off the lubricating oil and collect it. Attention! In case the lubricating oil contains unusual residues or is visibly changed, eliminate the causes. If necessary, carry out an inspection.
- Tighten the hexagon head plug (32) to the following torque rates:
- Clean the oil tank. - Fill up the oil supply system with lubricating oil. Use a lubricant with the viscosity indicated on the bearing type plate. - Start the oil supply system in order to fill up the bearing with lubricating oil.
The bearing is ready to work when the quantity of oil supplied at the bearing oil inlet corresponds to the values indicated in the EDP calculations.
25
6 6.1
Dismantling of the Bearing Tools and equipment
- Following tools and equipment are necessary:

Allan key set Wrenching key set Open jawed spanner set Feeler gauges (up 0,05 mm) Caliper gauge Emery paper, plain scraper Oil stone Lifting equipment Permanent sealing compound Clean (cloth weave) rags Oil with the correct viscosity (see bearing type plate) Detergents Liquid screw locking compound (e.g.LOCTITE 242) Liquid sealing compound and Teflon tape.
6.2
Use of lifting equipment Risk of injury! Before transport or lifting check if the eye bolts are tight! Insecure eye bolts could result in bearing becoming loose. Before moving the bearing by the eye bolts make sure that the split line screws are tightened, otherwise the bottom half of the bearing could become detached. Make sure that the eye bolts are not exposed to bending stress, otherwise the bolts could break. Follow exactly the instructions for the use of the lifting equipment.
- Use lifting equipment for following assembly and transport works:

Transport/Assembly of: Use lifting equipment for the following bearing sizes 9 28 14 28 11 28 14 28
Whole bearing unit Top half of the housing Bottom half of the housing Shells
26
- Following steps are to be observed before using the lifting equipment:

Whole bearing unit
- Check if the screws are tight (16):

Bearing size Torque value [Nm] for tot = 0,1 ( lightly oiled ) 9 40 11 69 14 170 18 330 22 570 28 1150
- Check if the eye bolts are tight (7). - Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts (7).
Size 22 and 28 Sizes 22 and 28 are delivered equipped with an assembly device. When not in use this assembly device is located in the "parking position" behind the flange and as such it is not allowed to use it as transport device.
Illustration 1:
Assembly device
To mount the top half of the housing remove the top sight glass and screw in the assembly device. By using the appropriate lifting equipment and with the help of the assembly device it is possible to lift and mount the top half of the housing in a straight position. After assembling the top half of the housing put the assembly device back into the "parking position" behind the flange and screw in the top sight glass.
27
Top half of the housing
- Check if the eye bolts are tight (7). - Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts (7).
Bottom half of the housing
- Screw two eye bolts (7) with suitable threads tight into the cross placed opposite tapped holes (19).
Bearing size Tapped hole 9 M 10 11 M 12 14 M 16 18 M 20 22 M 24 28 M 30
- Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts (7).

Shells
- Screw two eye bolts or screw hooks with suitable threads tight into the tapped holes (10):
Bearing size Tapped hole 14 M8 18 M 12 22 M 12 28 M 16
- Connect the lifting equipment to the screw hooks.
28
6.3
Preparation for dismantling
Attention! Make sure that the work place is clean. Contamination and damage to the bearing, especially to the working surfaces, have a negative influence on the operating quality and could lead to premature failure.
Attention! Do not use any violence or force!
- Shut down the installation and ensure it against unintended operation. - Shut down the oil supply system.
EM.T.
- Interrupt the cooling water supply. - Dismantle all thermo sensors from the connection holes. - Take all necessary measures to collect the lubricating oil. - Unscrew the hexagon head plug (32) and collect the lubricating oil.
Risk of pollution! Please observe the instructions for the use of the lubricating oil. The manufacturer can provide necessary information on waste oil disposal.
- Remove the thin metal plate (5) to get access to the assembly opening or, in the case of the split machine shield, dismantle the top half of the shield. - Tighten the hexagon head plug (32) to the following torque rates
Bearing size Torque (Nm] 9 30 11 30 14 30 18 40 22 60 28 60
- Inform yourself about maintenance and inspection of the oil supply system ( see also the Technical Documentation Oil Supply System ). Carry out all necessary maintenance and inspection works.
29
6.4
Dismantling of the shaft seal outboard side
- Dismantle the outboard side seals of the bearing. Proceed correspondingly to the seal type: Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10) Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11) Floating labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 12) Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20) Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21) Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22)
Type 10 6.4.1 Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10) Chapter 6.4.1 Chapter 6.4.2 Chapter 6.4.3 Chapter 6.4.4 Chapter 6.4.5 Chapter 6.4.6
- Loosen all screws (55) and take them out. - Remove simultaneously in axial direction both top half (48) and bottom half (51) of the seal carrier from the housing. - Shift a little (about 20 mm ) the top half (53) of the seal. Tilt it over carefully until the garter spring (49) unbends.
Warning of injury! During dismantling of the floating labyrinth seal hold tight the garter spring (49) which is under tension and could bounce back and lead to injury.
- Open the garter spring (49) and remove the bottom half of the seal (52) from the shaft.
Type 11 6.4.2 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11)
- Dismantle the dust flinger (69). Loosen the screws (70) and take out the dust flinger (69) from the groove (57) of the seal carrier.Remove both halves of the dust flinger. - Go on as indicated for type 10 (see Chapter .4.1).
6.4.3 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 12)
Type 12
- Disconnect both top (66) and bottom (68) halves of the baffle by untightening the screws (67). - Go on as indicated for type 10 (see Chapter 6.4.1).
6.4.4 Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20)
Type 20
- Loosen all screws (60) and take them out. - Take out the screws (61). - Remove simultaneously in axial direction both top (59) and bottom (63) halves of the rigid labyrinth seal.
6.4.5 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21)
Type 21
- Dismantle the dust flinger (69). Loosen the screws (70) and take out the dust flinger (69) from the groove (62) of the rigid seal. Remove both halves of the dust flinger. - Go on as indicated for type 20 (see Chapter 6.4.4).
6.4.6 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22)
Type 22
- Unscrew the top half (66) and the bottom half (68) of the baffle by untightening the screws (67). - Go on as indicated for type 20 (see Chapter 6.4.4).
30
6.5
Opening of the machine seal
- Loosen the screws (17) at the split line of the machine seal.
6.6
Dismantling of the top half of the housing
EM.V. Size 22 and 28
- Unscrew the screw plug with the welded on positioning pin. - Replace the top sight glass (9) by the assembly device.The top half of the housing can be lifted and transported by using the assembly device, well tight, and the appropriate lifting equipment. - Remove the screws (16) and lift the top half of the housing. - Lift the top part of the housing in axial direction until the top part of the flange becomes free. - Go on lifting until the top part of the housing can be moved in axial line over the shell, without touching it.
Illustration 2:
Dismantling of the housing top half
31
6.7
Removal of the top half of the shell
- Unscrew the screws (24) and lift the top half of the shell (11).
Attention! Do not damage the thrust and radial working surfaces.
Attention! In the case of insulated housings ( white plastic insulating foil ) avoid any jamming of the top half of the shell when you lift it up. Jamming could lead to damage of the insulating foil in the bottom half of the housing. EM.L. 6.7.1 Dismantling of the loose oil ring
- Open both split lines of the loose oil ring (44) by untightening and taking out the screws (47). Separate both halves of the loose oil ring (44) carefully without using any tools or other devices.
I II
44
44 44
47
Illustration 3
To check the geometry of the loose oil ring put it together as follows:
- Press the positioning pin (45) into the holes (46). - Adjust both halves of the loose oil ring till the split lines match each other. - Tighten the screws (47).
6.7.2 Dismantling the machine side shaft seal
- Shift a little ( about 20 mm ) the top half (53) of the seal. Tilt it over carefully until the garter spring (49) unbends.
Warning of injury! During dismantling of the floating labyrinth seal hold tight the garter spring (49) which is under tension and could bounce back and lead to injury.
- Open the garter spring (49) and turn the bottom half of the seal (52) in opposite direction from the anti rotation pin out of the integrated seal groove of the bottom half of the housing.
32 RH EMZWI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002 RENK AG Werk Hannover
6.8
Removal of the bottom half of the shell
Attention! Make sure that all bearings mounted on a shaft line are opened. Loosen the screws at the split line of the housings. Attention! The lifting equipment should not come into touch with the seal and working surfaces of the shaft.
- Lift the shaft up to the point where shaft and bottom half of the shell (18) do not touch each other any more. Protect the shaft against unintended movement. - Turn the bottom half of the shell (18) out of the bottom half of the housing (21) and remove it from the shaft.
Attention! If the bottom half of the shell (18) is provided with metal tabs (33) do not remove them. They regulate the oil level in the oil pockets.
6.9
Dismantling of the machine seal
Usually it is not necessary to dismantle the machine seal if maintenance works are carried out. However in case the machine seal must be dismantled , dismantle the bottom half of the housing. Attention! The assembly and dismantling of the bottom half of the bearing are fully described in the Instructions for Installation and Operation. Please observe these instructions. After dismantling the bottom half of the housing both halves of the machine seal can be unscrewed. In the case the machine seal is equipped with a hamp packing (15), some visible changes can be noticed, such as : tallow excess, black colour of the seal due to temperature development. Even in such cases it is not necessary to renew the hamp packing (15). Colour changes will appear with a new hamp packing too, until the seal clearance adjusts during operation.
33
Cleaning and Checking of the Bearing
Attention! Use only non aggressive detergents such as for instance VALVOLINE 150 Alcaline cleaning compounds (pH value 6 to 9, short reaction time).
Warning of injury! Please observe the instructions for the use of the detergents.
Attention! Never use cleaning wool or cloth. Residues of such materials left in the bearing could lead to excessive temperatures.
- Clean the following parts thoroughly:

EM.L. EM.T. top half of the housing (2) bottom half of the housing (21) top half of the shell (11) bottom half of the shell (18) sealing surfaces of the top half (48) and bottom half (51) of the seal carrier or of the rigid labyrinth seal
loose oil ring (44). - Check the condition of the water cooler (31).
In case the water cooler (31) is incrusted with oil sludge:
- Dismantle the water cooler. Remove the incrustation by using for instance a wire brush. - Install the water cooler (31) into the bearing.
34
- Carry out a visual check of the wear condition of all bearing parts. The following table provides information on the parts that must be replaced in case of wear.The right evaluation of the wear condition, especially of the running surfaces of the shell, implies a lot of experience. If in doubt, replace the worn part with new ones.
Bearing part Shell Wear condition Scoring Maintenance procedure Bearing temperature before inspection: not increased no new shells increased new shells New shell New shells New shaft seal
White metal lining damaged Bow wave ridges Shaft seal Baffles broken or damaged
Loose oil ring
Geometrical form New loose oil ring ( roundness, flatness ) visibly changed
EM.C. EM.L. EM.Y. Size 9 14
- Check the projection of the positioning pin (8) according to the values indicated below:
Bearing size Projection of the positioning pin (4) mm 9 7 11 8 14 10 18 12 22 14 28 16
In case the projection is less than indicated,
- drive the positioning pin (8) into the top half of the housing (2) until the indicated value is reached.
insulated bearings
- Check the insulating layer of the spherical seating (26) of the top half (2) and bottom half (21) of the housing. In case of damage contact the RENK sales agency in charge. - Check the mobility of all circular tilting pads (42).
EM..A
35
Assembly of the Bearing
Attention! Remove all impurities or other objects such as screws, nuts, etc. from inside the bearing. If left inside they could lead to damage of the bearing. Cover up the opened bearing during work breaks. Attention! Carry out all assembly operations without making use of force.
Attention! Secure all screws of the housing at the split line and flange with a liquid screw locking compound (e.g.LOCTITE 242).
8.1 EM..E
Fitting in the bottom half of the shell
Attention! Mounting the bottom half of the shell (not marked with an arrow) correctly will ease the assembly of the top half shell (marked with an arrow) (see chapter 4.6).
- Apply some lubricant to the spherical seating (26) in the bottom half of the housing (21) and to the working surfaces of the shaft. Use the same type of lubricant as indicated for bearing operation ( see type plate ). - Place the bottom half of the shell (18) on the working surface of the shaft. Turn the bottom half of the shell (18) into the bottom half of the housing (21) with the split line surfaces of both halves in true alignment.
In case the bottom half of the shell doesn`t turn in easily, check the position of the shaft and the alignment of the housing
Attention! These operations should be carried out most carefully. The thrust parts of the bottom shell must not be damaged.
- Lower down the shaft till it sits on the bottom half of the shell (18).
36
8.2
Assembly of the shaft seal machine side
The machine side shaft seal is, as standard, a floating labyrinth seal. The integrated seal groove is in the top and bottom halves of the housing. Warning of injury! During assembly hold the garter spring ends (49) securely to avoid them suddenly releasing and causing possible injury! Check the movement of the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft in the seal area outside the housing:
Put the garter spring (49) around the shaft and hook both ends into each other. Put both halves of the seal (52), (53) in their place on the shaft. Put the garter spring (49) into the groove (50). Turn the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft.
- Dismantle the floating labyrinth seal. - Apply sealing compound to the guide surfaces of the integrated seal groove in the bottom half of the housing.
Illustration 4:
Application of sealing compound to the integrated seal groove
37
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the seal surfaces and on the split line surfaces of both halves of the seal (52), (53).
Illustration 5:
- Place the bottom half of the seal (52)) with the labyrinths onto the shaft. - The oil return holes at the bearing side must be clear and open. - Turn the seal in opposite direction from the anti rotation pin into the groove of the housing until the split lines of the bottom half of the housing and the bottom half of the seal match each other. - Remove the residue of sealing compound. - Push the garter spring into the integrated seal groove between the bottom half of the housing and the seal until both ends jut out from the split line. - Place the top half of the seal with the cam facing the inside of the bearing on the bottom half of the seal. - Stretch the garter spring till both ends can be hooked.
38
EM.L.
8.3
- Open both split lines of the loose oil ring (44) by untightening and removing the screws (47). Separate both halves of the loose oil ring (44) carefully without using any tools or other devices.
I II
44
44
44
47
Illustration:6
- Place both halves of the loose oil ring into the shell groove (18) encircling the shaft. Press the positioning pin (45) of each split line into the corresponding hole (46). - Adjust both halves of the loose oil ring till the split lines match each other.
21 45 44
44
18
Illustration 7:

Bearing size Torque [Nm] 9 1,4 11 1,4 14 1,4 18 2,7 22 2,7 28 2,7
39
8.4
Fitting in the top half of the shell
- Apply some lubricant to the working surfaces of the shaft. Use the same type of lubricant as indicated for bearing operation (see type plate). - Check if the engraved numbers (20) on the bottom and top halves of the shell correspond. - Place the top half of the shell (11) on the shaft; both engraved numbers (20) should be on the same side.
Attention! An incorrectly placed shell could jam the shaft thus leading to the damage of both shaft and bearing. EM..B, EM..K, EM..E, EM..A
insulated bearings
Attention! Place the top half of the shell carefully on the shaft. The thrust parts of the top half of the shell must not be damaged. In the case of bearings arranged for insulation monitoring, connect the black cable for insulation monitoring to the shell. According to the bearing type, there are two possibilities of connection. 1. The black cable is provided with a cable connector.
- Plug the cable with the cable connector into the counterpart available on the top of the shell. - Lead the cable through the cable gland in the bottom half of the housing and out of the bearing. - Tighten the cable gland oil tight.
2. The black cable is provided with an eyelet.
- Fasten the cable with the eyelet to the split line of the shell, by using one of the shell joint bolts. - Lead the cable through the cable gland in the bottom half of the housing and out of the bearing. - Tighten the cable gland oil tight. - Tighten up the screws (24) to the following torque rates:
- Check the split line of the shell by using a feeler gauge. The split line gap should be less than 0,05 mm. If the split line is greater than this, dismantle both top and bottom (11),(18) halves of the shell. Rework the split line surfaces of the top half (11) and bottom half (18) of the shell with an oil stone.
EM.L.
EM.L. Marine Bearing
- Check the mobility of the loose oil ring (44).

A guide bush in the top half of the shell secures the function of the loose oil ring.
- Check the mobility of the loose oil ring (44) in the guide bush.
40
EM..E
Shells with taper land faces suitable only for one direction of rotation are marked with an arrow on the top half shell, which indicates the sense of rotation of the shaft. The arrow indicates the allowed direction of shaft rotation after completion of the bearing assembly.
- Before mounting the top half of the housing check that the proposed direction of rotation of the shaft corresponds to the direction indicated by the arrow on the top half of the shell. - If the directions match, continue the assembly of the bearing. - If the directions do not match, the shell must be disassembled, re aligned and mounted again.
Attention! A wrongly placed shell, without observance of the direction of rotation of the shaft, impairs the operational safety of the bearing. 8.5 Closing of the bearing
- Check the true alignment of the shell (11), (18) and bottom half (21) of the housing.
EM.C. EM.L. EM.Y. The positioning pin (8) in the top half of the housing fits in the corresponding hole (4). The shell is thus placed into its right position.
- Check if the engraved numbers (1) on the top and bottom halves of the housing correspond. - Clean the split line surfaces of the top and bottom halves (2), (21) of the housing. - Apply sealing compound to the whole surface of the split line of the bottom half (21) of the housing.
- Place the top half of the housing carefully into the machine shield, without touching the seals or the shell.
Illustration 8:
41
- Lower the top half of the housing (2) vertically on the bottom half of the housing (21). Lower the top half of the housing (2) till the split line of the housing is not visible any more. - Gently hit the bottom half of the housing (21) with a nylon hammer, thus ensuring the alignment of the spherical seating. - Insert the screws (16). Tighten them crosswise to the following torque rates:
Bearing size Torque [Nm] tot = 0,1 ( lightly oiled ) 9 40 11 69 14 170 18 330 22 570 28 1150
- Hand tighten the screws at the split line of the machine seal.
Size 22 and 28. EM.V.
insulated bearings
- Unscrew the assembly device and put it back into its "parking position" behind the flange. Tighten the assembly device to the following torque: 40 Nm. - Replace the top sight glass and screw it hand tight. - Tighten the screw plug with the welded on positioning pin into the top half of the housing.
Insulation monitoring In the case of electric insulated bearings provided with insulation monitoring, the cable coming out of the housing must be connected in a professional manner. According to the type supplied, please follow the assembly instructions given below. a) The cable is very short and provided with a further cable connector at the end of it. This cable is ready for connection to the housing. The bottom half of the housing is provided with the counterpart.
- Plug the cable connector into the counterpart.

Attention! This connection bypasses the electrical insulation of the bearing. In the case of electric machines, make sure at least one bearing is electrically insulated. To check the electrical insulation, interrupt the connection cable housing. Check the electrical resistance with a suitable measuring instrument. Make sure that both bearings and the coupling are electrically insulated. b) The cable has a free end. In this case the customer has to make the connection. Attention! If only one bearing is insulated, the end of the cable must not be earthed. Any further connection depends on the customers requirements related to the insulation monitoring and can not therefore be described here.
42
8.6
Assembly of the Seals Outboard Side
- Assemble the outboard side seals. Proceed according to the seal type used: Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10) Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11) Floating labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 12) Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20) Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21) Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22)
Chapter 8.6.1 Chapter 8.6.2 Chapter 8.6.3 Chapter 8.6.4 Chapter 8.6.5 Chapter 8.6.6
Type 10
8.6.1
Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10) Warning of injury! During assembly hold the garter spring ends (49) securely to avoid them suddenly releasing and causing possible injury!
Check the movement of the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft in the seal area outside the housing.
Put the garter spring (49) around the shaft and hook both ends into each other. Put both halves of the seal (52), (53) in their place on the shaft. Put the garter spring (49) into the groove (50). Turn the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft.
- Dismantle the floating labyrinth seal.
43
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the seal surfaces and on the split line surfaces of both halves of the seal (52), (53).
Illustration 9:
- Press the bottom half of the seal (52) against the shaft. - Place the top half of the seal (53) on the shaft and align both halves of the seal to each other. - Place the garter spring (49) into the groove (50) and stretch until both ends can be hooked.
54
53
49
52
21
Illustration 10: Assembly of the floating labyrinth seal

44
- Place in true alignment the split line of the floating labyrinth seal and the split line of the seal carrier. - Check that both engraved numbers (56) and (58) on top and bottom halves of the seal carrier (48), (51) correspond. - Clean the following the seal surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the seal carrier (the groove of the floating labyrinth seal, the flange surfaces) the split line surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the seal carrier the flange surfaces of the housing. - Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to: the lateral surfaces of the groove at the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the seal carrier the flange surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the seal carrier the split line surfaces of the bottom half of the seal carrier (51).
Illustration 11: Application of sealing compound to the seal carrier
45
- Place the top half of the seal carrier (48) on the top half of the seal (53). Press the bottom half (51) of the seal carrier against it. Push the shaft seal completely into the housing.
48 54
53
Illustration 12: Assembly of the seal carrier
- Place in true alignment the split lines of the seal carrier and the housing. - Tighten up the screws (55) to the following torque rates:
46
Type 11
8.6.2
Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11)
- Assemble the floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger as described in Chapter 8.6.1, Floating labyrinth seal type 10. - Place both halves of the dust flinger (69) in front of the shaft seal around the shaft. Loosely screw in the screws (70) at the split line of the flinger.
69
48
57
Illustration 13: Clearance between dust flinger and seal carrier EM..Q
- Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (57) of the seal carrier. - Set the clearance "e" at the following figure around the whole unit:
maximum longitudinal extension of the shaft in operation + 1 mm (Parameters indicated in the Technical Documentation of the Installation).
- Tighten up the screws (70) to the following torque rates:

Seal diameter [mm] Torque [Nm] EM..B, EM..K, EM..E, EM..A 80 140 7 >140 18
- Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (57) of the seal carrier. - Set the clearance "e" at 1 mm around the whole unit. - Tighten the screws (70) to the following torque rates:
47
Type 12
8.6.3
Floating labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 12)
- Assemble the floating labyrinth seal with baffle as in Chapter 8.6.1, Type 10. - Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the flange surfaces of the top half (66) and bottom half (68) of the baffle. - Screw the top half of the baffle (66) to the top half of the seal carrier (48) the bottom half of the baffle (68) to the bottom half of the seal carrier (51). - Tighten the screws (67) to the following torque rates:
Type 20
8.6.4
Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20)
- Check if the engraved numbers (64) and (65) on the bottom half (63) and top half (59) of the rigid labyrinth seal correspond. - Clean the flange surfaces of the top half (59) and bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal the split line surfaces of the top half (59) and bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal the flange surfaces of the housing. - Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the following parts: the flange surfaces of the top half (59) and bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal the split lines of the bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
Illustration 14: Application of sealing compound to the rigid labyrinth seal
48
- Place the top half (59) of the rigid labyrinth seal on the shaft and press slightly the bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal from below against it. Lightly push the rigid labyrinth seal completely into the housing. - Tighten the screws (61) at the split line of the labyrinth seal. - Place in parallel alignment the split line of the rigid labyrinth seal and the split line of the housing. Press the rigid labyrinth seal slightly from below against the shaft. Adjust the rigid labyrinth seal in such a way that the clearance "f" between the shaft and the rigid labyrinth seal at both split lines has the same figure.
59
21
Illustration 15: Alignment of the rigid labyrinth seal
63

49
Type 21
8.6.5
Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21)
- Assemble the rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger as indicated in Chapter 8.6.4, Type 20. - Place both halves of the dust flinger (69) round the shaft, in front of the rigid labyrinth seal. Mount the screws (70) loose.
69
59
e
62
Illustration 16: Clearance between dust flinger and rigid labyrinth seal EM..Q
- Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (62) of the rigid labyrinth seal. - Set the clearance "e" at the following figure around the whole unit:
maximum longitudinal extension of the shaft in operation + 1 mm (Parameters are indicated in the Technical Documentation of the Installation).

Seal diameter [mm] Torque [Nm] EM..B, EM..K, EM..E, EM..A 80 140 7 >140 18
- Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (62) of the rigid labyrinth seal. - Set the clearance "e" at 1 mm around the whole unit. - Tighten the screws (70) to the following torque rates:
Type 22
8.6.6
Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22)
- Assemble the rigid labyrinth seal with baffle as described in Chapter 8.6.4. - Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound on the flange surfaces of the top half (66) and bottom half (68) of the baffle. - Tighten the top half of the baffle (66) on the top half (59) of the rigid labyrinth seal the bottom half of the baffle (68) on the bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal. - Tighten the screws (67) to the following torque rates:
Seal diameter [mm] Torque [Nm]
50 RH EMZWI E Version: 2 Juli, 2002
80 140 4
>140 10
Starting Operation after Inspection
- Fit the thermo sensors for: temperature measurement of the journal part in the connection holes (27) temperature measurement of the thrust part in the connection holes (optional). - Retighten all screw plugs in the tapped holes (27), (28), (32), (34) to the following torque rates:
Screw plug threads Torque [Nm] for plugs with moulded on plastic seal Torque [Nm] for plugs with elastic seal G 3/8 30 G 1/2 40 G 3/4 60 G1 110 G 1 1/4 G 1 1/2 160 230 G2 320 G 2 1/2 500
34
60
85
130
240
300
330
410
- Check if the top sight glass (9) is tight. - Retighten the connection holes for oil inlet and oil outlet and the holes for the thrust part oil supply system (optional). The torque depends on the threaded joints used. - Carry out a visual check of the assembled bearing. - Fill up the oil supply system with lubricant. Use the same type of lubricant as indicated on the type plate. - Start operating the oil supply system in order to fill up the bearing with lubricant. - Check the way the oil supply system works ( see also the Technical Documentation of the Installation ).The lubricant quantity at the bearing oil inlet must correspond to the values indicated in the EDP calculations. that the temperature monitoring equipment works.
Attention! Not enough lubricant leads to temperature rises and thus to damage to the bearing. Too much lubricant leads to leakages. EMT..
- Start operating the cooling water supply system and check its functioning.
The bearing is ready for operation.
- Close the assembly opening of the machine shield (with the thin metal plate (5)) - Supervise the bearing during the trial run ( 5 10 operating hours ). Pay special attention to: the way the oil supply system works (necessary lubricant quantity, lubricant pressure before entering the bearing) bearing temperature sliding noises of the shaft seals tightness occurrence of inadmissible vibrations.
Attention! If the bearing temperature exceeds the calculated value by 15 K (see the EDP bearing calculations) stop the installation immediately. Carry out an inspection of the bearing and find out the causes.
51
10
Corrosion Protection for Longer Standstill Periods
If you want to protect the bearing mounted on an installation against corrosion proceed as follows:
- Dismantle the bearing (see Chapter 6). - Clean the bearing (see Chapter 7). - Paint or spray the top half of the shell (11), the bottom half of the shell (18) and the shaft with TECTYL 511. - Assemble the bearing (see Chapter 8). - Close all connection holes with screw plugs. - Seal the gaps between shaft seal and housing shaft seal and shaft by using a self adhesive, permanent tape. - Remove the top sight glass (9). Spray some anti corrosive such as TECTYL 511 or VALVOLINE into the bearing. - Put a bag of dessicant (silicate gel) inside. The dessicant absorbs the humidity and prevents the formation of condensation water into the bearing. - Close the bearing tight with the top sight glass (9).
In case the standstill period is longer than 1/2 year:
- Repeat the preservation procedures. - Put a new bag of dessicant into the bearing.
In case the standstill period lasts more years:
- Dismantle the shells. - Preserve and store the bearing parts.
11
Transport Protection
In case of a machine equipped with slide bearings type EM:
- Carry out the corrosion protection as described in Chapter 10 and apply enough lubricant on the working surfaces of the bearing. - Secure the shaft against thrust and radial movements during transport.
52
12 Baffle
Glossary With bearing types 10 and 20 the baffles are assembled externally in front of the shaft seals. The baffle, made of reinforced polyamide, protects the bearing from dust and water. The rigid labyrinth seal (type 20) is used with slide bearings type E with high oil throughput.It corresponds to the protective system IP44 and is made of an aluminium alloy. The rigid labyrinth seal is built of two halves, flanged at the housing.The labyrinths that wipe out the lubricant are arranged into two groups.The first two labyrinths , installed inside keep back most of the lubricant. Five further labyrinths protect the bearing from outside.They prevent the lubricant overflow and the ingress of impurities.The overflow lubricant is collected into a chamber between the both groups of labyrinths.Through the return bores the lubricant flows back into the bearing. The spherical seating is a special feature enabling the alignment of the shell in the housing.The shell is seated on two spherical seatings. The advantages of the spherical seating are: easy at assembly good heat transfer from the shell to the housing suitable for such applications with high thrust or journal loads. In the case of bearing types 10 and 20 a light alloy ring is clamped on the shaft in front of the shaft.This ring fits into a groove in the seal carrier or the rigid labyrinth seal, thus building a labyrinth. The labyrinth protects the shaft exit against low pressure that could otherwise " absorb " the lubricant. Low pressure occurs for instance in the case of rotating discs, such as couplings or cooling discs. The floating labyrinth seal (type 10) in the seal carrier is used as a shaft seal in the case of bearings type E operating under normal conditions. It prevents the lubricant and lubricant mist coming out and the ingress of impurities. The floating seal has a high capacity of resistance to wear. It is made of a high performance, high temperature stability and electrically insulated plastic material.The floating seal consists of two halves held together by a garter spring. Both ends of the spring are hooked together. In the case of slide bearings type EM the floating seal is mounted into a two piece seal carrier. The groove allows for radial movement of up to 1 mm. The seal is thus insensitive to shaft radial displacement or deflection. The sealing effect is produced by the baffles wiping off the lubricant from the shaft. The lubricant flows back into the bearing via oil return opening. In the case of the flange mounted bearings, the machine seal reduces the influence of positive and negative pressure in the machine thus preventing leakages at the inner seal area. The space between the machine seal and the bearing housing must always be vented to atmospheric pressure. The size of the gap between shaft and machine seal influences the sealing effect.
Rigid labyrinth seal
Spherical seating
Dust flinger
Floating labyrinth seal
Machine seal
53

Document No: Insts 01 0 26 Apr 2002
Section 7
Instrumentation
Revision: Revisi on Date:
Instrumentation
The instrument equipment manufacturers information is included next as an insert to the manual.
K:\Module Update\S7 Insts 01-0.doc
Explosionproof/Flameproof RTD Sensors
L REF.
INSERTION DEPTH D 27 mm MINIMUM
Ex d IIC AEx d IIC
CONDUIT THREAD
Overview
Explosionproof and flameproof rating for hazardous areas where accurate temperature sensing is critical. Tip sensitive, all stainless or MgO filled probes available Hazardous area rated
Specifications
Temperature range: -50 to 260C (-58 to 500F). Material: Probe: Stainless steel (tip sensitive models have copper alloy tip). Holder: Stainless steel. Connection head: Copper free aluminum alloy (CH104) 316L stainless steel (CH106). Pressure rating: See table on next page. Insulation resistance: 10 megohms min. at 100 VDC, leads to case. Connection: Terminal block for wires to 14 AWG. Time constant: Typical value in moving water. Tip sensitive: Single element 1.5 seconds. Dual element 5 seconds. All stainless and MgO filled: 10 seconds.
Explosionproof and flameproof ratings: National and Canadian Electrical Code: Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups B, C, and D, Class II, Groups E, F, and G, T6 (Ta = 40C), T2 (Ta = 260C). Ta limited to 160C for CSA Class II locations. National Electrical Code (Article 505): Class I, Zones 1 and 2, AEx d IIC, T6 (Ta =40C), T2 (Ta = 260C). Canadian Electrical Code (IEC 60079): Zones 1 and 2, Ex d IIC, T6 (Ta = 40C), T2 (Ta = 260C).
Hazardous area requirements

Refer to Minco's Application Aid #19 entitled Specifying Temperature Sensors for Hazardous Areas for more information on how to classify a hazardous area, methods of protection, and the various standards and agencies (including FM, CSA, CENELEC and ATEX). Application Aid #19 is available at www.minco.com/sensoraid/.
Specify and order products at:

www.minco.com/sensors_config
Specifications subject to change
Page 2-10
Probe diameters Number of elements Tip-sensitive All stainless MgO filled (platinum only)
0.215" (5.5 mm) Single Dual AS760 AS761 AS762 AS763
0.236" (6.0 mm) Single Dual AS700 AS701 AS702 AS703 AS704
0.250" (6.4 mm) Single Dual AS720 AS721 AS722 AS723 AS724 AS725
Connection head and fitting options

CH104: Aluminum IP65, Type 3 and 4. CH106: 316L stainless steel IP66, Type 3, 4, and 4X. Fitting Welded Welded Welded Welded Adjustable spring-loaded Adjustable spring-loaded Adjustable spring-loaded Adjustable spring-loaded Fixed spring-loaded Fixed spring-loaded Process thread 1 2 - 14 NPT 1 2 - 14 NPT G 12 G 12 1 2 - 14 NPT 1 2 - 14 NPT G 12 G 12 1 2 - 14 NPT 1 2 - 14 NPT Pressure Rating 200 psi (13.8 bar) 200 psi (13.8 bar) 200 psi (13.8 bar) 200 psi (13.8 bar) 50 psi (3.4 bar) 50 psi (3.4 bar) 50 psi (3.4 bar) 50 psi (3.4 bar) None None L REF. 4.4" (112 mm) 4.2" (106 mm) 4.2" (107 mm) 4.0" (101 mm) 5.7" (144 mm) 5.4" (138 mm) 5.7" (144 mm) 5.4" (138 mm) 4.4" (112 mm) 4.2" (106 mm) Head CH104 CH106 CH104 CH106 CH104 CH106 CH104 CH106 CH104 CH106 Code 0* 1* 2* 3* 4 5 6 7 8** 9**
* 0.250 diameter only for all stainless and MgO probes. ** 0.236 and 0.250 diameters only for fixed spring-loaded fittings. Note: Connection head dimensions are found on pages 4-2 to 4-3.
Sensing elements
Element Platinum (0.00392 TCR) 100 0.5% at 0C Code Single Dual PA PD PM PE PW CA NA NB CCCC NANA NBNB PAPA PDPD PMPM PEPE PWPW
Specification and order options

AS720 4 PD 100 X Assembly number from table Connection head/fitting from table Sensing element from table Insertion depth D (in mm): (431219 mm) Leads per sensing element: Y = 2 leads (n/a for copper) Z = 3 leads X = 4 leads (n/a for dual models) Conduit thread: 3 = 12 - 14 NPT 4 = 34 - 14 NPT
Platinum (0.00385 TCR) 100 0.1% at 0C (Meets EN60751, Class B) Platinum (0.00385 TCR) 100 0.06% at 0C (Meets EN60751, Class A) Platinum (0.00385 TCR) 100 0.5% at 0C Platinum (0.00375 TCR) 1000 0.12% at 0C Copper (0.00427 TCR) (dual) Nickel (0.00672 TCR) Nickel (0.00618 TCR) 10 0.2% at 25C 10 0.5% at 25C 120 0.5% at 0C 100 0.22% at 0C
AS7204PD100X3 = Sample part number
Specifications subject to change
Page 2-11
ASSEMBLIES
Assembly numbers
Part Number 141078-01 Revision F, June 2005
3300 XL 8mm & 3300 5mm Proximity Transducer System

Manual
3300 XL 8mm Proximity Transducer System Manual
Copyright 1999 Bently Nevada, LLC All Rights Reserved. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Bently Nevada, LLC in the United States and Other Countries: ACM, Actionable Information, Actionable Information to the Right People at the Right Time, ADRE, , Asset Condition Management, Asset Condition Monitoring, Bently ALIGN, Bently BALANCE, Bently DOCUVIEW, Bently LUBE, Bently Nevada, Bently PERFORMANCE, Bently RELIABILITY, CableLoc, ClickLoc, Data Manager, Decision SupportSM, DemoNet, Dynamic Data Manager, Engineer Assist, FieldMonitor, flexiTIM, FluidLoc, Helping You Protect and Manage All Your Machinery, HydroScan, HydroView, Keyphasor, Machine Condition Manager 2000, MachineLibrary, Machine Manager, MicroPROX, Move Data, Not People, Move Information, Not Data, NSv, Prime Spike, PROXPAC, Proximitor, REBAM, RuleDesk, SE, Seismoprobe, Smart Monitor, Snapshot, System 1, System Extender, TDXnet, TDIXconnX, The Plant Asset Management CompanySM, TipLoc, TorXimitor, Transient Data Manager, Trendmaster, TrimLoc, Velomitor The Bently Nevada orbit logo and other logos associated with the trademarks in bold above, are also all trademarks or registered trademarks of Bently Nevada in the United States and other countries. The following ways of contacting Bently Nevada, LLC are provided for those times when you cannot contact your local Bently Nevada representative: Mailing Address Telephone Fax Internet 1631 Bently Parkway South Minden, NV 89423 USA 1 775 782 3611 1 800 227 5514 1 775 215 2876 www.bently.com
ii
Related Documents
The following documents contain additional information that you may find helpful when you install the transducer. Most of these documents are available on ww.bently.com. Installing the Transducer Best Practices Document - Proximity Probes and Related Accessories: The Installation and Application of Eddy Current Proximity Transducers. Guidelines for Grounding (Earthing) Bently Nevada Rotating Machinery Information Systems. Installation of Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas. Considerations when using Eddy Current Proximity Probes for Overspeed Protection Applications. Glitch: Definition of and Methods for Correction, Including Shaft Burnishing to Remove Electrical Runout. Transducer Installation Accessories 31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing Manual (124200-01). 31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing Data Sheet (141610-01) 3300 XL Proximitor Housing Data Sheet (141195-01) 3300 XL Monitor and Transducer Verification Kits Data Sheet (141196-01) Electrical and Mechanical Runout API 670, Fourth Edition, Sections 6.1.1 (Location and Orientation Radial Shaft Vibration Probes) and 6.1.2 (Location and Orientation Axial Position Probes. Available from the American Petroleum Institute, Publications and Distribution, 1220 L Street NW, Washington DC, 20005, USA. Reference Bently Nevada Glossary (133055-01).
Disposal Statement Customers and third parties who are in control of the product at the end of its life or at the end of its use are solely responsible for the proper disposal of the product. No person, firm, corporation, association or agency that is in control of product shall dispose of it in a manner that is in violation of United States state laws, United States federal laws, or any applicable international law. Bently Nevada, LLC is not responsible for the disposal of the product at the end of its life or at the end of its use.
iii
Symbols Procedures in this manual use the following symbols:
Connect
Disconnect
Observe
Record Value
iv
European CE mark for the Bently Nevada 3300 XL Transducer System

In this Document is a list of the 3300 XL Transducer Assemblies that have the CE mark, applicable standards used for certification, and installation instructions required for compliance. Proximity Transducer Systems are electronic devices typically used in industrial applications. The 3300 XL Transducer System has been certified using the same Technical Construction File (TCF) and Declaration of Conformity as the 3300 8mm Transducer System because they are similar in design and application. The 3300 XL Proximity Transducer System consists of a Proximitor Sensor, Proximity Probe, and Extension Cable. TCF through TUV Rheinland of North America A Technical Construction File has been prepared through TUV Rheinland of North America (TUV Rheinland File Number: P9472350.07). The Certificate of Compliance is for Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive). The applicable Generic Norms are: EN50081-2 and EN50082-2. Installation Instructions These instructions are an addition to the Installation Instructions in Section 2. Proximity Probes All probe cases must have a solid connection to earth ground. Compliant Systems and Component Part Numbers
# 1 Model 3300 XL 8mm and 3300 5mm Model Numbers 330180, 330101*, 330102*, 330103*, 330104*, 330105*, 330106*, 330140, 330141, 330145, 330171, 330172, 330173, 330174, 330191, 330192, 330193, 330194, 330195, 330196, 330197, 330198, 330255, 330130, and 330190**
Includes all options and all approval versions of the base model numbers listed *--Pre XL probes and cables may be used as part of a CE XL system. **--any proximity probe, or extension cable that works correctly with the listed module.
Testing and Test Levels

Title EN 55011 EN 61000-4-2 ENV 50140 (EN 61000-4-3) Rad. RFI Test Levels Emission Class A 4kV; 8kV 10V/m A A 10V/m A 2kV B 0.5kV A 10V B 30A/m, 50Hz A ENV 50204 Rad. RFI EFT EN 61000-4-4 ENV 50142 (EN 61000-4-5) Surge ENV 50141 (61000-46) Cond. RFI EN 61000-4-8 Mag. Fields
Emission
ESD
Criteria
N/A
These notes listed below apply only to the table Testing and Test Levels discharge method: Contact; Air 80-1000 MHz sweep with 80% 1 kHz sine wave amplitude modulation 900 MHz dwell with 100% 200 Hz square wave modulation lines tested: I/O 150 kHz-80 MHz sweep with 80% 1 kHz sine wave amplitude modulation For the purposes of the 3300 XL 8mm and 3300 5mm System CE certification, the following criteria are defined as follows: Criteria A: Transducer system will output less than one third of a 3mil p-p meter scale (less than 1 mil p-p) and will return to steady state after test completion. Criteria B: Transducer system may react in any manner during test, but must self recover after test completion. Criteria C: N/A
vi
Contents
Related Documents ...........................................................................................................................iii European CE mark for the Bently Nevada 3300 XL Transducer System.......................................... v
Section 1 System Description ......................................................... 1

Transducer Systems ........................................................................................................................... 1 Proximitor Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 1 Proximity Probe and Extension Cable ............................................................................................... 2 Connectors ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Extended Temperature Range Applications....................................................................................... 2 Receiving, Inspecting, and Handling the System............................................................................... 3 Customer Service ............................................................................................................................... 4
Section 2 Installation........................................................................ 5
Installing the Probe ............................................................................................................................ 5 Mounting the Proximitor Sensor..................................................................................................... 7 Interchangeable Mounting Feet.......................................................................................................... 8 Mounting the Proximitor Sensor with DIN Mount Part.................................................................. 9 Removing the Proximitor Sensor from the DIN Rail.................................................................... 10 Termination of Field Wiring in the Terminal Block ........................................................................ 10 Routing the Extension Cable and Field Wiring ............................................................................... 11
Section 3 Maintenance and Troubleshooting .............................. 13

Scale Factor Verification ................................................................................................................. 14 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................... 17 Fault Type 1: VXDCR > -17.5 Vdc or VXDCR < -26 Vdc.................................................................... 19 Fault Type 2: VSIG = O Vdc ............................................................................................................ 20 Fault Type 3: -1 Vdc < VSIG < 0 Vdc .............................................................................................. 20 Fault Type 4: VXDCR <VSIG < VXDCR + 2.5 Vdc............................................................................... 23 Fault Type 5: VSIG = VXDCR ............................................................................................................. 23
Section 4 3300 XL Proximitor Housing ...................................... 25

Mounting Options ............................................................................................................................ 25 Environmental Certifications ........................................................................................................... 25 Removable gland plates ................................................................................................................... 25 Dimensional Drawings..................................................................................................................... 26 Panel Mount Orientation .............................................................................................................. 27 DIN Mount Orientation................................................................................................................ 28
Section 5 System Specifications .................................................. 29

Electrical .......................................................................................................................................... 29 Electrical Classification: .............................................................................................................. 32 Mechanical ....................................................................................................................................... 34 Environmental Limits ...................................................................................................................... 36
Section 6 System Ordering Information....................................... 39

3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes: ................................................................................................... 39 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Metric:....................................................................................... 40 3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probes............................................................................................ 40 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Smooth Case: ............................................................................ 41 3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes: ....................................... 42 3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes, Metric:........................... 42 3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Reverse Mount Probes ................................ 43 vii
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes, Smooth Case: ................ 43 3300 5 mm Proximity Probes:.......................................................................................................... 44 3300 5 mm Proximity Probes, Metric: ............................................................................................. 45 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor .......................................................................................................... 46 3300 XL Extension Cable ................................................................................................................ 46 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Extension Cable .................................................... 47 Accessories....................................................................................................................................... 47
Section 7 System Graphs and Dimensional Drawings ............... 51 Section 8 Micrometer Specifications and Ordering Information 71
Mechanical ....................................................................................................................................... 71 Ordering Information ....................................................................................................................... 72 3300 XL Precision Micrometer.................................................................................................... 72 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer .......................................................................................................... 72 Accessories................................................................................................................................... 72 Dimensional Drawings..................................................................................................................... 73
Section 9 Housing Specifications and Ordering Information..... 75

Mechanical ....................................................................................................................................... 75 Ordering Information ....................................................................................................................... 75 3300 XL Proximitor Housing.................................................................................................... 75 Accessories................................................................................................................................... 77
viii
ix
Section 1 System Description

Transducer Systems
The 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Transducer System consists of: a 3300 XL 8 mm probe a 3300 XL extension cable a 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor1
The 3300 XL 8 mm system represents our most advanced performance in an eddy current proximity transducer system. The standard 3300 XL 8 mm system is also 100% compliant with the American Petroleum Institutes (API) 670 Standard (4th Edition) for such transducers. All 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Transducer Systems achieve this level of performance while allowing complete interchangeability of probe, extension cable, and Proximitor Sensor without the need for individual component matching or bench calibration. Each component of the 3300 XL 8 mm Transducer System is backward compatible and interchangeable3 with other non-XL 3300 series 5 and 8 mm transducer system components4. This includes the 3300 5 mm probe, which is used when an 8 mm probe is too large for the available mounting space4, 5, and 6. The 3300 5mm Proximity Transducer System consists of: a 3300 5 mm probe 4, 5, 6 a 3300 XL extension cable a 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor1 Like the 3300 XL 8mm, the 3300 5mm system also provides an accurate, stable signal output over a wide temperature range while allowing complete interchangeability of probe, extension cable, and Proximitor Sensor without the need for individual component matching or bench calibration. Both systems provide an output voltage directly proportional to the distance between the probe tip and the observed conductive surface. They are capable of both static (position) and dynamic (vibration) measurements, and are primarily used for vibration and position measurement applications on fluid-film bearing machines, as well as Keyphasor measurement and speed measurement applications2.
Proximitor Sensor
The 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor incorporates numerous improvements over previous designs. Its physical packaging permits high-density DIN-rail installation. It can also be mounted in a traditional panel mount configuration, where it shares an identical footprint to older 4-hole mounted 3300 Proximitor Sensor. The mounting base for either option provides electrical isolation, eliminating the need for separate isolator plates. The 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor is highly immune to radio frequency interference, allowing installation in fiberglass housings without adverse effects from nearby radio 1
frequency signals. Improved RFI/EMI immunity allows the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor to achieve European CE mark approvals without requiring special shielded conduit or metallic housings, resulting in lower installation costs and complexity. The 3300 XLs SpringLoc terminal strips require no special installation tools and facilitate faster, more robust field wiring connections by eliminating screw-type clamping mechanisms that can loosen.
Proximity Probe and Extension Cable

The 3300 XL probe and XL extension cable also reflect improvements over previous designs. A patented TipLoc molding method provides a more robust bond between the probe tip and the probe body. The probes cable is more securely attached as well, incorporating a patented CableLoc design that provides 330 N (75 lbf) pull strength where the probe cable attaches to the probe tip. 3300 XL 8 mm Probes and XL Extension Cables can also be ordered with an optional FluidLoc cable option. This option prevents oil and other liquids from leaking out of the machine through the cables interior.
Connectors
The 3300 XL 8mm and 3300 5mm probe, extension cable, and Proximitor Sensor have corrosion-resistant, gold-plated ClickLoc connectors. These connectors require only finger-tight torque (connectors will "click"), and the specially engineered locking mechanism prevents the connectors from loosening. They do not require any special tools for installation or removal. 3300 XL 8 mm Probes and Extension Cables can also be ordered with connector protectors already installed. Connector protectors can also be supplied separately for installation in the field (such as when the cable must be run through restrictive conduit). Connector protectors are recommended for all installations and provide increased environmental protection7.
Extended Temperature Range Applications

An Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Probe and Extension Cable are available for applications where either the probe lead or extension cable may exceed the 177 C (350 F) temperature specification. The Extended Temperature Range Probe has an extended temperature rating for up to 260 C (500 F) for the probe lead and connector. The probe tip must remain below 177 C (350 F). The Extended Temperature Range Extension Cable is also rated for up to 260 C (500 F). Both the ETR probe and cable are compatible with standard temperature probes and cables. For example, you can utilize an ETR probe with the 330130 extension cable. The ETR system uses the standard 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor. When using any ETR component as part of your system, the accuracy is limited to the accuracy of the ETR system.
Notes: 1. Proximitor Sensors are supplied by default from the factory calibrated to AISI 4140 steel. Calibration to other target materials is available upon request. 2. Consult Bently Nevada Applications Note Considerations when using Eddy Current Proximity Probes for Overspeed Protection Applications when considering this transducer system for tachometer or overspeed measurements. 3. 3300 XL 8 mm components are both electrically and physically interchangeable with non-XL 3300 5 and 8 mm components. Although the packaging of the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor differs from its predecessor, it is designed to fit in the same 4hole mounting pattern when used with the 4-hole mounting base, and will fit within the same mounting space specifications (when minimum permissible cable bend radius is observed). 4. When XL and non-XL 3300-series 5 and 8 mm system components are mixed, system performance is limited to the specifications for the non-XL 3300 5 and 8 mm Transducer System. 5. A 5 mm probe uses smaller physical packaging while providing the same linear range as a 3300 XL 8 mm probe (ref 141194-01); however, it does not permit reduced side view clearances or tip-to-tip spacing requirements compared to an XL 8 mm probe. It is used when physical (not electrical) constraints preclude the use of an 8 mm probe, such as mounting between thrust bearing pads or other constrained spaces. When narrow side view probes are required, use the 3300 XL NSv probe and extension cable with the 3300 XL NSv Proximitor Sensor (refer to Specifications and Ordering Information p/n 147385-01). 6. XL 8 mm probes provide a thicker encapsulation of the probe coil in the molded PPS plastic probe tip. This results in a more rugged probe than the 3300 5 mm probe. The larger diameter of the probe body also provides a stronger, more robust case. Bently Nevada, LLC recommends the use of XL 8 mm probes when possible to provide optimal robustness against physical abuse. 7. Silicone tape is also provided with each 3300 XL extension cable and can be used instead of connector protectors. Silicone tape is not recommended in applications where the probe-to-extension cable connection will be exposed to turbine oil.
Receiving, Inspecting, and Handling the System

The probe, extension cable and Proximitor Sensor are shipped as separate units and must be interconnected at the installation site by the user. Carefully remove all equipment from the shipping containers and inspect the equipment for shipping damage. If shipping damage is apparent, file a claim with the carrier and submit a copy to the nearest Bently Nevada, LLC office. Include part numbers and serial numbers on all correspondence. If no damage is apparent and the equipment is not going to be used immediately, return the equipment to the shipping containers and reseal until ready for use. Store the equipment in an environment free from potentially damaging conditions such as high temperature or a corrosive atmosphere. See Environmental Limits on page 36 for environmental specifications.
Customer Service
Bently Nevada, LLC maintains numerous Sales and Service offices worldwide. To locate the office nearest you, visit our website http://www.bently.com. Here, you can also find specifications on all standard product offerings. Support for products and services should be directed to one of these departments: For product quotations, product applications, product ordering, scheduling onsite Services, and questions regarding existing orders, please contact your nearby Bently Nevada, LLC Sales and Service Office. For general product pricing, delivery, or other ordering information, contact your local BN office or contact Customer Service Department, Minden, Nevada, USA Phone: 1-775-215-1011 Fax: 1-775-215-2873. For technical questions or problems regarding installed BN products, contact our Technical Support Staff at: techsupport@bently.com or at the following locations: Technical Support (North America) Phone: 1-775-782-1818 Fax: 1-775-215-2890 Technical Support (UK) Phone: (44) 1925 818504 Fax: (44) 1925 817819
Section 2 Installation
This section contains a checklist of items that you must consider when you install a 3300 XL Transducer system.
Installing the Probe

The following figures show the probe sizes and the minimum values for probe separation, side clearance and target configuration. Refer to Probe Case Torque on page 35, for proper torque and the dimensions of the thread.
Description Probe tip Thread types Wrench Flats Lock nut
XL 8 mm probe 8 mm M10x1, 3/8-24, or unthreaded 8 mm or 5/16 in 17 mm or 9/16 in Hex
5 mm probe 5 mm M8x1 or 1/4-28 7 mm or 7/32 in 13 mm or 7/16 Hex
76.2 mm (3.00 in) Min * 15.2 mm (0.60 in) Min
50.8 mm (2.00 in) Min **
5 mm and XL 8 mm Probe Target Sizes

6.4 mm (0.25 in) Min
16.0 mm (0.63 in) Min
16.0 mm (0.63 in) Min 17.8 mm (0.70 in) Min
8.9 mm (0.35 in) Min
8.9 mm (0.35 in) Min
40.6 mm (1.60 in) Min
5 mm and XL 8 mm Probe Mounting Dimensions
5 mm and XL 8 mm Probe-to-Probe Separation Due to Cross Talk
Notes: * At or below 76.2 mm (3.00 in), an increase in scale factor as the target size is reduced will occur per performance specification 159484. See application alert below. ** At or below 50.8 mm (2.00 in), a small vibration signal will occur per performance specifications 159484, due to cross talk.
Application Alert: Mounting dimensions and target size affect the scale factor of proximity transducer systems. The minimum recommended dimensions above were chosen to minimize error yet retain flexibility for different mounting situations.
Adjust the distance between the probe tip and the shaft using one of the methods shown in the following figure. The electrical method for setting the probe gap is preferred.
Voltage at the center of the linear range (typically -9 Vdc)

OUT COM
Voltmeter
-9 V
Power Source
-24 V 1
Spacer
Vt
10 kohm, 1%
MADE IN U.S.A.
1270 um (50 mil)
Mechanical Method
Electrical Method
Mounting the Proximitor Sensor

Mount the Proximitor Sensor in a location that is compatible with its environmental specifications (see Environmental Limits on page 36). Consider the local electrical codes and the presence of hazardous or explosive gas at the installation site. (Refer to document Installation of Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas.)
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
Interchangeable Mounting Feet

The mounting feet for the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor are interchangeable. If a Proximitor Sensor is purchased with one mounting option, either the DIN mount option or the panel mount option, the mounting hardware can be changed simply by removing the mounting foot that is currently on the Proximitor Sensor and replacing it with the other type mounting foot.
(1) (2) (3)
DIN Mount Part (part number 138493-01) 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor Panel Mount Part (part number 138492-01)
Mounting the Proximitor Sensor with DIN Mount Part

To mount the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor with a DIN Mount Part on a DIN rail: 1. Install the Proximitor Sensor into the DIN Mount Part (if not already installed).
2. Examine the underneath side of the DIN Mount Part. There is a spring-loaded clip on one side and two protrusions that will catch the edge of the DIN rail on the other side. The side with the two protrusions will need to be installed so that the edge of the DIN rail fits into the gap.
(1) (2) (3)
Spring-loaded clip DIN rail Edge of DIN rail must fit into this gap
3. Push down on the Proximitor Sensor until the unit snaps into place. The unit is now installed.
Removing the Proximitor Sensor from the DIN Rail

Remove the Proximitor Sensor from the DIN rail by using a regular screwdriver to unclip the unit from the rail. Install a regular screwdriver into the rear of the spring-loaded clip and push the top of the screwdriver towards the Proximitor Sensor to pry the spring-loaded clip back so that the Proximitor Sensor can be removed from the DIN rail.
Termination of Field Wiring in the Terminal Block

1. Strip the insulation from the field wiring to be installed into the terminal block. The recommended strip length is 10 mm (0.4 in.).
10
2. Conductor strands must be twisted together before installing the field wire into the terminal block. It is highly recommended to tin the conductor strands as well. The terminal block can accommodate field wiring conductor sizes of 0.2 1.5 mm2 (16 24 AWG). 3. Using a small regular screwdriver push down on the orange lever corresponding to the position in the terminal block where the field wire will be installed and insert the field wire.
(1) (2)
Small screwdriver Field wiring
Removal of the field wire is accomplished by pushing down on the orange lever and pulling on the field wire to remove it from the terminal block. If a stranded wire is used for the field wiring and a strand is broken off inside the terminal block, turn the Proximitor Sensor upside down while pushing down the orange lever to remove the strand from the terminal block.
Routing the Extension Cable and Field Wiring

Route the extension cable using the following guidelines. Check that the sum of the extension cable and probe lead lengths equal the Proximitor Sensor system length. (For example, a 9 metre Proximitor Sensor will work with an 8 metre extension cable and a 1 metre probe.)
11
Check component compatibility by verifying system color identification on all system components. For the 3300 XL 8 mm system and 3300 5 mm probe, components will be marked with a blue color code. Secure the extension cable to supporting surfaces by using mounting clips or similar devices. Identify the probe and both ends of the extension cable by inserting labels under the clear Teflon sleeves and applying heat to shrink the tubing. Join the coax connectors between the Proximitor Sensor, extension cable and probe lead. Tighten connectors to finger tight. Use either a connector protector or self-fusing silicone tape to insulate the connection between the probe lead and the extension cable. Do not use self-fusing silicone tape to insulate a connection where the silicone tape may be exposed to turbine oil. If the probe is in a part of the machine that is under pressure or vacuum, seal the hole where the extension cable leaves the machine by using appropriate cable seals and terminal boxes.
Use the following wiring diagrams to connect the field wiring between the Proximitor Sensor and the monitoring instruments. (Refer to documents Guidelines for Grounding (Earthing) Bently Nevada Rotating Machinery Information System and Installation of Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas.)
Transducer Power Common (ground) Input Signal
No Barriers or 3300/3500 Internal Barriers

Vt COM OUT
Monitor Terminal Strip
Cable Shield
Proximitor Sensor
Connector Protector
Probe
Transducer Power Common (ground) Input Signal Monitor Terminal Strip Cable Shield
External Barriers
Vt COM OUT
Cable Shield External Barrier
Proximitor Sensor
Connector Protector
Probe
12
Section 3 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

This section shows how to verify that the system is operating properly and identify parts of the system that are not working properly. The 3300 XL Transducer System (probe, cable and Proximitor Sensor), when correctly installed and verified, does not need calibration or verification at regular intervals. If the monitor OK light (green) indicates a NOT OK condition (light is not illuminated), either a fault has occurred in the field wiring/transducer system/power source, the probe is too close to target, the probe is detecting other material than the target, the target material is not AISI 4140, the probe is too far from the target. Bently Nevada, LLC recommends the following practices to assure continued satisfactory operation. Verify operation using the scale factor verification method on the following page, if: Any of the system components (probe, cable or Proximitor Sensor) are replaced. Any of the components are removed and reinstalled or moved and remounted. Any of the components appear to be damaged. The machine being monitored is over-hauled.
Please note that a step change in the output of the transducer system, or other output that is not consistent with the associated machinerys trended data is, in most instances, not a transducer problem but a machinery problem. Verification of the transducer system under these conditions can be done at the users discretion. Under harsh operating conditions some users prefer to verify all transducers at a regular interval. As noted above, this is not required with the 3300 XL Transducer System. Users who wish to verify the system on a regular interval should use an interval consistent with their own practices and procedures, which may or may not be based upon ISO 10012-1 Quality Assurance Requirements for Measuring Equipment (section 4.11). For target materials other than AISI 4140 steel and for other special applications, contact your local Bently Nevada office.
Note: Hazardous Locations: Area must be free of hazardous material before any maintenance or troubleshooting can be performed.
The scale factor verification requires the following instruments and equipment: Digital multimeter Spindle micrometer Fixed resistor, 10 k Power supply (-24 Vdc 1)
The scale factor verification uses the test setup as shown in the following figure: 13
Multimeter Vdc
Vin OUT COM Vt Com 10 kohm
Power Supply -24 Vdc

+ -
Proximitor Sensor
Probe, Target, and Spindle Micrometer
Scale Factor Verification

1. Compensate for mechanical backlash and adjust the spindle micrometer for electrical zero.
2. Adjust the gap to electrical zero by moving the probe.
14
3. Compensate for mechanical backlash in the micrometer and adjust to the start of the linear range.
4. Record voltages in the following table and calculate Incremental Scale Factors (ISFs) and Average Scale Factor (ASF) using the equations.
15
Adjust Micrometer to
Record Voltages
Calculate Scale Factor
mmn
miln
Vdcn
ISFn (Incremental Scale Factor)
Vdiffn (Difference Voltage) >>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
>> >> >> >> >> >> >> >> >> >> >> >> >> >> >> >> >> ASF (Average Scale Factor)
>> >> >> >> >> >> >> >>
>> = Enter values into these cells
>>
Vdc n - 1 Vdc n 0.25 Vdc 0.25 mm Vdc 2.25 mm ASF(V/mm) = 2 ISFn (V/mm) = ISFn (mV / mil) =
16
Vdc n - 1 Vdc n 0.01
ASF(mV / mil) =
Vdc 10 mil Vdc 90 mil 0.08
Vdiffn = Vdc n + (mmn 7.87)
Vdiffn = Vdc n + (miln 0.2)
5. Use the following formula to determine maximum Deviation from Straight Line (DSL):
DSL(mm) = DSL(mil) =
Vdif Vdif
(max)
Vdif Vdif
(min)
15.74
(max) (min)
= ______ mm = ______ mil
0.4
If the ISF or DSL of the system is out of tolerance, contact Bently Nevada, LLC for further information on possible calibration problems. The preceding pages indicate scale factor verification using a TK-3. This is suitable for rough verification. For API 670 system verification a more precise micrometer and target must be used. There are two different 3300 XL Micrometer Kits that can be used to verify the calibration of Bently Nevada transducer systems or to check the scale factor of specific shafts. Both micrometer kits will work with Bently Nevada eddy current transducers ranging in size from the 3300 XL NSv Transducer System up to the 3300 XL 11 mm Transducer Systems. Both micrometers also have options for either a metric or English micrometer. The 3300 XL Precision Micrometer (part number 330185) is a highly accurate verification device. It should be used when performing acceptance testing on our transducer systems. All of our transducer systems have a specified linear range and average scale factor (ASF). The transducer systems also have a maximum deviation from straight line (DSL) and ISF tolerances for ambient and extended temperatures. The 3300 XL Precision Micrometer comes with a high precision 4140 steel target and is used to make precise measurements and verify whether the transducer system is working properly and within published specifications. The 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer (part number 330186) is used to check the scale factor of the transducer system directly on your shaft. You can compare the scale factor of your transducer system with that of a Bently Nevada supplied 4140 steel target to check whether errors in the measurement are due to runout, target material or a problem in the transducer system.
Troubleshooting
This section shows how to interpret a fault indication and isolate faults in an installed transducer system. Before beginning this procedure, be sure the system has been installed correctly and all connectors have been secured properly in the correct locations. When a malfunction occurs, locate the appropriate fault, check the probable causes for the fault indication and follow the procedure to isolate and correct the fault. Use a digital voltmeter to measure voltage. If you find faulty transducers, contact your local Bently Nevada, LLC office for assistance. The troubleshooting procedures use measured voltages as shown in the following figure and tables:
17
Vps
Vxdcr
Vsig
Table 3-1. Symbols for Measured Voltages

Symbol Meaning Voltage measured between...
VSIG
Signal voltage from the transducer
VPS
Power supply voltage
VXDCR
Supply voltage at transducer
Note: VSIG, VPS, and VXDCR are all negative voltage values.
Symbol
Definition
A>B A<B A=B
"A" value is more positive than "B" "A" value is more negative than "B" "A" same value (or very close) to "B"
18
MADE IN U.S.A.
OUT and COM
Power Source and Common
-VT and COM
Table 3-2 Definitions

Example
-21 > -23 -12 < -5 -24.1 = -24.0
Fault Type 1: VXDCR > -17.5 Vdc or VXDCR < -26 Vdc
Possible causes: Faulty power source Faulty field wiring Faulty Proximitor Sensor
Vps
Measure VPS: Is VPS > -23 Vdc or VPS < -26 Vdc? Yes: No: Faulty power supply. Go to next step.
Vxdcr
Measure VXDCR: Is VXDCR > -23 Vdc or VXDCR < -26 Vdc? Yes: Faulty Field wiring. No: Faulty Proximitor Sensor.
MADE IN U .S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
19
Fault Type 2: VSIG = O Vdc

Possible causes: Incorrect power source voltage Short circuit in field wiring Short circuit at Proximitor Sensor terminal connection Faulty Proximitor Sensor
Use the procedure for fault type 1 Go to the next step
Does fault condition type 1 exist? Yes: No:
Vsig
Measure VSIG: Is VSIG = 0 Vdc? No: Yes: Incorrect power source voltage or short in field wiring or short at Proximitor Sensor terminal connection. Faulty Proximitor Sensor.
Fault Type 3: -1 Vdc < VSIG < 0 Vdc

Possible causes:
20
Probe is incorrectly gapped (too close to target) Incorrect power source voltage Faulty Proximitor Sensor Probe is detecting other material than target (counter bore or machine case) Short or open circuit in a connector (dirty or wet) or loose connectors Short or open circuit in the probe Short or open circuit in extension cable
MADE IN U.S.A.
Does fault condition type 1 exist? Yes: No: Use the procedure for fault type 1 Go to the next step
Is the probe gapped correctly? Are counter bore dimensions correct? (See Installing the Probe on page 5.) No: Yes Regap the probe or check counter bore. Retest system. Go to the next step.
Step 2
Original probe/ extension cable

MADE IN U.S.A.
Vsig
Known good probe with correct length cable (open gap with probe held away from conductive material)
Measure VSIG: Is VSIG < VXDCR + 1 Vdc? No: Yes: Faulty Proximitor Sensor Go to next step
Inspect for clean connection: Is the connection dirty, rusty, or a poor connection? Yes: Clean the connector using isopropyl alcohol or electronic terminal cleaner, reassemble and retest the system.
21
No:
Go to the next step.
Measure resistance RTOTAL: Is RTOTAL within specifications? 5 m system: 8.75 0.70 9 m System: 9.87 0.90 Yes: No: Retest original system Go to the next step
Measure resistance, RPROBE: Is RPROBE within specifications (see Probe dc resistance (nominal) (RPROBE) table on page 29)? No: Yes: Faulty probe. Go to next step.
22
Measure the resistance, RJACKET and RCORE: Is the resistance within specifications (see Extension cable dc resistance [nominal] table on 29)? No: Yes: Faulty extension cable Retest the original system
Fault Type 4: VXDCR <VSIG < VXDCR + 2.5 Vdc

Possible causes: Faulty Proximitor Sensor Probe is incorrectly gapped (too far from target)
Measure VSIG: Is 1.2 < VSIG < -0.3 Vdc? No: Yes: Faulty Proximitor sensor Reconnect the system. Regap the probe. Retest the system.
Fault Type 5: VSIG = VXDCR

Possible causes: Incorrect power source voltage Faulty Proximitor Sensor Faulty field wiring (between Out and VT)
MADE I N U. S.A.
23
Vsig
Measure VSIG: Is VSIG = VXDCR? Yes: No: Faulty Proximitor Sensor Faulty field wiring (short between Out and VT)
Bently Nevada, LLC performs failure analysis on all returned transducers that are in warranty. The information gained during analysis of failed products is used to improve our current and future products. If you encounter a part that has failed, return the part with a brief description of the product application and symptoms observed to Bently Nevada headquarters in Minden, Nevada for analysis:
Bently Nevada, LLC Attn: Product Repair Department 1631 Bently Parkway South Minden, Nevada 89423 USA
24
MADE IN U.S.A.
Section 4 3300 XL Proximitor Housing

The 3300 XL Proximitor Housing allows you to protect Proximitor Sensors, interface modules and electrical terminal blocks in areas that would otherwise be subjected to possible damage from moisture or other adverse environmental conditions.
Mounting Options
The 3300 XL Proximitor Housing is designed to accommodate both DIN-rail and panel mounted Proximitor Sensors. The housing holds up to eight DIN-rail 3300 XL Proximitor Sensors or six panel-mounted Proximitor Sensors.
Environmental Certifications
The 3300 XL Proximitor Housing has been tested and certified to meet stringent IP66 and Type 4X environmental ratings for protecting enclosed electronic equipment in harsh conditions. The 304L stainless steel construction resists moisture, corrosion and impacts in virtually all installations. The Housing may be hosed down for cleaning when necessary. The 3300 XL Proximitor Housing can be used for North American Division 1 and 2 and European Zone 0, 1, and 2 hazardous area applications when used with approved fittings. However, it is not an explosion-proof housing.
Removable gland plates

The 3300 XL Proximitor Housing is a housing with removable gland plates. This feature makes it easy to remove the side plates or bottom gland plate for drilling or punching conduit holes. In addition, the door can be easily unlatched and removed due to its stainless steel slip hinge. The gland plates have four thickness options to suit various conduit installation requirements. If you want a threaded conduit hole, a gland plate thickness of 3.05 mm (0.120 in) or greater is required in order to properly drill and tap the holes. The conduit fittings come with a lock nut and O-ring to firmly tighten and seal the conduit fitting into both tapped and untapped holes. Fittings are available in stainless steel, brass, aluminum or chrome-plated zinc.
25
Dimensional Drawings
Figure 4-1 3300 XL Housing Outline Drawing

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Stainless steel slip hinge. Allows cover to be removed from housing M10 x 1.5 6 g ground stud, stainless steel M6 slotted hex head captive fastener, stainless steel Approval/ identification label M6 x 16 mm hex head bolt, stainless steel
26
(6) (7)
8.33 [0.328] padlock hasp Removable gland plate, 3 places
Panel Mount Orientation

The following illustration shows the correct orientation for six panel mounted 3300 XL Proximitor Sensors in the 3300 XL Proximitor Housing:
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
(1)
Mounting plate, 3300 XL Proximitor Housing
MADE IN U.S.A. MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
27
DIN Mount Orientation

The following illustration shows the correct installation for eight DIN-mounted 3300 XL Proximitor Sensors in a 3300 XL Proximitor Housing:
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
(1) (2)
Mounting plate, 3300 XL Proximitor Housing DIN rail end cap
28
Section 5 System Specifications

Unless otherwise noted, the following specifications are for a 3300 XL 8/5 mm Proximitor Sensor, extension cable and XL 8 mm or 3300 5 mm probe between +18 C and +27 C (+64 F to +80 F), with a -24 Vdc power supply, a 10 kilo load, an AISI 4140 steel target, and a probe gapped at 1.27 mm (50 mils). Performance characteristics are applicable for systems that consist solely of 3300 XL 8 mm or 3300 5 mm components. The system accuracy and interchangeability specifications do not apply when using a transducer system calibrated to any target other than a Bently Nevada, LLC AISI 4140 steel target.
Electrical
Proximitor Sensor Input:
Accepts one non-contacting 3300-series 5 mm, or 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probe and XL Extension Cable.
Power:
Requires -17.5 Vdc to -26 Vdc without barriers at 12 mA maximum consumption, -23 Vdc to -26 Vdc with barriers. Operation at a more positive voltage than -23.5 Vdc can result in reduced linear range.
Supply Sensitivity:
Less than 2 mV change in output voltage per volt change in input voltage.
Output resistance:
50
Probe dc resistance (nominal) (RPROBE) table:

Probe Length 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 5.0 9.0 Resistance from the Center Conductor to the Outer Conductor (RPROBE) (ohms) 7.45 0.50 7.59 0.50 7.73 0.50 7.88 0.50 8.73 0.70 9.87 0.90
Extension cable dc resistance (nominal):

Length of Extension Cable Resistance from Center Conductor to Center Conductor (RCORE) (ohms) 0.66 0.10 0.77 0.12 0.88 0.13 0.99 0.15 1.54 0.23 1.65 0.25 1.76 0.26 1.87 0.28 Resistance from Outer Conductor to Outer Conductor (RJACKET) (ohms) 0.20 0.04 0.23 0.05 0.26 0.05 0.30 0.06 0.46 0.09 0.49 0.10 0.53 0.11 0.56 0.11
3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5
29
Extension cable capacitance:

69.9 pF/m (21.3 pF/ft) typical
Field wiring:
0.2 to 1.5 mm (16 to 24 AWG). Recommend using three-conductor shielded triad cable. Maximum length of 305 metres (1,000 feet) between the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor and the monitor. See the frequency response graphs Figure 7-11 Frequency Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System with varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers, Figure 7-12 Phase Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System with varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers, Figure 7-13 Frequency Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System with varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers, and Figure 7-14 Phase Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System with varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers for signal roll off at high frequencies when using longer field wiring lengths.
Linear Range:
2 mm (80 mils). Linear range begins at approximately 0.25 mm (10 mils) from target and is from 0.25 to 2.3 mm (10 to 90 mils) (approximately 1 to 17 Vdc).
Recommended Gap Setting:

1.27 mm (50 mils)
Incremental Scale Factor (ISF)

XL 8 mm standard 5 metre system: 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) 5% including interchangeability error when measured in increments of 0.25 mm (10 mils) over the 80 mil linear range from 0 to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F). XL 8 mm standard 9 metre system: 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) 6.5% including interchangeability error when measured in increments of 0.25 mm (10 mils) over the 80 mil linear range from 0 to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F). 3300 5 mm standard 5 and 9 metre systems: 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) 6.5% typical, including interchangeability error when measured in increments of 0.25 mm (10 mils) over the linear range. Extended Temperature Range (ETR) 5 and 9 metre systems: 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) 6.5% including interchangeability error when measured in increments of 0.25 mm (10 mils) over the 80 mil linear range from 0 to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F).
30
Deviation from best fit straight line (DSL)

XL 8 mm standard 5 metre system: Less than 0.025mm (1 mil) with components at 0 C to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F). XL 8 mm standard 9 metre system: Less than 0.038mm (1.5 mil) with components at 0 C to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F). 3300 5 mm standard 5 and 9 metre systems: Less than 0.038mm (1.5 mil) with components at 18 C to 27 C (64 F to 80 F) Extended Temperature Range 5 and 9 metre systems: Less than 0.038mm (1.5 mil) with components at 0 C to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F).
XL 8 mm and 3300 5 mm standard 5 metre system performance over extended temperatures:

Over a probe temperature range of 35 C to +120 C (-31 F to +248 F) with the Proximitor Sensor and extension cable between 0 C to +45C (+32 F to +113 F), the ISF remains within 10% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) and the DSL remains within 0.076 mm (3 mils). Over a Proximitor Sensor and extension cable temperature range of 35 C to +65 C (-31 F to +149 F) with the probe between 0 C to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F), the ISF remains within 10% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) and the DSL remains within 0.076 mm (3 mils).
XL 8 mm and 3300 5 mm standard 9 metre system performance over extended temperatures:

Over a probe temperature range of 35 C to +120 C (-31 F to +248 F) with the Proximitor Sensor and extension cable between 0 C to +45C (+32 F to +113 F), the ISF remains within 18% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) and the DSL remains within 0.152 mm (6 mils). Over a Proximitor Sensor and extension cable temperature range of 35 C to +65 C (-31 F to +149 F) with the probe between 0 C to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F), the ISF remains within 18% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) and the DSL remains within 0.152 mm (6 mils).
Extended Temperature Range system performance over extended temperatures:

Over a probe and extension cable temperature range of 35 C to + 260 C (-31 F to +500 F) with the Proximitor Sensor between 0 C to +45C (+32 F to
31
+113 F), the ISF remains within 18% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) and the DSL remains within 0.152 mm (6 mils).
Frequency Response:
0 to 10 kHz: +0, -3 dB, with up to 305 metres (1000 feet) of field wiring.
Minimum Target Size:

15.2 mm (0.6 in) diameter (flat target)
Shaft Diameter
Minimum: 50.8 mm (2 in) Recommended minimum: 76.2 mm (3 in) Measurements on shaft diameters smaller than 50 mm (2 in) usually require close spacing of radial vibration or axial position transducers with the potential for their electromagnetic emitted fields to interact with one another (cross-talk), resulting in erroneous readings. Care should be taken to maintain minimum separation of transducer tips, generally at least 40 mm (1.6 in) for axial position measurements or 38 mm (1.5 in) for radial vibration measurements. Radial vibration or position measurements on shaft diameters smaller than 76.2 mm (3 in) will generally result in a change in scale factor. Effects of 60 Hz Magnetic Fields Up to 300 Gauss: Output voltage in mil pp/gauss:
Gap 5 metre XL Proximitor Sensor 0.0119 0.0131 0.0133 9 metre XL Proximitor Sensor 0.0247 0.0323 0.0348 Probe Ext. Cable
10 mil 50 mil 90 mil
0.0004 0.0014 0.0045
0.0004 0.0014 0.0045
Electrical Classification:
Complies with the European CE mark.
Hazardous Area Approvals

Note: Multiple approvals for hazardous areas certified by Canadian Standards Association (CSA/NRTL/C) in North America and by Baseefa (2001) in Europe.
North America: Ex ia IIC T4/T5; Class I Zone 0 or Class 1 Division 1; Groups A, B, C, and D, when installed with intrinsically safe zener barriers per drawing 141092 or when installed with galvanic isolators. Ex nA IIC T4/T5 Class I Zone 2 or Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D when installed without barriers per drawing 140979.
32
T5 @ Ta = -35 C to +85 C. T4 @ Ta= -51 C to +100 C. Europe: II 1 G EEx ia IIC T4/T5. EC certificate number BAS99ATEX1101, when installed per drawing 141092.
II 3 G EEx nAII T4/T5. EC certificate number BAS99ATEX3100U,when installed per drawing 140979. T5 @ Ta= -35 C to +85 C T4 @ Ta= -51 C to +100 C. IEC Ex: 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor, ia IECEx BAS04.0055X Ex ia IIC T4 / T5 (-51C Ta +100C / -35C Ta +85C) Terminal Block Connections Ui= -28V Ii= 140mA Pi= 0.84W Coaxial Connection Ui = -28V Ii = 140mA Pi = 0.84W Load Parameters The capacitance and either the inductance or the inductance to resistance (L/R) ratio of the load connected to the probe coaxial terminal, must not exceed the following values:
Group IIC IIB IIA Capacitance F 0.077 0.644 2.144 Inductance mH 0.99 7.41 15.6 L/R Ratio H/ 35 142 295
Ci = 0 Li =10H
Ci= 5.7nF Li = 0.85mH
The XL Proximitor Sensor must be installed so as to minimize the risk of impact or friction with other metallic surfaces. 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor, nA IECEx BAS04.0057X AEx nA II T4 / T5 (-51C Ta +100C / -35C Ta +85C) The terminals must be provided with a level of protection of at least IP54. Ui = -28V 3300 XL 8mm and 3300 5 mm Eddy Current Probes, ia IECEx BAS04.0056
33
AEx ia IIC Temperature Classification per the table below.

Temperature Classification T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Ambient Temperature (Probe Only) -51C to +232C -51C to +177C -51C to +120C -51C to +80C -51C to +40C
Ui = -28V Pi =0.84W
Ci = 1.5nF
Ii = 140mA Li = 200H 3300 XL 8mm and 3300 5mm Eddy Current Probes, nA IECEx BAS04.0058X Ex nA II Temperature Classification per the table above. Must be supplied from a voltage limited source. EEx nA for Zone 2, Group IIC, EC certificate number BAS99ATEX3100U.
Mechanical
Probe Tip Material:
Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS).
Probe Case Material:

AISI 304 stainless steel (SST) for forward mount and smooth case probes; AISI 303 SST for reverse mount probes.
Probe Cable Specifications:

XL 8 mm standard cable: 75 triaxial, fluoroethylene propylene (FEP) insulated probe cable in the following total probe lengths: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 5, or 9 metres. 3300 5 mm standard cable:
75 coaxial, fluoroethylene propylene (FEP) insulated probe cable in the following total probe lengths: 0.5, 1, 2, 5, or 9 metres.
Extended Temperature Range cable: 75 triaxial, perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) insulated probe cable in the following total probe lengths: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 5, or 9 metres.
Extension Cable Material:

75 triaxial, fluoroethylene propylene (FEP) insulated.
Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Extension Cable Material:

34
75 triaxial, perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) insulated.
Proximitor Sensor Material:

A380 aluminum
System Length:
5 or 9 metres including extension cable
Standard Probe and Extension Cable Armor (optional):

Flexible AISI 302 or 304 SST with FEP outer jacket.
Extended Temperature Range Probe and Extension Cable Armor (optional):

Flexible AISI 302 or 304 SST with PFA outer jacket.
XL 8 mm and ETR Tensile Strength (maximum rated):

330 N (75 lbf) probe case to probe lead. 270 N (60 lbf) at probe lead to extension cable connectors.
3300 5 mm Tensile Strength (maximum rated):

220 N (50 lbf) probe case to probe lead. 220 N (50 lbf) probe lead to extension cable connectors.
Connector material:
Gold-plated brass and gold-plated beryllium copper.
Probe case torque: Standard forward-mounted XL 8 mm probes (3/8-24, M10x1) Standard forward-mounted 3300 probes (1/4-28, M8x1) Standard forward-mount XL 8 mm probes - first three threads (3/8-24, M10x1) Reverse mount probes Maximum Rated 33.9 Nm (300 inlbf) 7.3 Nm (65 inlbf) 22.6 Nm (200 inlbf) 22.6 Nm (200 inlbf) Recommended 11.2 Nm (100 inlbf) 5.1 Nm (45 inlbf) 7.5 Nm (66 inlbf) 7.5 Nm (66 inlbf)
Connector-to-connector torque
Recommended torque: see table:
Connector Type Two 3300 XL gold "click" type connectors One non-XL stainless steel connector and one 3300 XL connector Tightening Instructions Finger tight Finger tight plus 1/8 turn using pliers
Maximum torque: 0.565 Nm (5 inlbf)
Minimum Bend Radius:

25.4 mm (1.0 in)
Total System Mass (typical):

35
0.7 kg (1.5 lbm) Probe: 323 g (11.4 oz) Extension Cable: 34 g/m (0.4 oz/ft) Armored Extension cable: 103 g/m (1.5 oz/ft) Proximitor Sensor: 246 g (8.7 oz)
Probe Temperature Range
Operating and Storage Temperature: Standard probe: -51 C to +177 C (-60 F to +351 F) Extended Temperature Range probe: -51 C to +177 C (-60 F to +351 F) for the probe tip; -51 C to +260 C (-60 F to +500 F) for the probe cable and connector.
Note: Exposing the probe to temperatures below 34 C (-30 F) may cause premature failure of the pressure seal.
Extension Cable Temperature Range

Operating and Storage Temperature: Standard cable: -51 C to +177 C (-60 F to +351 F) Extended Temperature Range cable: -51 C to +260 C (-60 F to +500 F)
Proximitor Sensor Temperature Range

Operating Temperature: -35 C to +85 C (-31 F to +185 F) Storage Temperature: -51 C to +100 C (-60 F to +212 F)
Relative Humidity:
Less than a 3% change in Average Scale Factor (ASF) when tested in 93% humidity in accordance with IEC standard 68-2-3 for up to 56 days.
Probe Pressure:
36
3300 XL 8 mm and 3300 5 mm probes are designed to seal differential pressure between the probe tip and case. The probe sealing material consists of a Fluorocarbon O-ring. Probes are not pressure tested prior to shipment. Contact our custom design department if you require a test of the pressure seal for your application.
Note: It is the responsibility of the customer or user to ensure that all liquids and gases are contained and safely controlled should leakage occur from a proximity probe. In addition, solutions with high or low pH values may erode the tip assembly of the probe causing media leakage into surrounding areas. Bently Nevada, LLC will not be held responsible for any damages resulting from leaking 3300 XL 8 mm or 3300 5 mm proximity probes. In addition, 3300 XL 8 mm or 3300 5 mm proximity probes will not be replaced under the service plan due to probe leakage.
Patents:
5,016,343; 5,126,664; 5,351,388, and 5,685,884.
Components or procedures described in these patents apply to this product.
37
38
Section 6 System Ordering Information

3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes:
330101 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, without armor3 330102 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, with armor3 Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX-EXX Option Descriptions A: Unthreaded Length Option
Order in increments of 0.1 in Length configurations: Maximum unthreaded length: 8.8 in Minimum unthreaded length: 0.0 in Example: 0 4 = 0.4 in B: Overall Case Length Option Order in increments of 0.1 in Threaded length configurations: Maximum case length: 9.6 in Minimum case length: 0.8 in Example: 2 4 = 2.4 in C: Total Length Option 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 10 15 20 50 90 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metre (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
D: Connector and Cable-Type Option 01 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector, standard cable 02 11 12 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector, standard cable Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector, FluidLoc cable Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector, FluidLoc cable
39
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Metric:

330103 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, without armor3 330104 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, with armor3 Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX-EXX Option Descriptions A: Unthreaded Length Option
Order in increments of 10 mm. Length configuration: Maximum unthreaded length: 230 mm Minimum unthreaded length: 0 mm Example: 0 6 = 60 mm B: Overall Case Length Option Order in increments of 10 mm. Metric thread configurations: Maximum length: 250 mm Minimum length: 20 mm Example: 0 6 = 60 mm C: Total Length Option 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 10 15 20 50 90 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metres (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
D: Connector and Cable-Type Option 01 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector, standard cable 02 11 12 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector, standard cable Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector, FluidLoc cable Miniature coaxial ClickLoc connector, FluidLoc cable
3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probes

330105-02-12-CXX-DXX-EXX, 3/8-24 UNF threads3 330106-05-30-CXX-DXX-EXX, M10 x 1 threads3 Option Descriptions C: Total Length Option 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
40
15 20 50 90
1.5 metre (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
D: Connector Option 02 Miniature ClickLocTM coaxial connector 12 Miniature ClickLocTM coaxial connector, FluidLoc cable
Note: The FluidLoc cable options 10 and 12 are not necessary on the vast majority of 330105 and 330106 installations due to the presence of the probe sleeve. Consider carefully the application before ordering the FluidLoc cable options
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Smooth Case:

330140 3300 XL 8 mm Probe without armor2 330141 3300 XL 8 mm Probe with armor2 Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX Option Descriptions A: Overall Case Length Option Order in increments of 0.1 in Length configurations: Maximum length: 9.6 in Minimum length: 0.8 in Example: 2 4 = 2.4 in B: Total Length Option 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 10 15 20 50 90 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metres (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
C: Connector and Cable-Type Option 01 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector, standard cable 02 11 12 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector, standard cable Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector, FluidLoc cable Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector, FluidLoc cable
41
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes:

330191 3300 XL 8 mm ETR Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, without armor 330192 3300 XL 8 mm ETR Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, with armor Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX Option Descriptions A: Unthreaded Length Option
Order in increments of 0.1 in Length configurations: Maximum unthreaded length: 8.8 in Minimum unthreaded length: 0.0 in Example: 1 5 = 1.5 in B: Overall Case Length Option Order in increments of 0.1 in Threaded length configurations: Maximum case length: 9.6 in Minimum case length: 0.8 in Example: 2 5 = 2.5 in C: Total Length Option 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 10 15 20 50 90 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metre (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes, Metric:

330193 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, without armor 330194 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, with armor Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX Option Descriptions A: Unthreaded Length Option
Order in increments of 10 mm. Length configuration: Maximum unthreaded length: 230 mm
42
Minimum unthreaded length: 0 mm Example: 0 6 = 60 mm B: Overall Case Length Option Order in increments of 10 mm. Metric thread configurations: Maximum length: 250 mm Minimum length: 20 mm Example: 0 6 = 60 mm C: Total Length Option 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 10 15 20 50 90 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metres (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Reverse Mount Probes

330195-02-12-CXX-DXX, 3/8-24 UNF threads 330196-05-30-CXX-DXX, M10 x 1 threads Option Descriptions C: Total Length Option 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 10 15 20 50 90 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metre (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes, Smooth Case:

330197 3300 XL 8 mm Probe without armor2 330198 3300 XL 8 mm Probe with armor2 Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX Option Descriptions A: Overall Case Length Option Order in increments of 0.1 in
43
Length configurations: Maximum length: 9.6 in Minimum length: 0.8 in Example: 3 5 = 3.5 in B: Total Length Option 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 10 15 20 50 90 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metres (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
3300 5 mm Proximity Probes:

330171 3300 5 mm Probe, 1/4-28 UNF thread, without armor 330172 3300 5 mm Probe, 1/4-28 UNF thread, with armor Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX-EXX Option Descriptions A: Unthreaded Length Option
Order in increments of 0.1 in Length configurations: Maximum unthreaded length: 8.8 in Minimum unthreaded length: 0.0 in Example: 0 4 = 0.4 in B: Overall Case Length Option Order in increments of 0.1 in Threaded length configurations: Maximum case length: 9.6 in Minimum case length: 0.8 in Example: 2 4 = 2.4 in C: Total Length Option 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 10 20 50 90 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
D: Connector and Cable-Type Option
44
01 02
Miniature coaxial ClickLoc standard cable
TM
connector with connector protector,
Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector, standard cable
3300 5 mm Proximity Probes, Metric:

330173 3300 5 mm Probe, M8 x 1 thread, without armor 330174 3300 5 mm Probe, M8 x 1 thread, with armor Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX-EXX Option Descriptions A: Unthreaded Length Option
Order in increments of 10 mm. Length configuration: Maximum unthreaded length: 230 mm Minimum unthreaded length: 0 mm Example: 0 6 = 60 mm B: Overall Case Length Option Order in increments of 10 mm. Metric thread configurations: Maximum length: 250 mm Minimum length: 20 mm Example: 0 6 = 60 mm C: Total Length Option 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 10 20 50 90 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
D: Connector and Cable-Type Option 01 02 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector, standard cable Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector, standard cable
45
3300 XL Proximitor Sensor

330180-AXX-BXX Option Descriptions A: Total Length and Mounting Option 50 5.0 metre (16.4 feet) system length, panel mount 51 52 90 91 92 5.0 metre (16.4 feet) system length, DIN mount 5.0 metre (16.4 feet) system length, no mounting hardware 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system length, panel mount 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system length, DIN mount 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system length, no mounting hardware
B: Agency Approval Option 00 Not required 05 Multiple approvals
3300 XL Extension Cable

330130-AXXX-BXX-CXX
Option Descriptions A: Cable Length Option 0 3 0 3.0 metres (9.8 feet) 035 040 045 070 075 080 085 3.5 metres (11.5 feet) 4.0 metres (13.1 feet) 4.5 metres (14.8 feet) 7.0 metres (22.9 feet) 7.5 metres (24.6 feet) 8.0 metres (26.2 feet) 8.5 metres (27.9 feet)
B: Connector Protector and Cable Option 00 Standard cable 01 02 03 10 11 12 13 Armored cable Standard cable with connector protectors Armored cable with connector protectors FluidLoc cable Armored FluidLoc cable FluidLoc cable with connector protectors Armored FluidLoc cable with connector protectors
46
3300 XL Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Extension Cable

330190-AXXX-BXX-CXX
Option Descriptions A: Cable Length Option 0 3 0 3.0 metres (9.8 feet) 035 040 045 070 075 080 085 3.5 metres (11.5 feet) 4.0 metres (13.1 feet) 4.5 metres (14.8 feet) 7.0 metres (22.9 feet) 7.5 metres (24.6 feet) 8.0 metres (26.2 feet) 8.5 metres (27.9 feet)
B: Cable Option 00 Standard cable 01 Armored cable C: Agency Approval Option 00 Not required 05 Multiple Approvals
Accessories
141078-01 Manual 02120015 Bulk field wire. 1.0 mm (18 AWG), 3 conductor, twisted, shielded cable with drain wire. Specify length in feet. 137491-AXX Aluminum probe clamp bracket2
2
Option Descriptions A: Mounting screw option 01 10-24 UNC-2A mounting screws 02 M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws
The aluminum clamp bracket is an unthreaded mounting bracket designed to use with the smooth case probes (330140, 330141, 330197 and 330198). After gapping the probe, tighten the clamp bracket by tightening the screws. The mounting screws have pre-drilled holes for safety wire.
137492-AXX Aluminum probe threaded mounting bracket Option Descriptions A: Thread size 01 3/8-24 02 1/4-28
47
03 04
M8 x 1 M10 x 1
The aluminum probe threaded mounting bracket is the standard mounting bracket for most 3300 and 3300 XL probe installations. The -01 and -02 options are supplied with two 10-24 UNC-2A mounting screws. The -03 and -04 options are supplied with two M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws. The mounting screws have predrilled holes for safety wire.
27474-AXX Phenolic threaded probe mounting bracket Option Descriptions A: Thread size 01 3/8-24 02 03 04 1/4-28 M8 x 1 M10 x 1
The phenolic threaded mounting bracket is recommended if additional electric isolation from the mounting location is required (as in some generator and electrical motor bearing locations). The -01 and 02 options are supplied with two 10-24 UNC-2A mounting screws. The -03 and -04 options are supplied with two M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws. The mounting screws have pre-drilled holes for safety wire.
138492-01 Replacement panel-mount mounting pad 138493-01 Replacement DIN-mount mounting pad 148722-01 3300 XL Test Plug. The 3300 XL Test Plug is contains three small test pins attached to three color-coded wires 1 metre in length, each terminated in a banana plug. The three-pin adapter plugs into the test pin holes on 3300 XL-style Proximitor Sensors. It is used to check the performance of the Proximitor Sensor from the test pin holes in the terminal strip without requiring the removal of the field wiring. 04310310 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor Panel-mount Screw. Package includes one 6-32 UNC thread forming mounting screw. (Supplied standard with Proximitor Housings [3300 XL panel-mount option] ). 03200006 Silicone self-fusing tape. A 9.1 metre (10 yard) roll of silicone tape to protect connectors. It is easy to install and provides excellent electrical isolation and protection from the environment. It is not recommended for use inside the casing of the machine. 40113-02 Standard Connector Protector Kit. Connector Protector Kit for 3300 XL 8 mm probes and extension
48
cables, including connector protectors and installation tools. 40113-03 5 mm/NSv Connector Protector Kit. Connector Protector Kit for 3300 5 mm probes, including connector protectors and installation tools. 136536-01 Connector Protector Adapter. Allows connector protector installation tools manufactured prior to 1998 to be used with 75 ClickLoc connectors. 40180-02 Standard Connector Protectors. Package contains 10 pairs of connector protectors for 3300 XL 8 mm probes and 3300 XL extension cables. 40180-03 5 mm/NSv Connector Protectors. Package contains 10 pairs of connector protectors for 3300 5 mm probes. 03839410 Standard Connector Protector - Male. Male connector protectors are installed onto the 3300 XL extension cable and attach to the female connector protector on the probe, providing environmental protection of connectors. 03839420 Standard Connector Protector - Female. Female connector protectors are installed onto the 3300 XL probe lead and attach to the male connector protector on the 3300 XL extension cable, providing environmental protection of connectors. Also placed on the 3300 XL extension cable to slide over the connection to the Proximitor Sensor and protect it from the environment. 03800001 5mm/NSv Connector Protector - Female. Placed onto 3300 5 mm probe leads; attaches to the male connector protector on the extension cable to provide environmental protection of connectors. 04301007 3/8-24 Probe Lock Nut with safety wire holes. Single probe lock nut with two holes drilled through the nut in order to secure the lock nut in place with safety wire. 04301008 M10 x 1 Probe Lock Nut with safety wire holes. Single probe lock nut with two holes drilled through the nut in order to secure the lock nut in place with safety wire. 330153-01 3300 XL Connector Kit. Used on 3300 XL 8 mm probes and 3300 XL extension cables. Contains one pair TM of male and female ClickLoc connectors, two colorcoded sleeves, two pieces of slit FEP tubing, and one strip of silicone tape.
49
330153-04 3300 5 mm Connector Kit. Used on 3300 5 mm probes. Contains one male ClickLocTM connector, one color-coded sleeve, one piece of slit FEP tubing, and one strip of silicone tape. 330153-09 3300 XL ETR Connector Kit. Used on ETR 3300 XL 8 mm probes and 3300 ETR XL extension cables. Contains one pair of male and female ClickLocTM connectors, two color-coded sleeves, two pieces of high temperature slit FEP tubing, and one strip of silicone tape. 163356 Connector Crimp Tool Kit. Includes one set of multiconnector inserts and connector installation instructions. Compatible only with 330153 connector kits or with probes shipped in 2003 or later with ClickLoc connectors uninstalled. Supplied with carrying case.
Notes:
1. Five metre probes are designed for use with the five metre Proximitor Sensor only. 2. Mounting clamps must be ordered separately for 330140, 330141, 330197, and 330198. 3. For a shorter delivery time, order commonly stocked probes. Currently, stocked probes consist of the following part numbers: 330101-00-08-05-02-00, 330101-00-08-05-02-05, 330101-00-08-10-02-00, 330101-00-08-10-02-05, 330101-00-12-10-02-00, 330101-00-12-10-02-05, 330101-00-16-10-02-00, 330101-00-16-10-02-05, 330101-00-20-05-02-00, 330101-00-20-10-02-00, 330101-00-20-10-02-05, 330101-00-30-10-02-00, 330101-00-30-10-02-05, 330101-00-40-05-02-00, 330101-00-40-10-02-00, 330101-00-40-10-02-05, 330101-00-60-10-02-00, 330101-00-60-10-02-05, 330102-00-20-10-02-00, 330103-00-02-10-02-05, 330103-00-03-10-02-05, 330103-00-04-10-02-00, 330103-00-04-50-02-00, 330103-00-05-10-02-00, 330103-00-06-10-02-00, 330104-00-06-10-02-00, 330104-01-05-50-02-00, 330105-02-12-05-02-00, 330105-02-12-05-02-05, 330105-02-12-10-02-00, 330105-02-12-10-02-05, 330106-05-30-05-02-00, 330106-05-30-05-02-05, 330106-05-30-10-02-00 and 330106-05-30-10-02-05.
50
Section 7 3300 XL 8mm System Graphs and Dimensional Drawings
Section 7 System Graphs and Dimensional Drawings

Gap (m m ) 0.00
4 0.25 0.50 0.75 1 .00 1 .25 1 .50 1 .75 2.00 2.25 2.50 0.1 0 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.1 0
2 0 -2 -4 1 0
5 0 -5 -1 0 -24 -22 -20 -1 8
Output (Volts)
-1 6 -1 4 -1 2 -1 0 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 0 1 0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 00
Gap (m ils)
5m @ 25 C (77 F) 5m @ 45 C (1 1 3 F) 5m @ 0 C (32 F)
Figure 7-1 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System over API 670 Testing Range
DSL Error (mm)
51
Gap (m m ) 0.00
6 4 2 0 -2 -4 -6 1 0
0.25
0.50
0.75
1 .00
1 .25
1 .50
1 .75
2.00
2.25
2.50 0.1 5
0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.1 0 -0.1 5
5 0 -5 -1 0 -24 -22 -20 -1 8
Output (Volts)
-1 6 -1 4 -1 2 -1 0 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 0 1 0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 00
Gap (m ils)
9m @ 25 C (77 F) 9m @ 45 C (1 1 3 F) 9m @ 0 C (32 F)
Figure 7-2 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System over API 670 Testing Range
52
DSL Error (mm)
0.1 0
Gap (m m )
6 4 2 0
0.00
0.25
0.50
0.75
1 .00
1 .25
1 .50
1 .75
2.00
2.25
2.50 0.1 5
0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.1 0 -0.1 5
-2 -4 -6 1 0
5 0 -5 -1 0 -24 -22 -20 -1 8
Output (Volts)
-1 6 -1 4 -1 2 -1 0 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 0 1 0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 00
Gap (m ils)
1 m P ro be @ 25 C (77 F) 1 m P ro be @ 1 20 C (248 F) 1 m P ro be @ -35 C (-31F)
Figure 7-3 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm Probe over API 670 Operating Range
DSL Error (mm)
0.1 0
53
Gap (m m ) 0.00 6 DSL ERROR (MILS) Referenced to 7.87V/mm (200mV/mil) 4 2 0 -2 -4 -6
0.25
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50
10%
ISF ERROR Referenced to 7.87 V/mm (200mV/mil)
5%
0%
-5%
-10%
-24 -22 -20 -18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 GAP (m ils) 70 80 90 100
OUTPUT (VOLTS)
1M Probe @ 25 C (77 F) 1M Probe @ 120 C (248 F)
1M Probe @ -35 C (-31 F)
Figure 7-4 Typical 3300 5 mm Probe over API 670 Operating Range
54
Gap (m m ) 0.00
6
0.25
0.50
0.75
1 .00
1 .25
1 .50
1 .75
2.00
2.25
2.50 0.1 5
2 0
0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.1 0 -0.1 5
-2 -4 -6 1 0
5 0 -5 -1 0 -24 -22 -20 -1 8
Output (Volts)
-1 6 -1 4 -1 2 -1 0 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 0 1 0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 00
Gap (m ils)
TC=25 C (77 F) Tc=-34 C (-30 F) Tc=-51C (-60 F)
Figure 7-5 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m Proximitor Sensor with 4 m of Extension Cable @ Tc (Probe is at 25 C)
DSL Error (mm)
0.1 0
55
Gap (m m ) 0.00
8 6
0.25
0.50
0.75
1 .00
1 .25
1 .50
1 .75
2.00
2.25
2.50 0.20 0.1 5 0.1 0 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.1 0 -0.1 5 -0.20
DSL Error (mils) Referenced to 200(mV/mil)
4 2 0 -2 -4 -6 -8 1 5
ISF Error (%) Referenced to 200(mV/mil)
1 0 5 0 -5 -1 0 -1 5 -20 -1 8 -1 6
Output (Volts)
-1 4 -1 2 -1 0 -8 -6 -4 -2 0
Gap (m ils)
1 0
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
1 00
25 C (77 F)
65 C (1 49 F)
85 C (1 85 F)
1 00 C (21 2 F)
Figure 7-6 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m Proximitor Sensor with 4 m Extension Cable @ Th (Probe is at 25C)
56
DSL Error (mm)
Gap (m m )
0.00 8 6 4 2 0 -2 -4 -6 -8 1 5 1 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1 .00 1 .25 1 .50 1 .75 2.00 2.25 2.50 0.20 0.1 0 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.1 0 -0.1 5 -0.20 0.1 5
DSL Error (mils)
ISF Error (%)
5 0 -5 -1 0 -1 5 -22 -20 -1 8 -1 6
Output (Volts)
-1 4 -1 2 -1 0 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 0 1 0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 00
Gap (m ils)
Tc=+25 C (+77 F) Tc=-34 C (-30 F) Tc=-51C (-60 F)
Figure 7-7 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m Proximitor Sensor with 8 m of Extension Cable @ Tc (Probe is at 25 C)
DSL Error (mm)
57
Gap (m m )
0.00 8 6 4 2 0 -2 -4 -6 -8 1 5 1 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1 .00 1 .25 1 .50 1 .75 2.00 2.25 2.50 0.20 0.1 5 0.1 0 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.1 0 -0.1 5 -0.20
DSL Error (mils)
ISF Error (%)
5 0 -5 -1 0 -1 5 -22 -20 -1 8 -1 6
Output (Volts)
-1 4 -1 2 -1 0 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 0 1 0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 00
Gap (m ils)
Th=+25 C (+77 F) Th=+85 C (+1 85 F) Th=+65 C (+1 49 F) Th=+1 00 C (+21 2 F)
Figure 7-8 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m Proximitor Sensor with 8 m of Extension Cable @ Th (Probe is at 25 C)
58
DSL Error (mm)
Gap (m m )
0.00 10 8 6 4 2 0 -2 -4 -6 -8 -10 15 10
0.25
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50 0.25 0.20 0.15 0.10 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.10 -0.15 -0.20 -0.25
DSL Error (mils)
ISF Error (%)
5 0 -5 -10 -15 -24 -22 -20 -18
Output (Volts)
-16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2
Gap (m ils)
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Th=+25 C (+77 F)
Th =+260 C (+500 F)
Figure 7-9 Typical 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range Probe and 4 m of Extended Temperature Range Extension Cable @ Th (Proximitor Sensor and probe tip with 1 foot of cable are at +25 C)
DSL Error (mm)
59
Gap (m m )
0.00 10 8 6 4 2 0 -2 -4 -6 -8 -10 15 10
0.25
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50 0.25 0.20 0.15 0.10 0.05 0.00 -0.05 -0.10 -0.15 -0.20 -0.25
DSL Error (mils)
ISF Error (%)
5 0 -5 -10 -15 -24 -22 -20 -18
Output (Volts)
-16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2
Gap (m ils)
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Th=+25 C (+77 F)
Th=+260 C (+500 F)
Figure 7-10 Typical 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range Probe and 8 metres of Extended Temperature Range Extension Cable @ Th (Proximitor Sensor and probe tip with 1 foot of cable are at +25 C)
60
DSL Error (mm)

1 0 Magnitude (dB) -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 100
10,000
100,000
2000' wiring
Figure 7-11 Frequency Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System with varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers
Phase Response with Different Field Wiring Lengths, No Barriers (5 m System) 0 -10 Phase Angle (degrees) -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -90 -100 100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)
2000' wiring
Figure 7-12 Phase Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System with varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers
61

1 0 Magnitude (dB) -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 100
1,000
Frequency (Hz)
10,000
100,000
2000' field wiring
Figure 7-13 Frequency Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System with varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers
0.00 -10.00 Phase Angle (degrees) -20.00 -30.00 -40.00 -50.00 -60.00 -70.00 -80.00 -90.00
Phase Response with Different Field Wiring Lengths, No Barriers (9 m System)
-100.00 100
1,000
100,000
2000' field wiring
Figure 7-14 Phase Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System with varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers
62
8 (5/16) Wrench Flats, 4 each 14.3 (9/16) for 3/8-24 threads2 75 ohm Cable 17.0 (0.67) for M10 threads2 8.0 3.7 (0.15) Max. Outside Dia. Dia. (0.31) 3.9 (0.16) Max. Dia. for FluidLoc R Cable Case Probe Tip Thread 7.6 (0.30) Outside Dia. of Armor 9.0 (0.35) Max Dia. of Armor Ferrule
2.5 (0.10) Unthreaded Length "A" Case Length "B" 6.0 (0.236) Max. 3 Total Length "C", +30%, -0%
Figure 7-15 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity probes, Standard Mount
330101 and 330191, 3/8-24 UNF-2A, without armor 330102 and 330192, 3/8-24 UNF-2A, with armor 330104 and 330194, M10X1 thread, with armor
6 6 7
330103 and 330193, M10X1 thread, without armor
5.6 (7/32) Wrench Flats for 1/4-28 threads, 7.0 (0.28) for M8 threads, 4 each 11.1(7/16) for 1/4-28 threads 3 13.0 (0.51) for M8 threads3 5.2 Dia. (0.21) Case Probe Tip Thread
75 ohm Cable 2.8 (0.11) Max Outside Dia. 7.6 (0.30) Outside Dia. of Armor 9.0 (0.35) Max Dia. of Armor Ferrule
3.2 (0.13) Unthreaded Length "A" Case Length "B" 6.0 (0.235) Max. Total Length 8 "C", +30%, -0%
Figure 7-16 3300 5 mm Proximity probes
330171, 1/4-28 UNF-2A, without armor 330172 , 1/4-28 UNF-2A, with armor 330173, M8X1 thread, without armor 330174, M8X1 thread, with armor
6 6 7
63
12 (0.47) Dia. Max.
36.3 Max. (1.43)
51.1 (2.01) Max.
12 (0.47) Dia. Max.
Connector Protector (Fluorosilicone Material)
Figure 7-17 Installed Connector Protectors
8.0 Dia. (0.31) Probe Tip
7/16 or M10 Hex
Case Thread 75 ohm Cable 3.7 (0.15) outside Dia.
2 (0.08) 5 (0.2) Unthreaded Length "A" 5.0 (0.20)
Case Length "B" 30 (1.2) 6.0 (0.236) Max. Total Length3 "C", +30%, -0%
Figure 7-18 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Reverse Mount
4, 7
330105 and 330195, 3/8-24 UNF-2A threads 330106 and 330196, M10X1 threads
64
8 (0.31) Dia. Tip
9.6 (0.38) Max. Dia.
75 Ohm Cable 3.68 (0.145) Dia. Max. 3.9 (0.16) Max. Dia. for FluidLoc R Cable With Armor, outside Dia. is 8.0 (0.315) 7.9 (0.31) 9.0 (0.35) Max Dia. of Armor Ferrule Wrench Flats 4 each Male (Plug) Connector 7.23 (0.285) Dia. Max.
2.54 (0.100) Case Length "A" 6.0 (0.236) Max. Cable Length
3
349.25 (13.750) Max.
Figure 7-19 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Smooth Case
330140 and 330197, without armor 330141 and 330198, with armor
6
75 ohm cable 3.7 (0.15) max. O.D. Miniature Male 3.9 (0.16) Max. Dia. for FluidLocR cable Coaxial Connector 7.6 (0.30) Max. O.D. of Armor FEP or PFA 9.0 (0.35) Max Dia. of Armor Ferrule Coated Armor 6 7.2 (0.285) 83.8 7.2 (0.285) 83.8 Armor Length: Max. Dia. (3.30) (3.30) Max. Dia. 300 (11.8) less than cable length 83.8 83.8 or PFA Insulated (3.30) (3.30) FEP Triaxial Cable Miniature Female Stainless Steel Ferrules Coaxial Connector 8.4 (0.33) Dia. Cable Length +20%, -0%
Figure 7-20 330130, 3300 XL Extension Cable (FEP armor and insulation) 330190, 3300 XL ETR Extension Cable (PFA armor and insulation)
65
63.5 (2.50)
50.8 (2.00) 81.3 (3.20)
50.8 (2.00) 61.2 (2.41)
5.1 (0.20)
Figure 7-21 Panel Mount 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor
Figure 7-22 DIN Mount 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor
66
50 (1.95)
25.4 (1.00)
86 (3.4)
50.8 (2.00) 79.4 (3.125) 60.2 (2.37) Mounting Option "A" Options -50 or -90 50.8 (2.00)
63.5 (2.50) 81 (3.2) 50.8 (2.00) 81.3 (3.20) 5.1 (0.20)
50.8 (2.00) 61.2 (2.41)
Figure 7-23 Physical mounting characteristics showing interchangeability of 3300 and 3300 XL Proximitor Sensors when 4-hole mounting option is used8
Notes:
1. All dimensions on figures are in millimetres (inches) unless otherwise noted. 2. Standard mount 8 mm probes supplied with 17 mm or 9/16 inch lock nut. 3. Probes ordered with 5 or 9 metre integral cables have a length tolerance of +20%, -0%. 4. Reverse mount probes not available with armor or connector protector options. 5. Letters inside quotation marks on figures refer to probe ordering options. 6. Stainless steel armor is supplied with FEP outer jacket for standard probes, PFA outer jacket for ETR probes.
67
7. FEP jacket is standard non-armored portion of the cable for standard probes, PFA jacket on non-armored portion for ETR probes. 8. Use M3.5 or #6 screws for panel-mount Proximitor Sensors (screws provided when purchasing Bently Nevada housings).
68
69
Section 8 Micrometer Specifications and Ordering Information
Section 8 Micrometer Specifications and Ordering Information

Mechanical
Target Buttons:
AISI 4140 Alloy Steel, 30.5 mm (1.20 in) diameter flat target
Note: Contact your nearest Bently Nevada Sales Professional for details on special target materials.
Casing Material:
3300 XL Precision Micrometer: Fiberglass and Plastic. 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer: ABS Plastic.
Micrometer specifications:
Table 8-1 3300 XL Precision Micrometer:
Part number 330185-01 330185-02 Resolution 0.000020 in 0.0005 mm Accuracy 0.000015 in 0.0004 mm Range 0-1 in 0-25 mm
Table 8-2 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer

Part number 330186-01 300186-02 Resolution 0.001 in 0.01 mm Accuracy 0.0001 in 0.003 mm Range 0-1 in 0-25 mm
Size
3300 XL Precision Micrometer (case dimensions) Height: 226 mm (8.9 in) Width: 274 mm (10.8 in) Length: 356 mm (14.0 in) 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer (case dimensions) Height:
71
152 mm (6.0 in) Width: 246 mm (9.7 in) Length: 356 mm (14.0 in)
Total System Mass

3300 XL Precision Micrometer: 6.8 kg (15.0 lbm) 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer: 2.8 kg (6.2 lbm)
3300 XL Precision Micrometer
330185-AXX Option Descriptions A: Scale Units 01 Micrometer in English units 02 Micrometer in metric units
(0-1 in) (0-25 mm)
3300 XL Shaft Micrometer

330186- AXX Option Descriptions A: Scale Units 01 02 Micrometer in English units Micrometer in metric units (0-1 in) (0-25 mm)
Note: The 3300 shaft micrometer and precision micrometer come with probe mounting adapters for 1/4 inch, 3/8 inch, 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, M8, M10, M14 and M16 probe thread sizes.
Accessories
Part Number 138751-01 140273-01 27505-01 Description 3300 XL Precision Micrometer Instruction Sheet 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer Instruction Sheet Target button: A replacement 4140 target button that comes standard with the 3300 XL shaft micrometer. There can be a variation of up to 5% in the average scale factor (ASF) between each target button. High Precision target button: A replacement 4140 target button that comes standard with the 3300 XL precision micrometer. There can be a variation of up to 0.6% in the Average Scale Factor (ASF) between each target button. Shaft Micrometer Strap: A replacement strap for the 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer.
136534-01
02200218
72
Section 8 Micrometer Specifications and Ordering Information Part Number 49478-01 49478-02 49478-03 49478-04 49478-05 49478-06 49478-07 49478-08 49478-09 49478-10 Description Probe mounting adapter, suitable for M5 threads. Probe mounting adapter, 1/4 inch threads. Probe mounting adapter, M8 threads. Probe mounting adapter, M10 threads. Probe mounting adapter, 3/8 inch threads. Probe mounting adapter, M11 threads. Probe mounting adapter, 1/2 inch threads. Probe mounting adapter, M14 threads. Probe mounting adapter, 5/8 inch threads. Probe mounting adapter, M16 threads.
Dimensional Drawings
280 (11) Typical 89 (3.5)
3 22 2 23
00 28 46 64 82 00
1 24
0 1 2 0 9 8
24 1 23 2 22 3
89 (3.5)
165 (6.5)
203 (8.0)
152 (6.0)
Figure 8-1 3300 XL Precision Micrometer

(1) (2) Collets to fit both metric and English 5mm, 8mm, 11mm, and 14mm probes. Removable AISI 4140 target
73
59.2 (2.33)
105.4 (4.15)
Figure 8-2 - 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer

Note: Dimensions for figures are in millimetres (inches)
74
0 1
160.0 (6.30) max. 150.9 (5.94) min.
2 3
4 3 2 1
24 23 22 21
Section 9 Housing Specifications and Ordering Information

Mechanical
Housing Rating:
For North America, the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) tested and certified the housing to a Type 4X waterproof and corrosion-resistant rating. For Europe, the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) also tested and certified the housing to meet the IP66 waterproof and dust-proof rating along with the 7 joule high impact mechanical risk test required by CENELEC standard EN50 014. Verified by Baseefa (2001) certificate number Ex85122 for use in ExN applications and by certificate number BAS99ATEX3102 for EEx n applications.
Housing Material:
304L stainless steel.
Gland Plate Gasket Material:

Neoprene.
Cover Gasket Material:

Poron.
Total System Mass:

6.4 kg (14.0 lbm) with standard gland plates but without conduit fittings installed; 8.0 kg (17.5 lbm) with standard gland plates and conduit fittings installed.
3300 XL Proximitor Housing
330181 -AXX - BXX - CXX DXX
The 3300 XL Proximitor Housing is rated for IP66 and Type 4X environmental conditions. It can accommodate up to eight 3300 XL Proximitor Sensors in the DIN-mount configuration or six panel-mount Proximitor Sensors. It has three removable gland plates, making it easier to install conduit fittings and cable gland seals.
Option Descriptions A: Transducer Type Option 00 No mounting hardware 01 03 04 05 3300 XL Proximitor Sensors (DIN mount), DIN-rail terminal blocks 3300 XL Proximitor Sensors (panel mount) 3300 Proximitor Sensors 3000 or 7200 Proximitor Sensors, VDCs, and Interface Modules
Note: Proximitor Sensors, Interface Modules, and Velocity-toDisplacement Converters are not included and must be ordered separately.
75
3300 XL 8mm Proximity Transducer System Manual Application Advisory: Care must be taken during system length selection to avoid having excess cable length coiled up inside of the housing. Excess cable coiled up in the housing may cause chafing and premature failure of the cables. Additional conduit boxes, armored cable or special provisions are recommended for long lengths of cable that must be coiled in the 330181 housing.
B: Conduit Fitting Option 00 Without fittings. 01 02 03 04 05 One brass M32 cable gland seal outlet, six brass M25 cable gland seal inlets. One brass M32 cable gland seal outlet, eight brass M25 cable gland seal inlets. One aluminum 1 -11 NPT conduit outlet, six aluminum -14 NPT conduit inlets, six aluminum -14 to -14 NPT reducers. One aluminum 1-11 NPT conduit outlet, eight aluminum -14 NPT conduit inlets, eight aluminum -14 to -14 NPT reducers. One 316 stainless steel 1 -11 NPT conduit outlet, six 316 stainless steel -14 NPT conduit inlets, six 303 stainless steel 14 to -14 NPT reducers. One 316 stainless steel 1 -11 NPT conduit outlet, eight 316 stainless steel -14 NPT conduit inlets, eight 303 stainless steel 14 to -14 NPT reducers. One chrome-plated zinc 1 -11 NPT conduit outlet, six chromeplated zinc -14 NPT conduit inlets, six 303 stainless steel -14 to -14 NPT reducers. One chrome-plated zinc 1 -11 NPT conduit outlet, eight chromeplated zinc -14 NPT conduit inlets, eight 303 stainless steel -14 NPT to -14 NPT reducers.
06
07
08
C: Gland Plate Thickness 01 Standard 2.34 mm (0.092 in) 02 03 04 3.05 mm (0.120 in) 4.76 mm (0.188 in) 6.35 mm (0.250 in)
D: Terminal Mounting Block Option 00 No terminal blocks 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 21 22 4 DIN rail terminal blocks 8 DIN rail terminal blocks 12 DIN rail terminal blocks 16 DIN rail terminal blocks 20 DIN rail terminal blocks 24 DIN rail terminal blocks 28 DIN rail terminal blocks 32 DIN rail terminal blocks 1 terminal block 2 terminal blocks
76
23 24 25 26
3 terminal blocks 4 terminal blocks 5 terminal blocks 6 terminal blocks
Note: Each DIN rail terminal block accepts only one wire. The standard terminal blocks each accept four wires. Thus, four DIN rail terminal blocks equal one standard terminal block.
Accessories
Part number 137936-01 137937-01 03818111 03839130 03839132 03850021 03813103 03813105 03813106 03818099 03818100 26650-01 26650-03 03818102 03818103 03818104 03818105 103537-01 Description Brass cable gland seal, M32 Brass cable gland seal, M25 Nickel-plated brass conduit fitting, PG21 x M20 Aluminum conduit fitting, -14 NPT Aluminum conduit fitting, 1 -11 NPT Aluminum reducer, -14 to -14 NPT Chrome-plated zinc conduit fitting, -14 NPT Chrome-plated zinc conduit fitting, 1-11 NPT Chrome-plated zinc conduit fitting, 1 -11 NPT AISI 316 stainless steel conduit fitting, 1 -11 NPT AISI 316 stainless steel conduit fitting, -14NPT AISI 303 stainless steel reducer, -14 to -14 NPT AISI 303 stainless steel reducer, 1 -11 to 1-11 NPT AISI 316 stainless steel conduit fitting, PG21 x M20 AISI 316 stainless steel conduit fitting, PG21 x PG11 AISI 303 stainless steel conduit seal, PG11 AISI 316 stainless steel conduit seal, M20 Terminal Mounting Block This 4-wire terminal mounting block includes screws and is easily installed. Terminal mounting blocks are used to connect transducer cables to field wiring that is routed back to the monitoring system. These blocks are used with the PROXPAC Transducer Assembly, integral 25 mm and 50 mm DE transducers, temperature sensors, Velomitor Sensors, and seismic transducers. DIN-rail Terminal Strip DIN-rail Terminal Strip Cover The DIN-rail terminal strip with cover is a single wire terminal strip that snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Conduit Seal Punch Tool A punch tool set is used when installing conduit seals. The conduit seals come with a rubber insert, with markings for where to "punch" holes. Use the punch tool set to punch the number of holes you need for the cables going through each conduit seal.
01691029 01691028 04490104
Sealtite Flexible Conduit Assembly 14847-XX 14848-XX -14 NPT Threads -14 NPT Threads
Option Descriptions A: Length Option Order in increments of 1 foot (300 mm) Minimum length: 1 foot = 0 1 Maximum length: 99 feet = 9 9
77
31000, 32000 Proximity Probe Housings
Description
Bently Nevada's 31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies are recommended when mounting proximity probes through the machine case and are typically used for radially mounted transducers, whether vibration or Keyphasor measurements.
Notes: 1. 2. When using these housings to measure radial vibration, ensure that the machine casing is affixed to the bearing in order to get an accurate relative vibration signal. When measuring shaft axial position with dual proximity probes, use housing 21022 instead. Consult specifications and ordering information (p/n 141601-01).
Use of a proximity probe housing allows external access to the proximity probe and its extension cable, permitting gap adjustment or probe replacement without disassembly of the machine. The 31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing Assembly is made of polyphenylene sulfide (PPS), an advanced, high-strength, thermoplastic with excellent corrosion resistance. Other elements of the housing assembly are made of corrosionresistant stainless steel. The housing can be ordered with installed 3300 XL Proximity Probes and a variety of conduit fittings. The 31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing Assembly is fully compliant with the American Petroleum Institute's (API) 670 Standard for externally mounted proximity probe housings. When installed in conjunction with an approved transducer system and appropriate I.S. barriers, the 31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing Assembly can be used in intrinsically safe hazardous area applications.
Note: The 31000/32000 Housing is intended to provide mechanical and environmental protection only, and is not an explosion-proof housing. When an explosion proof proximity probe housing assembly is required, use housing CA21000 or CA24701. Consult specifications and ordering information (p/n 141600-01).
Specifications
Mechanical Protection Ratings: Type 4X rating certified by Canadian Standards Association (CSA). IP66 rating verified by SC115582-1 (e) 106. CENELEC standard EN50014 rating for electrostatic dissipation of a plastic material located in a hazardous area. Glass-reinforced Polyphenylene Sulfide (PPS) thermoplastic containing conductive fibers.
Housing Material:
BN Part Number 141610-01 Revision E, August 2003
Page 1 of 9
Sleeve Material and Retaining Chain: Outer Sleeve and Exterior Screws: O-Ring Material: Recommended Torque (retaining nut): Housing Strength (typical):
AISI 304 stainless steel AISI 303 stainless steel Neoprene 29.4 Nm (260 inlb)
Outer sleeve was mounted on a test stand with its axis parallel to horizontal and the housing mounted on the outer sleeve through an end hole. The housing supported 912 N (205 lb) placed approximately 38 mm (1.5 inches) from the unsupported end with the cover fastened in place and grounding liner installed. Certified by BASEEFA to withstand two separate 4 Joule (3.0 ftlb) impacts at -39C (-38F) and at 115 C (239F). Samples of the housing and cover were verified by CSA to withstand a 7 Joule (5.2 ftlb) impact at ambient room temperature. 1.2 kg (2.6 lb) typical.
Probe Pressure The 31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing Assembly is designed to seal differential pressure between the probe tip and the housing main body when used with a 3300 XL 8 mm probe. The sealing material internal to the probe case consists of a Viton O-ring; the O-ring between the sleeve and the housing is a Neoprene O-ring. The plastic housing is certified to seal against hose-directed water according to NEMA 4X and IP66 standards but is not designed to resist internal or external pressure. Probes are not pressure tested prior to shipment. Contact our custom design department if you require a test of the pressure seal for your application.
Note: It is the responsibility of the customer or user to ensure that all liquids and gases are contained and safely controlled should leakage occur from a Proximity Probe Housing Assembly. Solutions with high or low pH values may erode the tip assembly of the probe, causing media leakage into surrounding areas. Bently Nevada Corporation will not be held responsible for any damages resulting from leaking Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies. In addition, Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies and 3300 XL 8 mm proximity probes will not be replaced under the service plan due to probe leakage.
Housing Impact Strength:
Probe Cable Length Maximum C plus D 0.5 metre 394 mm (15.5 in) 1.0 metre 760 mm (30.0 in) Table 1: Maximum "C" Option plus "D" Option for different "B" Options (probe cable length) Maximum C plus D with Visible P/N and S/N Label 0.5 metre 64 mm (2.5 in) 1.0 metre 483 mm (19.0 in) Table 2: Maximum "C" Option plus "D" Option for different "B" Options (probe cable length) where P/N and S/N Label on Probe Cable is visible outside of probe sleeve Probe Cable Length
Weight: Environmental Limits Temperature Rating:
-34C to +105C (-29F to +221F)
Hot Water and Steam Exposure Effects: (Specification not guaranteed) Brief periods (up to one week) of contact with hot water (95C [203F]) and/or condensing steam should not significantly affect the strength of the plastic housing. Contact with these beyond this length of time may eventually cause the strength of the plastic housing to permanently decrease during the first 6 to 8 weeks of exposure, and then level at approximately half of its initial value. Tests of actual housing performance after contact with hot water and condensing steam have not been conducted.
Page 2 of 9
Note: Conduit fittings are necessary when hardline conduit or metal tubing is brought into the housing. Flexible conduit should be ordered with integral 3/4-14 NPT fittings and do not require additional conduit fittings with the housing. If using flexible conduit, order the "E" = 00 option.
For penetration lengths between 1.0 and 2.0 inches, counter bore may be required in machine case to reduce probe side view and/or rear view effects.
31000-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXXX-EXX-FXX Option Descriptions A: Probe Option, With Connector
Note: To order housing only, use -00 for all Options.
0 0 Probe not required (Note: Option B must also be -00). 1 6 3300 XL 8 mm probe 2 6 3300 XL NSv probe 2 7 3300 XL NSv probe, multiple approvals 2 8 3300 XL 8 mm probe, multiple approvals 2 9 3300 XL 8mm probe, with connector protector 3 0 3300 XL 8mm probe, with connector protector, multiple approvals 3 1 3300 XL NSvTM probe, with connector protector 3 2 3300 XL NSvTM probe, with connector protector, multiple approvals 3 3 3300 XL 11mm probe 3 4 3300 XL 11mm probe, multiple approvals 3 5 3300 XL 11mm probe, with connector protector 3 6 3300 XL 11mm probe, with connector protector, multiple approvals 0 0 Probe cable not required (Note: Option A must also be -00). 0 5 0.5 metre (20 in) 1 0 1.0 metre (39 in) Order in increments of 0.5 in (13 mm). Minimum length: 1.5 in (38 mm). Maximum length: 7.5 in (191 mm). Example: 0 0 = No standoff adapter. 1 5 = 1.5 in (38 mm).
Note: "C" plus "D" dimensions greater than 12 in (305 mm) require additional sleeve support near the probe to prevent resonance from occurring. Sleeve adjustment range of Probe Penetration Option "D" is 0.5 in (13 mm).
Order in increments of 0.1 in (3 mm). Minimum length: 1.0 in (25 mm). Maximum length: 30 in (762 mm), see Table 1 for cable length limits. Example: 0 0 0 = No probe sleeve. 0 3 7 = 3.7 in ( 94 mm). 2 2 4 = 22.4 in (569 mm). E: Fittings Option 0 0 No fittings; two plugs and two washers. 0 1 One 3/4-14 NPT fitting, two plugs. 0 2 Two 3/4-14 NPT fittings, one plug. 0 3 Two plugs, one 3/4-14 NPT fitting, one 3/4-14 NPT to 1/214 NPT SST reducer, and a cable seal grip with grommets for cable sizes: 1/8 to 3/16, 1/4 to 5/16, and 5/16 to 3/8-in. 0 6 One 3/4-14 NPT fitting one 3/4-14 NPT to 1/2-14 NPT SST reducer and two plugs. 0 0 No outer sleeve, retainer, or retaining nut 0 2 3/4-14 NPT (Required if ordering Standoff Adapter Option). 0 5 7/8-14 UNF 2A
F: Mounting Thread Option
B: Probe Cable Length Option (See Table 1) C: Standoff Adapter Option ("C" Dimension)
D: Probe Penetration Option ("D" Dimension)
Page 3 of 9
Metric Proximity Probe Housing 32000-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXXX-EXX-FXX Option Descriptions A: Probe Option, With Connector 00 16 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Note: To order housing only, use -00 for all options.
Probe not required. (Note: Option B must also be -00). 3300 XL 8 mm probe. 3300 XL NSv probe 3300 XL NSv probe, multiple approvals 3300 XL 8 mm probe, multiple approvals. 3300 XL 8mm probe, with connector protector 3300 XL 8mm probe, with connector protector, multiple approvals 3300 XL NSvTM probe, with connector protector 3300 XL NSvTM probe, with connector protector, multiple approvals 3300 XL 11mm probe 3300 XL 11mm probe, multiple approvals 3300 XL 11mm probe, with connector protector 3300 XL 11mm probe, with connector protector, multiple approvals
see Table 1 for cable length limits. Example: 0 0 0 = No probe sleeve. 0 5 0 = 50 mm 7 6 0 = 760 mm E: Fittings Option 0 0 No fittings; two plugs and two washers. 0 1 One M25 fitting, two plugs. 0 2 Two M25 fittings, one plug. 0 3 Two plugs, M20 fitting, and one cable seal grip with grommet for armored probe cable. 0 5 One DIN PG11 fitting, two plugs. 0 7 One PG21 x M20 fitting, two plugs 0 8 Two PG21 x M20 fittings, one plug 0 0 No outer sleeve, retainer or retaining nut 0 1 M24 X 3 0 2 3/4-14 NPT (Required if ordering Standoff Adapter Option.)
F: Mounting Thread Option
B: Probe Cable Length Option
0 0 Probe cable not required (Note: Option A must also be -00). 0 5 0.5 metre 1 0 1.0 metre Order in increments of 10 mm. Minimum length: 40 mm. Maximum length: 200 mm. Example: 0 0 = No standoff adapter. 0 4 = 40 mm. 2 0 = 200 mm.
Note: "C" plus "D" dimensions greater than 305 mm (12 in) require additional sleeve support near the probe to prevent resonance from occurring. Sleeve adjustment range of Probe Penetration Option "D" is 13 mm (0.5 in). For penetration lengths between 25 and 50 millimeters, counter bore may be required in machine case to reduce probe side view and/or rear view effects.
C: Standoff Adapter Option ("C" Dimension)
Terminal Housing 106769 - AXX The 106769 housing consists of a 31000-style PPS housing with two terminal mounting blocks (each terminal block has four terminals) mounted in each housing. Sixteen ring lugs are supplied loose inside the housing for connecting transducer cables. Conduit fittings are 3/4-14 NPT chromeplated zinc fittings. Option Descriptions A: Conduit Fitting Option 0 0 No fittings 0 1 One fitting 0 2 Two fittings
D: Probe Penetration Option ("D" Dimension)
Order in increments of 1 mm. Minimum length: 25 mm. Maximum length: 760 mm,
Page 4 of 9
Accessories
124200-01 37948-01 Operation Manual Probe Support/Oil Sleeve Recommended for sleeves with "D" dimension longer than 12 in (305 m)
Housing AXX option for 3300 XL 11 mm probe option (A: 33 or A: 34)
108883-AXXX English Probe Sleeve (spare) A: Probe sleeve length This is the measured probe sleeve length. Order in increments of 0.1 in (3 mm). Note that the individual probe sleeve length does not include the distance from the end of the sleeve to the probe tip or the gap from the probe tip to the target material. If only the part number of the original housing is known and the sleeve cannot be measured, use the following table to determine the sleeve length: Calculation for 108883-XXX Probe sleeve length if original part number is known AXXX: = Standoff adapter option from original housing (31000 option C) + Probe penetration option from original housing (31000 option D) + 0 2 5. Example: original part number is 31000-16-10-15-035-03-02. AXXX: option for replacement sleeve is (015 + 035 + 025) = 0 7 5. AXXX: = Standoff adapter option from original housing (31000 option C) + Probe penetration option from original housing (31000 option D) + 0 2 6. Example: original part number is 31000-27-10-20-035-03-02. AXXX: option for replacement sleeve is (020 + 035 + 026) = 0 8 1. Minimum Probe Sleeve Length:
AXXX: = Standoff Adapter Option from original housing (31000 option C) + Probe penetration option from original housing (31000 option D) + 0 1 7. Example: original part number is 31000-33-10-30-113-01-02. AXXX: Option for replacement sleeve is (030 + 113 + 017) = 1 6 0. 3300 XL 8 mm probes: 3.5 in (89 mm) = 0 3 5 3300 NSv probes: 3.6 in (91 mm) = 0 3 6 3300 XL 11 mm probes: 2.7 in (69 mm) = 0 2 7
3300 XL 0.5 metre 8 mm probe: 18.0 in (457 mm) = 1 8 0 3300 NSv 0.5 metre probe: 18.1 in (460 mm) = 1 8 1 3300 XL 0.5 metre 11 mm probe: 16.0 in (406 mm) = 1 6 0 3300 XL 1.0 metre 8mm probe: 32.5 in (826mm) = 3 2 5 3300 XL NSv 1.0 metre probe: 32.6 in (828mm) = 3 2 6 3300 XL 1.0 metre 11 mm probe: 31.7 in (805 mm) = 3 1 7
AXX Option from 31000 Proximity Probe Housing part number Housing AXX option for 3300 XL 8 mm probe option (A: 16 or A: 28)
Housing AXX option for 3300 NSvTM probe option (A: 26 or A: 27)
Metric Probe Sleeve (Spare) 108882-AXXX A: Probe sleeve length This is the measured probe sleeve length. Order in increments of 1 mm (0.04 in). Note that the individual probe sleeve length does not include the distance from the end of the sleeve to the probe tip or the gap from the probe tip to the target material. If only the part number of the original housing is known and the sleeve cannot be measured, use the following table to determine the sleeve length:
Page 5 of 9
AXX Option from 32000 Proximity Probe Housing part number Housing AXX option for 3300 XL 8 mm probe option (A: 16 or A: 28)
Calculation for 108882-XXX Probe sleeve length if original part number is known AXXX: = Standoff Adapter Option from original housing (32000 option C) *10 + Probe penetration option from original housing (32000 option D) + 0 6 3. Example: original part number is 32000-16-10-08-205-03-02. AXXX: option for replacement sleeve is (080 + 205 + 063) = 3 4 8 AXXX: = Standoff adapter option from original housing (32000 option C) *10 + Probe penetration option from original housing (32000 option D) + 0 6 6. Example: original part number is 32000-27-10-10-105-03-02. AXXX: option for replacement sleeve is (100 + 105 + 066) = 2 7 1. AXXX: = Standoff adapter option from original housing (32000 option C) *10 + Probe penetration option from original housing (32000 option D) + 0 4 2. Example: original part number is 32000-33-10-10-105-03-02. AXXX: option for replacement sleeve is (100 + 105 + 042) = 2 4 7. 3300 XL 8 mm probes: 88 mm (3.5 in) = 0 8 8 3300 NSv probes: 91 mm (3.6 in) = 0 9 1 3300 XL 11 mm probes: 67 mm (2.6 in) = 0 6 7
823 mm (32.4 in) = 8 2 3 3300 NSv 1.0 metre probe: 826 mm (32.5 in) = 8 2 6 3300 XL 1.0 metre 11 mm probe: 802 mm (31.6 in) = 8 0 2 English Standoff Adapter (Spare) 109319-AXXX A: English standoff Adapter length Hex = 1 3/8 in; threads = 3/4-14 NPT Order in increments of 0.5 in (13 mm). Minimum length: 1.5 in (38 mm). Maximum length: 7.5 in (191 mm). Example: 0 4 5 = 4.5 in (114 mm).
Housing AXX option for 3300 NSvTM probe option (A: 26 or A: 27)
Metric Standoff Adapter (Spare) 109318-XX A: Metric Standoff Adapter length Wrench flats = 35 mm; threads = 3/4-14 NPT. Order in increments of 10 mm. Minimum length: 40 mm. Maximum length: 200 mm. Example: 1 2 = 120 mm.
Housing AXX option for 3300 XL 11mm probe option (A: 33 or A: 34)
Minimum Probe Sleeve Length:
Note: For desired probe penetration lengths of less than 25 mm (1.0 in), order a separate Individual Standoff Adapter. The effective probe penetration length will then be reduced by the length of the Individual Standoff Adapter, plus an additional 13 mm (0.5 in) due to the NPT thread engagement. Example: The customer desires a probe penetration length of 13 mm (0.5 in). To do this, they order a 31000 housing with DXXX (probe penetration) option of 0 3 0 [76 mm (3.0 in)] and a separate individual standoff adapter that is 51 mm (2.0 in) in length (part number 109319-020). The standoff adapter would cover 38 mm (2.0 in) of the probe sleeve, plus an additional 13 mm (0.5 in). Therefore, the effective probe penetration length would drop to 13 mm (0.5 in). Note: Signal affects due to probe side view and/or rear view of metal components are likely when effective penetration lengths of less than 1.0 inch are used.
Spare 3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probe, 3/8-24 UNF threads 330105-02-12-CXX-DXX-EXX Spare 3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probe, M10 X 1 threads 330106-05-30-CXX-DXX-EXX Option Descriptions C: Total Length Option 05 10 15 20 50 90 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 1.5 metre (4.9 feet) 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
3300 XL 0.5 metre 8 mm probe: 457 mm (18.0 in) = 4 5 7 3300 NSv 0.5 metre probe: 460 mm (18.1 in) = 4 6 0 3300 XL 0.5 metre 11 mm probe: 436 mm (17.2 in) = 4 3 6 3300 XL 1.0 metre 8 mm probe:
BN Part Number 141610-01 Revision D, February 2003
Page 6 of 9
D: Connector Option
0 0 Connector not installed 0 2 Miniature ClickLocTM coaxial connector 0 0 Not required 0 5 Multiple Approvals
Note: Plugs fill extra holes in plastic housing where needed.
Heavy Duty Conduit and Cable Fittings 03813103 03818100 03818101 03818102 03818103 03818104 03818105 03818111 26650-01 Chrome-plated Zinc Conduit Fitting, 3/4-14 NPT AISI 316 Stainless Steel Conduit Fitting, 3/4-14 NPT AISI 316 Stainless Steel Conduit Fitting, PG21 x M25 AISI 316 Stainless Steel Conduit Fitting, PG21 x M20 AISI 316 Stainless Steel Conduit Fitting, PG21 x PG11 AISI 303 Stainless Steel Cable Gland, PG11 AISI 316 Stainless Steel Cable Gland, M20 Nickel-plated Brass Conduit Fitting, PG21 x M20 AISI 303 Stainless Steel Reducer, 3/4-14 NPT to 1/2-14 NPT
E: Agency Approval Option
Spare 3300 NSv Reverse Mount Probe, 3/8-24 UNF threads 330906-02-12-CXX-DXX-EXX Spare 3300 NSv Reverse Mount Probe, M10 X 1 threads 330907-05-30-CXX-DXX-EXX Option Descriptions C: Total Length Option 05 10 50 90 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
D: Connector Option E: Agency Approval Option
0 0 Connector not installed 0 2 Miniature ClickLocTM coaxial connector 0 0 Not required 0 5 Multiple Approvals
Sleeve and Blanking Plugs 104968-01 104968-02 English Sleeve Plug, threaded, 303 stainless steel. Metric Sleeve Plug, threaded, 303 stainless steel.
Note: Plugs fill opening when sleeve is removed from machine case.
104288-01 104288-02
English Blanking Plug Metric Blanking Plug.

2002 Bently Nevada, LLC used in this document are registered marks of Bently Nevada, LLC
Page 7 of 9
Dimensional Drawing
Figure 1: Dimensions for 31000 and 32000 Proximity Probe Housings Dimensions are in millimetres (inches)
Page 8 of 9
All 4 holes in housing base, 1 per side, will accept sleeve or conduit fittings and cable glands. Fittings are supplied with housing depending on English, metric or DIN type. Hole plugs are provided to seal unused holes.
Installation Procedures 1. Install outer sleeve into machine case. 2. Insert probe sleeve and adjust probe gap. 3. Disconnect probe cable and fit housing over outer sleeve. 4. Slide retainer under retaining nut. Tighten nut. 5. Re-connect probe cable and Connector Protector. 6. Place housing cover on housing and tighten captive screws. 7. If hole plugs are used, tighten hole plug nuts to 0.5 N-m (5 in-lbs). Figure 2: Vertical profile and horizontal profile views of the Proximity Probe Housings
Page 9 of 9
Part Number 100076-01 Revision G, November 2006
330500 Velomitor Sensor 330525 Velomitor XA Sensor 330530 Radiation Resistant Velomitor Sensor
User's Guide
330500 Velomitor Sensor, 330525 Velomitor XA Sensor, 330530 Radiation Resistant Velomitor Sensor User's Guide
Bently Nevada, LLC has attempted to identify areas of risk created by improper installation and/or operation of this product. These areas of information are noted as DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION for your protection and APPLICATION ALERT or APPLICATION ADVISORY for the safe and effective operation of this equipment. Read all instructions before installing or operating this product. Pay particular attention to those areas designated by the following notices.
Application Alert: Improper installation may result in a decrease in the velocity sensor's amplitude and frequency response and/or generate false signals that do not represent actual vibration.
DANGER
Removing the terminal strip cover will expose the user to elevated voltages. Contact with exposed terminals may result in severe injury or death. Remove power from the unit before attempting to service the relay contacts. Copyright 1991 Bently Nevada, LLC All Rights Reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the copyright owner. The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Bently Nevada, LLC in the United States and Other Countries:
ACM, Actionable Information, Actionable Information to the Right People at the Right Time, ADRE, , Asset Condition Management, Asset Condition Monitoring, Bently ALIGN, Bently BALANCE, Bently DOCUVIEW, Bently LUBE, Bently Nevada, Bently PERFORMANCE, Bently RELIABILITY, CableLoc, ClickLoc, Data Manager, Decision SupportSM, DemoNet, Dynamic Data Manager, Engineer Assist, FieldMonitor, flexiTIM, FluidLoc, Helping You Protect and Manage All Your Machinery, HydroScan, HydroView, Key , Keyphasor, Machine Condition Manager 2000, MachineLibrary, Machine Manager, MicroPROX, Move Data, Not People, Move Information, Not Data, NSv, Prime Spike, PROXPAC, Proximitor, REBAM, RuleDesk, SE, Seismoprobe, Smart Monitor, Snapshot, System 1, System Extender, TDXnet, TDIXconnX, The Plant Asset Management CompanySM, TipLoc, TorXimitor, Transient Data Manager, Trendmaster, TrimLoc, Velomitor Bently Nevadas Orbit logo and other logos associated with the trademarks in bold above, are also all trademarks or registered trademarks of Bently Nevada in the United States and other countries. Crescent is a trademark of Crescent Tool and Horseshoe Corporation. Loctite is a trademark of Henkel Corporation.
ii
The following provides ways of contacting Bently Nevada for those times when you cannot contact your local Bently Nevada representative: Mailing Address Telephone Fax Internet 1631 Bently Parkway South Minden, NV 89423 USA 1 775 782 3611 1 800 227 5514 1 775 215 2876 www.bently.com
Disposal Instructions Non-Nuclear Applications

Customers and third parties, who are not member states of the European Union, who are in control of the product at the end of its life or at the end of its use, are solely responsible for the proper disposal of the product. No person, firm, corporation, association or agency that is in control of product shall dispose of it in a manner that is in violation of any applicable federal, state, local or international law. Bently Nevada LLC is not responsible for the disposal of the product at the end of its life or at the end of its use.
Disposal Instructions Nuclear Applications

This product is intended for use at nuclear site needs and it is the responsibility of the respective site to correctly dispose of this hardware as required by applicable regulations. The product is not covered under the WEEE directive and no person, firm, corporation, association or agency that is in control of product shall dispose of it in a manner that is in violation of any applicable federal, state, local or international law. Bently Nevada LLC is not responsible for the disposal of the product at the end of its life or at the end of its use.
iii
Foreword
This manual describes the Bently Nevada Velomitor Sensor, a piezovelocity sensor, and contains instructions for its installation and maintenance. If you need additional assistance contact the nearest Bently Nevada LLC office. This manual is intended for technicians and engineers experienced in the use of electronic instrumentation and machinery monitoring equipment. Section 1 describes the Velomitor Sensor, tells how it works, and lists applications and optional accessories. This section also includes information on the Bently Nevada machinery monitoring systems that are compatible with the Velomitor Sensor. Section 2 gives instructions for receiving and inspecting the Velomitor Sensor, choosing the proper monitoring points, and mounting the device. This section also shows how to install connecting cables. Section 3 tells how to maintain the Velomitor Sensor by describing the test procedures and equipment needed to verify that the device is operating properly. Section 4 contains instructions for field-testing and troubleshooting problems with the Velomitor Sensor and compatible Bently Nevada monitoring systems. Section 5 provides detailed specifications and sensitivity curves representing typical Velomitor Sensor operation.
RELATED DOCUMENTS 3500/42M Proximitor/Seismic Monitor Operation and Maintenance Manual, 143489-01 3300/55 Dual Velocity Monitor Operation Manual, 130747-01 3300/55 Dual Velocity Monitor Maintenance Manual, 130748-01
iv
Contents
Section 1 Operating Information..................................................... 1
Application......................................................................................................................................... 1 Principle of Operation ........................................................................................................................ 1 Ordering Options and Accessories..................................................................................................... 3 Velomitor Sensor Options........................................................................................................... 3 Mounting Adapters Option AA................................................................................................. 4 Agency Approvals Option BB .................................................................................................. 4 Compatible Monitoring Systems and Connections............................................................................ 4 Cable Options..................................................................................................................................... 8 Transducer Accessories.................................................................................................................... 15
Section 2 Installation...................................................................... 17
Receiving Inspection........................................................................................................................ 17 Installing the Transducer.................................................................................................................. 17 Positioning the Sensor.................................................................................................................. 17 Mounting...................................................................................................................................... 17 Installing Connecting Cable............................................................................................................. 18 Routing Cable (for Velomitor Sensor 330500)......................................................................... 18 Routing Cable (for Velomitor Sensor 330525)......................................................................... 19 Routing Cable (for Velomitor Sensor 330530)......................................................................... 19 Routing Armored Cable ............................................................................................................... 21 Sealing the Connecting Cable ...................................................................................................... 21
Section 3 Maintenance................................................................... 23
Test Setup......................................................................................................................................... 24 Performance Test Procedure ............................................................................................................ 25 Polarity Test Procedure.................................................................................................................... 26 Installation Note............................................................................................................................... 26
Section 4 Field Testing and Troubleshooting.............................. 27

Fault Indication #1 Fault Indication #2 Fault Indication #3 Cause/Solution............................................................................................... 27 Cause/Solution............................................................................................... 28 Cause/Solution............................................................................................... 28
Section 5 Specifications ................................................................ 29

Standard Use Specifications (330500, 330525) ............................................................................... 29 Nuclear Use Specifications (330530)............................................................................................... 30 Mechanical Drawing (330500, 330530) .......................................................................................... 31 Mechanical Drawing (330525) ........................................................................................................ 32
vi
Section 1 Operating Information

Application
Velocity sensors measure machinery casing vibration and are used on machines where using eddy current proximity transducers are not practical. Typical applications include pumps, electric motors, compressors, and fans. The 330525 Velomitor XA Sensor is designed for applications where a transducer housing is either unnecessary or not desired. The 330530 Radiation-Resistant Velomitor Sensor is designed for applications requiring a resistance to the effects of gamma-radiation.
Application Alert: Casing measurements may not be appropriate for some machinery protection applications.
If you measure the velocity of casing vibration to protect machinery, evaluate the usefulness of the measurement for each application. Most common machine malfunctions, such as unbalance or misalignment, occur on the rotor and originate as an increase (or at least a change) in rotor vibration. In order for any casing measurement alone to be effective for overall machine protection, the machine must faithfully transmit a significant amount of rotor vibration to the machine casing or mounting location of the sensor. Exercise care when physical installing of the sensor on the bearing housing or machine casing. Section 2 tells how to install the sensor.
Application Alert: Improper installation may result in a decrease in the velocity sensor's amplitude and frequency response and/or generate false signals that do not represent actual vibration.
Principle of Operation
The Velomitor Sensor is a piezoelectric velocity sensor. The sensing element of the device is a piezoelectric ceramic shear-mode element and electronics. When subjected to machinery vibration, this system exerts a force on the piezoelectric ceramic, which generates a signal proportional to that force. The sensor internally amplifies and integrates this signal to produce a low-noise output signal that is proportional to velocity.
Application Advisory: A sudden mechanical impulse may cause the piezoelectric velocity sensor to generate a low frequency signal that does not represent actual machinery vibration. This signal may change the state of alarm and/or danger relays.
The Velomitor Sensor is designed to monitor vibration in frequencies ranging from: 330500: 4.5 Hz to 5 kHz 330525: 4.5 Hz to 2 kHz 330530: 4.5 Hz to 5 kHz
The sensor has a calibrated sensitivity of 100 mV/in/s (4 mV/mm/s) and some of the sensors can measure velocities up to 50 in/sec pk (1270 mm/s pk) see the specification section for details. The stainless steel casing protects the Velomitor Sensor in highly corrosive environments. The operating temperature range is from -67F to 250F (-55C to 121C). Traditional velocity sensors consist of either a moving wire coil surrounding a fixed magnet or a fixed wire coil surrounding a moving magnet. The Velomitor Sensor is more accurate than traditional velocity sensors. Because the Velomitor Sensor contains no moving parts, it is also more durable and less sensitive to transverse motion than traditional seismic transducers. Its piezoelectric sensing element and solid-state circuitry let the Velomitor Sensor withstand years of continuous use. The Velomitor Sensor is a two-wire device that requires an external power supply. The power supply must provide a DC voltage of 22 to 30 Volts and a current of 10 mA. A constant current diode must be used to limit the current to the sensor to 2.5 to 6 mA. Figure 1-1 shows a simple block diagram of the Velomitor Sensor system.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Velomitor Sensor Pin A Pin B Shielded cable A white B black SHLD Constant current source DC voltage supply
Figure 1-1. 2
The Velomitor Sensor internal circuitry automatically sets the DC output bias when a constant current is supplied. The DC bias and AC signal appears between pins "A" and "B".
Application Alert: Use a constant current diode or other currentregulating circuitry to provide power to the Velomitor Sensor. Failure to do so may result in damage to the device and/or improper operation.
Compatible Bently Nevada monitoring systems provide the power required by the Velomitor Sensor without the need for additional external circuitry.
Ordering Options and Accessories

Velomitor Sensor Options
When ordering a Velomitor Sensor you may choose from the following list of options. Table 1-1 Ordering Information Part Number 330500 Options AA 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 00 04 BB 1/2 - 20 UNF M8 X 1 1/4 - 28 UNF 1/4 - 20 UNC 1/4 - 18 NPT 5/8-18 UNF 3/8-16 UNC 1/2-13 UNC No Approvals Multiple Approvals P/N: 89409-01 P/N: 89410-01 P/N: 89411-01 P/N: 89412-01 P/N: 89413-01 P/N: 04300015 P/N: 165025-01 P/N: 161191 Description
Part Number 330525
Options AA 00 01 02
Description No Approvals CSA Approvals ATEX Approvals 3
Part Number 330530
Options AA 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Description 1/2 - 20 UNF M8 X 1 1/4 - 28 UNF 1/4 - 20 UNC 1/4 - 18 NPT 5/8-18 UNF 3/8-16 UNC 1/2-13 UNC P/N: 89409-01 P/N: 89410-01 P/N: 89411-01 P/N: 89412-01 P/N: 89413-01 P/N: 04300015 P/N: 165025-01 P/N: 161191
Mounting Adapters Option AA

The base of the 330500 and 330530 Velomitor Sensor are machined with a 3/8-24 internal thread that will accommodate a variety of purchased or customer-manufactured mounting studs. Bently Nevada offers the 7 adapter studs listed in Table 1-1. You can order one stud with each transducer or purchase the studs separately. Table 1-1 also lists Bently Nevada part numbers used for ordering separate adapter studs. The base of the 330525 Velomitor Sensor is machined with a 1/4-18 NPT external thread.
Agency Approvals Option BB

Consult your local Bently Nevada sales representative for information regarding hazardous area approvals.
Compatible Monitoring Systems and Connections

The Velomitor Sensor is compatible with the Bently Nevada 3500/42 Proximitor/Seismic Monitor and 3300/55 Dual Velocity Monitor. For more information on the 3500/42 and 3300/55 please refer to Bently Nevada data sheets 143694-01 and 141516-01, respectively. Connections to the "A" and "B" terminals of the Velomitor Sensor are made through the terminal connector of the interconnect cable. At the monitor end of the cable, connect the cable "A" lead to the "A" terminal on the monitor and the "B" lead to the "B" terminal. The terminal connections appear in Figures 1-2 through 1-4. Refer to the 3500/42 and 3300/55 Monitor Manuals (P/Ns 143489-01, 130747-01 and 130748-01, respectively) for further information.
(1) 3500/42 Prox/Velom I/O Module with internal terminations, Velomitor Sensor input. (2) Wiring shown for Channels 1 and 2. Wiring typical for Channels 3 and 4. (3) Channel 1 Velomitor Sensor (4) Channel 2 Velomitor Sensor (5) Velomitor Sensor top view
Figure 1-2. 3500/42 Monitor with Prox/Velom I/O Module
(1) Wiring shown for Channels 1 and 2. Wiring typical for Channels 3 and 4. (2) 3500 Prox/Velom I/O Module with internal terminations, Velomitor Sensor input with external barriers. (3) Safe area or Zone 2, Division 2 (4) Hazardous area (5) Channel 1 Velomitor Sensor (6) Channel 2 Velomitor Sensor (7) Velomitor Sensor top view
Figure 1-3. 3500/42 Monitor with Prox/Velom I/O Module with External Barriers
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
Signal input relay module location Channel A recorder output Channel B recorder output Alert relay contacts Danger relay contacts Signal input relay module, dual relays Channel A Velomitor Sensor Channel B Velomitor Sensor
Figure 1-4. 3300 System Connections (3300/55 Monitor)
Cable Options
The Velomitor Sensor requires a two-conductor cable. We recommend using shielded cable to minimize noise interference. Table 1-2 describes the Bently Nevada cables used with the 330500 Velomitor Sensor, Table 1-3 describes the cables used with the 330525 Velomitor Sensor, and Table 1-4 describes the cables used with the 330530 Radiation Resistant Velomitor Sensor. Figures 1-5 through 1-9 show the configuration of the cable and connector for each of the sensors. Table 1-2. 330500 Velomitor Sensor Interconnect Cable and Accessories
APPLICATION Standard Temperature Unarmored Cable P/N 9571-AA CABLE DESCRIPTION Shielded 22 AWG cable with moisture-resistant female socket connector at transducer end, ring lugs at monitor end. Same as 9571-AA but with flexible stainless steel armored cable. Two-conductor shielded cable with a connector adapted for use with the 21128 Velocity Transducer Housing Assembly. Two-conductor shielded 18 AWG bulk cable. Specify number of feet. Velomitor Sensor Cable Connector Connector Clamp
Standard Temperature Armored Cable Cable for use with weatherproof housing
84661-AA
89477-AA
Bulk Cable
02173006
Spare Connector Spare Connector Clamp
00531061 00530574
Table 1-3. 330525 Velomitor Sensor Interconnect Cable and Accessories

APPLICATION Standard Temperature Armored Cable Bulk Cable P/N 106765-AA 02173007 CABLE DESCRIPTION Flexible Stainless Steel Armored Cable Two-conductor shielded 22 AWG bulk cable. Specify number of feet. Fluorosilicone Elastomer Boot Bottom Clamp Top Clamp
Spare Boot Spare Boot Clamps
03839144 03839142 03839143
Table 1-4. 330530 Velomitor Sensor Interconnect Cable and Accessories

APPLICATION Standard Temperature Unarmored Cable P/N 330533-AA CABLE DESCRIPTION Shielded 18 AWG cable with moisture-resistant female socket connector at transducer end, ring lugs at monitor end. Two-conductor shielded 18 AWG bulk cable. Specify number of feet. Velomitor Sensor Cable Connector
Bulk Cable
175873
Spare Connector
00531061
PART NUMBER 9571 - (SEE NOTE)
NOTE ORDER IN INCREMENTS OF 1.0 FOOT (0.30 m) EXAMPLE: 0 2 2 5 2 FEET (0.61 m) 25 FEET (7.6 m)
MINIMUM LENGTH = 2 FEET (0.61 m) MAXIMUM LENGTH = 99 FEET (30 m)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Cable 2-22 AWG conductor shielded, Teflon insulated Clear shrink tubing, 63.5 mm (2.5 in) 51 mm 13 mm (2.00 in 0.5 in) A, white B, black 126 mm 13 mm (5.00 in 0.5 in) SHLD, green Overall length 150 mm ( 6.0 in)
Figure 1-5. 9571 Cable for use with 330500 Velomitor Sensor
10

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) Stainless steel armor over cable Clear shrink tubing, 63.5 mm (2.5 in) typical 635 mm 76 mm (25.0 in 3.00 in) 51 mm 13 mm (2.00 in 0.5 in) A, white B, black 126 mm 13 mm (5.00 in 0.5 in) SHLD, green Overall length 150 mm ( 6.0 in)
11
1 2 3 4 5

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Schematic A, white B, black SHLD, green Overall length 150 mm ( 6.0 in)
12
NOTE ORDER IN INCREMENTS OF 3.0 METER (9.8ft) EXAMPLE: 1 2 0 5 10 METER (33 ft) 25 METER (82 ft)
MINIMUM LENGTH = 1 METER (3.3 ft) MAXIMUM LENGTH = 25 METER (82.0 ft) 1. 2-pin connector 2. Stainless steel armor, FEP coated 3. 7/8 single snap-grip hose clamp 4. 15/32 single snap-grip hose clamp 5. BN part number and serial number label 6. A, white 7. 38.1 mm (1.50 in) maximum 8. 14.5 mm (0.57 in) maximum 9. Fluorosilicone elastomer oil-resistant boot 10. 2-conductor shielded and jacketed cable 11. Approvals label 12. B, black 13. SHLD, green 14. Nickel-plated copper Teflon insulated ring terminal (size #6 stud) typical, 3 places 15. Overall length 150 mm ( 6 in) 16. Shield 17. Green 18. White 19. Black 20. Figure B, Wiring Diagram
13

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Cable 2-18 AWG conductor shielded, Tefzel insulated Clear shrink tubing, 63.5 mm (2.5 in) 51 mm 13 mm (2.00 in 0.5 in) A, white B, black 126 mm 13 mm (5.00 in 0.5 in) SHLD, green Overall length 150 mm ( 6.0 in)
Application Advisory: This cable is not like most other Velomitor cables in that the shield and drain wire are connected to the sensors connector. The sensor is connected to the machine that should be correctly grounded. So the sensor is the primary shield grounding point. See the special installation details in the section below.
14
Transducer Accessories
ACCESSORY Velocity Transducer Housing Assembly Requires a 1/2 - 20 UNF Velomitor Sensor adapter stud. Requires a 1/2 - 20 UNF Velomitor Sensor adapter stud. BENTLY NEVADA PART NO. 21128
Quick Connect Semi-permanent mounting method using permanently mounted bolts. Several bolts can be mounted and a single velocity transducer carried from bolt to bolt to measure vibration. Super Mag 100 Quick temporary method for mounting a velocity transducer. Junction Boxes
46122-01
Requires a 1/4 - 28 UNF Velomitor Sensor adapter stud.
46000-01
Weather proof or explosion proof housing for making electrical connections to interconnect cables. Flexible Conduit 1/2 in. (1.27 cm) 3/4 in. (1.91 cm) A convenient way to protect cables from moisture and abrasion.
03818016 (Body and Cover) 03818022 (Cavity extension) 03818065 (1/2 inch Conduit) (1.27 cm) 03818066 (3/4 inch Conduit) (1.91 cm) 14847 - AA 14848 - AA AA - Specifies required length
(See Bently Nevada Catalog or your local Bently Nevada Sales Representative for details.)
15
16
Receiving Inspection
Inspect the components of the your order as soon as you receive them for any shipping damage. Keep all shipping forms and invoices. If you discover any shipping damage, file a claim with the carrier and submit a copy to Bently Nevada LLC. Include all model numbers and serial numbers with the claim. We will either repair or replace damaged parts according to the terms and conditions of the sale. The velocity sensor is shipped in a protective package and the connector will be protected with a plastic cap. The Velomitor Sensor is a sensitive instrument and these precautions help to prevent damage during shipping.
Application Alert: Leave the protective cap on the connector until the final field wiring connection is made. This will prevent foreign debris from contaminating the connector possibly causing performance issues.
Installing the Transducer

Positioning the Sensor
For optimum performance and accurate measurements, place the velocity sensor at a position on the machine casing that is most responsive to vibration. Proper placement is often dependent on the application. Bently Nevada offers Machinery Diagnostic Services, which can help determine the best place to mount the sensor for your application.
Mounting
Follow these steps to install the Velomitor Sensor: Applies to the 330500 and 330530 Velomitor Sensors: Step 1. Verify that the ambient temperature and the temperature of the installation surface are within the temperature rating of the transducer. Step 2. Verify that the mounting site is flat, clean, and dry. The sensor requires a flat surface at least 1.25 inches in diameter. For the best results the roughness of the mounting surface should be no more than 32 micro-inch RMS and its flatness should be at least .0008 inches Total Indicator Reading (TIR). Step 3. Determine if the sensor requires a protective housing for the sensor. We recommend using the Velocity Transducer Housing Assembly (P/N 21128) if maintenance operations will expose the Velomitor Sensor or its connecting cable to possible physical damage or if the sensor will operate in an environment containing solvents, corrosives, or excessive moisture. Step 4. Drill and tap the mounting hole to the dimensions required by the adapter stud. Drill the hole so that the sensitive axis of the transducer will be perpendicular to a tangential plane on the machine casing. For the best results the hole should be within 6 minutes of perpendicular. 17
Step 5. Apply one drop of Loctite 242 brand or an equivalent adhesive to both ends of the mounting stud. Step 6. Apply a small portion of Sperry Multi-Purpose Ultrasonic Couplant (P/N 04567900) to the mounting surface. Step 7. With the adapter stud tightened to the Velomitor Sensor torque the sensor to the machine case to 40 in-lb (4.5 N-m). Applies to 330525 Velomitor Sensor: Step 1. Verify that the ambient temperature and the temperature of the installation surface are within the temperature rating of the transducer. Step 2. Verify that the mounting site will be suitable for drilling and tapping a hole for a 1/4-18 NPT thread. Consider the hole depth and casing thickness when selecting a mounting site for the transducer. Step 4. Drill and tap the mounting hole to the dimensions required by the 1/4-18 NPT stud. Standard drill size and depth is 7/16-inch and 0.90 inch, respectively. Drill the hole so that the sensitive axis of the transducer will be perpendicular to a tangential plane on the machine casing. For the best results, the holes should be within 30 minutes of perpendicular. When hand tight, the mounting stud of the transducer will have 2 or 3 threads exposed. Step 5. Using a Crescent or socket wrench, tighten the 330525 Velomitor Sensor to the mounting site to turn past hand tight engagement. This corresponds to a mounting torque of approximately 400 in-lb.
Installing Connecting Cable

Application Alert: Improper routing of cables through conduit can fray the wiring, which may result in a short or loss of signal.
Application Alert: If the sensor field wiring is reversed, then the bias voltage of Velomitor Sensor output will be within the monitors OK limits, but the unit will not generate a vibration signal. The product specification lists the valid voltage bias limits for the different Velomitor Sensors. The sensor must be within these limits to have a valid output signal.
Application Advisory: When routing the cable, consider protecting the cable from exposure to RF (radio frequency) energy by shielding the cable via grounded metal surfaces when possible. The product has been design to tolerate this interference, but careful routing of the cable can improve signal quality.
Routing Cable (for Velomitor Sensor 330500)

Bently Nevada LLC supplies connecting cables with ring lugs or military-type circular connectors. The cable connector must be compatible with the Velomitor Sensor connector. Route the connecting cable away from the moving components of the machine and avoid sharp corners during installation. To minimize noise, avoid routing 18
cables in the same cable tray with high voltage power lines. Tie the cable to a stationary part of the machine to prevent it from whipping and premature failure. Prevent the cable from bending sharply, twisting, kinking, knotting, or straining. To prevent physical damage route the cable through conduit. Before pulling cable through conduit, wrap the connector or terminals with tape or a similar covering to protect them from damage. Ensure that the cable does not rub against rough or sharp surfaces.

Bently Nevada LLC supplies connecting cables with military-type circular connectors. The cable connector must be compatible with the 330525 Velomitor Sensor connector. The 106765-AA cable assembly includes a quick connect/disconnect connector and clamps to secure and seal the splashresistant boot. The cable assembly comes with the top clamp secured in position and the bottom clamp looped around the boot. Use a small screwdriver to open the clamps by prying the teeth of the clamps apart. Slide the boot back to reveal the connector. This will allow the cable assembly to easily install on the transducer. Once the connector is engaged, slide the boot down over the connector assembly and top of the transducer. The groove on the inside bottom of the boot should fit neatly over the lip above the hex flats. The grooves on the outside of the boot at the top and bottom indicate the placement of the clamps. Secure the clamps with pliers.

Bently Nevada LLC supplies connecting cables with ring lugs or military-type circular connectors. The cable connector must be compatible with the Velomitor Sensor connector. Route the connecting cable away from the moving components of the machine and avoid sharp corners during installation. To minimize noise, avoid routing cables in the same cable tray with high voltage power lines. Tie the cable to a stationary part of the machine to prevent it from whipping and premature failure. Prevent the cable from bending sharply, twisting, kinking, knotting, or straining. To prevent physical damage route the cable through conduit. Before pulling cable through conduit, wrap the connector or terminals with tape or a similar covering to protect them from damage. Ensure that the cable does not rub against rough or sharp surfaces. The radiation resistant cable 330533 is built from materials that are tolerant to gamma-radiation, but the life of the cable can be extended, if during installation, the cable should be routed in a manner to shield or keep the maximum distant between the cable and the radiation sources. One possible installation scenario involves piping which the fluid has radioactive material floating in it. In this instance you should not strap the cable to the piping, but instead try to route the cable away from the radiation source as soon as the cable leaves the sensors connection interface.
19
Special installation instruction for 330530s cable (330533) and installation in nuclear environments This cable has the shield and drain wire connected at the sensors connector. The sensor should be correctly grounded on the machine and so this becomes the primary shield grounding point inside containment. Our best practice says that only one point should be used to connect to the cables shield and so to keep with this practice, an isolation capacitor needs to be installed, see diagram for our recommendation.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
B, black A, white SHLD Capacitor, 0.01uF to 0.05, minimum of 300 V Feed-through Terminal Block, Outside Containment Feed-through Terminal Block, Inside Containment Velomitor Sensor Connector Typical Monitor Wall of Containment
Figure 2-1. Recommendations for 330533 Cable Hook-up

Application Advisory: The capacitor is required to prevent ground loops. If the case of the machine that the 330530 is mounted to is not at the same voltage potential as the monitors common, a current will flow through the shield of the interconnect cable. This low level current could cause false readings or trips. At high levels, this current could destroy the monitor if the capacitor is not used.
20
Routing Armored Cable

If you will not route the cable inside conduit, use armored cable and secure it to supporting surfaces with clips or similar devices. Route the cable through protected areas to reduce the chance of damage. Connect one end of the armor directly to the enclosure or other structure in which the monitor is mounted. Rigidly connect the other end of the armor to a structure near the Velomitor Sensor. The recommended minimum bend radius for armored cable is 1.5 inches (38.1 mm).
Sealing the Connecting Cable

When conduit-enclosed cable is routed through oil or gaseous environments, seal the ends of the conduit to prevent leakage into the protected enclosure. Table 2-1 describes the strategies for sealing conduit and the differential pressures for which they apply. Table 2-1. Conduit Sealing Techniques
Differential Pressure Less than one atmosphere Seal Type ZY5 cable seal similar to Bently Nevada P/N 10076-AA or duct seal putty. Special interconnecting cable. (Contact Bently Nevada for details.)
Greater than one atmosphere
Bently Nevada cable seals protect against splash and abrasion but they do not protect against immersion. Contact Bently Nevada if greater protection is required.
21
22
Section 3 Maintenance
This section shows how to check the performance of the Velomitor Sensor. Table 3-1 lists the recommended maintenance equipment. If the required equipment is not available, contact the nearest Bently Nevada LLC field office, or a testing laboratory for testing. Table 3-1. Recommended Maintenance Equipment
Recommended Equipment MB Dynamics Model PM50 Exciter Shake Table MB Dynamics, Model 2250 Power Amplifier Krohn-Hite Model 1200A Function Generator (Bently Nevada P/N 02280852) Bently Nevada LLC Model 330180-50-00 Proximitor Sensor Model 330101-00-08-10-02-00 Probe Model 330130-040-00-00 Extension Cable Power Supply, Bently Nevada TK15 -24.0 Vdc with minimum output current of 20 mA and less than 5 mV peak-peak noise 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick, 0.85 inch (21.6 mm) diameter, 16 in pp (0.41 m pp) Specification
AISI 4140 Steel Target Material
3 mA (Motorola P/N 1N5309) current diode Bently Nevada P/N 00643485
23
Test Setup
(1) (2) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Oscilloscope Proximitor Sensor Pin B (black) Pin A (white) Probe Velomitor Sensor Target Shake table Power amplifier Signal generator 3 mA current diode 24Vdc TK-15 Figure 3-1
Step 1. Connect test equipment as shown in Figure 3-1. Step 2. Mount the 4140 steel target to the shake table so that it is rigidly attached to the moving armature as shown in Figure 3-2.
24
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Velomitor Sensor Probe Target Shake table base Figure 3-2
Step 3. Mount a 3300 XL 8mm, 1 meter probe (P/N 330101) such that it is isolated from the motion of the shake table. Step 4. Connect the probe to a four meter extension cable (P/N 330130-04000-00) and Proximitor Sensor (P/N 330180-50-00). Step 5 Apply -24 Vdc power to the Proximitor Sensor and monitor the output with a voltmeter or oscilloscope.
Note: The accuracy of the system can be improved by mounting the probe and target on the same axis as the sensitive axis of the Velomitor Sensor and by verifying that there is no mechanical resonance in the probe or target fixture at the frequency of calibration (100 Hz).
Step 6. Mount the velocity sensor to be checked on the shake table and tighten by hand. Step 7. Adjust the probe-to-target gap so that the Proximitor Sensor output is at midrange, -10.0 0.5 Vdc. Step 8. Connect the velocity transducer to the oscilloscope or voltmeter as shown in Figure 3-1.
Performance Test Procedure

Step 1. Set the signal generator to 100 1 Hz and adjust the power amplifier gain so that the Proximitor Sensor output is .318 .003 volts peak-to-peak (0.112 0.001 Vrms). This signal corresponds to a peak-to-peak displacement of 0.00159 inches (0.0404 mm) and a peak-to-peak velocity of 1.0 inch per second (25.4 mm/s). 25
Step 2. Verify that the output of the velocity sensor is between .095 and .105 volts peak-to-peak (.0336 to .0371 Vrms). If the output is not in this range, return the unit to the factory.
Polarity Test Procedure

Use this test to verify the proper phase response. Any out-of-phase response will adversely affect machinery balancing. Step 1. Connect the cable as shown in the setup in Figure 3-1. Step 2. Set the time base on the oscilloscope to 20 milliseconds/division. Step 3. Hold the velocity sensor in hand and tap the bottom. Verify that the waveform on the oscilloscope first goes positive as shown in Figure 3-3. If it goes negative first, return the unit to the factory for replacement.
(1)
Display goes positive
Figure 3-3
Installation Note
Verify that the connector and the mating part of the sensor both are free of any foreign debris. If required, clear out material before connecting parts to prevent shorting out of the signal.
26
Section 4 Field Testing and Troubleshooting
Section 4 Field Testing and Troubleshooting

Use the following procedure to test an installed Velomitor Sensor and isolate a suspected malfunction. The Velomitor Sensor is a hermetically sealed unit with no adjustments or field repairable components. If you determine that the Velomitor Sensor is not functioning properly, return it to a factory authorized repair center for further evaluation and disposition. When the Velomitor Sensor is used with a Bently Nevada monitoring system, the system indicates a sensor fault when the monitor's OK LED goes OFF. A fault may be due to a sensor malfunction or a malfunction in the field wiring. Before troubleshooting a suspected problem: first check to make sure that the sensor has been correctly installed, all connections are secured and in the proper locations. If the sensor is properly installed, use the following steps to help identify the problem.
Fault Indication #1
Cause/Solution
Bently Nevada Monitor OK LED is off

Monitor Power is off. Check that the monitor power supply is plugged in and power is on. Interconnect cable is disconnected, connected loosely, or connected to the wrong monitor. Verify that the sensor is connected to the correct monitor and to the correct monitor terminals. Check that the screws are tight. Interconnect cable is not connected, connection is loose at the sensor, or sensor is open/shorted. Verify that the sensor is connected either visually or by measuring the DC bias voltage between terminals A and B on the monitor (with the cable connected to the sensor and monitor). The absolute value should be 123 Vdc. If the measured DC bias voltage is not within the values indicated and the interconnect cable has been verified not to be a problem (by using the next two steps), then the sensor may be damaged. Interconnect Cable is Damaged: Shorted Visually inspect the interconnect cable for apparent damage. Disconnect the interconnect cable at both ends and measure the resistance between the two conductors, "A" to "B". If the measurement is intermittent or shorted, then replace the cable. Interconnect Cable is Damaged: Open Disconnect the interconnect cable at both ends. Then short the two conductors together at one end and measure the resistance of the cable at the other end. If the cable is open circuited, replace the cable. 27
Fault Indication #2
Cause/Solution
Unusually low vibration with non-machine related low level, broadband noise.
Sensor signal is not isolated, is shorted to the case or has noise coupled to the signal. Use the following procedure: Step 1: Measure the resistance between the A terminal pin and the sensor case. Repeat the resistance measurement from the B terminal pin to the sensor case. Resistance should be 1M or greater. Step 2: Inspect and/or clean sensor connector to remove foreign debris. Step 3: Repeat resistance measurement of step 1. Replace sensor if resistance is not 1M or greater.
Fault Indication #3
Cause/Solution
Monitor is indicating transducer is OK (not-OK indicator is off), but there is no vibration signal.
Sensor wiring is mis-wired or faulty Velomitor Sensor. Use the following procedure: Step 1: Measure the bias voltage of the sensor at the monitor terminals. Normally the voltage should be around 12 volts reference to the B terminal. If the voltage is outside the specification limits (like 7 volts for the 330530) the transducer wiring is most likely reversed. Step 2: At the monitor input terminal reverse the wiring connection between A terminal and B terminal. Step 3: Retest the sensor as described in Step 1. If the voltage level is still outside the specification limits then the Velomitor Sensor is most likely at fault.
28
Section 5 Specifications
Standard Use Specifications (330500, 330525)
Parameters are specified at 77 F (25 C) unless otherwise indicated.
330500 Velomitor Sensor

Electrical Sensitivity Frequency Response Velocity Range Transverse Sensitivity Amplitude Linearity Mounted Resonant Frequency Power Requirements Output Bias Voltage Dynamic Output Impedance Broadband Noise Floor Grounding Maximum Cable Length Environmental Operating Temperature Range Shock Limit Humidity Limit Mechanical Weight Dimensions Case Material Connector
330525 Velomitor XA Sensor
4 mV/mm/s (100 mV/in/s) 5% at 100 Hz 0.9 dB, 6.0 Hz to 2.5 kHz 0.9 dB, 6.0 Hz to 1.0 kHz 3.0 dB, 4.5 Hz to 5.0 kHz 3.0 dB, 4.5 Hz to 2.0 kHz 1270 mm/s (50 in/s), peak <5% of axial sensitivity 2% to 6.0 in/s, peak 12 kHz, minimum DC Voltage: -22 to -30 Vdc Bias Current: 2.5 to 6.0 mA -12.03.0 Vdc, Over Temperature Referenced to pin A <2400 < 0.004 mm/s (160 in/s) Case Isolated 305 m (1000 ft) with no signal degradation -55 C to 121 C (-67 F to 250 F) 5000 gs, peak 100% Relative (hermetically sealed)
150 g, (5.3 oz), typical See Figures 5-1 See Figures 5-1 304L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 2 pin Mil-C-5015, 2 pin Mil-C-26482, hermetically sealed, hermetically sealed, 304 stainless steel shell 304 stainless steel shell Mounting Torque 4.5 N-m (40 in-lbs) 45.3 N-m (400 in-lbs) Polarity Pin A goes positive with respect to Pin B when the sensor case motion is toward the connector. Note: Operation outside the specified limits will result in false readings or loss of machine monitoring.
29
Nuclear Use Specifications (330530)

Parameters are specified at 77 F (25 C) unless otherwise indicated.
330530 Velomitor Sensor (Pre-Radiation)

Electrical Sensitivity Frequency Response Velocity Range Transverse Sensitivity Amplitude Linearity Mounted Resonant Frequency Power Requirements Output Bias Voltage, referenced pin B to pin A Dynamic Output Impedance Broadband Noise Floor Grounding Maximum Cable Length Environmental Operating Temperature Range Shock Limit Humidity Limit Radiation Dosage Mechanical Weight Dimensions Case Material Connector
330530 Velomitor Sensor (Post Radiation)
4 mV/mm/s (100 mV/in/s) 4 mV/mm/s (100 mV/in/s) 5% at 100 Hz 10% at 100 Hz 0.9 dB, 6.0 Hz to 2.5 kHz 1.0 dB, 6.0 Hz to 2.5 kHz 3.0 dB, 4.5 Hz to 5.0 kHz 3.0 dB, 4.5 Hz to 5.0 kHz 635 mm/s (25 in/s), peak 420 mm/s (16.5 in/s), peak < 5% of axial sensitivity 2% to 6.0 in/s, peak 12 kHz, minimum DC Voltage: -22 to -30 Vdc Bias Current: 2.5 to 6.0 mA -12.02.0 Vdc, Room Temp -12.01.0 Vdc, Room Temp -12.03.7 Vdc. Over Temp -12.03.45 Vdc, Over Temp Referenced to pin A Referenced to pin A < 2400 < 0.008 mm/s (320 in/s) Case Isolated 305 m (1000 ft) with no signal degradation -55 C to 121 C (-67 F to 250 F) 5000 gs, peak 100% Relative (hermetically sealed) 3 Mrads, maximum guarantee, See White-paper for test summary
150 g, (5.3 oz), typical See Figures 5-1 304L Stainless Steel 2 pin Mil-C-5015, hermetically sealed, 304 stainless steel shell Mounting Torque 4.5 N-m (40 in-lbs) Polarity Pin A goes positive with respect to Pin B when the sensor case motion is toward the connector. Note: Operation outside the specified limits will result in false readings or loss of machine monitoring.
30
Mechanical Drawing (330500, 330530)
1
25.3mm [0.995]
2
18.0mm [0.71] 63.2mm [2.49]
44.2mm [1.74] 33.0mm [1.30]
32
0.4 mm [0.015] 21.3mm [0.84]
3
(1) (2) (3) 25.4 mm [1.00] hexagonal MIL-C-5015 stainless steel receptacle, 2-pin, 5/8 24 UNEF-2A 3/8 24 UNF-2B x .25 DP, minimum, C-bore .50 x .03 DP
Notes:
1. Dimensions are in millimetres [inches] 2. Finished machine surfaces 3. Tolerances: Decimal .XX = 0.3 mm [0.01] .XXX = .13 mm [.005]
Figure 5-1
31
Mechanical Drawing (330525)
1 2
70.1mm [2.76] 44.7mm [1.76] 34.3mm [1.35]
5.1mm [0.20]
14.2mm [0.56]
27.8mm [1.10]
(1) (2) (3)
25.4 mm [1.00] hexagonal MIL-C-26482 stainless steel receptacle, 2-pin 1/4 18 NPT
Notes:
1. Dimensions are in millimetres [inches] 2. Finished machine surfaces 3. Tolerances: Decimal .XX = 0.3 mm [0.01] .XXX = .13 mm [.005]
Figure 5-2
32
21128, CA21128, BA42608 Velocity Transducer Housings

Description
Velocity Transducer Housings protect velocity sensors from damage caused by hose-directed water, corrosion, physical abuse, or other adverse environmental conditions. Constructed of 303 stainless steel, these housings are designed to meet NEMA 4X and IP65 requirements when properly installed. The 21128 housing is preferred for most non-hazardous environmental conditions. The CA21128 is the explosion-proof version that is CSA certified for use in Classes I, II, and III, Division 1, Groups B,C,D,E,F, and G. It must be ordered and shipped with a CSA approved velocity sensor installed in the assembly. The BA42608 housing is used for BASEEFA-approved installations where compliance with British Standard 5345 is necessary. It provides the environmental and physical protection needed to comply with the IP65 rating defined in IEC standard 144.
Specifications and Ordering Information Part Number 141628-01 Rev. C (06/07) Page 1 of 4
Specifications
Physical
Outlet Port Size: 1/2-in NPT. Internal Mounting Thread 21128 and CA21128: 1/2-in 20 UNF. BA42608: 5/8-in 18 UNF-2B. Weight: 1.6 kg (3.55 lb) without velocity sensor or fittings. B:
03
1/2-in NPT, explosion-proof and cable grip fittings
Explosion-proof velocity housing including transducer CA21128-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX Note: B00 Transducer Mounting Angle/Minimum Operating Frequency option is applicable to A00 and A01 Transducer Type Options. The others are applicable to the A04 Transducer Type Option. A: Transducer Type Option 00 No Transducer 01 330500 Velomitor velocity sensor, data sheet 141632-01 04 9200 Seismoprobe velocity sensor, data sheet 141626-01 Transducer Mounting Angle/Minimum Operating Frequency Option 00 No option 31 0 2.5, 4.5 Hz (270 cpm) 32 45 2.5, 4.5 Hz (270 cpm) 33 90 2.5, 4.5 Hz (270 cpm) 36 0 100, 10 Hz (600 cpm) 39 0 180, 15 Hz (900 cpm) Mounting Thread Option 01 Unthreaded boss, 28.5 mm (1.125 in) diameter 02 3/4-in 14 NPT 03 1/2-in 14 NPT 04 1/2-in 14 BSP (G 1/2-in) Cable Exit Fitting Option 01 1/2-in NPT plug 02 1/2-in NPT, explosion-proof fitting 03 1/2-in NPT, explosion-proof and cable grip fittings
Temperature rating: -29C to +121C (-20 F to +250F) Moisture: Resistant to moisture and corrosion but is not submersible. O-Ring material: Neoprene C:
D:
Water and Corrosion-Resistant Velocity Transducer Housing 21128-AXX-BXX Note: Compatible with all Bently Nevada velocity sensors having 1/2-in 20 UNF mounting threads and a top mount connector or equivalent. A: Mounting Thread Option 01 Unthreaded boss, 28.5 mm (1.125 in) diameter 02 3/4-in 14 NPT 03 1/2-in 14 NPT 04 1/2-in 14 BSP (G 1/2-in) Cable Exit Fitting Option 01 1/2-in NPT plug 02 1/2-in NPT, explosion-proof fitting
IP65 Water and Dust-Resistant Velocity Transducer Housing BA42608-AXX-BXX Note: Requires a BASEEFA-approved velocity sensor with an isolator having 5/8-in 18 UNF-2B male threads and a top mount terminal strip. A: Mounting Thread Option 01 Unthreaded boss, 28.5 mm (1.125 in) diameter 02 3/4-in 14 NPT 03 1/2-in 14 NPT 04 1/2-in 14 BSP (G 1/2-in) Cable Exit Fitting Option 01 1/2-in NPT plug 02 1/2-in NPT, explosion-proof fitting
B:
B:
03
1/2-in NPT, explosion-proof and cable grip fittings
Dimensional Drawing
Figure 1: Velocity Transducer Housing Dimensions are in millimetres (inches)
Bently Nevada and Velomitor are trademarks of General Electric Company. Neoprene is a trademark of the DuPont Corporation. Copyright 1999. Bently Nevada LLC. 1631 Bently Parkway South, Minden, Nevada USA 89423 Phone: 775.782.3611 Fax: 775.215.2873 www.ge-energy.com/bently All rights reserved.
Quick Installation Guide

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
Rosemount 3144P
Rosemount 3144P HART Temperature Transmitter

Start
Step 1: Configure (Bench Calibration) Step 2: Set the Switches Step 3: Mount the Transmitter Step 4: Wire and Apply Power Step 5: Perform a Loop Test Safety Instrumented Systems Product Certifications
End
www.rosemount.com
00825-0100-4021e
Rosemount 3144P
2007 Rosemount Inc. All rights reserved. All marks property of owner.
00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
Emerson Process Management Emerson Process Management Emerson Process Management Temperature GmbH Rosemount Division Asia Pacific Private Limited
8200 Market Boulevard Chanhassen, MN USA 55317 T (US) (800) 999-9307 T (Intnl) (952) 906-8888 F (952) 949-7001 Frankenstrasse 21 63791 Karlstein Germany T 49 (6188) 992 0 F 49 (6188) 992 112 1 Pandan Crescent Singapore 128461 T (65) 6777 8211 F (65) 6777 0947
IMPORTANT NOTICE
This installation guide provides basic guidelines for the Rosemount 3144P. It does not provide instructions for detailed configuration, diagnostics, maintenance, service, troubleshooting, explosion-proof, flameproof, or intrinsically safe (I.S.) installations. Refer to the 3144P reference manual (document number 00809-0100-4021) for more instruction. The manual and this QIG are also available electronically on www.rosemount.com.
WARNING
Explosions could result in death or serious injury: Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review the approvals section of this manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation. In an Explosion-proof/Flame-proof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers when power is applied to the unit. Process leaks may cause harm or result in death Install and tighten thermowells or sensors before applying pressure. Do not remove the thermowell while in operation. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock.

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
Rosemount 3144P
STEP 1: CONFIGURE (BENCH CALIBRATION)

The Rosemount 3144P communicates using a 375 Field Communicator (communication requires a loop resistance between 250 and 1100 ohms) or AMS. Do not operate when power is below 12 Vdc at the transmitter terminal). Refer to the 3144P Reference Manual and 375 Field Communicator Reference Manual (document number 00809-0100-4276) for more information.
Update the 375 Field Communicator Software

The 375 Field Communicator Field Device Revision Dev v4, DD v1 or greater is required to fully communicate with the 3144P. The Device Descriptors are available with new communicators or can be loaded into existing communicators at any Emerson Process Management Service Center. Perform the following steps to determine if an upgrade is required. 1. Connect the sensor (see the wiring diagram located on the inside of the housing cover) 2. Connect the bench power supply to the power terminals (+ or ). 3. Connect a 375 Field Communicator to the loop across a loop resistor or at the power/signal terminals on the transmitter. 4. The following message will appear if the communicator has a previous version of the device descriptors (DDs). NOTICE: Upgrade the communicator software to access new XMTR functions. Continue with old description? NOTE: If this notice does not appear, the latest DD is installed. If the latest version is not available, the communicator will communicate properly, but when the transmitter is configured some new capabilities may not be visible. To prevent this from happening, upgrade to the latest DD or answer NO to the question and default to the generic transmitter functionality.
Figure 1. Connecting a Communicator to a Bench Loop.
Power/Signal Terminals 250 RL 1100 Power Supply
3144-0000a04a
Rosemount 3144P
STEP 1 CONTINUED...
Verify Transmitter Configuration
00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
A check () indicates the basic configuration parameters. At minimum, these parameters should be verified as part of the configuration and startup procedure.
Table 1. HART Fast Key Sequences(1) Function Active Calibrator Alarm Values Analog Output Average Temperature Setup Average Temperature Configuration Burst Mode Burst Option Calibration Clear Log Configure Hot Backup Configuration D/A Trim Damping Values Date Descriptor Device Information Diagnostics and Service Differential Temperature Setup Differential Temperature Configuration Drift Alert Filter 50/60 Hz First Good Temperature Setup First Good Temperature Configuration Hardware Revision Hart Output Intermittent Sensor Detect Intermittent Threshold Loop Test LRV (Lower Range Value) LSL (Lower Sensor Limit) Master Reset Message Meter Options Open Sensor Holdoff Percent Range Poll Address Process Temperature Process Variables Range Values Review Scaled D/A Trim HART Fast Keys 1, 2, 2, 1, 3 1, 3, 4, 2, 1 1, 1, 4 1, 3, 3, 2 1, 3, 3, 2 1, 3, 4, 3, 3 1, 3, 4, 3, 4 1, 2, 2 1, 2, 1, 6 1, 3, 3, 4 1, 3 1, 2, 2, 2 1, 3, 4, 1, 3 1, 3, 5, 2 1, 3, 5, 3 1, 3, 5 1, 2 1, 3, 3, 1 1, 3, 3, 1 1, 3, 3, 5 1, 3, 6, 1 1, 3, 3, 3 1, 3, 3, 3 1, 4, 1 1, 3, 4, 3 1, 3, 6, 2 1, 3, 6, 3 1, 2, 1, 1 1, 3, 4, 1, 1 1, 3, 4, 1, 5 1, 2, 1, 3 1, 3, 5, 4 1, 3, 4, 4 1, 3, 6, 4 1, 1, 5 1, 3, 4, 3, 1 1, 1 1, 1 1, 3, 4, 1 1, 4 1, 2, 2, 3

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
Rosemount 3144P
HART Fast Keys 1, 3, 2, 3 1, 3, 2, 4 1, 3, 2, 2 1, 3, 2, 3, 3 1, 3, 2, 4, 3 1, 3, 2, 3 1, 3, 2, 4 1, 2, 2, 1, 1 1, 3, 2, 1 1, 3, 2, 3, 1 1, 3, 2, 4, 1 1, 4, 1 1, 2, 1, 4 1, 3, 5, 1 1, 3, 2, 5 1, 2, 1 1, 3, 2, 1 1, 3, 4, 1, 2 1, 3, 4, 1, 6 1, 3, 1 1, 2, 1, 5 1, 3, 2, 1 1, 3, 2, 3, 6(1) 1, 3, 2, 4, 6
Function Sensor 1 Configuration Sensor 2 Configuration Sensor Limits Sensor 1 Serial Number Sensor 2 Serial Number Sensor 1 Setup Sensor 2 Setup Sensor Trim Sensor Type Sensor 1 Unit Sensor 2 Unit Software Revision Status Tag Terminal Temperature Setup Test Device Transmitter-Sensor Matching URV (Upper Range Value) USL (Upper Sensor Limit) Variable Mapping View Log Wires 2-wire Offset Sensor 1 2-wire Offset Sensor 2
(1)
This table contains the minimum functions required for complete transmitter configuration. Refer to the 3144P Reference Manual for the full list.
Input/Verify Callendar Van-Dusen Constants

If sensor matching is being used with this combination of a transmitter and sensor, verify the constants input. When using two sensors, repeat Steps 1 5 for the second sensor. 1. At the Home screen, select 1 Device Setup, 3 Configuration, 2 Sensor Config, 1 Change Type/Conn., 1 Sensor 1 (Select Sensor 2 two sensors). Set the control loop to manual. Select OK 2. Select Cal VanDusen at the Enter Sensor Type prompt. 3. Select the appropriate number of wires at the Enter Sensor Connection prompt. 4. Enter the Ro, Alpha, Beta, and Delta values from the stainless steel tag attached to the special-order sensor. 5. Select OK after you return the control loop to automatic control.
Rosemount 3144P
00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
STEP 2: SET THE SWITCHES

The Security and Failure Mode Switches are located on the top center of the electronics module. Follow the steps below to set the switches.
Without a LCD Display

1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Set the loop to manual (if applicable) and disconnect the power. Remove the electronics housing cover. Set the switches to the desired position. Reattach housing cover. Apply power and set the loop to automatic control.
With a LCD Display

Set the loop to manual (if applicable) and disconnect the power. Remove the electronics housing cover. Unscrew the LCD display screws and slide the meter straight off. Set the switches to the desired position. Reattach the LCD display and electronics housing cover (consider LCD display orientation rotate in 90 degree increments). 6. Apply power and set the loop to automatic control.
STEP 3: MOUNT THE TRANSMITTER

Mount the transmitter at a high point in the conduit run to prevent moisture from draining into the transmitter housing.
Typical Field Mount Installation

1. Mount the thermowell to the process container wall. Install and tighten thermowells. Perform a leak check. 2. Attach any necessary unions, couplings, and extension fittings. Seal the fitting threads with silicone or tape (if required). 3. Screw the sensor into the thermowell or directly into the process (depending on installation requirements). 4. Verify all sealing requirements. 5. Attach the transmitter to the thermowell/sensor assembly. Seal all threads with silicone or tape (if required). 6. Install field wiring conduit into the open transmitter conduit entry (for remote mounting) and feed wires into the transmitter housing. 7. Pull the field wiring leads into the terminal side of the housing. 8. Attach the sensor leads to the transmitter sensor terminals (the wiring diagram is located inside the housing cover). 9. Attach and tighten both transmitter covers.
3144-0433QIG
B E
A = Thermowell B = Extension (Nipple) C = Union or Coupling
D = Conduit for Field Wiring (dc power) E = Extension Fitting Length

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
Rosemount 3144P
STEP 3 CONTINUED...
Typical Remote Mount Installation
1. Mount the thermowell to the process container wall. Install and tighten thermowells. Perform a leak check. 2. Attach a connection head to the thermowell. 3. Insert sensor into the thermowell and wire the sensor to the connection head (the wiring diagram is located inside the connection head). 4. Mount the transmitter to a 2-in. (50 mm) pipe or a panel using one of the optional mounting bracket (B4 bracket is shown below). 5. Attach cable glands to the shielded cable running from the connection head to the transmitter conduit entry. 6. Run the shielded cable from the opposite conduit entry on the transmitter back to the control room. 7. Insert shielded cable leads through the cable entries into the connection head / transmitter. Connect and tighten cable glands. 8. Connect the shielded cable leads to the connection head terminals (located inside the connection head) and to the sensor wiring terminals (located inside the transmitter housing).
A D
644-0000b05b
E B C
A = Cable Gland B = Shielded Cable from Sensor to Transmitter C = Shielded Cable from Transmitter to Control Room D = 2-in. (50 mm) pipe E = B4 Mounting Bracket
Rosemount 3144P
00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
STEP 4: WIRE AND APPLY POWER

Wiring diagrams are located inside the terminal block cover. An external power supply is required to operate the transmitter. The power required across the transmitter power terminals is 12 to 42.4 V DC (the power terminals are rated to 42.4 V DC). To prevent damaging the transmitter, do not allow terminal voltage to drop below 12.0 Vdc when changing the configuration parameters.
Load Limitations
Maximum Load = 40.8 X (Supply Voltage - 12.0)(1) 420 mA dc
Load (Ohms)
1240 1100 1000
750
500 250 0 10 18.1 12.0 Min 30 42.4
HART and Analog Operating Range
Analog Only Operating Range
Supply Voltage (V dc) (1) Without transient protection (optional).
Power the Transmitter

1. Remove the terminal block cover. 2. Connect the positive power lead to the + terminal. Connect the negative power lead to the terminal. 3. Tighten the terminal screws. 4. Reattach and tighten the cover. 5. Apply power.
Sensor Terminals (1 5)
+ Test
Ground

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
Rosemount 3144P
Wiring Diagram
3144P Single-Sensor
2-wire RTD and Ohms
3-wire RTD and Ohms**
4-wire RTD and Ohms
T/Cs and Millivolts
RTD with Compensation Loop*
* Transmitter must be configured for a 3-wire RTD in order to recognize an RTD with a compensation loop. ** Rosemount provides 4-wire sensors for all single-element RTDs. You can use these RTDs in 3-wire configurations by leaving the unneeded leads disconnected and insulated with electrical tape.
3144P Dual-Sensor
R W W&G G B
T/Hot Backup/Dual Sensor with 2 RTDs*
**
T/Hot Backup/Dual Sensor with 2 Thermocouples*
T/Hot Backup/Dual Sensor with RTDs/ Thermocouples *
T/Hot Backup/Dual Sensor with RTDs/ Thermocouples *
T/ Hot Backup/Dual Sensor with 2 RTDs with Compensation Loop*
* Rosemount provides 4-wire sensors for all single-element RTDs. You can use these RTDs in 3-wire configurations by leaving the unneeded leads disconnected and insulated with electrical tape. ** Typical wiring configuration of a Rosemount dual-element RTD is shown (R=Red, W=White, G=Green, B=Black)
Ground the Transmitter

Ungrounded Thermocouple, mV, and RTD/Ohm Inputs Each process installation has different requirements for grounding. Use the grounding options recommended by the facility for the specific sensor type, or begin with grounding Option 1 (the most common). Option 1 (recommended for ungrounded transmitter housing): 1. Connect signal wiring shield to the sensor wiring shield. 2. Ensure the two shields are tied together and electrically isolated from the transmitter housing. 3. Ground shield at the power supply end only. 4. Ensure that the sensor shield is electrically isolated from the surrounding grounded fixtures.
Transmitter 420 mA loop Sensor Wires Shield ground point Connect shields together, electrically isolated from the transmitter
Rosemount 3144P
STEP 4 CONTINUED...
00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
Option 2 (recommended for grounded transmitter housing): 1. Connect sensor wiring shield to the transmitter housing (only if the housing is grounded). 2. Ensure the sensor shield is electrically isolated from surrounding fixtures that may be grounded. 3. Ground signal wiring shield at the power supply end.
Transmitter Sensor Wires 420 mA loop
Shield ground point
Option 3: 1. Ground sensor wiring shield at the sensor, if possible. 2. Ensure that the sensor wiring and signal wiring shields are electrically isolated from the transmitter housing and other fixtures that may be grounded. 3. Ground signal wiring shield at the power supply end.
Shield ground point
Grounded Thermocouple Inputs 1. Ground sensor wiring shield at the sensor. 2. Ensure that the sensor wiring and signal wiring shields are electrically isolated from the transmitter housing and other fixtures that may be grounded. 3. Ground signal wiring shield at the power supply end.
Shield ground point
10

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
Rosemount 3144P
STEP 5: PERFORM A LOOP TEST

The Loop Test verifies transmitter output, loop integrity, and operation of any recorders or similar devices installed in the loop.
Initiate a loop test:

1. Connect an external ampere meter in series with the transmitter loop (so the power to the transmitter goes through the meter at some point in the loop). 2. From the Home screen, select 1 Device Setup, 2 Diag/Serv, 1 Test Device, 1 Loop Test. The communicator displays the loop test menu. 3. Select a discreet milliampere level for the transmitter to output. At Choose Analog Output select 1 4mA, 2 20mA or select 4 Other to manually input a value between 4 and 20 milliamperes. Select Enter to show the fixed output. Select OK. 4. In the test loop, check the transmitters actual mA output and the HART mA reading are the same value. If the readings do not match, either the transmitter requires an output trim or the current meter is malfunctioning. 5. After completing the test, the display returns to the loop test screen and allows the user to choose another output value. To end the Loop Test, Select 5 End and Enter.
Initiate Simulation Alarm

1. From the Home screen, select 1 Device Setup, 2 Diag/Serv, 1 Test Device, 1 Loop Test, 3 Simulate Alarm. 2. The transmitter will output alarm current level based on the configured alarm parameter and switch settings. 3. Select 5 End to return the transmitter to normal conditions.
SAFETY INSTRUMENTED SYSTEM

When using a 3144P transmitter, the following guidelines should be followed. For additional Safety Instrumented Systems information consult the Rosemount 3144P reference manual (document number 00809-0100-4021). The manual is available electronically on www.rosemount.com or by contacting a sales representative.
3144P Safety Certified Identification

All safety certified 3144P transmitters require safety certified electronics. To identify a safety certified transmitter, verify one of the following: 1. See a yellow tag affixed to outside of transmitter. 2. Verify the option code B in the model string. 3. Verify the option code QT in the model string.
11
Rosemount 3144P
Installation
00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
No special installation is required in addition to the standard installation practices outlined in this document. Always ensure a proper seal by installing the electronics housing cover(s) so that metal contacts metal. Environmental limits are available in the 3144P Product Data Sheet (document number 00813-0100-4021). This document can be found at www.rosemount.com. The loop should be designed so the terminal voltage does not drop below 12 Vdc when the transmitter output is 24.5 mA. Position the security switch to the ON position to prevent accidental or deliberate change of configuration data during normal operation.
Configuration
Use any HART-compliant master to communicate with and verify configuration of the 3144P SIS (see "Table 1: HART Fast Key Sequences" to verify configuration). DD revision 3144P SIS Dev. 4 Rev 1 or greater is required. User-selected damping will affect the transmitters ability to respond to changes in the applied process. The damping value + response time should not exceed the loop requirements. NOTES 1. Transmitter output is not safety-rated during the following: configuration changes, multidrop, loop test. Alternative means should be used to ensure process safety during transmitter configuration and maintenance activities. 2. DCS or safety logic solver should be configured to match transmitter configuration. Figure 2 identifies the Rosemount alarm and saturation levels. (Alarm and saturation values are user-configurable.) Position the alarm switch to the required HI or LO alarm position. With a HART communicator, select the alarm and saturation levels using the following HART fast keys 1 Device Setup, 3 Configuration, 4 Dev Output Config, 2 Alarm/Saturation, 2 AO Levels.
Figure 2. Rosemount Standard Alarm Levels
Normal Operation 3.75 mA(1) max 3.9 mA low saturation 4 mA 20 mA 20.5 mA high saturation 21.75(2) min.
(1) Transmitter Failure, hardware alarm in LO position. (2) Transmitter Failure, hardware alarm in HI position.
4. Some detected faults are indicated on the analog output at a level above high alarm or below low alarms regardless of the alarm levels configured. 5. For specific saturation and alarm level settings, see the reference manual (00809-0100-4021).
12

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
Rosemount 3144P
Operation and Maintenance

The following proof tests are recommended. In the event that an error is found in the safety functionality, proof test results and corrective actions taken must be documented at www.rosemount.com/safety. Use "Table 1: HART Fast Key Sequences" to perform Loop Test, Review Device Variables, and view Status. See the 3144P Reference Manual for additional information. The required proof test intervals will depend on the transmitter configuration and the temperature sensor(s) in use. Refer to the FMEDA report and reference manual for further information. Abbreviated Proof Test Conducting the Abbreviated Proof Test will detect approximately 63% of transmitter DU failures and approximately 90% of temperature sensor(s) DU failures, not detected by the 3144P safety-certified automatic diagnostics, for a typical overall assembly coverage of 72%. 1. Using Loop Test enter the milliampere value representing a high alarm state. 2. Check the reference meter to verify the mA output corresponds to the entered value. 3. Using Loop Test enter the milliampere value representing a low alarm state. 4. Check the reference meter to verify the mA output corresponds to the entered value. 5. Use a HART communicator to view detailed device status to ensure no alarms or warnings are present in the transmitter. 6. Check that sensor value(s) are reasonable in comparison to a basic process control system (BPCS) value. 7. Document the test results per the plants requirements. Extended Proof Test Conducting the Extended Proof Test, which includes the Abbreviated Proof Test, will detect approximately 96% of transmitter DU failures and approximately 99% of temperature sensor(s) DU failures, not detected by the 3144P safety-certified automatic diagnostics, for a typical overall assembly coverage of 97%. 1. Execute the Abbreviated Proof Test. 2. Perform a minimum two point sensor verification check. If two sensors are used, repeat for each sensor. If calibration is required for the installation, it may be done in conjunction with this verification. 3. Verify that the housing temperature value is reasonable. 4. Document the test results per the plants requirements.
13
Rosemount 3144P
Inspection
Visual Inspection Not required Special Tools Not required Product Repair
00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
All failures detected by the transmitter diagnostics or by the proof-test must be reported. Feedback can be submitted electronically at www.emersonprocess.com/rosemount/safety/certtechdocumentation.htm. The 3144P is repairable by major component replacement.
Reference
Certification 3144P is designed, developed, and audited to be compliant to IEC 61508 Safety certified SIL 2 Claim Limit (redundant in SIL 3). Specifications The 3144P must be operated in accordance to the functional and performance specifications provided in the 3144P reference manual. The 3144P Safety Certified specifications are the same as the 3144P. Start-up time Performance within specifications is achieved within 6 seconds after power is applied to the transmitter when the damping is set to 0 seconds. Failure Rate Data The FMEDA report includes failure rates and common cause Beta factor estimates. This report is available at www.rosemount.com/safety. 3144P Safety Certified Safety Failure Values Safety accuracy: 2.0%(1) or 2 C, whichever is greater. Safety response time - 5.0 seconds Self-diagnostics Test Interval: At least once per hour Product Life 50 years based on worst case component wear-out mechanisms, not based on the wear-out of process sensors.
(1) A 2% variation of the transmitter mA output is allowed before a safety trip. Trip values in the DCS or safety logic solver should be derated by 2%.
14

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
Rosemount 3144P
PRODUCT CERTIFICATIONS
Rosemount 3144P With HART / 420 mA
Approved Manufacturing Locations
Rosemount Inc. Chanhassen, Minnesota, USA Rosemount Temperature GmbH Germany Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Singapore
European Union Directive Information

The EC declaration of conformity for all applicable European Directives for this product can be found on the Rosemount website at www.rosemount.com. A hard copy may be obtained by contacting an Emerson Process Management representative. ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) Rosemount Inc. complies with the ATEX Directive. Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) (89/336/EEC) EN 50081-1: 1992; EN 50082-2:1995; EN 61326-A1+A2+A3:1997 Industrial
Hazardous Locations Installations

North American Certifications Factory Mutual (FM) Approvals I5 FM Intrinsic Safety and Non-incendive: Intrinsically Safe for Class I/II/III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G. Temperature codes: T4A (Tamb = 60 to 60 C) T5 (Tamb = 60 to 50C) Zone Marking: Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T4 (Tamb = 50 to 60 C) Intrinsically Safe when installed in accordance with control drawing 03144-0321. Non-incendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D. Suitable for use in Class II / III, Division 2, Groups F and G. Non-incendive when installed in accordance with Rosemount drawings 03144-0321. Temperature codes: T6 (Tamb = 60 to 60 C), T5 (Tamb = 60 to 85C) E5 Explosion Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D. Dust Ignition-Proof for use in Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G. Explosion-Proof and Dust Ignition-Proof when installed in accordance with Rosemount drawing 03144-0320. Indoor and outdoor use. NEMA Type 4X. Temperature code: T5 (Tamb = 50 to 85 C) NOTE For Group A, seal all conduits within 18 inches of enclosure; otherwise, conduit seal not required for compliance with NEC 501-15(A)(1). Non-incendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D. Suitable for use in Class II/III, Division 2, Groups F and G. Non-incendive when installed in accordance with Rosemount drawing 03144-0321. Temperature codes: T5 (Tamb = 60 to 85 C), T6 (Tamb = 60 to 60C) 15
Rosemount 3144P
00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Approvals I6 CSA Intrinsic Safety and Division 2 Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; Class III, Division 1; Suitable for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D. Intrinsically Safe and Division 2 when installed per Rosemount drawing 031440322. K6 Combination of I6 and the following: Explosion Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; Class III, Division 1 hazardous locations. Factory sealed. European Certifications E1 ATEX Flameproof Approval (Zone 1) Certificate Number: KEMA01ATEX2181 ATEX Category Marking II 2 G EEx d IIC T6 (Tamb = 40 to 70 C) EEx d IIC T5 (Tamb = 40 to 80 C) Max supply voltage: 55 Vdc ND ATEX Dust Ignition Proof Approval Certificate Number: KEMA01ATEX2205 ATEX Category Marking II 1 D T95 C (Tamb = 40 to 85 C) Max supply voltage: 55 Vdc N1 ATEX Type n Approval (Zone 2) Certificate Number: BAS01ATEX3432X ATEX Category Marking II 3 G EEx nL IIC T6 (Tamb = 40 to 50 C) EEx nL IIC T5 (Tamb = 40 to 75 C) Ui = 55V Special Conditions for Safe Use (X): The transmitter is not capable of withstanding the 500 v insulating test required by Clause 9.1 of EN50021:1999. This condition must be taken into account during installation. I1 ATEX Intrinsic Safety Approval (Zone 0) Certificate Number: BAS01ATEX1431X ATEX Category Marking II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6 (Tamb = 60 to 50 C) EEx ia IIC T5 (Tamb = 60 to 75 C)
Table 2. Input Entity Parameters Power/Loop Ui = 30 V dc Ci = 5 nF Ii = 300 mA Li = 0 Pi = 1.0 W Sensor Uo = 13.6 V Io = 56 mA Po =190 mW
Ci = 78 nF Li = 0
Special Conditions for Safe Use (x): The transmitter is not capable of withstanding the 500V insulation test as defined in Clause 6.4.12 of EN50 020. This condition must be taken into account during installation.
16

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007 Australian Certifications Standard Australia Quality Assurance Services (SAA) E7 Flameproof Approval Certificate Number: AUS Ex 02.3813X Ex d IIC T6 (Tamb = 20 to 60 C) IP66 Special Conditions for Safe Use (x): 1. Apparatus must be installed in accordance to Rosemount drawing 03144-0325. 2. If the sensor is intended to be remote mounted, it should be installed in a suitable Standards Australia certified Flame-Proof enclosure and installed in accordance with Rosemount drawing 03144-0325. 3. Standards Australia certified cable glands or conduit adapters must be used when connecting to external circuits. Where only one conduit entry is used for connection to external circuits, the unused entry is to be closed by means of a blanking plug supplied by Rosemount or by a suitable Standards Australia certified blanking plug. N7 Type N Approval Certificate Number: IECEx BAS 07.0003X Ex nA nL IIC T6 (Tamb = 40 to 50 C) Ex nA nL IIC T5 (Tamb = 40 to 75 C) Ui = 55 V I7 Intrinsic Safety Approval Certificate Number: IECEx BAS 07.0002X Ex ia IIC T6 (Tamb = 60 to 50 C) Ex ia IIC T5 (Tamb = 60 to 75 C)
Table 3. Input Entity Parameters Power/Loop Ui = 30 V dc Ci = 0.005 F Ii = 300 mA Li = 20 H Pi = 1.0 W Sensor Uo = 13.6 V Io = 100 mA Po = 80 mW
Rosemount 3144P
Ci = 78 F Li = 0 H
Special Conditions for Safe Use (x): 1. For options using the transient protection board, the apparatus should be connected to earth with a copper conductor of 4 mm2 or greater. 2. For the label with more than one type of marking on it, upon completion of commissioning the apparatus the irrelevant marking code(s) shall be permanently scribed off. Brazilian Certifications Centro de Pesquisas de Energia Eletrica (CEPEL) Approval I2 CEPEL Intrinsic Safety Consult factory for availability. E2 CEPEL Explosion-proof: BR - Ex d IIC T5 (Tamb = 40 to 80 C) Japanese Certifications Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS) Flameproof Certification E4 Without sensor: Ex d IIB T6 (Tamb = 20 to 55 C) With sensor: Ex d IIB T4 (Tamb = 20 to 55 C) 17
Rosemount 3144P
Combination Certifications
00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
Stainless steel certification tag is provided when optional approval is specified. Once a device labeled with multiple approval types is installed, it should not be reinstalled using any other approval types. Permanently mark the approval label to distinguish it from unused approval types. KA KB K1 K7 K5 Combination of K1 and K6 Combination of K5 and K6 Combination of E1, N1, and I1 Combination of E7, N7, and I7 Combination of I5 and E5
Additional Certifications American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval ABS Type Approval for temperature measurements in hazardous locations on ABS Classed Vessels, Marine and Offshore Installations. Type Approval is based on Factory Mutual (FM) Approvals; therefore, specify order code K5. Please contact an Emerson Process Management representative if a copy of the certification is required. Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval for Shipboard and Offshore Installations DNV rules for classifications of ships and mobile offshore units for temperature measurements in the following locations:
Table 4. Applications / Limitations Location Temperature Humidity Vibration Enclosure Class D B B/C D
NOTE The transient protector (option code T1) is required when requesting DNV Type Approval. Additionally, hazardous locations approvals may be required (based on shipboard location) and will need to be specified by the Hazardous Locations option code. Please contact an Emerson Process Management representative if a copy of the certification is required. GOSTANDART Tested and approved by Russian Metrological Institute
18

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007 NOTES
Rosemount 3144P
19
Rosemount 3144P
NOTES
00825-0100-4021, Rev DA February 2007
20

Document No: LubSystem 01
Section 8
0 01 May 2002

The lubricating oil system equipment manufacturers information, and the associated equipment manufacturers information, is included next as an insert to the manual.
K:\Module Update\S8 LubSystem 01-0.doc
APPROVED DOCUMENT TO BE INCLUDED WHEN AVAILABLE

Document No: GBox 01 0 26 Apr 2002
Section 9
Gearbox
Gearbox
The gearbox manufacturers information, and the associated equipment manufacturers information, is included next as an insert to the manual.
K:\Module Update\S9 GBox 01-0.doc
_I000_01
Register Structure
I II III IV V VI VII VIII IX X
GB
Operating instructions Drawings and alignment diagram
Spare parts
Manufacturer's declaration
1/2
_I000_01
GB
2/2
T0000_01
I Operating instructions
High Speed, Parallel Shaft Gear Unit
Type: Serial No.: FD 48-3 518 117
GB
1 / 38
T0000_01
Revision history
Revision 01 02 Content of change Corrections to the address/telephone numbers in chapter 8 Revision of layout Document pages total : 38 38
GB
2 / 38
T0000_01
Table of Contents Chapter Page

1 GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................................................5 1.1 Notes on warranty ................................................................................................................................5 1.2 Technical data.......................................................................................................................................6 1.3 Functional verification.........................................................................................................................6 1.4 Terms of Delivery..................................................................................................................................6 2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ..............................................................................................................................7 2.1 Symbols for important instructions/operations..............................................................................7 2.2 Personnel qualification .......................................................................................................................8 2.3 Non-observance of safety instructions ............................................................................................8 2.4 Safety regulations.................................................................................................................................8 2.5 Safety instructions for the user..........................................................................................................9 2.6 Safety instructions for installation and maintenance.................................................................10 2.7 Safety requirements for spare parts ...............................................................................................10 2.8 General summary of safety requirements......................................................................................10 3 PACKING, SHIPPING, STORAGE, WASTE DISPOSAL ..........................................................................11 3.1 Packing .................................................................................................................................................11 3.2 Shipping................................................................................................................................................11 3.3 Storage..................................................................................................................................................14 3.4 Waste Disposal ...................................................................................................................................15 4 DESCRIPTION...............................................................................................................................................17 4.1 Design ...................................................................................................................................................17 4.1.1 Housing..........................................................................................................................................17 4.1.2 Gear set .........................................................................................................................................17 4.1.3 Bearings ........................................................................................................................................17 4.1.4 Oil supply.......................................................................................................................................17 4.1.5 Seals ..............................................................................................................................................17 4.1.6 Instrumentation............................................................................................................................17 5 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION.............................................................................................................19 5.1 Preparing the gearbox .......................................................................................................................19 5.2 Mounting instructions........................................................................................................................19 5.2.1 Mounting the couplings..............................................................................................................19 5.2.2 Alignment of shafts .....................................................................................................................20 5.2.3 Mounting the gearbox ................................................................................................................21 GB 3 / 38
T0000_01 5.2.4 Mounting of the pipes .................................................................................................................22 5.2.5 Flushing of the pipes ...................................................................................................................23 5.3 Oil supply ..............................................................................................................................................23 5.3.1 Lubrication oil supply ..................................................................................................................23 5.3.2 Lubrication oil pump....................................................................................................................23 6 OPERATION...................................................................................................................................................25 6.1 Commissioning ....................................................................................................................................25 6.1.1 Commissioning procedure .........................................................................................................26 6.1.2 Check list A ...................................................................................................................................27 6.1.3 Check list B ...................................................................................................................................27 6.1.4 Check list C ...................................................................................................................................28 6.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................29 6.3 Slow down and standstill .................................................................................................................29 7 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................31 7.1 Inspection and maintenance ............................................................................................................31 7.1.1 Notes for inspection and maintenance ...................................................................................31 7.1.2 Maintenance of the oil................................................................................................................32 7.1.3 Selection of lubricating oils for high capacity gearboxes ...................................................33 7.2 Repair ....................................................................................................................................................34 7.3 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................................35 8 SPARE PARTS ..............................................................................................................................................37
GB
4 / 38
_0100_01
GENERAL INFORMATION
BHS gearboxes are developed to the most current know-how and , processes in gearbox engineering for special applications, e.g. compressors, turbines ventilators, cooling water pumps, etc. The calculation of the gear dimensions is performed in accordance with standard dimensioning rules, like DIN 3990, ISO 6336, AGMA 421.06, API 613 and others. BHS gearboxes are available in different constructions, according to different revolutions and torques. For more information see our brochures which we send you on demand. BHS offers different monitoring sensor elements, e.g. temperature detectors, vibration and speed probes.
1.1
Notes on warranty
BHS gear units must only be used under the field conditions which are described in this instruction manual. The manufacturer is not liable for any malfunction or damage caused by any other than the intended use of the gear units or individual modules or parts of it. The same also applies to any repair or other service operation performed or attempted by persons other than duly authorized service staff. Such action will invalidate any claim under warranty, including for parts not directly affected. Opening or disassembling of the gear unit without approval of the manufacturer will render all warranty claims null and void. The manufacturer is not liable for any malfunction or damage caused by ignorance of this instruction manual respectively non-observance of safety requirements, warnings and cautions. The same also applies to any consequential damages. The gear unit must be operated by properly trained and well instructed staff. The proper operating condition of the gear unit and the associated equipment must be verified before putting into operation. Any device modification, particularly the removal or replacement of device parts or the use of accessories from other manufacturers is not permitted. Mind that any such action will render all warranty claims null and void.
Annotation: Technical device upgrading by the manufacturer are subject to change without prior notice.
GB
5 / 38
_0100_01
1.2
Technical data
Gearbox data Power rating.....................................................................................................................9695 kW Input speed......................................................................................................................1787 rpm Output speed...................................................................................................................3895 rpm Total weight....................................................................................................................... 6900 kg Assembly between .......................................................................................... E-Motor / Pump Lubrication FZG-failure load stage (DIN 51354) .................................................................................. min. 7 Used lubricant ..............................................................................................................ISO VG 46 Gear oil requirement......................................................................................................195 l/min Working oil pressure (overpressure) ......................................................................... 1,5 bar g Switch-off oil pressure (overpressure)...................................................................... 0,9 bar g Oil inlet temperature............................................................................................................. 50C Heat to be dissipated by the lube oil ............................................................................100 kW Gearbox noise Average sound pressure @ 1 m* ................................................................................ 87 dB(A) Sound power level* ..................................................................................................... 102 dB(A) For further information to the gearbox refer to outline drawing. *Refer to chapter 2.5, "Safety instructions for the user".
1.3
Functional verification
Each gearbox has been checked by a mechanical test run before delivery. The functional verification is confirmed in a test certificate. Please also pay attention to the notes in case of shipping damages (refer to chapter 3.2).
1.4
Terms of Delivery
The general terms of delivery of BHS Getriebe GmbH, Sonthofen are valid in their actual version.
GB
6 / 38
_0200_01
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The following instructions include fundamental notes and warnings which have to be observed for installation, operation and maintenance. To fulfil the safety aspects, these instructions must be read in particular before performing any installation, operation or maintenance work.
2.1
Symbols for important instructions/operations

The following symbols are marking important manual instructions. Disregarding these instructions may result in damage to the equipment respectively in injury to the operator of the equipment. NOTE This symbol (hand) indicates an information, which should be especially observed.
CAUTION This symbol (warning triangle) indicates danger to the equipment.
WARNING This symbol (varying with each danger) indicates danger to personnel. The symbol shown warns of dangerous rotating parts.
GB
7 / 38
_0200_01
2.2
Personnel qualification
Operation, maintenance and service work must be performed by properly qualified personnel. The specific areas of responsibility must be observed and inspected by the customer. Personnel without the specific qualification must be properly trained before working at the equipment. Ensure that the necessary operating instructions have been completely understood. This encloses all actions on installation, connection, operation and maintenance.
2.3
Non-observance of safety instructions

Non-observance of the safety instructions may result in serious damage to the equipment and the direct environment as well as in serious injury to the personnel. In addition this will render all warranty claims of the manufacturer null and void.
2.4
Safety regulations
Together with the instructions in this manual, the relevant national safety regulations as well as the legal directives for installation, commissioning and operation of the plant and the corresponding prevention of accidents regulations must be observed. The following are safety regulations in the EU: DIN VDE 0100 DIN VDE 0113 EN 60204 Part 1 EN 50110-1 VDE 0105 Beyond this the internal safety precautions and regulations of the company must be observed by the personnel. The customer is responsible for the observance of all legal directives and regulations at the plant.
GB
8 / 38
_0200_01
2.5
Safety instructions for the user

Rotating shafts of gearboxes must be protected and not be touched during operation. It is recommended to use coupling covers. NOTE Gear specific technical data must be noticed. WARNING Safety devices must Danger of injury!
not
be
dismantled
during
operation.
According to the third rule concerning the machinery safety law (machinery noise information rule 3. GSGV), the following data is provided about gearbox noise: The sound pressure level quoted in the Technical Data chapter is the mean value. The measurement is performed at a distance of 1 m from the surface of the gearbox, at the height of the shaft center line The measuring process takes place according to DIN 45635-01-KL2 or DIN 4563501-KL3 and DIN 45635 part 23. NOTE We are firmly instructing that in the installed state, some coupling and installation circumstances beyond our control could cause substantial changes of noise emission as a result of solid-body sound transmission, ensuing mutually from the aggregates in addition to secondary emission from neighboring components.
GB
9 / 38
_0200_01
2.6
Safety instructions for installation and maintenance

At the plant, the customer is responsible for carrying out installation and maintenance work only by qualified personnel.. WARNING It is only allowed to work on gearboxes when the plant is in standstill. Switch off the complete plant and protect it against switching on. Attach the following warning sign: Do not switch on! Personnel is working on the plant. NOTE Refer to chapter 7 for further maintenance instructions and the scheduled maintenance!
2.7
Safety requirements for spare parts

The manufacturer is not liable for any damage caused by unauthorized work, particularly as the result of any removal or replacement of device parts or as the result of using spare parts from other manufacturers than BHS. Such action will render all warranty claims null and void. Changes and modifications at system components must be carried out by service staff of the manufacturer or persons expressly authorized and trained by the manufacturer. Use original spare parts from BHS only. NOTE For further information about original spare parts from BHS refer to Chapter 8 respectively to register IV of this instruction manual.
2.8
General summary of safety requirements

Safety and reliability of the gearbox can only be guaranteed when observing all of the installation instructions, operation instructions and the system parameters of the data sheets (Chapter 1.2).
GB
10 / 38
_0300_01
3 3.1
PACKING, SHIPPING, STORAGE, WASTE DISPOSAL Packing

If not desired by the customer otherwise, the gearbox is dispatched on a stable wooden base ready to build in. Every opening of the gearbox is closed with a lid or a plug. Modules and attachments to be dispatched separately are packed in wooden boxes. Spare parts are normally provided with wax-based conservation (e.g. Tectyl), wrapped in aluminum-coated paper or polyethylene flat foil and dispatched in stable wooden boxes.
3.2
Shipping
CAUTION Observe the shipping dimensions and the maximum save load of the transporter. Please refer to the shipping documents for the exact weight. Observe the shipping and loading instructions on the wooden base respectively on the shipping container. The following means: Fragile ware Protect from moisture Upside Sling here Do not lift with a fork stacker Example of a shipping container
GB
11 / 38
_0300_01 The transportation of the gearbox has to take place cautiously in order to avoid damages through an exertion of force or careless loading and unloading. Adequate loading security devices (transport belts, anti-skid devices etc.) should be provided during shipping. High temperature fluctuations and strong impacts should be avoided. CAUTION The gearbox may only be slung at the points provided! For this, see also the gearbox installation plan! V E R Y I M P O R T A N T ! Please exactly observe our instructions in cases of shipping damage. If you don't observe the formal requirements the transport insurer is not liable. NOTE The shipping documents contain a red information sheet which eases handling in case of shipping damages. If this sheet is missing in the shipping documents, you can simply copy the following page to handle shipping damages.
GB
12 / 38
_0300_01 To determine the extent of shipping damages, consult the commissioner of the transport companies timely, according to their relevant regulations. This guarantees the claims for damage in your interest. EXTERNAL RECOGNIZABLE DAMAGES OR LOSSES Damages or losses must be attested on the way-bill by a specific note before taking the ware. On railway transports demand a factual statement from the railway company. On postal transports the damage has to be attested in writing before taking damaged packets from the postal service. NOT RECOGNIZABLE DAMAGES Inform the transport company immediate and in writing about damages which expose during unpacking. Observe the following terms for notification: a) Postal service................................................................... Immediate (not later than 24 hours) after delivery by the transport company. b) Railway company ...................................................................... Not later than 7 days after delivery by the transport company. c) Forwarding agency transports together with railway transports ............................................ Not later than 4 days after delivery by the transport company. The following text is recommended to use for the required notifications to the transport companies: To the goods office in ....................................................................................................... (respectively to the postal service, forwarding agency, transport company). The consignment with date..........................(sender.....................................) from............ .....................to..........................................(statement of the way-bill, parcel, signature) has been taken without reclamation since no external damages were recognized. However on opening the consignment there was found out that the content has been damaged and / or stolen during shipping. We consider that you are responsible for the damage occurred. If it is necessary from your point of view you can convince yourself in our company................................................................................................................. in our depot (road, number) about the extent of damage. In addition we would like you to inform the sender of our company by telling us the number of the delivery note and / or the bill number.
GB
13 / 38
_0300_01
3.3
Storage
In case the customer does not persist on special preservation rules, our gearboxes are delivered in preserved condition under use of our test stand preservation oils of the ARAL Konit series or equivalent types. These oil types are highly endurable (FZG-standard test DIN 51354/2 Load Stage 10) and correspond in their viscosity to the ISO viscosity classes VG 32, VG 46 or VG 100 Without additional packing but with all gearbox openings closed (delivery state), the corrosion protection with the oil types mentioned above would last for approximately 6 months. CAUTION Storage is only allowed in a well ventilated room under normal temperature conditions and a non-corrosive atmosphere! If the gearbox has been taken in operation after delivery even for a short time (e.g. on a customer test stand), then the protection against corrosion would be washed out and thereby raised. Should you have questions regarding long-term conservation, please contact our Service Department (for the address refer to Chapter 8) The above mentioned preservation oils as well as equivalent products of other manufacturers can be used for subsequent treatment of preservation. If a further test run becomes necessary, we recommend a preservation test stand oil to the customer. This type of oil sticks to the moistened surfaces and protects against corrosion. The maximum reachable preservation time will be given by the manufacturer of the oil. The remaining oil is usually compatible with the later used kind of oil. But always customer and oil manufacturer may decide whether the remaining test stand oil must be washed out.
GB
14 / 38
_0300_01
CAUTION We are expressly warning against the use of preserving wax or similar agents inside the gearbox! These preservatives can lead to clogged lubricant jets, lubricant sprays, small lubricant holes and to clogged or damaged filter elements. When applying such agents, the gearbox should be dismantled and carefully washed prior to starting. Opening the gearbox is only allowed to BHS service personal (refer to Chapter 1.1, Notes on warranty). For an external preservation of metallic bright parts we recommend the application of tangible (when dry) type of wax products as Tectyl 846 or something similar. External preservation is to be washed carefully before further assembly or installation inside the machinery is done. Parts not delivered with the gearbox in the mounted state should be cleaned as mentioned above; the same applies to spare parts. We recommend cold cleaner (e.g. Eskapon) for washing. You should certainly prevent the cleaning agent from entering into the interior of the gearbox.. CAUTION When using a cleaning agent, the respective working rules and instructions of the manufacturer should be observed.
3.4
Waste Disposal
In addition to the details given here, observe the relevant national waste disposal provisions and legal requirements. Housing parts, gears as well as gear shafts shall be disposed of like steel scrap. The same goes for parts made of gray cast iron if they are not collected separately. Sealing rings and hydrodynamic bearings are partly made of nonferrous metal and shall be disposed of accordingly. Waste oil shall be collected and disposed of according to regulations.
GB
15 / 38
_0300_01
GB
16 / 38
T0400101
4 4.1
DESCRIPTION Design
The design of the BHS gearboxes is determined by the latest research and developments in gearing technology and by the requirements of the main applications.
4.1.1
Housing Gearcases are of massive and rigid designs assuring optimum vibrations and noise damping. Amply dimensioned inspection holes allow an easy inspection of the gear sets.
4.1.2
Gear set The gear sets are designed as single stage, parallel shaft gears. All gearings are manufactured from high alloy steels, hardened and ground.
4.1.3
Bearings The shafts are running in easy to service and split hydrodynamic bearings of a high load carrying capacity and stable running behavior also under partial load. An adjustable radial bearing at the pinion shaft or at the gear shaft allows to optimize the tooth contact pattern for full load. The adjustment of the bearings to correct the tooth contact pattern may only be done by BHS service personnel. Axial forces are absorbed by an axial bearing. A hydraulic jacking oil system for the slide bearings is provided in case of severe starting conditions.
4.1.4
Oil supply The gearboxes are lubricated via a central pressure oil supply. Every bearing and gearing is fed with oil separately, via internal connections. The oil leaving the lubrication points is collected in the oil sump, from where it flows back either directly or through a conduit to the oil tank.
4.1.5
Seals For static sealing of the partition joints, a non-hardening surface sealing is used. The shafts are sealed with contact-less labyrinth seals. These are made of two pieces.
4.1.6
Instrumentation Instrumentation supplied by BHS is described on the outline drawing, register II.
GB
17 / 38
T0400101
GB
18 / 38
_0500_01
5 5.1
ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION Preparing the gearbox

Carefully remove the packing material completely. Remove corrosion protection on shaft ends just before the couplings are mounted. For the cleaning agent refer to Chapter 3.3, Storage. Clean the base surfaces. Put the gearbox onto the base. Mount loosely delivered sensors and parts only after the installation, so long as conditions allow, in order to avoid damages.
5.2
Mounting instructions
Coupling hubs will be mounted onto the shafts and misalignment of the coupled shafts will be corrected. After the alignment and mounting of the gearbox on the base, the pipes of the pressure oil supply will be laid.
5.2.1
Mounting the couplings If the coupling is mounted at the customer, the coupling hub must be cleaned carefully and mounted either with suitable mounting device or mounted by warmingup the gear shaft. CAUTION Do not use impact tools! NOTE Use suitable dismounting devices for dismounting coupling elements from the shafts. All gearbox shafts are carefully dynamical balanced. If the coupling hub is mounted later, verify if further balancing is necessary.
GB
19 / 38
_0500_01 5.2.2 Alignment of shafts For aligning the shafts refer to guideline VDI 2726, Alignment of gearboxes as well as to the operating instructions of the coupling manufacturer. It would be an advantage to correct first the angular alignment before correcting the radial alignment. When the angular alignment is done, the shafts remain to be corrected only axially parallel in horizontal and vertical direction. In the operation state, the shafts to be coupled must be in true alignment, so that disadvantageous effects cannot influence either the safety or on the connected machines. This also applies to the application of flexible couplings. Note the alignment tolerances of the plant and the coupling manufacturer. Following effects for shaft alignment must be considered when shaft alignment is done: Heat dilatation of the machine foundation Heat dilatation of the machine housing Deflection of the machine shafts Variation of shaft position during operation condition against mounting condition because of shaft displacement in bearings, bearing loading, hydrodynamic lubrication and tooth forces on gearboxes. Slant positioning of the shafts because of outside mounted masses. NOTE Displacements which can be expected in respect of the gearbox can be determined on the alignment diagram in the appendix. For the admissible alignment tolerances of the inserted coupling please see the operating instructions of the coupling manufacturer. CAUTION If a very heavy coupling is mounted onto the low speed shaft the displacement of the center of gravity may cause an overturning of the gearbox. Overturning of the gearbox must be avoided in any case. Therefore the shaft must be supported near the coupling and the central position has to be determined by means of a dial gauge. After the first times of running under full load the accuracy of the alignment should be ascertained once more.
GB
20 / 38
_0500_01 5.2.3 Mounting the gearbox The gearbox has to be fastened on a foundation absorbing reaction forces and torques. Avoiding deformations and vibrations it is necessary to use a stiff construction of the foundation with plane horizontal and clean surfaces. The mounting of the gearbox has to be done as follows: The gearbox is fastened on its location on the foundation, using fixtures (e.g. tapered pins or parallel keys). When tightening foundation screws, ensure that the tightening torque is uniform, in order to avoid deforming the housing After tightening the gearbox on the foundation, it is necessary to recheck the alignment of the shafts relating to the demanded accuracy.
Housing deformations result in an unfavorable variation of the tooth contact pattern. The reference surfaces at the two front sides of the gearbox are used for ascertaining and eliminating housing deformations. This has to be done as follows: Remove the protection cover of reference surfaces. Put a bubble level (precision 0.05 mm/m) on the first reference surface and read the horizontal deviation (for definition of (+) and (-) refer to next page). Repeat procedure with the second reference surface. Beside the two reference surfaces the actual value is imprinted. The difference between the read horizontal deviations must correspond to the difference of the imprinted actual values. Level the gearbox until the difference correspond. For this put shims between gearbox and foundation. A twisting of the gearbox up to 0.1 mm/m is acceptable. Preserve reference surface (rust protection). Reconnect the protection cover on the reference surfaces.
The following table and figure illustrate the correct gearbox: Ref. surface I II Difference Imprinted actual value 0,10 mm/m -0,15 mm/m 0,25 mm/m Read value 0,05 mm/m -0,20 mm/m 0,25 mm/m
GB
21 / 38
_0500_01 Definition for (+) and (-) values on reference surfaces Precision Bubble level
Reference surface
Low Speed Side
5.2.4
Mounting of the pipes Mounting of the pipes must be done in such a manner, that no impurities, transported with the lubricant can get inside the gearbox. Impurities in the lubricant are damaging or prematurely destroying the slide bearings and running teeth. Special care should be taken to ascertain that these pipes are free from scales and slag particles in their interior after welding (if possible the pipes should be washed with acid or welded with protective gas). Both the suction pipe and the return pipe should lead to the oil tank, with as short length as possible, without sharp curves. CAUTION It should be ensured that neither gearbox nor pump parts become subjected to deformation by connected lubricant pipes. Deformations caused by lubricant pipes can be avoided under use of expansion joints. The lubricant return pipe from the gearbox to the tank should be laid inclined as much as possible. The following lubricant velocities should be reached: Suction pipe Pressure pipe Lubricant drainage pipe 1.0 to 1.5 m/s 2.0 to 2.5 m/s < 0.15 m/s
GB
22 / 38
_0500_01 5.2.5 Flushing of the pipes Prior to initial starting, the whole pipe system should be flushed for several hours, using the auxiliary oil pump. Thereby, the oil inlet to the gearbox should be separated (insert blanks) and led to the tank via a provisional oil pipe. Flushing through the gearbox is not permitted. Care should also be taken when flushing the pipes so that no dirt collects at the blanks, and eventually drop into the gearbox when the discs are removed. CAUTION After flushing the pipes it must be checked whether all blanks are disconnected from the gear oil input.
5.3
5.3.1
Oil supply
Lubrication oil supply Lubrication oil for the lubrication and cooling of the gearbox avoids scuffing at the high loaded tooth flanks. The lubrication oil supply of the gearbox is integrated in the lubrication system of the unit mutually using the pressure and temperature control. It should be ascertained that the oil is running calmly and free of bubbles into the gearbox The oil temperature at the input of the gearbox can be taken from Chapter 1.2, Technical Data. The lubrication oil of the gearbox must be refined by means of filters. Following notes must be considered: The oil filter must filter dirt particles until a size of 25 m A filtration is recommended according to fineness class --/15/12, ISO 4406 Bypass micro-filters are recommendable. In the initial operation period, the filter must be cleaned frequently.
5.3.2
Lubrication oil pump In many cases the lubrication oil supply will be done by a lubrication oil pump mounted at the gearbox (refer to pump documentation in Register V). The pump is sucking up the oil with an underpressure which can be taken from the gearbox outline drawing.
GB
23 / 38
_0500_01
GB
24 / 38
_0600_01
6 6.1
OPERATION Commissioning
The delivered gearbox has been submitted to a mechanical test run. If no other special agreements are made and installation conditions are fulfilled the gear box can be taken into operation according to the commissioning procedure as described in chapter 6.1.1. The exact working oil pressure has to be noted and can be referred to on the nameplate. Further technical data are shown in chapter1.2. CAUTION Changes on bearings and lubricant devices may not be implemented without the permission of BHS! CAUTION During the initial operation period, filter elements should be cleaned at shortened intervals. After the first 200 service hours, a first oil sample should be taken and its characteristics analyzed (refer to chapter 7). The filter elements should be cleaned or replaced if necessary.
GB
25 / 38
_0600_01 6.1.1 Commissioning procedure Step 1 2 Activities Mounting of the gearbox according to chapter 5 Check list A according to chapter 6.1.2. All points okay continue with step 3. If faulty, stop the commissioning process and repair the defects. Restart with step 2. 3 Start the oil plant. CAUTION Observe the guidelines given by the person responsible for the complete system! CAUTION Observe the guidelines of the oil supplier! 4 Check list B according to chapter 6.1.3. All points okay continue with step 5. If faulty, stop the commissioning process and repair the defects. Restart with step 2. 5 Start the plant. NOTE During the starting phase, monitor the behavior of the plant, especially vibrations and noise. CAUTION Observe the guidelines given by the person responsible for the complete system! 6 Check list C according to chapter 6.1.4. All points okay continue commissioning process. If faulty, stop the commissioning process and repair the defects. Restart with step 2.
GB
26 / 38
_0600_01 6.1.2 Check list A Check the gearbox prior to starting: 6.1.3 Inspection cover closed. Temperature and shaft vibration sensor installed and connected. Unused connection holes closed with metal plugs. Oil inlet and outlet pipes connected and sealed, all closing discs removed (see chapter 5). Sense of rotation checked prior to coupling the driving machine. Alignment of individual aggregates according to the alignment instructions (prepare a report of actual values). Screw connections provided on the shaft line fitted according to suppliers instructions (tightening torque or bolt extension). Tightening torque of foundation bolts checked. Gearbox connected to earth. Pressure gauges installed right at the entry of the oil into the gearbox. Couplings mounted and checked according to suppliers instructions Driving machine, engine, oil system etc. checked according to suppliers instructions. Axial assembly dimensions according to outline drawing. Devices to avoid shaft currents installed. Loose parts such as tools, free hanging cables etc. removed away from rotating parts. Protective devices installed.
Check list B Check the oil supply of the gearbox prior to commissioning the machinery: Oil pressure p, at oil inlet. Nominal value: See chapter 1.2, "Technical data". Oil temperature TOil at oil inlet: Nominal value: See chapter 1.2, "Technical data". Bearing temperature TL at the bearing metal. Nominal value: TL approximately TOil . Check whether oil system are tight. 27 / 38
GB
_0600_01 6.1.4 Check list C After commissioning, check the gearbox at nominal speed, at nominal load and upon reaching the steady condition:
(1) (2) (3)
Oil pressure p, at oil inlet. Nominal value: See chapter 1.2, "Technical data". Oil temperature TOil at oil inlet: Nominal value: See chapter 1.2, "Technical data". Bearing temperature TL at the bearing metal. Nominal value: TL < TL Alarm(3) Check weather casing, oil pipes, partial joints, instrument connections and sealing ring are tight. Casing vibrations veff. Nominal value: veff < veff Alarm(1). Shaft vibrations s. Nominal value: s < sAlarm(1) . Noise LPA, summed level (mean value at 1 m distance). Nominal value: According to regulation(2). Alarm and trip values for vibrations according to outline drawing. Refer to chapter 2, Safety instructions The bearing temperatures measured during mechanical test run do not allow a reliable assessment of the full load temperatures. It is recommended to adjust the alarm values not before the real indications are stabilized under full load with regard to variations of the oil inlet temperature. The alarm value should be set 5C above the real temperature indication under full load, the trip value should be set 5C above the alarm value. The limits given on the outline drawing must not be exceeded.
GB
28 / 38
_0600_01
6.2
Operation
During operation the gearbox should be checked continuously in accordance to check list C. In the event of substantial deviation from the mentioned operation parameter, the plant should be switched off immediately and the cause investigated, in order to prevent a gearbox failure. Lubrication oil and filter elements should be checked regularly (refer to chapter 7.1).
6.3
Slow down and standstill

Also during the slow down period, the gearbox has to be fed with sufficient lubricant. The indicated gearbox switch-off pressure, the Plant-Quick-Stop must not be fallen short of (switch on the auxiliary pump). Check at which oil pressure the auxiliary oil pump begins to work. It is recommended to keep running the auxiliary oil pump even after standstill of the plant until the gearbox and lubricant have considerable cooled down. Thus the formation of condensed water inside the gearbox will be prevented. If the standstill period extends over several months, preservation measures will become necessary for the gearbox (refer to chapter 3.3, Storage).
GB
29 / 38
_0600_01
GB
30 / 38
T0700_01
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

For all service and maintenance works, chapter 2, Safety instructions is to be observed! NOTE All maintenance and repair works may only be performed by competent personnel.
7.1
7.1.1
Inspection and maintenance

Notes for inspection and maintenance The operating performance of the gearbox or the whole plant is to be submitted to a continuous monitoring process. Reasonably, this should be realized with a kind of an automatic system. Following items have to be noted especially for inspection and maintenance of the gearbox: The oil filling of the lube oil system or the system itself should have to be checked. Any changes are to be reported immediately to the person or authority responsible for the operation, or if necessary the machinery should be brought to a standstill immediately! At continuous operation, the inspection of the whole gearbox (bearings, gearing, lubricating devices, etc.) is recommended at 2 to 3-year intervals or the adjustment to inspection schedules of the adjoining machines. Please be aware that maintenance and repair work may only be performed by BHS fitters. CAUTION Operation faults, which result from inadequate or inappropriate maintenance, may involve high costs of repair and long standstill periods. Spare parts may be ordered using the attached spare parts list (refer to register IV). For further information please contact the specialists of our service department.
GB
31 / 38
T0700_01 7.1.2 Maintenance of the oil Quality and maintenance of the oil and fineness of the filters have a positive influence on the preservation of the failure load stage. Micro filters, mounted in bypass will increase the durability of the lubrication oil efficiently. It is also useful for a good oil maintenance to remove the condensation water at the lowest point of the oil tank. CAUTION You should pay particular attention to the fact, that no dust penetrates into the oil system, even during inspection or other times of standstill. Please bear in mind that the lowest failure load stage required for a gearbox must be retained practically throughout the whole life of the lubricating oil. It has to be ensured that the quality of the oil corresponds over the hole working time of the gearbox to the data given in chapter 7.1.3. Because of this the lubrication oil has to be checked and perhaps changed according to the information given by the manufacturer of the complete plant. A precise analysis of the oil has to be performed according to the requirements/recommendations of the oil manufacturer or when color of the oil has changed substantially or not later than 4000 operation hours. Following approximate values can be taken for the assessment. But only a detailed check can show whether single values can be exceeded. Consistency Viscosity Neutralizing number Infrared diagram 10 - 15 % 10 - 15 % Opposite to origin state Opposite to origin state
Origin value + 0,5 mg KOH/g when origin diagram is changed
Impurity min. class of purity /15/12 to ISO 4406 Before filling the oil system, the oil tank, oil filter and the pipes have to be cleaned thoroughly. NOTE Rules for disposal waste of oil and filter elements must be noticed.
GB
32 / 38
T0700_01 7.1.3 Selection of lubricating oils for high capacity gearboxes Usually the gearbox will operate in a common oil circulation with several machines. For this reason oil producers developed special types of oil, which become fair the request of the different applications. The following points are to be particularly considered: Oil type Viscosity Failure load stage Flash point Additives Undissolved air in oil supply Industrial Oil See chapter 1.2 See chapter 1.2 > 200C max. 2 % ISO 6743-6 ISO 3448 ISO 14635 ISO 2592
No zinc-dithiophosphates (ZnDTP)
CAUTION A low flash point may result in spontaneous ignition of the lube oil. NOTE Obtain written confirmation of the failure load stages of these oils from your oil supplier. Higher FZG failure load stages are not disadvantageous for the gearbox. The technical services of the oil producers should be included to the lubricating oil selection. All possible loads soiling the lubricant oil are to be declared to the oil manufacturer (e.g. condensed water, water vapour, process gases etc.). CAUTION Synthetic lubricants may only be used after consultation and permission of BHS. For reasons of operation safety no oil containing zinc-dithiophosphate (ZnDTP) may be used in BHS gearboxes. Scientific investigations have shown that lubricating oils including the oil additive zinc-dithiophosphate (ZnDTP) may react with copper in the oil system. Since the oil circulation system contains copper-bearing items (e.g. oil cooler, copper plated teeth) resulting deposits may damage the gearbox. GB 33 / 38
T0700_01 Lubricating oils have to be kept basically in clean closed containers (doses, cans, barrels) in order to avoid the penetration of dust and humidity into the interior, and to keep the risk of oxidation with air as low as possible. The storage location should be dry and cool. Moreover, the instructions of the oil manufacturer should be observed.
7.2
Repair
With the beginning of the repairs is to be waited until oil and gearbox are cooled down (danger of scalding or burn)! NOTE With all repairs, chapter 2 "Safety instructions" is to be particularly considered. WARNING All repairs may be executed only in the standstill of the gearbox. It must be guaranteed that the plant cannot be set into operation while working on it. CAUTION Larger components or modules are to be fastened carefully to the lifting device while removing or mounting Only use suitable and perfect lifting device and lifting attachment! Stay of persons under the floating load is forbidden! Additionally to this manual the generally accepted legal and other obligatory regulations are to be observed for accident prevention. While standstill of the gearbox a visual check of teeth can be made regarding the tooth contact pattern and the abrasion. To do this the inspection cover must be removed and the shafts be turned. The evaluation must be executed by expert personnel or by our service department.
GB
34 / 38
T0700_01
7.3
Troubleshooting
The following table serves the definition of possibly occurring disturbances at the gearbox. If disturbances occur during operation, which are not specified in the table, we recommend to contact our service department. Fault Oil pressure low or irregular Possible causes - Pump damaged, Safety valve damaged or not correct adjusted - Filter clogged - Air in the inlet pipe - Oil level low in oil tank - Leak in oil pipe - Oil pressure insufficient - Oil pressure insufficient in the bearing Measures - Repair pump, check valve or repair Clean or perhaps change filter Repair leak Find cause, refill oil Repair leak Increase inlet pressure, perhaps enlarge diaphragm
High bearing temperature
- Check oil system, increase quantity of oil flow to the gearbox - Oil cooling insufficient - Check oil cooling unit, change heat exchanger - Misalignment of the shafts - Realign the gearbox - Check oil pressure, check whether orifice has been dismounted erroneously - Enlarge oil return and check slope of pipe system - Change oil, inform oil manufacturer
High gearbox temperature
- Quantity of oil flow too high - Oil return insufficient - Foaming of lubricant oil
GB
35 / 38
T0700_01 Fault High vibrations Possible causes - Failure in balancing - Misalignment - Deformation of gearbox housing - Shaft bent - Bearings damaged or used up - Tooth system damaged Unusual noises - Oil pump damaged (when directly mounted pumps are used) - Toothing damaged - Bad tooth contact pattern - Viscosity of lubricant oil insufficient - chemically aggressive constituents in the lubricant oil - Oil supply insufficient at gearing - Dirt in lubricant oil - Bad tooth contact pattern - Impact load, caused by foreign matter between the teeth - Fatigue damages Measures - Balance the shaft - Check alignment - Check foundation - Check true running of shaft - Mount spare gear set - Change bearings - Mount spare gear set - Change pump and drive unit
- Mount spare gear set - Check foundation, new alignment - Change lubricant oil, inform the oil manufacturer - Analyze oil, change oil, inform the oil manufacturer - Check oil system, clean nozzle orifice - Clean system and gearbox - Check foundation, new alignment, mount spare gear set - Mount spare gear set
Tooth damaged (scuffing, corrosion, overheating)
Tooth breakage
- Mount spare gear set
GB
36 / 38
_0800_01
SPARE PARTS
When placing orders for spare parts, please use the attached spare parts list in Register IV. We only give a warranty according to Chapter 1.1 for spare parts and accessories supplied by us. We expressly inform you that we do not approve spare parts from other suppliers. Installing such products therefore can under circumstances impair the safety. We rule out any liability for damages which result from using non-original spare parts and accessories. Please be aware that there are production and delivery specifications for original and non-original parts and we always offer you spare parts according to the latest technical standard and legal directives. For the most prompt processing of your spare parts order the following data should be quoted: Serial No. as per nameplate Type of gearbox as per nameplate Part-no. according to Register IV Denomination according to Register IV Quantity Likewise for other correspondence, please always quote the serial number of your gearbox. Thus the processing of your order will be quickened significantly.
GB
37 / 38
_0800_01 The following is our address for service and spare parts sales: BHS Getriebe GmbH "Service Department" Postfach 12 51 D-87516 Sonthofen Phone: Divisions: Sales, spare parts: Sending of technicians: Technical advice: +49 8321 / 802-545 info@bhs-getriebe.de -541 -541 or 540 -541 (0 83 21) 8 02-0
Telefax: eMail:
GB
38 / 38
_Z000_01
II Drawings and alignment diagram
GB
1/1
Job No.:
518117
Khurais Crude Oil Shipping Pump
Aligning Scheme
DRIVE
fixed Alignment values are constituted of the following components: (Values are based on a temperature difference of Due to housing heat-up temperature [mm] 0,00 0,31 0,17 0,31
32,5 C) Due to bearing clearance [mm] -0,09 0,19 -0,03 0,06
Total [mm] X1 = Y1 = X2 = Y2 = -0,09 0,50 0,14 0,37
HS shaft: LS shaft:
X-direction Y-direction X-direction Y-direction
Lenght Expansion at coupling: (due to heat up)
HS shaft: LS shaft:
0,26 [mm] 0,25 [mm]
The above given theoretical shaft displacements (radial displacements) are based on the following values : Alignment temperature (room temperature) Pressure angle of gearing Bearing clearance of low speed shaft Bearing clearance of high speed shaft Oil inlet temperature Oil heat-up temperature 30,0 20,00 0,290 - 0,339 0,220 - 0,263 50,0 12,5 [C] [] [mm] [mm] [C] [C]
BHS Getriebe GmbH
16. Mrz 07 TTA braendl
_E000_01
IV Spare parts
GB
1/1
BHS Getriebe GmbH Ersatzteilestckliste / Spare part List: TURBO-STIRNRADGETRIEBE FD48-3 Z.Nr. 601634900 Schnittzeichnung / Cross Sectional Drawing: 601790400 Auftragsnummer: 518117 / 48330
Seite/Page: 1
Pos. Artikel-Nr Stk. Bezeichnung 1 Bezeichnung 2 Material Gewicht Kg/Stck Pos. Part-no. Qty. Denomination 1 Denomination 2 Material Weight Kg/pc. 0200 602189800 1 RADIALLAGER Z315/225X140 ST/WM 39 RADIAL BEARING 0210 602189801 1 RADIALLAGER Z315/225X140 ST/WM 39 RADIAL BEARING 0220 602190200 1 RADIALLAGER W250/180x160 EINSTELLBAR ST/WM 26,2 RADIAL BEARING 0230 602190201 1 RADIALLAGER W250/180x160 EINSTELLBAR ST/WM 26,2 RADIAL BEARING 0240 004571308 1 AXIALKIPPSEGMENTLAGER-PAAR AK07-178/89X60-BZ 16,1 AXIAL TILTING PAD BEARING PAIR 0260 513937100 1 DICHTRING 355/225X68 ALMG4,5MN 0 SEALING RING 0270 513936900 1 DICHTRING 280/180X64 ALMG4,5MN 5,4 SEALING RING 0410 601677700 1 RADWELLE EINTEILIG M=7 Z=85 18CRNIMO7-6 1738 ONE-PIECE WHEEL SHAFT 0450 601676900 1 RITZELWELLE Z=39 M=7 18CRNIMO7-6 491 PINION SHAFT 0910 101007275 4 WIDERSTANDSTHERMOMETER L1=2500 MM , L2=2800 MM IEC 751 Kl. A 0 RESISTANCE THERMOMETER 0911 101004983 4 WIDERSTANDSTHERMOMETER L1=2000 MM , L2=2300 MM IEC 751 Kl. A 0 RESISTANCE THERMOMETER 0915 101006656 4 WIDERSTANDSTHERMOMETER L1=240 MM,L2=40 MM,LK=200 MM IEC 751 KL. A 0 RESISTANCE THERMOMETER Ende Druckdatum: 12.04.2007 11:25
TE000_01
Customer procedure no.: 518117 Edition: 2007
Operating instructions
Spare Parts Storage System
BHS Getriebe GmbH Postfach 1251 D-87516 Sonthofen Telephone: +49(0)8321-802-200 Fax: +49(0)8321-802-220 Internet: www.bhs-getriebe.de e-mail: info@bhs-getriebe.de
1 / 17
TE000_01
Contents 1. REVISION INDEX...................................................................................................... 3 2. ABOUT THIS MANUAL ............................................................................................. 4

2.1. Validity 2.2. Target audience 2.3. Other applicable documents 2.4. Symbols and markings 4 4 4 4
3. DESIGNATED USE ................................................................................................... 5 4. SAFETY..................................................................................................................... 6

4.1. Product safety 4.2. Safety regulations 4.3. Qualification of personnel 4.4. Heavy loads 4.5. Markings on the product 6 6 6 7 7
5. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................... 8 6. DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................... 9 7. PACKAGING AND TRANSPORT............................................................................ 10

7.1. Packaging 7.2. Symbols on the transport packaging 7.3. Transportation of the product 10 10 11
8. INSTALLATION AND STORAGE ............................................................................ 12

8.1. Preparations 8.2. Storage system installation 8.3. Moving / relocating the spare parts storage system 8.4. Preservation on delivery 8.5. Gas filling 8.6. Opening and closing the spare parts storage system; fitting and removing spare parts 12 12 12 13 13 14
9. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................... 15

9.1. Faults 9.2. Disposal 17 17
2 / 17
TE000_01
1. REVISION INDEX
Table 1-1: Revision index Revision Change 00 This manual is a new edition
3 / 17
TE000_01
2. ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This manual is an integral part of the product. BHS Getriebe GmbH accepts no liability whatsoever and grants no warranty cover for primary damage or secondary damage arising as a result of non-observance of this manual. Read the manual carefully before use. Keep the manual for the entire lifetime of the product. Keep the manual accessible to operating staff and maintenance personnel at all times. Pass the manual on with the product to any subsequent owner or user. Insert any supplements received from the manufacturer in the manual.
2.1. Validity This manual applies only to the product named on the front page. 2.2. Target audience This manual is aimed at qualified professionals who are trained in assembly, commissioning, operating, servicing and decommissioning. 2.3. Other applicable documents Due notice should be taken of the following documents in addition to the manual: List of spare parts
2.4. Symbols and markings 2.4.1. Warning signs Nature, source and consequences of danger! Action required to avert danger.
SIGNAL WORD
4 / 17
TE000_01
2.4.2. Levels of danger on warning signs Table 2-1: Levels of danger on warning signs Danger level Likelihood of occurrence Consequences of disregard Imminent danger
DANGER
Death, serious injury Death, serious injury Moderate injury Damage to property
Potential danger
WARNING
Potential danger
ATTENTION ATTENTION
Potential danger
2.4.3. Notes NOTE Tips for simpler work / safe work. Action which can be taken to simplify work / safety measures.
3. DESIGNATED USE
The spare parts storage system is specifically designed and manufactured for the parts named in Chapter 5. The spare parts storage system may therefore be used only for long-term corrosion-resistant storage of these parts supplied by BHS-Getriebe.
5 / 17
TE000_01
4. SAFETY
4.1. Product safety BHS Getriebe GmbH products have been developed with reference to the best available technology and approved safety regulations. Nevertheless, the use of products developed by BHS Getriebe GmbH may entail danger to life and limb of the user or third parties or damage to the product and other material assets. Do not use the product if it is damaged in any way and handle it correctly in a safety-conscious manner with due regard for any dangers and with due reference to the manual. Arrange for the immediate repair of any faults which may affect the products safety.
4.2. Safety regulations The operator of the system is responsible for complying with all the statutory regulations and guidelines. Product to be commissioned, operated and maintained in accordance with the following instructions only:
-
Manual Warning and information signs on the product All other operating and assembly instructions pertaining to the system System-specific stipulations and requirements Relevant national and regional regulations, especially explosion prevention, health & safety, and accident prevention
4.3. Qualification of personnel Ensure that any work on the product is carried out exclusively by trained professionals who are also conversant with this manual. Personnel who are not yet in possession of the relevant qualifications must be duly trained. Ensure that the requisite procedures outlined in this manual have been understood.
6 / 17
TE000_01
4.4. Heavy loads The heavy weight of the product and its components can give rise to the following dangers in transit and during assembly: Danger of being crushed or trapped by moving or toppling components Do not reach between the moving parts Risk of injury from falling components Do not stop or work under suspended loads.
WARNING
ATTENTION
4.5. Markings on the product The following markings are affixed to the product: LIFT HERE HANDLE WITH CARE STORE UNDER ROOF THIS SIDE UP (for horizontal and vertikal storage) GROUNDING (if applicable) PLACE FORK FOR LIFTING HERE LIFTING LUG FOR HANDLING LID ONLY LIFTING LUG FOR TURNING CONTAINER AND VERTICAL TRANSPORT ONLY HOLE FOR OPTIONAL FIXATION ON FLOOR READ MANUAL FIRST BEFORE HANDLING CONTAINER DO NOT OPEN CONTAINER WHEN PRESSURIZED / PURGE FIRST WITH BREATHABLE AIR BEFORE OPEN CONTAINER FOR TRANSPORT: CLOSE VALVE, MOUNT PROTECTIVE CAP AND FASTEN FIXATION OF LIQUID-GAS-BOTTLE GAS-SUPPLY-VALVE, -14NPT PURGE-CONNECTION FOR NITROGEN AND DRAIN-VALVE FOR CONDENSED WATER, -14NPT 7 / 17
TE000_01
PURGE-CONNECTION FOR AIR, -14NPT CONNECTION FOR ADDITITIONAL MONITORINGS, -14NPT PRESSURE-RELIEF-VALVE MAX. INFLATE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE 0.2 bar PRESSURE GAGE
Each place of storage of the spare parts is marked with its BHSGetriebe article no and quantity.
5. TECHNICAL DATA
The spare parts storage system may be fitted with the following parts only. Gas inflation medium............................................................... Nitrogen / air Size of nitrogen cylinder i.a.w. EN 1442 ................................................. 20 l Guaranteed service life..................................................................... 3 years Storage volume (without mounted spare parts) ..................................2,7 m3 Internal operating pressure (overpressure).................................. 0.07 bar g Relief valve internal pick-up pressure (overpressure)...................0.20 bar g Total weight (fully fitted)............................................................... 3990 kg Weight empty............................................................................... 1600 kg Equipment Description Gear wheel shaft Pinion shaft Radial bearing Radial bearing Radial bearing Radial bearing Tilting-pad thrust bearing Seal ring Seal ring Quantity [units] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 article no. BHS-Getriebe 601677700 601676900 602189800 602189801 602190200 602190201 004571308 513937100 513936900 Unit weight [kg] 1738 491 39 39 26,2 26,2 16,1 8,5 5,4
8 / 17
TE000_01
6. Description
Horizontal aspect:
9 1 4 9 11
16
15
8 2 3
11
13
14
10
10
14
12
Vertical aspect: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

14 14
15. 16.
Nameplate Gas-supply-valve Pressure gage Purge connection for air Pressure-relief-valve Purge connection for nitrogen and drain valve for condensed water Connection for additional monitorings Lifting lugs for transportation in horizontal position Lifting lugs for handling top half of storage system only Fork Lift Pocket for forklift truck transportation in horizontal position Lifting lugs for transportation in vertical position and for moving / turning spare parts storage system Possible mounting for nitrogen cylinder Ground thread Hole for optional floor mounting of spare parts storage system Joint with bolts and tapered pins Top of storage system
9 / 17
TE000_01
7. PACKAGING AND TRANSPORT

7.1. Packaging Unless the customer requests otherwise, the product is shipped with no base and ready for use. Any openings on the product are covered and padded. Components and accessories which are shipped separately are packed in wooden crates. Spare parts are generally preserved with wax-based products, e.g. Tectyl. They are wrapped in aluminium foil or polythene sheeting and shipped in wooden crates. 7.2. Symbols on the transport packaging The following symbols are marked on the base or shipping crate: Table 7-1: Symbols on the transport packaging Symbol Meaning Fragile
Keep dry
Top
Attach here
10 / 17
TE000_01
7.3. Transportation of the product The spare parts storage system may be transported in horizontal position using a suitable crane and attached at the suspension points (8 or 10), or using a forklift truck with the fork arms placed in the designated recesses (11). The spare parts storage system may be transported in vertical position with a suitable crane only, attached at the suspension points (11). Consult shipping documents for loading gauge and maximum permissible load on transport vehicle and adhere to the specified limits. Risk of injury from falling components! Use tested and approved load handling equipment only. Attach product at designated suspension points only. Use appropriate load-securing devices. Do not stand under suspended loads.
-
WARNING
NOTE
Use appropriate load-securing devices, e.g. straps and tie-downs. Ensure that the product is not exposed to strong fluctuations in temperature. Handle the product with care in order to protect it from impact damage. Shock indicators Shock indicators are fitted inside the container. They verify that the product has been handled correctly.
11 / 17
TE000_01
8. INSTALLATION AND STORAGE

8.1. Preparations Unpack the spare parts storage system carefully and remove all the packaging material. Set the spare parts storage system down on a stable foundation (see 8.2. ff.). Risk of damage to sensors and other components supplied loose with the system! Set up the spare parts storage system before mounting the loose components supplied with the system
ATTENTION
8.2. Storage system installation The spare parts storage system must be installed on a foundation with sufficient load-bearing capacity. The spare parts storage system can be set up either horizontally or vertically. The spare parts storage system may be secured to the floor, if preferred, using the holes provided (14). 8.3. Moving / relocating the spare parts storage system A suitable crane is required to move the spare parts storage system from horizontal to vertical position or vice versa. To move the system proceed as follows: If a nitrogen cylinder is connected to the spare parts storage system, it should be clamped firmly to the storage system (12), sealed, and the cap screwed on. All connections (2, 4 and 6) should be sealed gastight.
-
Risk of injury from falling components! Use tested and approved load handling equipment only. Attach product at designated suspension points only. WARNING Do not stand under suspended loads. Hook the spare parts storage system to two cranes at all four lifting lugs on the base frame (11) of the storage system. Hoist the spare parts storage system evenly until there is sufficient ground clearance to pivot the spare parts storage system. Pivot the spare parts storage system down on the relevant side until it is located in the required horizontal or vertical position. 12 / 17
TE000_01
Lower the spare parts storage system down evenly and put it down gently.
8.4. Preservation on delivery If stored under cover the corrosion protection lasts approx. three years with the openings on the storage system closed, with spare parts preserved with Tectyl (as supplied) and without any additional steps being taken such as filling with nitrogen. The service life can be greatly extended by filling the spare parts storage system with nitrogen. BHS-Getriebe cannot guarantee a longer service life, however, as this is heavily dependent on the handling, nitrogen charge and maintenance of the spare parts storage system. 8.5. Gas filling Please note the following points when filling the system with nitrogen: The storage system is designed for a differential pressure of 0.35 bar
NOTE
8.5.1. Flushing the storage system First action is to adjust the needle of the pressure gauge to the 0 of the clock-face (see operating instructions of the pressure gauge). In order to ensure that the storage system contains only nitrogen (when charging the spare parts storage system with nitrogen) or air (when opening the spare parts storage system) it must be flushed with the appropriate medium for approx. five minutes at approx. 0.1 bar g. Risk of suffocation from leaking nitrogen This process may only be carried out in well-ventilated rooms or outdoors as there is a risk of suffocation from an WARNING excessive concentration of nitrogen in the inhaled air! Connect all the controls and measuring instruments and check for leaks and correct operation.
-
ATTENTION
Risk of injury from incorrect handling All the connections are clearly marked on the storage system and may be used for the intended purpose only.
When flushing the spare parts storage system in closed rooms a suitable hose should be connected to the flushing point (6 or 4) in order to route the purging gas outside. 13 / 17
TE000_01
Secure the nitrogen cylinder to the storage system (12), fit valves, connect nitrogen cylinder to the gas supply valve (2) and check for leaks and correct operation. Open the nitrogen cylinder and gas supply valve (2) carefully and set output pressure to approx. 0.1 bar g.
-
Open the purging gas connection for nitrogen / condensate drain valve (6) as well when flushing with nitrogen. Open the purging gas connection for air (4) as well when flushing with air.
After the flushing process close the nitrogen cylinder and gas supply valve (2). Act swiftly to remove any hoses which had to be attached and to seal the flushing pipe connection gas-tight with the relevant plugs or shut-off valve.
8.5.2. Filling the storage system with air / nitrogen Secure the nitrogen cylinder to the storage system (12), fit valves, connect nitrogen cylinder to the gas supply valve (2) and check for leaks and correct operation. Open the nitrogen cylinder and gas supply valve (2) carefully and set output pressure to approx. 0.07 bar g.
8.6. Opening and closing the spare parts storage system; fitting and removing spare parts Danger of falling components Spare parts may only be removed and fitted with the system in the horizontal position.
WARNING
Risk of injury from projectile parts Do not open the storage system when pressurised. Ensure that the storage system is filled with air at ambient ATTENTION pressure. Remove all the tapered pins from the joint (15). Undo all the bolts on the joint (15). Attach the top of the storage system (16) to the crane at the designated points (9). Arise the top of the storage system (16) carefully and vertically. Set down the top of the storage system (16) on a secure foundation. 14 / 17
TE000_01
Attach the spare part for removal to the crane at the designated points. Open the relevant clamp of the spare part being removed and take the spare part out with care. Close the spare parts storage system in the reverse order to opening it. Once the storage system has been sealed gas-tight it can be flushed and refilled with nitrogen as outlined above. Risk of injury from overturning of spare parts storage system Changes to the contents of the spare parts storage system also affect the position of its overall centre of gravity (stability).
ATTENTION
9. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

The spare parts storage system must be regularly serviced to keep it in good working order and prolong its service life. The following services and inspections should be carried out at appropriate intervals: Check spare parts storage system for damage. Check internal pressure of storage container. Check condition of nitrogen gas cylinder. Check condition of spare parts held in spare parts storage container. Check whether condensate has formed inside the storage container. Should this be the case, drain it off via the condensate drain valve (6) and dispose of it properly. Gas will escape with the condensate. The gas must be refilled after the draining process (see 8.4.2.).
NOTE
15 / 17
TE000_01
The gas outlet of the pressure-relief-valve (see Pt. 6 Pos. 5) is protected with a balloon against penetration of humidity and contaminants (sand, dust) When the release pressure of the pressure-relief-valve is exceeded, the blown-off gas out of the spare parts container will be collected inside the balloon. This gas has to be discharged to avoid bursting of the balloon time by time. Therefore the hose clamp, fixing the balloon, has to be released and the gas has to be discharged carefully. Thereafter the hose clamp has to be tightened again. In case of a defect balloon, the balloon has to be replaced immediately to ensure reliability of the pressure-relief-valve. This process may only be conducted in well vented rooms or outdoors.
ATTENTION
The inspection intervals depend on, e.g.: the ambient conditions in the location in which the storage system is located, variations in temperature, the target preservation time, the type of pressurisation (permanent setting or periodic pressure adjustment), whether the storage container is filled with nitrogen or ambient air, the relative humidity of the ambient air in the latter case.
BHS-Getriebe is not fully au fait with the ambient and operating conditions on site. It is therefore incumbent on the operator of the spare parts storage system to specify the service intervals and monitoring procedures and to draw up a maintenance schedule and oversee its implementation. However, the first inspection of the above-mentioned points must be carried out upon expiry of the three-year warranty period. NOTE Malfunctions which arise as a result of insufficient and improper maintenance can lead to high repair costs and long downtimes.
It is advisable to fill the storage system with nitrogen continually and to monitor the internal pressure permanently online, preferably electronically as well. The storage system has an additional connection for this purpose which can take such measuring instruments (7).
16 / 17
TE000_01
9.1. Faults If faults occur during operation please contact the service department of BHS Getriebe GmbH. 9.2. Disposal Dispose of housing parts, gearwheels and shafts as steel scrap. This includes grey cast iron parts unless there is a separate collection for these. Dispose of seal rings and slide bearings as nonferrous heavy metal. Collect any condensate and dispose of it in line with the relevant legislation. Adhere to all the relevant national regulations and legal requirements governing disposal.
17 / 17

Document No: HydroEq 01 0 26 Apr 2002
Section 10
10

The hydraulic assembly / removal equipment manufacturers information is included next as an insert to the manual.
K:\Module Update\S10 HydroEq 01-0.doc
Outer Cover Polyamide (PA)
Pressure Support 4 layers of high-tensile steel wire
Inner Core Polyoxymethylene (POM)
Working Temperature -22 F to 140 F [ -30C to +60C ]
Color: grey, other colors upon request
ID
0.20 inch 5.0 mm
8 5
OD
0.44 inch 11.2 mm
Working Pressure
26100 psi 1800 bar
Min. Burst Pressure

65250 psi 4500 bar
F N U
Min. Bend Radius

6 inch 150 mm
58
Weight
0.175 lbs/ft 0.260 Kg/m
H L F N U
HP-Fitting
Type M female swivel
BSP male fitting

P S B wrench flat
NPT male fitting

NPT wrench flat
BSP female swivel

P S B 4 2
thread size 1/4"x28UNF LH HP-Fitting S* 9/16"x18UNF Type M female swivel C/S G1/4" BSP male fitting C 1/4" NPT NPT male fitting C G1/4" BSP female swivel C= available in carbon steel * = Waterblast Nipple C/S S= available in stainless steel 3/8"x24UNF LH C/S* 9/16"x18UNF LH C/S
The safety factor between burst pressure and working pressure is rated at 2.5 to 1. Depending on various operating conditions, this factor can vary. Please contact your SPIR STAR representative. We reserve the right to change wihtout notice.
Outer Cover Polyamide (PA)
Pressure Support 4 layers of high-tensile steel wire
Inner Core Polyoxymethylene (POM)
Working Temperature -22 F to 140 F [ -30C to +60C ]
Color: grey, other colors upon request
ID
0.25 inch 6.3 mm
OD
0.50 inch 12.6 mm
Working Pressure
21750 psi 1500 bar
Min. Burst Pressure

55100 psi 3800 bar
Min. Bend Radius

7 inch 180 mm
Weight
0.198 lbs/ft 0.295 Kg/m
L F N U 8 5
HP-Fitting
F N U

58
NPT male fitting

wrench flat NPT
thread size HP-Fitting 3/8"x24UNF LH S* 9/16"x18UNF C/S 1/4" NPT C S= available in stainless steel
NPT male fitting C= available in carbon steel

* = Waterblast Nipple
The safety factor between burst pressure and working pressure is rated at 2.5 to 1. Depending on various operating conditions, this factor can vary. Please contact your SPIR STAR representative. We reserve the right to change without notice.

Crude Pump Installation Manual - SULZER PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Crude Pump Installation Manual - SULZER PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Document No: Revision: Revision Date:

48330 Lead 01 0 01 Oct 2007

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual Volume 1 of 3

Crude Oil Shipping Pumps

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual

Revision: Revision Date:

Table of Contents Volume 1 of 3

(48330 Lead 01-0)

Introduction and General Safety

Manual No. 104.471.646

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual

Revision: Revision Date:

Mechanical Seal and Associated Equipment

Burgmann - 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2 Cyclone Separator - Operating Manual and Drawing

Manual No. 104.471.646

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual

Revision: Revision Date:

Manual No. 104.471.646

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual

Revision: Revision Date:

Lubricating Oil System

Hydraulic Assembly / Removal Equipment

Manual No. 104.471.646

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual

Revision: Revision Date:

List of Equipment Supplied

Special Tools and Equipment:

Manual No. 104.471.646

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual

Revision: Revision Date:

Manual No. 104.471.646

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual

Revision: Revision Date:

Sulzer Drawings and Documents

Manual No. 104.471.646

1 Drawing No. E1-104.430.193

(COUPLING GUARD) (COUPLING)

CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP B36-G-0002A

RETURN TO PUMP SUCTION

INSTRUMENT SYMBOL KEY

RACK MOUNTED INSTRUMENT (OR BACK OF PANEL, BY OTHERS)

HH SET @ 9.2 in H SET @ 4.6 in

HH SET @ 9.2 in H SET @ 4.6 in

EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SYSTEM (ESD, BY OTHERS)

TERMINATION POINT SCHEDULE

SEAL OIL & LUBE OIL SYSTEMS

SEP.PARTS LIST REPLACED BY

DESIGN GROUP SUBSTITUTE FOR ORIGINAL SCALE

DRAWN CHECKED APPROVED

9901-48330 CAD - DRAWING

MACHINING REGULATIONS SEE DRAWING NORMS.

13-06-06 C.Woolner 13-06-06 C.Woolner 13-06-06 T.Brennan

1 Drawing No. E1-104.430.193

CONTROL STATION *MOUNTED OFF-SKID*

MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (MCC)

MOTOR HEATER (120V 1PH 60Hz)

MAIN TERMINAL BOX HEATER (120V 1PH 60Hz)

SPEED INCREASING GEARBOX B36-GG-0002A

CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP B36-G-0002A

INSTRUMENT SYMBOL KEY

RACK MOUNTED INSTRUMENT (OR BACK OF PANEL, BY OTHERS)

EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SYSTEM (ESD, BY OTHERS)

TERMINATION POINT SCHEDULE

CONTROL STATION MOUNTED OFF-SKID